I need a power point on Artillery Skill Proficiency Test (ASPT) from tables1 through 5. It could be found on the 6-40, 6-50 manual FM 3-09.8 or on the TM 9-1015-260-10 M119A3 Operators Manual. It’s probably going to be about 25 slides or more. Let me know

tc_3-09.8_fa_gunnery_november_2013.pdf

Home >Government homework help >I need a power point on Artillery Skill Proficiency Test (ASPT) from tables1 through 5. It could be found on the 6-40, 6-50 manual FM 3-09.8 or on the TM 9-1015-260-10 M119A3 Operators Manual. It’s probably going to be about 25 slides or more. Let me know

TC 3-09.8

Field Artillery Gunnery

November 2013

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Distribution is authorized to US Government agencies only to protect technical or operational information. This determination was made on 28 August 2012. Other request for this document will be referred to Commandant, US Army Artillery School, ATTN: ATSF-DT, Fort Sill, OK 73503-5600.

DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of this document.

Headquarters, Department of the Army

This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online (https://armypubs.us.army.mil/doctrine/index.html).

To receive publishing updates, please subscribe at http://www.apd.army.mil/AdminPubs/new_subscribe.asp.

DESTRUCTION NOTICE: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of this document.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 i

TC 3-09.8 Training Circular No. 3-09.8

Headquarters

Department of the Army Washington, DC, 15 November 2013

Field Artillery Gunnery

Contents Page

PREFACE ...................................................................................................................... x Chapter 1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 1-1

Qualification Methodology ........................................................................................... 1-1 Scope .......................................................................................................................... 1-2

General Content .......................................................................................................... 1-2 Standardization ........................................................................................................... 1-2 Single Sources ............................................................................................................ 1-3 Task-Based Training Strategy .................................................................................... 1-3 Battle Focus ................................................................................................................ 1-3 Mission essential Task List ........................................................................................ 1-3 Commander’s Assessment ......................................................................................... 1-3 Section I – Training Strategy ....................................................................................... 1-5 Gunnery Tables ........................................................................................................... 1-5 Section II – Commander’s Guidance .......................................................................... 1-7 Training Goals ............................................................................................................. 1-7 Training Requirements ................................................................................................ 1-7 Section III – Training Plans ......................................................................................... 1-8 Gunnery Training ........................................................................................................ 1-8 Long-Range Training Plans ........................................................................................ 1-9 Short-Range Training Plans ........................................................................................ 1-9 Near-Term Training Plans ......................................................................................... 1-10

Chapter 2 Safety ......................................................................................................................... 2-1 Section I – Certification, Battle Focus, Duties, and Responsibilities .......................... 2-1 Certification ................................................................................................................. 2-1 Battle Focus ................................................................................................................ 2-2 Responsibilities and Duties ......................................................................................... 2-2 Section II – Procedures ............................................................................................... 2-5

Contents

ii TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Cannon Safety ............................................................................................................ 2-5 Cannon Safety Aids .................................................................................................... 2-6 Section III – Manual Computation of Safety Data ..................................................... 2-12 Manual Safety Computation Procedure .................................................................... 2-12 Safety Card ............................................................................................................... 2-12 Basic Safety Diagram ............................................................................................... 2-13 Computation of Low angle Safety Data .................................................................... 2-15 Safety T ..................................................................................................................... 2-19 Updating Safety Data After Determining a GFT Setting ........................................... 2-21 Determination of Maximum Effective Illumination Area ............................................ 2-33 Safety Considerations for M549/M549A1 RAP ......................................................... 2-34 Safety Considerations for M864 Base Burn DPICM/M79541 Base Burn HE ........... 2-35 Computation of High angle Safety Data................................................................... 2-35 Section IV – Determining Minimum Quadrant Elevation ........................................... 2-44 Minimum Quadrant Elevation .................................................................................... 2-44 Section V – MLRS Safety Procedures ...................................................................... 2-51 Section VI – Computation of MLRS/HIMARS Safety Data ....................................... 2-53 General ..................................................................................................................... 2-53 MLRS Surface Danger Zone Values ......................................................................... 2-55 Computing Safety Data ............................................................................................. 2-55 Section VII – Check Data for M270A1/HIMARS/M142 HIMARS .............................. 2-83 M270A1, MLRS, M142 HIMARS, ............................................................................. 2-83

Chapter 3 13F Fire Support Tables ........................................................................................... 3-1 Section I – ASPT for Fire Support ............................................................................... 3-1 Section II – Fire Support Tables ............................................................................... 3-16 Fire Support table I: Individual Tasks ........................................................................ 3-16 Fire Support Table II: Establish Operations .............................................................. 3-58 Fire Support Table III: Fire Planning ......................................................................... 3-64 Fire Support Table IV: Execute Fires ........................................................................ 3-90 Fire Support Table V: Mounted Gunnery Training Program ................................... 3-104 Observer Table VI ................................................................................................... 3-105 Fires Cell Table VI ................................................................................................... 3-105 Chapter 4 13B/13M Delivery Section Training ......................................................................... 4-1 Section I – Howitzer Section Tables ........................................................................... 4-1 ASPT for Howitzer Sections ........................................................................................ 4-2 Requirements .............................................................................................................. 4-2 Howitzer Table I: Individual Tasks ......................................................................... 4-28 Howitzer Table II: Rigging Procedures ..................................................................... 4-41 Howitzer Table III: Establish Operations ................................................................... 4-48 Howitzer Table IV: Execute Fires .............................................................................. 4-56 Howitzer Table V: Section Certification..................................................................... 4-61 Table VI: Section Qualification .................................................................................. 4-62 Section II – MLRS Section Tables ............................................................................ 4-62 Training With MLRS Tables .................................................................................... 4-62 Requirements ........................................................................................................... 4-63 Test Stations ............................................................................................................. 4-67

Contents

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 iii

MLRS Tables ............................................................................................................ 4-75 MLRS Table I: Individual Soldier and Leader Tasks ................................................. 4-75 MLRS Table II: Conduct MLRS Firing Section OPAREA Occupation ...................... 4-84 MLRS Table III: Prepare HIMARS for Air Movement ................................................ 4-86 MLRS Table IV/A: Launcher Reload Procedures ..................................................... 4-87 MLRS Table IV/B: Ammunition Upload/Download Procedures ................................ 4-89 MLRS Table V: Training and Certification ................................................................ 4-92 MLRS Table VI: Qualification .................................................................................... 4-94

Chapter 5 13R Radar Section Tables ........................................................................................ 5-1 Section I – ASPT for Radar Sections .......................................................................... 5-1 Test Station 1: Map and Aiming Circle Orientation ..................................................... 5-5 Test Station 2: Initialize the Radar .............................................................................. 5-9 Test Station 3: Establish Communications ............................................................... 5-10 Section II – Radar Tables ......................................................................................... 5-12 Radar Table IA: Individual Tasks .............................................................................. 5-12 Radar Table IB: Individual Leader Tasks .................................................................. 5-18 Radar Table II: LCMR (Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar) ..................................... 5-20 Radar Table III: RSOP (Reconnaissance, Selection, and Occupation of (Position) 5-22 Radar Table IV: Perform Radar Operations ............................................................. 5-26 Radar Table V: Certification ...................................................................................... 5-29 Radar Table VI: Qualification .................................................................................... 5-29

Chapter 6 13D/13P Fire Direction Tables ................................................................................. 6-1 Training With Fire Direction Tables ............................................................................. 6-1 ASPT for FDC/POC/BOC ........................................................................................... 6-1 Requirements .............................................................................................................. 6-1 Fire Direction Table I: Individual Leader and Soldier Tasks ..................................... 6-11 Fire Direction Table II: Establish Operations ............................................................ 6-16 Fire Direction Table III: Compute Firing Data ........................................................... 6-23 Fire Direction Table IV: Provide Control of the FDC ................................................. 6-31 Fire Direction Table V: Certification .......................................................................... 6-34 Fire Direction Table VI: Qualification ........................................................................ 6-34

Chapter 7 13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables ....................................... 7-1 Section I – ASPT for Survey/MET Sections ................................................................ 7-1 Test Station 1 Written Exam ....................................................................................... 7-5 Test Station 2: Basic MET Skills ................................................................................. 7-6 Test Station 3: Survey Skills ....................................................................................... 7-9 Section II – Survey/MET Tables ............................................................................... 7-13 Survey/MET Table I: Individual Tasks ...................................................................... 7-13 Survey/MET Table II: Establish Operations .............................................................. 7-28 Survey/MET Table III: Survey/MET Planning and Coordination ............................... 7-31 Survey/MET Table IV: Perform Survey/MET Missions ............................................. 7-32 Survey/MET Mission Scenario #1: Occupy an Existing Fire Base ........................... 7-34 Survey/MET Mission Scenario #2: Occupy an Unsecure Fire Base ........................ 7-36 Survey/MET Table V: Survey/MET Training and Certification .................................. 7-38 Survey/MET Table VI: Survey/MET Qualification ..................................................... 7-38

Contents

iv TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Chapter 8 Collective FA Gunnery Training .............................................................................. 8-1 Section I – Evaluation ................................................................................................. 8-1 Concept ...................................................................................................................... 8-1 General ....................................................................................................................... 8-1 Artillery Table VII: Platoon RSOP ............................................................................... 8-2 Artillery Table VIII: Move ............................................................................................. 8-3 Artillery Table IX: Conduct Occupation of a Position Area and Establish a Firing

Capability .................................................................................................................... 8-4 Artillery Tables X–XII: Platoon Training, Certification, and Qualification .................. 8-10 Artillery Tables XII–XV: Battery Training, Certification, and Qualification ................ 8-23 Artillery Tables XVI–XVIII: Battalion Training, Certification, and Qualification ......... 8-24 Collective Gunnery Training in Support of Combined Arms Training ....................... 8-24

Appendix A JADOCS .................................................................................................................... A-1 Appendix B Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables .............................................................................. B-1

Appendix C Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations ....................................................... C-1

Appendix D Time & Accuracy Standards ................................................................................... D-1 Appendix E Gunner's Qualification Test ..................................................................................... E-1

Appendix F M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearnance ....................................................................... F-1

GLOSSARY ................................................................................................... Glossary-1 REFERENCES ...........................................................................................References-1 INDEX .................................................................................................................. Index-1

Figures Figure 2-1. Emplacing safety stakes for M119A2 ............................................................................... 2-7 Figure 2-2. Boxed safety ..................................................................................................................... 2-9 Figure 2-3. Unboxed safety ............................................................................................................... 2-10 Figure 2-4. Combat safety ................................................................................................................. 2-11 Figure 2-5. Illumination safety ........................................................................................................... 2-11 Figure 2-6. Example range safety card ............................................................................................. 2-13 Figure 2-7. Example of a completed safety diagram (HE/WP/SMK) ................................................ 2-15 Figure 2-8. Low angle safety matrix .................................................................................................. 2-18 Figure 2-9. Example low angle safety matrix (shell HE/WP/SMK) ................................................... 2-18 Figure 2-10. Example of a completed Safety T................................................................................. 2-19 Figure 2-11. Example of post occupation low angle safety with Range K applied (shell HE/WP/SMK) ...

..................................................................................................................................... 2-24 Figure 2-12. Example of a low angle safety matrix (shell M825) ...................................................... 2-25 Figure 2-13. Example of ballistic data (M825) (NOTE: Refer to 155-AM-3 for MACS procedures) 2-26 Figure 2-14. Example of post occupation low angle safety with Range K applied (shell M825) ...... 2-29 Figure 2-15. Example of a low angle safety matrix (shell illumination) ............................................. 2-30 Figure 2-16. Example of safety table data, M485 illumination (NOTE: Refer to 155-AM-3 for MACS

procedures) .................................................................................................................... 2-31

Contents

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 v

Figure 2-17. High angle safety matrix .............................................................................................. 2-38 Figure 2-18. Example of a high angle safety matrix (shell HE) ........................................................ 2-39 Figure 2-19. Example of a high angle safety matrix (shell M825) .................................................... 2-40 Figure 2-20. Example of a high angle safety matrix (shell illumination) .......................................... 2-41 Figure 2-21. Low angle safety computations .................................................................................... 2-42 Figure 2-22. High angle safety computations .................................................................................. 2-43 Figure 2-23. Angles of minimum QE ................................................................................................. 2-45 Figure 2-24. Armed VT decision tree ................................................................................................ 2-47 Figure 2-25. Example impact area .................................................................................................... 2-58 Figure 2-26. Example OPAREA azimuth limits OPAREA Method 1 ................................................ 2-58 Figure 2-27. Example development of target selection box azimuth limits ....................................... 2-59 Figure 2-28. Example development of target selection box range limits .......................................... 2-60 Figure 2-29. Example development of minimum and maximum quadrant ....................................... 2-60 Figure 2-30. Safety T computations (fire missions) .......................................................................... 2-62 Figure 2-31. Example Safety T ......................................................................................................... 2-62 Figure 2-32. Firing OPAREA SDZ requirements .............................................................................. 2-63 Figure 2-33. Example exclusion areas M28A1/A2 ............................................................................ 2-64 Figure 2-34. Example impact area .................................................................................................... 2-66 Figure 2-35. Example OPAREA azimuth limits OPAREA Method 2 ................................................ 2-66 Figure 2-36. Example of minimum and maximum range arcs .......................................................... 2-67 Figure 2-37. Safety T computations (fire missions) .......................................................................... 2-68 Figure 2-38. Example Safety T ......................................................................................................... 2-68 Figure 2-39. Firing OPAREA SDZ requirements .............................................................................. 2-70 Figure 2-40. Example of exclusion areas for M28A1/A2 .................................................................. 2-71 Figure 2-41. Example of the development of target selection box azimuth limits ............................. 2-71 Figure 2-42. Example of the development of target selection box range limits ................................ 2-72 Figure 2-43. Example of an impact area ........................................................................................... 2-73 Figure 2-44. Example of the development of target selection box range limits ................................ 2-74 Figure 2-45. Example of computing safety data ............................................................................... 2-75 Figure 2-46. Example of a Safety T .................................................................................................. 2-76 Figure 2-47. Example of the LDA and the NHA ................................................................................ 2-77 Figure 2-48. Example exclusion areas M28A1/A2 ............................................................................ 2-78 Figure 2-49. Example of an impact area ........................................................................................... 2-79 Figure 2-50. Example of azimuth limits ............................................................................................. 2-80 Figure 2-51. Example of fire missions for Safety T ........................................................................... 2-80 Figure 2-52. Example of a Safety T .................................................................................................. 2-81 Figure 2-53. Example LDA, NHA, and Exclusion Areas I and II ....................................................... 2-82 Figure 3-1. Test station diagram ......................................................................................................... 3-3 Figure 4-1. Example 1 Cluster method testing station .................................................................... 4-4 Figure 4-2. Example 2 Cluster method testing station .................................................................... 4-4 Figure 4-3. Test stations “round-robin” guideline .............................................................................. 4-65 Figure 5-1. Test station diagram ......................................................................................................... 5-3

Contents

vi TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 6-1. 13D/P test station diagram ............................................................................................... 6-3 Figure 7-1. Sample test station diagram ............................................................................................. 7-3 Figure B-1. PCR range table ............................................................................................................... B-1 Figure D-1. Five elements of accurate predicted fire are met ........................................................... D-30 Figure D-2. Accurate predicted fire requirements not met ................................................................ D-34

Tables Table 1-1. FA gunnery tables .............................................................................................................. 1-5 Table 1-1. FA gunnery tables (continued) ........................................................................................... 1-5 Table 1-2. Section/Team qualification criteria ..................................................................................... 1-7 Table 2-1. Manual safety computation .............................................................................................. 2-12 Table 2-2. Construction of a basic safety diagram ........................................................................... 2-14 Table 2-3. Low angle procedures ..................................................................................................... 2-16 Table 2-3. Low angle procedures (continued) .................................................................................. 2-17 Table 2-4. Tables and addenda required for safety computations ................................................... 2-20 Table 2-5. Low angle procedures using a GFT with GFT setting applied ........................................ 2-21 Table 2-5. Low angle procedures using a GFT with GFT setting applied (continued) ..................... 2-22 Table 2-5. Low angle procedures using a GFT with GFT setting applied (continued) ..................... 2-23 Table 2-6. Examples of low angle safety .......................................................................................... 2-23 Table 2-7. Ballistic Data for Safety Computations ............................................................................ 2-27 Table 2-8. Ballistic Data for Safety Computations ............................................................................ 2-32 Table 2-9. Procedures to determine maximum effective illumination area ....................................... 2-34 Table 2-10. High angle safety procedures ....................................................................................... 2-36 Table 2-10. High angle safety procedures (continued) ..................................................................... 2-37 Table 2-11. Examples of high angle safety ...................................................................................... 2-39 Table 2-12. Manual minimum QE computations ............................................................................... 2-46 Table 2-13. RFT minimum QE computations .................................................................................... 2-46 Table 2-14. RFT example for howitzer platoon ................................................................................. 2-46 Table 2-15. Manual armed VT minimum QE computations .............................................................. 2-48 Table 2-16. RFT minimum QE computations .................................................................................... 2-48 Table 2-17. Intervening crest, option 1 ............................................................................................. 2-50 Table 2-18. Intervening crest, option 2 ............................................................................................. 2-51 Table 2-19. M28A1/A2 (combined) safety ........................................................................................ 2-55 Table 2-20. Exclusion areas.............................................................................................................. 2-63 Table 2-21. Launcher checklist ......................................................................................................... 2-85 Table 2-21. launcher checklist (continued) ....................................................................................... 2-86 Table 2-22. OIC/FDC checklist ......................................................................................................... 2-86 Table 2-22. OIC/FDC checklist (continued) ...................................................................................... 2-87 Table 2-23. Launcher checklist ......................................................................................................... 2-88 Table 2-24. OIC/FDC Launcher checklist ......................................................................................... 2-89

Contents

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 vii

Table 2-24. OIC/FDC Launcher checklist (continued) ...................................................................... 2-90 Table 3-1. Test Stations ...................................................................................................................... 3-5 Table 3-2. Fire Support Table I – Basic FS skills (individual) ........................................................... 3-17 Table 3-2. Fire Support Table I – Basic FS skills (individual)(continued) ......................................... 3-18 Table 3-3. JFO academic sustainment ............................................................................................. 3-56 Table 3-4. Fire Support Table II – Establish operations ................................................................... 3-57 Table 3-5. Fire Support Table III – Fire planning .............................................................................. 3-64 Table 3-6. Fire Support Table IV – Execute fires .............................................................................. 3-89 Table 4-1. Gunner’s qualification test ............................................................................................... 4-17 Table 4-2. Howitzer Table I: Individual tasks .................................................................................... 4-28 Table 4-3. Howitzer Table II: Collective tasks for rigging .................................................................. 4-41 Table 4-4. Rigging procedures .......................................................................................................... 4-41 Table 4-5. Howitzer Table III – Establish operations ........................................................................ 4-48 Table 4-6. Howitzer Table IV – Execute fires .................................................................................... 4-57 Table 4-7. Howitzer Table V – Section certification .......................................................................... 4-62 Table 4-8. Howitzer Table VI – Section qualification ........................................................................ 4-62 Table 4-9. MLRS section tables ........................................................................................................ 4-75 Table 4-10. MLRS Table I – Basic skills (individual) ......................................................................... 4-75 Table 4-11. MLRS Table II – Conduct MLRS firing section OPAREA occupation ........................... 4-84 Table 4-12. MLRS Table III – Prepare HIMARS for air movement ................................................... 4-86 Table 4-13. MLRS Table IV/A – Launcher reload procedures .......................................................... 4-87 Table 4-14. MLRS Table IV/B – Ammunition upload/download procedures .................................... 4-89 Table 4-15. MLRS Table V – Training and certification .................................................................... 4-92 Table 4-16. Dry-fire certification fire mission and ammunition requirements .................................... 4-93 Table 4-17. MLRS Table VI – Qualification ....................................................................................... 4-94 Table 5-1. Radar Table IA – Individual tasks .................................................................................... 5-12 Table 5-2. Radar Table IB – Individual leader tasks ......................................................................... 5-18 Table 5-3. Radar Table II – LCMR .................................................................................................... 5-20 Table 5-4. Radar Table III – RSOP ................................................................................................... 5-22 Table 5-5. Radar Table IV – Radar operations ................................................................................. 5-26 Table 6-1. Test Stations ...................................................................................................................... 6-4 Table 6-2. Fire Direction Operator's Test ............................................................................................ 6-7 Table 6-3. Fire Direction Table I – Individual tasks 13D and 13P..................................................... 6-12 Table 6-4. Task Reference ................................................................................................................ 6-16 Table 6-5. Fire Direction Table II – Establish operations .................................................................. 6-17 Table 6-6. Fire Direction Table III – Compute firing data .................................................................. 6-23 Table 6-7. Fire Direction Table IV – Provide Control of the FDC...................................................... 6-31 Table 7-4. Survey/MET Table I – Individual survey/MET skills ......................................................... 7-13 Table 7-5. Survey/MET Table II – Establish operations ................................................................... 7-28 Table 7-6. Survey/MET Table III – Survey/MET planning and coordination ..................................... 7-31 Table 7-7. Survey/MET Table IV – Perform survey/MET missions .................................................. 7-32 Table 8-1. Collective Gunnery Tables VII–XII ..................................................................................... 8-2

Contents

viii TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 8-2. Tasks for Collective Gunnery Tables XIII–XVIII .............................................................. 8-23 Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I ............................................................................................................ B-1 Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I(continued) ......................................................................................... B-2 Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I(continued) ......................................................................................... B-3 Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I(continued) ......................................................................................... B-4 Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I(continued) ......................................................................................... B-5 Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I(continued) ......................................................................................... B-6 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II ............................................................................................................ B-7 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ........................................................................................... B-8 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ........................................................................................... B-9 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-10 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-11 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-12 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-13 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-14 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-15 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-16 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-17 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-18 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-19 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-20 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-21 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-22 Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II(continued) ......................................................................................... B-23 Table D-1. Overall fire mission timing ................................................................................................ D-6 Table D-2. Simultaneous mission timing ............................................................................................ D-7 Table D-3. Fire mission section timing (FIST/COLT) ......................................................................... D-7 Table D-4. Fire mission section timing (FDC section) ....................................................................... D-8 Table D-5. Fire mission section timing (gun section) ......................................................................... D-8 Table D-6. Ready to fire (RTF) times – general ................................................................................. D-9 Table D-6.1. RTF times – emergency mission (hip shoot) .............................................................. D-10 Table D-7. Fire for effect (FFE): When ready, at my command, or time on target .......................... D-12 Table D-8. FFE: Large segmented target ........................................................................................ D-13 Table D-9. FFE: FASCAM (target of opportunity) ............................................................................ D-14 Table D-10. FFE: Priority target or final protective fire .................................................................... D-15 Table D-11. FFE: Immediate suppression ....................................................................................... D-16 Table D-12. FFE: Immediate smoke ................................................................................................ D-17 Table D-13. FFE: ICM/DPICM ......................................................................................................... D-18 Table D-14. FFE: Schedule of fires/fire plan .................................................................................... D-19 Table D-15. FFE: Counterfire ........................................................................................................... D-20 Table D-16. FFE: Engage a moving target, AMC, or TOT ............................................................... D-21 Table D-17. Conduct registration, with radar ................................................................................... D-22

Contents

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 ix

Table D-18. Conduct HB/MPI registration (with at least two observers) ......................................... D-23 Table D-19. Adjust fire, forward observer ........................................................................................ D-24 Table D-20. Adjust fire, forward observer using a LLDR/MELIOS, or adjust fire, radar observed .. D-25 Table D-21. Adjust fire, high angle , forward observer .................................................................... D-26 Table D-22. Adjust fire, high angle , forward observer using a G/VLLD/LLDR/MELIOS; adjust fire, high

angle , radar observed ............................................................................................................. D-27 Table D-23. Adjust fire: Coordinated illumination ............................................................................ D-28 Table D-24. Adjust fire: Simultaneous missions .............................................................................. D-29 Table D-25. Adjust illumination ........................................................................................................ D-30 Table D-26. Adjust smoke ................................................................................................................ D-31 Table D-27. X and Y radius values .................................................................................................. D-35

x TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Preface The mission of the Field Artillery is to deliver fires and integrate those fires and scalable capabilities to enable commanders to dominate their operational environment across full spectrum operations. To accomplish the mission, the Field Artillery must remain the maneuver commander’s premier, worldwide deployable force able to dominate any operating environment through the integration, synchronization, and employment of organic, joint, and coalition lethal and non-lethal fires.

Training Circular (TC) 3-09.8 is an interim training circular intended to support the mission of the Field Artillery by providing the operational Army Field Artillery Individual Section Certification Tables. These tables are intended to parallel Maneuver Tables 1–6 and are designed for artillery leaders at all levels to assess the proficiency of their units to perform their mission and to sustain Field Artillery Core Competencies throughout the ARFORGEN Cycle. The programs outlined in this manual follow the concepts and guidance provided in ADP 7-0 and ADRP 7-0, Training Units and Developing Leaders.

The tasks, conditions, and standards in this TC are based on system technical manuals, training products, and tasks in the military occupational specialty (MOS) 13-series Soldier’s manuals. In all cases, use the most current technical manuals as references when executing the tables. All Field Artillery units are encouraged to provide ideas to upgrade the tasks, conditions, and standards in this circular.

This publication applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard (ARNG), Army National guard of the United States (ARNGUS) and the U.S. Army Reserve (USAR) unless otherwise stated.

The proponent for this publication is the United Stated Army Training and Doctrine Command. The preparing agency is the U.S Army Field Artillery School. Submit changes for improving this publication on DA Form 2028 (Recommend Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) and forward to the Directorate of Training and Doctrine, Doctrine Branch, Fires Center of Excellence, Fort Sill, Oklahoma 73503.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 1-1

Chapter 1

Introduction This Training Circular (TC) provides the guidelines for implementing a Field Artillery (FA) gunnery program that incorporates all FA systems. The objective is a safe, technically and doctrinally grounded, progressive, task oriented training model. FA, as a system of systems, requires integrating functions or tasks performed by the critical elements of the gunnery team to provide timely and accurate fires. The artillery tables provide the commander with a systematic means of training and qualifying each of the sections/crews/teams that are critical to the solution of the gunnery problem. The tables provide progressive training from Military Occupational Specialty (MOS) qualified individual tasks through collective gunnery training at the battalion level. These tables also provide all FA leaders and Soldiers with the “what” and “how” to train materials that are standard across the Army.

The FA commander continuously assesses the unit’s proficiency and readiness to perform mission essential tasks. Each commander implements gunnery programs to achieve and sustain unit readiness and proficiency in these tasks. The commander uses all the resources available to implement an efficient gunnery program; this maximizes the use of ammunition, training area availability, and Soldier training time to sustain proficiency.

This TC provides an effective progressive method for qualification procedures. Given the tempo and various mission requirements, the intent of this TC is to provide commanders a flexible, yet proven methodology to train and develop highly qualified combat crews/sections.Para1-1

QUALIFICATION METHODOLOGY

CERTIFICATION 1-1. Certification is a safety focused assessment by the battery commander that his crews are safe to fire. It is normally done semi-annually, but can be increased in frequency as necessary in order to meet Unit Status Report (USR) qualification requirements. It is completed at battery level, valid for 6 months, and includes the written safety test administered by the Battalion Master Gunner/Fire Direction Non Commissioned Officer (FDNCO)/Fire Support NCO, a hands-on safety certification witnessed by the Battery Commander, and the Artillery Skills Proficiency Test (ASPT) which has been verified and validated by the Battalion’s Master Gunner. Table V (Dry Missions) administered by the battery are used to validate the commander’s recommendation of safety certification. Certification must be completed prior to any live fire qualification or requalification procedures.

EVALUATION 1-2. Evaluation is a semi-annual external validation of sections/teams. It is focused on Artillery Table VI missions. The evaluation is administered under the control of the Battalion Master Gunner and the oversight by the Battalion’s Command Sergeant Major.

QUALIFICATION 1-3. Qualification is a live fire event based on the correct execution of Artillery Table VI. It is normally done semi-annually for the Active Component (AC) and annually for the Army National Guard (ARNG), but can be increased in frequency as necessary in order to meet USR qualification requirements. It is completed at battery level and observed by battery leadership. Qualification is valid for 6 months from date of qualification for the AC and 12 months for the ARNG.

Chapter 1

1-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

1-4. No training strategy satisfies the requirements of all units, and this model is no exception. A new organization with untrained personnel would use the progression of tables as presented as a means to achieve training proficiency. As the proficiency of the unit progresses and is sustained, the commander adjusts the strategy to fit the level of training of the unit. The semi-annual lock step progression of Tables I–VI is not the requirement; demonstrated training proficiency is the goal. The commander should consider the following to determine the gunnery strategy: (1) Results of the ASPT, (2) Record of proficiency on individual tasks (Table I initially, but task proficiency is expected to be sustained and improved during normal training), and (3) Section Task Proficiency on critical tasks (Table V).

1-5. The unit Master Gunner is a primary advisor and manager of the commander’s gunnery program. FA Master Gunners are the commander’s key resource and the unit focal point for administering the training and qualification programs in this TC. Master Gunners are selected for their technical education and skills in their MOS, training management, and individual instructor proficiency, as well as for breadth of proficiency in various artillery skills. A Master Gunner is an operations staff asset, having specified training management responsibilities for gunnery, technical standardization, and safety oversight. The Master Gunner is responsible for the selection, training, and certification of evaluators for implementing the tables in this TC. He will assist in the execution of the commander’s safety certification program. The Master Gunner will also assist the commander in developing programs and training future Master Gunners in the organization. For a more detailed description of all Master Gunner duties and responsibilities see FM 3-09.21 (Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for the Field Artillery Battalion).

SCOPE 1-6. This TC provides a methodology for standardizing gunnery training for the FA force to support Unified Land Operations. Effective FA training throughout the years has always required tough, thorough, and achievable standards. Technical proficiency and flexibility in a resource and time constrained environment is the hallmark of the FA branch.

GENERAL CONTENT 1-7. The general content of the FA Gunnery Tables provides:

• Tables with procedures and individual tasks based on the associated system technical manuals (TMs) for the equipment assigned to the section being trained. References are provided for all tasks in the tables.

• Focus on FA gunnery procedures, in the provision of an Armywide FA standard gunnery training program, in a common tabular format consistent with maneuver branch tables.

• Procedures for certification/qualification of all crews/sections involved in gunnery. The tables provide crew/section/team qualification tables through collective training at the battalion level as required to support the commander’s assessment of training readiness, in accordance with AR 220- 1 (Unit Status Reporting).

• Performance steps for all individual task are available through the Digital Training Managmenet System (DTMS) or each Military Occupational Speciality (MOS) Soldier Training Publication (STP). Performance measures are available to use during the evaluaiton of all individual and collective tasks.

STANDARDIZATION 1-8. Standardization serves as a guideline to unit commanders and Soldiers for application in their training environment. Using these practices depends on the planning and expertise of Soldier leaders in their environment. This TC is a source to sustain the technical body of knowledge in a force performing a multitude of Soldier tasks related and unrelated to gunnery proficiency. Standardization:

• Provides prescriptive guidelines and rationale for standardized gunnery in U.S. Army FA units. • Accommodates command, table of organization and equipment (TOE), and unit peculiar

requirements (such as theater of operations, mission essential task list [METL], airborne, and air assault) while capturing artillery standards at the same time.

Introduction

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 1-3

• Provides baseline proficiency requirements for unit(s) retraining from non-artillery employments. • Allows commanders to incorporate training conditions, exercises, and focus.

SINGLE SOURCES 1-9. Though a single source document, this TC is not an encyclopedic, multivolume recapitulation of TMs. This TC is designed to be used with the up to date TMs required for the safe and effective operation of all FA systems. Single source:

• Provides actual information or bibliographical references to artillery documentation for training FA tables to standard.

• Provides a living document to the field Army by reference to the requirements for updated TMs as they are developed for current and new systems.

TASK BASED TRAINING STRATEGY 1-10. The artillery tables represent a task based training strategy linked to required resources to assist the commander and training manager in the development of realistic, battle focused gunnery training. The artillery training and standards in this TC are, by design, related to other available descriptive collective training strategies available to unit leaders. These strategies include the following:

• The Combined Arms Training Strategies (CATS) for artillery battalions include a strategy, the supporting resources and recommended events, training aids, devices, simulators, and simulations (TADSS), and supporting training support packages (TSPs) for the training of the artillery tables. The CATS ammunition resources are based on the Standards in Training Commission (STRAC) allocations.

• DA Pam 350-38 (Standards in Training Commission [STRAC]) provides descriptive strategies, combining ammunition allocations, and TADSS based on the overarching CATS.

BATTLE FOCUS 1-11. Battle focus is a concept for deriving peacetime training requirements from wartime missions. Battle focus guides the planning, execution, and assessment of each unit’s training program. This is to ensure that its members train as they fight. The battle focus process is the same for Active Army and Reserve Component (RC) units (both Modified Table of Organization and Equipment [MTOE] and Table of Distribution and Allowances [TDA]). ADP 7-0, Training Units and Developing Leaders explains how to plan, resource, and execute training events. This TC provides the gunnery principles and standards to evaluate crew, section, and platoon training.

MISSION ESSENTIAL TASK LIST 1-12. A unit’s training program must support the METL; therefore, time, resources, and command emphasis must all focus on training tasks that support the METL. Platoon sergeants and section chiefs should use the appropriate critical task list to identify the individual tasks that support the collective tasks. To develop the METL, the commander must know and understand the war plans and external directives handed down from the higher headquarters.

• The Brigade Combat Team (BCT) Commander and Fires Battalion Commander will determine the fire missions that must be trained by the Fire Support Team/Combat Observation and Lasing Team (FIST/COLT) to support the unit’s METL.

COMMANDERS ASSESSMENT 1-13. FA Gunnery training must be well designed and continuous for units to achieve, improve, and sustain gunnery proficiency. Each commander must continually assess their unit’s previous performance, current level of training, and state of weapon and weapon platform maintenance to determine its level of proficiency in gunnery. Then, they must train their unit to produce skilled crewmen, crews, and platoons. The Master Gunner should advise the commander and assess, plan, develop, implement, instruct, evaluate, and reassess all phases of

Chapter 1

1-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

gunnery training. The commander’s ongoing assessment is crucial to gunnery program development and where the team effort should be demonstrated most.

1-14. The following factors must be considered during the assessment: • Evaluate previous training. The commander assesses training with input from the executive officer

(XO), S-3, subordinate leaders, and Master Gunners (see ADP 7-0). He can use individual and crew training to determine the unit’s proficiency.  Individual. Common task test results show basic individual training proficiency. The ASPT

evaluates specific section related individual proficiency. The written test for Table I evaluates knowledge of Individual MOS tasks. Individual weapons training and qualification scores indicate proficiency levels with the various weapons organic to the sections and platoon.

 Section. Section training proficiency can be measured by reviewing results of most recent gunnery tables, leader safety certification results, and specific section training requirements.

 Collective. Collective training proficiency can be measured by reviewing past collective gunnery, Combat Training Center (CTC), and field training exercise (FTX) results.

• Section turbulence. • Training days available. • Resources available. • The unit’s specific METL. • Past strengths and weaknesses within the unit. • Who will be the primary trainer for the gunnery program?  Evaluation. The commander uses specific standards to measure the demonstrated abilities of

individuals and crews. Accurate evaluations are necessary to identify where to place training emphasis. Leaders must make on the spot corrections and demand aggressive action to correct training deficiencies. Crew level simulations results are also good indicators of crew proficiency.

 Informal. Unit leaders evaluate performance informally during training.  Formal. The commander schedules a dedicated evaluator on either the long or short range

training plan.  Internal. The evaluated unit plans, resources, and conducts their own evaluations.  External. Higher headquarters or another unit plans, resources, and conducts a unit evaluation.

Introduction

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 1-5

SECTION I – TRAINING STRATEGY

GUNNERY TABLES Table 1-1. FA Gunnery Tables

Chapter 1

1-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 1-1. FA Gunnery Tables (Continued)

QUALIFICATION CRITERIA 1-15. Table 1-2 lists the minimum requirements for a crew/section to maintain qualification. Field artillery commanders will train and safety certify, but are not limited to the following personnel:

Introduction

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 1-7

Table 1-2. Section/Team Qualification Criteria

SECTION II – COMMANDER’S GUIDANCE

TRAINING GOALS 1-16. Training goals will vary based on the assigned mission and commander’s intent. The goal is to create a training environment that is as realistic and demanding as possible with the resources available. The following goals should be set to ensure successful training:

• Set and enforce tough, but achievable standards. Tough standards will generate effective training; loose standards will produce weak sections. The sections cannot be fooled; they know when they have done well. Insist on repetition to achieve mastery.

• Start early. All aspects of a training program must be thoroughly coordinated. Forecast resources and maintenance assistance long before they are needed.

• Be thorough. Avoid wasting resources and training opportunities. Give subordinates the guidance and assets needed to train their sections and platoons.

• Be flexible. Continually update the training program to the changing needs of the unit. If assessment and planning stop, the training program stagnates.

• Train continually. Train at every opportunity, not just during an intensified period, to get ready for qualification tables. Specialized high intensity training programs should be used only to bring a unit up to a desired proficiency level; then train continually to maintain that level.

1-17. Contingency plans and alternate methods of training should be identified in case the primary plan cannot be executed. Training time is valuable and should not be lost due to unforeseen factors.

TRAINING REQUIREMENTS 1-18. Training must conform to Army doctrine. The training requirements listed below must be trained and completed to standard to ensure the ultimate success of the gunnery training plan.

• Schedule section skills training monthly, concurrently with preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), prepare to fire checks, and tactical training.

• All Soldiers assigned to a section must pass all ASPT tasks in the 6 months (12 months for RCs) before live fire.

• Sections must meet or exceed the prerequisites to live fire as established by AR 350-1 (Army Training and Leader Development), local regulations, and the unit commander.

Chapter 1

1-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

• Section members must maintain proficiency on Table I tasks appropriate for their skill level before conducting Table II. Tasks may be evaluated during routine training events or as a written examination.

• Sections must participate in and satisfy the requirements of the Individual and Crew Gunnery Training for Unstabilized platforms in FM 3-20.21 (Heavy Brigade Combat Team [HBCT] Gunnery).

• Sections must qualify on Table VI before conducting the collective Gunnery Tables. • Platoons must qualify on Table XII semi-annually. • ASPT evaluators must pass all ASPT tasks before they evaluate a particular ASPT station

themselves. • Live Fire Convoy training events will be conducted in accordance with TC 4-11.46 (Convoy

Protection Platform Gunnery).

1-19. The commander develops his training strategy after assessing the strengths and weaknesses of his unit. His strategy must focus on his METL, sustain his unit’s strengths, and correct its weaknesses. He will find that some tasks apply to all Soldiers, some apply only to types of sections/teams, and others apply to multiple types of sections. This requires an integrated training strategy. Gunnery progresses logically to support section/team training, leading the section or platoon up to a collective, tactical, live fire evaluation during section or platoon qualification.

SECTION III – TRAINING PLANS 1-20. Once the commander and his staff have developed his METL and thoroughly assessed training proficiency, he begins the detailed process of developing a training plan.

GUNNERY TRAINING

MASTER GUNNER 1-21. The mission of the Master Gunners is to train the unit for gunnery and act as subject matter expert for all weapon system platforms in the battalion. The Master Gunner advises commanders at all echelons and assists with the planning, development, execution, and evaluation of all gunnery related training (individual, crew, and collective). The Brigade FSNCO acts as Master Gunner for all Fire Support related training and personnel in the BCT.

1-22. The Master Gunner duties include— • Assist the integration of newly assigned Soldiers.  Sets up or conducts initial skills training for new personnel.  Assists in training new section members.  Trains and certifies section/team evaluators.

• Assists all elements in the unit concerning gunnery training. • Forecasts and manages ammunition for certification and evaluations. • Manages gunnery records, ASPT records, and section rosters. • Sets up and oversees ASPT training and evaluates the results. • Coordinates and controls training device use. • Plans and manages section/team gunnery simulations training. • Executes gunnery training. • Supervises live fire ranges to make sure all standards are followed. • Advises the commander on battle roster changes and section/team turbulence impacts.

Introduction

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 1-9

LONG RANGE TRAINING PLANS 1-23. Long range planning synchronizes supporting units and agencies by allocating dedicated training time for organizations and units to train on METL tasks. Long range planning goes out to 1 year for Active Army and 3 to 5 years for RC at the battery level.

1-24. Each commander identifies training needs from his METL task proficiency assessment. He sets goals and forecasts or allocates resources to reach them. When considering his long range plan, the commander must answer several questions:

• What is the current platoon proficiency level (crew and squad)? The answer to this question depends on:  Battle roster changes.  Performance during previous gunnery exercises and section and platoon situational training

exercises (STXs) and LFXs. • What are the performance goals for the platoons (the proficiency level sections must reach to

accomplish METL tasks)? • What resources must we have, and where is the command emphasis?  Correct tasks that fall short of the standard.  Sustain proficiency in tasks that meet the standard.

• What schools and training are needed to certify and train trainers?  Master Gunner’s course.  Section evaluator’s certification.  ASPT evaluator certification.  Instructor/operator courses within the unit.  Joint Fires Observer (JFO) trained and certified observers.

SHORT RANGE TRAINING PLANS 1-25. Short range planning defines in greater detail the broad guidance on training events and other activities outlined in the commander’s training guidance and depicted on the long range calendar. Short range planning looks out from 3 to 6 months for Active Army and 12 to 20 months for RC. Resources identified during long range planning are allocated and prioritized during short range planning. Command training guidance is published to provide trainers detailed information on the training objective.

1-26. Gunnery resource considerations are ammunition, fuel and maintenance, range and maneuver area, and training device availability.

• Ammunition. Master Gunners must carefully manage ammunition allocations. The battalion Master Gunner forecasts ammunition needs well before the training event. For many reasons, the ammunition authorization could fall short of the forecasted training requirement. The Master Gunner gets the yearly ammunition authorized according to DA Pam 350-38, he then allocates ammunition based on the commander’s guidance and priority’s.

• Fuel and Maintenance. An intensive vehicle technical inspection program should be instituted prior to gunnery to ensure all vehicles are fully mission capable (FMC) with the goal of each crew qualifying on their own vehicle.

• Range and Maneuver Area. Include target and range support personnel. Coordinate Direct/Indirect Fire Range requirements with Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Gunnery density for BFIST as applicable.

• Short Range Gunnery. Considerations include:  Vehicle services.  Other mandatory training, or events prescribed by higher headquarters.  No training events (holidays, leaves, installation support).

Chapter 1

1-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

 Section training priorities and expected outcomes.  Leader, individual, and collective tasks associated with the training event.  Steps required in preparing trainers and evaluators.  Integration of section training on the training calendar.

NEAR TERM TRAINING PLANS 1-27. Near term planning consists of scheduling and executing training specified in the short range training plan, providing specific guidance for training, and producing detailed training schedules. Near term planning covers a period of 6 to 8 weeks prior to execution of training for Active Army and 4 months prior to execution of training for RC.

1-28. Training meetings should be held at battalion, company, and platoon levels so all key personnel understand detailed information.

• Battalion meetings focus on training management.  Conduct final coordination of ranges, training areas, and ammunition.  Coordinate between units for maintenance, medical, logistics, and personnel requirements.  Lock in and publish unit training schedules.

• Company and platoon meetings cover the specifics of executing the training event. These elements should be included in the gunnery operations order (OPORD).  Discuss when the training will be conducted, to include movement times, to the training area.  Discuss personnel involved in the training event, and identify who is responsible for conducting

the training.  Discuss in detail the range setup, execution, and key individual responsibilities.  Discuss training location, uniforms, and special equipment required to conduct training.  Discuss specific personnel performance measures to be evaluated.

1-29. Commanders should require back briefs to ensure subordinate leaders understand all aspects of the training event. The formal training plan culminates with the training schedule. Commanders, key leaders, and all trainers must continue to plan and coordinate training informally with a series of pre-execution checks. Additionally, trainers, Soldiers, and support personnel must thoroughly prepare for training.

• Pre-execution checks systematically prepare Soldiers, trainers, and resources to ensure that training starts properly. These checks are developed, and responsibility for them assigned, during short range planning.

• Commanders prepare trainers to conduct performance oriented training by providing time, guidance, resources, and references. Each trainer rehearses his preparations and reviews the tasks and subtasks that he must conduct. This gives him confidence in his ability to perform the task himself, and to teach Soldiers the correct skills.

Task Assesment 1-30. Each task has a standard that measures the successful performance of the task and task steps that give directions on the how to of task performance. Furthermore, some steps have performance measures listed as well. In order to assess a task and give a “T, P, or U” rating, we have attempted to identify a criterion that satisfies the needs of the commanders and is as non ambiguous as possible. Keeping in mind that the commander has the ultimate responsibility of rating a task, this method below represents one way to assess tasks. It cannot possibly take into account all possible situations and apply mission, enemy, terrain, troops and time available and civil considerations (METT-TC) to the assessment. The commander must do that and use his subjective opinion to give the final rating.

1-31. In addition to the standard, several task steps/performance measures are listed for each task. Each task step/performance measure is graded either “GO” or “NO-GO.” The question, “Does a unit have to perform each task step/performance measure successfully in order to receive a ‘Trained’ for the task?” has always arisen. In the past, the answer according to the Mission Training Plan (MTP) manuals was “Yes.” We know, however, the

Introduction

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 1-11

practical answer is no. As long as the task standard is met, and critical steps, identified with a “+,” are performed to standard the unit will successfully perform the task. If every step were required for successful completion of a task, the unit would never have a rating of “Practice” for any task. We have attempted to identify critical steps for each task. We may have overlooked some steps, and you may not agree with our evaluation of critical steps. We ask your help to identify critical steps during your review and use of the tables.

• A rating of “T” = All critical task steps/performance measures as indicated by a “+” are performed, 70% of those task steps not listed as critical are performed, and the element attains the task standard. “T” (trained) means that the unit can successfully perform the task to standard. Only sustainment training is needed. The leader/observer/controller or trainer judges task performance to be free of significant shortcomings. Practice on “T” tasks is designed to keep Soldiers from loosing proficiency.

• A rating of “P” = All critical task steps/performance measures as indicated by a “+” are performed, less than 70% of those task steps not listed as critical are performed, and the task standard is met. “P” (practice) means that the unit can perform the task with some shortcomings. The shortcomings are not severe enough to require complete retraining. Only refresher training is required. The determining factor is the task standard. The task standard must be met to receive a rating of “P.”

• A rating of “U” = The unit fails to attain the task standard. “U” (untrained) means that the unit cannot perform the task to standard. The element has failed one or more critical task steps/performance measures. The determining factor is the failure of the unit to perform the task to the stated standard. It may be assumed that if a critical task step is failed, then the task standard cannot be met. The leader must prepare a comprehensive strategy to train all tasks not executed to standard.

1-32. Units should strive to receive a “GO” on each performance measure. “NO-GOs” should be analyzed and discussed during after action reports (AARs) and critiques. Units should train to eliminate “NO-GOs” from future evaluations.

1-33. Evaluations can be internal or external. Internal evaluations are conducted at all levels, and they must be a routine component of all training. External evaluations are usually more formal and are normally conducted by a headquarters two echelons above the unit being evaluated.

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-1

Chapter 2

Safety The basic rule for preventing firing incidents is to recognize that individuals make errors, and the best safeguard against those errors is an independent double check of all operations in which human error could cause a firing incident (sometimes referred to as the two man rule). A fundamental aspect of safety is that no one person performs a critical live fire task then checks that task alone. For every critical task required for firing artillery safely, there is a person or persons designated to verify the task. Verification of data includes independent checks by independent means.

SECTION I – CERTIFICATION, BATTLE FOCUS, DUTIES, AND RESPONSIBILITIES

CERTIFICATION 2-1. Live fire safety is critical when training artillery units. The commander’s certification of leaders in the required safety procedures is a gate for all subsequent live fire training (for delivery sections, see Chapter 4). Training individual leader safety tasks is a critical first step in training the Field Artillery Gunnery Tables.

2-2. Conducting live fire safety checks and verification is an integral responsibility in most leader duty positions in FA units. Qualifying leaders to perform their responsibilities includes live fire safety procedures and positive checks required to perform duties as Officer in Charge (OIC), Range Safety Officer (RSO), and safety certified section chief. Commanders are responsible for the safety certification/qualification of individual leaders to perform in the duty positions listed in paragraph 2-3.

INDIVIDUAL SAFETY CERTIFICATION 2-3. The duty positions in an FA firing battery that requires knowledge or skills that directly impact on live fire safety will be certified during individual certification of skills. A written test, hands on component, or both may verify this certification. Examples of questions can be obtained from the Field Artillery Master Gunners Knowledge Center on the Fires Knowledge Network (FKN) at https://www.us.army.mil/suite/files/1834686 . Tasks to support the hands-on component are in located in the specific Military Occupational Specialty chapters within TC 3-09.8. The duty positions requiring individual certification are:

• Battery commander. • Battery XO. • Battery FDO. • Platoon leader. • Gunnery sergeant. • Platoon sergeant. • Section chief. • Chief Fire Control SGT/Chief Fire Direction Computer.

SECTION/CREW/TEAM TRAINING 2-4. All sections/crews/teams that contribute directly to solving the gunnery problem will be trained in a dry status, prior to live fire qualification. Where available, TADSS will be used to support training such as—

• Guard Unit Armory Device Full Crew Interactive Simulation Trainer (GUARDFIST) II. • Call for fire trainer (CFFT) for FIST/COLT training. • M270A1/HIMARS Fire Contro Panel Trainer (FCPT).

Chapter 2

2-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

• Fire Support Combined Arms Tactical Trainer (FSCATT) for howitzer section training. • Desk Top Trainer (PDFCS/DFCS).

BATTLE FOCUS 2-5. Live fire safety requirements normally associated with ranges and range safety (such as the Safety T) also apply to combat. The requirement to compute and check left and right limits, minimum and maximum charges, fuze settings, deflections, and quadrant elevations are as critical in avoiding fratricide and violation of fire support coordination measures (FSCM) during combat as are range safety precautions during live fire training.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES

Commanders of Filed Artillery Battalions and Larger Units 2-6. Commanders establish and maintain a safety training and certification program for their personnel. This program trains and qualifies firing battery personnel in safety procedures for their specific areas of responsibility. When the commander is satisfied that the personnel are qualified to perform the safety duties as required, he certifies them. Personnel who have not completed annual training and certification will not be appointed as OIC or RSO. Additionally, the commander must:

• Comply with the installation procedures for certifying OIC/RSO/Laser RSO (LRSO). • Conduct risk management for all range operations.

Officer In Charge 2-7. The OIC is the battery commander or his command safety certified representative. The OIC is responsible for all aspects of safety in the firing unit and on the assigned firing range. Before the firing exercise, the RSO provides the OIC with the required safety data and firing limitations. The OIC verifies that the unit is in the proper firing position, supervises the conversion of the safety data into a safety diagram, and ensures that another command safety certified individual verifies the diagram. The safety data determined from the safety diagram provide right and left deflection limits, minimum (min) and maximum (max) Quadrant Elevations (QEs) for authorized charges, and minimum safe fuze times. The Safety T, modified as needed by the XO’s minimum QE, is given to the appropriate members of the firing battery. The OIC ascertains locations of friendly personnel who may inadvertently become exposed to artillery fires (through the installation Range Control Officer [RCO]). The OIC ensures dissemination of this information to platoon leaders, platoon sergeants, and section chiefs, as appropriate, to guard against fratricide.

Fire Direction Officer 2-8. The FDO has primary responsibility for computing safety data and ensuring that all safety data are updated after registration and receipt of current MET data. The FDO, assisted by the chief computer operator, plots the impact area on a map or chart in the FDC and ensures that all firing data are within prescribed safety limits before they are sent to the firing sections. The FDO is responsible for adjusting minimum QE for intervening crests. Re-compute and issue updated Safety Ts:

• When a registration is completed. • When MET conditions change. • When restrictions change.

Chief Fire Control Sergeant 2-9. The chief fire control sergeant, within the cannon organizations, assists the FDO in verifying initialization data in the Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS). The chief fire control sergeant assists in constructing the safety diagram and in verifying the data for the Safety T and the adjustment of minimum QE for intervening crest.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-3

Chief Fire Direction Computer 2-10. The chief fire direction computer, with the MLRS/HIMARS organizations, assists the FDO in verifying initialization data in the Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS). The FDC assists in constructing the safety diagram using the Safety Data Calculator (SDC).

Fire Control Sergeant/Fire Direction Center (FDC) Section Chief 2-11. The cannon fire control sergeant/MLRS/HIMARS FDC section chief have primary responsibility for initializing, maintaining, and operating the AFATDS database and supervising the secondary means of data computation as necessary. He assists the chief fire control sergeant/chief fire direction computer with safety computations and performs duties of the chief during his absence or during 24 hour operations.

Gunnery Sergeant/Platoon Sergeant 2-12. The gunnery sergeant/platoon sergeant helps the XO or platoon leader and must be prepared to perform many of the duties in the absence of the XO or platoon leader.

Howitzer section Chief 2-13. The howitzer section chief supervises all practices at or near the weapon. These practices include verifying that the announced safety data are applied to the weapon and that the proper charge, fuze, and projectiles are fired. The howitzer section chief has final responsibility for firing the weapon and performs the following pre-fire checks (in accordance with applicable operator level TM-10 series):

• Checks the serviceability and type of ammunition and fuze used. • Ensures the proper emplacement of safety stakes/tape. • Physically verifies that every charge is correct before loading. • Verifies the fuze/time setting on each round before loading. • Announces the time fuze setting on the round (for comparison with the announced fire

command). • Checks deflection and quadrant for each round by visual inspection of data, sight picture, and

leveling vials. Using the gunner’s quadrant, to verify quadrant, is mandatory for the first rounds fired in each new mission or as directed.

MLRS/HIMARS Section Chief 2-14. The launcher section chief is responsible for the safe operation of the weapon system by the crew from the upload of live rockets through rocket launch. The launcher section chief ensures that all procedures in the launcher are conducted in accordance with applicable technical manuals and all reports and checks are verified in accordance with the procedures outlined in this chapter. The launcher section chief is ultimately responsible for ensuring that munitions are neither armed nor fired until firing data is properly verified as safe. The launcher section chief also ensures that the gunner is trained to properly read and use a Safety T.

Range Control Officer 2-15. The RCO gives the following safety data to the firing unit OIC:

• Grid coordinates of the firing position. • Lateral safety limits. • Minimum and maximum ranges. • Authorized ammunition to be fired (fuze, projectile, and charge). • Maximum ordinate (high angle or low angle). • Hours during which firing is to be conducted. • Target area boundaries.

Chapter 2

2-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Range Safety Officer 2-16. The RSO is responsible for the safety practices of the firing element and ensures that the section chiefs have safety data. In Cannon Units, the RSO determines the lowest QE that can be fired safely from the firing position and ensures that projectiles clear all immediate crests (for the XO’s minimum QE, see page 2-45). The FDO, the platoon sergeant, and/or the gunnery sergeant will assist. In MLRS/HIMARS Units, the RSO ensures that section chiefs report firing data to the POC/BOC and that Area F and Exclusion Area I are clear. Before granting clearance to fire, the RSO:

• Ensures that weapons and personnel are properly positioned. • Ensures that authorized ammunition and explosives (to include proper charge, fuze, and fuze

settings) are used. • Ensures that firing settings and weapons systems are within prescribed safety limits and

verified. • Ensures that the surface danger zone (SDZ) is clear of all unauthorized personnel. • Ensures that proper hearing protection is worn by personnel in noise hazard areas. • Ensures that proper eye protection is worn by personnel within eye hazard areas. • Ensures that permission is received from range control to begin training and live fire

operations. • Conducts final coordination with the OIC before beginning live fire operations. (This

coordination will include a summary of checks, inspections, and actions that the RSO has completed and verification that required communications have been established and a “hot status” has been received from range control.)

• Orders immediate cease fire or check firing when an unsafe condition occurs. • Is physically present at the training site. • Reports all accidents and ammunition malfunctions to the range OIC. • Verifies, upon completion of firing or firing order, to the OIC that all weapons and weapons

systems are clear and safe before allowing removal of weapons from the firing area.

Laser Range Safety Officer 2-17. The LRSO:

• Ensures that unit personnel employing lasers receive thorough safety briefings (including explanations of specific laser related hazards, safety equipment, and detailed range safety procedures) and comply with procedures in DA Pam 385-63 (Range Safety).

• Knows and observes horizontal and vertical safety limits of the laser range. • Follows unit standard operating procedures (SOPs) for laser operations and training exercises. • Ensures that all personnel engaged in laser operations, including personnel in target areas,

maintain continuous communications. • Ceases laser operations immediately if communications or positive control of the laser beam is

lost.

2-18. The LRSO takes extreme caution when using a target designating laser in conjunction with ordnance delivery aircraft. The onboard laser seeker may lock onto the designator or its radiated energy (beam or reflected beam) instead of the target. The LRSO uses the following procedures to reduce this risk:

• Ensures that the pilot of the attacking aircraft has positive knowledge of the location of the designator and the target area before releasing munitions.

• Designates the approach paths and briefs both the designating and forward air controller and the aircrews before conducting the mission. Plans aircraft approach paths to preclude crossing laser designator beams with the laser seeker. (The laser seeker should intersect the designator beam well forward of the laser firing point, angling toward the target.)

• Ensures that only mission essential personnel are within the area of effects for the weapon

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-5

employed from the designator or direct or reflected beam of the laser designator during operations.

• Does not launch or release munitions on a heading toward the laser designator. See applicable technical manuals for recommended employment procedures.

Observer 2-19. The observer ensures that the impact area is clear of personnel and equipment prior to firing and spots all fired rounds and reports any duds to range control. When the Leica Vector (VIPER), Lightweight Laser Designator Rangefinder (LLDR), or any other device is used for lasing, the observer must ensure that all applicable laser safety procedures are followed.

SECTION II – PROCEDURES 2-20. The following safety procedures include firing and computational procedures for both MLRS/HIMARS and cannons. These procedures are identical to those in FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19 (Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery) and FM 6-50 (Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Field Artillery Cannon Battery) and are consolidated here for convenience. These procedures comply with AR 385-63/MCO 3570.1B (Range Safety) and DA Pam 385- 63; however, if local range regulations are more restrictive than the material in this manual, follow the local range regulations.

CANNON SAFETY 2-21. This section identifies the specific duties of cannon battery personnel before, during, and after firing. Specific duties of safety personnel before firing include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Verify that the data the RCO gives to the OIC apply to the unit firing, that the unit is in the correct location, and that the data are correct.

• Compute and verify the safety diagram (at least two safety certified personnel, normally the platoon leader and FDO).

• Ensure that all personnel and equipment are clear from Surface Danger Area E before firing (see DA Pam 385-63 for the dimensions of Surface Danger Area E for specific weapon systems).

• Check the DA Form 581 (Request for Issue and Turn-In of Ammunition) and range safety card to ensure that only authorized ammunition is fired (platoon leader or platoon sergeant).

• Ensure that no safety violations occur at or near the weapon(s) (all members of the firing unit). • Check the weapons for correct boresighting (section chief). • Verify the lay of the battery (platoon leader or platoon sergeant). • Compute and verify minimum QE (platoon leader or FDO). • Compare minimum QE with the QE for minimum range shown on the safety diagram. Use the

larger of the two as the minimum QE (platoon leader or FDO). • Verify that the section chief has safety data (Safety T). Ensure that section chiefs are advised

of all friendly personnel in the area who may inadvertently be exposed to FA direct or indirect fires (platoon leader or platoon sergeant).

• Supervise and check the emplacement of safety aids (stakes, tape, and other devices) (platoon leader, platoon sergeant, or gunnery sergeant).

• Verify that range clearance has been obtained (platoon leader or FDO).

2-22. Specific duties of safety personnel during firing include, but are not limited to, the following: • Verify the serviceability of ammunition (section chief). • Supervise key safety personnel in the performance of their duties (OIC or RSO).

Chapter 2

2-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

• Verify that the charges, projectiles, and fuzes being fired are only those prescribed on the safety card (section chief, platoon leader, or platoon sergeant).

• Visually inspect to ensure that the correct shell fuze combination, time (if required), and charge are properly prepared and loaded on each round. Verify that the correct number of remaining powder increments (execpt for MACS charges) are removed to the powder pit before loading and firing each round (section chief).

• Verify that rounds are not fired below the minimum QE or above the maximum QE (section chief, platoon leader, or platoon sergeant).

• Verify that rounds are not fired outside the lateral (deflection) safety limits specified on the range safety card (section chief, platoon leader, or platoon sergeant).

• Verify that time fuzed rounds are not fired with fuze settings that are less than the minimum time prescribed on the safety diagram (section chief, platoon leader, or platoon sergeant).

2-23. Suspend firing when any unsafe condition exists (any person who sees an unsafe act). Examples of unsafe conditions include the following:

• Powder bags exposed to fire. • Personnel smoking near pieces of ammunition. • Improper handling of ammunition. • Time fuze previously set and not reset to safe. • Primer inserted into the firing assembly before breech is closed (separate loading ammunition). • Failure to inspect powder chamber and bore after each round is fired. • Failure to swab powder chamber after each round of separate loading ammunition is fired.

2-24. On all commands that are unsafe to fire, command “CHECK FIRING,” and give the reason(s) why the command is unsafe (section chief or anyone observing an unsafe act), as in the following examples:

• “UNSAFE TO FIRE 3 MILS OUTSIDE RIGHT SAFETY LIMIT AND 20 MILS ABOVE MAXIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION.”

• “UNSAFE TO FIRE 5 MILS BELOW MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION.” • PERSONNEL OR AIRCRAFT DIRECTLY IN FRONT OF THE WEAPON.

CANNON SAFETY AIDS 2-25. From the range safety card, the FDO prepares a safety diagram and Safety Ts for the safety certified personnel. Safety aids are used to ensure that only safe data are fired from the position. Two such safety aids are the safety stakes and safety tape. These aids are used as a visual check to ensure that the line of fire is within safety limits.

M119A2 Howitzer 2-26. Emplace safety aids for the M119A2 howitzer as follows:

• Deflection safety aids.  Set off the left deflection limit on the pantel by using the deflection counter.  Traverse the tube to establish the proper sight picture on the aiming point.  Emplace the safety stake against the right side of the lunette and drive it firmly into the

ground.  Mark the right deflection limit in the same manner, but emplace the safety stake on the left

side of the lunette. • Deflection safety aids (M119A2).  Lay in the center of traverse as shown in Figure 2-1 (A).  Determine the left deflection limit and traverse the tube to the maximum left (0-100 mils

scale). The crew shifts the carriage right until the tube is at the left deflection limit.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-7

Emplace the left deflection limit safety stake as shown in Figure 2-1 (B).  Determine the right deflection limit, and traverse the tube to the maximum right (0-100

mils scale). The crew shifts the carriage left until the tube is at the right limit. Emplace the right deflection limit safety stake as shown in Figure 2-1 (C).

• Quadrant elevation safety aids (M119A2).  Use the cam follower as an index mark.  Set off the maximum QE on the fire control quadrant. Elevate the tube until the bubbles

center in the elevation level vials.  Mark the cam with a piece of tape in line with the cam follower.  Mark the minimum QE in the same manner.

Figure 2-1. Emplacing safety stakes for M119A2

M777 Howitzer 2-27. Emplace safety tape on the M777 howitzer as follows:

• Deflection safety aids.  With the tube parallel to the azimuth of lay (AOL) (deflection 3,200), place a piece of tape

over the azimuth (AZ) counter (bottom carriage).  Set off the left deflection limit on the pantel by using the deflection counter. Traverse the

tube to establish the proper sight picture on the aiming point.  Using a straightedge, draw a line (on the tape placed on the bottom carriage) directly below

the azimuth counter index mark on the upper carriage. Record the left deflection limit next to that line.

 Mark the right deflection limit in the same manner. • Quadrant elevation safety aids.

Chapter 2

2-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

 With the tube elevated at 0 mils, place a piece of tape on the trunnion support, and draw a straight line as an index.

 Set off the minimum QE on the fire control quadrant. Elevate the tube until the bubble centers in the elevation level vial.

 Place a piece of tape on the quadrant mount. Draw a line across from the index line established on the trunnion support. Record the minimum QE next to that line.

 Mark the maximum QE in the same manner.

M109A6 PALADIN FIRING SAFETY 2-28. Firing safety is paramount; every secondary independent check/verification ensures that rounds to be fired will impact and detonate on the desired target. Failure to conduct secondary independent checks is the primary contributing factor to M109A6 Paladin firing incidents. Conducting procedurally correct crew drills can help prevent firing incidents from occurring. The most frequent types of firing incidents during Paladin live fire operations that can be prevented by secondary independent checks are:

• Firing at load elevation. • Degraded operations (Appendix A, FM 3-09.70, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for

M109A6 Howitzer [Paladin] Operations). The leadership must be proactive under degraded operations.

• Charge error.

2-29. Target location and verification of target location are critical factors in fire mission processing as well. The POC/BOC verifies target location at the battery level. Targets must be physically plotted and checked to ensure that they plot safely and do not violate any FSCM. The following techniques aid the FDC in ensuring that all target grids are cleared for safe engagement.

BOXED SAFETY 2-30. Safety is computed in accordance with FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19 standards and can be derived from automated range safety. The FDO computes safety from the center of radius grid used in the move order. The safety data is valid for howitzers firing within a 750 meter radius of the surveyed grid. Using the range fan, the FDO maximizes his safety box by determining his own limits within an approved impact area. The left and right limits are input in the move order message format. The FDO determines minimum and maximum quadrants.

2-31. The minimum and maximum quadrants and charge specific data are sent to the howitzers by digital means. The section chief enters the data into the Automatic Fire Control System (AFCS). Minimum QE is entered into the AFCS. Maximum QE is input as maximum tube elevation. The FDO must specify charge using this technique. He must select the optimum charge to fire based on the tactical situation. Every mission sent to the howitzer must be checked, and the specified charge must be sent down to the howitzers. The POC must check and resolve intervening crests (see paragraph 2-81).

2-32. Boxed safety is similar to regular FA safety with the following exceptions: • Not required to use range safety card. • Use surveyed move order grid within training area with a 750 meter radius. • Charge restricted

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-9

Figure 2-2. Boxed safety

UNBOXED SAFETY 2-33. This technique requires the FDO to shrink the perimeter of the selected impact area by area A plus 12 probable errors (PEr) in range or per local range safety regulations (whichever is safest) to account for probable errors. The minimum quadrant to fire is computed using the lowest optimum charge to the closest minimum range of the impact area.

2-34. The POC transmits minimum QE to the howitzer using digital means, and the COS inputs minimum QE into the AFCS. The FDO does not send the howitzers a maximum QE. Not sending a maximum QE allows the platoon greater flexibility to engage targets within their sectors and enables firing of different charges per mission. All data is safe as long as howitzers remain within a 750 meter radius of the occupation grid (see Figure 2-3). The following are key points in unboxed safety:

• Minimum QE is computed using the lowest optimum charge. • Multiple charges can be fired. • Impact area is reduced by Area A plus 12X PEr or per local range safety regulations

(whichever is safest) to allow for probable errors • Howitzer pairs work within a 750 meter radius.

Chapter 2

2-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-3. Unboxed safety

COMBAT SAFETY 2-35. Combat safety (see Figure 2-4) is similar to unboxed safety with the following exceptions:

• Minimum QE is computed to the minimum range line (for example, forward line of own troops [FLOT]/brigade coordinated fire line [CFL]).

• Left and right limits are computed to the brigade boundaries and sent in the move order. • The POC must check intervening crests.

Note. Minimum range is computed for lowest optimum charge. Grid fired must be verified by at least three independent checks (forward observer [FO]/FIST, battalion FDC, POC/BOC). Howitzers input minimum QE and left and right limits on move order. Multiple charges can be fired.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-11

Figure 2-4. Combat safety

ILLUMINATION SAFETY 2-36. Illumination safety (see Figure 2-5) is similar to boxed safety and is computed using an approved safety box in an impact area. Computations are made per the procedures in FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19. The FDO computes minimum and maximum quadrants. Maximum QE is computed using range to impact. The POC transmits the calculated data/Safety T to the howitzers via digital means. The chief records the data, but does not enter the Safety T limits into the AFCS. The key points are—

• Similar to boxed safety. • Illumination Safety T is sent to guns via digital means. • The howitzer section chief does not enter Safety T data into AFCS, but records the data.

Figure 2-5. Illumination safety

Chapter 2

2-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SECTION III – MANUAL COMPUTATION OF SAFETY DATA 2-37. Minimum and maximum QEs, deflection limits, and minimum fuze settings must be computed to ensure that all rounds fired impact or function in the target area. These data are presented and arranged in a logical manner on a Safety T. This section describes how to manually compute safety data using tabular and graphical equipment. (As stated earlier, the RCO gives the OIC the lateral safety limits and the minimum and maximum ranges of the target areas. This data must be converted to fuze settings, deflections, and quadrants.) The computations discussed in this section should be performed by two safety certified personnel working independently.

MANUAL SAFETY COMPUTATION PROCEDURE 2-38. Manual safety computations are completed in four steps—beginning with receiving the range safety card and ending with constructing the Safety T. These steps are listed in Table 2-1

Table 2-1. Manual Safety Computation

Note. Figures 2-21 and 2-22 represent locally reproducible safety computation forms. Reproduce these forms on 8½ x 11 inch paper. FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19 prescribes these forms.

SAFETY CARD 2-39. A range safety card (Figure 2-6), which prescribes the hours of firing, the area where the firing will take place, the location of the firing position, limits of the target area (per AR 385-63/MCO 3570.1B), and other pertinent data is approved by the RCO and provided to the OIC. The OIC of firing gives a copy of the range safety card to the position safety officer, who constructs the safety diagram based on the prescribed limits.

Note. The range safety card shown in Figure 2-6 is used for all safety computation examples in this chapter.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-13

Figure 2-6. Example range safety card

BASIC SAFETY DIAGRAM 2-40. Upon receiving the range safety card, the FDO constructs a basic safety diagram. The basic safety diagram graphically portrays the data on the range safety card, or it is determined from the surface danger zone (DA Pam 385-63) and need not be drawn to scale. Information shown on the basic safety diagram includes the minimum and maximum range lines; the left, right, and intermediate (if any) azimuth limits; the deflections corresponding to the azimuth limits; and the Area of Limitation (AOL).

2-41. Table 2-2 shows the steps for constructing a basic safety diagram. Figure 2-7 is an example of a completed safety diagram.

Chapter 2

2-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-2. Construction of a Basic Safety Diagram

Step Action 1. On the top third of a sheet of paper, draw a line representing the AOL for the firing unit.

Label this line with its azimuth and the common deflection for the weapon system. NOTE: If the AOL is not provided, do the following to determine AOL:

• Subtract the maximum left azimuth limit from the maximum right azimuth limit. • Divide this value by two. • Add the result to the maximum left azimuth limit, and express the result to the

nearest 100 mils. (Expressing to the nearest 100 mils makes it easier for the aiming circle operator to lay the howitzers.)

2. Draw lines representing the lateral limits in proper relation to the AOL. Label these lines with the corresponding azimuth from the range safety card.

3. Draw lines between these lateral limits to represent the minimum and maximum ranges. Label these lines with the corresponding ranges from the range safety card. These are the diagram ranges. NOTE: If the minimum range for fuze time is different from the minimum range, draw a dashed line between the lateral limits to represent the minimum range for fuze time. Label this line with the corresponding range from the range safety card. This is the minimum time diagram range.

4. Compute the angular measurements from the AOL to each lateral limit. On the diagram, draw arrows indicating the angular measurements and label them.

5. Apply the angular measurements to the deflection corresponding to the AOL (common deflection) and record the result. This will be added to the drift and graphical firing table (GFT) deflection correction determined in the safety matrixes to produce the deflection limits on the Safety T. NOTE: If no GFT deflection correction has been determined: deflection limits = drift + diagram deflection. NOTE: If a GFT setting has been determined, deflection limits = drift + GFT deflection correction + diagram deflection. Drift is applied to the basic safety diagram by following the “left least, right most” rule. The lowest (least) drift is applied to all left deflection limits, and the highest (greatest) drift is applied to all right deflection limits.

6. Label the diagram with the following information from the range safety card: firing point location (grid and altitude), charge, shell, fuze, angle of fire, and AOL.

2-42. When the basic safety diagram is complete, it will be constructed to scale in red on the firing chart. Plot the firing point location as listed on the range safety card. Using temporary azimuth indexes, a Range Deflection Protractor (RDP), and a red pencil, draw the outline of the basic safety diagram:

• First draw the azimuth limits to include doglegs. • Then, by holding the red pencil firmly against the RDP at the appropriate ranges, connect the

azimuth lines.

Note. Only after drawing the basic safety diagram on the firing chart may the base piece location is plotted and deflection indexes be constructed. Should the diagram be drawn from the base piece location, it would be invalid unless the base piece was located over the firing point marker.

2-43. After the basic safety diagram has been drawn on a sheet of paper and on the firing chart, it is drawn on a map of the impact area using an RDP and a pencil. These limits must be drawn accurately because they will be used to determine altitudes for Vertical Intervals (VIs). Determine the maximum altitude along the minimum range line. This is used to ensure that the quadrant fired will cause the round to clear the highest point along the minimum range line and impact (function) within the impact area. At the maximum range, select the minimum altitude to ensure that the round will not clear the lowest point along

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-15

the maximum range. Once the altitudes have been selected, label the basic safety diagram with the altitudes for the given ranges.

Note. The rule for determining the correct altitude for safety purposes is called the mini/max rule. At the minimum range, select the maximum altitude; at the maximum range, select the minimum altitude. If the contour interval is in feet, use either the Graphical Site Table (GST) or divide feet by 3.28 to determine the altitude in meters (feet ÷ 3.28 = meters). This rule applies to both manual and automated procedures.

Figure 2-7. Example of a completed safety diagram (HE/WP/SMK)

COMPUTATION OF LOW ANGLE SAFETY DATA 2-44. Use the steps outlined in Table 2-3 and in the matrix in Figure 2-8 as examples for organizing computations. The low angle safety matrix is used for all munitions except M712 CLGP (Copperhead). Paragraph 2-59 describes M712 safety computations. The data are determined by either graphical or tabular firing tables. In the case of expelling charge munitions, the safety table located in the firing tables or firing table addenda is used to determine elevation, time of flight (TOF), fuze setting, and drift. Use artillery expression for all computations except where noted. A completed low angle safety matrix is shown in Figure 2-9.

Note. The ballistic data used to compute the examples in this chapter are located on pages 2-28 through 2-29 (M825 low angle) and 2-33 through 2-34 (illumination).

Chapter 2

2-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-3. Low Angle Procedures

Step Action 1. On the top third of a blank sheet of paper, construct the basic safety diagram in

accordance with the range safety card (see Table 2-2 for procedures). 2. In the middle third of the sheet of paper, construct the low angle safety matrix

(Figure 2-8). 3. Record the diagram ranges from the basic safety diagram. 4. Record the charge from the range safety card. 5. Enter the range correction, if required. The range correction is necessary only if a

nonstandard condition exists and is not already accounted for in a Graphical Firing Table (GFT) setting, such as correcting for the always heavier than standard white phosphorous projectile. See Figure 2-8, paragraph (b) to determine range correction. If a range correction is required, it is expressed to the nearest 10 meters. If no range correction is required, enter 0 (zero).

6. Determine the total range. Total range is the sum of the diagram range and the range correction. Total range is expressed to the nearest 10 meters.

7. Enter the Range K. Range K is required only if a GFT setting has been obtained but cannot be applied to a GFT (for example, determining illumination safety with a high explosive [HE] GFT setting). Range K is simply the total range correction from the GFT setting expressed as a percentage. This percentage, when multiplied by the total range, produces the entry range. If no GFT setting is available (for example, pre-occupation safety), enter 1.0000 as the Range K. If a GFT setting is available, (for example, post occupation safety), enter the Range K expressed to four decimal places (for example, 1.1234). Step 7a shows how to compute Range K.

7a. Divide Range ~ Adjusted Elevation by the Achieved Range from the GFT setting to determine Range K. Range ~ Adjusted Elevation Divided by Achieved Range = Range K

8. Determine the entry range. Multiply the total range by Range K to determine the entry range. If Range K is 1.0000, the entry range will be identical to the total range. Entry range is expressed to the nearest 10 meters.

9. Following the mini/max rule, determine the VI by subtracting the unit altitude from the altitude corresponding to the diagram range, and record it. VI is expressed to the nearest whole meter. NOTE: Diagram range is used to compute VI and site because this is the actual location of the minimum range line. VI is not computed for minimum time range lines. The range correction, total range, and Range K are used to compensate for nonstandard conditions and represent the aiming point that must be used to cause the round to cross the diagram range.

10. Compute and record site to the diagram range. Use the GST from the head of the projectile family when possible. Site is expressed to the nearest whole mil.

11. Determine the elevation from table C (base ejecting) or tabular firing table (TFT)/GFT (bursting), and record it. Elevation is expressed to the nearest whole mil. NOTE: GFT settings are not used to determine elevation. Range K represents total corrections; therefore, using a GFT setting would double the effects of those corrections.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-17

Table 2-3. Low angle Procedures (Continued)

Step Action 12. Compute the quadrant elevation and record it. Quadrant elevation is the sum of

elevation and site. Quadrant elevation is expressed to the nearest whole mil. 13. Determine and record the minimum fuze setting for M564/M565 fuzes. These fuze

settings correspond to the entry range and are extracted from table C (base ejecting) or TFT/GFT (bursting). Fuze settings are expressed to the nearest tenth of a fuze setting increment. NOTE: Minimum fuze settings are determined only for minimum range lines and may be computed for separate minimum fuze range lines.

14. Determine and record the minimum fuze setting for M582/M577 fuzes. These fuze settings correspond to the entry range and are extracted from table C (base ejecting) or TFT/GFT (bursting). Fuze settings are expressed to the nearest tenth of a second. NOTE: Minimum fuze settings are determined only for minimum range lines and may be computed for separate minimum fuze range lines.

15. Determine and record the time of flight corresponding to the entry range from table C (base ejecting) or TFT/GFT (bursting). Time of flight is expressed to the nearest tenth of a second.

16. Determine the minimum fuze setting for M728/M732 fuzes. Add 5.5 seconds to the time of flight, and express to the next higher whole second. The variable time (VT) fuze is designed to arm 3.0 seconds before the time set. They have been known to arm up to 5.5 seconds before the time set. That is why this value is added and always expressed up to the next whole second. VT fuze settings are expressed up to the next higher whole second. NOTE: Minimum fuze settings are determined only for minimum range lines and may be computed for separate minimum fuze range lines.

17. Determine and record drift corresponding to the entry range from table C (base ejecting) or TFT/GFT (bursting). Drift is applied to the basic safety diagram by following the “left least, right most” rule. The lowest (least) drift is applied to all left deflection limits, and the highest (greatest) drift is applied to all right deflection limits. Drift is expressed to the nearest whole mil.

18. Ensure that computations are verified by a second safety certified person. 19. On the bottom third of the sheet of paper, record the data on the Safety T.

Chapter 2

2-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-8. Lowangle safety matrix.

Figure 2-9. Example low angle safety matrix (shell HE/WP/SMK)

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-19

SAFETY T 2-45. The Safety T is a convenient method of arranging safety data and is used to verify the safety of fire commands (see Figure 2-10). The information needed by the FDO, XO, or platoon leader and section chief is organized in an easy to read format. The Safety T is labeled with a minimum of firing point location, charge, projectiles(s), fuze(s), angle of fire, and AOL. Other optional entries are subject to unit SOP. Any time new safety data are determined, new Safety Ts are constructed and issued after the old Safety Ts have been collected (for example, after a move or after a registration or MET + VE [velocity error]). Use only one charge per Safety T.

2-46. The FDO ensures that all data transmitted from the FDC is within the limits of the Safety T. The section chief ensures that all data applied to the ammunition or howitzer is within the limits of the Safety T. The FDO must ensure that deflection to fire is between the deflections listed on the Safety T then determine if the quadrant elevation corresponding to that deflection is between the minimum and maximum QE on the Safety T. Finally, the FDO must ensure that the fuze setting is equal to (or greater) than the minimum fuze setting listed on the Safety T for the specific fuze type.

Note. Figure 2-10 (DA Form 7353-R, Universal Safety - T) represents a locally reproducible form. Reproduce this form on 8½ x 11 inch paper. FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19 prescribes this form. DA Form 7353-R is also available on the Army Publishing Directorate Web Site at http://www.APD.army.mil.

Figure 2-10. Example of a completed Safety T

Chapter 2

2-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-4. Tables and Addenda Required for Safety Computations

Weapon System Projectile Type Projectile Family

Firing Table for Base Projectile

Firing Table Addendum

M101A1 M314 HE 105-H-7 N/A M444 HE 105-H-7 ADD-B-2

M119 M314 HE 105-AS-3 N/A M444 HE 105-AS-3 ADD-F-1

M777 or M109A6

M107 HE 155-AM-2/3 N/A M485 HE 155-AM-2/3 N/A M449 HE 155-AM-2/3 ADD-I-2 M483A1 HE 155-AM-2/3 ADD-R-1 M483A1 DPICM 155-AN-2/3 ADD-J-2 M795 HE 155-AM-2/3 N/A M825 HE 155-AM-2/3 ADD-T-0 w/ch 1 M825 DPICM 155-AN-2/3 ADD-Q-0 w/ch 1, 2 M825A1 HE 155-AN-2/3 ADD-T-0 w/ch 1 M825A1 DPICM 155-AN-2/3 ADD-Q-0 w/ch 1, 2 M692 DPICM 155-AN-2/3 ADD-L-1 w/ch 1, 2 M731 DPICM 155-AN-2/3 ADD-N-1 w/ch 1 M718 DPICM 155-AN-2/3 ADD-W-0 M741 HE 155-AN-1 ADD-N-1 M898 HE 155-AN-2 ADD-W-1 (Preferred)

ADD-W-0

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-21

UPDATING SAFETY DATA AFTER DETERMINING A GFT SETTING 2-47. After a GFT setting is determined (the result of registration or MET + VE technique), the FDO must compute new safety data. The GFT setting represents all nonstandard conditions in effect at the time it was determined. The effect on safety is that, if the data determined before the GFT setting was found to no longer represent the safety box, it could result in an unsafe condition if not applied to safety computations. In order to update safety, new elevations are determined, which correspond to the minimum and maximum ranges. Deflections are modified by applying the GFT deflection correction to each lateral limit. Minimum fuze settings are also recomputed. The basic safety diagram drawn in red on the firing chart does not change. It was drawn on the basis of azimuths and ranges, and it represents the actual limits.

2-48. There are two techniques for updating safety computations: using the Range K method and applying a GFT setting to a GFT. Both methods use the same safety matrices and apply to both low and high angle fire. The preferred technique for updating safety computations is to apply a GFT setting to the appropriate GFT. Unfortunately, not all munitions have associated GFTs. Application of total corrections is the same as for normal mission processing. The total corrections, in the form of a GFT setting or Range K, must be applied in accordance with the data on which they were determined (for example, the GFT setting for an HE registration applies to all projectiles in the HE family, while a MET + VE for dual purpose improved conventional munitions [DPICM] would apply to all projectiles in the DPICM family). If automation is available, a false registration with M795 graze burst data may be used to determine total corrections for all projectiles in the DPICM family. The principal difference between the two techniques is the manner in which minimum fuze setting is determined.

Determining Minimum Fuze Setting Using a GFT with a GFT Setting Applied 2-49. When a GFT setting is applied and a fuze setting is to be determined, it is extracted opposite the time gauge line (if it is the fuze listed on the GFT setting) or as a function of elevation (for all others). Use the procedures in Table 2-5 to update safety using a GFT with a GFT setting applied.

DETERMINING FUZE SETTING USING THE RANGE K TECHNIQUE 2-50. To simplify updating safety, the Range K technique determines all fuze settings as a function of elevation. The difference between registered fuze settings and fuze settings determined using the Range K technique in actual firings and computer simulations varies by only zero to two tenths (0.0–0.2) of a fuze setting increment/second. The safety requirements in DA Pam 385-63/MCO 3570.1B and incorporation of minimum fuze setting range lines adequately compensate for the difference in computational techniques. Figure 2-7 demonstrates how to update safety when no GFT is available, using the Range K technique. Use the procedures in Table 2-3 (low angle) or Table 2-9 (high angle) to update safety using the Range K technique.

Table 2-5. Low Angle Procedures Using a GFT with GFT Setting Applied

Step Action 1. On the top third of a blank sheet of paper, construct the basic safety diagram per the

range safety card. (See Table 2-2 for procedures.) 2. In the middle third of the sheet of paper, construct the low angle safety matrix (see

Figure 2-8). 3. Record the diagram ranges from the basic safety diagram. 4. Record the charge from the range safety card.

Chapter 2

2-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-5. Low angle Procedures Using a GFT with GFT Setting Applied (Continued)

Step Action 5. Enter the range correction, if required. This range correction is only necessary if a

nonstandard condition exists which requires a change in aiming point and is not already accounted for in a GFT setting, such as correcting for the always heavier than standard white phosphorous projectile. See Figure 2-8, paragraph (b) to determine range correction. If a range correction is required, it is artillery expressed to the nearest 10 meters. If no range correction is required, enter 0 (zero).

6. Determine the total range. Total range is the sum of the diagram range and the range correction. Total range is expressed to the nearest 10 meters.

7. Range K. This is not used when determining data with a GFT with a GFT setting applied, as the elevation gauge line represents Range K.

8. Entry Range. This value is the same as the total range. Entry range is artillery expressed to the nearest 10 meters.

9. Following the mini/max rule, determine the Vertical Interval (VI) by subtracting the unit altitude from the altitude corresponding to the diagram range, and record it. VI is expressed to the nearest whole meter. NOTE: Diagram range is used to compute VI and site because this is the actual location of the minimum range line. VI is not determined for minimum fuze range lines. The range correction, total range, and Range K are used to compensate for nonstandard conditions, and represent the aiming point which must be used to cause the round to cross the diagram range.

10. Compute and record site to the diagram range. Use the Graphical Site Table (GST) from the head of the projectile family whenever possible. Site is expressed to the nearest whole mil.

11. Place the Manufacturer's Hairline (MHL) on the entry range, determine the elevation from the elevation gauge line on the GFT, and record it. Elevation is expressed to the nearest whole mil.

12. Compute the quadrant elevation and record it. Quadrant elevation is the sum of elevation and site. Quadrant elevation is expressed to the nearest whole mil.

13. Using the procedures from appendix G, FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19, determine and record the minimum fuze setting for M564/M565 fuzes. These fuze settings correspond to the entry range. If the GFT setting was determined using the M564/M565 fuze, then determine the fuze setting opposite the time gauge line. If the GFT setting was not determined using the M564/M565 fuze, then extract the fuze setting corresponding to adjusted elevation. Fuze settings are expressed to the nearest tenth of a fuze setting increment. NOTE: Minimum fuze settings are only determined for minimum range lines and may be computed for separate minimum fuze range lines.

14. Using the procedures from appendix G, FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19, determine and record the minimum fuze setting for M582/M577 fuzes. These fuze settings correspond to the entry range. If the GFT setting was determined using the M582/M577 fuze, then determine the fuze setting opposite the time gauge line. If the GFT setting was not determined using the M582/M577 fuze, extract the fuze setting corresponding to adjusted elevation. Fuze settings are expressed to the nearest tenth of a second. NOTE: Minimum fuze settings are only determined for minimum range lines and may be computed for separate minimum fuze range lines.

15. Using the procedures from appendix G, FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19, determine and record the time of flight corresponding to the entry range. Extract the time of flight corresponding to adjusted elevation from the TOF scale. Time of flight is expressed to the nearest tenth of a second.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-23

Table 2-5. Low angle Procedures Using a GFT with GFT Setting Applied (Continued)

Step Action 16. Using the procedures in appendix G, FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19, determine the

minimum fuze setting for M728/M732 fuzes. Add 5.5 seconds to the time of flight. VT fuze settings are expressed up to the next higher whole second. NOTE: Minimum fuze settings are only determined for minimum range lines and may be computed for separate minimum fuze range lines.

17. Determine and record drift corresponding to adjusted elevation. Drift is applied to the basic safety diagram by following the “left least, right most” rule. The smallest (least) drift is applied to all left deflection limits, and the greatest (most) drift is applied to all right deflection limits. Drift is expressed to the nearest whole mil.

18. Ensure that computations are verified by a second safety certified person. 19. On the bottom third of the sheet of paper, record the data on the Safety T.

2-51. Figures 2-9 through 2-16 and Table 2-6 provide examples of low angle safety.

Table 2-6. Examples of Low Angle Safety

Figure No. Title Description 2-9 Example of low angle safety matrix,

shell HE/WP/SMK Completed low angle safety matrix for shell HE/WP/SMK

2-10 Example of a completed Safety T Safety T for low angle for shell HE/WP/SMK

2-11 Example of post occupation low angle safety with Range K applied (shell HE/WP/SMK)

Completed post occupation safety matrix and Safety T for shell HE/WP/SMK

2-12 Example of a low angle safety matrix (shell M825)

Completed low angle safety matrix and Safety T for shell M825 (improved smoke and DPICM family)

2-13 Example of ballistic data (M825) Extracts from Firing Table (FT) ADD-T-0 to be used for safety computation examples only

2-14 Example of post occupation low angle safety with Range K applied (shell M825)

Completed post occupation safety matrix and Safety T for shell M825

2-15 Example of a low angle safety matrix (shell illumination)

Completed low angle safety matrix for shell illumination

2-16 Example ballistic data (M485 illumination)

Extracts from FT 1-55-AM-2/3 to be used for safety computation examples only

Chapter 2

2-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-11. Example of post occupation low angle safety with Range K applied (shell

HE/WP/SMK)

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-25

Figure 2-12. Example of a low angle safety matrix (shell M825)

Chapter 2

2-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Ballistic Data for Safety Computations FT ADD-T-0 Projectile Improved Smoke M825

Projectile Family = DPICM

Explanation: The following listings contain ballistic data to support the example safety computations in this circular. They are not to be used to compute firing data as they do not account for submunition/payload delivery. Columnar Data:

Column: 1. Range – The distance measured on the surface of a sphere concentric with the earth

from the muzzle to a target at the level point. 2. Elevation – The angle of the gun in the vertical plane required to reach the range

tabulated in column 1. The maximum elevation shown represents the highest angle at which predictable projectile flight is possible under standard conditions of MET and material.

3. Fuze setting M577 – Fuze setting for a graze burst—numbers to be set on the fuze MTSQ M577 or ET M762 that will produce a graze burst at the level point when firing under standard conditions. This setting will produce a graze burst at the time of flight listed in column 4.

4. Time of Flight – The projectile travel time under standard conditions from the muzzle to the level point at the range in column 1. Time of flight is used as fuze setting for fuze MTSQ M577 and fuze ET M762.

5. Azimuth correction to compensate for drift – Because of the right hand twist of the tube, the drift of the projectile is to the right of the vertical plane of fire. This drift must be compensated for by a correction to the left.

Figure 2-13. Example of ballistic data (M825) (NOTE: Refer to 155-AM-3 for MACS procedures.)

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-27

Table 2-7. Ballistic Data for Safety Computations

Ballistic Data for Safety Computations FT ADD-T-0 Projectile Improved Smoke M825 Projectile Family = DPICM

Charge 4G Range (M) Elevation (Mil) Fuze Setting (M577) Time of Flight (Sec) Drift (Mil)

0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3800 246.4 14.2 14.2 3.9 3900 254.3 14.6 14.6 4.0 4000 262.3 15.1 15.1 4.2 4100 270.4 15.5 15.5 4.3 4200 278.6 16.0 16.0 4.4 4300 287.0 16.4 16.4 4.6 4400 295.5 16.9 16.9 4.8 4500 304.1 17.3 17.3 4.9 4600 312.9 17.8 17.8 5.1 4700 321.8 18.3 18.3 5.2 4800 330.9 18.8 18.8 5.4 4900 340.2 19.3 19.3 5.6 5000 349.7 19.8 19.8 5.8 5100 359.4 20.3 20.3 6.0 5200 369.3 20.8 20.8 6.2 5300 379.5 21.3 21.3 6.4 5400 389.9 21.9 21.9 6.6 5500 400.5 22.4 22.4 6.8 5600 411.5 23.0 23.0 7.0 5700 422.8 23.5 23.5 7.3 5800 434.5 24.1 24.1 7.5 5900 446.5 24.7 24.7 7.8 6000 459.0 25.4 25.4 8.1 6100 472.0 26.0 26.0 8.4 6200 485.5 26.7 26.7 8.7 6300 499.7 27.3 27.3 9.0 6400 514.6 28.1 28.1 9.4 6500 530.4 28.8 28.8 9.8 6600 547.3 29.6 29.6 10.2 6700 565.4 30.5 30.5 10.7 6800 585.2 31.4 31.4 11.2 6900 607.3 32.4 32.4 11.8 7000 632.5 33.5 33.5 12.5 7100 663.2 34.9 34.9 13.5 7200 705.5 36.7 36.7 14.9

Chapter 2

2-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Ballistic Data for Safety Computations FT ADD-T-0 Projectile Improved Smoke M825

Projectile Family = DPICM Charge 4G

Range (M) Elevation (Mil) Fuze Setting (M577) Time of Flight (Sec) Drift (Mil) 7200 852.1 42.4 42.4 21.0 7100 894.3 44.0 44.0 23.2 7000 924.8 45.0 45.0 25.0 6900 950.0 45.9 45.9 26.6 6800 971.9 46.6 46.6 28.2 6700 991.6 47.2 47.2 29.7 6600 1009.7 47.8 47.8 31.2 6500 1026.4 48.3 48.3 32.6 6400 1042.1 48.7 48.7 34.1 6300 1056.9 49.2 49.2 35.6 6200 1071.0 49.6 49.6 37.2 6100 1084.4 49.9 49.9 38.7 6000 1097.3 50.3 50.3 40.3 5900 1109.7 50.6 50.6 42.0 5800 1121.6 50.9 50.9 43.7 5700 1133.2 51.2 51.2 45.6 5600 1144.3 51.5 51.5 47.5 5500 1155.2 51.8 51.8 49.5 5400 1165.7 52.1 52.1 51.7 5300 1175.9 52.3 52.3 54.0 5200 1185.9 52.5 52.5 56.6 5100 1195.6 52.8 52.8 59.3 5000 1205.1 53.0 53.0 62.3 4900 1214.3 53.2 53.2 65.6 4800 1223.3 53.4 53.4 69.3 4700 1232.1 53.6 53.6 73.4 4600 1240.7 53.8 53.8 78.1 4500 1249.1 54.0 54.0 83.4 4400 1257.2 54.2 54.2 89.4 4300 1265.2 54.4 54.4 96.4 4200 1272.9 54.6 54.6 104.5 4100 1280.4 54.8 54.8 113.9 4000 1287.7 55.0 55.0 124.9 3900 1294.7 55.2 55.2 138.0 3800 1301.5 55.4 55.4 153.3 3700 1308.0 55.6 55.6 171.2 3669 1310.0

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-29

Figure 2-14. Example of post occupation low angle safety with Range K applied (shell M825)

Chapter 2

2-30 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-15. Example of a low angle safety matrix (shell illumination)

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-31

Ballistic Data for Safety Computations FT 155-AM-2 Projectile Illumination M485/M485A1/M485A2

Projectile Family = HE

Explanation:

The following listings contain ballistic data to support the example safety computations in this circular. They are not to be used to compute firing data as they do not account for submunition/payload delivery. Columnar Data:

Column:

1. Range – The distance measured on the surface of a sphere concentric with the earth from the muzzle to a target at the level point.

2. Elevation – The angle of the gun in the vertical plane required to reach the range tabulated in column 1. The maximum elevation shown represents the highest angle at which predictable projectile flight is possible under standard conditions of MET and material.

3. Fuze setting M565 – Fuze setting for a graze burst numbers to be set on the fuze MT M565 that will produce a graze burst at the level point when firing under standard conditions. This setting will produce a graze burst at the time of flight listed in column 4.

4. Time of flight – The projectile travel time under standard conditions from the muzzle to the level point at the range in column 1. Time of flight is used as fuze setting for fuze MTSQ M577 and fuze ET M762.

Figure 2-16. Example of safety table data, M485 illumination (NOTE: Refer to 155-AM-3 for MACS procedures.)

Chapter 2

2-32 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-8. Ballistic Data for Safety Computations

Ballistic Data for Safety Computations FT 155-AM-2 Projectile Illumination M485/M485A1/M485A2

Projectile Family = HE

Charge 3G Range (m) Elevation (mil) Fuze Setting (M565) Time of Flight (sec) Drift (mil)

0 0.0 0.0 0.0 100 6.4 0.4 0.1

3800 280.9 15.1 15.2 6.5 3900 290.0 15.5 15.7 6.7 4000 299.4 16.0 16.2 7.0 4100 308.8 16.5 16.6 7.2 4200 318.5 17.0 17.1 7.5 4300 328.3 17.5 17.6 7.7 4400 338.4 18.0 18.1 8.0 4500 348.6 18.5 18.7 8.3 4600 359.1 19.0 19.2 8.6 4700 369.8 19.5 19.7 8.9 4800 380.8 20.1 20.3 9.2 4900 392.0 20.6 20.8 9.5 5000 403.6 21.2 21.4 9.8 5100 415.5 21.8 21.9 10.1 5200 427.8 22.3 22.5 10.5 5300 440.5 23.0 23.2 10.9 5400 453.7 23.6 23.8 11.3 5500 467.4 24.2 24.4 11.7 5600 481.7 24.9 25.1 12.1 5700 496.7 25.6 25.8 12.6 5800 512.4 26.3 26.5 13.1 5900 529.1 27.1 27.3 13.6 6000 547.0 27.9 28.1 14.2 6100 566.2 28.7 28.9 14.9 6200 587.3 29.6 29.9 15.6 6300 610.9 30.6 30.9 16.5 6400 638.3 31.8 32.1 17.5 6500 672.1 33.2 33.5 18.8 6600 722.3 35.2 35.5 21.0

************ ************ ************ ************ ************

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-33

Ballistic Data for Safety Computations FT 155-AM-2 Projectile Illumination M485/M485A1/M485A2

Projectile Family = HE

Charge 3G Range (m) Elevation (mil) Fuze Setting (M565) Time of Flight (sec) Drift (mil)

6600 842.7 39.7 40.0 27.1 6500 892.6 41.4 41.7 30.2 6400 926.2 42.5 42.8 32.5 6300 953.2 43.4 43.7 34.5 6200 976.6 44.1 44.4 36.5 6100 997.4 44.7 45.0 38.3 6000 1016.4 45.2 45.6 40.1 5900 1033.9 45.7 46.1 42.0 5800 1050.3 46.2 46.5 43.8 5700 1065.8 46.6 47.0 45.6 5600 1080.4 47.0 47.3 47.5 5500 1094.4 47.4 47.7 49.5 5400 1107.7 47.7 48.0 51.5 5300 1120.6 48.0 48.4 53.6 5200 1132.9 48.3 48.7 55.8 5100 1144.8 48.6 48.9 58.2 5000 1156.2 48.9 49.2 60.7 4900 1167.3 49.1 49.5 63.4 4800 1178.1 49.3 49.7 66.3 4700 1188.5 49.6 49.9 69.4 4600 1198.6 49.8 50.2 72.9 4500 1208.4 50.0 50.4 76.7 4400 1217.9 50.2 50.6 81.0 4300 1227.1 50.4 50.8 85.8 4200 1236.0 50.6 51.0 91.3 4100 1244.7 50.8 51.2 97.5 4000 1253.0 51.0 51.3 104.8 3900 1261.1 51.2 51.5 113.1 3800 1268.8 51.3 51.7 123.0

Chapter 2

2-34 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

DETERMINATION OF MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE ILLUMINATION AREA 2-52. All illumination safety data are for graze burst; therefore, when illumination fire mission data are computed, the QE determined includes the appropriate height of burst (HOB). This will prevent achieving a 600 meter HOB (750 meter HOB for 105 mm) at the minimum and maximum range lines. Before processing illumination fire mission, determine the maximum effective illumination area for the current range safety card. This area should be plotted on the firing chart to help determine if illumination can be fired and to let the forward observers know where they can fire illumination effectively. This area will always be significantly smaller than the HE safety area. See Table 2-7 for steps outlining the general procedure. This area can be increased by computing high angle data.

Note. The procedures used to determine the maximum effective illumination area can be used for all expelling charge munitions to show their maximum effective engagement area.

Table 2-9. Procedures to determine maximum effective illumination area

Step Action 1. Look at the Tabular Firing Table (TFT), part 2, column 7 Range to Impact (RTI) and

enter the nearest range listed without exceeding the maximum range. 2. Determine the corresponding range to target in column 1. This is the maximum range

the unit can achieve with a 600 meter (155mm) HOB and keep the projectile in the safety box if the fuze fails to function.

3. Determine the minimum range for which a 600 meter (155mm) HOB is achieved and have the fuze function no earlier than the minimum range line. Look at the TFT, part 2, column 3 and enter the nearest listed fuze setting (the column is labeled FS) that is not less than the determined minimum fuze setting. Column 3 is the fuze setting for the M565 fuze, so if M577 is to be used, the fuze setting must be corrected by using table B. Determine the corresponding range to target in column 1.

4. The area between these two lines is the maximum effective illumination area where a 600 meter HOB (155mm) is achieved; the fuze functions no earlier than the minimum range line, and the round does not exceed the maximum range line if the fuze fails to function. NOTE: High angle fire produces a much greater effective illumination area. The FDO must use column 6, range to fuze function, to determine the minimum effective illumination range line. The maximum effective illumination range line is determined by using fuze setting corresponding to column 7 (range to impact).

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS FOR M549/M549A1 RAP 2-53. Rocket Assisted Projectile (RAP) safety data are computed using the low angle safety matrix or high angle safety matrix as appropriate. The only difference is that a safety buffer must be incorporated for rocket failure or rocket cap burn through. For firing in the rocket off mode, a 6,000 meter buffer must be constructed beyond the maximum range line to preclude the projectile exceeding the maximum range line. For firing in the rocket on mode, a 6,000 meter buffer must be constructed short of the minimum range line to preclude the projectile falling short of the minimum range line.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-35

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS FOR M864 BASE BURN DPICM/M795A1 BASE BURN HE

2-54. Base burn safety data are computed using the low angle safety matrix or high angle safety matrix as appropriate. The only difference is that a safety buffer must be incorporated for base burn element failure. A 5,000 meter buffer must be constructed short of the minimum range line to preclude the projectile falling short of the minimum range line.

COMPUTATION OF HIGH ANGLE SAFETY DATA 2-55. The safety data for high angle fire is computed in the same manner as that for low angle fire except for the ballistic variations caused by the high trajectory. Site is computed differently (by using the 10 mil site factor and the angle of site/10) and mechanical or electronic fuze settings are not determined. Table 2-9 contains the steps required to compute high angle safety.

Note. It is the FDO’s responsibility to ensure that all high angle fuze settings will cause the fuze to function within the safety box.

2-56. Use the steps outlined in Table 2-9 and in the matrix in Figure 2-17 as examples for organizing computations. The high angle safety matrix is used for all munitions except M712 cannon launched guided projectile (CLGP) (Copperhead). The data are determined by either graphical or tabular firing tables. In the case of expelling charge munitions, the safety table located in the firing tables or firing table addenda is used to determine elevation, time of flight, fuze setting, and drift. Use artillery expression for all computations except where noted.

Note. The ballistic data that are used to compute the high angle examples are located after the low angle safety examples.

Chapter 2

2-36 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-10. High Angle Safety Procedures

Step Action 1. On the top third of a blank sheet of paper, construct the basic safety diagram per the range

safety card (see Table 2-2 for procedures). 2. In the middle third of the sheet of paper, construct the high angle safety matrix

(Figure 2-17). 3. Record the diagram ranges from the basic safety diagram. 4. Record the charge from the range safety card. 5. Enter the range correction, if required. This range correction is only necessary if a

nonstandard condition exists which requires a change in aiming point and is not already accounted for in a GFT setting, such as correcting for the always heavier than standard white phosphorous projectile. See Figure 2-17, paragraph (b) to determine range correction. If a range correction is required, it is expressed to the nearest 10 meters. If no range correction is required, enter 0 (zero).

6. Determine the total range. Total range is the sum of the diagram range and the range correction. Total range is expressed to the nearest 10 meters.

7. Enter the Range K. Range K is only required if a GFT setting has been obtained but cannot be applied to a GFT (such as determining Illumination safety with an HE GFT setting). Range K is simply the total range correction from the GFT setting expressed as a percentage. This percentage, when multiplied by the total range, produces the entry range. If no GFT setting is available (for example, pre-occupation safety), then enter 1.0000 as the Range K. If a GFT setting is available (for example, post occupation safety), then enter the Range K expressed to four decimal places (for example, 1.1234). Step 7a demonstrates how to compute Range K.

7a. Divide Range ~ Adjusted Elevation by the Achieved Range from the GFT setting to determine Range K. Range ~ Adjusted Elevation Divided by Achieved Range = Range K

8. Determine the entry range. Multiply the total range times Range K to determine the entry range. If Range K is 1.0000, then the entry range will be identical to the total range. Entry range is expressed to the nearest 10 meters.

9. Following the mini/max rule, determine the vertical interval by subtracting the unit altitude from the altitude corresponding to the diagram range, and record it. VI is expressed to the nearest whole meter. NOTE: Diagram range is used for computations of VI and site because this is the actual location of the minimum range line. The range correction, total range, and Range K are used to compensate for nonstandard conditions. These represent the aiming point which must be used to cause the round to cross the diagram range.

10. Determine and record the angle of site divided by 10 to the diagram range. This is performed by dividing the angle of site (use the appropriate GST, if possible) by 10. <SI/10 is expressed to the nearest tenth of a mil and has the same sign as the VI.

11. Determine and record the 10 mil site factor from the GFT or TFT that heads the projectile family. The 10 mil site factor is expressed to the nearest tenth of a mil and is always negative. NOTE: Remember to use the diagram range to compute the 10 mil site factor.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-37

Table 2-10. High angle Safety Procedures (Continued)

Step Action 12. Compute and record site. Site is the product of <SI/10 times the 10 mil site factor. Site is

expressed to the nearest whole mil. 13. Determine the elevation from table C (base ejecting) or TFT/GFT (bursting), and record it.

Elevation is expressed to the nearest whole mil. NOTE: GFT settings are not used to determine elevation, as Range K represents total corrections, and to use a GFT setting would double the effects of those corrections.

14. Compute the quadrant elevation and record it. Quadrant elevation is the sum of elevation and site. Quadrant elevation is expressed to the nearest whole mil.

15. Determine and record drift corresponding to the entry range from table C (base ejecting) or TFT/GFT (bursting). Drift is applied to the basic safety diagram by following the “left least, right most” rule. The lowest (least) drift is applied to all left deflection limits, and the highest (greatest) drift is applied to all right deflection limits. Drift is expressed to the nearest whole mil.

16. Ensure that computations are verified by a second safety certified person. 17. On the bottom third of the sheet of paper, record the data on the Safety T.

Note. Minimum fuze settings are not computed for high angle safety. It is the FDO’s responsibility to ensure that all fuze settings will cause the projectile to function in the impact area.

Chapter 2

2-38 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-17. High angle safety matrix.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-39

Table 2-11. Examples of High Angle Safety

Figure No. Title Description 2-18 Example of high angle safety (shell

HE) Completed high angle safety matrix and Safety T for shell HE

2-19 Example of high angle safety (shell M825)

Completed high angle safety matrix and Safety T for shell M825

2-20 Example of high angle safety (shell illumination)

Completed high angle safety matrix and Safety T for shell illumination

Figure 2-18. Example of a high angle safety matrix (shell HE)

Chapter 2

2-40 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-19. Example of a high angle safety matrix (shell M825)

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-41

Figure 2-20. Example of a high angle safety matrix (shell illumination)

Chapter 2

2-42 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-21. Low angle safety computations

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-43

Figure 2-22. High angle safety computations

Chapter 2

2-44 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SECTION IV – DETERMINING MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION

The XO or platoon leader is responsible for determining the lowest QE that can be safely fired from his position that will ensure projectiles clear all visible crests (minimum QE).

MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION

ELEMENTS OF COMPUTATION 2-57. A minimum quadrant for each howitzer is ALWAYS determined. The maximum of these minimum quadrants is the XO’s minimum quadrant. Using the RFT in Appendix B is the fastest method of computing minimum QE. The QE determined from Appendix B is always equal to or greater than (more safe) manual computations. Manual computations are more accurate than the rapid fire tables and are used if the sum of the site to crest and the angle needed for a 5 meter vertical clearance is greater than 300 mils. Figure 2-23 shows the following elements of minimum QE.

• Piece to crest range (PCR) is the horizontal distance between the piece and the crest expressed to the nearest 100 meters. Measurement methods are described in paragraph 2-59.

Note. All angles are determined and expressed to the next higher mil. FT RFT-155-1 RAPID FIRE TABLES FOR CALCULATION OF THE EXECUTIVE OFFICER’S (XO’S) MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION WITH CANNON, 155MM HOWITZER, M284 ON HOWITZER, MEDIUM, SELF-PROPELLED, 155MM, M109A5/A6 AND CANNON, 155MM HOWITZER, M199 ON HOWITZER, MEDIUM, TOWED, 155MM, M198 AND CANNON, 155MM HOWITZER, M776 ON HOWITZER, MEDIUM, TOWED, 155MM, M777A1/A2 FIRING WITH PROPELLING CHARGES, M231, M232, AND M232A1 are available on line. Firing Table (FT) RFT-155-1 for the MACS charge is currently located on the Firing Tables and Ballistics (FTaB) site on AKO (https://www.us.army.mil/suite/page/131620) as an Electronic Tabular Firing Table (ETFT).

• Angle 1 is the angle of site to crest measure by the weapons. Procedures are discussed in pararaph 2-58.

• Angle 2 is the vertical angle required to clear the top of the crest. For quick, time, and unarmed proximity (VT) fuzes, a vertical clearance of 5 meters is used. For armed VT fuzes, see paragraph 2-65.

• Angle 3 is the complementary angle of site. It is the complementary site factor (TFT, table G) for the appropriate charge at the PCR multiplied by the sum of angles 1 and 2. Site is the sum of angles 1, 2, and 3.

Note. The entry argument for table G is PCR. If it is not listed, do not interpolate; use the next higher listed value.

• Angle 4 is the elevation (TFT, table F) for the appropriate charge corresponding to the PCR. • Angle 5 is a safety factor equivalent to the value of two forks (TFT, table F) for the appropriate

charge at the PCR. • The sum of angles 1 through 5 is the minimum QE for the weapon and the charge computed.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-45

Figure 2-23. Angles of minimum QE

MEASURING ANGLE OF SITE TO CREST 2-58. As soon as the piece is “safed,” prefire checks have been conducted, and ammunition has been prepared, position improvement begins with verification of site to crest as measured by the advance party. The advance party measures site to crest with an M2 compass or aiming circle/Gun Laying Positioning System (GLPS). The section chief measures the angle of site to crest and reports this information to the XO or platoon leader. To measure the angle of site to crest, the section chief sights along the bottom edge of the bore, has the tube traversed across the probable field of fire, and has the tube elevated until the line of sight clears the crest at the highest point. He then centers all bubbles on the elevation mount and reads the angle of site to the crest from the elevation counter. This angle of site and the PCR are reported as part of the section chief’s report.

MEASURING PIECE TO CREST RANGE 2-59. There are five methods that can be used to measure PCR:

• Taping. This is the most accurate method; however, it is normally too time consuming. • Subtense. This method is fast and accurate. • Map measurement. This method is fast and accurate if the obstacle can be accurately located

(for example, a lone tree will not appear on a map). • Pacing. This method is time consuming and depends on the distance and accessibility to the

crest. • Estimation. This method is the least accurate, but it is used when other methods are not

feasible.

2-60. Regardless of the method used to measure PCR, the XO or platoon leader must verify PCR before he computes QE. He can do this by using any of the five methods.

COMPUTATION FOR FUZES OTHER THAN ARMED VT 2-61. The XO or platoon leader performs the computations indicated in this section if the sum of angles 1 and 2 (Figure 2-23) exceeds 300 mils or if the RFTs are not available. All angles are determined and expressed to the next higher mil. Table 2-11 lists the steps and provides an example of an XO’s or platoon leader’s manual computations.

Chapter 2

2-46 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-12. Manual Minimum QE Computations

Step Action 1. Howitzer 1 (M198) reports a site to crest of 16 mils at a PCR of 1,100 meters. 2. ∠1 = site to crest = 16 mils 3. ∠2 = (VI x 1.0186) ÷ PCR (in thousands)

= (5 x 1.0186) ÷ 1.1 = 4.6 ≈ 5 mils

This VI is a 5 meter vertical clearance safety factor. It can also be computed by using the GST. Solve in the same way as angle of site (4.6 ≈ 5).

4. ∠3 = (∠1 + ∠2) x CSF = (16 + 5) x 0.010 = 0.210 ≈ 1 mil

5. ∠4 = EL = 74.1 ≈ 75 mils 6. ∠5 = 2 Forks (TFT, table F, column 6)

= 2 x 2 = 4 mils 7. Minimum QE = ∠1 + ∠2 + ∠3 + ∠4 + ∠5

= 16 + 5 + 1 + 75 + 4 = 101 mils

2-62. The same example is solved in Table 2-12 by using the RFTs in Appendix B.

Table 2-13. RFT Minimum QE Computations

Step Action 1. Determine if the RFT can be used (∠1 + ∠2 ≤ 300 mils). Use Appendix B, page B-1. Since

the sum of angles 1 and 2 is less than or equal to 300 (16 + 5 = 21), the RFT can be used. 2. Determine RFT value. Enter the appropriate RFT. The entry arguments are howitzer

(M198), propellant (M3A1, GB), fuze (PD), PCR (1,100), and charge (3). The correct table is in Appendix B, page B-7. The RFT value is 86. This value equals the sum of angles 2, 3, 4, and 5 (∠2 + ∠3 + ∠4 + ∠5). NOTE: Use the RFT labeled “M557, M564” for all minimum QE computations except armed VT. For armed VT, use the RFT labeled “M728.”

3. Determine the RFT minimum QE. This value equals the sum of angle 1 and the RFT value (16 + 86 = 102).

2-63. One howitzer section may report a site to crest that is unusually high. If the XO or platoon leader determines that it is the result of a single narrow obstruction (such as a tree), the piece can be called out of action when firing a deflection that would engage the obstruction. This would enable the platoon to use the next lower site to crest. Other alternatives are to remove the obstruction or move the weapon.

2-64. Table 2-13 shows why minimum QE is computed for all guns, regardless of which has the largest site to crest.

Table 2-14. RFT Example for Howitzer Platoon

Gun Chg PCR Site to Crest + RFT = Minimum QE 1 3GB 800 128 64 192 2 3GB 1,000 105 80 185 3 3GB 1,500 92 116 208 4 3GB 1,200 115 93 208

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-47

COMPUTATIONS FOR ARMED VT FUZE (LOW ANGLE FIRE) 2-65. The method of computing the XO’s minimum QE for firing a projectile fuzed with an M728 or M732 fuze depends on the method in which the fuze is used. The proximity (VT) fuze is designed to arm 3 seconds before the time set on the fuze; however, some VT fuzes have armed as early as 5.5 seconds before the time set on the fuze. Because of the probability of premature arming, a safety factor of 5.5 seconds is added to the time of flight to the PCR. Since time on the setting ring is set to the whole second, the time determined in computing minimum safe time is expressed up to the nearest whole second. A VT fuze will not arm earlier than 2 seconds into time of flight, which makes it a bore safe fuze.

2-66. In noncombat situations, the XO or platoon leader determines the minimum safe time by adding 5.5 seconds to the time of flight to the minimum range line as shown on the range safety card. The minimum QE determined for fuzes quick and time is also valid for fuze VT.

2-67. In combat situations, the XO or platoon leader determines the minimum QE and a minimum safe time for fuze VT. The minimum QE determined for Point Detonating (PD) fuzes is safe for VT fuzes if the fuze setting to be fired is equal to or greater than the minimum safe time determined in paragraph 2-720. If the XO or platoon leader finds it necessary to fire a VT fuze with a time less than the minimum safe time, he must modify the minimum QE. He does this by increasing the vertical clearance to ensure that the fuze will not function as it passes over the crest. In addition, he must ensure the fuze will not function over any intervening crests along the gun target line (see paragraph 2-76).

2-68. If the projectile is to be fired with the VT fuze set at a time less than the minimum safe time, allowance must be made for vertical clearance of the crest. Vertical crest clearances for armed M728 and M732 VT fuzes fired over ordinary terrain for all howitzer systems is 70 meters.

2-69. If the projectile is to be fired over marshy or wet terrain, the average HOB will increase. The vertical clearance is increased to 105 meters. If the projectile is fired over water, snow, or ice, the vertical clearance is 140 meters.

2-70. The minimum QE for armed fuze VT, when a fuze setting less than the minimum safe time is fired, is based on the PCR and a vertical clearance as indicated in paragraphs 2-75 and 2-73.

2-71. Figure 2-24 shows a decision tree for applying armed VT minimum QE.

Figure 2-24. Armed VT decision tree

Chapter 2

2-48 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

2-72. Table 2-14 shows an example of computations to determine minimum QE for an armed VT fuze.

Table 2-15. Manual Armed VT Minimum QE Computations

Step Action 1. Howitzer 1 (M198) reports a site to crest of 16 mils at a PCR of 1,100 meters. 2. ∠1 = site to crest= 16 mils 3. ∠2 = (VI x 1.0186) ÷ PCR (in thousands)

= (70 x 1.0186) ÷ 1.1 = 64.8 ≈ 65 mils

This VI is a 70 meter vertical clearance safety factor. It can also be computed by using the GST. Solve in the same way as angle of site (64.7 ≈ 65)

4. ∠3 = (∠1 + ∠2) x CSF = (16 + 65) x 0.010 = 0.710 ≈ 1 mil

5. ∠4 = EL = 74.1 ≈ 75 mils 6. ∠5 = 2 Forks (TFT, table F, column 6)

= 2 x 2 = 4 mils 7. Minimum QE = ∠1 + ∠2 + ∠3 + ∠4 + ∠5

= 16 + 65 + 1 + 75 +4 = 161 mils

8. Determine minimum safe time. This value is the sum of TOF to PCR and 5.5 expressed up to the next higher second (4.1 + 5.5 = 9.6 ≈ 10.0 sec).

2-73. The same example is solved in Table 2-15 by using the RFT in Appendix B.

Table 2-16. RFT Minimum QE Computations

Step Action 1. Determine if the RFT can be used (∠1 + ∠2 ≤ 300 mils). This is done manually since

page B-1 (Appendix B) uses a vertical clearance of 5 meters. See Step 3 in Table 2-14 for ∠2. Since the sum of angles 1 and 2 is less than or equal to 300 (16 + 65 = 81), the RFT can be used.

2. Determine RFT value. Enter the appropriate RFT. The entry arguments are howitzer (M198), propellant (M3A1, GB), fuze (M728 or M732), PCR (1,100), and charge (3). The correct table is in Appendix B, page B-13. The RFT value is 147. This value equals the sum of angles 2, 3, 4, and 5 (∠2 + ∠3 + ∠4 + ∠5). NOTE: Use the RFT labeled “M557, M564” for all minimum QE computations except armed VT. For armed VT, use the RFT labeled “M728.”

3. Determine the RFT minimum QE. This value equals the sum of angle 1 and the RFT value (16 + 147 = 163).

4. Determine minimum safe time. Use the same entry arguments as in Step 2. The minimum safe time is 10.0.

2-74. If the VT fuze setting to be fired is equal to or greater than the minimum safe VT time, the minimum QE for fuzes quick and time applies. If the fuze setting to be fired is less than the minimum safe time, the minimum QE determined for armed VT applies.

USING MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION 2-75. After computing minimum QE for each charge authorized, the XO or platoon leader must compare the minimum QE to the QE required to clear the minimum range line. The XO must then select the highest quadrant for each charge to be used as the minimum QE to be fired from that position.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-49

INTERVENING CREST 2-76. FDOs must ensure that artillery fires clear intervening crests. Intervening crests are defined as any obstruction between the firing unit and the target not visible from the firing unit. The following are the possible options, listed in order of preference:

• Option 1: Determine firing data to the crest (include all nonstandard conditions) and add two forks (Table 2-16).

• Option 2: Determine a minimum QE in a similar manner as XO’s minimum QE (Table 2-17). • Option 3: Use the trajectory tables in the appendix of the TFT.

2-77. Option 1 is preferred because it incorporates all current nonstandard conditions that will affect the projectile along the trajectory. Based on the availability of corrections for nonstandard conditions, the FDO has the responsibility to determine if this really is the best option. Table 2-16 lists the steps.

Chapter 2

2-50 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-17. Intervening Crest, Option 1

Step Action 1. Upon occupation, the FDO analyzes the terrain for intervening crests. 2. Upon determining the altitude of this crest, he computes QE firing data to this point. The

best solution includes all available corrections for nonstandard conditions (current and valid GFT setting).

3. Add the value of two forks (TFT, table F, column 6) to the QE determined in Step 2 to ensure that round to round variations (probable errors) will clear this crest.

4. The FDO then records this QE and charge on his situation map as a check to ensure that rounds will clear the intervening crest.

5. Upon receipt of a fire mission, the FDO will compare his intervening crest QE to his fire mission quadrant. One of three situations will occur: 1. The target is located short of the intervening crest. The FDO does not consider the effects of the crest at this time. 2. The mission QE exceeds intervening crest QE by a significant margin—indicating the round will clear the crest. 3. Fire mission QE exceeds intervening crest QE by only a small margin or is less than intervening crest QE, indicating the round may or may not clear the crest. The FDO must determine if the round will clear after considering the following:

• Have all nonstandard conditions been accounted for? • How old is the current MET message? • Are registration corrections being applied to this mission?

Upon realizing that the round may not or will not clear the crest, the FDO can fire either high angle or a reduced charge. The quickest choice would be to fire high angle, but tactical situations may prevent this. Firing a lower charge will increase dispersion more than high angle. For example, at a range of 6,000 meters, the following applies:

• Low angle, charge 5: Probable error in range = 15 meters • High angle, charge 5: Probable error in range = 17 meters • Low angle, charge 4: Probable error in range = 23 meters • If a lower charge is selected, Steps 2 through 5 must be repeated.

6. If VT fuzes are to be fired (M700 series), the FDO must take additional action to ensure that the VT fuze does not arm before passing over the crest. Follow the steps in paragraph 2-65 for determining armed VT minimum QE and FS.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-51

2-78. Option 2 does not include current corrections for all nonstandard conditions. Table 2-17 lists the steps.

Table 2-18. Intervening Crest, Option 2

Step Action 1. Upon occupation, the FDO analyzes the terrain for intervening crests. 2. The FDO determines and announces the grid and map spot altitude to the crest.

3. The horizontal control operator (HCO) plots the grid and determines and announces range to the crest. 4. The vertical control operator (VCO) computes angle of site to the crest. This is the same

as determining site to crest for a howitzer. 5. Determine if the RFT can be used (∠1 + ∠2 ≤ 300 mils). Angle 1 equals angle of site

to the crest. Refer to ST 6-50-20 (Battery Executive Officer’s/Platoon Leader’s Handbook), page A-1. Since ∠1 and ∠2 decrease with range, this should not be a problem.

6. Determine RFT value. Enter the appropriate RFT. The entry arguments are howitzer (M198), propellant (M3A1, GB), fuze (M728 or M732), PCR (1,100), and charge (3). The correct table is on ST 6-50-20, page A-13. The RFT value is 147. This value equals the sum of angles 2, 3, 4, and 5 (∠2 + ∠3 + ∠4 + ∠5). NOTE: Use the RFT labeled “M557, M564” for all minimum QE computations except armed VT. For armed VT, use the RFT labeled “M728.”

7. Determine RFT intervening crest QE. This value is the sum of the angle of site to the crest and the RFT value.

8. If VT is fired, enter the appropriate table and extract the correct information. 9. Follow Steps 4 and 5 of Table 2-16.

2-79. Option 3 is the least preferred option and uses the trajectory charts in the appendix of the TFT. This offers a quicker but less accurate method to clear the intervening crest. The FDO must make a judgment call when to use these charts. The FDO must use caution when making this decision.

SECTION V – MLRS/HIMARS SAFETY PROCEDURES 2-80. MLRS/HIMARS safety data may be calculated using a launcher’s fire control system (FCS) (two check launchers) or the Safety Data Calculator (SDC). The latest version of the SDC may be used to compute safety data for OPAREA Method 1, point to point , and firing point methods of safety computation. Using the procedures in this chapter, check launchers determine the data required to manually develop the Safety T. The SDC can also determine the data required for the Safety T and produce the Safety T. SDC generated Safety T data will be verified by one the following methods:

• The input of SDC data by a safety certified individual and verified by a second safety certified individual. This process will be performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified SDC operator) and both sets of Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be identical.

• The input of SDC data by a safety certified individual and verified by a second safety certified individual and by a check launcher performing the required check missions and command data being within ±5 mils in AZ and QE and 0.5 seconds fuze time.

Note. The SDC does not compute a Safety T for OPAREA Method 2. The SDC can also execute a single solution to compute commanded firing data for a single mission. Single Solution should not be used in the development of a Safety T but can be recalled only in the form of a report from the SDC. Verify that the SDC is the most current version. The most current version can be found on the Fires Knowledge Network (FKN) 13P Page.

Chapter 2

2-52 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

2-81. The following section will explain in detail how the FDC develops the SDZ diagram, along with step by step procedures for the firing data that will be used to develop a Safety T.

2-82. SDC is a user friendly operator interface wrapped around an existing FORTRAN program that calculates MLRS/HIMARS ballistic firing data. SDC uses the same ballistic algorithm that is resident on the launcher FCS. SDC calculates and displays a Safety T for the M270A1 and M142 HIMARS launchers using the methods outlined in this chapter; for example, point to point , firing point, and OPAREA Method 1. SDC provides commanders with an alternate means of developing safety data for live fires. Using tactical equipment (check launchers) is optional when the SDC program is used. All other safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter still apply.

2-83. The MLRS/HIMARS launcher FCS performs many repetitive self-tests during operations. Built into both the launcher hardware and software, these tests check and continually monitor the launcher throughout its operation. Additional manual checks should focus on areas of potential crew error in the area (based on historical data and observations) that has caused most launcher related firing incidents. Checks that verify the accuracy and validity of all data input into the AFATDS, SDC, and launcher FCS eliminate most of the causes of firing incidents.

2-84. MLRS/HIMARS firing data (azimuth, quadrant elevation, and fuze setting) are computed by the FCS and SDC. To complete a firing sequence, the Launcher Module (LM) must be oriented and maintain accuracy within ±3 mils in quadrant elevation and ±3 mils azimuth of the FCS solution (command versus actual data displayed on the Fire Control Panel [FCP]). If for any reason the Launcher Drive System (LDS) fails (part wear, adverse mechanical failure, and so forth), thus preventing the LM from reaching or maintaining its computed ballistic firing window, the FCS will cancel the fire mission and not allow the crew to fire the rockets.

2-85. Additionally, while conducting every fire mission, the FCS further verifies its LM position by comparing its launcher navigation system data (or PNU M270A1, and M142 HIMARS) against a mechanical reference provided by azimuth and elevation resolvers. The azimuth resolver is attached to the rotating gear of the launcher turret, and the elevation resolver is attached to the LM pivot point where the cage and turret are connected. A failure of agreement between the FCS and its mechanical resolvers will alert the crew with a warning message. Any indication of a system error (Built In Test [BIT] light or critical failure prompt on the FCP) will cause the crew to immediately abort the mission in progress and troubleshoot the fault before continuing. Strict adherence to the operator manual’s procedures and all FCS warning indicators is necessary.

2-86. Operator error is minimized by verifying launcher firing data. A safety certified individual must make this verification. The independence of this check is maintained in two ways: 1) by ensuring that safety data is input and verified by two different safety certified personnel and 2) by a minimum of two check launchers when conducting static firings to obtain safety data. This includes launcher startup data, MET data, and any subsequent MET updates, target grid coordinates, altitudes, and grid zones. It also consists of a comparison of the command firing data from the FCS of both launchers. Tolerance between check system command data is ±5 mils in azimuth and quadrant elevation and 0.5 seconds in fuze time.

2-87. The ±5 mil requirement between check systems does not apply when using SDC. SDC generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods.

• In the first method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a second safety certified individual. This process will be performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified SDC operator) and both sets of Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be the same.

• In the second method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data which is verified by a second safety certified individual and by a check launcher performing the required check missions and command data being within ±5 mils in AZ and QE and 0.5 seconds in fuze time.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-53

Note. When using the SDC program, ensure that safety data input is input by a safety certified individual and verified by a second safety certified individual. Ensure that the MET data is valid. See Chapter 7 of this manual or ATTP 3-09.15 (Site Exploitation Operations) for more information on MET use criteria. Verify that the Global Positioning System (GPS) data is done by map spot (Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver [PLGR], resection, and so forth). The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases. Verify that check launchers are uploaded with training pods before check missions. Check Launchers should have training pods so that there is not a negligent discharge.

2-88. Ensure that safety data input is input by a safety certified individual and verified by a second safety certified individual (for example, gunner and section chief for the FCS, and operations officer and battery FDNCO for the AFATDS). Both the gunner and section chief of the firing launcher must verify that the actual data (displayed at aim) falls within the Safety T when conducting live fire exercises using the safety computations in Section IV.

2-89. Additionally, the PADS established Survey Control Point (SCP) must always be verified. A copy of the data is sent via a location status message to the Battery Operations Center (BOC) or Platoon Operations Center (POC), where it is verified by map spotting and printed out in hard copy and retained. The BOC or POC files this information for historical record. The BOC or POC verifies that the MET data and impact area target location were correctly entered by the Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) operator and transmitted digitally to the firing launcher(s) where the data are automatically entered into the Fire Control System (FCS). Independent verification of startup data by the launcher section chief and the platoon leader ensures that accurate position data is used during fire mission computation. The gunner ensures, and the section chief verifies, that startup and update data are properly entered into the launcher FCS. Independent verification of startup data by the launcher section chief and the platoon leader ensures that accurate position data is used during fire mission computation.

2-90. Procedures for firing safety involve verification that the FCS is functioning properly, and verification of launcher firing position within a designated firing area. Strict adherence to operator’s manual procedures and all FCS warning indicators is necessary. Additionally, a printed copy of the launcher’s command data sent via Mission Fired Report (MFR) to the BOC or POC for historical record is required.

2-91. Using observers located near and properly oriented on the impact area to observe safe impact for M28A1 or M28A2 training rockets for safety verification depends on local installation range Standard Operation Procedures (SOPs). If spotting of the rocket impact is required, visual observers and/or radar tracking (AN/TPQ-36 or -37) may be used.

Note. Sample MLRS/HIMARS firing safety checklists are provided on pages 2-89 through 2-94.

SECTION VI – COMPUTATION OF MLRS/HIMARS SAFETY DATA

GENERAL

Note. Do not use M270A1 safety data for HIMARS. Compute safety data separately for each weapon system.

2-92. Units using these procedures must be thoroughly familiar with the applicable terms contained in DA Pam 385-63. To develop safety data for MLRS/HIMARS, there are three things that must be done:

• Obtain a (range specific) range safety card. • Develop an Surface Danger Zone (SDZ) diagram. • Develop a Safety T based on munitions and current MET.

2-93. The installation RCO provides a range safety card to the OIC. This card states the location coordinates of the launcher firing area and the location coordinates of the target(s) to be engaged. In some

Chapter 2

2-54 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

cases, the range safety card will also contain left and right azimuth limits and minimum/maximum ranges to impact. The RCO also identifies any special instructions that must be followed in firing at that range (road guards, time constraints, Air Force over flights, and so forth).

2-94. Developing the SDZ diagram requires implementing the SDZ requirements referenced in the TRADOC safety letters. The SDZ diagram is developed and maintained in the FDC. It is used to ensure that targets lie within the target selection box and to define the launcher danger area, noise hazard area, and exclusion areas between the firing points and the target selection box. The following terms and definitions along with values in Table 2-18 will be used to identify the SDZ for MLRS/HIMARS:

• SDZ. The ground and airspace designated within the training complex (to include associated safety areas) for vertical and lateral containment of projectiles, fragments, debris, and components resulting from the firing, launching, or detonation of weapon systems to include explosives and demolitions.

• Installation impact area. An area that has been established by the installation RCO. • Usable portion of the installation impact area. That portion of the installation impact area that a

unit has been allowed to use must be square or rectangular, perpendicular to the Azimuth of Fire (AOF), and completely within the installation impact area.

• SDZ impact area. That portion of the impact area defined by applying Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax inward from the usable portion of the impact area. This area will contain all but 1:1,000,000 normally functioning rockets and debris.

• Target area. The area inside a specific point or location to which the weapon is fired (DA Pam 385-63/MCO 3570.1B). In addition, the point or location within the SDZ where targets are emplaced for weapon system engagement.

• Target box. That area inside the SDZ impact are where a single target is located. • Target selection box. That area inside the SDZ impact area where targets must lie. • Area F. Consists of the Launcher Danger Area and the Noise Hazard Area as defined below:  Launcher Danger Area (LDA). The area immediately behind the firing point or area that is

at risk from blast and debris in which no one may occupy.  Noise Hazard Area (NHA). The area to the rear and flanks of the firing point or OPAREA

in which a noise hazard exists. Only personnel with authorized hearing protection may occupy this area.

• Exclusion Areas I and II. That part of the SDZ between the firing point or firing OPAREA and the forward or front edge of the usable portion of the Impact Area in which there is danger from short rounds.

• Safety T. A four space table that shows the left and right azimuth limits and the minimum and maximum QE for firing the M28A1/A2 (see Figure 2-31). The SDC generated Safety T can also generate Max QE Time of Flight (TOF) and Min QE TOF.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-55

Table 2-19. M28A1/A2 (Combined) Safety

Range to Target (meters) W X Y 8,000 to 9,000 770 2,525 1,905 9,001 to 10,000 855 2,155 1,635 10,001 to 11,000 945 1,795 1,440 11,001 to 12,000 1,045 1,485 1,290 12,001 to 13,000 1,155 1,220 1,185 13,001 to 14,000 1,290 1,175 1,115 14,001 to 15,000 1,475 1,275 1,075

2-95. The Safety T defines the left and right limits for firing azimuth and the minimum and the maximum limits for firing QE. It is maintained in the FDC and in the firing launchers.

Note. See DA Pam 385-63 for firing the M26 rockets (along with other restrictions, that is, fin failure impact area, Exclusion Area III [Area C], and so forth).

MLRS/HIMARS SURFACE DANGER ZONE VALUES 2-96. The following terms and abbreviations are used to define MLRS/HIMARS surface danger zones:

• AOF- Azimuth of Fire • H- Height of the launcher above mean sea level. • Distance W- A distance to either side of the target wide enough to include all debris

(payload, warhead skin, and rocket motor) from normally functioning rounds. Distance W is the maximum lateral distance a projectile will ricochet after impacting within the dispersion area. Distance W defines the maximum lateral edge of the ricochet area.

• Wmax- The maximum possible value of W. For OPAREAs, this is the value of W at a range from the rear edge of the OPAREA to the geographic center of the usable portion of the installation impact area.

• Distance X- A distance beyond the target adequate to contain a properly functioning rocket.

• Xmax- The maximum possible value of X. For OPAREAs, this is the value of X at a range from the forward edge of the OPAREA to the geographic center of the usable portion of the installation impact area.

• Distance Y- A distance short of the target sufficient to include all debris (payload, warhead skin, and rocket motor) from normally functioning rounds.

• Ymax- The maximum possible value of Y. For OPAREAs, this is the value of Y at a range from the forward edge of the OPAREA to the geographic center of the usable portion of the installation impact area.

• Area F- Consists of the LDA and the NHA.

COMPUTING SAFETY DATA

SAFETY COMPUTING METHODS 2-97. There are three methods to compute safety data for MLRS/HIMARS live firing: OPAREA, point to point, and firing point. All of these methods apply to all of the SDZ requirements previously discussed.

Chapter 2

2-56 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Note. The numerical values for AZ, range, and QE in all of the figures in this section are provided to assist in understanding the procedures for computing safety. To create the SDZ diagram use GTA 06-05-001.

• OPAREA method. This method requires a larger impact area but allows the unit to derive a single Safety T for an entire launcher OPAREA firing into a target area. This method allows the unit to conduct more realistic and tactically driven live fire exercises, thus significantly enhancing training. There are two techniques (Method 1 and Method 2) to derive safety data using the OPAREA method. Both techniques will yield the same azimuth limits and minimum and maximum quadrants if the minimum and maximum altitudes/elevations at the minimum and maximum ranges of the target area are used. Method 2 has the execution steps in different order of application. OPAREA safety works well when conducting live fire exercises with the M28A1/A2 training rocket (reduced range). Small impact areas may preclude using OPAREA safety procedures.

• Point to point method. This method allows the unit to derive a Safety T from a specific firing point to a specific point target that lies within a target area.

• Firing point method. This method allows the unit to derive a Safety T for a single firing point (firing into a target area).

SAFETY COMPUTING PHASES 2-98. Safety computations for each of these methods are completed in four phases—

• Phase I: Apply the SDZ requirements (for the specific munitions) to the installation impact area. • Phase II: Derive the firing limits in both azimuth and quadrant elevation. • Phase III: Apply the SDZ requirements (for the specific munitions) to the launcher firing point

or OPAREA. • Phase IV: Complete the flight corridor and Exclusion Areas I and II.

2-99. Paragraphs 2-101 (OPAREA Method 1), 2-1115 (OPAREA Method 2), 2-125 (Point to Point Method), and 2-139 (Firing Point Method) contain step by step procedures the FDC uses to develop the SDZ diagram.

OPAREA METHOD 1 OF COMPUTING SAFETY 2-100. This method requires a larger impact area but allows the unit to derive a single Safety T for an entire launcher OPAREA firing into a target area.

PHASE I OPAREA METHOD 1 2-101. Apply the SDZ requirements to the installation impact area (see Figure 2-25).

Note. Both techniques will yield the same azimuth limits and minimum and maximum quadrants if the minimum and maximum altitudes/elevations at the minimum and maximum ranges of the target area are used. Method 2 has the execution steps in different order of application. If you have been issued a range safety card from your range control office that takes into account the MLRS/HIMARS SDZ requirements, the OIC/firing unit must complete the SDZ diagram for their firing point(s) or firing OPAREA(s).

• Step 1. Plot and draw the installation impact area on a map or overlay. If the existing installation impact area to be used for MLRS/HIMARS firing is not a square or rectangle, the unit must draw a square or rectangle inside the existing impact area. One side of the square or rectangle must be perpendicular to the AOF from the center of the OPAREA to the center of the impact area. The procedures in Step 4 are only valid when applied to a square or rectangular impact area (see Figure 2-25).

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-57

• Step 2. Index the geographic center of the usable portion of the installation impact area (target) (see Figure 2-25).

• Step 3. Index the center of the proposed firing OPAREA. Draw a circle around the index. (The size of the circle will be allocated by range control.) This radius may be larger or smaller depending upon the training area and/or impact area available to the unit. All of the OPAREA firing points must be located in this OPAREA circle.

Note. If given an irregular firing OPAREA by range control, you must construct a circular firing OPAREA that remains completely inside the area that you received from range control. As an example, we will use a large firing OPAREA with a radius of 1,000 meters for graphical simplicity.

• Step 4. Draw a line connecting the two indices from Steps 2 and 3. • Step 5. Using the appropriate munition specific table (Table 2-18), derive and apply the

appropriate values of Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax to the edges of the installation impact area (toward target) (see Figure 2-25). For OPAREAs, the entry value for Wmax is the range from the rear edge of the OPAREA to the target. The entry value for Xmax is the range from the forward edge of the OPAREA to the target. The entry value for Ymax is the range from the forward edge of the OPAREA to the target. The SDZ impact area is the area that contains all but 1:1,000,000 normally functioning rockets and debris.

Chapter 2

2-58 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-25. Example impact area

PHASE II OPAREA METHOD 1 2-102. Determine the left and right azimuth limits of the OPAREA.

• Step 1. Mark the most forward, rearward, right, and left positions along the circumference of the OPAREA circle from Phase I (see Figure 2-26).

• Step 2. Draw a safety fan from both the left and right positions (from Step 1), which will keep all rounds within the SDZ impact area. You must also apply any azimuth restrictions imposed by the range control for the OPAREA (use the more restrictive of the two sets of azimuth limits). Measure the left and right limits of each fan (see Figure 2-26). These are the initial left and right azimuth limits for the entire live fire OPAREA. (You will determine the final azimuth limits with FCS in Step 8.)

Figure 2-26. Example OPAREA azimuth limits OPAREA method 1

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-59

complete a “target selection box” and will be referred to as “crossover azimuths” (see Figure 2-27).

Figure 2-27. Example development of target selection box azimuth limits

2-103. Derive the minimum and maximum range limits.

Note. Range control may or may not provide a range safety card with the minimum and maximum ranges identified. If minimum and maximum range is supplied, you must use these values.

• Step 4. Measure the minimum range from the most rearward position in the OPAREA to a point just beyond the intersection of the left and right crossover azimuths. Ensure this point is inside the SDZ impact area. From this point, or if this point is short of the SDZ impact area, move along the azimuth limits until you can draw an arc between the original (not the crossover azimuths) left and right azimuth limits and remain wholly within the SDZ impact area (see Figure 2-28). In drawing the minimum range arc, you must consider munitions capabilities and any minimum range restrictions issued by range control.

Note. To use OPAREA safety, the crossover point of the left and right azimuth limits must occur just inside or short of the SDZ impact area. If the crossover point is too far into the SDZ impact area (or beyond it), the target selection box cannot be constructed inside the SDZ impact area and OPAREA safety cannot be used.

• Step 5. Measure the maximum range from the most forward position in the OPAREA to the most distant point inside the SDZ impact area that will scribe an arc between the left and right azimuth limits and remains wholly within the SDZ impact area (see Figure 2-28).

Note. For the example in Figure 2-28, the crossover point was inside the SDZ impact area and the range to the crossover point was 7,100 meters. The minimum and maximum range arcs for the example were based on the M28A1 minimum and maximum ranges of 8,000 and 15,000 meters. These arcs fall inside the original SDZ impact area azimuth limits. (Remember, radius of example OPAREA is 1,000 meters.) Measure the minimum range from the most rearward position—10,000 meters. Measure the maximum range from the most forward position—13,000 meters.

Chapter 2

2-60 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-28. Example development of target selection box range limits

• Step 6. Apply the minimum range from Step 4 to the most forward position in the OPAREA by drawing an arc between the left and right azimuth limits at the minimum range (see Figure 2-29). To draw the min arc, using GTA 06-05-001, place the pivot point over the rear most point of the OPAREA and draw the arc at the apporpriate range. To draw the max arc place the pivot point at the forward most point of the OPAREA and draw the arc at the apporpriate range

• Step 7. Apply the maximum range from Step 5 to the most rearward position in the OPAREA by drawing an arc between the left and right azimuth limits at the maximum range (see Figure 2-29). This arc completes the drawing of the target selection box. (Range control may impose additional range limits.)

Figure 2-29. Example development of minimum and maximum quadrant

Note. When using SDC, you are not required to use the check launchers. All other safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and local range regulations still apply.

• Step 8. Compute the Safety T using two check launchers at a minimum. Both check launchers must use the current MET to conduct four dry fire missions, for a total of eight fire missions, from front, rear, left, and right OPAREA extremes as listed below (see Figure 2-30). The FDC

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-61

will compare the command data between the two check launchers to ensure they agree within ±5 mils in azimuth and QE. (Range control may impose stricter tolerances.) The FDC will use the most restrictive command data. Regardless of method used, the FDC must incorporate the applicable range regulation tolerances for your specific installation.

2-104. SDC generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods. • In the first method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a second

safety certified individual. This process is performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified SDC operator) and both sets of Safety T data are compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be exactly the same.

• In the second method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a second safety certified individual and by a check launcher performing the required check missions with command data within ±5 mils in AZ and QE and 0.5 seconds fuze time.

2-105. The FDC must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data from the target area is used at minimum range and that the minimum altitude/elevation from the target impact area is used at maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max rule). However, the actual launcher firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude MUST be used during the live fire regardless of method used to properly account for vertical interval.

Note. When using the SDC program, ensure that safety data is input by a safety certified individual and verified by a second safety certified individual. This process will be performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified SDC operator) and both sets of Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be exactly the same.

• Fire mission 1. Forward most OPAREA position to the lower left corner of the target selection box. Apply the maximum altitude from the target area at minimum range (mini/max rule). This yields the minimum QE.

• Fire mission 2. Rearward most OPAREA position to the upper left corner of the target selection box. Apply the minimum altitude from the target area at maximum range (mini/max rule). This yields the maximum QE.

• Fire mission 3. Left most OPAREA position to the lower right corner of the target selection box. Apply the minimum altitude from the target area at maximum range (mini/max rule). This yields the right azimuth limit.

• Fire mission 4. Right most OPAREA position to the lower left corner of the target selection box. This yields the left azimuth limit.

Note. Check launchers can be used as firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

Chapter 2

2-62 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-30. Safety T computations (fire missions)

Note. The target selection box size has been increased for viewing purposes. For a more accurate relative size of the target selection box, see Figure 2-29 or 2-33.

2-106. This completes the Safety T that establishes firing limits for the launcher within the OPAREA (see Figure 2-31).

Figure 2-31. Example Safety T

PHASE III OPAREA METHOD 1 2-107. Apply the SDZ requirements of Area F, which include the Launcher Danger Area (LDA) and Noise Hazard Area (NHA), to the launcher OPAREA.

2-108. This phase applies the LDA and NHA requirements to the OPAREA. This is done by applying those requirements around the rear half of the circumference of the OPAREA (see Figure 2-32). Although these actual danger areas are a function of the specific launcher location, controlling entry to the areas derived in this phase will allow more freedom of movement for the launcher and will add realism to the live fire training exercise.

• Step 1. The LDA is the area immediately to the rear of the launcher, which is directly exposed to blast and debris. Divide the OPAREA in half by drawing a line through its center,

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-63

perpendicular to the AZ to the target constructed in Phase I. Extend outward along this line to a point 400 meters on each side around the rear half of the OPAREA (see Figure 2-32).

• Step 2. The NHA extends an additional 300 meters behind the LDA for the M28A1/A2. Only mission essential personnel wearing hearing protection can occupy it. There are two means of constructing the NHA. The first is the most simple, while the second method minimizes the size of the NHA, thus allowing less use of the training area.

2-109. Construct NHA using Method A. • Step 2a. The following instructions apply to our example of a 1,000 meter radius OPAREA.

Draw a box that extends 400 meters plus the radius of your firing OPAREA to the left and right (the 1,000 meter radius + 400 meters) as well as 1,700 meters (the 1,000 meter radius + 400 meters + 300 meters) to the rear of the center of the firing OPAREA. The result for our example is a box 2,800 meters wide and 1,700 meters deep. Standard instructions for constructing the NHA using Method A is simply to add 300 meters to the rear depth of the LDA. Put simply, go left and right 400 meters from the edge of your specific firing OPAREA, add a total of 700 meters to the rear edge of your firing OPAREA, and create a rectangle as shown on the left side of Figure 2-34. Go to Phase IV OPAREA Method 1.

2-110. Construct NHA using Method B. • Step 2b. From the center of the OPAREA, draw an arc (400 meters plus the radius of the

OPAREA) to the rear of the center of the OPAREA along the AOF to intersect the line developed in Step 1. (See Figure 2-32, Method B, to establish the LDA.)

• Step 2c. Draw two lines parallel to the AOF on the left and right sides that extend back from the perpendicular line drawn in Step 1. (See Figure 2-32, Method B.)

• Step 2d. From the center of the OPAREA, draw a line along the AOF to the rear that is equal to the radius of OPAREA + 400 meters + 300 meters.

• Step 2e. From the end of this line, draw an arc that intersects the two lines in Step 2c to enclose the NHA.

Figure 2-32. Firing OPAREA SDZ requirements

Chapter 2

2-64 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Phase IV OPAREA Method 1

2-111. Complete the flight corridor. • Step 1. Construct line segments from points (3a and 3b) forward to the far edge of the

installation impact area. The line segments should be parallel to the left and right azimuth limits, respectively, and begin at points 400 meters to the left and right of the OPAREA. This describes the general flight corridor (see Figure 2-32).

• Step 2. The exclusion area is that area of the SDZ flight corridor within a specified distance of the far edge of the firing area. It is endangered by failure of the rocket motor during the boost phase.

2-112. Construct Exclusion Area I. • Step 2a. Construct an arc, from the forward edge of the OPAREA, with a radius that extends

beyond the OPAREA by the distance given in Table 2-19 (based on the level of accepted risk for Exclusion Area I). The area between the arc and the front of the OPAREA is Exclusion Area I. The example in Figure 2-33 shows both a 1:10,000 short round probability (2,500 meters) and a 1:1,000 short round probability (1,000 meters).

2-113. Construct Exclusion Area II. • Step 2b. The area between the arc of Exclusion Area I and the front of the impact area is

Exclusion Area II for the M28A1/A2 training rocket (reduced range). Exclusion Area II can only be occupied under waiver. Exclusion Area I cannot be occupied (see Figure 2-33).

• Step 2c. The AZ and range limits determined in Steps 3, 6, and 7 of Phase II also describe a small area around the target. This is the target selection box. All targets selected from this box will fall within the Safety T for the live fire OPAREA (see Figure 2-33).

Table 2-20. Exclusion Areas

Short Round Probability M28A1 and M28A2 Exclusion Area I Exclusion Area II

1 per 1,000 firings 1,000 meters See Note 1 per 10,000 firings 2,500 meters See Note NOTE: This distance will vary based on range to target and the size of the impact area. It is the area between Exclusion Area I and the SDZ impact area.

Figure 2-33. Example exclusion areas M28A1/A2

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-65

OPAREA METHOD 2 OF COMPUTING SAFETY 2-114. This method requires a larger impact area, but allows the unit to derive a single Safety T for an entire launcher OPAREA firing into a target area.

PHASE I OPAREA METHOD 2 2-115. Apply the SDZ requirements to the installation impact area.

Note. Both techniques will yield the same azimuth limits and minimum and maximum quadrants if the minimum and maximum altitudes/elevations at the minimum and maximum ranges of the target area are used. The two methods differ in the order of the execution steps. If you have been issued a range safety card from your range control office that takes into account the MLRS/HIMARS SDZ requirements, proceed to Step 1 of Phase II.

• Step 1. Plot and draw the installation impact area on a map or overlay. If the existing installation impact area to be used for MLRS/HIMARS firing is not a square or rectangle, the unit must draw a square or rectangle inside the existing impact area. One side of the square or rectangle must be perpendicular to the AOF from the firing point to the center of the impact area. The procedures in Step 4 are only valid when applied to a square or rectangular impact area. Index the approximate geographic center of the installation impact area (target) (see Figure 2-34).

• Step 1a. Index the geographic center of the installation impact area (target) (see Figure 2-34). • Step 2. Index the center of the proposed firing OPAREA. Draw a circle around the index. The

size of the circle will be allocated by range control. This radius may be larger or smaller, depending upon the training area and/or impact area available to the unit. All of the OPAREA firing points must be located in this OPAREA circle (see Figure 2-34).

Note. If range control gives you an irregular firing OPAREA, you must construct a circular firing OPAREA that remains completely inside the area that you received. To compute OPAREA safety, a circle with a radius must be used. As an example, we will use a large firing OPAREA with a radius of 1,000 meters for graphical simplicity.

• Step 3. Draw a line connecting the two indices from Steps 1a and 2 (see Figure 2-34). • Step 4. Using the appropriate munition specific table (Table 2-18), derive and apply the

appropriate values of Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax to the edges of the installation impact area (toward target). For OPAREAs, the entry value for Wmax is the range from the rear edge of the OPAREA to the target. The entry value for Xmax is the range from the forward edge of the OPAREA to the target. The entry value for Ymax is the range from the forward edge of the OPAREA to the target. Based on these entry ranges, extract the appropriate values from Table 2-18 and apply them from the edges of the installation impact area toward the target. The SDZ impact area is the area that contains all but 1:1,000,000 normally functioning rockets and debris (see Figure 2-34).

Chapter 2

2-66 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-34. Example impact area

PHASE II OPAREA METHOD 2 2-116. Determine the initial left and right azimuth limits of the OPAREA.

• Step 1. Mark the most forward, rearward, right, and left positions along the circumference of the OPAREA circle from Phase I OPAREA Method 2 (see Figure 2-35).

Figure 2-35. Example OPAREA azimuth limits OPAREA method 2

• Step 2. Draw a safety fan from both the left and right positions (from Step 1), which will keep all rounds within the SDZ impact area. You must also apply any azimuth restrictions imposed by range control for the OPAREA (use the more restrictive of the two sets of azimuth limits). Measure the left and right limits of each fan (see Figure 2-35). These are the left and right azimuth limits for the entire live fire OPAREA.

• Step 3. Measure the maximum range from the most forward position in the OPAREA to the most distant point inside the SDZ impact area that will scribe an arc between the left and right azimuth limits that remains completely within the SDZ impact area (see Figure 2-36).

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-67

Figure 2-36. Example of minimum and maximum range arcs

Note. For the example shown in Figure 2-36, the crossover point was inside the SDZ impact area and the range to the crossover point was 7,100 meters. The minimum and maximum range arcs for the example were based on the M28A1 minimum and maximum ranges of 8,000 and 15,000 meters, respectively. These arcs fall inside the original SDZ impact area azimuth limits. (Remember, the radius of the example OPAREA is 1,000 meters.) Measure the minimum range from the most rearward position—10,000 meters. Measure the maximum range from the most forward position—13,000 meters. SDC cannot be used for computation of OPAREA Method 2.

• Step 4. Draw an arc between the original left and right azimuth limits and remain completely within the SDZ impact area. Measure the minimum range from the most rearward position in the OPAREA to the lower left hand corner of this arc. Ensure that this point is inside the SDZ impact area (see Figure 2-36). In drawing the minimum range arc, you must consider munition capabilities and any minimum range restrictions issued by range control.

• Step 5. Compute the Safety T using two check launchers at a minimum. Both check launchers must use the current MET to conduct four dry fire missions, for a total of eight fire missions— from front, rear, left, and right OPAREA extremes as listed below (see Figure 2-37). The FDC will compare the command data between the two check launchers to ensure that they agree within ±5 mils in AZ and QE. (Range control may impose stricter tolerances.) The FDC will use the most restrictive command data. Regardless of the method used, the FDC must incorporate the applicable range regulation tolerances for your specific installation.

2-117. The FDC must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data from the target area is used at minimum range and that the minimum altitude/elevation from the target impact area is used at maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max rule). However, the actual launcher firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude MUST be used during the live fire regardless of the method used to properly account for vertical interval.

• Fire mission 1. Rearward most OPAREA position to the lower left corner of the target area. Apply the maximum altitude of the target area at minimum range (mini/max rule). This yields the minimum QE.

• Fire mission 2. Forward most OPAREA position to the upper right corner of the target area. Apply the minimum altitude of the target area at maximum range (mini/max rule). This yields the maximum QE.

• Fire mission 3. Left most OPAREA position to the lower left corner of the target area (mini/max rule). This yields the right azimuth limit.

Chapter 2

2-68 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

• Fire mission 4. Right mostOPAREA position to the upper right corner of the target area. This yields the left azimuth limit.

Note. The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

Figure 2-37. Safety T computations (fire missions)

2-118. This completes the Safety T that establishes firing limits for the launcher within the OPAREA (see Figure 2-38).

Figure 2-38. Example safety t

PHASE III OPAREA METHOD 2 2-119. Apply the SDZ requirements for Area F to the launcher OPAREA and complete the flight corridor. This phase applies the LDA and NHA requirements to the OPAREA. This is done by applying those requirements around the rear half of the circumference of the OPAREA (see Figure 2-39). Although these actual danger areas are a function of the specific launcher location, controlling entry to the areas derived in this phase will allow more freedom of movement for the launcher and will add realism to the live fire training exercise.

• Step 1. The LDA is the area immediately to the rear of the launcher, which is directly exposed to blast and debris. Divide the OPAREA in half by drawing a line through its center,

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-69

perpendicular to the AZ to the target constructed in Phase I. Extend outward along this line to a point 400 meters on each side around the rear half of the OPAREA (see Figure 2-39).

• Step 2. The NHA extends an additional 300 meters for the M28A1/A2 behind the LDA. Only

mission essential personnel wearing hearing protection can occupy it. There are two means of constructing the NHA. The first is the most simple, while the second method minimizes the size of the NHA, thus allowing less use of training area.

2-120. Construct NHA using Method A. • Step 2a. The following instructions apply to our example of a 1,000 meter radius OPAREA.

2-121. Construct NHA using Method B. • Step 2b. From the center of the OPAREA, draw an arc (400 meters plus the radius of the

OPAREA) to the rear of the center of the OPAREA along the AOF to intersect the line developed in Step 1. (See Figure 2-39, Method B, to establish the LDA.)

• Step 2c. Draw two lines parallel to the AOF on the left and right sides that extend back from the perpendicular line drawn in Step 1. (See Figure 2-39, Method B.)

• Step 2d. From the center of the OPAREA, draw a line along the AOF to the rear that is equal to the radius of OPAREA + 400 meters + 300 meters.

• Step 2e. From the end of this line, draw an arc that intersects the two lines in Step 2c to enclose the NHA.

Chapter 2

2-70 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-39. Firing OPAREA SDZ requirements

PHASE IV OPAREA METHOD 2 2-122. Complete the flight corridor.

• Step 1. Construct line segments from points (3a and 3b) forward to the far edge of the installation impact area. The line segments should be parallel to the left and right azimuth limits, respectively, and begin at points 400 meters to the left and right of the OPAREA. This describes the general flight corridor (see Figure 2-39).

2-123. Construct Exclusion Area I. • Step 2a. Construct an arc, from the forward edge of the OPAREA, with a radius that extends

beyond the OPAREA by the distance given in Table 2-19 (based on the level of accepted risk for Exclusion Area I). The area between the arc and the front of the OPAREA is Exclusion Area I. The example in Figure 2-39 shows both a 1:10,000 short round probability (2,500 meters) and a 1:1,000 short round probability (1,000 meters).

2-124. Construct Exclusion Area II. • Step 2b. The area between the arc of Exclusion Area I and the front of the impact area is

Exclusion Area II for the M28A1/A2 training rocket (reduced range). Exclusion Area II can only be occupied under waiver. Exclusion Area I cannot be occupied (see Figure 2-40).

• Step 2c. The AZ and range limits determined in Steps 2, 3, and 4 of Phase II also describe a small area around the target. This is the target selection box. All targets selected from within this box will fall within the Safety T for the live fire OPAREA (see Figure 2-40).

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-71

Figure 2-40. Example of exclusion areas for M28A1/A2

• Step 3. Apply the lower (or left most) value of the left azimuth limits (derived from the left most position) to the right mostposition. Apply the higher (or right most) value of the right azimuth limits (derived from the right mostposition) to the left most position. Ensure that these azimuths are marked separately and distinctly from the previous fans. They will be used to complete a target selection box and will be referred to as “crossover azimuths.” Selecting targets within this box reduces the chance of a normally functioning rocket traveling outside the impact area to an acceptable level of less than 1:1,000,000 (see Figure 2-41).

Figure 2-41. Example of the development of target selection box azimuth limits

• Step 4. Apply the minimum range from Step 3 of Phase II to the most forward position in the OPAREA by drawing an arc between the left and right azimuth limits at the minimum range (see Figure 2-42).

• Step 5. Apply the maximum range from Step 3 of Phase II to the most rearward position in the OPAREA by drawing an arc between the left and right azimuth limits at the maximum range (see Figure 2-42). This arc completes the drawing of the target selection box. (Range control may impose additional range limits.)

Chapter 2

2-72 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-42. Example of the development of target selection box range limits

POINT TO POINT METHOD OF COMPUTING SAFETY 2-125. The point to point method allows the unit to derive a Safety T from a specific firing point to a specific point target that lies within a target area.

PHASE I POINT TO POINT METHOD 2-126. Apply the SDZ requirements to the installation impact area (see Figure 2-43).

Note. If you have been issued a range safety card from your range control office that takes into account the MLRS/HIMARS SDZ requirements, proceed to Step 1 of Phase II. The target box given by range control is a very small box in which the exact target grid is located (normally 200 meters square). Range control may also give azimuth and range limits from the firing point. If you are not required by range control to use the point to point method, use the firing point method to increase your target selection opportunities.

• Step 1. Plot and draw the installation impact area on a map or overlay. If the existing installation impact area to be used for MLRS/HIMARS firing is not a square or rectangle, the unit must draw a square or rectangle inside the existing impact area. One side of the square or rectangle must be perpendicular to the AOF from the firing point to the geographic center of the usable portion of the impact area. The procedures in Step 4 are only valid when applied to a square or rectangular impact area.

• Step 1a. Index the geographic center of the usable portion of the installation impact area (target) (see Figure 2-43).

• Step 2. Index the firing point (see Figure 2-43). • Step 3. Draw a line connecting the two indices from Steps 1 and 2 (see Figure 2-43). • Step 4. Using the appropriate munition specific table (Table 2-18), derive and apply the

appropriate values of Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax to the edges of the usable portion of the installation impact area (toward target). The entry values for Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax are the ranges from the specified firing point on the range safety card to the specific point target listed on the range safety card. The SDZ impact area is the area that contains all but 1:1,000,000 normally functioning rockets and debris (see Figure 2-43).

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-73

Figure 2-43. Example of an impact area

PHASE II POINT TO POINT METHOD 2-127. Determine the initial left and right azimuth limits.

• Step 1. Draw lines from the firing point to the right and left inner edges (far corners) of the SDZ impact area, which will keep all rounds within the SDZ impact area. The azimuths for these lines will be stated on the range safety card. This will be your initial left and right limit. These limits will be further refined in Step 2 (see Figure 2-44).

Chapter 2

2-74 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-44. Example of the development of target selection box range limits

2-128. Derive the minimum and maximum values for QE. • Step 2. Determine the minimum range at which a vertical line can be scribed between the left

and right azimuth limits that lies completely within the SDZ impact area (see Figure 2-44) developed in Phase I or given by range control. This line shows the minimum range limit of the target box. You must also observe any additional range restrictions imposed by the range safety office (or munitions limitations).

• Step 3. Determine the maximum range at which a vertical line can be scribed between the left and right azimuth limits that lies completely within the SDZ impact area (see Figure 2-44). This line shows the maximum range limit of the target box. You must also observe any additional range restrictions imposed by the range safety office (or munitions limitations).

Note. When using SDC, you are not required to use check launchers. All other safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and local range regulations still apply.

2-129. Determine safe firing data and compute the Safety T. • Step 4. Using the current MET message, compute the Safety T using two check launchers at a

minimum. Check launchers will conduct two dry fire missions each and determine firing data from the specified firing point to the lower left hand corner and upper right hand corner of the target box as presented along the gun target line (see Figure 2-45). The FDC will compare the command data between the two check launchers to ensure that they agree within ±5 mils in azimuth and QE. Range control may impose stricter tolerances. SDC generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods:

• In the first method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a second safety certified individual. This process is performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified SDC operator) and both sets of Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be exactly the same.

• In the second method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a second safety certified individual and by a check launcher performing the required check missions and command data being within ±5 mils in AZ and QE and 0.5 seconds fuze time.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-75

Figure 2-45. Example of computing safety data

2-130. The FDC must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data from the target area is used at minimum range and that the minimum altitude/elevation from the target impact area is used at maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max rule). However, the actual launcher/firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude MUST be used during the live fire regardless of method used to properly account for vertical interval.

Note. When using the SDC program, ensure that two different safety certified personnel verify safety data input. This process will be performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified SDC operator) and both sets of Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be identical. The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

• Fire mission 1. From the specified firing point (location will be given on the range safety card) to the lower left hand corner of the target box. Apply the maximum altitude at minimum range. This yields the left azimuth limit and minimum QE.

• Fire mission 2. From the specified firing point (location will be given on the range safety card) to the upper right hand corner of the target box. Apply the minimum altitude at maximum range. This yields the right azimuth limit and the maximum QE.

2-131. The check launchers with current MET will report their actual (if layed on target) and command check data to the FDC. The FDC will compare the command data between the two check launchers to ensure that they agree within ±5 mils in AZ and QE. (Range control may impose stricter tolerances.) The FDC will use the more restrictive command data. Regardless of method used, the FDC must incorporate the applicable range regulation tolerances for your specific installation.

2-132. SDC generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods: • In the first method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a second

safety certified individual. This process will be performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified SDC operator) and both sets of Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be exactly the same.

• In the second method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a

Chapter 2

2-76 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

second safety certified individual and by a check launcher performing the required check missions and command data being within ±5 mils in AZ and QE and 0.5 seconds fuze time.

2-133. The FDC must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data from the target area is used at minimum range and that the minimum altitude/elevation from the target impact area is used at maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max rule). However, the actual launcher/firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude MUST be used during the live fire regardless of method used to pro24815092perly account for vertical interval.

2-134. This completes the Safety T for the point to point method. See Figure 2-46 for an example.

Note. If the local range safety regulation lists a variance/tolerance between check systems, the range specific tolerances will be used. The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

Figure 2-46. Example of a safety t

PHASE III POINT TO POINT METHOD 2-135. Apply the SDZ requirements to the launcher firing point.

• Step 1. The LDA is the area immediately to the rear of the launcher that is directly exposed to blast and debris. It extends 350 meters to the left and right of the launcher firing point (perpendicular to the AOF) and 400 meters to the rear of the firing point (parallel to the AOF). Personnel are prohibited from occupying this area (see Figure 2-47).

• Step 2. The NHA extends behind the LDA. Only mission essential personnel wearing hearing protection can occupy this area. Draw a box that extends beyond the LDA an additional 300 meters, for M28A1 or M28A2 training rockets, to the rear of the firing point (see Figure 2-47).

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-77

Figure 2-47. Example of the LDA and the NHA

PHASE IV POINT TO POINT METHOD 2-136. Complete the flight corridor.

• Step 1. Draw lines from the left and right forward edge of Area F to the left and right rear edge of the useable portion of the installation impact area, respectively, that are parallel to the left and right azimuth limits (see Figure 2-48).

• Step 2. Exclusion Areas I and II are the areas of the SDZ flight corridor within a specified distance of the downrange edge of the firing area. They are endangered by failure of the rocket motor during the boost phase (see Figure 2-48).

2-137. Construct Exclusion Area I. • Step 2a. Construct an arc, centered on the firing point, with a radius derived from Table 2-19

(based on the level of accepted risk for Exclusion Area I). The area between the arc and the firing point is Exclusion Area I (see Figure 2-48).

Note. A 1:1,000 or 1:10,000 short round probability is used when calculating risk under waiver in accordance with DA Pam 385-63.

2-138. Construct Exclusion Area II. • Step 2b. The area between the arc of Exclusion Area I and the forward edge of the SDZ

impact area is Exclusion Area II for the M28A1/A2 training rocket (reduced range) (see Figure 2-48).

Chapter 2

2-78 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 2-48. Example exclusion areas M28A1/A2

Note. Exclusion Area II can only be occupied under waiver in accordance with DA Pam 385-63. Exclusion Area I cannot be occupied.

FIRING POINT METHOD OF COMPUTING SAFETY 2-139. The firing point method allows the unit to derive a Safety T for a single firing point (firing into a target area).

PHASE I FIRING POINT METHOD 2-140. Apply the SDZ requirements to the installation impact area.

Note. The difference between the firing point method of computing safety and the point to point method of computing safety is that, with the firing point method, a larger target selection box allows the launcher to fire at different targets, whereas the point to point method allows firing at one target within a much smaller target box. If you have been issued a range safety card from your range control office that takes into account the MLRS/HIMARS SDZ requirements, proceed to Step 1 of Phase II.

• Step 1. Plot and draw the installation impact area on a map or overlay. If the existing installation impact area to be used for MLRS/HIMARS firing is not a square or rectangle, the unit must draw a square or rectangle inside the existing impact area. One side of the square or rectangle must be perpendicular to the AOF from the firing point to the geographic center of the usable portion of the impact area. The procedures in Step 4 are only valid when applied to a square or rectangular impact area.

• Step 1a. Index the geographic center of the usable portion of the installation impact area (target) (see Figure 2-49).

• Step 2. Index the firing point (see Figure 2-49).

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-79

Figure 2-49. Example of an impact area

• Step 3. Draw a line connecting the two indices from Steps 1a and 2 (see Figure 2-49). • Step 4. Using the appropriate munition specific table (Table 2-18), derive and apply the

appropriate values of Wmax, Xmax, and Ymax to the edges of the usable portion of the installation impact area (toward target). The entry value for Wmax is the range from the FP to the target. The entry value for Xmax is the range from the FP to the target. The entry value for Ymax is the range from the FP to the target. This is the SDZ impact area (see Figure 2-49).

PHASE II FIRING POINT METHOD 2-141. Determine the initial left and right azimuth limits.

• Step 1. Draw lines from the firing point to the right and left edges of the SDZ impact area, which will keep all rounds within the SDZ impact area. Draw the left line from the firing point to the upper left hand corner of the SDZ impact area. Repeat this process by drawing a line from the firing point to the upper right hand corner of the SDZ impact area. This will be your initial left and right limit. These limits will be further refined in Step 2. Apply any azimuth restrictions imposed by range control for the firing area (see Figure 2-50).

2-142. Derive the minimum and maximum values for QE.

Note. Range control may or may not provide a range safety card with the minimum and maximum ranges identified. If minimum and maximum range is supplied, those values will be applied.

• Step 2. Determine the minimum range at which an arc can be scribed between the left and right azimuth limits and lie completely within the SDZ impact area. Draw a line on the arc between the left and right azimuth limits (see Figure 2-50). This line shows the minimum range limit of the target selection box/target area. The target selection box and target area are the same area when using the firing point method of safety computation. Observe any additional range restrictions imposed by the range safety office. (For our example, installation range safety office limitations of 8,000 and 9,400 meters were applied.)

• Step 3. Determine the maximum range at which an arc can be scribed between the left and right azimuth limits and lie completely within the SDZ impact area. Draw a line on the arc between the left and right azimuth limits (see Figure 2-50). This line shows the maximum range limit of the target selection box/target area. The target selection box and target area are the same area when using the firing point method of safety computation. Observe any

Chapter 2

2-80 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

additional munition specific limitations or range restrictions imposed by the range safety office.

Figure 2-50. Example of azimuth limits

2-143. Determine the safe firing data and compute the Safety T.

Note. When using SDC, you are not required to use the check launchers. All other safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and local range regulation still apply. The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

Figure 2-51. Example of fire missions for Safety T

• Step 4. Using the current MET message, compute the Safety T using two check launchers at a minimum. Check launchers will conduct two dry fire missions each and determine firing data from the specified firing point to the lower left hand corner and upper right hand corner of the target selection box. The target selection box and target area are the same area when using the firing point method of safety computation (see Figure 2-51).

• Fire mission 1. From the specified firing point to the lower left hand corner of the target selection box/target area. Apply the maximum altitude at minimum range. This yields the left azimuth limit and minimum QE.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-81

• Fire mission 2. From the specified firing point to the upper right hand corner of the target selection box/target area. Apply the minimum altitude to the maximum range. This yields the right azimuth limit and the maximum QE.

2-144. The check launchers with current MET will report their actual and command check data to the FDC. The FDC will compare the command data between the two check launchers to ensure that they agree within ±5 mils in azimuth and QE. (Range control may impose stricter tolerances.) The FDC will use the more restrictive command data. Regardless of method used, the FDC must incorporate the applicable range regulation tolerances for your specific installation.

2-145. SDC generated Safety T data will be verified by one of two methods: • In the first method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a second

safety certified individual. This process is performed twice (the second time with a different safety certified SDC operator) and both sets of Safety T data compared. The data on these Safety Ts will be exactly the same.

• In the second method, a safety certified individual inputs SDC data, which is verified by a second safety certified individual and by a check launcher performing the required check missions and command data within ±5 mils in AZ and QE and 0.5 seconds fuze time.

2-146. The FDC must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data is used at minimum range and that the minimum altitude/elevation is used at maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max rule). However, the actual launcher/firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude MUST be used during the live fire regardless of method used to properly account for vertical interval.

2-147. This completes the Safety T for the firing point method (see Figure 2-52).

Figure 2-52. Example of a safety t

PHASE III FIRING POINT METHOD 2-148. Apply the SDZ requirements to the firing point.

Chapter 2

2-82 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

• Step 2. The NHA extends behind the LDA. Only mission essential personnel wearing hearing protection can occupy this area. Draw a box that extends beyond the LDA an additional 300 meters for M28A1/A2 to the rear of the firing point (see Figure 2-53).

• Step 3. The exclusion area is that area of the SDZ flight corridor within a specified distance of the downrange edge of the firing area. It is endangered by failure of the rocket motor during the boost phase (see Figure 2-53).

Figure 2-53. Example LDA, NHA, and Exclusion Areas I and II

PHASE IV FIRING POINT METHOD 2-149. Complete the flight corridor.

2-150. Construct Exclusion Area I. • Step 3a. Construct an arc, centered on the firing point, with a radius derived from Table 2-19

(based on the level of accepted risk for Exclusion Area I). The area between the arc and the firing point is Exclusion Area I (see Figure 2-53).

Note. A 1:1,000 or 1:10,000 short round probability is used when calculating risk under waiver per DA Pam 385-63.

2-151. Construct Exclusion Area II. • Step 3b. The area between the arc of Exclusion Area I and the forward edge of the SDZ

impact area is Exclusion Area II for the M28A1/A2 training rocket (reduced range).

Note. Exclusion Area II can only be occupied under waiver per DA Pam 385-63. Exclusion Area I cannot be occupied.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-83

SECTION VII – CHECK DATA FOR M270A1/MLRS M142 HIMARS Note. When using SDC, it is not required to use check launchers. SDC alleviates the need for check launchers; all other safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and local range regulations still apply.

2-152. Check data is the process of developing and verifying firing data by using a minimum of two check launchers to determine the most accurate data possible to ensure safe live fire exercises. This section contains procedures for the safe operation of the M270A1 MLRS and M142 HIMARS. See example live fire safety checklists (pages 2-87 through 2-91) and check data checklists (pages 2-92 through 2-94).

2-153. There are three methods used to develop a Safety T (OPAREA, point to point, and firing point). Each of these methods requires two check launchers at a minimum to develop a Safety T. The check launchers will determine firing data for the required number of fire missions based on the method selected. Check launchers will report their actual and command data to the FDC. The FDC will apply the applicable range regulation tolerances specific to your installation and use the more restrictive command data.

2-154. The FDC must ensure that the maximum altitude/elevation data is used at minimum range and that the minimum altitude/elevation is used at maximum range when computing safety data (mini/max rule). However, the actual launcher/firing point altitude/elevation and actual target location elevation/altitude MUST be used during the live fire regardless of method used to properly account for vertical interval.

Note. The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

M270A1 MLRS AND M142 HIMARS 2-155. The following material covers M270A1 MLRS and M142 HIMARS unique operational functions relating to check data. The introduction of GPS as a source of navigation presents new operational factors that must be addressed. The following procedures incorporate the new operational factors and MUST be followed when using the M270A1 MLRS and M142 HIMARS launcher for check data:

• The database must be purged of any previous fire mission or MET data. • The section chief will verify FCS resolver readouts and ensure that they are within the correct

tolerances (at stow).

Note. All azimuth and elevation resolver data will be in accordance with the system technical manual. All launchers must be parked within ±100 mils of the FCS command parking heading and less than 89 mils slope (M270A1 can fire up to a 266 mils slope). Check launchers and firing launchers will use the same current MET.

• Check data can be computed from the firing point or an alternate location with the M270A1 and M142.

• Valid weekly GPS keys will be used, and the chief will verify that the launcher is operating in the GPS aided mode (keys loaded and verified using SCP or DAGR) with COMSEC in FOM 1.

• If it is not possible to operate in the GPS aided mode prior to moving to the firing point to develop firing data, the launcher must perform a system parameter update on a verified SCP and ensure that the launcher performed a zero velocity update (ZUPT).

Note. The M270A1 and M142 HIMARS launchers will not accept a position update while in the GPS aided mode.

• A digital or manual fire mission requires the chief and gunner to verify that the launcher’s

Chapter 2

2-84 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ballistic solution is computed by either occupying the firing point or by using the assigned firing point location.

• A manual fire mission requires the chief or gunner to read back required data to the FDC. If check launchers are not using the ballistic solution function, they must occupy the mission firing point and lay their LM on target and report the actual and command data to the FDC. This ensures that the FCS performs a complete computation of the fire mission (displaying command and actual data) using all external factors, thereby providing the most accurate data possible.

WARNING

Standard MET WILL NOT be used to develop check data.

Note. Check launchers WILL use the command data (not actual data) in developing Safety T data.

Note. The check launchers can be used as the firing launchers after completing the Safety T and purging all databases.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-85

Table 2-21. Launcher Checklist

EXAMPLE OF A LAUNCHER LIVE FIRE SAFETY CHECKLIST

BEFORE FIRING 1. Launcher crews receive a prefire safety briefing from the FDC/OIC. 2 FDC/OIC reviews the Safety T with the launcher chiefs. 3. Section chief conducts a prefire safety briefing with his crew and reviews the Safety T. 4. Section chief verifies that the correct option is selected for Hang Fire “STOP,” Misfire

“STOP,” Use LP/C 2 on Rocket Malfunction, “NO.” Section chief reviews hang fire and misfire procedures according to SOP.

5. Chief verifies resolvers (at stow). NOTE: M270A1 azimuth resolver ±1.8, elevation resolver ±2.0; M142 HIMARS azimuth resolver ±7.0 mils, elevation resolver ±3.2 mils.

6. Chief will verify that no immediate mask is present at the FP. If mask is present, it will be measured and reported to the FDC for input. NOTE: High QE will be selected by launchers during startup procedures if required.

LAUNCHER CHECKLIST 7. Chief inspects ammunition (dents, cracks, gouges, shorting plug) before performing

loading and records lot/serial number. 8. Launcher chief ensures that the gunner purges all previous MET and fire missions from

the FCS database. 9. If GPS is not available for the M270A1 MLRS and the M142 HIMARS, the launcher

must perform a system parameter update. NOTE: If firing from a GPS-aided launcher, SCP updates are not required.

10 Chief sends a “LCHR STATUS” to the FDC. 11. Launcher receives current MET from the FDC. 12. If manual MET is used, section chief will verify MET by reading back all lines of MET to

the FDC. NOTE: Recommend that a few lines of MET be read back to the FDC even if it was sent digitally. The RSO will verify all startup data to include verification of current MET in use.

13. Gunner transmits digital “WILL COMPLY” to the FDC. 14. Chief verifies that gunner performs rocket select (if required) before launcher receiving

the fire mission from the FDC. 15. Chief and gunner review and record the fire mission in the MLRS Launcher Fire Mission

Log (DA Form 7233-R). 16. Launcher moves to the firing point. 17. Launcher is parked on firing point (distance from FP marker based on range control

limits) or within the OPAREA. 18. Launcher is parked within ±100 mils (or within range control limits if less) of the parking

heading. 19. Gunner lays the LM. 20. Chief visually verifies that the LM is oriented downrange (towards the AOF). 21. Chief ensures that the TC hatch and doors are closed, vent fan switch is set to MED,

firing damper is set to the firing position for the M270A1, or the chemical air filtration unit (CAFU) switch is turned on for the HIMARS, and cab pressure gauge reads a minimum of 0.25 inches of water.

Chapter 2

2-86 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-21. Launcher Checklist (Continued)

EXAMPLE OF A LAUNCHER LIVE FIRE SAFETY CHECKLIST

22. Chief and gunner verify that the actual data falls within the Safety T. 23. Chief directs gunner to arm and fire. Chief reports “SHOT” to the controlling FDC.

NOTE: During multiple firings, chief and gunner must ensure that the firing data stays within the Safety T. If the firing data blanks out during firing, a check fire must be initiated (safe rockets) and the FDC notified.

AFTER FIRING 24. Chief reports “ROUNDS COMPLETE” to the FDC. 25. Chief verifies that no tube or grass fires exist.

NOTE: The LM is not to be stowed until all rounds are declared safe by the OIC. 26. FDC announces that all rounds were observed safe and instructs the launcher to stow

the LM. 27. Launcher stows and moves off the firing point.

Table 2-22. OIC/FDC Checklist

EXAMPLE OF AN OIC/FDC LIVE FIRE SAFETY CHECKLIST

BEFORE FIRING 1. Ensure that the target is entered into the fire control system and verified by map spot. 2. NOTE: When using SDC, you are not required to use check launchers. SDC alleviates

the need for check launchers; all other safety procedures and requirements outlined in this chapter and local range regulations still apply.

3. Ensure that the SDZ computation and safety diagram are posted and verified by the OIC. 4. Ensure MET validity.

NOTE: Up to 4 hour old MET message may be used except during day/night transitions or frontal passages. See FM 3-09.60 (FM 6-60) (Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Multiple Launch Rocket System [MLRS] Operations) or FM 3-09.15 (Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Meteorology) for more information on MET checking procedures.

5. Ensure that at least two launchers have dry fired each check mission one time each and that their firing solutions meet range specific check tolerances. If SDC is used to develop the Safety T, ensure that two safety certified individuals verify all data input.

6. Ensure that launcher chief has verified that no immediate mask is present at the FP. If mask is present, it will be measured and reported to the FDC for input.

7. FDC conducts downrange mask checks and inputs data if required. 8. FDC computes the data for each Safety T. On the Safety T, he will annotate the firing

point/OPAREA they apply to, the time the MET data was flown and the date it was prepared, and the munitions in use. SDC automatically annotates this data on the Safety T.

9. The FDC and the OIC/NCOIC verify the Safety T data. 10. OIC conducts a prefire safety briefing with the launcher chiefs. 11. Road guards are briefed and posted (if applicable). 12. Observers have received necessary training, are briefed, have the required items, and

are posted. 13. FDC verifies that the range is clear, radar is set (if applicable), and observers are

oriented to observe the rockets.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-87

14. Communication is established and maintained between the OIC, FDC, firing launcher, observers, radar (if applicable), and road guards (if applicable). If at any time communication is lost between any of these elements, all firing will be halted.

15. FDC contacts range control for a wet check-in code. 16. FDC receives a launcher status. 17. FDC transmits MET to launcher. If MET is manually entered, all lines of MET will be

read back to FDC and verified. NOTE: Recommend that a few lines of MET be read back to the FDC even if it was sent digitally. NOTE: The same MET that was used to compute the Safety T must be sent to launcher for the live fire mission.

18. OIC/FDC ensures that radar is set (if applicable), observers are ready, Exclusion Area I is clear of personnel, and the roads are blocked (if applicable).

19. FDC transmits fire mission. 20. Launcher moves to the FP, parks on the heading, and lays the LM. 21. FDC and OIC (FDC) ensure receipt of “Advanced Ready,” and verify the data is safe.

NOTE: The OIC will ensure that an MLRS FDC Fire Mission Log (DA Form 7232-R) is maintained in the FDC.

DURING FIRING 22. FDC sends the fire command. 23. Ensure that the chief reports “SHOT” to the controlling FDC. 24. Road guards remain in place (if applicable). 25. Communication is maintained. 26. All rockets launched safe; ensure that the chief reports “ROUNDS COMPLETE” to the

FDC. NOTE: The LM is not to be stowed until all rounds are declared safe by the OIC.

AFTER FIRING 27. Ensure that the FDC receives the MFR. 28. Observers and/or radar (if applicable) report rounds observed safe. 29. FDC announces that all rounds were observed safe, then instructs the launcher to stow

the LM. 30. Launcher stows and moves off the firing point. 31. FDC/FDNCO prints out all data for the fire mission.

Chapter 2

2-88 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-23. Launcher Checklist

EXAMPLE OF A LAUNCHER CHECK DATA CHECKLIST

BEFORE COMPUTING CHECK DATA 1. Launcher crews receive a check data briefing from the FDC/OIC. 2. Chief conducts a check data briefing with his crew. 3. Section chief verifies that the correct option is selected for Hang Fire “STOP,” Misfire

“STOP,” Use LP/C 2 on Rocket Malfunction, “NO.” Section chief reviews hang fire and misfire procedures per SOP.

4. Chief verifies resolvers (at stow). NOTE: M270A1 azimuth resolver ±1.8, elevation resolver ±2.0; M142 HIMARS azimuth resolver ±7.0 mils, elevation resolver ±3.2 mils.

5. If mask is present at the FP, it will be measured and reported to the FDC for input. NOTE: High QE will be selected by launchers during startup procedures if required.

LAUNCHER CHECKLIST 6. Chief ensures that the gunner purges previous MET, fire missions, and firing points from

the FCS database. 7. Chief sends a “LCHR STATUS” to the FDC. 8. Launcher receives current MET from the FDC. 9. If manual MET is used, section chief will verify MET by reading all lines of MET back to

the FDC. NOTE: Recommend that a few lines of MET be read back to the FDC even if it was sent digitally. NOTE: The RSO will verify all startup data to include verification of current MET in use.

10. Launcher receives fire mission. 11. Gunner transmits digital “WILL COMPLY” to the FDC. 12. Chief and gunner review and record the fire mission in the MLRS Launcher Fire Mission

Log (DA Form 7233-R). 13. Launcher moves to the firing point. 14. Launcher is parked on firing point (distance from FP marker based on range control

limits) or within the OPAREA. 15. All launchers are parked within ±100 mils (or within range control limits if less) of the

parking heading. 16. Gunner lays the LM. 17. Chief visually verifies that the LM is oriented downrange toward the AOF.

NOTE: The section chief will ensure that AZ, QE, and fuze time and other pertinent data are recorded on the MLRS Launcher Fire Mission Log (DA Form 7233-R) before rocket launch.

18. Chief reads command data to the FDC.

Safety

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 2-89

Table 2-24. OIC/FDC Launcher Checklist

EXAMPLE OF A CHECK DATA CHECKLIST USING LAUNCHERS (OIC/FDC CHECK DATA CHECKLIST) SAFETY T DEVELOPMENT

1. Ensure that the target is entered into the fire control system and verified by map spot. 2. Ensure that the launcher grids for startup are correct for the firing point if the launcher is

not GPS aided and operating in inertial mode. 3. Ensure MET validity.

4. Ensure that at least two launchers have dry fired each check mission one time each and that their firing solutions meet range specific check tolerances.

5. Ensure that the launcher chief has verified that no immediate mask is present at the FP. If a mask is present, it will be measured and reported to the FDC for input.

6. FDC conducts downrange mask checks and inputs data if required. 7. FDC contacts range control for a wet check-in code. 8. FDC receives a launcher status. 9. FDC transmits MET to launcher. If MET is manually entered, all lines of MET will be

10. FDC transmits fire mission. 11. Ensure that launcher moves to the firing point, parks on the heading, and lays the LM. 12. Chief reads back command data to the FDC. 13. FDC computes the data for each Safety T. The Safety T will include the firing

point/OPAREA they apply to, the time the MET data was flown and the date it was prepared, and the munitions in use.

14. Safety T data is verified by the FDC and the OIC/NCOIC. 15. Check data launchers are ordered to purge their databases and ensure that no previous

fire missions, FPs, or MET exists in the FCS. This is required only if the launcher will be a live fire launcher.

Chapter 2

2-90 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 2-24. OIC/FDC Launcher Checklist (Continued)

EXAMPLE OF AN SDC CHECK DATA CHECKLIST (OIC/FDC CHECK DATA CHECKLIST) SAFETY T DEVELOPMENT

1. Ensure that the target is entered into the fire control system and verified by map spot. 2. Ensure that the launcher grids for startup are correct for the firing point if the launcher is

not GPS aided and operating in inertial mode. 3. Ensure MET validity.

4. Develop and plot the SDZ requirements on a map or overlay. Identify the geographical location of the target box or target selection boxes, whichever is applicable. Range control may or may not provide these locations.

5. Ensure that at least two safety certified individuals verify all data input into the SDC. FDC computes the data for each Safety T. The Safety T will include the firing point/OPAREA they apply to, the time the MET data was received and the date it was prepared, and the munitions in use.

6. Safety T data is verified by the FDC and the OIC/NCOIC. 7. FDC contacts range control for a wet check-in code.

NOTE: The firing launcher must use the same valid MET that was used in computing the Safety T. Safety Ts will be updated upon receipt of new MET.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-1

Chapter 3

13F Fire Support Tables Chapter 3 provides commanders, Fire Support Officers (FSOs), and Fire Support NCOs (FSNCOs) a standardized method of training and qualifying the fire support (FS) personnel assigned to their organizations. This chapter includes training and qualification standards for all Fire Support Teams (FISTs), Combat Observation and Lasing Teams (COLTs), Joint Fires Observers (JFOs), and Fires Cells.

INTRODUCTION 3-1. The training strategy for the FS elements of the Brigade Combat Teams (BCTs) is a progressive, Crawl, Walk, Run (C, W, R) strategy that must be integrated into the training plans of both the Fires Battalion and the Maneuver Force. In the Infantry Brigade Combat Teams/Heavy Brigade Combat Teams/Stryker Brigade Combat Teams (IBCTs/HBCTs/SBCTs) the FISTs/COLTs must participate in the crew gunnery training programs of the BCTs as a gate to participation in Direct/Indirect Mounted Gunnery. The FS Tables provide a methodology to train both observers and Fires Cells and support the events and tasks described in the Combined Arms Training Strategies for the HBCT, SBCT, and IBCT.

TRAINING WITH FIRE SUPPORT TABLES 3-2. Gunnery training programs should be developed that support the commander’s Mission Essential Task List (METL), develop and sustain qualified observer teams and Fires Cells, and provide a means to evaluate, certify, and qualify teams and cells. The FS Tables consist of the Artillery Skills Proficiency Test (ASPT), individual training (Table I), observer team and fires cell collective training (Tables II, III, and IV), and certification and qualification (Tables V and VI).

3-3. The BCT FSO and 13F Master Gunner must ensure that the FS training program— • Certifies and qualifies observer teams to support mortar and Fires Battalion live fire exercises

(LFXs). • Is integrated with the vehicle crew gunnery program. • Maintains proficiency and qualification of JFOs (see Tables II and IV). • Certifies and qualifies Fires Cell to support Company through BCT collective training exercises. • Supports the Commander’s METL.

SECTION I – ASPT FOR FIRE SUPPORT 3-4. The ASPT evaluates the FIST/COLT member’s ability to execute selected FS related skills. The tasks listed in this chapter provide the unit commander a means to evaluate the FIST member’s basic proficiency before LFXs. The ASPT can also be used as a guide for identifying team strengths and weaknesses. The commander, Master Gunner, and senior FSO should use ASPT results when structuring the unit’s annual gunnery training program.

REQUIREMENTS 3-5. All personnel assigned to a FIST/COLT will be assessed in the ASPT. FS personnel are required to pass the ASPT prior to FIST qualification. To pass the ASPT, an observer must receive a GO on all stations. If an observer fails a task, he must be retrained and retested on that station until he receives a GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare, administer, and evaluate the ASPT.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3-6. The commander will incorporate risk assessment in planning all aspects of this training. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station in accordance with the unit SOP.

Chapter 3

3-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Note. Evaluators must have passed the ASPT within 6 months before the testing.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCESS 3-7. Before the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test station. When the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator logs the Soldiers in on a roster at each station and provides each Soldier with all materials and equipment displayed, as outlined on this section and in the Test Administrative Guide for that station. The evaluator reads the instructions to the Soldier exactly as written in the guide for each station. The evaluator must use the criterion scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each Soldier’s performance. As each Soldier finishes or the time limit is up (whichever occurs first), the evaluator checks the Soldier’s performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs him of his performance on that task, and directs him either to the next station or to further training.

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES FOR SOLDIERS RECEIVING A NO-GO 3-8. If a Soldier does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion scoring checklist, he receives a NO-GO. The Soldier must then be critiqued on that task, given an explanation of his mistakes, and told what to do to correct them. Soldiers will be retrained and retested in accordance with the local SOP.

EVALUATION CRITERIA 3-9. See attached criterion scoring checklist for each task provided in the test station administrative guidance.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED 3-10. The personnel, equipment, and material in the following list should be considered for all stations, but their use depends on the task to be trained. Additional items, if required, are listed in the Test Administrative Guide for each particular station.

• Primary evaluator (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test (he may also occupy a test station).

• Station evaluator, SGT or above (one per test station). • Classroom or training area. • Stopwatch (one per evaluator). • Criterion scoring checklist and GO/NO-GO checklist (one per Soldier). • Desk and chair or clipboard (one per test station). • Pencils (one per Soldier). • TC 3-09.8. • Lensatic compass. • Binoculars.

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 3-11. The evaluator tasked to conduct the ASPT should consider the following elements below during his planning:

The ASPT 3-12. The evaluator must determine whether the ASPT will be a diagnostic test or record test. A “diagnostic” ASPT identifies the unit’s strengths and weaknesses, provides information for the gunnery program, and assesses newly assigned personnel. A “record” ASPT allows a commander to certify proficiency of Soldiers to meet artillery table prerequisites.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-3

Determine the Test Site 3-13. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all stations; for example, Station 7, Conduct a Terrain Sketch, requires a clear view of surrounding terrain at ranges representing those of an observation post (OP). Refer to the station conditions for each station to determine what is needed for that station.

Construct a Test Station Diagram 3-14. Before rehearsing the test, create a test station diagram. This diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. The ASPT can be conducted using the “round robin” example, as the steps do not need to be done in any specific order in order to accomplish the training. The best methodology to complete the “round robin” would be to break the Soldiers down into three to four man teams (number of personnel dependent), and allow them to begin at different stations. As the Soldier teams complete all the stations, they would be directed to the control station in order to annotate the training and address any deficiencies. This diagram will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The diagram should include the following elements: test stations, control station, direction of rotation, movement schedule, concurrent/retrain station, and aid station/warm-up tent, if available. Figure 3-1 depicts an example test station diagram.

Figure 3-1. Test station diagram

Determine Resources 3-15. The evaluator must determine the resources necessary to support the ASPT. He must consider the support of the test site, as well as the training aids required to conduct the test to standard. The evaluator can determine training aids or actual equipment, such as a desktop computer, for recognition of combat vehicles (ROC-V), BFIST (or other vehicle platforms), and laser range finders (LRFs) by referring to the individual station in this and following chapters. To support the test site, the Non-Commissioned Officer in Charge (NCOIC) must determine the amount of support needed to conduct the test; for example, BFIST with drivers, transportation to and from the test site, tents for warm-up briefings, stopwatches, tables for scoring, chairs, medical support, and Class I support if needed. Once the NCOIC has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the Master Gunner or battalion S-3.

Select Evaluators 3-16. Evaluators should be selected as far in advance as possible. This gives the NCOIC time to select the most qualified personnel available and time to coordinate with other units, if necessary; it also allows the

Chapter 3

3-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

evaluator time to prepare. If the FSO/FSNCO must draw on resources from outside his unit, he should request assistance from the Master Gunner. After the evaluators have been selected, the FSNCO will brief them on their duties and responsibilities, the test schedule and location, and the station they will be testing.

Test Evaluators 3-17. Evaluators must be technically proficient in performing all tasks to standard. Each evaluator is tested on all test stations.

Conduct a Rehearsal 3-18. Because of the size and scope of this test, it must be rehearsed before it is administered. This rehearsal will be conducted at the test site with all evaluators present. The FSNCO should check each station to ensure that the evaluator is aware of his duties and responsibilities, the station is set up correctly with all training aids and test materials on hand, and testing is conducted in accordance with the Test Administrative Guides.

Conduct the ASPT 3-19. Before the testing, the FSNCO must ensure that the stations are set up and all equipment and training aids are available. He must also ensure that the Soldiers are briefed on safety and the station locations and that the Soldiers are assigned to the test stations. During testing, the FSNCO will spot check each station to ensure the task standards are being maintained and the evaluators are maintaining a roster of personnel evaluating and annotating the scorecards correctly.

Conduct the AAR for the ASPT 3-20. The Brigade FSO should conduct an AAR to help the FSNCO understand his actions and interactions during the conduct of the ASPT. The AAR should be conducted before the unit commander’s debrief and should consist of a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the FSNCO to better prepare the commander’s debrief as well as prepare him for the next ASPT.

Prepare Debrief 3-21. Once the test is complete, the FSNCO will prepare a brief for the commander informing him of the ASPT results. (This information will also be retained for training records.) As soon as the Soldiers complete the training and before anyone leaves the test site, the Soldiers’ scorecards will be collected. The evaluators can provide additional information about a Soldier’s test performance. After all data is collected, they prepare a summarization of the results. Information from test results must be interpreted to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the unit. At a minimum, this report will contain the following data:

• A roster, by duty position, of each Soldier tested. • The scores of each Soldier tested. • The percentage of Soldiers passing the ASPT. • The percentage of GOs per station. • The percentage of NO-GOs per station. • Assessment of tasks receiving NO-GOs, what caused the NO-GOs • Recommended corrective action.

TEST STATIONS 3-22. Each station consists of a Test Administrative Guide and criterion scoring checklist as required.

INTEGRATED COMBINED ARMS BATTLE FOCUSED TRAINING 3-23. All combat vehicle crew proficiency tests and qualification tables should be integrated with the training and qualification ranges of the supported force when feasible.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-5

TABLE 3-1. Test Stations

FIST ASPT 1. Combat Vehicle Skills Proficiency Tests 2. Mission Equipment Package Test Station 3. Mounted Land Navigation Test Station 4. Dismounted Land Navigation Test Station 5. Prepare Laser Range Finder/Designator for Operation Dismounted Mode Test Station 6. Operate Communications Test Station 7. Construct a Terrain Sketch Test Station 8. Recognition of Combat Vehicles Test Station

COMBAT VEHICLE SKILLS PROFICIENCY TEST STATION

STATION 1

PREPARE THE M1131 STRYKER FIRE SUPPORT VEHICLE (FSV) FOR OPERATIONS

061-284-1007 CONDITIONS: Given an M1131 Stryker FSV with standard combat load, a four man FIST team, and TM 9-2320- 311-10. This task should not be trained in MOPP. STANDARDS: IAW TM 9-2320-311-10.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLIDER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) on the M1131

Stryker Fire Support Vehicle (FSV).

2. Assembled .50 Caliber/M2 Machine Gun Mount. 3. Assembled the Ground/Vehicular Laser Locator Designator (G/VLLD). 4. Assembled the Night sight Mount 5. Assembled the Night sight for operation. 6. Performed boresight collimation for G/VLLD to Night Sight. 7. Performed initial switch settings. 8. Powered up TSCP. 9. Initialized TSCP.

10. Verified PLGR was set to receive in FOM1. 11. Powered up SCU. 12. Initialized SCU. 13. Initialized communications platform. 14. Conducted communications check. 15. Powered up the FBCB2-BFT. 16. Logged in to the FBCB2-BFT.

Chapter 3

3-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PREPARE THE M1200 ARMORED KNIGHT VEHICLE (AKV) FOR OPERATIONS

061-284-1008 CONDITIONS: Given an M1200 Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) with standard combat load, a three man COLT team, and TM 9-2320-380-10. This task should not be trained in MOPP.

STANDARDS: IAW TM 9-2320-380-10. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLIDER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Performed PMCS on vehicle. 2. Assembled M240B/M249 Machine Gun Mount. 3. Assembled LDM Mount for FS3. 4. Assembled FS3. 5. Performed boresight collimation for FS3. 6. Performed initial switch settings. 7. Powered up TSCP. 8. Initialized TSCP. 9. Verified DAGR was set to receive in FOM1.

10. Powered up SCU. 11. Initialized SCU. 12. Initialized communications platform. 13. Conducted communications check. 14. Powered up the FBCB2-BFT. 15. Logged in to the FBCB2-BFT.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-7

PREPARE THE M707 KNIGHT VEHICLE FOR OPERATIONS 061-284-1009

CONDITIONS: Given an M707 Knight vehicle with standard combat load, a three man COLT team, and TM 9- 2350-362-10. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: IAW TM 9-2350-362-10. EVALUATION PREPARATION: Setup: Ensure that all equipment and reference materials are available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the soldier's performance. Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier what he is required to do IAW the task conditions and standard. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Performed PMCS on vehicle. 2. Assembled M240B/M249 machine gun mount. 3. Assembled G/VLLD for Operations (G/VLLD only). 4. Assembled Nightsight Mount 5. Assembled Nightsight 6. Performed boresight collimation for G/VLLD to Nightsight 7. Assembled LDM mount 8. Assembled FS3 9. Performed boresight collimation for FS3

10. Performed initial switch settings 11. Power up LCU or SCU (FOS Device). 12. Initialized LCU or SCU 13. Power up TSCP. 14. Initialized TSCP 15. Initialized communications platform 16. Conducted commo check

Chapter 3

3-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PREPARE THE BRADLEY FIRE SUPPORT VEHICLE (BFIST) FOR OPERATIONS

061-284-1010 CONDITIONS: Given an M7 or M3A3 Bradley Fire Support vehicle (BFIST) with standard combat load, a four man FIST team, and TM 9-2350-297-10-1. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: IAW TM 9-2350-297-10-1. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLIDER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Conducted PMCS on vehicle and equipment. 2. Ensured that the fire suppression switch was in Auto. 3. Turned on master power. 4. Turned on engine accessories switch. 5. Verified control panels were operational. 6. Pressed fuel control handle. 7. Pressed horn. 8. Started engine. 9. Checked TEC fault light.

10. Allowed engine to warm up. 11. Powered TSCP (M7 BFIST) 12. Initialized TSCP (M7 BFIST) 13. Verified PLGR was set to receive in FOM1. 14. Powered up SCU/LCU 15. Initialized SCU/LCU 16. Powered up HTU. 17. Powered up ISU (M7 BFIST). 18. Powered up communications equipment.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-9

MOUNTED LAND NAVIGATION TEST STATION TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 2 (FIST AND COLT PERSONNEL)

NAVIGATE FROM ONE POINT ON THE GROUND TO ANOTHER POINT WHILE MOUNTED

071-COM-1030 CONDITIONS: You are a member of a squad or team in a field environment and have been directed to conduct mounted movement to a designated point. You have a 1:50,000-scale topographic map of the area, a coordinate scale, a protractor, a magnetic compass, and a vehicle with cross-country capability. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Navigate to the designated point using terrain association, dead reckoning, or combination of the two.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED: • Training criteria from TC 3-09.8 • BFIST, M998A1 FIST-V, Stryker vehicle, M707 Knight vehicle, and M1200 Armored Knight • Vehicle TM

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 160 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 165 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Before the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator will select an area that has varying terrain and vegetation. The area must be large enough to have 8 points that are 1,000 to 5,000 meters apart. Each point is on or near an identifiable terrain feature and is marked on the ground with a sign containing a letter or number. Dummy signs are placed not less than 100 meters or more than 200 meters to the right and left of the correct point. Clearly mark all correct points on the map. Prepare a sheet of paper giving the azimuth and distance for each leg of the course. Have pencils available for the Soldiers.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER:

1. Terrain association. Give the Soldier the map and tell him to direct the driver and vehicle over the course recorded on the map. Tell the Soldier to record the letter or number at the end of each leg of the course. Tell the Soldier the course will be covered using terrain association.

2. Dead reckoning with steering marks. Give the Soldier a protractor, a compass, and a sheet of paper with the azimuth and distance for each leg of the course. Maps are not used. Tell the Soldier to direct the driver and vehicle over the course recorded on the paper. Tell the Soldier to record the letter or number at the end of each leg to the course. Tell him the course will be covered using steering marks.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Navigated using terrain association. 2. Navigated using dead reckoning. 3. Navigated using a combination of dead reckoning and terrain

association.

Chapter 3

3-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

DISMOUNTED LAND NAVIGATION TEST STATION TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 3 (FIST AND COLT PERSONNEL)

NAVIGATE FROM ONE POINT ON THE GROUND TO ANOTHER POINT WHILE DISMOUNTED

071-329-1006

CONDITIONS: Given a 1:50,000-scale topographic map of the area; a coordinate scale; a protractor; a magnetic compass; a designated point on the ground; and a requirement to conduct dismounted movement to the designated point. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Navigate to the designated point using terrain association, dead reckoning, or a combination of the two.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED: • Training criteria from TC 3-09.8 • 1:50,000 scale map • Compass • Protractor

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 60 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 65 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Before the Soldier arrives, the evaluator will select an area with varying terrain and vegetation that is large enough to have 2 points, 1,000 to 2,000 meters apart. Each point will be on or near an identifiable terrain feature and will be marked on the ground with a sign containing a letter or number. Dummy signs should be placed not less than 100 meters nor more than 200 meters to the right and left of the correct point. Clearly mark all correct points on the map. Prepare a sheet of paper giving the azimuth and distance for each leg of the course to be covered. Have pencils available for the tested Soldier. INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER:

1. Terrain association. a. Give the Soldier the map and tell him to identify the best route to take between the 2 points that have been plotted on the map (1,000 to 2,000 meters apart). NOTE: The best route must have been determined by a subject matter expert before the test. b. Give the Soldier the map and tell him he must move from point A plotted on the map to point B (1,000 to 2,000 meters apart) using terrain association (no compass will be used). Tell him how much time he has to complete the course.

2. Dead reckoning. Give the Soldier the sheet of paper with the azimuth and the distance for each leg of the course (3 to 5 points, 200 to 500 meters apart), and the compass; no map will be used. Tell the Soldier to move over the course shown by the azimuth and the distance on the paper. Tell the Soldier to record the letter or number at the end of each leg of the course. Tell the Soldier how much time he has to complete the course. NOTE: Time standards will be based on the average time it takes two subject matter experts to complete the course plus 50 percent; for example: subject matter expert time, 1 hour. One hour added to 50 percent = course test time of 1 hour, 30 minutes. Soldier being tested will be given 10 minutes to study the map and to determine their course of action. At the end of this time, the Soldier will move to the start point and begin the test.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-11

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Navigated using terrain association. 2. Navigated using dead reckoning. 3. Navigated using a combination of dead reckoning and terrain

association.

PREPARE LASER RANGE FINDER/DESIGNATOR FOR

OPERATION DISMOUNTED MODE TEST STATION TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 4 (ALL)

PREPARE LASER RANGE FINDER/DESIGNATOR (G/VLLDMELIOS, LLDR) FOR OPERATION DISMOUNTED MODE

061-274-5100, 061-274-5101

CONDITIONS: Given a laser range finder/designator w/power conditioner, dismounted collimator, compass, and an area of observation.

STANDARDS: Soldier performs PMCS on all equipment, properly sets up the laser range finder/designator in a dismounted mode in accordance with the appropriate TM, prepares for night operations, and performs initial check of equipment.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED: • Training criteria from TC 3-09.8 • Declinated compass • Operational laser range finder/designator

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Before the Soldier arrives, the evaluator will select an area with a panoramic view of surrounding terrain such as an observation post (OP) and have an operational laser range finder/designator ready for the Soldier. The observer is responsible for ensuring that the impact area is clear of personnel and equipment prior to firing, and spotting all fired rounds. The observer must ensure that all applicable laser safety procedures are being followed.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: You are currently located at an OP. You must successfully perform pre- operation checks, properly set up the laser range finder/designator for 24 hour operations, and perform the initial check of equipment in accordance with the TM. This is a timed event. You will have 10 minutes to complete the assigned tasks. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin. (Start the time.)

Chapter 3

3-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

G/VLLD 061-274-5100 Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. The Soldier properly identified all equipment. 2. The Soldier performed PMCS in accordance with the TM. 3. The Soldier properly set up the equipment for 24-hour operations. 4. The Soldier performed an operational check on the assigned laser range

finder/designator.

AN/PED-1 Lightweight Laser Designator Rangefinder 061-274-5101 Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Prepared LLDR for operation. a. Assembled LLDR b. Powered up the system. c. Set up GPS. d. Established Communication e. Entered system data. f. Performed 12-Step AVAM Compensation. g. Saved settings. h. Configured system. i. Performed system test j. Set designation code (PRF Code). k. Boresighted the LLDR.

2. Determined target location 3. Designated target 4. Performed system shutdown procedures

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-13

OPERATE COMMUNICATIONS TEST STATION TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 5 (ALL) OPERATE SINCGARS ADVANCED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM (ASIP)

WITH VIC-3 061-275-8004

CONDITIONS Given an operational radio set AN/VRC-90F, RT-1523E/F, AN/PYQ-10 (SKL), TM 11-5820-890- 10-6, and DA Form 2404 (Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet) or ULLS equivalent.

STANDARDS: You must enter a radio net, send a message, and leave a radio net using the proper call signs, call sign sequence, prowords, phonetic alphabet and numerals with 100 percent accuracy

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED: • Training criteria from TC 3-09.8 • SINCGARS ICOM. Fill device with frequency hopping data • TM 11-5820-890-10-1 • Operational distant station • DA Form 2404

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Before the Soldier arrives, the evaluator will check communications with the distant station and ensure that all equipment is operational.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: You must successfully prepare the SINCGARS for operation; perform preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) and operator troubleshooting procedures; and correctly establish communications from a control box in all required modes with a distant station. You have 10 minutes to complete the task. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin. (Start the time.)

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed Voice Communications. 2. Prepared the SINCGARS for Operation.

a. Defined Terms and Definitions. b. Identified Controls and Indicators. c. Identified Characteristics and Components. d. Conducted Start-Up Procedures.

3. Operated Simple Key Loader (SKL). a. Identified Characteristics and Components. b. Prepared the Simple Key Loader for Operation. c. Loaded Single Key. d. Loaded Equipment. e. Loaded Platform

4. Performed Basic Operator Maintenance on a SINCGARS Radio Set. 5. Recognized Electronic Attack and Implemented Electronic Protection. 6. Performed Tactical Communications.

Chapter 3

3-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONSTRUCT A TERRAIN SKETCH TEST STATION TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 6 (ALL)

CONSTRUCT A TERRAIN SKETCH 061-283-5002

• Training criteria from TC 3-09.8 • Declinated compass • Tactical overlay with zone of supported unit, location of three fired on targets, a registration

point, and object to be CRP • Map of operational area • OF Fan

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Before the Soldier arrives, the evaluator will select an area with a panoramic view of surrounding terrain, such as an OP, and have pencils available for the Soldier.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: You are currently located at an OP. Your grid location is as follows: __________________________. You must successfully construct a terrain sketch with direction measured within ±100 mils of actual direction in accordance with ATP 3-09.30. You have 10 minutes to complete the task. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin. (Start the time.)

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-15

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Drew the terrain and manmade features within the zone of observation

on paper.

a. Drew skyline (horizon). b. Drew intermittent crests, hills, and ridges. c. Drew all natural terrain features. d. Drew all manmade objects. e. Drew "T" format label for each reference point and target.

2. Determined “T” data for each known and reference points on the terrain sketch.

a. Labeled reference points with name, target number, or known point designation at the top of the "T" bar.

b. Determined the direction for each known point and reference points. c. Labeled the right side of the "T" format with the corresponding data. d. Determined the distance, altitude (alt), and grid for each known point. e. Labeled the right side of the "T" format with the corresponding data. f. Labeled observer's name, date, and grid location in the lower right

corner.

RECOGNITION OF COMBAT VEHICLES TEST STATION

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 7 (ALL)

RECOGNITION OF COMBAT VEHICLES

CONDITIONS: You will be seated at the computer and administer the computer assisted ROC-V (Visible) posttest (all FIST, COLT) and the ROC-V (1st or 2d Gen).

STANDARDS: Each Soldier will achieve a minimum score of 70 on each sub-test (ROC-V Visible, SMCT, ROC- V [1st or 2d Gen if equipped with night vision sights]).

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED: • Training criteria from TC 3-09.8 • Computer hardware/software requirements as specified in POI for ROC-V

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 30 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 35 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: The commander must determine the appropriate vehicles to include in the record test based on METL. The ROC-V instructor module allows the selection of combat vehicles to be included. The program of instruction (POI) for ROC-V Train the Trainer, ROC-V (Visible), ROC-V (1st Gen), and ROC-V (2d Gen) are available on CD-ROM and at https://rocv.army.mil. You will be required to log in with your CAC and then select the ROC-V or ROC-IED tab for the training you want to take. If you have any problems accessing the Web site or

Chapter 3

3-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

require CD copies of the training, you may contact the proponent, the Night Vision and Electronic Sensor Directorate, via e-mail at [email protected].

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN:

ACTION: Complete Visible Posttest.

1. Select the posttest button and allow the test to load. An image will appear on the screen. 2. Select the vehicle name from the choices presented on the screen. 3. The next image will appear. Repeat step. 4. When finished with the last vehicle, an AAR will appear. You may scroll to view the entire screen. The AAR

summarizes how well you identified the targets in the images. The answers you correctly gave are shaded in green. Incorrect answers are colored red. If you answered both correctly and incorrectly for the same target during the testing process, the button will appear with both green and red. Clicking in a red box will show your answer along with the correct vehicle so that you may see the differences between the two.

5. Click on the Next button. 6. This will end the posttest and you will be taken to the ROC-V main menu.

ACTION: Complete the SMCT Test.

1. Click on the SMCT Test button. 2. The Login Screen appears. Complete login information screen and click on the Next button. 3. Select type and difficulty level for the test you would like to take. Click on the Next button. 4. Complete the SMCT test. 5. When finished with last vehicle, another AAR like the first will appear. Click on the Next button to continue. 6. This will end the SMCT test and you will be taken to the ROC-V main menu.

Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin. (Start the time.)

PERFORMANCE MEASURES: The performance measures for this task are included in the computer based training and pre/posttests. As demonstrated levels of performance increase, the time standards may be adjusted to increase the degree of difficulty of the tasks or to simulate combat conditions as required.

SECTION II – FIRE SUPPORT TABLES 3-24. The FS Tables are designed to train the observer teams and Fires Cells in the FS tasks necessary to provide timely and accurate indirect fires in support of the maneuver commander’s intent. The tables provide a structure of progressive, gated training from individual through qualification at the artillery team level.

FIRE SUPPORT TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL TASKS 3-25. Tasks listed in Fire Support Table I are the basic individual tasks that members of the FIST/COLT/Fires Cells must master before proceeding to team level tasks. Once individuals have demonstrated proficiency in the basic skills required to set up and operate the equipment by successfully completing the ASPT, they use those skills to perform the basic tasks listed in Table I. The training on the basic individual tasks in FS Table I should be trained and evaluated during the weekly team training and constitutes the crawl level training of these tasks. A written examination may also be used as a diagnostic tool. Sample questions are available on the Fires Knowledge Network, Master Gunner Web Site (http://sill-www.army.mil/428thfa/Master_Gunner/index.html) for the commander’s use in developing an examination for Table I tasks.

INDIVIDUAL TASKS FOR FIRES CELLS 3-26. As a prerequisite to provide effective FS planning, Fires Cells at all levels must know the Military Decision Making Process (MDMP) and be able to mirror the steps in FS planning. They must also understand

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-17

both lethal and non-lethal effects and ensure both are integrated in the targeting process and in the Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance (ISR) planning. To accomplish these tasks, assigned personnel must know, understand, and be able to define all doctrinal terms including Fire Support Coordination Measures, Targeting Terms, and Fire Planning tools.

Table 3-2. Fire Support Table I – Basic FS Skills (Individual)

Task Number Task Title Skill Level Observer Individual Tasks

061-283-1001 Determine Direction Within the Target Area 1 061-283-5000 Operate the Pocket-Sized Forward Entry Device 1

071-COM-1003 Determine a Magnetic Azimuth Using a Lensatic Compass 1 071-329-1004 Determine the Elevation of a Point on the Ground Using a

Military Map 1

071-329-1009 Convert Azimuths 1 071-329-1014 Locate an Unknown Point on a Map and on the Ground by

Intersection 1

071-329-1015 Locate an Unknown Point on a Map and on the Ground by Resection

071-510-0001 Determine Azimuth Using a Protractor 1 071-510-0002 Compute Back Azimuth 1

071-COM-1011 Orient a Map Using a Lensatic Compass 1 113-610-2044 Navigate Using the AN/PSN-11 1 061-276-1012 Install OE-254/GRC Antenna Group 1 061-355-5100 Prepare a Forward Observer System (FOS) for Operation 1 061-355-5102 Initialize a FOS Device 1 061-355-5105 Shut Down the FOS Device 1 061-355-3001 Supervise the Processing of a Fire Plan Using FOS 3 061-283-1002 Locate a Target by Grid Coordinates 1 061-283-1003 Locate a Target by Polar Plot 1 061-283-1004 Locate a Target by Shift from a Known Point 1 061-283-1011 Engage Targets with Indirect Fires 1 061-283-5002 Construct a Terrain Sketch 1 061-284-1017 Engage Targets with a Precision Guided Munition (PGM) 2 061-284-1000 Control Attack Aviation 2 061-283-2002 Conduct Final Protective Fires 2

Chapter 3

3-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 3-2. Fire Support Table I – Basic FS Skills (Individual) (Continued)

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-283-2051 Establish an Observation Post 2 061-283-2104 Conduct a Mortar Registration 2 061-283-2206 Request Fire on Irregularly Shaped Targets 2 061-284-1001 Process Platoon Forward Observer Target List 2 061-284-5006 Engage a Moving Target with Indirect Fire 2 061-284-1002 Control AC130 Gunship Fire 2 061-284-4005 Plan The Employment of Mortars 3 061-284-4009 Develop an Observation Plan 3 113-610-2005 Navigate using the Defense Advanced Global Positioning

System (GPS) Receiver (DAGR) 2

NONE Digital Training/Proficiency Check List Fires Cell Individual Tasks

061-284-3032 Process Observer Target List 3 061-284-1011 Post Information on a Situation Map/Overlay 1 061-284-1005 Refine Target Location Using Precision Strike Suite for Special

Operations Force (PSS-SOF) 3

061-284-3033 Plan Company Team Fire Support 3 061-284-3039 Clear Indirect Fires 3 061-284-3055 Plan for the Employment of Special Munitions 3 061-284-1006 Perform Collateral Damage Estimate Methodology 4 061-284-1015 Produce Targets in a Fire Support Element (FSE)/Fires Cell (FC) 4 061-284-1016 Plan a Joint Close Air Support (JCAS) Request 4 061-284-4006 Coordinate Fire Support 4 061-284-4008 Conduct Rehearsals – TF and Above 4 061-284-4036 Produce Targeting Products 4 061-284-1014 Supervise the Establishment of the Fire Support Element (FSE)/

Fires Cell (FC) 4

061-284-4012 Coordinate Requests for Naval Surface Fire Support 4 061-284-4014 Produce a Quick Fire Plan 3 061-274-5100 Prepare the AN/TVQ-2 (G/VLLD) with Equipment Set

AN/UAS/12 for Operation 1

061-274-5101 Operate the AN/PED-1 Lightweight Laser Designator Rangefinder

061-274-3987 Construct a Laser Range Safety Fan 2 061-284-3044 Supervise the Establishment of Fire Support Team

Communications 3

061-300-5011 Transmit Messages using AFATDS 1 061-300-5015 Process Target Information Using AFATDS 1 061-300-5047 Process a Received Fire Support Munitions Restriction

Guidance Using AFATDS 1

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-19

OBSERVER INDIVIDUAL TASKS DETERMINE DIRECTION WITHIN THE TARGET AREA

061-283-1001

CONDITIONS: Given a Warning Order (WARNO) or BCT/Task Force Operations Order (OPORD), a reference point within the target area with a known direction, terrain sketch, field artillery binoculars, a compass, and a target in the target area. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: To the nearest 60 mils (10 mil increments) of the actual direction. EVALUATION PREPARATION: Setup: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the soldier's performance. Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier what he is required to do in accordance with (IAW) the task conditions and standard. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Identified the reference point or target within the target area. 2. Estimated the direction using the eight (8) cardinal directions. 3. Determined the direction by scaling from a map. 4. Determined the direction using a compass. 5. Determined the direction measuring from a reference point. 6. Determined the direction using other measuring devices.

a. Determined the direction using an aiming circle. b. Determined the direction using a G/VLLD. c. Determined the direction using a GPS.

OPERATE THE POCKET-SIZED FORWARD ENTRY DEVICE (PFED) AN/PSG-10

061-283-5000 CONDITIONS: Given a man pack radio, map, compass, binoculars, observed fire fan, protractor, ruggedized handheld computer with determined Observer Identification, Warning Order, Target Location, Target Description, Method of Engagement, and Method of Fire and Control data

STANDARDS: In sequential order until desired target effects are accomplished IAW TB 7010-350-10. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the performance measures and the references to score the Soldier’s performance. Brief the Soldier. Tell the Soldier what he is required to IAW the task conditions and standards. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Prepared PFED for operations. 2. Created Digital Reports and Messages utilizing the Pocket-Sized Forward Entry

Device (PFED)

3. Transmitted Digital Reports and Messages utilizing the Pocket-Sized Forward Entry Device (PFED)

4. Received Digital Reports and Messages utilizing the Pocket-Sized Forward Entry Device (PFED)

5. Processed a Fire Mission Request utilizing the Pocket-Sized Forward Entry Device (PFED)

(Note: Digital Training Checklist for PFED is located at the end of Table I and Table IV: Execute Fires)

Chapter 3

3-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

DETERMINE A MAGNETIC AZIMUTH USING A LENSATIC COMPASS 071-COM-1003

CONDITIONS: You are a member of a squad or team in a field environment and have been directed to determine a magnetic azimuth. You have a compass and a designated point on the ground. STANDARDS: Determined the correct magnetic azimuth to the designated point within 3 degrees using the compass to cheek method, and within 10 degrees using the center hold method. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with the equipment and or materials described in the conditions statement. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is expected of him by reviewing the task standards. Stress to the Soldier the importance of observing all cautions, warnings, and dangers to avoid injury to personnel and, if applicable, damage to equipment. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Inspected the compass. 2. Determined direction. 3. Determined the azimuth using the compass-to-cheek method. 4. Determined the azimuth using the center-hold method.

DETERMINE THE ELEVATION OF A POINT ON THE GROUND

USING A MILITARY MAP 071-329-1004

CONDITIONS: As a member of a dismounted squad given a 1:50,000 scale military map and a military protractor. You have been directed to determine the elevation of a point on the map. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Determine the elevation of the designated point to within half the value of the contour interval. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with the equipment and/or materials described in the conditions statement. BRIEF THE SOLDIER: Explain what is expected of the Soldier by reviewing the task standards. Stress to the Soldier the importance of observing all cautions, warnings, and dangers to avoid injury to personnel and, if applicable, damage to equipment. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Identified the contour interval and unit of measurement used on the map from the elevation guide.

2. Identified the point on the map. 3. Determined the direction of up elevation and down elevation. 4. Determined the elevation of the identified point.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-21

CONVERT AZIMUTHS 071-329-1009

CONDITIONS: Given a standard 1:50,000 scale military map with a declination diagram, a pencil, and magnetic and grid azimuths that must be converted.

STANDARDS: Convert the given magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth and the given grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth without error.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Give the Soldier a standard 1:50,000 scale military map, a piece of paper, a pencil, and a magnetic and grid azimuth to convert. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to convert the magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth and the grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined the correct grid azimuth. 2. Determined the correct magnetic azimuth.

LOCATE AN UNKNOWN POINT ON A MAP AND

ON THE GROUND BY INTERSECTION 071-329-1014

CONDITIONS: As a member of a patrol team, you are given a 1:50,000-scale military map, a magnetic compass, a military protractor, a pencil, paper, an item with a straight edge such as a ruler or folded piece of paper, at least two well-defined points on the ground that can be located on the map, an observed unknown point, and a requirement to determine the location of the unknown point on the map. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Determine the grid coordinates of the unknown point to within 100 meters; include the two-letter 100,000 meter square identifier using either the map and compass method or the straight line method. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with the equipment and / or materials described in the conditions statement. BRIEF THE SOLDIER: Explain what is expected of the Soldier by reviewing the task standards. Stress to the Soldier the importance of observing all cautions, warnings, and dangers to avoid injury to personnel and, if applicable, damage to equipment. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Identified an unknown point on a map by intersection using the map and compass method.

2. Identified an unknown point on a map by intersection using the straightedge method.

Chapter 3

3-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

LOCATE AN UNKNOWN POINT ON A MAP AND ON THE GROUND BY RESECTION

071-329-1015

CONDITIONS: As a member of a patrol team, you are given a 1:50,000-scale military map, a magnetic compass, a military protractor, a pencil, paper, an item with a straight edge such as a ruler or folded piece of paper, at least two well-defined points on the ground that can be located on the map, and a requirement to determine your location. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Determine the grid coordinates of your location to within 100 meters; include the two-letter 100,000 meter square identifier using either the map and compass method or the straight line method. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with the equipment and / or materials described in the conditions statement. BRIEF THE SOLDIER: Explain what is expected of the Soldier by reviewing the task standards. Stress to the Soldier the importance of observing all cautions, warnings, and dangers to avoid injury to personnel and, if applicable, damage to equipment. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Identified your location on a map by resection using the map and compass method.

2. Identified your location on a map by resection using the straightedge method.

DETERMINE AZIMUTH USING A PROTRACTOR

071-510-0001 CONDITIONS: As a member of a squad, given a 1:50,000-scale military map, a military protractor (GTA 05-02- 012), a pencil, paper, a designated starting point on the map, and a designated ending point on the map. You have been directed to determine the azimuth from the starting point to the ending point. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Identify the starting point and ending point on the map, draw a straight line on the map connecting the points, align the protractor to the map, and determine the value of the angle.1 degree or 20 mils.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with a 1:50,000 scale military map, 2 points plotted and labeled (A) and (B), a protractor, a straightedge, and a pencil. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to determine the azimuth from point (A) to point (B) within 1 degree or 20 mils.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified the starting point on the map. 2. Identified the ending point on the map. 3. Drew a straight line on the map connecting the two points. 4. Aligned the protractor to the map. 5. Determined the value of the angle.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-23

COMPUTE BACK AZIMUTH 071-510-0002

CONDITIONS: As a member of a squad given a pencil, paper, an azimuth in degrees, and an azimuth in mils. You have been directed to compute back azimuth. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Determine the back azimuth for each given azimuth to the exact degree or mil.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with azimuths, one in degrees and one in mils. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to compute the exact back azimuths. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Determined back azimuth using degrees. 2. Determined back azimuth using mils.

ORIENT A MAP USING A LENSATIC COMPASS 071-COM-1011

CONDITIONS: You are a member of a squad or team in a field environment and have been directed to orient a map in preparation for movement. You have a 1:50,000-scale topographic map of the area and a compass. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Orient the map to the ground using a compass. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with the equipment and or materials described in the conditions statement. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is expected of him by reviewing the task standards. Stress to the Soldier the importance of observing all cautions, warnings, and dangers to avoid injury to personnel and, if applicable, damage to equipment. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Determined the direction of the declination and its value from the declination diagram.

2. Laid the map in a horizontal position. 3. Used one of the two techniques to orient the map.

Chapter 3

3-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

NAVIGATE USING THE AN/PSN-11 113-610-2044

CONDITIONS: This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation; given an operational precision lightweight global positioning system (GPS) receiver (PLGR) AN/PSN-11; battery, lithium, storage, BA-5800/U; Data Transfer Device (DTD); initialization, setup, and waypoint information; and TM 11-5825-291-13. NOTE: Supervision and assistance are available. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Operated the PLGR with COMSEC variables by entering setup and waypoint information, receiver acquiring four satellites, and successfully navigating to five waypoints within 60 minutes. EVALUATION PREPARATION: Setup: For this evaluation, prepare equipment and ensure equipment is operational. Provide sufficient initialization, setup, and waypoint data information to the soldier so that the PLGR can be used to navigate. Prepare a navigation course. Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier all performance measures must be accomplished within 60 minutes. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Entered or verified correct setup displays. 2. Entered crypto keys. 3. Entered and verified initialization displays. 4. Entered waypoint information. 5. Checked status displays to ensure acquisition of four satellites. 6. Navigated to five waypoints.

INSTALL ANTENNA GROUP OE-254/GRC 061-276-1012

CONDITIONS: Given an antenna group, OE-254/GRC, AN/PRC-119F, one assistant and an operational distant station. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Successfully assemble, perform operator's preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), erect and connect to a combat net radio, establish radio communications with a distant station, lower, disassemble, and stow the OE-254 antenna IAW TM 11-5985-357-13. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Solider what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Performed safety procedures. 2. Performed operator’s PMCS and troubleshooting. 3. Assembled the antenna. 4. Raised the antenna (two persons). 5. Connected the antenna to a combat radio. 6. Established communications with a distant station. 7. Lowered the antenna (two persons). 8. Disassembled the antenna. 9. Stowed the antenna.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-25

PREPARE A FORWARD OBSERVER SYSTEM (FOS) FOR OPERATION 061-355-5100

CONDITIONS: Given a Forward Observer System (FOS) device, power source, radio set, laser locator designator, necessary power and communication interface cables, and TB 11-7021-228-10-1/2/3/4.

STANDARDS: Prepared the FOS device for operation IAW TB 11-7021-228-10-1/2/3/4.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Verify that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Solider what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Installed FOS internal power source. 2. Installed FOS external DC power source. 3. Installed FOS external AC power source. 4. Connected FOS to external equipment (SINCGARS, printer, IPADS). 5. Positioned the FOS keyboard. 6. Powered up the FOS. 7. Adjusted brightness, contrast, and keyboard backlight. 8. Logged in Username and Password. 9. Display FOS Startup Display to initialize the FOS System.

10. Entered the required data on the SETUP Screen. 11. Entered the required data on the NET STATUS Screen. 12. Entered the required data on the MEMBER DATA Screen. 13. Entered the required data on the MAP MODIFICATION Screen. 14. Pressed F2 and <STOP>.

INITIALIZE A FOS DEVICE

061-355-5102

CONDITIONS: Given an operational device loaded with Forward Observer System (FOS) software, initialization data, and the appropriate Technical Bulletin.

STANDARDS: Initial FOS device IAW appropriate manual.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Verify that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected the operational mode. 2. Entered FOS setup data. 3. Entered NET status data. 4. Entered member data. 5. Entered map modification data.

Chapter 3

3-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SHUT DOWN THE FOS DEVICE 061-355-5105

CONDITIONS: Given an operational FOS Device which has been initialized, communications established with other net members, and TB 11-7021-228-10-1.

STANDARDS: Shut down the FOS device IAW TB 11-7021-228-10-1.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLIDER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected the operational mode. 2. Entered FOS setup data. 3. Entered NET status data. 4. Entered member data. 5. Entered map modification data.

SUPERVISE THE PROCESSING OF A FIRE PLAN USING FOS

061-355-3001

CONDITIONS: Given a unit operating in a tactical environment, operational FOS Device, a current database, an operator and Fire Plan information.

STANDARDS: The Fire Plan is processed with FOS without error.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Established the preplanned target list in the FOS device. 2. Established the fire plan schedule in the FOS device. 3. Verified targets to be fired within each group. 4. Verified the targets to be fired within each series. 5. Transmitted the fire plan target list to higher for scheduling. 6. Verified the fire plan schedule. 7. Disseminated the Fire plan.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-27

LOCATE A TARGET BY GRID COORDINATES 061-283-1002

CONDITIONS: Given an observer location, map with OF fan, compass, artillery binoculars, left and right limits to zone of responsibility, writing instrument, blank paper, and a Center Reference Point (CRP). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Within 250 meters of the target location. EVALUATION PREPARATION: Setup: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the soldier's performance. Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier what he is required to do in accordance with (IAW) the task conditions and standard. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Located observer position on map. 2. Oriented map. 3. Applied OF fan to map. 4. Labeled OF fan. 5. Measured direction to target. 6. Measured distance to target. 7. Applied direction and distance to OF fan. 8. Determined target coordinates from map.

LOCATE A TARGET BY POLAR PLOT

061-283-1003

CONDITIONS: Given an observer location, map with OF fan, protractor, compass, artillery binoculars, left and right limits to zone of responsibility, writing instrument, blank paper, and a target with known grid location. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Within 250 meters of the target location. OTHER INFORMATION: Ensure that any briefing, references, and equipment necessary to perform the task are provided to the Soldier. Use the references and evaluation guidelines to score the Soldier’s performance. Upon completion of the task inform the Soldier of the score received (“GO” or “NO-GO”). If the Soldier received a “NO- GO” provide remedial training on the step(s) performed incorrectly. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Identified the observer’s location to the FDC. 2. Determined the observer-target (OT) direction. 3. Estimated the distance to the target. 4. Determined a vertical shift, if significant. 5. Announced direction, distance, and vertical shift to target.

Chapter 3

3-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

LOCATE A TARGET BY SHIFT FROM A KNOWN POINT 061-283-1004

CONDITIONS: Given an observer location, map with OF fan, compass, artillery binoculars, left and right limits to zone of responsibility, writing instrument, blank paper, and a Center Reference Point (CRP). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Within 250 meters of actual target location. EVALUATION PREPARATION: Setup: Ensure that a target is readily identifiable to the soldier and the equipment listed in the conditions is present and operational. The evaluator must know the grid location, direction, and distance to the target that will be used. Brief Soldier: Identify the target to the soldier. Tell the soldier to determine the location of the target using the shift from the known point method of target location. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Located the target. 2. Identified a known point near the target. 3. Measured the OT direction. 4. Measured the lateral shift from the known point to the OT line. 5. Measured/estimated the range change along the OT line. 6. Measured a vertical shift, if significant. 7. Announced known point, direction to target, lateral, range, and vertical shift

from known point to target.

ENGAGE TARGETS WITH INDIRECT FIRES

061-283-1011 CONDITIONS: Given a man pack radio, map, compass, binoculars, observed fire fan, protractor, ruggedized handheld computer with determined Observer Identification, Warning Order, Target Location, Target Description, Method of Engagement, and Method of Fire and Control data. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: In sequential order until desired target effects are accomplished IAW ATP 3-09.30.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that a target is readily identifiable to the Soldier and the equipment listed in the conditions is present and operational. The evaluator must know the grid location, direction, and distance to the target that will be used. BRIEF SOLDIER: Guide the Soldier to the target without identifying the type target. Tell the Soldier to engage the target.

NOTE: Ensure that the tested Soldier understands exactly what is expected of him, but do not help him in any way.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-29

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Conducted a Quick Smoke Mission.

a. Determined maneuver target line, most vulnerable point, wind direction, and adjusting point for smoke.

b. Transmitted request for quick smoke mission within 70 seconds of cue. c. Requested shell smoke once the 200-meter bracket has been split.

2. Conducted an Immediate Smoke Mission. a. Determined placement point of immediate smoke. b. Transmitted Observer ID, Immediate Smoke, and Target Location within 25

seconds.

c. Transmitted refinement and surveillance EOM. 3. Conducted Coordinated Illumination.

a. Determined location of suspected enemy activity. b. Transmitted request for illumination within 45 seconds. c. Transmitted adjustment corrections within 10 seconds. d. Determined enemy activity. e. Transmitted "Coordinated Illumination" within 10 seconds. f. Transmitted request for fire within 45 seconds. g. Adjusted high explosive (HE) and, if necessary, illumination within 10

seconds.

h. Engaged target. i. Transmitted refinement, end of mission, and surveillance.

4. Conducted an Immediate Suppression Mission. a. Determined target location +/- 150 meters of actual target location. b. Transmitted observer call sign, "IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION" and target

location.

c. Suppressed target. d. Transmitted final refinement data, end of mission, and the effects observed.

5. Conducted a Suppression Mission. a. Determined target location +/- 150 meters of actual target location. b. Transmitted observer call sign, “SUPPRESSION" and target location. c. Suppressed target. d. Transmitted final refinement data, end of mission, and the effects observed.

Chapter 3

3-30 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONSTRUCT A TERRAIN SKETCH 061-283-5002

CONDITIONS: Given an observer location; map with OF fan; compass; artillery binoculars; left and right limits to zone of responsibility; writing utensil; blank paper; and an object to be Center Reference Point (CRP).

STANDARDS: Produce an accurate panoramic representation of the terrain, skyline, intermittent crests, hills, and ridges, natural terrain and manmade features within the zone of observation and responsibility to include zone limits, direction, distance and grids correctly labeled in the T format.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Drew skyline. 2. Drew intermittent crests, hills, and ridges. 3. Drew all natural terrain features. 4. Drew all manmade objects. 5. Measured the direction to all known points, reference points, and terrain

features.

6. Labeled all points with available data using “T” format. 7. Labeled observer’s name, date, and grid location in the lower right corner.

ENGAGE TARGETS WITH A PRECISION GUIDED MUNITION (PGM)

061-284-1017

CONDITIONS: Given a laser designator device (only required for laser missions), a laser range finder, targets, observer location, map, communications with the Battalion Fires Cell, a Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF) code (only required for laser missions), a PGM and a National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA) validated mensuration tool with current imagery in a combat environment.

STANDARDS: Achieved desired effects on target IAW ATP 3-09.30.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment and reference materials are available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

NOTE: The observer is responsible for ensuring that the impact area is clear of personnel and equipment prior to firing, and spotting all fired rounds. When the G/VLLD or any other device is being used for lasing, the observer must ensure that all applicable laser safety procedures are being followed.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Grid Attack (location determined within 3 meters with the mensuration tool). 2. IR Attack. 3. Laser Designate. 4. Laser Anoint. 5. Laser Anoint Offset.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-31

CONTROL ATTACK AVIATION 061-284-1000

CONDITIONS: Given an Attack Aviation Platform, a 1:50,000 map, an OF fan, a compass, a terrain sketch (drawn by the observer), communications with Pilot, a GPS, a LRF, binoculars, night vision goggles (during hours of limited visibility), a marking device for friendly positions and enemy targets, and an enemy target. "Rules of Engagement and Rules of Interaction have been provided. Coalition forces and noncombatants, such as refugees, media, Non Government Organizations, and contract personnel may be present in the operational area." Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Utilize the appropriate techniques and equipment to control attack aviation assets on the battlefield without sustaining any fratricide.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use, Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Properly planned the mission. 2. Properly prepared the 5 Line. 3. Transmitted the Situation Update. 4. Transmitted the 5 Line. 5. Confirmed target was properly marked. 6. Confirmed correct Brevity Codes used IAW FM 1-02.1. 7. Used proper Laser Designating procedures (only when designating for Hellfire). 8. Received BDA from attacking team.

Chapter 3

3-32 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONDUCT FINAL PROTECTIVE FIRES 061-283-2002

CONDITIONS: Given FPF location guidance, friendly unit locations, observer location, a map, OF fan, compass, a terrain sketch (with CRP, L & R limits, known points), artillery binoculars, a target list, communications with FDC (voice or digital). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Adjust the final protective fires (FPF) on the location indicated by the company and/or team commander, without fratricide, IAW ATP 3-09.30.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined adjusting point and attitude 400 to 600 meters beyond friendly

troops.

2. Transmitted request for fire. 3. Transmitted adjustments starting with the closest flanking round that impacts

nearest to the FPF line.

4. Transmitted refinement. 5. Recorded FPF. 6. Ended the mission.

ESTABLISH AN OBSERVATION POST 061-283-2051

CONDITIONS: Given laser equipment, a compass, coordinate scale, OF fan, a map, artillery binoculars, an OPORD/OPLAN, a mission with location to establish an OP, left and right limits of zone of observation, and communications. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP..

STANDARDS: Establish an observation post IAW ATP 3-09.30.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected primary and alternate OPs and routes. 2. Established security. 3. Occupied OP and refined location. 4. Established communications with higher HQ. 5. Transmitted coordinates to higher HQ. 6. Prepared laser equipment for operation. 7. Prepared terrain sketch. 8. Updated situation map. 9. Verified planned targets with triggers.

10. Improved security.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-33

CONDUCT A MORTAR REGISTRATION 061-283-2104

CONDITIONS: Given a compass, observer location, a map, observed fire (OF) fan, a terrain sketch, artillery binoculars, communications with FDC (voice and/or digital), and a fire order from the FDC. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Register the mortar platoon IAW ATP 3-09.30.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Received fire order from FDC to begin a registration. 2. Transmitted location to registration point when prompted by the FDC. 3. Transmitted corrections to the FDC.

a. Established one round over and one round short. b. Fired last round within 50 meters.

4. Transmitted refinement and recorded registration point. 5. Requested section right/left when instructed by FDC to adjust sheaf. 6. Adjusted sheaf. 7. Announced “Sheaf is adjusted, end of mission” once refinement corrections for

all mortars had been transmitted.

REQUEST FIRE ON IRREGULARLY SHAPED TARGETS 061-283-2206

CONDITIONS: Given irregularly shaped targets, observer location, map with an observed fire (OF) fan, a terrain sketch (with left and right limits and known points), artillery binoculars, communications with the fire direction center (FDC), and ATP 3-09.30. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Engage the target by initiating a call for fire within 45 seconds.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Transmitted call for fire within 45 seconds. 2. Engaged target. 3. Transmitted refinement, end of mission, and surveillance.

Chapter 3

3-34 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PROCESS PLATOON FORWARD OBSERVER TARGET LIST 061-284-1001

CONDITIONS: Given a target number block, zone of responsibility, observer’s location, a map, artillery binoculars, Signal Operating Instructions (SOI), company and platoon leader’s guidance, appropriate field manuals, and communications with the Fire Direction Center (FDC) and Fire Support Team (FIST) headquarters.

STANDARDS: Prepare the forward observer target list and submit it through the proper channels IAW ATP 3- 09.30 and FM 6-20-40.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Received target guidance from proper authority. 2. Plotted targets on map or overlay. 3. Assigned appropriate target number to each target. 4. Entered:

a. Target description that was planned to be attacked b. Grid location c. Altitude d. Attitude e. Size

5. Prepared the Forward Observer target list. 6. Submitted the Forward Observer target list to the proper authority for approval. 7. Disseminated the Forward Observer target list to appropriate agencies.

ENGAGE A MOVING TARGET WITH INDIRECT FIRE 061-284-5006

CONDITIONS: Given a moving target, observer location, a map, Observed Fire (OF) Fan, a terrain sketch (with left and right limits and known points), binoculars, compass, and communication with the Fire Direction Center (FDC). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Engage a moving target IAW ATP 3-09.30.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined target as threat and met attack criteria. 2. Calculated the intercept point and trigger. 3. Transmitted call for fire. 4. Transmitted subsequent corrections within 10 seconds. 5. Engaged target. 6. Transmitted refinement, end of mission, and surveillance.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-35

CONTROL AC130 GUNSHIP FIRE 061-284-1002

CONDITIONS: Given a 1:50,000 map, an observed fire (OF) fan, a compass, a terrain sketch (drawn by the observer), communications with a gunship, a GPS, an LRF, binoculars, night-vision goggles (during hours of limited visibility), IR lights, (or other marking devices), and an enemy target. Rules of Engagement and Rules of Interaction have been provided. Coalition forces and noncombatants, such as refugees, media, Non-Government Organizations, and contract personnel may be present in the operational area. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Complete the AC-130 request within 45 seconds of target identification; mark the target, and adjust the gunship onto the target. Follow all procedures specified in the JP-3-09.3 (J-FIRE). Target is engaged without fratricides. End-of-mission and battle damage assessment is sent without delay when the desired effects have been achieved.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLIDER: Tell the Solider what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Properly planned the mission. 2. Conducted SEAD (If necessary). 3. Properly prepared the 5 Line. 4. Conducted AUTHENTICATION procedure (if necessary). 5. Transmitted Situation Update. 6. Transmitted 5 Line. 7. Confirmed gunship has “VISUAL” on friendlies. 8. Confirmed target was properly marked. 9. Confirmed gunship TALLEY’s target.

10. Commanded gunship to “Engage the Target” (At My Command Only). 11. Adjusted fire from impact using range (meters) and cardinal direction. 12. Transmitted “Successful” or “Unsuccessful” with accurate BDA.

Chapter 3

3-36 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PLAN THE EMPLOYMENT OF MORTARS 061-284-4005

CONDITIONS: Given a Maneuver Task Force planning and employing mortars during combat operations. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: The Battalion FSNCO plans for mortar employment IAW the Battalion Commander’s Intent and Guidance for Fires.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Tell him that the assistant is to help in backing up the vehicle.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Employed mortars that supported the Commander’s intent. 2. Advised the Battalion Commander on mortar weapon system advantages over

other Fire Support means.

3. Planned: a. Command relationships b. Priorities of fires c. Best means of employment d. Displacement techniques to be used

4. Verified that survey and MET support was available to the mortars.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-37

DEVELOP AN OBSERVATION PLAN 061-284-4009

CONDITIONS: Given a Battalion/Task Force or Brigade planning combat operations and developing courses of action, IPB products, draft EFSTs, and a proposed target list. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: An observation plan is developed for each COA that assures redundant observers are in place for each EFST.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Tell him that the assistant is to help in backing up the vehicle.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Developed an Observation Plan that incorporates:

a. Security b. Observation of targets and triggers c. Communications

2. Selected proposed primary, alternate, and redundant OPs for each FST and/or HPT.

3. Determined primary and alternate routes to the proposed OPs using the MCOO, or determined method and route of insertion if not by ground.

4. Verified line of sight for FM communications with delivery units and FC. 5. Calculated triggers for each target. 6. Tested feasibility of triggers using battle calculus and refined as necessary. 7. Determined most suitable method of extraction. 8. Validated or refined the OP during war gaming. 9. Integrated the OP into the Fire Support Plan and the FSEM after COA approval.

10. Rehearsed plan with observers.

Chapter 3

3-38 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

NAVIGATE USING THE DEFENSE ADVANCED GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) RECEIVER (DAGR)

113-610-2005 CONDITIONS: Given a DAGR GPS in any environment where the Soldier has to maintain constant awareness at all times. The student will be aware of Contemporary Operational Environment factors such as extreme temperature differences, unstable political state and hostile locals are of the essence to maintain vital communications. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Met when the Soldier successfully navigates to 2 out of 3 assigned locations using the DAGR GPS in any environment while observing the Contemporary Operational Environment.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: Provide the Soldier with all material and equipment listed in the condition statement.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Entered Menu and selected the Op mode. 2. Entered main menu and set the Display Setup 3. Entered Main menu and set the Receiver Setup 4. Entered or verified correct setup displays. 5. Entered crypto keys. 6. Entered and verified initialization displays. 7. Entered waypoint information. 8. Navigated to five waypoints.

Prepare PFED for Operation Performance Measure GO No GO

1 Installed the batteries 2 Installed the battery adapter 3 Attached the PLGR/LASER Cable to the PFED 4 Attached the Radio Cable to the PFED 5 Connected the MELIOS/PLGR Cable to the PLGR 6 Connected the MELIOS/PLGR Cable to the Laser Range Finder 7 Connected the SINCGARS ASIP Radio Cable to the Radio

Initialize the PFED Performance Measure GO No GO

1 Clicked on Start 2 Clicked on PFED 3 Entered password 4 Clicked on OK 5 Entered current position a. Tapped on Position with the stylus b. Tapped on MGRS with the stylus c. Clicked on UTM d. Verified location data (if PLGR/GPS is attached) 6 Clicked on Set Time a. Verified hour and minute data b. Clicked OK (if PLGR/GPS is attached) 7 Clicked OK on the main grid location screen 8 Input user information

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-39

a. Clicked Edit on the lower left of the main screen b. Clicked on User Info c. Tapped on the keyboard d. Clicked on 123 (Toggles keyboard) e. Tapped on Call Sign f. Input Call Sign g. Tapped on Observer Id h. Input Observer Id i. Tapped on Unit Name j. Input Unit Name (must be exact as name in AFATDS master unit list) k. Tapped on URN l. Input URN data (must be exact as name in AFATDS master unit list) m. Tapped on Service dropdown n. Selected Army o. Tapped on the Role dropdown p. Selected Forward Observer q. Tapped on the Echelon dropdown r. Selected Squad s. Tapped on Keyboard t. Tapped on Laser Info u. Entered Laser Code v. Entered Cloud Height (in meters, feet , or appropriate measurement) w. Selected m (Meters) from the measurement dropdown list x. Entered Visibility y. Selected m (Meters) from the distance dropdown list z. Tapped OK aa. Closed the User Information screen by clicking OK 9 Enter Map Information a. Tapped on Edit b. Selected Map Info c. Tapped on the GN window d. Adjusted GN window to mirror the gird convergence chart on the map d. Tapped on the GM Angle # symbol e. Input the GM Angle and clicked OK f. Selected mils from the dropdown g. Tapped on the Grid Convergence # symbol h. Input the Grid Convergence and tapping OK i. Selected mils from the dropdown j. Closed the Map Information screen by clicking OK

10 Setup Devices (Sensors and Communications) a. Tapped on Edit b. Tapped on Comms c. Tapped on Devices d. Tapped on Add for Sensors e. Selected the device from the Sensors list (PLGR, MELIOS, etc) f. Tapped on the device to highlight g. Tapped on the Config Icon on the lower right hand side of the screen h. Verified data exist i. Tapped on OK j. Tapped on Add for Comms k. Selected the device from the Comms list (SINCGARS, Two-Wire) l. Input the Network Name m. Selected the Network Type from the dropdown list

Chapter 3

3-40 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

n. Entered the Station Address o. Tapped on Advanced p. Selected the Mod from the dropdown list q. Selected the Baud rate from the dropdown list r. Selected the Error from the dropdown list s. Selected the Network Access Delay data (Hi Init, Hi Sub, Lo Init, Lo Sub) t. Input Key Time data u. Closed the TACFIRE Settings screen by tapping on OK v. Closed the TacLink Setup screen by tapping on OK w. Turn on Commo Devices x. Tapped Commo Device to highlight y. Tapped on the GO Icon NOTE: If you receive the error “Device setting have changed, please perform Soft

Reboot” OK the window. Exit PFED and insert stylus into the reset button at the bottom of the RPDA.

z. Tapped OK to close the Device Setup Screen 11 Input subscribers addresses a. Tapped on Edit b. Tapped on Comms c. Tapped on Addresses d. Tapped on New e. Input Call Sign f. Select Device type from the dropdown list g. Input the URN data h. Tapped on New i. Selected Net Address to connect through k. Selected Message Format from the dropdown list l. Input the Station Address m. Tapped on the Primary on Net box n. Tapped on Process Messages o. Selected messages to process (all or individually) p. Tapped on OK to close the Process Messages screen q. Tapped on OK to close the Connection Setup screen r. Tapped on OK to close the Edit Address screen

12 Input Target Numbers a. Tapped on Edit b. Tapped on Fire Support c. Tapped on Target Numbering from the list d. Entered Target Number data e. Tapped on OK to close the Auto Target Numbering screen

13 Setup Auto Position Reporting a. Tapped on Edit b. Tapped on Prefs c. Tapped on Auto Position Reporting from the list d. Tapped on the ON radio button e. Selected the measure in which to Report Position (Time, Distance, or Both) f. Input either time or distance in which the report would be generated g. Tapped on OK to close the Auto Position Reporting screen

14 a. Tapped on Edit b. Tapped on Prefs c. Tapped on Hotkeys from the list d. Tapped on Button # to highlight e. Selected CFF Template for Buttons 1 - 3 f. Tapped OK in the upper right corner to close the Hotkeys Setup screen

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-41

15 Input default measurement Units for a. Position b. Meters c. Direction d. Alt/Elev e. Speed f. Tapped OK to close the Measurement Units Sel screen

16 Input password 17 Purge Databases (as required) 18 Input Planned Target List a. Tapped Edit b. Tapped Fire Support c. Tapped on Planned Target List NOTE: if update message is received select No and update later d. Select the Mission Type e. Select location type f. Input UTM data g. Input target description data (size and type) h. Tapped more button i. Select the Method of Engagement j. Select the Method of Fire and Control k. Tapped OK l. Tapped Save m. Tapped OK in the upper right corner to close the Planned Target List

19 Associate Targets to Hotkeys (as necessary) 20 Load imagery using SD Card 21 Initialize PFI Viewer

Initialize the Lightweight Forward Entry Device (RHC-2/SCU)

Performance Measure GO No GO 1 Log into the LFED 2 Display the Forward Observer Software (FOS) startup screen on the RHC a. Press F8 (if not previously loaded or software is unusable) b. Press Enter/Return key c. Select the FOS operational mode d. Enter data (1) Setup (2) Sensor Setup/Status (select “Dismount” if the RCU/SCU is not mounted in the

BFIST/Knight

(3) Channel Status (4) Member Data (5) Auto Target Numbering (only required if an FO/FIST or FSO/CDR) (6) MAP Modification 3 Active Networks 4 Establish Member Monitor (as required) 5 Establish Self Location Criteria a. Enter known location b. Calculate self-location c. Enter Altitude d. Enter Laser One Point Method (Ensure HTU is not in sleep mode) e. Enter Laser Two Point Method (Ensure HTU is not in sleep mode) 6 Transmit the OBSR LOC Message 7 Enter Survey Form Header Data 8 Establish transmit/receive requirement on the Legal Message Table

Chapter 3

3-42 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

FIRES CELL INDIVIDUAL TASKS PROCESS OBSERVER TARGET LIST

061-284-3032

CONDITIONS: Given an operation order, target list worksheet, a map, execution matrix, communications equipment, and a fire support team.

STANDARDS: Planned targets are consolidated, approved, and received by the battalion Fires Cell.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Consolidated all targets and target lists. 2. Refined targets. 3. Resolved duplications. 4. Assigned target numbers. 5. Prepared target list worksheet. 6. Plotted labeled targets on the map. 7. Briefed Commander for approval. 8. Forwarded target list to the BN FSO for approval.

POST INFORMATION ON A SITUATION MAP/OVERLAY

061-284-1011

CONDITIONS: Given an observer location, map with OF fan, compass, artillery binoculars, left and right limits to zone of responsibility, writing instruments, overlays, and a Center Reference Point (CRP). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: IAW FM 1-02.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. Have a list of current tactical information available to the Soldier. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Plotted control measures on the tactical situation overlay. 2. Plotted fire support coordination measures on the tactical situation overlay. 3. Plotted unit locations on the tactical situation overlay. 4. Plotted indirect firing unit locations and range capabilities on the range

capability overlay.

5. Plotted all preplanned target information on the target overlay.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-43

REFINE TARGET LOCATION USING PRECISION STRIKE SUITE FOR SPECIAL OPERATIONS FORCE (PSS-SOF)

061-284-1005

CONDITIONS: As a certified NGA accredited fire support team NCO in field environment, given a target, observer location, map, artillery binoculars, lensatic compass, radio communications, LLDR, and a FOS device loaded with PSS-SOF software.

STANDARDS: Determine the refined location of the target within 3 meters of actual location IAW National System for Geospatial Intelligence Concept of Operations (CONOPs) for the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA) Target Coordination Mensuration (TCM) Program Accreditation, dated 28 Apr 2010.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment and references are available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier's performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined target location. 2. Transmitted or manually entered grid into FOS device with PSS-SOF. 3. Created a target marker icon. 4. Used mapping tools in PSS-SOF to refine target location. 5. Generated a refined grid, bearing and range to target. 6. Transmitted refined location to the Fire Support Element.

PLAN COMPANY TEAM FIRE SUPPORT

061-284-3033

CONDITIONS: Given a company team preparing for combat operations, a Task Force OPLAN/OPORD and commander’s intent and guidance for fire support. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: A Fire Support plan is created which includes at a minimum all assigned targets, an observation plan and a scheme of fires. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Obtained enemy operations and fire support information. 2. Issued warning order. 3. Developed tentative plan to support the company team scheme of maneuver. 4. Initiated movement as required. 5. Conducted reconnaissance with the company team commander. 6. Completed plan based on the results of the reconnaissance. 7. Briefed fire support portion of the OPORD. 8. Conducted back-briefs, rehearsals, PCC, and PCI.

Chapter 3

3-44 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CLEAR INDIRECT FIRES 061-284-3039

CONDITIONS: Given units conducting combat operations, an OPORD, map with situation overlay, Target List, and communications with higher and adjacent units. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Indirect fires are positively cleared to ensure attack of enemy will not result in casualties to friendly forces or noncombatants.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Monitored call for fire target location. 2. Determined if the target location was within boundaries, and short of the CFL of

requesting observer.

3. Compared target location to situation map to determine if units are within impact of grid, called to confirm if not positive.

4. Contacted higher or adjacent unit FSO, FDC to clear or deny fires. 5. No casualties to friendly forces or noncombatants from indirect fire.

PLAN FOR THE EMPLOYMENT OF SPECIAL MUNITIONS 061-284-3055

CONDITIONS: Given an OPORD, Intelligence Annex/INTSUM, Commander’s scheme of maneuver, Situation Overlay, and map. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Special Munitions are planned to support the Commander’s scheme of maneuver.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Planned Improved Conventional Munitions (ICM). 2. Planned FA delivered SCATMINE. 3. Planned Illumination. 4. Planned Smoke. 5. Planned Copperhead.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-45

PERFORM COLLATERAL DAMAGE ESTIMATE METHODOLOGY 061-284-1006

CONDITIONS: As a certified JTS accredited Fire Support NCO, given a fire mission request, the current No Strike List (NSL), a Collateral Damage Estimate (CDE) Worksheet, appropriate CER tables and related CDE publications in a field environment. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Accurately implement the Collateral Damage Methodology for the fire mission request.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment and references are available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Accurately recorded fire mission request. 2. Positively identified target validity. 3. Deconflicted target against NSL and RTL. 4. Conducted general target size analysis. 5. Conducted weaponeering assessment. 6. Conducted a refined assessment. 7. Conducted a casualty estimate assessment. 8. Determined appropriate CDE Classification level. 9. Cleared or denied target engagement IAW assessments.

10. Produce CDE Graphic recommendation

PRODUCE TARGETS IN A FIRE SUPPORT ELEMENT (FSE)/FIRES CELL (FC) 061-284-1015

CONDITIONS: Given a selected course of action (COA), IPB products, and Commander’s Intent and guidance for fire support

STANDARDS: Targets are developed using the Decide, Detect, Deliver, and Access (D3A) methodology that meets the Commander’s guidance for fire support.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment and references are available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified that:

a. The intelligence collection plan is focused on high-payoff targets. b. All target acquisition assets are fully employed. c. Target acquisition systems understand target selection standards and battle

damage assessment requirements.

d. Communication links have been established between the detection systems and delivery systems to include a backup delivery system for each high- payoff target.

e. Backup target acquisition systems are identified. 2. Notified collection asset managers of target attack and target location. 3. Reviewed the results of the attack to determine if reattack is required.

Chapter 3

3-46 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PLAN A JOINT CLOSE AIR SUPPORT (JCAS) REQUEST 061-284-1016

CONDITIONS: Given a Brigade- or Battalion-level tactical situation and multiple requests for preplanned and immediate Joint Close Air Support (JCAS).

STANDARDS: JCAS is planned IAW the Commander’s guidance.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified potential use of other fire support systems. 2. Determined target suitability for an air attack. 3. Resolved potential airspace conflicts. 4. Integrated safeguards and coordination measures in plan. 5. Prepared the DD Form 1972. 6. Coordinated request through appropriate agencies (Pre-Planned Request). 7. Monitored immediate request and assisted with clearance procedures

(Immediate Request).

8. Transmitted approved mission request data to requestor. 9. Monitored mission and recorded/relayed effects and BDA information.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-47

COORDINATE FIRE SUPPORT 061-284-4006

CONDITIONS: Given an OPORD, map, situation overlay, a fire support status chart, the Commander’s concept of operation, and communications with higher and adjacent units.

STANDARDS: All available Fire support assets synchronized with all Six War-fighting Functions.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined status of fire support assets. 2. Assisted in determining FS tasks from maneuver Operation Plan and higher Fire

Support Plan.

3. Assisted in developing fires that integrate into developing concept of operations (Course of Action [COA] Development).

4. Assisted in the Wargame (COA Analysis, COA Comparison, and COA Approval).

5. Assisted in the production of targeting products (Orders Production). 6. Plotted targets to verify non-duplication, locations are beyond FLOT, and do not

violate any FSCM.

7. Coordinated with units that have targets in adjacent maneuver unit sectors, large targets requiring multiple echelon firing units, and/or fixed/rotary-wing targets.

8. Recommended repositioning of fire support delivery units and radar assets. 9. Verified FSOs and observers know the locations of the maneuver boundaries,

FA-delivered SCATMINE safety boxes, and other FSCMs.

10. Developed in coordination with the engineer and S-3 the FA-delivered SCATMINE safety boxes.

11. Positioned observers in redundancy. 12. Verified target locations with calculated trigger point locations. 13. Established Final Protective Fires (FPF) and priority targets. 14. Provided MET and survey to mortars. 15. Established refinement cutoff time. 16. Assisted with Staff Supervision by conducting back-briefs, combined arms and

fire support rehearsals, and managed refinement.

17. Verified during rehearsals: a. Target locations. b. Trigger points. c. Execution of essential for support tasks. d. Fire support execution matrix. e. Fire support coordination measures. f. Timing and synchronization up for support efforts.

Chapter 3

3-48 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONDUCT REHEARSALS – TF AND ABOVE 061-284-4008

CONDITIONS: Given a unit preparing for combat, an OPLAN/OPORD, an operational TOC, and key personnel.

STANDARDS: The integration and synchronization of all fire support operations that support the scheme of maneuver are portrayed and key personnel demonstrate their role in the execution of the plan.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Conducted rehearsal as scheduled. 2. Participants demonstrated knowledge of the fire support plan. 3. Conducted rehearsal early enough to permit attendance by all essential

personnel.

4. Verified Fire Support responsibilities among Fire Support Elements, artillery commanders, observers, and sensor managers.

5. Briefed the disposition of friendly and enemy Fire Support Elements, their ranges, and capabilities.

6. Announced events for Fire Support Elements to initiate fires, to include: a. Target location, trigger, and engagement criteria. b. Primary and alternate observer. c. Primary and alternate firing element location. d. Method of engagement and attack criteria. e. Target task, purpose, and effect. f. Primary and alternate communications link. g. Displacement criteria, routes, and locations for Fire Support assets including

mortars.

7. Announced when FSCM go into and out of effect.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-49

PRODUCE TARGETING PRODUCTS 061-284-4036

CONDITIONS: Given a unit planning a combat operation, an operational TOC, and an operational TAFCS with operator.

STANDARDS: The Fire Support Execution Matrix, High-Payoff Target List, Attack Guidance Matrix, and Target Selection Standards are developed, integrated into the OPORD/OPLAN, and disseminated.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Received planning guidance from the FSO, maneuver commander. 2. Assisted the FSO and targeting officer in synchronizing the staff actions. 3. Supervised the TAFCS operator developing the initial targeting overlay. 4. Synchronized the section’s efforts in determining when and how to engage the

HPTs.

5. Assisted the targeting officer in performing COA development. 6. Assisted the assistant FSO in developing recommendations for the intelligence,

surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR) plan.

7. Assisted the targeting officer and targeting team refining the combat assessment guidelines developed by the S-2.

8. Assisted the targeting officer in synchronizing the collection plan and attack plan after receiving the Commander’s guidance and conducting target value analysis.

9. Assisted the targeting officer in developing the fire support fire execution matrix by consolidating the HPTL, AGM, TSS, and CA guidance.

10. Verified targeting products are integrated into the OPORD/OPLAN. 11. Assisted the FSO during staff action/reaction/counteraction drills for each COA. 12. Assisted the FSO in refining the scheme of fires and formulating the FS plan for

the OPORD/OPLAN based on the Commander’s selected COA and additional guidance.

13. Supervised the FS operator in updating the TAFCS database. 14. Disseminated the FS planning products to subordinate’s levels for bottom-up

refinement.

Chapter 3

3-50 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SUPERVISE THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE FIRE SUPPORT ELEMENT (FSE)/FIRES CELL (FC)

061-284-1014

CONDITIONS: Given a Tactical Operations Center (TOC) operating in a combat environment that is occupying a new location. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: The Fire Support Element/Fires Cell is fully operational.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Coordinated with the TOC Noncommissioned Officer In Charge (NCOIC) on

local security.

2. Secured assigned sector of the perimeter. 3. Verified digital and voice communications with higher, subordinate, and

supporting headquarters.

4. Verified that all FOS and digital databases were updated and Continuity of Operations (CONOPS) was performed.

5. Supervised the updating of manual and digital maps, overlays, and status charts. 6. Verified the operation of power generation equipment. 7. Directed the organization of the daily shift log, OPLAN, OPORD, Warning

Order (WARNO), FRAGO files.

8. Updated current operational status of all supported, supporting, and subordinate units and dissemination to other staff cells.

9. Supervised the implementation of security measures to include camouflage, CBRN defense, OPSEC measures, and COMSEC measures.

10. Implemented shift plan.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-51

COORDINATE REQUESTS FOR NAVAL SURFACE FIRE SUPPORT 061-284-4012

CONDITIONS: Given the situation map, plotting equipment, Naval Surface Fire Support, Naval Surface Fires Officer to provide assistance, a situation overlay, a functioning Fire Support Coordination Center, and a request for Naval Surface Fire Support.

STANDARDS: Requests for Naval Surface Fire Support are coordinated in a timely and correct manner.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Monitored the Call for Fire or request for Naval Surface Fire Support. 2. Determined whether the request should be approved on the basis of the use of

organic maneuver weapons, field artillery, air, and the application of fire support coordination principles.

3. Determined whether the request should be approved based on the large probable error and elliptical dispersion pattern.

4. Coordinated with all necessary fire support agencies to ensure safe and integrated fires.

PRODUCE A QUICK FIRE PLAN

061-284-4014 CONDITIONS: Given a operations order (OPORD) or warning order (WARNO), Intelligence Annex or INTSUM, Fire Support Situation Map with overlays, Commander's Guidance, and DA Form 5368 (Quick Fire Plan). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Quick Fire Support Plan supports the commander's intent is produced and disseminated.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area set up to evaluate the task. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Extracted necessary information from OPORD. 2. Completed coordination with required units. 3. Recommended necessary FSCMs. 4. Numbered planned targets. 5. Prepared DA Form 5368. 6. Received Commander’s approval. 7. Disseminated plan to those who will implement the plan. 8. Rehearsed plan. 9. Informed Commander when ready to execute.

Chapter 3

3-52 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PREPARE THE AN/TVQ-2 (G/VLLD) WITH EQUIPMENT SET AN/UAS/12 FOR OPERATION

061-274-5100

CONDITIONS: Given an AN/TVQ-2 (G/VLLD) w/ batteries, AN/TAS-4(B) w/power conditioner and batteries, compass; with an order to set up a dismounted OP for laser operations.

STANDARDS: Prepare the AN/TVQ-2 (G/VLLD) with Equipment Set AN/UAS/12 for operation IAW TM 9- 1260-477-12 w/chgs.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area to orient the G/VLLD. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLIDER: Tell the Solider what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Removed tripod with traversing unit from backpack. 2. Adjusted azimuth and elevation gimbal locks. 3. Stood up the tripod. 4. Coarse-leveled the azimuth axis of the TU. 5. Installed the LD/R. 6. Installed power source. 7. Mated the interface connector of the tripod TU with the LD/R J2 connecter. 8. Rotated the LD/R until line of sight is aligned along the downhill leg. 9. Locked azimuth and elevation gimbal locks.

10. Fine tuned TU bubble. 11. Installed night sight and mount. 12. Connected power source to night sight. 13. Boresighted night-sight to LD/R.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-53

OPERATE THE AN/PED-1 LIGHTWEIGHT

LASER DESIGNATOR RANGEFINDER 061-274-5101

CONDITIONS: Given an AN/PED-1 Lightweight Laser Designator Rangefinder (LLDR) with preloaded GPS Crypto data, a power source, and a FOS device.

STANDARDS: IAW TM 11-5855-315-13&P.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure that you have a pre-designated area to orient the LLDR. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLIDER: Tell the Solider what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared LLDR for operation.

a. Assembled LLDR b. Powered up the system. c. Set up GPS. d. Established Communication e. Entered system data. f. Performed 12-Step AVAM Compensation. g. Saved settings. h. Configured system. i. Performed system test j. Set designation code (PRF Code). k. Boresighted the LLDR.

2. Determined target location within 10 meters. 3. Designated target without fratricide. 4. Performed system shutdown procedures without damage to equipment.

Chapter 3

3-54 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONSTRUCT A LASER RANGE SAFETY FAN

061-274-3987

CONDITIONS: Given a laser designating device with its respective technical manual, an observer location, a map, overlay materials, a 3 x 5 card, marking pen/pencil, protractor, an area to lase, and an ATP 3-09.30. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Construct a laser range safety fan for a laser designating device’s zone of observation IAW ATP 3- 09.30.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined buffer zone. 2. Determined backstops. 3. Computed the min and max VA. 4. Determined nominal ocular hazard distance (NOHD). 5. Determined left and right azimuths. 6. Cleared a 30 meter area in the direction the laser device is being used. 7. Drew the laser fan from information. 8. Constructed safety T card.

. SUPERVISE THE ESTABLISHMENT OF FIRE

SUPPORT TEAM COMMUNICATIONS 061-284-3044

CONDITIONS: Given a fire support status chart, Commander’s guidance, signal-operating instructions (SOI), automated net control device (ANCD), and section communications equipment. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Tactical communications in the fire support team (FIST) headquarters was established with the correct agency or element.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Established radio communication. 2. Established digital communication. 3. Authenticated messages. 4. Conducted trouble shooting procedures. 5. Verified control options for company FOs.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-55

TRANSMIT MESSAGES USING AFATDS 061-300-5011

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to send messages using AFATDS, communication equipment, current active network, destination unit, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Transmit messages to a destination unit, without error.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Solider what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Transmitted a message using a template. 2. Transmitted a free text message.

PROCESS TARGET INFORMATION USING AFATDS

061-300-5015

CONDITIONS: Given target information and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Process target information in the AFATDS, without error.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Entered target information. 2. Reviewed Fire Mission Data (as required). 3. Performed suspect target processing (if required). 4. Performed target indicator processing (if required).

PROCESS A RECEIVED FIRE SUPPORT MUNITIONS

RESTRICTION GUIDANCE USING AFATDS 061-300-5047

CONDITIONS: Given a received fire support munitions restrictions guidance, an AFATDS, external Operational Facility (OPFAC), and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Process received fire support munitions restriction guidance IAW the mission requirements.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Processed the received fire support restrictions guidance.

Chapter 3

3-56 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

JOINT FIRES OBSERVER (JFO) ACADEMIC SUSTAINMENT 3-27. In addition to the individual tasks listed in FS Table I, JFO-qualified personnel are required to sustain their knowledge and proficiency in the academic subject areas presented during initial training by a minimum of 9 hours of academics every 6 months. In accordance with the Memorandum of Agreement (MOA), JFO qualification consists of Table II sustainment tasks, Table II academic requirements, and Table V sustainment training and will be tracked in the Digital Training Management System (DTMS). The BCT FSNCO should verify that the following training is conducted and recorded in DTMS, and all JFO-qualified personnel in his element are trained in the following subjects:

Table 3-3. JFO Academic Sustainment

Task Number Subject Reference 1 Aircraft Capabilities JFIRE, FM 3-09.32 2 Aircraft Weapons JFO Training Web Site 3 Artillery Applications ATP 3-09.30 4 Brevity Terms/Authentication ATP 1-02.1 5 Laser/Terminal Guidance Operations JFIRE, FM 3-09.32, JP 3-09.1 6 AC-130 Capabilities/Employment JFIRE, FM 3-09.32 7 Threat Air Defense Artillery FM 3-04.111, JFIRE, FM 3-09.32 8 Inertially Aided Munitions JFIRE, FM 3-09.32 9 Forward Air Controller Airborne JFIRE, FM 3-09.32

10 Close Combat Attack FM 3-04.111, JFIRE, FM 3-09.32 11 CAS Mission Planning JP 3-09.3, FM 3-09.32 12 Naval Surface Fire Support JFIRE, FM 3-09.32, ATP 3-09.30 13 Urban CAS JFIRE, FM 3-09.32, ATP 3-09.30 14 Night CAS JFIRE, FM 3-09.32, ATP 3-09.30 15 JFO/JTAC Integration JFO Training Web Site 16 GPS Operations Appropriate Equipment TM 17 Laser Range Finder Operations JFIRE, FM 3-09.32, ATP 3-09.30

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-57

FIRE SUPPORT TABLE II: ESTABLISH OPERATIONS 3-28. The tasks in Fire Support Table II include the collective tasks that are required to occupy a new position, establish FS operations, and are prerequisites for successful execution of tasks in subsequent tables. Selecting and occupying the observation point (OP) and positioning the FS vehicle in the maneuver formation are critical tasks that share many of the same requirements. The changing face of the asymmetrical operating environment may have an impact on the use and importance of static OPs, but the tactical considerations in selecting and occupying an OP also apply to the physical location of the observer in a tactical formation. The tasks in Fire Support Table II include establishing operations to most effectively accomplish the FS tasks necessary to support the commander’s intent. This training should be conducted as an STX in a field environment. Unit CATS provide guidance to train Fire Support Table II tasks.

3-29. At the Fires Cell level, a detailed SOP is required to support the seamless integration of the Fires Cell into the command post (CP) of the supported force and to provide guidance on the specific tools to be developed by the Fires Cell. Examples are: Fire Support Execution Matrix (FSEM), FS Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield (IPB), Target List, Target Synchronization Matrix (TSM), and the Lethal and Non-Lethal Fire Support Task Matrix. The Fires Cell must establish a Fires Net Plan that includes Primary, Alternate, Contingency, and Emergency Communications Nets. The Fires Cell must also establish and synchronize battle rhythm and targeting with the Air Tasking Order (ATO) cycle.

Table 3-4. Fire Support Table II – Establish Operations

Task Number Task Title Reference Observer Tasks

06-5-5049 Establish a Fire Support Team Observation Post UTL-DTMS 11-2-0302 Establish a Single Channel Voice Radio Net UTL-DTMS

Fires Cell Tasks 06-5-5082 Establish Fire Support Operations UTL-DTMS 06-6-5054 Maintain a Fires Cell (FC) UTL-DTMS

Chapter 3

3-58 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ESTABLISH A FIRE SUPPORT TEAM OBSERVATION POST 06-5-5049

CONDITIONS: The unit is conducting combat operations. The enemy situation requires continuous observation of the battle area. The unit has digital devices and communication equipment. Fire support tasks (FSTs) have been assigned to the FIST/COLT for execution. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The FIST/COLT selects a position that provides continuous observation of the assigned engagement area, NAI, TAI, or objective, suitable evaluation of effects of fires on targets, and an ability to communicate voice and digital IAW unit TSOP, applicable FMs and Commander’s guidance. A functional observation post is established that allows completion of all missions/FSTs.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The FSO and fire support (FS) sergeant determine:

a. The best location for the OP based on METT-TC and whether or not the OP will be mounted or dismounted.

b. A hide area for FIST/COLT vehicles if necessary. c. The distance and type of movement required to reach the OP (foot/vehicle,

stealthy or infiltration/normal).

d. What digital capability can be established in the OP and how digital traffic will need to be routed using FBCB2 or FATDS devices (HTUs/LCUs).

e. The location of supporting/backup, alternate, and supplementary OPs. 2. The fire support (FS) sergeant establishes and maintains an observation

capability as follows:

a. Establishes and maintains voice and digital (as required) communications with supported unit FSOs, Fires Cells, and/or appropriate FDCs.

b. Conducts a thorough terrain map analysis of the area of operations of the supported unit’s area of operation.

c. The FS sergeant uses techniques that make communications more reliable and less vulnerable.

d. The FS team prepares a terrain sketch as time and situation permit with final approval by FS sergeant.

e. The FS team orients the observed fire (OF) fan, if available, on the map with final approval by FS sergeant.

3. The FS sergeant selects and occupies an OP/lasing position. a. The FS sergeant selects a position that allows observation of assigned zone

of action, takes advantage of existing cover and concealment, avoids landmarks and prominent terrain features, and provides concealed access and exit routes to the position.

b. The FIST/COLT occupies a selected position without detection by enemy forces.

NOTE: The observer is equipped with a laser locator/range finder and has occupied a new position (without GPS capability).

c. The FS sergeant uses techniques that make communications more reliable and less vulnerable.

d. The FS team prepares a terrain sketch as time and situation permit with final approval by FS sergeant.

(1) Ranging at least two known points. (2) Determining direction to both points. (3) Performing map resection.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-59

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO NOTE: Observer does not have a laser locator/range finder or GPS capability. e. The FS team orients the observed fire (OF) fan, if available, on the map

with final approval by FS sergeant.

4. The FIST/COLT gathers operational information. a. Determines location using global positioning system (GPS) receivers. b. The FS sergeant obtains current locations of forward deployed maneuver

elements and other observers.

NOTE: The observer is equipped with a laser locator/range finder and has occupied a new position (without GPS capability).

c. The FS sergeant prepares laser locator/range finder for operation. d. The FS sergeant determines location without GPS (±50 meters radius of

actual observer location). The following methods may be used:

(1) Ranging at least two known points. (2) Determining direction to both points. (3) Performing map resection. NOTE: Observer does not have a laser locator/range finder or GPS capability. e. The FS sergeant determines location (within 100 meters of actual location)

by using a map and M2 compass (performs map resection).

5. The FS sergeant reports information to FC, FDC or appropriate agency.

Chapter 3

3-60 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ESTABLISH A SINGLE CHANNEL VOICE RADIO NET 11-2-0302

CONDITIONS: The element is tactically deployed and must establish the communications networks. Operators were briefed and issued SOI/SSI extracts, numerical cipher authenticated system, operations codes, and brevity lists. Situational hazards such as NBC conditions; OPFOR, EW, and directional finding ability exist. General condition applies. (See Chapter 5, paragraph 5-4.) Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: Operators establish and enter a radio net no later than the time prescribed in the OPLAN/OPORD. The net is not compromised. Time required to complete this task increases in MOPP4.

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO SAFETY: Follow all appropriate safety guidelines and regulations. 1. The radio operators install radio set for operation. a. Secure radios in mount. b. Connect audio accessories. c. Install antennas. d. Perform before operation PMCS. e. Perform operational checks for radios. 2. Radio operators make initial entry into the nets. (113-571-1022) a. Obtain appropriate call signs, suffixes, and frequencies from the SOI/SSI. b. Enter a radio net. c. Authenticate when challenged by network control station (NCS). 3. Radio operators recognize frequency interference. a. Recognize jamming/interference. b. Determine if interference is internal or external. c. Determine if interference is intentional or unintentional. 4. Radio operators initiate prescribed ECCM. a. Continue to operate. b. Increase transmit power. c. Tune receiver for maximum signal. d. Relocate antenna. e. Request frequency change. f. Report suspected jamming to immediate supervisor. g. Submit MIJIFEEDER report. 5. Radio operators employ preventive ECCM and radio procedures. a. Use secure COMSEC equipment if available (TSEC/KY-38 or TSEC/KY-57). b. Load appropriate key variables using KYK-13 or KYX-15. c. Use only approved radiotelephone procedures as required by the SOI/SSI. d. Encrypt and decrypt grid coordinates using the SOI/SSI (not necessary in secure

voice operation.)

e. Keep the length and number of transmissions to a minimum (not more than 20 seconds per transmission).

f. Use the lowest power setting required to communicate with desired stations. g. Use correct call signs and frequencies. h. Observe periods of radio listening silence. i. Adhere to net discipline.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-61

ESTABLISH FIRE SUPPORT OPERATIONS 06-5-5082

CONDITIONS: The fire support team (FIST) is supporting a company/troop (Co/Trp) that is preparing for, or engaged in combat operations. FIST personnel have been briefed by the battalion/squadron (Bn/Sqn) FSO and have arrived at the supported Co/Trp CP area. The unit has digital devices and communication equipment. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The FIST successfully established FS operations to support the Co/Trp IAW unit TSOP and appropriate field manuals. This includes voice and digital communications with all necessary elements, an understanding of Co/Trp operations/TSOP, all automated systems fully operational (to include a functional initial database and communications structure), and integration of the FIST into Co/Trp operations. The FIST provided continuous and timely fire support planning, coordination, and execution for the supported Co/Trp.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Co-locates the FIST HQ with company/troop CP or as directed by supported

commander.

2. Establishes and maintains a FIST HQ as follows: a. The FS sergeant (Sgt) supervises configuration of all field artillery and

ABCS devices (such as FBCB2) and other digital devices.

(1) The individual members of the FIST gather the necessary information as directed by the FSO or FS Sgt.

(2) The individual members of the FIST enter the necessary information and/or configure equipment settings as directed by the FSO or FS Sgt.

b. The FS sergeant or his designated representative establishes communications (voice and digital) with appropriate agencies, such as:

(1) Battalion FDC. (2) Battery FDC, as appropriate. (3) Maneuver battalion fires cell. (4) Maneuver company commander. (5) Mortar FDC, as appropriate. (6) Forward observers. (7) Other FS agencies, as appropriate. c. The FSO or FS Sgt conduct the necessary quality control (QC) checks to

verify that all automation/communications equipment is properly set up and ready for operation.

d. The company FSO obtains initial guidance from the company/troop commander.

e. The FS sergeant or his designated representative determines and reports FIST HQ location to appropriate FDCs and Fires Cell.

NOTE: A fire support vehicle (FSV) is available. All systems are operational. Standards at paragraph f. through h. below apply.

f. The FS sergeant or his designated representative initiates and operates the targeting station.

g. The FS sergeant or his designated representative initiates and operates the communications station.

h. The FS sergeant or his designated representative initiates and operates the observation station.

3. The company FSO or his designated representative keeps the maneuver commander advised on FS operations and capabilities as follows:

Chapter 3

3-62 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO a. Advises the company/troop commander on the capabilities, limitations, and

employment of all fire support assets available to support his operations.

b. Informs the company/troop commander of enemy FS capabilities, limitations, and employment doctrine.

4. The company FSO or his designated representative obtains and manages current FS information (battle tracking), such as:

a. Target attack guidance, battalion/company FS execution matrix, friendly and enemy situation, scheme of fires, assigned FSTs (fire support tasks), HPTL (high-payoff target list), status of available FS systems, call signs/frequencies, observer codes, IO themes and messages, etc.

b. Situation map must display maneuver and FS graphics, such as: (1) Maneuver control measures. (2) FSCMs. (3) Location of maneuver units. (4) Location/range fans of FS systems. (5) Observer locations. c. Disseminates above information to platoon forward observers (FOs) and other

observers as appropriate.

d. Reports to the Fires battalion operations/FDC, or battery FDC, and battalion Fires Cell the disposition of the company/troop on the ground, to include location and patrol actions.

e. Disseminates FS annex for tactical operations to battalion Fires Cell as quickly as possible without being compromised.

f. Reports all acquired information (size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment (SALUTE)) about enemy activities reported by observer assets to battalion Fires Cell and Fires battalion.

NOTE: A laser designator system (LDS) is available and operational. 5. The FIST will manage lasing operations in assigned area.

a. The company FSO or his designated representative ensures selection and occupation of a position that will provide maximum line of sight and coverage of the AO for LDS, mutual support for other LDS positions, and defilade when possible.

b. The FS sergeant or his designated representative orients LDS for direction and bore sight, night sight, if necessary.

c. The company FSO or his designated representative ensures location facilitates communications with supported unit and FS assets.

d. The company FSO or his designated representative ensures updated location information is reported to battalion Fires Cell and FDCs.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-63

MAINTAIN A FIRES CELL (FC) 06-6-5054

CONDITIONS: Force artillery units are operating in a joint and combined environment engaged in combat or under conditions when combat operations are imminent. FA and force CPs are operational and tactically deployed. The unit has digital devices and communications equipment. The Fires Cell functions as an integral part of the FA TOC, supervised by the G3/S-3. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The Fires Cell provides a continuous tactical fire control capacity that ensures the accomplishment of its essential tasks for fire support.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The Fires Cell (FC) performs the following functions: 2. Establishes continuous tactical fire control facilities for force artillery units

IAW the unit's TSOP. +

3. Establishes and maintains communications (voice and digital) with appropriate higher, lower, and adjacent HQ, other FS assets, and target producing elements. +

a. Monitors and operates in the artillery command fire radio nets. b. Acts as NCS (net control station) for the force artillery fire nets.

4. Analyzes targets produced by the FA TOC's target production section or force HQ Fires Cell.

5. Ensures proper dissemination of targets to appropriate firing elements. 6. Initiates requests for additional FA support and for action by non-FA means and

passes them to the force Fires Cell.

7. Establishes mutual support with designated continuity of operations unit. (if assigned).

8. Maintains the fire control map. a. Plots targets in prioritized order, HPTs first. b. Plots all friendly firing units within range and their range fans. c. Plots FSCMs (fire support coordination measure) and maneuver control

measures.

d. Plots major friendly unit boundaries. e. Plots all other items by unit TSOP.

9. Assists the operations element in scheduling fires. 10. Maintains continuous tactical FA control facilities:

a. Receives, processes, and disseminates current tactical information. b. Maintains ability to operate in degraded mode. NOTE: The following tasks are performed by AFTADS equipped units.

11. Initializes AFTADS (Advance Field Artillery Tactical Data System) IAW the unit TSOP.

12. Performs data base file maintenance. 13. Passes control to the MSU (mutual support unit) if assigned, and recovers

control.

NOTE: If there is no designated MSU available, a subordinate element or jump TOC element, should initialize as the force artillery HQ.

Chapter 3

3-64 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

FIRE SUPPORT TABLE III: FIRE PLANNING 3-30. The focus of this table is on the FS planning process as an integral part of the MDMP planning conducted by the supported battalion or BCT or as part of troop-leading procedures at the company level. A full understanding of the doctrinal tasks and tools addressed in Table II is a prerequisite for the fire-planning process. To produce an effective, integrated, executable fire plan the Fires Cell must conduct battle drills to develop and gather inputs for the running estimates prior to receipt of a new mission. To assess the capability of the Fires Cell to develop a fully integrated fire plan requires the participation of the Fires Cell as part of the commander’s staff in a training event or exercise. The purpose of Table III is to ensure that the Fires Cell is proficient at fires-related tasks prior to participation with the full staff. Fire Support Table III is for Fires Cells only. Task steps and performance measures for some tasks may not apply at the company level.

Table 3-5. Fire Support Table III – Fire Planning

Task Number Task Title Reference 06-1-1055 Conduct Rehearsals (CO/TRP FIST) UTL-DTMS 06-1-1097 Conduct Rehearsals (BN Fires Cell) UTL-DTMS 06-5-5048 Process the FIST Fire Plan UTL-DTMS 06-5-5080 Plan Fires in Support of Maneuver Operations UTL-DTMS 06-6-1118 Conduct Fire Support Planning UTL-DTMS 06-6-5074 Analyze Targets UTL-DTMS 71-8-5114 Establish Target Priorities (Battalion – Corps) UTL-DTMS

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-65

CONDUCT REHEARSALS (CO/TRP FIST) 06-1-1055

CONDITIONS: The fire support (FS) team (FIST) is operational as part of a company/troop (Co/Trp) that is preparing for, or is engaged, in tactical operations. The OPORD (which included the FS plan) has been written, briefed, and disseminated. The unit has digital devices and communications equipment. The Co/Trp commander has provided rehearsal guidance and indicated the type of rehearsal to be conducted. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The FIST successfully conducts its own rehearsals and drills and participates in other Co/Trp and higher echelon combined arms, FS, and field artillery (FA) voice and digital rehearsals IAW the unit TSOP, FS plans, and directives. The FIST verifies and clarifies the critical elements of the FS plan and identifies the changes necessary to ensure the FS plan properly supports the maneuver plan and is fully integrated and synchronized as part of the combined arms plan. The rehearsal(s) also adequately prepares the necessary FS and maneuver personnel for execution of assigned FS responsibilities during actual execution of the FS plan.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The Co/Trp FS officer (FSO) attends/participates in the battalion/squadron

(Bn/Sqn) combined arms rehearsal with the Co/Trp commander.

2. The FSO and/or FS sergeant (Sgt): a. Evaluate the differences between current, plan, and rehearsal configuration

data (communications and automation) and digital fire plans.

b. Identify how and when changes need to be made to facilitate both rehearsal and planning without hindering current operations or creating safety risks.

c. Develop a plan to allow rapid resumption of current digital operations if needed.

d. Supervise the FS specialist in entering digital planning and rehearsal fire plan and configuration data into automated systems.

e. Conduct quality control checks to verify proper configuration. 3. The FSO ensures FOs attend/participate in Co/Trp rehearsals with platoon

leaders. +

4. The FSO ensures the FIST and the platoon leaders use the FSEM as the base document for the rehearsal process.

a. FS plan and maneuver plan are rehearsed concurrently for synchronization. b. Target execution responsibilities for primary and backup observers. c. Verifies triggers points with conditions to fire. d. FSTs/targets are addressed to ensure understanding of its purpose, method of

accomplishment and desired end state in relation to the maneuver plan.

e. Discusses mortar positioning and movement plan. f. Implementation of FSCMs. g. Discusses observation plan. h. Corrections and refinements to the FS plan. i. Validation of engagements of criteria and areas.

5. The FSO ensures the following are highlighted during the combined arms rehearsal:

accomplishment and desired end state in relation to the maneuver plan.

Chapter 3

3-66 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO e. Discusses mortar positioning and movement plan. f. Implementation of FSCMs. g. Discusses observation plan. h. Corrections and refinements to the FS plan. i. Validation of engagements of criteria and areas.

6. During the FS rehearsal, the Co/Trp FSO accomplishes the following: + a. Confirms communications (voice and digital) to observers, Fires Cells, FDCs

and other FS agencies.

b. Executes FSTs/targets from sensors to shooters. c. Verifies observation plan. d. Validates and adjusts triggers. e. Loads high priority targets in computer buffers. f. FSCMs are implemented and verified.

7. The FSO recaps all critical FS events. 8. The FS Sgt or FSO verify that all communications and automation systems have

been returned to their current or plan configurations as appropriate. +

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-67

CONDUCT REHEARSALS (BN FIRES CELL) 06-1-1097

CONDITIONS: The fires cell is part of an infantry battalion/combined arms battalion that is preparing for, or engaged in, tactical operations. The unit has digital devices and communications equipment. The command post (CP) and fires cell are operational and OPORD (which included the FS plan) has been written, briefed, and disseminated. The commander has directed the XO/S-3 to conduct a rehearsal. All critical commanders, staff, attachments, and OPCON leaders are present. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The fires cell successfully conducted its own rehearsals and drills and participated in other Bn and higher echelon combined arms, FS, and field artillery (FA) voice and digital rehearsals IAW the unit TSOP, FS plans, and directives. The fires cell verified and clarified the critical elements of the FS plan and identified the changes necessary that ensured the FS plan properly supported the maneuver plan and was fully integrated and synchronized as part of the combined arms plan. The rehearsal(s) also adequately prepared the necessary FS and maneuver personnel for execution of assigned FS responsibilities during actual execution of the FS plan.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Bn FSO conducts FS rehearsals early enough to permit attendance by all

essential personnel.

a. Initiates Bn level rehearsal planning after COA approval, to include site selection, security, and construction.

b. Rehearses in conjunction with the BCT fires cell. c. Assists participants in gaining a visual impression of planned FS operations. d. Conducts reduced rehearsals when time is limited, focusing on the most

critical FS aspects.

e. Reminds participants that the rehearsal is not a war game. f. Continues rehearsals until all required rehearsal objectives are met or until the

time available expires.

g. Records any adjustments or unresolved questions raised during the rehearsal. h. Takes immediate action to resolve any open issues. i. Makes only absolutely minimum required changes to the FS annex and

provides for integration into the OPLAN/OPORD, as appropriate, through verbal orders, FRAGOs, etc.

j. Coordinates with battalion and Co/Trp mortar platoons as required to ensure synchronized rehearsal operations and digital exchanges.

2. The FSO verifies and clarifies FS responsibilities among, FIST teams, FA commanders, observers, and sensor managers. Validation includes the following:

a. FS plan is in compliance with the Commander’s intent, FS guidance, and concept of operations.

b. Integration of intelligence collection/ reconnaissance and surveillance plans with FS requirements. Includes availability of primary and backup observers/collection assets for each FST.

c. Integration of obstacle and barrier plans with FS operations. d. Integration of CAS targets and airspace management.

e. Verification of target locations, engagement criteria, ROE, FSCM, airspace coordination measures, RADAR zones, and trigger points/events to initiate attacks.

f. Battle hand off points, phase lines, or events for transition contiguous and noncontiguous areas of operations.

g. Responsibilities for the clearance of fires.

Chapter 3

3-68 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO h. Avoidance of unnecessary duplications. i. Adequacy of Sustainment in support of FS operations. j. Availability of adequate communications assets to satisfy range and volume

requirements.

3. The FSO and/or FS sergeant (Sgt): a. Evaluate the differences between current, plan, and rehearsal configuration

data (communications and automation) and digital fire plans.

b. Identify how and when changes need to be made to facilitate both rehearsal and planning without hindering current operations or creating safety risks.

c. Develop a plan to allow rapid resumption of current digital operations if needed.

d. Supervise the FS specialist in entering digital planning and rehearsal fire plan and configuration data into automated systems.

(1) The scheme of fires is integrated and synchronized with the maneuver plan.

(2) Provisions are in place for acquiring tracking and reporting BDA for HPTs if directed by the commander.

(3) Positioning and displacement plans for FS and TA assets are fully integrated into force operations and potential movement and terrain management conflicts are resolved.

(4) Measures to prevent fratricide, collateral damage and noncombatant casualties are acceptable.

(5) Protection measures are adequate. (6) CSS and communications requirements are met. (7) Changes resulting from the rehearsal are fully integrated into a modified

FS plan and provided expeditiously to supporting and supported FS and TA assets.

(8) Initiated fires from subordinate units are IAW their FS plans. e. Conduct quality control checks to verify proper configuration.

4. During combined arms rehearsals the FSO: a. Briefs the disposition of friendly and enemy FS elements, their ranges and

capabilities.

b. Indicates when friendly FS elements initiate fires (trigger points), the targets, who is observing, who is firing and from where, the ammunition and desired target effects.

c. Indicates when FSCMs go into effect and become no longer effective. d. Verifies: (1) The scheme of fires is integrated and synchronized with the maneuver

plan.

(2) Provisions are in place for acquiring tracking and reporting BDA for HPTs if directed by the commander.

(3) Positioning and displacement plans for FS and TA assets are fully synchronized with Bn/Sqn operations and potential movement and terrain management conflicts are resolved.

(4) Measures to prevent fratricide, collateral damage, and noncombatant casualties are acceptable.

(5) Force protection measures are adequate. (6) CSS and communications requirements are met.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-69

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (7) Changes resulting from the rehearsal are fully integrated into a modified

FS plan and provided expeditiously to supporting and supported FS and TA assets.

(8) Initiated fires from subordinate units are IAW their FS plans. 5. The FS Sgt or FSO verify that all communications and automation systems have

been returned to their current or plan configurations as appropriate.

PROCESS THE FIST FIRE PLAN

06-5-5048

CONDITIONS: The supported company/troop is conducting combat operations. Fire plans have been developed. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The FIST executes fire plans and accomplishes the purpose of the FST.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The company FSO receives the mission from higher headquarters. 2. Advises the supported unit commander of friendly fire support capabilities and

limitations.

3. Creates company level fire support plan that meets the Commander’s intent. 4. Passes fire support information to lower, adjacent, and other FA units.

a. Equipment status b. RADAR zones (if applicable) c. Fire support coordination measures d. Personnel SITREP e. Target list

5. Advises the supported unit commander on target acquisition assets. 6. Coordinates requests for fire support assets with the battalion FC. 7. The FIST HQ processes the company target list. 8. Processes geometries and ACAs and inform the commander. 9. Requests close air support as needed and allocated.

10. Conducts attack air missions.

Chapter 3

3-70 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PLAN FIRES IN SUPPORT OF MANEUVER OPERATIONS 06-5-5080

CONDITIONS: The supported unit is planning for combat operations. The OPORD/OPLAN has been issued by higher HQ and briefed. The commander has started formulating his order. The Company/Troop Fire Support Officer is with the commander. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The Fire Support Officer prepares an FS plan IAW applicable FMs that meets the maneuver Commander’s guidance and intent for fires.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The Company/Troop FSO conducts fire support planning IAW ATP 3-09.30, in

support of company operations using Troop Leading Procedures (TLP).

a. Plans early and continuously. b. Exploits available targets. c. Plans the use of lethal and non-lethal attack means. d. Selects the lowest echelon capable of furnishing effective support. e. Selects the most effective means. f. Furnishes the type of support requested. g. Avoids duplication. h. Coordinates airspace. i. Provides adequate support. j. Provides rapid and effective coordination. k. Uses fire support coordination measures. l. Provides for flexibility.

2. Upon mission receipt, the company FSO: a. Conducts an analysis of higher HQ Fire Support plan to include: (1) Fires paragraph and Effects ANNEX. (2) FS tasks to subordinates. (3) Fire support documents. (4) Reviews the friendly and enemy situation. (5) Determines FS assets and allocations available to support the

company/troop.

(6) Determines or requests Fire Support Coordination Measures (FSCMs). (7) Determines FSTs and targets assigned by higher HQ for execution. b. Advises and assists the commander in development of fire support guidance. c. Obtains the Commander’s restated mission.

3. During the Commander’s warning order issue, the company/troop FSO: a. Provides the commander current FS information for incorporation. b. Issues a warning order to FIST on fire support specific issues (i.e., FSTs).

4. The company FSO concurrently makes a tentative FS annex based on the Commander’s and higher HQ FS guidance as follows:

a. Ensures all digital systems are updated with current data. b. FSCMs and maneuver control measures are disseminated to the lowest level,

as early as possible.

c. Selects the method for accomplishing the FSTs identified in the mission analysis.

(1) Company mortars

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-71

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (2) Artillery (3) Offensive IO (4) Joint Fires d. Integrates FSTs (assigned by higher HQ and tasks developed based on

Commander’s FS guidance) into a concept of fires.

e. Advises the commander if tasks can or cannot be met with assets available and allocations.

f. Refines procedure for the positive clearance of fires. g. Refines engagement criteria, planned targets, trigger points, and observers for

triggers.

h. Develops a target list work sheet. i. Develops a company fire support execution matrix. j. Briefs tentative FS plan to the commander for additional guidance,

refinement, and approval to disseminate for planning purposes.

5. The company FSO disseminates tentative FS plan to subordinates to facilitate movement into observation positions and conducting troop leading procedures and pre-combat checks and inspections (PCCI).

6. The company FSO accompanies company/troop commander on reconnaissance: a. Ensures placement of triggers for FSTs. b. Designates primary and alternate observers to execute FSTs. c. Develops an observation plan that includes all available observation assets. d. Refines/adjusts targets and FST grid locations based on ground truth and the

company Commander’s guidance.

e. Nominates and deconflicts targets. 7. The company FSO completes his FS plan:

a. Modifies FS annex based on reconnaissance. b. Briefs the commander for FS annex approval. c. Receives Commander’s final approval on scheme of fires. d. Transmits any final refinements to the task force Fires Cell. e. Briefs FS subordinates early on FS annex. f. Prepares and distributes the appropriate fire support documents, such as: (1) Fire Support Matrix (lethal and nonlethal). (2) Target List Work sheet. (3) Fire Support Overlay. (4) Observation plan. (5) IO Themes and Messages (Patrol Cards as required).

8. The company FSO briefs the FS portion of the company OPORD to include: a. Purpose (Commander’s FS guidance). b. Priority of fires. c. Allocation of FS assets. d. Restrictions (i.e., FSCMs, constraints, etc.). e. Scheme of fires/FST execution in support of the scheme of maneuver. f. FS rehearsals times. g. Answers all FS related questions.

9. The company FSO synchronizes/refines the FS plan with the maneuver plan through combined arms and FS rehearsals.

Chapter 3

3-72 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONDUCT FIRE SUPPORT PLANNING 06-6-1118

CONDITIONS: The Fires Brigade, brigade combat team (BCT) is conducting the military decision-making process (MDMP) while preparing for or engaged in operations. Additional fire support agencies such as the tactical air control party (TACP) or air and naval gunfire liaison company (ANGLICO) are integrated into the Fires Cell. The BCT has established communications and digital connectivity via the Army Battle Command System (ABCS), when equipped, with subordinate, adjacent, and higher headquarters, and is passing information IAW higher headquarters’ and the BCT’s SOPs. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The Fires Cell assisted in the development of intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB) and ISR planning to develop the ISR order. The Fires Cell conducted mission analysis and developed the scheme of fire support for all courses of action (COA). The Fires Cell revised the scheme of support during COA analysis and comparison. The Fires Cell recommended COA and completed the fire support plan. The Fires Cell produced the high-payoff target list (HPTL), essential tasks for fire support, attack guidance matrix (AGM), target selection standard (TSS), and the fire support annex (with overlay) for the BCT order.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. FSO assists in the development of the initial intelligence preparation of the

battlefield (IPB).

NOTE: IPB is initiated upon receipt of intelligence products and driven by additional products and intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR) feeds. The commander’s staff assists the S-2 in preparing the initial IPB; and although the performance measures are presented separately, they may be performed simultaneously with some of the following task steps.

a. Participates in the IPB huddle to- (1) Receive information. (2) Define operational environment. (3) Update timelines. (4) Identify area of operation (AO) and area of interest (AOI). (5) Identify initial intelligence requirements. b. Gathers the following overlays and reports. (1) Brigade AO overlay, if available. (2) Fires Brigade AOI overlays. (3) Modified combined obstacle overlay (MCOO). (4) Reports that identify the significant characteristics of the environment. (a) Transportation network (road specifications). (b) Natural or manmade obstacles. (c) Weather effects on terrain. (5)Potential position areas for artillery (PAA). c. Performs initial analysis of the battlefield’s effects on enemy and friendly

capabilities.

(1) Cross country mobility. (2) Visibility.

d. FSO/targeting officer assists the S-2 in evaluating the threat by providing the current information on the enemy and his fire support capabilities.

(1) Addresses known enemy artillery units and their capabilities that may affect the operation.

(2) Addresses other assets such as mortar, air support, and naval gunfire that the enemy may employ.

(3) Addresses enemy nuclear and chemical fire support capabilities.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-73

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (4) Identifies recent trends in the way enemy fire support has been used

based on battle damage assessment (BDA), observed fires and reports.

(5) Identifies enemy fire support target acquisition and delivery systems locations capable of ranging the brigade AO.

(6) Using the threat characteristics identifies unaccounted fire support assets and likely areas the enemy fire support target acquisition and delivery systems are capable of ranging the brigade AO.

(7) Fires Cell creates the AOI overlay as directed by the targeting officer on the common operational picture (COP)/Joint Common Database (JCDB) updates.

(8) Fires Cell exports the AOI overlay to the S-2 section for consolidation. e. Assists the S-2 in the integration of enemy fire support into the enemy

courses of action (ECOA) and initiates target value analysis (TVA) to identify high-value targets (HVT).

(1)Assists S-2 in developing enemy fire support template. (2) Integrates execution of enemy lethal and nonlethal fires into the

ECOAs.

(3) Considers target characteristics (such as composition, disposition, degree of protection, size, location, shape, and mobility).

(4) Considers impact of terrain and weather on enemy employment and positioning of fires.

(5) Identifies HVTs considering the ECOAs by identifying assets and capabilities the enemy commander requires.

(6) Nominates named area of interest (NAI), targeted area of interest (TAI), and detection assets for inclusion in the BCT and ISR plan.

f. Fires Cell tracks the status of fire support systems. g. Analyzes effects of IPB on fire support.

2. FSO initiates the planning process based on the receipt of warning order 1 or anticipated mission.

NOTE: The MDMP commences with the receipt of a higher headquarters order or by direction of the commander or deputy commanding officer (DCO) anticipating a mission.

a. Updates running estimates and COP in AFATDS. b. Understands higher maneuver and fire support plan. c. Identifies refined AO and AOI. d. Receives Commander’s guidance for fire support. (1) Authorizes movement only to support any immediate requirements. (2) Initial intelligence requirements of mission analysis.

e. Coordinates with the brigade operational law team on current rules of engagement (ROE) for indirect fire, or for requesting modification to the ROE, if applicable.

3. FSO assists in the ISR planning. NOTE: Initial ISR planning is conducted concurrently with IPB and the decision-making process.

Developing the ISR plan may be considered an independent, simultaneous decision-making process. Although these performance measures are presented separately here, for training purposes they may be performed concurrently with the following task steps.

a. Identifies ISR fire support requirements and conduct ISR mission analysis. (1) Higher headquarters tasks. (2) Additional support requirements.

Chapter 3

3-74 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (3) Prepositioning of field artillery (FA) assets. (4) Recommended essential tasks for fire support. b. Participates in the ISR huddle to receive the Commander’s ISR guidance and

engagement criteria.

c. Develops the fire support scheme of support. (1) Target acquisition plan. (a) Conducts time analysis. (b) Organizes and analyzes facts. (c) Identifies specified and implied tasks. (d) Identifies NAIs and TAIs. (e) Translates status of assets into capabilities. (f) Allocates/organizes assets to ensure redundancy. (g) Details observer to shooter criteria. (h) Establishes quick-fire net for observer to shooter. (2) PAAs for batteries. (3) Priority of fires. (4) Priority targets. (5) Fire support coordination measures (FSCM). (6) Deception plan. d. Participates in war-gaming to analyze the ISR COAs. e. The commander or DCO approves the ISR plan. f. FSO completes the ISR fire support plan and prepares fire support paragraph,

with graphics and FSCMs, for ISR order.

g. Participates as necessary in the ISR rehearsal. h. Revises the plan after rehearsals.

4. The Fires Cell conducts mission analysis. NOTE: The BCT may receive additional higher headquarters WARNOs, intelligence feeds and

summaries, and the OPORD during this step. a. During mission analysis, the FSO/targeting officer determines known facts

about fire support operations.

(1) Determines BCT fire support missions from higher echelon orders. (2) Determines unit locations and capabilities/limitations with the

assistance of BFT and AFATDS.

(3) Determines ammunition availability and identifies discrepancies/shortfalls in controlled supply rate (CSR).

(a) Amount of ammunition required for operations (required supply rate [RSR]).

(b) Recent usage and trends. (c) CSR. (4) Organizes FA assets to support future operations and plans for their

relocation and resupply, if necessary.

(5) Determines electronic warfare (EW) asset requirements. b. FSO participates in the facts/assumptions huddle. (1) Presents facts on friendly characteristics, fire support capabilities, and

limitations, to include but not limited to-

(a) Current fire support unit status.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-75

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (b) Higher headquarters fire support requirements. (c) CSR and RSR. (d) Unit locations. (e) Weapons capabilities. (f) Other fire support assets (CAS, naval gunfire, and mortars, EW,

MISO, CMO, SOI, PAO). Addresses specific FA, air support, naval gunfire, and target acquisition assets/requirements to include their capabilities and limitations.

(g) Fire support missions. (2) Presents assumptions on the availability, capabilities, and employment

of target acquisition assets.

(a) Projected fire support units’ status. (b) Possible follow-on support requirements. (3) Presents constraints. (a) FSCMs. (b) Munitions employment. (c) Target restrictions (FSCM, ROE, Social, Moral, Political). c. Determines fire support specified and implied tasks. (1) Specified. (2) Implied. (3) Support for higher headquarters planned fires. d. Participates in task huddle to present specified and implied tasks. e. BCT DCO conducts the targeting huddle to focus the targeting effort. NOTE: BCT commander receives support from the FSO on all aspects of fire support planning,

coordination, and synchronization with maneuver and the maneuvering of FA assets. (1) FSO briefs recommended high-payoff targets (HPT) and impact of

environmental effects (terrain and weather) based on initial TVA.

(2) FSO provides the following input to the commander: (a) Recommends essential tasks for fire support for operation to

include task and purpose.

(b) Recommends targets for engagement (type, location, and time). (c) Determines if recommended targets can be acquired.

(d) Recommends delivery/attack system best suited for attack and ensures system meets established guidance (effects) and targeting objective with the least expenditure of ammunition, and sufficient ammunition by type is available to support the fire plan.

(e) Recommends clearance-of-fires guidance. (f) Recommends, in coordination with the BOLT, changes to indirect

fire ROE, if not addressed in the clearance-of-fire guidance.

(3) Commander issues the following guidance: (a) Approves HPTs. (b) Approves draft essential tasks for fire support that must be

accomplished by fires. This includes the “when” and “why” it must be accomplished in relation to other events in the battle.

Chapter 3

3-76 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (d) The critical enemy formation or function that, if successfully

attacked by fires, will lead most directly to mission accomplishment.

(e) Target attack criteria to include target effects. (f) Desired effects for each critical fire support task. This will include

a desired targeting objective.

(g) BDA/MOE requirements. f. FSO completes conventional TVA to complete the draft AGM. Develops the

HPTL, AGM, and TSS protected target list and assists with the collection plan, in concert with the targeting team (DCO, S-2, S-3, engineers, air defense artillery [ADA], intelligence, electronic warfare [EW], and BOLT) considering the following:

(1) Commander’s essential tasks for fire support and target engagement priorities.

(2) Accuracy of target location. (3) Engagement criteria. (4) Fire support status. (5) Fire support capabilities and limitations, to include weapons and

munitions available.

(6) Observers available. g. Provides the BCT S-4 with an initial projection of ammunition required for

the operations based on available information on possible targets and target types.

h. Participates in the mission analysis brief. NOTE: Information previously briefed to the commander is not repeated. i. After mission analysis, the FSO participates in the Commander’s huddle and

provides recommendations for fire support to include-

(1) Essential tasks for fire support that support the Commander’s intent. Essential tasks for fire support are expressed in terms of task, purpose, method, and effects.

(2) Attack and engagement criteria. (3) Priorities for target engagement.

(4) Purpose of fires (overall, by asset, and for special munitions such as smoke, illum, Copperhead, area denial artillery munition [ADAM]/remote anti-armor mine [RAAM]).

(5) Allocation of assets to accomplish fire support tasks. (6) Restrictions. Includes FSCMs, AGM, TSS guidance, and the protected

target list.

(7) Nomination of initial HPTs, by phase, to support the essential tasks for fire support.

(8) AFATDS database development, to include Commander’s guidance, filtering guidance, and screening guidance.

j. Develops the AGM with HPTL and TSS protected target list and assists with the collection plan, in concert with the targeting team.

k. Coordinates timing for fire support rehearsals with DCO and Fires battalion. l. Provides input to the S-3 for the second WO. m. Passes information to direct support (DS) FA battalion tactical operations

center (TOC) to allow the Fires battalion to start their planning process.

5. During COA development, the FSO, in coordination with the S-3, develops the

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-77

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO scheme of support of essential tasks for fire support for the operation, to include-

NOTE: The FSO may have to develop separate schemes of support for multiple COAs. a. Participates in the COA development and provides advice for the

employment of fire support.

(1) Where to find and attack essential tasks for fire support formation, the decisive point (where to mass the effects of combat power), and TVA.

(2) Shaping and decisive operations (sketch of the broad concept of the operation).

(3) The purpose of the shaping and decisive operations. (4) Revises specified and implied tasks based on requirements for shaping

and decisive operations.

b. Develops scheme of fire support. (1) Analyzes relative combat power by- (a) Arranging specified and implied tasks for shaping and decisive

operations on the battlefield in time and space.

(b) Analyzing friendly capabilities pertaining to the operation. (c) Using battle calculus to test feasibility analyzing relative force fire

support ratios (friendly versus enemy) necessary to achieve the tasks.

(2) Identifies HVTs, with methods of engagement (maneuver, lethal, nonlethal) and desired effects, for tentative HPTs.

(3) Selects tentative positions and allocation of sensors (radars, critical friendly zones [CFZ], call-for-fire zones, striker platoon, fire support team [FIST], and combat observation lazing team [COLT]) for the detect function of the targeting process.

(4) Nominates FA movement techniques and position areas. Selects tentative positions, movement plans, and allocation of firing systems for the deliver function of the targeting process.

(5) Prioritizes targets that should be attacked during shaping and decisive operations.

(6) Quantifies effects (criteria of success) (MOE). (7) Selects tentative triggers for initiating delivery of fires, positioning of

assets, or cuing radars.

(8) Identifies FSCMs that facilitate the attack of targets. (9) Completes a tentative observation plan that addresses the detection of

targets and the combat assessment of essential tasks for fire support.

(10) Prioritizes initial targets/scheduling of fires needed to support each COA.

(11) Coordinates the effort with aviation, engineer, electronic warfare, G3 air, and naval gunfire liaison officer, IOWG, and TACP elements.

(12) Allocates all fire support assets to include CAS and naval gunfire to meet the Commander’s intent and accomplish the essential tasks for fire support.

(13) Allocates target and radar zones. (14) Establishes a no later than (NLT) time for targets to be added or

refined.

(15) Assists the S-2 in collection plan refinement. c. FSO participates in hasty war-game to determine the scheme of support

Chapter 3

3-78 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO feasibility and suitability of COAs.

NOTE: S-3 identifies the critical event/phase to be war-gamed. Follow these performance measures for each event/phase war-gamed.

(1) Briefs essential tasks for fire support and HPTs with shaping and decisive operations.

(2) Briefs FA organization for battle and allocation of FS resources at the start of war-gaming for each COA.

(3) FS section provides input to the S-3 section Battlefield Planning and Visualization (BPV) or moves and positions FA elements during the event.

(4) Describes target acquisition and execution of fires for shaping and decisive operations.

(5) Briefs FSCMs. (6) Records results and adjusts or modifies the fire support plan as

necessary.

(a) Essential tasks for fire support and HPTL. (b) Scheme of support. (c) Organization for combat. (d) PAAs. (e) FSCMs. (7) Upon completion of war-gaming, reviews branch options for each COA. d. If necessary, briefs the scheme of support during the COA brief.

NOTE: Each war-gaming session is conducted in a similar manner. (1) Essential tasks for fire support. (2) Fire support assets available (FA, FIST, radar, COLT, Fires Cells,

brigade reconnaissance troop [BRT]).

(3) FSCMs. (4) Units to receive priority of fires. (5) AGM with HPTs. (6) Draft concept of fires. (7) FA positioning and movement plan. (8) Fire support execution matrix (FSEM), that answers who, what, when,

and where for planned fires and how they accomplish the essential tasks for fire support.

(9) Draft target list worksheet and overlay. (10) Draft or modified target synchronization matrix (TSM). (11) Fires planned by and/or availability of fire from higher headquarters. (12) Collection/reconnaissance and surveillance plan.

6. During COA analysis the BCT FSO/targeting officer references the AGM, and TSS.

a. Receives the DCO’s evaluation criteria and description. b. Participates in hasty war-game to expand the scheme of support and identify

advantages and disadvantages with each COA.

NOTE: S-3 identifies the critical event/phase to be war-gamed. Follow these performance measures for each event/phase war-gamed.

(1) Lists fire support critical events, decision points, essential tasks for fire support, FS TAIs, and HPTs.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-79

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (2) Briefs FA organization for battle and allocation of fire support resources

at the start of war-gaming for each COA.

(3) Fires Cell provides input to the S-3 section BPV or moves and positions FA elements during the event.

(4) Describes and records the following: (a) Identifies movement and displacement requirements for fire

support delivery systems, and ensures that they are accounted for in the scheme of maneuver.

(b) Describes target acquisition and execution of fires for shaping and decisive operations.

(c) Describes integration of psychological operations (MISO) assets, chemical fires, electronic warfare (EW), CAS, air interdiction (AI), and naval gunfire support.

(d) Simulates engagement of attack systems against HPTs to determine volume and volley of fires, desired target effects, and BDA collection requirements.

NOTE: States the enemy vulnerabilities created by loss of certain functions and capabilities. (e) The FSO in conjunction with the S-2, determines what targets on

the list can be acquired by BCT assets and what targets are translated into requests to higher headquarters.

(5) Briefs FSCMs. (6) Records results and adjusts or modifies the fire support plan as

necessary:

(a) Essential tasks for fire support and HPTL. (b) Scheme of support. (c) Organization for combat. (d) PAAs. (e) FSCMs. (f) Sustainment requirements to include RSR and casualty evacuation

(CASEVAC).

(7) AGM and FSEM with shaping and decisive operations. (8) Target acquisition and TSS targeting. (9) Upon completion of war-gaming, reviews branch options for each COA. c. Targeting officer coordinates the exchange of information between the

brigade and the Fires battalion S-2 and the Fires Cell. Specific functions performed are-

(1) Determines specific target aspects and vulnerabilities, aided by the S-2 and FSO, to include target location error requirements and dwell times for viable attack.

(2) States the enemy vulnerabilities created by loss of certain functions and capabilities.

(3) Determines requirements for unmanned aerial system (UAS) support. d. Analyzes results of hasty war-gaming to provides an overall assessment of

the supportability for each COA, including the relationship of time versus space and the ability of the available FS assets to accomplish the essential tasks for fire support.

(1) Evaluates each COA against the stated evaluation criteria focusing on how well each COA accomplishes the critical tasks and effects.

(a) Refines COAs based on fire support insights gained during war-

Chapter 3

3-80 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO gaming process.

(b) Rejects COAs based on fire support insights gained during war- gaming process.

(2) Fires Cell and targeting team record battlefield functional area (BFA) specific advantages and disadvantages of COA with emphasis on supportability for use in COA comparison.

(3) Develops initial AGM for each COA to portray critical events in time and space.

(4) Develops the initial FSEM. (5) Identifies fire support CSS assets required for all COAs. (6) Records fire support strengths and weaknesses for each COA, to include

risk assessment to subordinate, supporting, and supported elements. Determines specific target aspects and vulnerabilities, aided by the S- 2 and FSO, to include target location error requirements and dwell times for viable attack.

7. FSO conducts COA comparison. a. FSO provides following fire support information for each COA during the

comparison huddle-

(1) FSO evaluates the advantages and disadvantages of each COA from a fire support perspective.

(a) Ensures that the FA will be able to accomplish the essential tasks for fire support.

(b) Identifies fire support assets available. (c) Develops initial HPTL. (d) TSS. (e) Presents findings to staff members for consideration. (2) Scores each COA using the evaluation criteria. (a) Highlights COA advantages and disadvantages. (b) Provides analysis to the S-3 section. b. Presents results during the COA decision brief. (1) Assists the DCO in choosing a recommended COA for presentation to

the commander for the decision brief.

(2) Has available- (a)Updated fire support estimate. (b) Advantages, disadvantages and supporting rationale for each

COA.

8. BCT commander approves COA and issues additional guidance, if necessary, and directs formal war-gaming.

a. Approves COA and HPTL. NOTE: FSO follows the previous war-gaming performance measures in completing the scheme of

support. b. Participates in formal war-game to finalize and synchronize the scheme of

support with the scheme of maneuver.

(1) Ensures scheme of fires is synchronized with and supports the scheme of maneuver. This includes-

(a) A clear sequence of essential tasks for fire support. (b) Triggers for the essential tasks for fire support. (c) Allocation of and positions for target acquisition.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-81

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (d) FSCMs. (e) Specific attack systems and volleys of fire. (f) Detailed battlefield calculus of time and volume of fires required to

accomplish the essential tasks for fire support - movement, ready-to-fire times, time to build up smoke, fire ADAM/RAAM mission, fire a battalion 6, shift from one target to the next-and identification of critical periods for fire support.

(g) If necessary, planned targets from higher and adjacent units into the BCT plan.

(h) Assigned primary and backup observers for all targets on the target list worksheet.

(2) At the end of war-gaming, provides an overall assessment of supportability for each COA, including the relationship of time versus space, and the ammunition or assets required. During the accelerated tactical decision-making process (TDMP), this step is accomplished after COA development.

(3) Approves the HPTL developed by the FSO, S-3, S-2, air defense officer, assistant brigade engineer (ABE), air liaison officer (ALO), targeting officer, and BOLT.

c. War-games results- (1) Fires paragraph with essential tasks for fire support. (2) Fire support annex to include- (a) AGM. (b) Target list. (c) Target overlay. (d) TSM or modified TSM. d. Once the HPTL is approved, the FSO ensures that fire planning and fire

support requests are processed according to the BCT Commander’s guidance.

e. Provides input for the third WO. f. Fire support noncommissioned officer (FSNCO) ensures the fire support

operator inputs target data into AFATDS.

g. Targeting officer facilitates the exchange of information between the BCT and the Fires battalion S-2s and the Fires Cell. Specific functions he performs are-

(1) Helps the S-2 and the FSO determine specific target aspects and vulnerabilities. This includes target location error requirements and dwell times for a viable attack. He and the S-2 are responsible for producing the target selection standard for the BCT.

(2) Coordinates intelligence and electronic warfare (IEW) targeting taskings with the supporting military intelligence (MI) unit and the MI battalion.

(3) States the enemy vulnerabilities created by loss of certain functions or capabilities.

(4) In coordination with the FSO, consolidates, and distributes the restricted target list.

(5) During operations, monitors compliance with the restrictions and reports incidents where the restrictions have been violated.

h. The DCO ensures targeting requirements, confirmed during war-gaming, are

Chapter 3

3-82 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO met to produce the HPTL, AGM, and TSS.

9. Fires Cell completes the fire support plan and assists with orders production. a. Ensures the plan- (1) Contains the Commander’s guidance received after the mission

analysis, including:

(a) Concept of fires (overall, by asset, and for special munitions such as smoke, illum, Copperhead, ADAM/RAAM).

(b) AGM. (c) HPTL. (d) TSS.

(e) Essential tasks for fire support (task, purpose, method, and effects) for each phase that would support the Commander’s intent.

(f) The organization combat and employment of munitions to accomplish all tasks.

(2) Supports forces in contact. (3) Synchronizes the fire support systems in time and space with maneuver. (4) Prioritizes the effects of all indirect-fire assets, to include CAS and

naval gunfire, to meet the Commander’s intent.

(5) Allocates targets and zones. (6) Establishes a NLT time for targets to be added or refined. (7) Includes guidance on the employment of Fire Support Teams. (8) Contains guidance on suppression of enemy air defense (SEAD) (if

applicable).

(9) Details FSCMs. b. The detailed scheme of fires; targets; triggers; task, purpose, method, and

effects for each target; primary and backup observers; and allocation of resources to accomplish each Essential task for fire support.

c. FSO prepares the fires portion of the concept of the operation paragraph for inclusion in the SBCT OPORD/operations plan (OPLAN).

(1) Prepares fire support paragraph/annex for OPORD. (a) Purpose. (b) Priority. (c) Allocation. (d) Restrictions. (2) Submits fire support paragraph/annex with all accompanying

matrixes/lists/graphics to the S-3 for inclusion in the OPORD. Ensures the plan includes: FSEM, target list worksheet, and target overlay; and that they provide a detailed scheme of fires.

(a) Fire support estimate. (b) Fire support annex to OPORD/OPLAN (Annex D). (c) Fire support overlay. (d) Target list matrix. (e) Essential task for fire support list. (f) HPTL. (g) Fire support execution matrix (FSEM). (3) Ensures the essential tasks for fire support are clearly stated by task,

purpose, method, and effects (lethal and nonlethal).

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-83

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (4) Recommends decision criteria to shift from one essential task for fire

support to the next and/or to shift the focus of fires from contiguous to noncontiguous areas of operation and/or from one task force to another.

10. FSO assists in revising plan after rehearsals. a. Participates in the combined arms, fire support, and service support rehearsals

as necessary.

b. Provides input for FRAGO, as necessary.

Chapter 3

3-84 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ANALYZE TARGETS 06-6-5074

CONDITIONS: The unit is preparing for or is engaged in combat operations. Communications have been established. Reports are being provided. The S-3 is developing an operation order/operation plan (OPORD/OPLAN). Intelligence assets are providing data on the threat. The commander orders the analysis of targets to accomplish desired effects. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The Fires Cell used the targeting process of decide, detect, deliver, and assess (D3A) to recommend targets for attack to satisfy the Commander’s guidance, intent for fires, and ROE.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The commander directs the targeting effort. He receives support from the FSO

who advises him on all aspects of fire support (FS) planning, coordination, and synchronization with maneuver and the maneuvering of field artillery (FA) assets. The commander provides guidance for the targeting effort. This guidance should include the following:

a. What critical tasks must be accomplished by fires. This includes the “when” and “why” it must be accomplished in relation to other events in the battle.

b. How he intends to shape the AO with fires in terms of time and space. c. The critical enemy formation or function that, if attacked by fires, will lead

most directly to mission accomplishment.

d. The desired end state for each essential fires and effects task. e. Combat assessment requirements.

2. To support the commander in developing guidance, the FSO provides the following input to the commander:

a. Recommends targets to be engaged. b. Recommends delivery/attack system best suited for attack. (1) Ensures system meets established guidance (effects) and targeting

objective with the least expenditure of ammunition.

(2) Ensures sufficient ammunition by type is available to support the fire plan.

c. Recommends clearance-of-fires guidance. 3. As a part of the targeting process, the S-2 provides the following information:

a. High-value targets (HVT) based on target arrays. b. Enemy capabilities and projected course of action (COA).

4. The DCO/XO directs the S-2, FSO, IO and targeting officer (BCT level) to prioritize the TSM before the commander approves it. Priorities should address:

a. What targets should be engaged. b. When the targets should be attacked. c. The desired effects on the target.

5. The commander approves the TSM developed by the targeting team. During war-gaming, the S-2 determines what targets organic assets can acquire and what targets are translated into requests to higher headquarters.

6. The targeting officer facilitates the exchange of information between the BCT and the fires battalion S-2s and the Fires Cell. Specific functions he performs are:

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-85

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO a. Helps the S-2 and the FSO determine specific target aspects and

vulnerabilities. This includes target location error requirements and dwell times for a viable attack. He and the S-2 are responsible for producing the target selection standards for the BCT.

b. States the enemy vulnerabilities created by loss of certain functions or capabilities.

c. Under the FSO’s guidance, formulates and tracks the attack guidance used in the BCT and fires battalion CP.

7. The IO, in coordination with the FSO provides nonlethal input to the targeting process.

8. The DCO/XO supervises and facilitates the actions of the targeting team as they perform conventional target value analysis (TVA).

a. Receives target attack criteria from the commander during war-gaming. b. In conjunction with the S-2 and targeting officer, analyzes enemy target

array, considering:

(1)Target value analysis of HVTs to produce HPTs. (2)Commander’s target engagement priorities. (3)Engagement criteria. (4)Accuracy of target location. (5) Target characteristics (such as composition, disposition, degree of

protection, size, location, shape, and mobility).

(6) Terrain and weather. (7) Weapons and munitions available. (8) Observers available.

Chapter 3

3-86 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ESTABLISH TARGET PRIORITIES (BATTALION – CORPS) 71-8-5114

CONDITIONS: The staff is conducting or preparing to conduct operations. Communications are established with subordinate, adjacent units, and higher headquarters (HQ). Command and Control (C2) Information Systems (INFOSYS) are operational and are passing information in accordance with Tactical Standard Operating Procedures (TACSOP). The command has received a Warning Order/Operations Plan/Operations Order/Fragmentary Order (WARNO/OPLAN/OPORD/FRAGO) from higher headquarters and is exercising mission command. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The staff establishes target priorities that support the accomplishment of the mission. The staff identifies and recommends for selection, target categories in precedence to mission accomplishment, or individual targets to attack by analyzing all warfighting functions, during the operation.

NOTE: Task steps and performance measures may not apply to every unit or echelon. Prior to evaluation, coordination should be made between evaluator and the evaluated units’ higher headquarters to determine the task steps and performance measures that may be omitted.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO NOTE: The targeting team establishes targeting priorities for each phase or critical event of an

operation. The targeting team develops the following products to reflect those priorities: the high- payoff target list (HPTL), the intelligence synchronization plan, target selection standards (TSS) matrix, the attack guidance matrix (AGM) and the target synchronization matrix (TSM).

1. The staff led by the Fires Cell (FC), leads the targeting team by establishes targeting priorities for each phase or critical event of an operation. Conducts mission analysis to develop a restated mission to begin the targeting process, by:

a. High-Payoff Target List (HPTL). b. Intelligence Synchronization Plan. c. Target Selection Standards Matrix (TSS). d. Attack Guidance Matrix (AGM). e. Target Synchronization Matrix (TSM).

2. The staff, led by the Intelligence section, conducts Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield (IPB) to establish the foundation of the targeting process.

3. The staff, led by the Intelligence section, identifies possible High-Value Targets (HVT) during IPB, by:

NOTE: HVTs are those assets the enemy commander requires for the successful completion of his mission. HVT identification begins as early as the development of the doctrinal template. Refinement takes place during the development of the situation template and the wargaming process.

a. Identifying initial HVT categories based on the enemy doctrinal templates, which identify critical assets for each type of operation at each echelon of command.

b. Adjusting initial HVT categories based on enemy situational templates. c. Identifying Named Areas of Interest (NAI) to assist in locating HVT based on

the event template.

d. Identifying Decision Points (DP) to support the attack of HVT based on the Decision Support Template (DST).

NOTE: The DST is a combined intelligence and operations estimate in graphic form. It relates the detail of the event template to DPs that are significant to the commander. It identifies critical battlefield areas (including target areas of interest [TAIs] and NAIs) and events and activities that require tactical decisions by time and location. Although a total staff effort, the DST is essentially a product of the Intelligence Cell, G3, Plans Cell and Fire Support (FS) Cell. The DST is updated throughout the wargaming process.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-87

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 4. The staff develops the Commander’s Critical Information Requirements (CCIR)

to include Priority Intelligence Requirements (PIR) and Information Requirements (IR) to refine target information and target prioritization.

5. The staff led by the FC conducts Target Value Analysis (TVA) upon completion of IPB, to determine HVT for the operation, by:

a. Identifying potential HVT sets associated with critical enemy functions that could interfere with units Courses of Action (COA) or that are key to enemy success.

b. Providing a relative ranking of target sets. c. Developing Target Areas of Interest (TAI). d. Developing DP or decision TPL. e. Recording DP and TAI in the DST. The DST also records information

relevant to establishing target priorities to include:

(1) NAI. (2) TPL. (3) Avenues of approach and mobility corridors. (4) Objectives. (5) Current enemy situation. f. War-gaming COA to determine HPT from HVT. NOTE: HPTs are those HVTs that, if successfully attacked, contribute substantially to Division

operations. HPTs are developed from HVTs when the various COAs are war-gamed. If it is beyond unit capability, they are passed to the next-higher echelon as a PIR.

g. Recording TVA information on target spread sheets which, include: (1) Doctrinal template and resume. (2) Failure option statement. (3) Relative value matrix. (4) Attack rationale. (5) Specific HVT. h. Recording information required to engage targets on target sheets.

6. The staff led by the FC develops the HPTL by determining: a. The sequence or order of appearance of targets. b. The ability to detect, identify, classify, locate and track the target. c. Degree of accuracy available from acquisition systems. d. Ability to engage the target. e. Ability to suppress, neutralize, or destroy the target based on attack guidance. f. Resources required.

7. The Intelligence section produces the intelligence synchronization plan to collect and refine target information, by:

a. Tasking Reconnaissance, Surveillance, and Target Acquisition (RSTA) assets as soon as possible to begin the collection effort.

b. Directing RSTA assets to answer PIR and IR. c. Identifying gaps in the intelligence effort. d. Anticipating future intelligence requirements. e. Producing the Intelligence Synchronization Matrix (ISM). f. Determining what collection requirements (HPT, PIR, Battle Damage

Assessment [BDA]) organic assets can accomplish and what requirements are forwarded to higher headquarters as requests.

Chapter 3

3-88 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 8. The FC produces the TSS matrix by determining:

NOTE: TSS are criteria, applied to enemy activity (acquisitions and battlefield information), used in deciding whether the activity is a target. TSS put nominations into two categories: targets and suspected targets. Targets meet accuracy and timeliness requirements for attack. Suspected targets must be confirmed before any attack.

a. The attack system target location accuracy requirements (Target Location Error).

b. The size of the enemy activity (point or area). c. The status of the activity (moving or stationary). d. The timeliness of the information.

9. The commander, with recommendations from the staff, provides attack guidance including:

a. Prioritized list of HPT. b. When, how, and desired effects of the attack. c. Special instructions. d. HPT that require BDA. e. Subordinate and adjacent unit targets that may be requested and included in

the TSM.

10. The Targeting team produces the AGM, including: a. Target categories. b. Specific HPT. c. Timing of attack. d. How targets are to be attacked. e. Desired target effects. f. Restrictions.

11. The FC produces the TSM which must provide: a. The list of HPT by category and by agency responsible for detecting,

attacking, and assessing effects.

b. Verification that assets have been assigned to each targeting process task for each target.

NOTE: The targeting team may prepare a TSM for each COA, or may use the HPTL, TSS, and AGM for the war-game and prepare a TSM for only the approved COA.

12. The staff in accordance with the Intelligence section develop necessary BDA requirements.

13. The FC briefs the commander on all target priority products, receives approval and any additional guidance, and updates target priorities/targeting information as necessary.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-89

FIRE SUPPORT TABLE IV: EXECUTE FIRES 3-31. The tasks in Fire Support Table IV include the conduct of fire missions for FIST/COLT, and the execution of the Fire Support Plan for the Fires Cell. It also includes the tasks that must be performed by the JFO as sustainment training to maintain certification. These tasks should be trained and assessed using available simulation such as the call for fire trainer (CFFT) or simulations. These tasks should be trained using all tactical communications, digital entry devices, and day- and night-vision devices assigned to the section. When Table IV is complete, dismounted fire supporters move to Table VI.

Table 3-6. Fire Support Table IV – Execute Fires

Task Number Task Reference Observer Tasks

06-5-5046 Conduct FIST/COLT Fire Missions UTL-DTMS 06-5-5047 Employ Non Field Artillery Fire Support Assets UTL-DTMS

NONE PFED Checklist Fires Cell Tasks

06-1-5002 Execute Fires DTMS 06-6-6053 Conduct Precision Targeting DTMS 06-6-5066 Employ Lethal Fires in Support of the BCT UTL-DTMS 71-8-5146 Perform Battle Damage Assessment (Battalion – Corps) UTL-DTMS

NONE LFED (RHC-2/SCU) Checklist

OBSERVER TASKS–FIRE MISSIONS 3-32. All fire missions are conducted under Task 06-5-5046, Conduct FIST/COLT Fire Missions, using simulations. Simulation provides an opportunity to plan and conduct missions with munitions that may not be fired live because of safety limitations.

• Request and Adjust Area Fire (Voice and Digital) • Conduct a Registration • Fire for Effect Missions

Chapter 3

3-90 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONDUCT FIST/COLT FIRE MISSIONS 06-5-5046

CONDITIONS: A fire support team/combat lasing team (FIST/COLT) element has occupied an observation post (OP) and established Fire Support operations. The unit has digital devices and communications equipment. Enemy targets are visible or suspected. The Fire Support Team sees a canalized enemy force moving toward friendly positions. Targets suitable for Copperhead engagement have been identified. The laser locater is operational and oriented. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The FIST/COLT accurately located targets, called for and adjusted fires and fired for effect to destroy, neutralize, or suppress targets and meet the purpose of the FSTs and commander’s guidance.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The observer maintains observation as follows:

a. Maintains ability to observe and adjust fires while moving or stationary. b. Maintains communications with supporting unit IAW Tactical Standard

Operating Procedures (TSOP).

c. Maintains current locations of forward elements and other observation teams. d. Conducts a thorough terrain map analysis. e. Takes advantage of cover and concealment.

2. The observer locates targets using one of the following methods of target location:

a. Grid. b. Polar. c. Shift from a known point. d. Laser Polar.

3. The observer conducts voice and digital adjust fire missions. a. Uses proper radio communications procedures to call for fire (if applicable). b. Uses one of various techniques for area adjustment , such as: (1) Successive bracketing. (2) Hasty bracketing. (3) One round adjustment. (4) Creeping fire. c. Bases the deviation corrections on correct observer-target (OT) factor and

angular deviation (if applicable).

d. Sends subsequent corrections. e. Ensures fire for effect is within 50 meters.

4. The observer conducts voice and digital fire for effect missions. a. Ensures target location is close enough to have effects with the first volley

fired.

b. Requests appropriate shell/fuse combination. c. If desired effects are not achieved, the observer does the following: adjusts

the rounds and repeats; changes shell/fuze combination; requests additional fire for effect volleys.

5. The observer conducts voice and digital immediate suppression missions. a. The observer identifies the target. b. Transmits complete call for fire. c. Ensures an accurate target location is close enough to have effects with the

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-91

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO first volley fired.

d. If desired effects are not achieved, the observer does the following: Adjusts the rounds and repeats; changes shell/fuze combination; requests additional fire for effect volleys.

e. Ensures final suppression rounds are within 150 meters of the target (if necessary).

6. The observer observes munitions effects and reports battle damage assessments to include:

a. Estimates the extent of damage to the target and/or casualties. b. Reports damage assessment to the fire direction center (FDC) providing fires.

7. When directed, the observer, with laser locator, conducts a High Burst/Mean Point of Impact (HB/MPI) registration (FA only), by voice and digital communications.

a. Fire Direction Center (FDC) transmits orienting data to observer. b. The observer orients on orienting data. c. The observer announces to FDC ready to observe. d. The observer lases the burst. e. The observer records and transmits burst location to FDC until FDC

terminates registration.

8. The observer registers, confirms, and adjusts a parallel sheaf for mortars. a. Uses successive bracketing. b. Sends appropriate corrections to FDC. c. Adjusts sheaf to within 50 meters range and 40 meters lateral spread between

rounds.

9. The observer engages a moving target array as follows: a. Establishes the speed and direction of movement of the enemy formation. b. Establishes the intercept point. NOTE: The intercept point will be the kill zone for the enemy formation. The amount of time it takes

to process the planned mission, plus the time of flight for the rounds, times the probable speed of the formation, equals the minimum distance to plot the intercept point form the target. The direction to the intercept point will be the most likely direction the enemy vehicles will move.

c. Determines the trigger point. NOTE: Transmission time plus the time of flight times the target speed, equals distance to emplace

trigger point from intercept point. d. Fires the mission when the lead vehicle crosses the trigger point. NOTE: These are variations of fire missions that may be fired when conducting a Fire Mission:

Fire for Effect (FFE) (Bn Mass) Echelons Above BN Mass Engage a Moving Target Array Low angle Adjust (Fuze time) Precision Registration High angle Adjust (Radar or FO) Coordinated Illumination Final Protective Fire (FPF) Adjust Simultaneous Missions Quick Smoke Irregularly Shaped Target TOT Schedule of Fires

Chapter 3

3-92 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO Immediate Suppression Priority Target Sweep and Zone Multiple Volley Mission FFE Chemical (Cannot be fired) FFE FASCAM FFE ICM/DPICM (Cannot be fired) These are variations of fire missions that may be fired when engaging a moving Target. Echelons Above BN Mass FFE (BN Mass) Engage a Moving Target Array Low angle Adjust (Fuze time) Low angle Adjust (Radar or FO) Simultaneous Missions Quick Smoke Irregularly Shaped Target TOT Schedule of Fires Immediate Suppression Priority Target Illumination Immediate Smoke

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-93

EMPLOY NON FIELD ARTILLERY FIRE SUPPORT ASSETS 06-5-5047

CONDITIONS: The supported company/troop is conducting combat operations. FA and mortar assets are inappropriate, unavailable, or insufficient to attack enemy targets. The targets meet the Commander’s attack criteria. A joint tactical air controller (JTAC), naval spotter, or aero scout cannot observe the target. The observer has communications with the Fires Cell. The Fires Cell has established communications links with supporting aircraft, NSFS, or attack helicopter means. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The FO engaged targets with FS means other than FA and mortars and accomplished the purpose of the FSTs and the Commander’s guidance for fires.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO NOTE: Type II and III control may only be performed by a JFO-qualified observer.

1. Directs a CAS mission as follows: a. Requests mission and clearance through the battalion Fires Cell/BCT FC. b. Requests CAS Check-In Briefing from the ETAC. c. Provides CAS Briefing Form (9-Line) information to the ETAC. d. Plans SEAD fires, if necessary. e. Maintains contact with the JTAC/ETAC who is in contact with the flight

leader enroute and verifies attack information.

f. Marks target by use of one of the following methods: (1) Artillery or mortar. (2) Adjusts from previous aircraft hits, giving reference to cardinal heading. (3) Marks target with laser designator system for aircraft, if applicable. g. Monitors CAS AC ingress route relay via the ETAC Cleared Hot/Abort NOTE: If the pilot is not lined up on the proper target, aborts the mission by contacting the

JTAC/ETAC. If lineup is proper, directs CLEARED HOT to continue mission and drops ordnance on target.

h. Monitors CAS AC egress route. i. Provides BDA to the JTAC/ETAC.

2. Adjusts naval surface fire support (NSFS) to include the following: a. Considers NSFS capabilities/limitations for the mission. b. Requests mission and clearance through battalion Fires Cell/BCT FEC. c. Transmits the CFF through the FC in two parts: (1) Spotter identification, warning order and target number. (2) Target location, target description, method of engagement, and method

of fire and control.

3. Directs an attack helicopter strike as follows: a. Initiates SEAD request, if necessary. b. Specifies type/location of targets to be engaged. c. Directs the attack helicopter route in and out of area. d. Uses laser designator system, if applicable.

4. Provides appropriate battle damage assessment.

Chapter 3

3-94 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Process a Call for Fire (CFF) with the PFED Performance Measure GO No GO

1 Identify the target through the laser locater device 2 Produce a mensurated location using the PFI Viewer 3 Develop the Call for Fire (CFF) message a. Click the lase button on the laser device b. Input Target Description c. Tapped the More button d. Select the Method of Engagement e. Select the Method of Fire and Control f. Tapped Send 4 Fire Mission Monitor is displayed with Active Target and status 5 Received the MTO 6 Highlight the Target MTO message 7 Tapped the MTO button 8 Review the MTO 9 Review status of target (Shot, Splash, Rds Complete for WR)

10 Tapped the EOM button 11 Tapped the End of Mission radio button 12 Tapped the BDA button 13 Input the Battle Damage Assessment data 14 Tapped OK to close the Battle Damage Assess screen 15 Select how the target will be saved 16 Tapped on the Send button 17 Target was cleared from the Active Target List on the Fire Mission Monitor screen

JFO SUSTAINMENT TASKS 3-33. During every 6-month period (semi-annual), each JFO must complete the number and type events prescribed by the JFO MOA (see following list) to remain qualified. The events begin with the JFO acquiring a target and providing targeting data to the Joint Tactical Air Controller (JTAC) for a Type 2 or 3 close air support (CAS) terminal attack control. If live events are not possible or feasible, the events may be accomplished via simulation if approved by first O6 in the JFO’s chain of command. Waivers will be documented and maintained in the JFO training folder. Several events may be completed during one or more of the following scenarios (i.e., surface-to-surface and laser terminal guided operations [TGOs] to engage simultaneous targets during one scenario):

• Performance of two live/simulated laser guided weapon system TGO events. • Performance in support of one live/simulated fixed-wing CAS control. • One live/simulated night-target marking event using marking devices (i.e., Laser, IR Pointer),

conducted at night beyond end of evening nautical twilight (EENT) and prior to beginning morning nautical twilight (BMNT). Laser events in conjunction with TGO in support of CAS controls credits this requirement if conducted between EENT and BMNT.

• Performance of one live/simulated terminal attack control as non-qualified JTAC, individual using Multi-Service Procedures for the Joint Application of Firepower (JFIRE). Supervision by a qualified JTAC is preferred but not required.

• Performance of one live/simulated abort. This task may be accomplished in conjunction with other semi-annual events.

• Performance of six live/simulated surface-to-surface or naval surface call for fire events. • Performance of one live/simulated AC-130 call for fire.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-95

FIRES CELL EXECUTION TASKS 3-34. The Fires Cell execution tasks should be trained and assessed during an STX or staff exercise (STAFFEX). This event should be conducted using interactive simulation that provides realistic cues and responses and requires adjustment and refinement of Annex D, Radar positioning and cueing plan, Counterfire Plan, and drill execution and support of branches and refinements of the original order. A manual scenario using inputs from a Master Scenario Events List (MSEL) if an appropriate simulation is not available may also drive the event. Critical tasks for the company Fires Cell include adjusting trigger events and conducting technical/digital and sensor-to-shooter rehearsals.

EXECUTE FIRES

06-1-5002

CONDITIONS: The maneuver unit is operating in a joint environment and is conducting tactical operations. The maneuver S-3/G3 has issued an operations order/fragmentary order (OPORD/ FRAGO). The unit has digital devices and communications equipment. The fires cell is coordinating fires to support the maneuver element. Some iterations of this task can be performed in MOPP4. STANDARDS: The fires cell coordinates the efforts of targeting team, S2/G2 to provide fire support to the maneuver commander, maintains geometries and fire support coordination measures (FCSM), identifies and engages high payoff targets (HPTs), and processes combat assessment

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. The Fires Cell executes fires in support of the counter-mortar/counter-battery fight and close support of committed maneuver forces. The FS officer (FSO) (or FS coordinator [FSCOORD]) resolves any outstanding conflicts between the scheme of maneuver and the scheme of fires.

2. The FSO/FSCOORD ensures planned fires are updated in AFATDS based on the evolving tactical situation and observation of common operational picture (COP) data.

3. The FS Sgt supervises updates of geometries and FSCMs, IAW current fight, in AFATDS.

*4. The Fires Cell processes FS requests. *5. The FSO/FSCOORD ensures the request is valid: 6. The FSO/FSCOORD or targeting officer processes combat assessment: 7. FSO/FSCOORD monitors the current situation and maintains situational

awareness.

8. The Fires Cell coordinates FS with higher, lower, and adjacent units and staff agencies as required using ABCS.

9. Fires Cell provides missions fired roll-up when required. 10. FSO/FSCOORD and targeting officer participate in targeting meetings as

required.

11. The targeting officer ensures digital fire missions are executed as follows: a. ASAS collects ELINT and nominates targets IAW TCRIT. b. ASAS initiates fire mission to AFATDS in Fires Cell (TIDAT).

Chapter 3

3-96 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONDUCT PRECISION TARGETING 06-6-6053

CONDITIONS: The unit is conducting or preparing to conduct operations. Communications are established with subordinate and adjacent units, and higher headquarters. Command and Control (C2) Information Systems (INFOSYS) are operational and passing information in accordance with Tactical Standing Operating Procedures (TSOP). A target has been acquired by a sensor that may require engagement by a precision munition. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. TASK STANDARDS: The Fires Cell validates the target in accordance with (IAW) Target Selection Standards (TSS), High Payoff Target List (HPTL) and Fire Support Coordination Measures (FSCM), determines munitions to be use (precision guided munition (PGM)/Ballistic) based on attack guidance matrix (AGM) and target presentation, and performs an initial assessment for collateral concerns based on rules of engagement (ROE), no strike lists (NSL), and restricted target lists (RTL).

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO

1.Targeting cell receives target acquisition from a sensor: a.Targeting cell validates target against:

(1)TSS (2)HPTL (3)FSCM

b.Conducts an initial assessment for collateral concerns: (1)ROE (2)NSL (3)RSL

2.Targeting Cell determines munitions to be use (PGM/Ballistic) based on AGM and target presentation. 3.The targeting cell enters target data into the mensuration, weaponeering, Collateral Damage Estimation (CDE), coordination and fire mission processing tools. NOTE: Current Imagery and Imagery analysis is required for mensuration and CDE production. Modeling for effects using Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual (JMEM) Weaponeering System (JWS) is required on non standard military targets. Quality control procedures must be established based on Fires Cell capabilities; non organic support may be required.

4.Weaponeering determines proper weapon to target pairing to achieve effects and can determine single or multiple desired point of impacts (DPI). 5.Targeting cell performs mensuration:

a. Refined locations are generated for each desired points of impact (DPI) and a Mensuration Point Graphic (MPG) is developed IAW DAI PAM 3002.01 or CJCSI 3370.01). b.Targeting officer performs quality control inspections (QCI).

NOTE: Secondary independent checks will be conducted along with QCI. This can be achieved with adjacent or higher HQ by certified individuals, if required.

6.Fires Cell inputs target data into fire support coordination tool and advanced field artillery tactical data system (AFATDS). NOTE: If more than one aim point, annotate in additional remarks block of Joint Automated Deep Operations Coordination System (JADOCS), on the MPG and collateral damage estimation graphic (CDE-G).

7.The targeting cell performs CDE manually in conjunction with approved tool: a.Create CDE Graphic. b.Targeting Officer conducts QCI.

NOTE: Secondary independent checks will be conducted along with QCI. This will normally be done with the adjacent or higher HQ by certified individuals. 8.Fires Cell submits CDE-G and MPG for approval or denial.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-97

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO 9.Fires Cell briefs the Commander/designated authority and fire support officer (FSO) on status of CDE-G and MPG. 10.Fires Cell updates target data as required and initiates a fire mission. 11.Special Staff starts clearance of fires. 12.Commander or designated approval authority approves mission. 13.Fire control element (FCE) sends target with fire direction tool. NOTE: All collateral damage estimate products will be developed and produced based upon the methodology established by the Chairman of Joint Chiefs of Staff Instruction 3160.01A with validated tables produced by Joint Technical Coordination Group for Munitions Effectiveness (JTCGME). All products created using this methodology are to be handled as secret manual review (SECRET/MR) and all classification and security measures must be followed.

Chapter 3

3-98 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

EMPLOY LETHAL FIRES IN SUPPORT OF THE BCT 06-6-5066

CONDITIONS: The Fires brigade combat team (BCT) is engaged in combat operations. The S-3 is developing or has issued an order. Fire support planning and establishment of fire support coordination measures (FSCM) are ongoing to support maneuver elements. The FIB/BCT has established communications and digital connectivity via the Army Battle Command System (ABCS), when equipped, with subordinate, adjacent, and higher headquarters, and is passing information IAW higher headquarters’ and the FIB/BCT’s SOPs. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The Fires Cell employed all available lethal fires assets to support the Commander’s intent and execute the essential fire support tasks.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. FSO, in conjunction with other members of the Fires Cell, processes planned

fire support requests (FBCB2/Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System [AFATDS] or FM).

a. Receives subordinate unit requests for planned fires to include, but not limited to-

(1) Preparatory fires (planned or on-call). (2) Counterfire. (3) Suppression of enemy air defense (SEAD). (4) Priority targets. (5) Counter preparation fires. (6) On-call targets. (7) Targets of opportunity. b. Reacts to changing situations; for example- (1) Planned fire support assets are not available because of a change in

Commander’s guidance or additional requirements.

(a) Determines priority of mission. (b) If other fires are available, assigns an alternate means of fire

support, such as close air support (CAS) or naval gunfire, to attack the target.

(2) CAS has been scheduled against a target but has not yet arrived on station. Fires Cell determines the desirability and feasibility of engaging the target with less effective means of fire support until air assets arrive.

2. FSO processes combat assessment. a. Fire support noncommissioned officer (FSNCO) requests assessment from

observing unit FSO.

b. FSO requests, through the S-2, the appropriate intelligence collection agency to determine damage on selected targets identified during the decide phase of the targeting process.

c. FSO determines if another attack is necessary based on results of the combat assessment and makes a recommendation to the commander and S-3 based on his assessment.

3. FSNCO monitors the current situation. a. Maintains the status of all available fire support agencies, to include- (1) Locations. (2) Missions.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-99

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (3) Capabilities. (4) Ammunition status. (5) Equipment status. b. Collects and maintains friendly and known enemy situation, to include- (1)Maneuver graphics. (2) Locations of maneuver and indirect fire elements (battalion mortars, and

fires battalion firing and trains elements).

(3) Observer locations as reported by maneuver observers via FBCB2 and by artillery observers using the Forward Observer System (FOS).

(4) FSCMs via AFATDS graphic depiction and MCS common operational picture (COP)/Joint Common Database (JCDB) update.

(5) Host nation (HN) restrictive fire measures via AFATDS update. (6) Friendly and enemy obstacles via MCS COP/JCDB updates. c. Anticipates when and where the FSO will need to make decisions,

recommendations, or take actions. Identifies what information requirements the FSO will need for those actions, recommendations, and decisions.

(1) Uses troop-leading procedures (TLP) to prepare the Fires Cell. Briefs the plan, scheme of fires, and critical events (friendly and enemy). Assigns specific tasks based on mission, enemy, terrain, troops and time available, and civil considerations (METT-TC). Rehearses key battle drills (such as simultaneous attacks on the same target with both CAS and artillery).

(2) Remains abreast of changes to the scheme of maneuver and scheme of fires during the battle and adjusts/informs the Fires Cell of changing information requirements.

d. Establishes and maintains the AFATDS current operations screen, other situation maps (SITMAP) and target planning maps.

e. Records FA-delivered mines (coordinated with the engineer), if applicable, on operations map and overlays, and ensures they are posted to the MCS COP/JCDB and are disseminated across the brigade via FBCB2 entity data messages.

f. Passes and receives intelligence data to/from the S-2. 4. FSNCO coordinates with higher, subordinate, and adjacent units.

a. Informs or confirms with higher headquarters the location of maneuver elements, scheme of maneuver, and proposed locations.

b. Provides and receives FSCMs and ensures they are posted to the MCS COP/JCDB update.

c. Exchanges targeting information with higher headquarters intelligence agencies, and subordinate fire support agencies.

d. Assists battle captain in clearance of fires. 5. FSO coordinates fire support for the FIB/BCT.

a. Key targeting team member at the BCT battle map (with executive officer [XO], S-2, and battle captain):

(1) Anticipates fire support events 30 to 60 minutes out. (2) Makes decisions, recommendations, and takes action as required by the

scheme of fires.

(3) Tasks the FSNCO and targeting officer to execute his decisions while he remains focused 30 to 60 minutes out.

b. Monitors nets of subordinate Fires Cells to ensure that established procedures

Chapter 3

3-100 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO are being followed.

c. If coordination of fires across boundaries is required, coordinates for clearance of fires.

d. Fires Cell analyzes targets and calls-for-fire to ensure they meet the Commander’s intent. For targets of opportunity, coordinates with appropriate asset for attack. In addition:

(1) Requests adjacent/higher unit engages target if possible. (2) Advises the fires battalion if the target will not be engaged by fires

battalion elements.

(3) Advises the requesting agency of the asset engaging the target. e. If adjacent/higher element allows engagement, the Fires Cell does the

following:

(1) Notifies the fire support resource that they are cleared to fire. (2) Notifies the requester that the mission is cleared to fire. f. Ensures all current targeting information is maintained in the AFATDS

database.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-101

PERFORM BATTLE DAMAGE ASSESSMENT (BATTALION – CORPS) 71-8-5146

CONDITIONS: The staff is conducting or preparing to conduct operations. Communications are established with subordinate and adjacent units, and higher headquarters. Command and Control (C2) systems are operational and passing information in accordance with Tactical Standard Operating Procedures (TACSOP). The command has received a Warning Order/Operations Plan/Operations Order/Fragmentary Order (WARNO/OPORD/OPLAN/FRAGO) from higher headquarters and is exercising mission command. The commander has issued planning guidance. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The staff, led by the Intelligence Section, provides timely and accurate Battle Damage Assessment (BDA) feedback on the effectiveness of attacks (lethal and nonlethal) against objectives and targets. BDA includes; physical damages, functional affects, and impact upon enemy targets. This enables the staff to provide timely and accurate recommendations for re-attack.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The Fires Element and Intelligence section, determines specific High-payoff

Targets (HPT) and target types requiring Battle Damage Assessment (BDA) following attacks by:

a. Ensuring the intelligence collection plan accounts for BDA collection requirements.

b. Identifying assets best capable of collecting Physical Damage Assessment (PDA).

c. Establishing the BDA criteria and incorporating it into Priority Information Requirements (PIR).

d. Providing analysis of probable enemy courses of action (COA) after an attack.

e. Providing probable locations of HPTs during targeting phases. f. Providing intelligence updates of current enemy situation.

2. The Plans Section develops criteria to support BDA using: a. Target Management Matrix (TMM). b. Attack Guidance Matrix (AGM). c. Target Damage Assessment (TDA) collection requirements.

3. The Intelligence Section provides intelligence products to targeting to support the four steps of the targeting process: Decide, Detect, Deliver and Assess (D3A).

4. The Intelligence Section analyzes reports of target conditions following attack(s), incorporating information from all available sources by:

a. Conducting a PDA to include: (1) Number of systems destroyed or damaged. (2) Number of casualties (enemy, friendly, and civilian). (3) Number and capabilities of surviving systems/personnel.

b. Conducting a Functional Damage Assessment (FDA) to include: (1) Assessing targets’ ability to continue to perform its intended function. (2) Estimating the amount of time the enemy will take to repair/replace

targeting functions.

Chapter 3

3-102 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO c. Assessing the enemy response to attacks by: (1) Determining whether targets are moving, adjusting, or hardening in

response to attack.

(2) Determining if damages are affecting the enemy’s combat effectiveness in accordance with (IAW) the Commander’s criteria for success.

(3) Identifying enemy deception efforts and techniques. d. Conducting a Target System Assessment (TSA) to include: (1) Assessing the effectiveness of attacks against target system capabilities. (2) Assessing the effect on enemy unit combat effectiveness. e. Determining if attack(s) resulted in an adverse environmental impact (the

release of hazardous materials).

5. The Intelligence Section uses BDA results to produce Combat Assessments (CA), update threat characteristics, update Common Operational Picture (COP), maintain running estimates, and identify opportunities or threats resulting from target attacks.

6. The Intelligence section reviews intelligence reports and available data to determine:

a. Accuracy of target locations. b. Timeliness and accuracy of fires or effects. c. Achievement of desired effects on enemy targets. d. Requirements to submit BDA requests to higher headquarters.

7. The Intelligence section, in coordination with the Current Operations Section and Fires Element, reviews the BDA, targeting data, and Commander’s Critical Information Requirement (CCIR) to provide the commander re-attack recommendations by:

a. Reviewing any new guidance from the commander or higher headquarters. b. Reviewing current operations. c. Assessing impact on operations if re-attack is not conducted. d. Assessing status of assets available for re-attack. e. Assessing which targets have not met AGM execution criteria. f. Confirming availability, capability and limitations of assets available for re-

attack.

g. Providing updated AGM with list of targets recommended for re-attack. 8. The staff recommends which targets are adjusted on the AGM and which assets

will be used to conduct re-attack.

9. The Commander makes adjustment decisions and approves updated AGM. 10. The Intelligence Section disseminates BDA results IAW Tactical Standard

Operating Procedures.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-103

Process a Fire Mission on the Lightweight Forward Entry Device (RHC-2/SCU) Performance Measure GO No GO

1 Display Fire Mission Request for: a. Area Fire Mission b. Final Protective Fire Mission c. Target of Opportunity Mission (FO/FIST) d. Moving Target Mission e. On Call Fire Mission f. Quick Smoke Fire Mission g. Hellfire Mission h. Tactical Air Mission i. Precision Registration Mission j. High Burst/Mean-Point-Of-Impact Registration Mission 2 Enter Fire Mission Data 3 Review and process MTO and FO CMD messages 4 Process subsequent adjustments 5 Process the FO CMD message 6 Complete the EOM

Chapter 3

3-104 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

FIRE SUPPORT TABLE V: MOUNTED GUNNERY TRAINING PROGRAM

NOTE: This table does not apply to Dismounted Forward Observers.

3-35. This table trains the mounted FIST/COLT to integrate indirect and direct fires while on the move. Table V (Practice) and Table VI (live fire) (Day/Night) should be scheduled together over a 2-day period to reduce orientation and setup time. The objective is to integrate direct and indirect fires to form a team collective effort that trains tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) to the task standards required. Table V is applicable only for mounted FIST/COLT and includes as a prerequisite, the requirement to participate in and satisfy the requirements of the Individual and Crew Gunnery Training for Stabilized or Unstabilized platforms in FM 3- 20.21 (Heavy Brigade Combat Team [HBCT] Gunnery) or FM 3-22.3 (Stryker Gunnery). The Brigade FSO/Master Gunner in the HBCT/SBCT will maintain the training status of all FISTs/COLTs and record their participation in the BCT gunnery training programs. Each FIST/COLT must maintain qualification on their assigned vehicle-mounted direct fire system as a gate to proceed to combined Direct/Indirect Fire Qualification.

DEVELOPMENT OF EXERCISE 3-36. Units determine specific threat target types and engagement distances. Chapters 16 and 17 of FM 3- 20.21, Chapter 10 of FM 3-22.3, and this chapter provide evaluation procedures and standards. Certain guidelines apply to all Mounted tables.

Concept of the Mounted FIST/COLT Tables 3-37. Leaders use a “scenario-based training” concept to develop the tables, which they resource based on the unit METL. Each engagement’s tactical scenario includes battlefield awareness, situational awareness, and SOPs. The crew then makes decisions based on this scenario.

• Example 1. The FIST crew occupies an OP position behind an infantry company in the defense. The crew is presented with a moving threat vehicle at 1,200 meters, a rocket-propelled grenade (RPG) team at 600 meters, and a T-72 at 4,000 meters. The crew should report the threat vehicle and the RPG team and should initiate a report to the maneuver commander on the T-72. The maneuver commander then makes the tactical decision to request fire on the T-72.

• Example 2. The COLT crew has pushed forward with a dismounted scout section and set up an OP. The COLT’s FST is to place fires on the attacking enemy’s tank elements and then engage the direct-fire targets. The COLT crew occupies a turret-defilade position. They are presented with or are engaged by (signature device) an RPG team at 400 meters and a T-72 at 3,000 meters. They should engage the RPG team first, and then initiate a fire mission on the T-72.

General Requirements 3-38. Mounted Table V is a gate for Mounted Table VI, Integrated Indirect and Direct Fire Qualification. Leaders conduct BFIST qualification in accordance with the guidelines and standards in this chapter and in FM 3-20.21 and FM 3-22.3.

• The Brigade FSO develops an OPORD to support the execution of the mission. • The unit Master Gunner coordinates all necessary resources and personnel to support the gunnery

exercise and coordinates the schedule with the supported unit’s Bradley fighting vehicle (BFV) tables and crew gunnery training.

• The crews or FISTs/COLTs will operate, scan, and laser targets in FIST mode. They will engage direct-fire targets in gun mode. This trains them to maintain their weapons status for their primary mission.

3-39. Mounted crews must fire these tables in order to receive proper training on the total vehicle operation. They must train as much as possible to ensure that they can smoothly move from FIST mode to gun mode. They must know how to quickly and accurately reacquire target(s) and engage with the 25 mm or coax.

13F Fire Support Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 3-105

3-40. Leaders conduct live fire collective tasks on the range complex that provides the best available observed-fire targets, maneuver area, and direct-fire targets.

3-41. Leaders can conduct crew practice (Table V) and qualification (Table VI) on the same range; however, they use a different target-presentation sequence for each.

3-42. When the target array consists of more than two targets, the third target will be on a delay of 15-25 seconds based upon the Commanders training objectives. They require crews to use proper battlefield analysis, situational awareness, and engagement techniques. Targets should represent realistic threat arrays that a crew might encounter on the battlefield. Leaders can include friendly targets to emphasize the importance of fratricide training.

OBSERVER TABLE VI 3-43. The qualification table for all FISTs/COLTs is an LFX. The tasks to be evaluated are the collective tasks in Tables II and IV. Because of the resources required to conduct an artillery LFX it is not feasible to qualify every assigned observer on every type of METL-related fire mission or to conduct live fire training for the sole purpose of FIST qualification. The evaluation of FIST must be conducted as multi-echelon training during Fires Battalion platoon and battery training and qualification and during Mortar LFX. The commander must, however, certify that all assigned FISTs are qualified to safely call for and adjust indirect fires. The commander may base his recommendation for certification on the cumulative results of Tables I, II, and IV for dismounted observers and Tables I, II, IV, and VI for mounted observers.

FIRES CELL TABLE VI 3-44. Fires cell qualification requires the participation of the supported company, battalion, or BCT commander and staff. It also requires external evaluator/observer-controllers (OCs) that would be problematic for most BCT-level Fires Cells except as a by-product of a BCT CPX (warfighter exercise [WFX]). The run- level event for the Fires Cell must include a combination of tasks trained in Tables II–IV to demonstrate the capability to establish operations, conduct fire planning, and execute fires. Table VI qualification of the Fires Cell may be accomplished during a live training event such as a company, task force (TF) or BCT combined arms live fire exercise (CALFEX), or FTX or during a constructive event such as a Battle Command Training Center (BCTC) or WFX. The qualification may also be accomplished during a scenario-driven training event using an MSEL to provide cues and responses. An interactive simulation-driven event that would include plans and orders and scenario to drive fire-planning and execution, include counterfire inputs, radar positioning requirements as well as non-lethal planning considerations may also be possible for Fires Cell with access to BCTC.

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-1

Chapter 4

13B/13M Delivery Section training Chapter 4 presents the artillery tables for FA delivery systems that provide a methodology for training and evaluating individuals and crews/sections—tasks required to safely emplace, prepare for firing, fire, and displace all cannon, rocket, and missile systems.

INTRODUCTION 4-1. The methodology and format of Chapter 4 include the cannon crewmember and the MLRS crewmember. Cannon crewmember’s tables are located in Section I, and MLRS crewmember’s tables are located in Section II. The sections provide a progressive, gated approach to the conduct of training to assist commanders in the assessment of training and the horizontal integration of training across the combined arms team. The tables also provide the means and tasks for C,W,R training for the section chief to use during Sergeant’s Time Training as refresher training or as a prelude to the evaluation of training. The content of the ASPT and Table I provide the individual tasks to support the routine training of sections and crews. This chapter includes the section/crew tasks from FM 6-50 (Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Field Artillery Cannon Battery), FM 3-09.60 (Multiple Launch Rocket System [MLRS] Operations), and FM 3-09.70 (Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for M109A6 Howitzer [PALADIN] Operations) organized by howitzer and rocket/missile delivery systems.

SECTION I – HOWITZER SECTION TABLES 4-2. Howitzer sections and the crew-training program should be leveraged to support the commander’s METL. The training program must develop and sustain FA core competencies, support collective tasks, and provide a means to evaluate, certify, and qualify howitzer sections and crews. The Howitzer Section Tables consist of the individual tasks training (Table I), rigging operations (Table II), establish operations (Table III), execute fires (Table IV), certifications (Table V), and qualifications (Table VI). The Active Army is required to qualify semi-annually, and the National Guard is required to qualify annually.

4-3. Prior to the section taking the ASPT, the written test should be administered to all cannon crewmen. A sample written test is located in Appendix C. The Master Gunner can develop his own written test, or he can use questions from the sample. The written test should consist of a minimum of 50 questions from common crewmember and system-specific training. The section must score at least 80% on the written test. ASPT Stations 1 through 8 are administered to all crewmembers, and the individual Soldier tasks are trained continuously. Tables II, III, and IV are individual and collective tasks which will train the section/crew in Establishing Operations, Deliberate Occupation, and Execute Fire in support of the commander’s METL. Table II identifies and includes the preparation of the section/crew on the tactical assembly area for the next table and special skills necessary for rigging procedures that will be conducted by air assault organizations. Table V (Section Certification [Dry Fire]) must be conducted prior to Table VI (Section Qualification [Live Fire]).

The gunner’s test is required semi-annually to all gunners, ammo team chiefs, assistant gunner, and section chiefs. Prior to moving to Tables III through VI they must achieve “GOs” on all stations. For a section to be certified to fire in the absence of the certified section chief, the gunner and the ammo team chief (acting as the section chief) must be certified in the occupation (Table III) and delivery of fire (Table IV) tasks.

4-4. The key leaders consist of the top seven in the battery as outlined in DA Pam 385-63 (Range Safety), Chapter 11. The key leaders will take the written test, the gunner’s test, and the leader tasks (see Leader Table) semi-annually on critical individual tasks that are essential to the mission of the battalion. They must receive a “GO” rating on all tasks to be considered certified. A “NO-GO” rating requires retraining and retesting on those tasks where a NO-GO was received.

4-5. The commander and the Master Gunner must ensure that the howitzer section and crew training program—

• Integrates individual and leader’s tasks within the howitzer and crew training program. • Maintains core competencies, proficiencies, and certification of the howitzer and crew sections.

Chapter 4

4-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

• Qualifies the howitzer and crew section through an LFX collective training exercise. • Supports the commander’s METL.

ASPT FOR HOWITZER SECTIONS 4-6. The ASPT evaluates the howitzer section member’s ability to execute selected crew skills. The tasks listed in this chapter provide the unit commander a means to evaluate the howitzer section member’s basic proficiency prior to live fire exercises. The ASPT can also be used as a tool to assess section strengths and weaknesses. The commander, Master Gunner, and battery leaders should use ASPT results when structuring the unit’s semi-annual gunnery training program based on objective measures of performance.

REQUIREMENTS 4-7. All howitzer/crew section personnel and any personnel assigned to a howitzer section (regardless of MOS) will be administered the ASPT. Howitzer section members are required to pass the ASPT prior to Howitzer Section Qualification. To pass the ASPT, a Soldier must receive a GO on all stations. If a Soldier fails a task, he must be retrained and retested on that station until he receives a GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare, administer, and evaluate the ASPT.

Note. Evaluators must be certified prior to testing.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 4-8. The commander will incorporate risk assessment in planning all aspects of this training. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station in accordance with the unit SOP.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCESS 4-9. Before the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test station. When the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator logs the Soldiers in on a roster at each station and provides each Soldier with all materials and equipment displayed, as outlined on this section and in the Test Administrative Guide for that station. The evaluator reads the instructions to the Soldier exactly as written in the guide for each station. The evaluator must use the criterion-scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each Soldier’s performance. As each Soldier finishes or the time limit is up (whichever occurs first), the evaluator checks the Soldier’s performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs him of his performance on that task, and directs him either to the next station or to further training.

Administrative Procedures for Soldiers Receiving a NO-GO 4-10. If a Soldier does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion-scoring checklist, he receives a NO- GO. The Soldier must then be critiqued on that task, given an explanation of his mistakes, and told what to do to correct them. Soldiers will be retrained and retested in accordance with the local SOP.

Evaluation Criteria 4-11. See attached criterion-scoring checklist for each task provided in the test station administrative guidance.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED 4-12. The personnel, equipment, and material in the following list should be considered for all stations, but their use depends on the task to be trained. Additional items, if required, are listed in the Test Administrative Guide for each particular station:

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-3

• Primary evaluator (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test (he may also occupy a test station).

• Station evaluator, SGT or above (one per test station). • Classroom or training area. • Stopwatch (as per timed station). • Criterion-scoring checklist (one per Soldier). • Desk and chair or clipboard (one per station). • Pencils (one per Soldier). • TC 3-09.8 (one per test site).

Planning Considerations 4-13. The evaluator tasked to conduct the ASPT should consider the following elements below during his planning:

The ASPT 4-14. A “record” ASPT allows a commander to certify proficiency of Soldiers to meet artillery table prerequisites.

Determine the Test Site 4-15. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all stations. Refer to the station conditions for each station to determine what is needed for that station.

Construct a Test Station Diagram 4-16. Before rehearsing the test, create a test station diagram. This example diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. It will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The diagram should include the following elements: test stations, control station, direction of rotation, movement schedule, concurrent/retaining station, and aid station/warm-up tent, if available. Example test station diagrams are depicted in Figures 4-1 and 4-2.

STATION 1 DISSAMBLE/ASSEMBLE BREECH MECHANISM

STATIO N

4/5 PREPARE AM

M U

N TIO

N FO

R FIRIN G

/ TRAN

SPO RTIN

STATION 7 MEASURE SITE TO CREST USING M-2 COMPASS

ST AT

IO N

9 LO

AD A

N D

FI RE

PR EP

AR ED

R O

U N

D/ RE

CO RD

AN D

M AI

N TA

IN D

A FO

RM 45

Control Station Warm up tent

Aid Station

CLUSTER METHOD TESTING STATION

Chapter 4

4-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 4-1. Example 1 – Cluster method testing station

STATION 1 LAY HOWITZER FOR INITIAL DIREC USING

PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

STATION 2 LAY HOWITZER BY USING ALTERNATE METHODS OF LAY

STATION 3/4 LAY HOWITZER BY RECIPROCAL LAY USING PAN TELES/ REFER THE PIECE

STATION 5 ALIGN CLOSE IN AIM POINT USING M100 SERIES/REFER THE PIECE

STATION 6 BORESIGHT

PANORAMIC TELES/ BORESIGHT DIRECT

FIRE TELESCOPE

STATION 7 VERIFY BORESIGHT WITH M139/M140.

STATION 8 CONDUCT FIRE

MISSION

STATION 9 SIGHT ON TARGET

DURING DIRECT FIRE W/PANORAMIC

TELESCOPE

Control Station Warm-Up tent

Aid Sta.

CLUSTER METHOD TESTING STATION

Figure 4-2. Example 2 – Cluster method testing station

Determine Resources 4-17. The Master Gunner must determine the resources necessary to support the ASPT. He must consider the support of the test site, as well as the training aids required to conduct the test to standard. The evaluator can determine training aids or actual equipment, such as howitzers and gunner’s quadrants (GQs) by referring to the individual station in this and following paragraphs. To support the test site, the NCOIC must determine the amount of support needed to conduct the test; for example, howitzer, drivers, transportation to and from the test site, tents for warm-up briefings, stopwatches, tables for scoring, chairs, medical support, and Class I support if needed. Once the Master Gunner has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the battalion S-3.

Select Evaluators 4-18. Evaluators should be selected as far in advance as possible. This gives the platoon sergeant/gunnery sergeant time to select the most qualified personnel available and time to coordinate with other units, if necessary; it also allows the evaluator time to prepare. After the evaluators have been selected, the Master Gunner will brief them on their duties and responsibilities, the test schedule and location, and the station they will be testing.

Test Evaluators 4-19. Evaluators must be technically proficient in performing all tasks to standard. Each evaluator is tested on all test stations.

Conduct a Rehearsal 4-20. Because of the size and scope of this test, it must be rehearsed before it is administered. This rehearsal will be conducted at the test site with all evaluators present. The Master Gunner should check each station to ensure that the evaluator is aware of his duties and responsibilities, the station is set up correctly with all training aids and test materials on hand, and testing is conducted in accordance with the Test Administrative Guides.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-5

Conduct the ASPT 4-21. Before the testing, the Master Gunner must ensure that the stations are set up and all equipment and training aids are available. He must also ensure that the Soldiers are briefed on safety and the station locations and that the Soldiers are assigned to the test stations. During testing, the Master Gunner will spot-check each station to ensure the task standards are being maintained and the evaluators are maintaining a roster of personnel evaluating and annotating the scorecards correctly. As soon as the Soldiers complete the training and before anyone leaves the test site, the Soldiers’ scorecards will be collected.

Conduct the AAR for the ASPT 4-22. The Master Gunner should conduct an AAR to understand the actions and interactions during the conduct of the ASPT. The AAR should be conducted before the unit commander’s debrief and should consist of a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the Master Gunner to better prepare the commander’s debrief as well as prepare him for the next ASPT.

Prepare Debrief 4-23. Once the test is complete, the Master Gunner will prepare a brief for the commander informing him of the ASPT results. (This information will also be retained for training records.) The evaluators can provide additional information about a Soldier’s test performance. After all data is collected, they prepare a summarization of the results. Information from test results must be interpreted to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the unit. At a minimum, this report will contain the following data:

Test Stations 4-24. Each station consists of a Test Administrative Guide and criterion-scoring checklist as required.

Integrated Combined Arms Battle-Focused Training 4-25. All ASPTs and qualification tables (such as individual tasks training [Table I], rigging operations [Table II], establish operation [Table III], and execute fires [Table IV]) should be integrated with the training and qualification ranges of the supported force when feasible.

ASPT 4-26. The table below consists of the ASPT. These tasks are the basic individual tasks each member must take and perform prior to moving to the section-level task. Training on these tasks can be trained during the Sergeant’s Time/section training and constitute the Crawl-level phase of training.

ASPT

1. Disassemble/Assemble the Breech Mechanism 2. Prepare Ammunition for Firing 3. Measure Site to Crest Using M-2 Compass 4. Prepare Ammunition for Transporting 5. Emplace and Recover Close in Aiming Points 6. Record and Maintain Fire Mission on Data on DA Form 4513 (Record of Missions Fired)

Chapter 4

4-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ASPT 7. Load and Fire a Prepared Round 8. Prepare a Position to Receive/Emplace a Howitzer (Advance Party)

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 1 DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE BREECHBLOCK

AND FIRING PIN ASSEMBLY (M119A2) 061-281-1410

CONDITIONS: Given an M119A2 howitzer with the breechblock closed, the operating lever locked in position, section equipment, and an assistant. STANDARDS: Disassemble and assemble the breechblock and firing pin assembly. Soldier must clean, inspect, reassemble, and perform a functions check without error.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier this task will be conducted in two phases. In phase one, the Soldier will disassemble the breechblock and firing pin assembly. In phase two, the Soldier will be required to assemble the breechblock and firing pin assembly.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Disassembled the breechblock and firing pin assembly. 2. Cleaned and inspected the breechblock and firing pin assembly. 3. Assembled the breechblock and firing pin assembly. 4. Performed a function check.

DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE BREECHBLOCK

AND FIRING MECHANISM (M777A1/A2) 061-306-1002

CONDITIONS: Given M777A1/A2 howitzer with the breech block resting on the breech stool, section equipment, and an assistant.

STANDARDS: Disassemble the breech and firing mechanism. Clean, inspect, and reassemble the breechblock and firing mechanism in accordance with the performance measures listed in TM 9-1025-215-10. Breechblock and firing mechanism must function as designed.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier this task will be conducted in two phases. In phase one, the Soldier will disassemble the breechblock and firing mechanism. In phase two, the Soldier will assemble the breechblock and firing mechanism. Tell the Soldier the assistants are available to help him.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Closed the scavenge isolator valve. 2. Opened the breech mechanism. 3. Placed breech stool onto recoil slides. 4. Moved the breech stool forward until it is centered under breechblock assembly. 5. Lowered breech mechanism onto center of breech stool. 6. Removed the M54 Firing Mechanism. 7. Disassembled the M54 Firing Mechanism. 8. Serviced and Inspected the M54 Firing Mechanism.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-7

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 9. Assembled the M54 Firing mechanism.

10 Tested functions on the M54 Firing mechanism. 11. Removed the Injector Arm Assembly. 12. Serviced and Inspected the Injector Arm Assembly. 13. Removed the Firing Pin. 14. Serviced and Inspected Remove the Firing Pin. 15. Installed the Firing pin. 16. Removed the Tray Assembly. 17. Serviced and Inspected the Tray Assembly. 18. Removed the Body Assembly. 19. Serviced and Inspected the Body Assembly. 20. Removed the Spindle Assembly. 21. Disassembled the Spindle Assembly. 22. Serviced and Inspected the Spindle Assembly. 23. Assembled the Spindle Assembly. 24. Installed the spindle assembly. 25. Separated the Breechblock and Carrier Assemblies. 26. Serviced and Inspected the Breechblock and Carrier Assemblies. 27. Installed the Breech. 28. Installed the Body Assembly. 29. Installed the Tray Assembly. 30. Installed the Injector Arm Assembly. 31. Installed the M54 Firing Mechanism.

Chapter 4

4-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE BREECHBLOCK AND FIRING MECHANISM (M109 SERIES)

061-270-1410

CONDITIONS: Given an M109A6 howitzer, section equipment, an assistant.

STANDARDS: Disassemble the breechblock and firing mechanism. Clean, inspect, and reassemble the breechblock and firing mechanism. Breechblock and firing mechanism must function as designed.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier this task will be conducted in two phases. In phase one, the Soldier will disassemble the breechblock and firing mechanism. In phase two, the Soldier will assemble the breechblock and firing mechanism. Tell the Soldier he will have the assistants to help him.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Disassembled the breechblock and firing mechanism. 2. Cleaned and inspected as required. 3. Reassembled the breechblock and firing mechanism. 4. Performed a function check.

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 2 PREPARE AMMUNITION FOR FIRING

061-266-1508 CONDITIONS: Given ammunition, section equipment, assistance, and firing data. STANDARDS: The Soldier prepared a projectile for firing IAW the information listed in FM 6-50 and announced firing data. TEST PLANNING TIME:

• Administrative time: 10 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 20 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Ensure that all the equipment is available and ready for use. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. To evaluate this task requires inert munitions, training aids, computer-based training, or written examination.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: Tell the Soldier that he must select the proper shell-fuze combination from the fuzes and shells present, set the fuze (if required), and cut the charge IAW the announced firing data without error. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin. (Start the time.)

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected the proper shell-fuze combination 2. Prepared the projectile(s). 3. Sets the fuze(s) by using the proper fuze wrench and/or setter. 4. Prepared the propellent 5. Gave the prepared round to the designated cannoneer

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-9

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 3

MEASURE SIGHT-TO-CREST USING AN M2 COMPASS 061-266-5100

CONDITIONS: Given an M2 compass and designated position area for the howitzer.

STANDARDS: Sight on and measure the highest crest in the sector of fire, measure the elevation three times and report the average site to crest to the executive officer or FDC.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 2 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 7 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Before the Soldier arrives, the evaluator will measure site to crest with an aiming circle and determine a primary sector of fire.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: You are the advanced party man for your howitzer. This position has been designated for your howitzer and you have been directed to measure the site to crest. Your primary sector of fire is _________. Do you have any questions? You may begin. (Start the time.)

Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Held the compass correctly. 2. Read the elevation in mils 3. Measured the site to crest three times. 4. Recorded the average measurement.

Chapter 4

4-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 4

PREPARE AMMUNITION FOR TRANSPORTING 061-266-1501

CONDITIONS: Given a M109A6 howitzer, section ammunition vehicle, required ammunition, loading plan, adequate dunnage material, section equipment, and assistance. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Prepared ammunition for transporting in accordance with (IAW) the loading plan, FM 6- 50, and TM 9-2350-314-10.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Before the Soldier arrives, the evaluator will select an area with howitzers in position.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: Tell the Soldier to follow the loading plan and the directions in FM 6- 50. Tell the Soldier that an assistant will help handle the ammunition. Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Applied safe ammunition handling procedures. 2. Inspected ammunition 3. Arranged munitions by square weight, lot, and type 4. Secured munitions IAW vehicle load plan

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-11

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 5

EMPLACE AND RECOVER CLOSE IN AIMING POINTS 061-266-1105

CONDITIONS: Given an assigned howitzer in a firing position, section equipment and an assistant.

STANDARDS: Emplace and recover close-in aiming points IAW appropriate weapons manual.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Have the howitzer set up in a firing configuration, the collimator and aiming posts in stowed location, and the gunner stationed at the sight mounted on the howitzer. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Tell the Soldier that the gunner is at his station and will assist him in emplacement of the collimator and aiming posts.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Emplaces and/or recovers the collimator. 2. Emplaces and/or recovers the aiming post.

Chapter 4

4-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 6

MAINTAIN FIRE MISSION DATA ON A DA FORM 4513 (RECORD OF MISSIONS FIRED)

061-266-1102

CONDITIONS: Given a blank DA Form 4513, standard data, a list of ammunition on hand, and announced firing data.

STANDARDS: Record fire commands and nonstandard data, ammunition expended, resupplied, turned in or transferred on DA Form 4513 (as directed) with no misplaced entries and no math errors.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information and references are available and the equipment is serviceable and ready for use. Ensure the Soldier announces the data clearly and loudly enough for the tested Soldier to hear. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Tell the Soldier that he will have an assistant to announce all data to him.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Logged administrative data 2. Recorded ammunition components on hand.

NOTE: Includes fire commands and check firing. 3. Logged Fire Mission Data 4. Recorded ammunition expended, resupplied, transferred, or turned in 5. Recorded subsequent fire missions on the next available line

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-13

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 7A

PREPARE AN M105 ROUND FOR FIRING FROM AN M119 HOWITZER 061-281-1543

CONDITIONS: Given an M119A2 howitzer with crew in a firing position, section equipment, tools, projectiles, charges and fuzes in a tactical scenario. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: The Soldier prepared an M105 round for firing for the M119 Howitzer

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available and ready for use. Ensure the round is prepared and a fire command is ready to be given.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to load the howitzer on command. Give the fire command.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected the proper projectile and fuze combination

a. Located the munition container b. Removed the fiber container carefully c. Removed the cartridge case and projectile d. Removed U-shaped packing stop e. Inspected the round for damage, corrosion, foreign matter, etc. f. Inspected the propelling charge for misplaced increments, rips, tears,

and/or strong ammonia smell.

2. Removed the closing plug a. Removed metal closing plug b. Removed plastic closing plug

3. Fuzed the projectile a. Cleared the fuze cavity and threads of debris and obstructions b. Screwed in the fuze by hand c. Tightened the fuze 1/4 turn with the M18 fuze setter wrench

4. Set the fuze a. Set the fuze to Superquick b. Set the fuze to Delay-action c. Set the fuze to proximity d. Set the fuze to airburst e. Set the fuze to superquick (impact) f. Reset the fuze

5. Prepared the propelling charge. a. Removed projectile from cartridge case b. Removed charge increments from the cartridge

Chapter 4

4-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

c. Inspected the charge increments for damage and ammonia scent d. Removed increments numbered higher than the charge to be fired e. Discarded unneeded increments to the powder pits f. Reassembled remaining increments with the cartridge case and

projectile

STATION 7B

FIRE A PREPARED ROUND FROM AN M777A1/A2 HOWITZER 061-306-1004

CONDITIONS: Given a Howitzer layed for direction and elevation, a howitzer section, equipment, tools, prepared projectiles and a fire order. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: The Soldier fired a prepared round for the M777A1/A2 howitzer-A IAWA procedural steps listed in TM 9-1025-215-10. TEST PLANNING TIME:

• Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier‘s performance.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared a 155-MM round for firing. 2. Loaded and fired a Prepared Round. 3. Loaded the propelling charge 4. Inserted the primer 5. Fired the projectile

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-15

STATION 7C LOAD AND FIRE A PREPARED ROUND (M109A6)

061-270-1507

CONDITIONS: Given an M109A6 howitzer with crew, tube at loading elevation, open Breech block, section equipment and a fire command.

STANDARDS: Load and fire a prepared round in accordance with the performance measures listed in TM 9-2350- 314-10. Round must be fired safely and with no injury to personnel or equipment.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available and ready to use. Have the tube at the loading elevation (less than 300 mils). Have a prepared round and a fire command available. Use an inert or practice round for training and/or non firing purposes.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier he will be tested as Cannoneer Number 1, and an assistant will act as the assistant gunner. Tell the Soldier to load and fire a prepared round. Give the fire command.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Loaded the projectile and propellant.

a. Loaded the projectile. b. Rammed the projectile. c. Loaded the propellant. d. Ensured witness marks were aligned.

2. Primed and fired the howitzer. a. Inserted primer. b. Ensured primer was seated. c. Connected lanyard at appropriate time. d. Fired on command.

3. Ensured the bore was clear and announced BORE CLEAR. a. Swabbed powder chamber. b. Ensured tube was clear. c. Announced BORE CLEAR.

Chapter 4

4-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 8

PREPARE A POSITION TO AREA TO EMPLACE A HOWITZER (ADVANCE PARTY)

061-266-1101 CONDITIONS: Given in a field environment, section equipment, an M2 compass, an M16 rifle and/or a 2-meter subtense bar, an azimuth of fire, an initial deflection, and a howitzer location. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP STANDARDS: The Soldier will prepare a position to receive/emplace a howitzer IAW information listed in FM 6-50. TEST PLANNING TIME:

• Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is serviceable and the SB-22 is in place. Have an M2 aiming circle with an operator available. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Tell the Soldier that the M2 aiming circle operator will help him as necessary.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed Security of the Position Area. 2. Implemented the track plan 3. Prepared Section Position. 4. Established wire communications. 4. Acquired initial readings.

CONDUCT GUNNER’S QUALIFICATION TEST

4-27. The gunner’s test will be administered to all personnel assigned as gunner and section chief. At the discretion of the commander, the Gunner’s Test can also be administered to the following personnel, the ammunition team chief, assistant gunner and key leaders. The gunner’s test should be conducted at the battalion level by evaluators who have been certified by the Master Gunner. All tasks must be accomplished with GO ratings to be considered qualified.

Note. This test can bolster the esprit and motivation of the Soldier by recognizing individual proficiency. The artillery clasp for the marksmanship badge will be awarded upon completing this test when utilizing the scoring standards criteria located in Appendix E in accordance with AR 600-8-22, Military Awards. Gunners and chiefs will perform only the tasks that are specific and applicable to the organization’s weapon systems. FCS refers to all fire control systems (Paladin Digital Fire Control System/Digital Fire Control System [PDFCS/DFCS]).

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-17

Table 4-1. Gunner’s Qualification Test

Task Number Subject Lay the Howitzer

061-266-2004 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Using the Panoramic Telescope 061-266-2003 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Without an Aiming Circle by Using the

Panoramic Telescope 061-266-2002 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire by Reciprocal Lay by Using the

Panoramic Telescope 061-266-1806 Lay and Measure a Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range Quadrant (Except

M119) 061-266-2231 Refer the Piece 061-281-2005 Lay and Measure a Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range Quadrant (M119)

Aiming Point Reference 061-266-2001 Align Close in Aiming Points Using the M100-Series Panoramic Telescope

Boresight 061-266-2005 Boresight the Panoramic Telescope by Using a Distant Aiming Point (DAP) 061-266-2239 Verify the Boresight of the Panoramic Telescope with the M139/M140/M154

Alignment Device M119

061-281-1000 Verify Boresight of the M90A2 Direct Fire telescope by Using a Distance Aiming Point (DAP) (M119)

M777 061-306-1015 Boresight the Elbow Telescope using Distant Aiming Point (M777 Series)

Indirect Fire Mission 061-266-3705 Process a Fire Mission on the Gun Display Unit (GDU) 061-306-3001 Conduct Fire Mission on the M777 Howitzer Using Digital Fire Control System

(DFCS) 061-307-3568 Conduct Indirect Fire Missions Using the Automatic Fire Control System

Direct Fire

061-266-2235 Sight on a Target During Direct Fire with the Panoramic Telescope 061-281-2233 Sight on a Target During Direct Fire (M119) 061-306-1217 Sight on a Target with the Direct Fire Telescope (M777A1/A2) 061-306-1218 Perform Direct Fire Using the M171A1 Telescope (M777A1/2) 061-307-3556 Perform Direct Fire Using the Automatic Fire Control System

Chapter 4

4-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

LAY A HOWITZER FOR INITIAL DIRECTION OF FIRE USING THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

061-266-2004

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer in the firing position with the cannon tube 50 mils off the azimuth of fire and at loading elevation (unit SOP). Bubbles will be level, and special corrections are 0. An assistant examiner will operate the aiming circle, which will be located 75 meters to the left front of the howitzer. Soldier positions himself as gunner and announces when ready. The assistant examiner commands NUMBER 1 ADJUST, AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT.

STANDARDS: The Soldier laid a howitzer for initial direction of fire using the panoramic telescope (pantel) IAW FM 6-50, and appropriate weapons manuals.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 10–17 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Tell the Soldier to lay the howitzer for initial direction of fire.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified the aiming circle and uses proper commands. 2. Laid the howitzer by using proper commands. 3. Recorded the lay deflection.

LAY A HOWITZER FOR INITIAL DIRECTION OF FIRE WITHOUT AN AIMING CIRCLE BY USING THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

061-266-2003

CONDITIONS: You will be given a howitzer with a panoramic telescope (pantel), positioned within 50 mils of the azimuth of fire, and the tube at lay elevation, a distant aiming point (DAP), an M2 compass, a gunner’s reference card, a command to lay the weapon, and an assistant.

STANDARDS: Lay the howitzer for initial direction of fire without an aiming circle using the pantel IAW FM 6- 50.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 10–17 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. The howitzer must be in position with the tube at lay elevation and within 50 mils of the azimuth of fire. Have the assistant act as the instrument operator. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to lay the howitzer by using the aiming point deflection method, the M2-compass method, and the howitzer back-lay method.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Lays the howitzer by using the aiming point deflection method. 2. Lays the howitzer by using the M2 compass method. 3. Lays the howitzer by using the back-lay method.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-19

LAY A HOWITZER FOR INITIAL DIRECTION OF FIRE BY RECIPROCAL LAY BY USING THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

061-266-2002

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer in firing position and already laid for initial direction of fire. Bubbles will be level and special corrections at 0. The pantel will be 50 mils off the howitzer to be laid. An assistant examiner will act as the gunner of the howitzer to be laid. The Soldier positions himself as gunner and states when ready. The examiner will say BEGIN.

STANDARDS: Lay the Howitzer for initial direction of fire by reciprocal lay by using the panoramic telescope IAW FM 6-50.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 10–17 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Tell the Soldier that he is the gunner on the howitzer which is laid, “NUMBER (so- and-so).”

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Sighted on the adjacent howitzer and determines and announces the deflection

by using proper commands.

2. Laid the adjacent howitzer by using proper commands. 3. Recorded the lay deflection to the adjacent howitzer.

MEASURE A HOWITZER FOR QUADRANT WITH A RANGE QUADRANT

061-266-1806

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer with the tube at an unknown elevation and a fire command containing elevation.

STANDARDS: Lay and measure quadrant with the range quadrant within ± zero mils.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 10–17 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment are available and ready for use. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standard. Tell him that he is to measure quadrant and, upon command, will lay for quadrant.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Measured the quadrant. 2. Laid for quadrant.

Chapter 4

4-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

REFER THE PIECE 061-266-2231

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer in the firing position that has already been laid for initial direction of fire. Bubbles will be level and special corrections at 0. The pantel will be oriented on the collimator. An assistant examiner will be operating the verification circle 75 meters to the howitzer’s left front. The Soldier positions himself as the gunner and announces when ready. The assistant examiner commands NUMBER 1 REFER, AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT.

STANDARDS: Refer the piece IAW FM 6-50.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 10–17 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Tell the Soldier that he will have an assistant to give him the command to refer. Identify the aiming point to the Soldier.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Centered the bubbles, and sights on the aiming point. 2. Announced the deflection.

LAY AND MEASURE A HOWITZER FOR QUADRANT WITH THE RANGE QUADRANT (M119)

061-281-2005

CONDITIONS: Given an M119 howitzer with the tube at an unknown elevation and a fire command containing elevation.

STANDARDS: Lay and measure the quadrant with the range quadrant to the nearest whole mil.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 10–17 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is serviceable and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell him that he is to measure the quadrant and then, upon command, to lay for quadrant.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Laid for quadrant. 2. Measured for quadrant.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-21

ALIGN CLOSE IN AIMING POINTS USING THE M100-SERIES PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

061-266-2001

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer in a firing position, section equipment, and necessary assistants. STANDARDS: The Soldier aligned the close in aiming point to 0 mils in accordance with (IAW) procedures listed in TM 9-1025-215-10 and 9-1015-252-10.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Tell the Soldier to align close in aiming points IAW the references. Tell the Soldier that the assistant will follow his instructions and will not be the cause for failing the task.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Rotated the head of the pantel in the direction to which the aiming points are to

be emplaced.

2. Used the proper hand and arm signals to direct the assistant to move and align the aiming points.

3. Recorded the deflection.

BORESIGHT THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE BY USING A DISTANT AIMING POINT (DAP)

061-266-2005

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, section equipment, test target and a distant aiming point (DAP).

STANDARDS: Boresight the panoramic telescope IAW applicable references.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is ready and available for use. The DAP must be at least 1,500 meters from the weapon. Locate a testing target 50 meters in front of howitzer. Boresight using the test target. BRIEF SOLDIER: Identify the DAP to the Soldier.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Boresights by using a DAP. 2. Boresights by using a TT.

Chapter 4

4-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

VERIFY THE BORESIGHT OF THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE WITH THE M139/M140/M154 ALIGNMENT DEVICE

061-266-2239

CONDITION: Given a howitzer in the firing position, with level bubbles and special corrections on 0. The cannon tube will be at 0 mils elevation, and the azimuth counter will be set at 1600. The Soldier will be provided with an M139/M140/M154 alignment device. The Soldier positions himself as gunner and announces when ready. STANDARDS: The Soldier checked the boresight of the panoramic telescope with the M139/M140/M154 alignment device IAW TM 9-1025-215-10, TM 9-2350-314-10, and TM 9-1015-252-10

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Tell the Soldier to check the boresight of the pantel with the M139/M140/M154 alignment device.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Checked the alignment. 2. Conducted a comparison test (if necessary).

VERIFY BORESIGHT OF THE M90A2 DIRECT FIRE TELESCOPE BY USING A DISTANCE AIMING POINT (DAP) (M119)

061-281-1000

CONDITIONS: Given an M119A2 howitzer with the direct fire telescope mounted, the tube aligned on a distant aiming point (DAP), and section equipment.

STANDARDS: Verify the boresight of the M90A2 (the direct fire telescope) by using a DAP IAW TM 9-1015-252- 10. Soldier must verify the alignment or take the proper corrective action.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is ready and available for use. Have the tube aligned on the DAP, the firing pin removed, and the muzzle cross hairs emplaced. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to boresight the direct fire telescope using a distant aiming point.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared the telescope mount and checked the reticle alignment. 2. Took proper corrective action.

a. Elevation line not aligned with DAP. b. Vertical reticle line not aligned on DAP. c. Cross-leveled the M187 telescope mount.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-23

BORESIGHT THE ELBOW TELESCOPE USING DISTANT AIMING POINT (M777 SERIES)

061-306-1015

CONDITIONS: Given an M777A1/A2 howitzer with the direct fire telescope mounted, a tube aligned on a well- defined aiming point (at least 1,500 meters away), boresight strings and boresight disk mounted (Muzzle crosshairs may be used in lieu of muzzle boresight disc) and an assistant.

STANDARDS: Adjust the direct fire telescope until the sight picture of the direct fire telescope matches the sight picture of the bore.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available and ready for use. Have the direct fire telescope, boresighting strings, and boresight disk mounted. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to boresight the direct fire telescope.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Cross-leveled the M172A1 telescope and quadrant mount. 2. Checked the reticle alignment. 3. Adjusted the alignment (as necessary).

PROCESS A FIRE MISSION ON THE GUN DISPLAY UNIT (GDU) 061-266-3705

CONDITIONS: Given an M119 howitzer, with a gun display unit (GDU/GDU-R) mounted, a fire mission, and fire commands from the battery computer unit (BCU).

STANDARDS: Process a fire mission on the GDU IAW TM 11-7440-283-12-2/GDU-R TM 11-7010-404-13/TB 11-7010-404-10. Soldier must process a typical area fire mission (fire when ready), process a typical area fire mission (at my command), process updated continuous fire/final protective fire/special instructions on the GDU.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use and a fire mission is in progress. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier that two other Soldiers will act as gunner and assistant gunner.

Chapter 4

4-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Processed a when-ready fire mission.

a. Processed the adjust phase. b. Processed the FFE phase (initial volley).

2. Processed an at-my-command fire mission. a. Processed the adjustment phase. b. Processed the FFE phase (initial volley AMC).

3. Processed subsequent data. a. Processed the FFE phase (subsequent volley when ready). b. Processed the FFE phase (subsequent volley at my command).

4. Action Azimuth Fire for Effect a. Processed the Azimuth Fire for Effect.

CONDUCT FIRE MISSION ON THE M777 HOWITZER USING DIGITAL FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM (DFCS)

061-306-3001

CONDITIONS: Given an M777A1/A2 howitzer with section equipment emplaced at a firing point or area, an operational digital fire control system (DFCS), digital communications with the platoon operation center (POC), and ammunition to be fired.

STANDARDS: Conduct indirect fire missions by using the DFCS (M777A1/A2). Soldier must (1) acknowledge receipt of a fire mission, (2) identify the elements of a fire mission, (3) execute the fire mission and (4) verify ammunition inventory. All steps must be done in sequence and correct data must be set prior to firing ammunition.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide at the test site all equipment and information stated in the condition statement. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to conduct indirect fire missions by using the DFCS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Acknowledged receipt of a Fire Mission 2. Execute the Fire Mission 3. Verfified ammunition inventory

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-25

CONDUCT INDIRECT FIRE MISSIONS USING THE PALADIN DIGITAL FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM

061-307-3569

CONDITIONS: Given an M109A6 howitzer with section equipment emplaced at a firing point or area, an operational Paladin Digital Fire Control System (PDFCS), digital communications with the platoon operation center (POC), and ammunition to be fired.

STANDARDS: Conducted indirect fire missions by using the PDFCS (M109A6). Soldier must (1) acknowledge receipt of a fire mission, (2) execute the fire mission and (3) verify ammunition inventory. All steps must be done in sequence and correct data must be set prior to firing ammunition IAW TM 9-2350-314-10.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Provide at the test site all equipment and information stated in the condition statement.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Acknowledged receipt of a fire mission. 2. Executed the fire mission. 3. Verified ammunition inventory.

SIGHT ON A TARGET DURING DIRECT FIRE WITH THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

061-266-2235

Note: The central or reticle method of sighting may be used. Only the one-man–one-sight technique of direct fire will be used.

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer with a panoramic telescope (pantel) in a field location, a target, and a fire command.

STANDARDS: A stationary target is emplaced 400 to 800 meters from the howitzer to simulate a moving target.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Have a fire command ready. Have an assistant available (if needed). BRIEF SOLDIER: Identify the target to the Soldier, and have the Soldier use the central lay or reticle lay method.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Sight on identified target 2. Repeat lead and range 3. Laid on target using straight telescope (M119 only) 4. Laid on target using alternate method (reticle or central method)

Chapter 4

4-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SIGHT ON A TARGET DURING DIRECT FIRE (M119) 061-281-2233

CONDITIONS: Given an M119 howitzer with the direct fire telescope mounted, and a target for direct fire.

STANDARDS: Sight on the target with the direct fire telescope until the correct sight picture is attained and the target is neutralized.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 10–15 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Have a direct fire telescope mounted and a target and a fire command available. BRIEF SOLDIER: Identify the target to the Soldier, and give the fire command.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified target. 2. Repeated range. 3. Laid on target using straight telescope 4. Laid on target using alternate method.

NOTE: Steps 3 and 4 will depend on which method is used. Only one method should be tested here.

PERFORM DIRECT FIRE USING THE M171A1 TELESCOPE (M777A1/A2) 061-306-1218

CONDITIONS: As a Gunner in field environment, given an M777A1/A2 howitzer in the firing position and a target for direct fire. The howitzer is laid and pantel is oriented on the collimator, the cannon tube is at 0 mils.

STANDARDS: Sight on the target using the Direct Fire Telescope until the correct sight picture is attained and the target is neutralized.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: None

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared Sight 2. Center Bubbles 3. Set Azimuth knob to 3200 and bar knob to Direct mode 4. Track Target 5. Used Proper commands

6. Followed Subsequent command based on Section Chief Fire Command

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-27

PERFORM DIRECT FIRE USING THE PALADIN DIGITAL FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM 061-307-3568

CONDITIONS: Given an M109A6 howitzer with an operational PDFCS in field environment or firing position with section personnel, equipment, and a target to engage. STANDARDS: Performed direct fire with the PDFCS by inputting range and elevation to target. Give commands in sequence, elevated or depressing tube until properly elevated.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Tell the Soldier to prepare the howitzer for direct firing using the PDFCS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Sights on the target, establishes the announced lead, and commands “FIRE.”

NOTE: Central or reticle lay methods. 2. Responds to subsequent fire commands.

Chapter 4

4-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

HOWITZER TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL TASKS 4-28. Soldier’s tasks provide the commander a means to evaluate key leaders on critical individual tasks and knowledge required to safely operate and fire the howitzer. The tasks listed in Table 4-2 provide a foundation and support the collective tasks in Tables II through VI. These tasks are the minimum requirement toward a certified/qualified crew and are not all-inclusive of the critical task list and will be performed with the organization’s weapons system. Soldiers will perform the skill-level task appropriate to the duty position.

Table 4-2. Howitzer Table I: Individual Tasks Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-266-3305 Determine Site and Range to Crest 3 061-266-3315 Determine that Howitzer Data is Safe to Fire 3 061-266-3321 Take Immediate Action for Misfire (Semi-fixed Ammunition) 3 061-266-3322 Take Immediate Action for Misfire (Separate-Loading

Ammunition) 3

061-281-3430 Perform Prefire Checks on an M119 Howitzer 3 061-306-3002 Initialize the Digital Fire Control System (M777A1/A2) 3 061-306-3010 Perform Prefire Checks on an M777A1/A2 Howitzer 3 061-307-3430 Perform Prefire Checks on an M109A6 Howitzer 3 061-307-3559 Initialize the Paladin Digital Fire Control System 3 061-307-4561 Emplace the M109A6 Using the Paladin Digital Fire Control

System (PDFCS) 3

061-266-4007 Lay the Battery or Platoon Using Alternate Methods of Lay 4 061-266-4013 Declinate the M2 or M2A2 Aiming Circle 4 061-266-5302 Orient the M2 or M2A2 Aiming Circle 4 061-320-5301 Set Up the Gun Laying Positioning System (GLPS) 4 061-320-5302 Recover the Gun Laying Positioning System (GLPS) 4 061-320-5303 Orient the Gun Laying Positioning System (GLPS) with the PLGR 4 061-320-5304 Orient the GLPS for Direction Using Known Position 4 061-320-5305 Orient the GLPS for Direction Using Back Polar Plot Method 4 061-320-5306 Lay the Battery or Platoon Using GLPS 4 061-320-5307 Establish Survey Control Using The Gun Laying and Positioning

System 4

061-266-4000 Set-Up and Recover the M2 or M2A2 Aiming Circle 4 061-266-3313 Prepare Range Card(s) for a Howitzer 3 061-266-3311 Perform End for End on the Gunner’s Quadrant 2–3 061-266-3310 Perform Micrometer Test on the Gunner’s Quadrant 2–3

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-29

DETERMINE SITE AND RANGE TO CREST 061-266-3305

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, two assistants, and a sector of fire with an aiming point to a measurable crest.

STANDARDS: Determine site and range to crest. Soldier must correctly identify the highest crest in the sector of fire, determine the range to the nearest 100 meters, and record data on DA Form 5212-R (Gunner’s Reference Card).

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready to use. Ensure that the two assistants are present. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier that the two assistants will assist him in elevating and traversing the tube, measuring distance if needed.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Sighted along bottom edge of bore. 2. Traversed the tube across the probable field of fire. 3. Elevated the tube until crest was cleared. 4. Determined angle of elevation of the site to crest. 5. Determined range in 100 meter increments. 6. Recorded site and range to crest on the Gunner’s Reference Card (DA Form

5212-R).

7. Reported site and range to crest to the Platoon Sergeant.

DETERMINE THAT HOWITZER DATA IS SAFE TO FIRE 061-266-3315

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer with safety aids, ammunition, section/crew, safety T, and a series of fire commands.

STANDARDS: Determine that the howitzer data is safe to fire. If unsafe, state all reasons why mission is unsafe to fire.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Have the howitzer laid and ready for firing. A safety T will be prepared for the howitzer. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier that he will be given a series of fire commands and provide him with a copy of the prepared safety T.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined that the data received was safe to fire. Reported unsafe data and

stated reason (if any).

2. Ensured that all data was correctly set on the weapon. 3. Visually inspected to ensure the correct shell-fuze combination (time if

required) and charge(s) were properly prepared and loaded for both single and multiple-round missions.

Chapter 4

4-30 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TAKE IMMEDIATE ACTION FOR MISFIRE (SEMI-FIXED AMMUNITION) 061-266-3321

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, a loaded projectile, (actual or inert), and a misfire situation.

STANDARDS: Take immediate action for misfire (semifixed ammunition). Soldier must take immediate action for (1) a cold tube misfire and (2) hot tube misfire. Crew must follow the procedures in sequence.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Use an inert or practice round for training. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier that an inert or practice round will be used for training purposes and that the tube is hot or cold.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Took immediate action for a cold tube misfire. 2. Took immediate action for a hot tube misfire.

TAKE IMMEDIATE ACTION FOR MISFIRE

(SEPARATE-LOADING AMMUNITION) 061-266-3322

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, a loaded projectile (actual or inert), and a misfire situation.

STANDARDS: Take immediate action for misfire (separate-loading ammunition). Soldier must take immediate action for (1) cold tube misfire, (2) warm tube misfire and (3) hot tube misfire. Soldier must follow the procedures for his weapon system in sequence.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Took immediate action for a misfire on a M109A6 Howitzer.

a. Used cold tube procedures. b. Used warm tube procedures. c. Used hot tube procedures.

2. Took immediate action for a misfire on a M777A1/A2 Howitzer. a. Performed cold tube procedures. b. Performed warm tube procedures. c. Performed warm tube in hot weather procedures. d. Performed hot tube procedures.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-31

PERFORM PREFIRE CHECKS ON AN M119 HOWITZER 061-281-3430

CONDITIONS: Given an M119 howitzer in a firing position and section equipment.

STANDARDS: The Soldier performed prefire checks to ensure howitzer is safe to fire IAW procedures listed in TM 9-1015-252-10

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to perform prefire checks. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Checked inner recuperator cylinder. 2. Checked stuffing box pin. 3. Checked jacking back nut. 4. Checked cannon tube. 5. Checked function of breech block and firing mechanism safety. 6. Checked locking key and cotter pin. 7. Ensured trail is not touching ground. 8. Checked tension and firing stays.

INITIALIZE THE DIGITAL FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM (M777A1/A2)

061-306-3002

CONDITIONS: Given an M777A1/A2 with a DFCS, TM 9-1025-215-10, BII, AAL in a tactical environment.

STANDARDS: Initialize the DFCS in a sequential and procedural order in accordance with TM 9-1025-215-10.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Verify that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified the Howitzer’s position. 2. Performed DFCS power up procedures. 3. Established communication parameters. 4. Entered spheroid and datum information. 5. Performed Navigational update.

Chapter 4

4-32 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PERFORM PREFIRE CHECKS ON AN M777A1/A2 HOWITZER 061-306-3010

CONDITIONS: Given an M777A1/A2 howitzer, necessary assistance, and section equipment. STANDARDS: The Soldier performed prefire checks to determine if the howitzer is safe to fire following the procedural steps listed in TM 9-1025-215-10.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to perform prefire checks.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. SC ensured the following prefiring checks were completed:

a. Ensured bore was clear. b. Ensured howitzer had five points of contact with the ground. c. Ensured breech and PFM witness marks were aligned. d. Ensured oil index pin were flush.

2. Driver made the following prefire checks: a. Ensured no foreign matter was present in cannon tube. b. Ensured obtrator pad (Crossley pad) and disk are installed. c. Ensured that split rings were 180 degrees apart.

PERFORM PREFIRE CHECKS ON AN M109A6 HOWITZER

061-307-3430

CONDITIONS: Given an M109A6 howitzer in a garrison or field environment with howitzer crew section equipment and TM 9-2350-314-10. STANDARDS: The Soldier performed prefire checks on the recoil system, low voltage check, howitzer tube, breech and perform the rammer reliability check to ensure the howitzer is safe to fire IAW procedures listed in TM 9-2350-314-10.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Have the howitzer prepared to conduct the tests and an extra alignment device available. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to perform prefire checks.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Checked tube for obstruction. 2. Conducted low voltage check. 3. Inspected breech. 4. Conducted rammer reliability check. 5. Checked recoil system.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-33

INITIALIZE THE PALADIN DIGITAL FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM (M109A6) 061-307-3559

CONDITIONS: Given an M109A6 howitzer with crew, voice communications between the howitzer and the Platoon Operation Center (POC), and initialization information. STANDARDS: Initialize the Paladin Digital Control System in sequence following the performance steps in TM 9- 2350-314-10.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide at the test site all equipment and information stated in the condition statement. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to initialize the Paladin Digital Fire Control System.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed checks outside the howitzer before initialization. 2. Performed checks inside the howitzer before initialization. 3. Powered up the PDFCS. 4. Conducted initialization of NET ACCESS data. 5. Conducted initialization of NET ADDRESS data 6. Conducted initialization of SETUP AND INFORMATION data. 7. Performed SECTION IN ORDER.

EMPLACE THE M109A6 USING THE PALADIN DIGITAL FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM

(PDFCS) 061-307-4561

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, aligned along the azimuth of fire, and in travel lock. The “Emplace” screen is displayed on the Paladin Display Unit (PDU). The Soldier positions himself as the section chief and announces when ready. The examiner will state BEGIN. STANDARDS: Emplace the M109A6 using the PDFCS. Soldier must follow all procedural steps and all site data information must be entered before sending piece status. TEST PLANNING TIME:

• Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5–12 minutes • Total time (per vehicle): 5–10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION SETUP: Provide at the test site all the equipment and information stated in the task conditions statement. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to prepare the howitzer for firing using the Paladin digital fire control system.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Initialized PDFCS. 2. Supervised position of gun and FAASV. 3. Supervised section emplacing howitzer.

Chapter 4

4-34 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

LAY THE BATTERY OR PLATOON USING ALTERNATE METHODS OF LAY 061-266-4007

CONDITIONS: Given a declinated M2 or M2A2 compass, a visible distant aiming point (DAP) which can be located on a map, a M2 or M2A2 aiming circle, an azimuth of fire, a 1:50,000-scale map, a battery or platoon center, a protractor, a battery or platoon in a firing position, and an adjusting piece which is laid on a target and has fired the first round.

STANDARDS: Orient the aiming circle using the announced deflection from the firing piece and give the proper commands (as specified IAW FM 6-50) to lay the remainder of the battery or platoon.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Have the battery or platoon (one howitzer identified as the designated piece) in position, the gunner(s) available, and the aiming circle tripod set up. BRIEF SOLDIER: Identify the designated piece, the DAP, the azimuth of fire, and the location of battery or platoon center to the Soldier.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Laid the howitzer using the M2 compass and proper commands (as required).

a. Determined the deflection to the howitzer. b. Laid the howitzer using the proper commands. c. Gave the proper command to lay the remaining howitzer.

2. Laid the battery or platoon by using the aiming point-deflection method and proper commands (as required).

a. Determined the azimuth from the center of the battery or platoon to the DAP. b. Computed a deflection to the aiming point. c. Laid the battery or platoon by using correct commands.

3. Oriented the aiming circle using the howitzer back-lay method, and laid the battery or platoon by using proper commands (as required).

a. Determined the azimuth of fire. b. Marked the azimuth of fire with stakes and tape. c. Ensured adjusting piece positioned alongside or over the marked azimuth, all

other howitzers on line.

d. Gave correct commands after the FDC announced firing data to the howitzer and the first round was fired.

e. Announced the correct commands to lay the remaining howitzers.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-35

DECLINATE THE M2 OR M2A2 AIMING CIRCLE 061-266-4013

CONDITIONS: Given an emplaced aiming circle, a declination station with known data, and FM 6-50.

STANDARDS: Determine when declination is required IAW FM 6-50, declinate the aiming circle to an accuracy of ±2 mils with a surveyed declination station, and record the data on the notation pad.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment and personnel are ready and available. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to declinate the aiming circle IAW FM 6-50.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Declinated the aiming circle.

a. Followed proper procedures in setting up and leveling the aiming circle. b. Determined the declination constant. (1) Declinated the aiming circle using magnetic north. (2) Declinated the aiming circle using grid north.

ORIENT THE M2 OR M2A2 AIMING CIRCLE

061-266-5302

CONDITIONS: Given an M2 or an M2A2 aiming circle set up and leveled over a designated location, the end of the orienting line (EOL), an azimuth to the EOL, a declination constant (DC), an azimuth of fire, a battery or platoon in a firing area, necessary assistants, and communication with each howitzer.

STANDARDS: Orient the aiming circle until the 0-3200 line is parallel with the azimuth of fire. Lay the battery or platoon until the reading on the aiming circle and the reading on the panoramic telescopes (pantels) are identical and the weapon is oriented on the line of fire.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Identify the EOL to the Soldier. Inform the Soldier of the azimuth of fire and the azimuth to the EOL and also the DC of the aiming circle. Tell the Soldier that the assistants will act as gunners.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Oriented the aiming circle by the orienting angle method (as required). 2. Oriented the aiming circle by the grid azimuth method (as required). 3. Laid the battery or platoon using the proper commands.

Chapter 4

4-36 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SET UP THE GUN LAYING POSITIONING SYSTEM (GLPS) 061-320-5301

CONDITIONS: Given a Gun Laying and Positioning Systems (GLPS), PLGR or DAGR, a location, and the GLPS TM 9-6675-347-13&P.

STANDARDS: The GLPS will be visually centered over an OS and self-located for position and azimuth using automated input from the Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) or Defense Advanced GPS Receiver (DAGR). The OS will provide line of sight from the GLPS to each of the howitzers.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP. Ensure that all components of the GLPS are available and ready for operation. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to set up the GLPS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected location for the GLPS. 2. Set up and leveled the tripod. 3. Mounted gyroscope. 4. Mounted theodolite with the laser rangefinder. 5. Mounted battery or power pack. 6. Mounted PLGR. 7. Leveled the system.

RECOVER THE GUN LAYING POSITIONING SYSTEM (GLPS)

061-320-5302

CONDITIONS: Given a Gun Laying Positioning System (GLPS) in an operational configuration.

STANDARDS: Soldier must (1) turn off the GLPS, (2) disconnect all adjoining pieces of equipment, and (3) secure them in their storage containers by the prescribed safe manner outlined in TM 9-6675-347-13&P.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to recover the GLPS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Turn off GLPS. 2. Dismounted day/night target rod. 3. Removed battery. 4. Removed PLGR or DAGR from bracket. 5. Dismounted theodolite. 6. Dismounted gyroscope. 7. Recovered tripod legs.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-37

ORIENT THE GUN LAYING POSITIONING SYSTEM (GLPS) WITH THE PLGR 061-320-5303

CONDITIONS: Given a GLPS set up in a battery or platoon location and a requirement to orient the GLPS for direction using the PLGR or DAGR.

STANDARDS: The GLPS will be visually centered over an OS and self-located using automated input from the PLGR by the procedures outlined in TM-9-6675-347-13&P and without error.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to lay the battery or platoon using the GLPS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Set up the GLPS. 2. Determined the GLPS position. 3. Oriented the GLPS. 4. Selected “Lay by Deflection.”

ORIENT THE GLPS FOR DIRECTION USING KNOWN POSITION

061-320-5304

CONDITIONS: As a gunnery sergeant or a recon sergeant in a field environment, given a GLPS, known position and an order to orient the GLPS.

STANDARDS: Orient the GLPS for direction using the known position by procedures outlined in TM 9-6675-347- 13&P.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all components of the GLPS are available and ready for operation. BRIEF SOLDIER: Give the Soldier the known position and tell him to orient the GLPS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Input known position. 2. Oriented the GLPS.

Chapter 4

4-38 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ORIENT THE GLPS FOR DIRECTION USING BACK POLAR PLOT METHOD 061-320-5305

CONDITIONS: Given a GLPS that is set up and leveled in a battery or platoon location.

STANDARDS: Orient the GLPS for direction using the back polar plot method following the procedural steps outlined in TM-9-6675-347-13&P and without error.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to lay the battery or platoon using the GLPS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Input the reference point. 2. Selected reference point. 3. Oriented GLPS.

LAY THE BATTERY OR PLATOON USING GLPS

061-320-5306

CONDITIONS: Given a Gun Laying Positioning System (GLPS) oriented for direction, TM for GLPS and a requirement to lay the howitzers.

STANDARDS: Lay the battery or platoon using the GLPS to zero mils.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to determine and report the azimuth of the line of fire using the GLPS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected Gun Laying from menu. 2. Laid Battery/Platoon by deflection using proper procedures and commands.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-39

ESTABLISH SURVEY CONTROL USING THE GUN LAYING AND POSITIONING SYSTEM

061-320-5307

CONDITIONS: Given a Gun Laying and Positioning System (GLPS) oriented for direction in a battery location and a requirement to establish survey control using the GLPS.

STANDARDS: Establish survey control using the GLPS. Students must establish an orienting station (OS) and the end of the orienting line (EOL) without error.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to establish an OS and EOL using the GLPS.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected gun laying menu. 2. Selected lay by azimuth. 3. Sighted on the forward station 4. Emplaced the OS hub. 5. Emplaced the EOL. 6. Recorded the Survey Control data.

SET UP AND RECOVER THE M2 OR M2A2 AIMING CIRCLE

061-266-4000

CONDITIONS: Given a complete M2 or M2A2 aiming circle in the stowed position, an orienting station (OS) (ORSTA) or a known point.

STANDARDS: Set up and recover the aiming circle following the procedural steps in FM 6-50. Soldier must (1) Set up the aiming circle; (2) Level the aiming circle; (3) Recover the aiming circle.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Identify the ORSTA or a known point on the ground to them.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Set up the aiming circle. 2. Leveled the aiming circle. 3. Recovered the aiming circle.

Chapter 4

4-40 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PREPARE RANGE CARD(S) FOR A HOWITZER 061-266-3313

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, crew members, emplaced aiming points, a sector of fire, pencil, and range card(s).

STANDARDS: Prepare a range card for a howitzer. Range card must depict target reference points and contain all data to engage the targets.

OTHER INFORMATION: Have the howitzer and/or crew-served weapon emplaced and laid with all materials present. Have at least three aiming points.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Completed the sketch of the assigned sector of fire. 2. Prepared the data portions of the range card.

a. Howitzer section. b. Crew-served weapon section.

3. Completed the sketch of the crew-served weapon range card. 4. Prepared the data portion of the crew-served weapon range card.

PERFORM END FOR END ON THE GUNNER’S QUADRANT

061-266-3311

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, a serviceable gunner’s quadrant, and necessary assistance.

STANDARDS: Perform the gunner’s quadrant end-for-end test and determine correction.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is serviceable and ready for use. Prepare the howitzer for the end-for-end test. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier that an assistant will elevate and/or depress the tube IAW the tested Soldier’s instructions.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Inspected the gunner’s quadrant and quadrant seats, plates, and planes. 2. Performed the end-for-end test, and determines the serviceability. 3. Performed a test for positive error, and determines serviceability. 4. Performed a test for negative error, and determines serviceability.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-41

PERFORM MICROMETER TEST ON THE GUNNER’S QUADRANT 061-266-3310

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, a serviceable gunner’s quadrant, and necessary assistance.

STANDARDS: Perform the gunner’s quadrant micrometer test IAW appropriate TM and state if the gunner’s quadrant is serviceable.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Have the howitzer tube at 0 mils elevation and the trunnions as level as possible. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier that an assistant will act as the Assistant Gunner.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Inspected gunner’s quadrant and quadrant seat, plates, and planes. 2. Performed the micrometer test. 3. Determined the serviceability.

HOWITZER TABLE II: RIGGING PROCEDURES 4-29. Rigging procedures include basic crew/section-level special tasks critical to the performance of special missions (see Table 4-3). Tasks listed in crew/section special tasks (Table 4-4) include rigging procedures for airmobile operations. Specific rigging procedures must comply with unit TACSOP and TM 4-48.11 (Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load: Dual-Point Load Rigging Procedures). Rigging procedures will be completed by IBCTs and SBCTs. The Section must be trained on rigging the howitzer by the Master Gunner and certified by the battery commander prior to moving to the PZ/LZ

Table 4-3. Howitzer Table II: Collective Tasks For Rigging

Task Number Task Reference 06-2-3006 Prepare for Air Movement UTL-DTMS 06-2-3025 Conduct a Field Artillery Air Assault UTL-DTMS 06-2-3024 Conduct Field Artillery Airborne Operations UTL-DTMS 06-2-5005 Conduct an Air Assault Artillery Raid UTL-DTMS

Table 4-4. Rigging Procedures

Crew/Section Special Tasks Dual-Point Rigging Procedures for M119/A2 Howitzer – Performance Steps Listed in Chapter 6 of TM 4-48.11 Rig the A-22 Container for Air Movement Tandem Rigging Procedures for M119A2 Howitzer and a 1097 HMMMV – Chapter 6 of TM 4-48.11 Rig the M119A2 Howitzer with Firing Platform Attached (A-Frame Rigging) Dual-Point Rigging Procedures for M777A1/A2 Howitzer – Performance Steps Listed in Chapter 6 of TM 4-48.11 Dual-Point Rigging Procedures for M119A2 Howitzer – Performance Steps Listed in Chapter 6 of TM 4-48.11

Chapter 4

4-42 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Prepare for Air Movement 06-2-3006

CONDITIONS: The battery commander has issued a movement order that includes air movement, and the date and time of departure/arrival at the airfield or landing zone/pickup zone (LZ/PZ). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. STANDARDS: The battery prepares all platoon and section vehicles, equipment, supplies, and personnel for air movement IAW guidance in the movement order and TM 4-48.09.

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. The battery commander notifies the platoon leaders and the chief of firing battery of the upcoming air operation.

a. All personnel are briefed on the following items. (1) Date, time, location of departure, and marshaling areas. (2)Method of movement, movement schedule. (3)Actions upon arrival at LZ and PZ b. Ensures concealment of unit markings on all equipment, vehicles, and

personnel.

c. Briefs actions during loading. 2. Platoons and/or sections make all necessary preparations for air movement. a. Ensures equipment and vehicle inspections are completed at designated

staging and marshaling areas before loading.

b. Packs and loads all equipment according to vehicle load plans. c. Reduces all vehicles to lowest possible configuration. d. Determines center of gravity for each item to be moved. Marks center of

gravity on each.

e. Packages and marks all hazardous material on appropriate form(s). f. Moves equipment to PZ or airfield, when directed.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-43

CONDUCT A FIELD ARTILLERY AIR ASSAULT 06-2-3025

CONDITIONS: Given a battery of towed artillery that are conducting combat operations and has been ordered to conduct a planned air assault movement. The battery has been given guidance to include the location of the new position area, pickup and landing zones (PZ/LZ), times, and coordinating instructions. The LZ is secure and the advance party has prepared the position.

STANDARDS: The battery secures and rigs all equipment IAW FMs, and pilot/crew chief directions. The battery occupies the LZ and establishes firing capability within 12 minutes (105mm Btry) or 13 minutes (155mm Btry).

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. The BC/XO conducts air mission brief (AMB) with the air mission commander (AMC).

*2. The BC/Platoon leader/ Platoon Sergeant assemble and briefs personnel on the mission IAW TSOP.

a. Briefs all personnel on the following: (1) Mission. (2) Method of movement. (3) General enemy situation. (4) Use of communications. (5) Pickup zone (PZ) and landing zone (LZ) operations and safety. (6) Rehearsal times and location. b. Briefs key personnel on the following: (1) Route of movement to the LZ. (2) Location of PZ and LZ. (3) Time of displacement. (4) Azimuth of fire. (5) Tentative location of battery center.

3. The battery establishes communications with the lift unit. Primary and alternate frequencies must be identified.

4. The battery ensures PZ is marked and identified. 5. The BC/1SG organizes troops and equipment into chalks and assigns chalk

leaders.

6. The chalk leaders ensure the following: a. All personnel know which aircraft and which position to load. b. All personnel wear or carry rucksack on the aircraft. c. Notify the crew chief when all personnel are on board.

7. All sections prepare for airlift at PZ as follows: When rigging the equipment, insure that the proper steps are followed as

outlined in ATTP 3-18.12 and/or the appropriate equipment manual.

a. Howitzers, vehicles, A-22 bags, and cargo nets are rigged for internal or external loading.

b. Loads are properly identified and marked. 8. The battery ensures hookup teams are properly equipped. Static probes and

goggles or protective mask are required as a minimum.

Chapter 4

4-44 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 9. The battery maintains noise and light discipline in rear and forward areas and

PZ and LZ.

NOTE: For night air assaults, unit must use flashlights, beanbag and marking lights, IR strobes, or chem lights (bright lights are not a viable operation when pilots are flying with the assistance of night observation devices (NODs)). The decision of what light to use should be made by the pilots.

10. The battery maintains security in rear and forward areas and PZ and LZ. 11. The advance party secures LZ and position area and ensures LZ is properly

organized. Minimum personnel are used for advance party.

12. The battery conducts LZ operations as follows: a. The crews unload on order of aircraft crew chief. b. The individuals will move 15-20 meters out from the side of the aircraft

and assume the prone position facing away form the aircraft, weapons at the ready, until the aircraft has departed the LZ.

c. After aircraft depart the LZ crews immediately de-rig equipment. 13. The battery attains firing capability.

NOTE: Add 5 minutes for night occupation. 14. The battery defends against ground attack during insertion as follows:

a. Fires and maneuvers off the LZ to the closest side offering cover and concealment.

b. Coordinates employment of all available fire support on enemy forces. c. Accounts for personnel and equipment once disengaged form the enemy.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-45

CONDUCT FIELD ARTILLERY AIRBORNE OPERATIONS 06-2-3024

CONDITIONS: Given a battery of M119 or M777 that is conducting combat operations and has been ordered to conduct an airborne operation movement. Air Force aircraft are available. Date, time, and departure and arrival airfields are specified. The ground tactical, marshaling, loading and landing plans are available. The battalion staff has planned the operation.

STANDARDS: The battery conducts airborne operations to support the maneuver force OPORD IAW commander's guidance, TSOP, movement plan, load plan and applicable FM 90-26 and TMs.

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The BC/1SG assembles and briefs personnel IAW TSOP. 2. The BC/1SG maintains contact with the battalion staff to ensure complete

coordination of the battery requirements in the following:

a. Ground tactical plan. b. Fire support plans. c. Field artillery support plans. d. Loading priorities and cross loading with maneuver elements. e. Times for movement to heavy drop rigging site (HRDS), Joint Inspection

(J/I), and loading into aircraft.

f. Information concerning the drop zone (DZ), such as enemy situation, hazards & obstacles, assembly areas, signals, and survey control.

3. The battery conducts marshaling area activities. The BC/1SG ensures the following:

a. Soldiers are assembled, organized, and marked. b. Soldiers are cross loaded. c. Sustained airborne training is conducted. d. Equipment to be heavy dropped is moved to the HDRS at the correct time. e. All equipment and correct ammunition are loaded on the platforms. f. Vehicles are sequenced IAW the movement plan and loaded IAW load

plans.

g. All equipment for combat is rigged correctly and loads are properly marked for ease of identification on the DZ.

h. Personnel are briefed on tactical operations. i. Rehearsals are conducted. j. Final inspections of personnel and equipment are conducted.

4. Battery conducts the operation. Leaders do the following: a. Ensure beanbag lights and chemlights are activated in the aircraft. Ensure

battery has backup signal(s) for heavy drop platforms.

b. Ensure jumpers exit on or near the heavy equipment point of impact (HEPI).

c. Ensure battery immediately derigs equipment and personnel, conducts unit assembly procedures IAW TSOP, and moves off the DZ if required.

NOTE: The tactical situation may require the unit to attain a firing capability on the DZ. 5. The battery conducts drop zone mission.

a. 105MM Fifteen minutes during the day. Twenty-five at night.

Chapter 4

4-46 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO b. 155MM Twenty-five minutes during the day. Forty minutes at night. NOTE: Time starts when the last jumper, first pass, exits the aircraft. Time stops when FDC receives

call for fire, constructs and checks charts, plots targets, computes data and sends to howitzer. The howitzer(s) is laid, prefire checks are complete, firing data applied, round prepared and positioned.

6. BC/1SG assembles all personnel and reports strength accountability to the battalion staff immediately upon occupation of position.

7. Battery maintains noise and light discipline and security.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-47

CONDUCT AN AIR ASSAULT ARTILLERY RAID 06-2-5005

CONDITIONS: The battery is in position providing fires and has been ordered to conduct an air assault artillery raid. Required air assault equipment is on hand. The FA forward observers are available. The Army aviation assets are available. The advance party arrives at the LZ, 15-20 minutes prior to the main body. STANDARDS: The elements move to the PZ at the prescribed time, rig equipment and conduct the raid IAW the OPORD.

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The BC/XO plans air assault raid, as follows:

a. Plans mission using Troop Leading Procedures (TLP) and considering the factors of METT-TC.

b. Uses established TSOP. c. Ensures minimum equipment is taken on raid. d. Specifies correct ammunition for desired effect on target. e. Identifies pickup zone (PZ) and landing zone (LZ) locations. f. Coordinates with higher HQ for security element. g. Coordinates with higher HQ for attack helicopter support. h. Requests intelligence update from higher HQ.

2. The BC/XO does the following: a. Coordinates with S-3 air. b. Conducts an air mission briefing (AMB) with air mission commander. c. Designates raid personnel. d. Inspects raid personnel. e. Conducts troop safety briefing.

3. The battery prepares to conduct air assault artillery raid to include the following:

a. Raid participants conduct a rehearsal. b. Firing data are pre-computed and distributed. c. PZ and security are established. NOTE: PZ is a minimum of 500 meters from the battery area. d. Howitzers and personnel are moved to PZ at appropriate time. e. Equipment is rigged and inspected. f. Prearranged signals or code words for extraction are distributed.

4. Battery executes air assault artillery raid to include the following: a. Advance party and security elements secure the LZ. b. Advance party establishes communications with aircraft and observers. c. Loads are delivered to the correct LZ. d. Firing capability is established. e. Weapons are prepared for sling load extraction. f. Lift helicopters are recalled to LZ by BC/XO. g. Howitzers and personnel are extracted from LZ. h. Safety procedures are strictly adhered to.

Chapter 4

4-48 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

HOWITZER Table III: ESTABLISH OPERATIONS 4-30. This section outlines the procedures, tasks, performance steps, and assessments for establishing operations for an FA howitzer section and crew. This section is designed to assist the commander in planning, preparing, and establishing operations for howitzer section and crew. The section includes TTP for occupying a tactical assembly area, conducting equipment and weapons inspections, and performing section/crew special tasks critical to the unit’s ability to perform the overall mission but unique to certain types of units. Table III will include the collective tasks required to perform an occupation by a howitzer section during both day and night conditions. The tasks will be trained as an STX as a gate prior to the abbreviated procedures trained in Table IV and may be included in the LTX for Tables IV and V. Table 4-5 lists the collective tasks included in Table III.

Table 4-5. Howitzer Table III – Establish Operations

Task Number Task Reference 06-2-3001 Occupy a Tactical Area UTL-DTMS 06-2-3026 Conduct a Non Paladin Occupation UTL-DTMS 06-4-5021 Prepare Howitzer for Conduct of Fire Mission (Non Paladin) UTL-DTMS 06-3-5012 Established Firing Capability (Paladin Units) UTL-DTMS 06-4-5026 Perform a Paladin Survivability Move UTL-DTMS 06-4-5007 Load Howitzer Section Ammunition UTL-DTMS

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-49

OCCUPY A TACTICAL AREA 06-2-3001

CONDITIONS: The unit is conducting or preparing to conduct combat operations and is ordered to move to and occupy a tactical assembly area or position area. The advance party/quartering party has conducted route and area reconnaissance and has selected, occupied and prepared the position area. The unit is conducting tactical convoy operations and has reached the release point (RP).

STANDARDS: The unit moves into their assigned position, establishes operations, maintains security and performs position improvement.

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. The BC/1SG ensures the following: a. Vehicle interval and security are maintained when entering the area. b. Vehicles observe a track plan while occupying position. c. Vehicles are positioned to allow for rapid entry and exit. d. Operational capability is maintained at all times. e. Communications is established and maintained.

2. As the elements clear the release point, advance party members, waiting in covered and concealed positions, move out to guide them to selected or designated area without halting.

3. Ground guides observe the track plan and ensure that elements do not interfere with other elements during occupation by maintaining vehicle interval.

4. The unit establishes and maintains local security from enemy air and ground forces.

a.Section chiefs confirm defensive sectors with the BC/1SG/PL. b. OPs are placed on critical avenues of approach based on the commander’s

guidance. The OPs establish communications with the CP.

c. Unit maintains noise, light, and camouflage discipline. d. Unit conducts patrols IAW the TSOP.

5. The BC/1SG coordinates, as a minimum, with the element on the left and right. a. Establishes responsibility for overlapping enemy avenues of approach

between adjacent units.

b. Exchanges information on OP locations and unit signals. 6. The unit establishes and maintains operations. 7. The BC/1SG develops a defense plan.

a. Prepares the defense diagram. b. Employs all anti-armor weapons. c. Establishes automatic weapons left and right limits and/or the final protective

line.

d. Emplaces mines and obstacles, ensuring they are covered by fire. 8. The BC/1SG forwards the defense sketch to the battalion TOC; retains one copy

for unit use.

9. The battery performs position improvements as follows: a. Installs camouflage and conceals equipment. b. Prepares and designates alternate positions. c. Organizes logistic elements with enough turnaround area to ease operations.

Chapter 4

4-50 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO d. Selects, prepares, and marks helicopter landing area and ensures: (1) The area is relatively level. (2) The area is circular and 25 to 80 meters in diameter. (3) The approach/departure direction is free of obstacles. (4) The area is marked for day and night operations.

10. The battery observes OPSEC to avoid revealing to the enemy the location and intention of the unit.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-51

CONDUCT A NON PALADIN OCCUPATION 06-2-3026

CONDITIONS: The battery/platoon of M119A2/M777A1/A2 is conducting combat operations. The battery/platoon has completed a tactical road march and has arrived at the release point. The advance party is present. Lead the sections to positions that have been prepared. 6400 mil operations may be required.

STANDARDS: The battery/platoon occupies position, establishes security, communications, and establishes battery/platoon firing capabilities with 13 minutes during the day and 18 minutes for night operations.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The BC/PL directs and controls the occupation as follows:

a. Maintains vehicle interval during the occupation. b. Observes track plan during movement in position area. c. Establishes firing capability immediately. d. Position vehicles for rapid entry and exit. e. Ensures sections establish communications. f. Ensures light and noise discipline. g. Ensures that vehicles in the position area move with ground guide.

2. The ground guides meet battery/platoon elements at the designated entry point and lead vehicles to their designated position.

3. Each gun guide performs the following: a. Aligns the howitzer on the azimuth of fire. b. Gives the initial deflection to the gunner. c. Marks the position for day and night operations.

4. The gunnery sergeant performs the following: a. Lays the howitzers. b. Implements the security plan as people become available. c. Verifies that each howitzer emplaces sufficient aiming points for 6400 mil

operations.

5. The XO/PL determines, prepares, and submits the XO report as follows: a. Determines the position minimum quadrant elevation (QE) to the nearest 1.0

mils for all charges to be fired.

b. Determines a safe time setting for all fuzes to be fired. c. Immediately prepares and submits XO report to the FDC. Elements are

reported as determined. As a minimum, report the following:

(1) Battery/Platoon is laid. (2) Azimuth of lay. (3) Orienting angle (if applicable). (4) Minimum QE. (5) Distribution of pieces (deflection, vertical angle, and distance from

aiming circle).

d. Submits additional information as it becomes available to include: (1) Left and right limits. (2) Maximum Elevation. (3) Ammunition count by type to include: a. Amount (projectile, fuze, and propellant charge). b. Lot numbers.

Chapter 4

4-52 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (4) Square weight of projectiles by lot.

6. Continue with position improvement, camouflage nets and distribution of ammunition as required.

PREPARE HOWITZER FOR CONDUCT OF FIRE MISSION (NON PALADIN) 06-4-5021

CONDITIONS: The battery/platoon has completed a tactical move. The advance party has prepared the new position area. Each gun guide has aligned his weapon along the azimuth of fire and has given the initial deflection to the gunner.

STANDARDS: The section chief establishes and maintains operational capability IAW FM 6-50 and unit TSOP. The section chief maintains firing data and makes required entries on Record of Missions Fired as directed by the FDC.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. The section chief gives the command to “Prepare for Action.” 2. The crew emplaces spades or trails. 3. The crew lays howitzer.

*4. The section chief verifies lay. 5. The crew emplaces primary aiming point.

*6. The section chief verifies boresight of the howitzer. *7. The section chief and crew perform prefire checks. *8. The section chief ensures enough ammunition is prepared IAW TSOP. 9. The section chief verifies sight and range to crest.

10. The crew establishes communication with FDC. *11. The section chief completes section chief’s report, records standard fire

commands, and reports “in order,” ready to fire.

12. The crew lays on priority target (if applicable). 13. The crew improves howitzer position.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-53

ESTABLISHED FIRING CAPABILITY (PALADIN UNITS) 06-3-5012

CONDITIONS: The battery/platoon is conducting combat operations. The platoon has completed a tactical road march and has arrived at the firing point. The howitzer crews have occupied the firing point given by the senior paladin chief within the position area. The Gunnery sergeant has designated a POC location.

STANDARDS: The battery/platoon occupies position area and is ready to deliver fires within 3 minutes.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

*1. The platoon leader: The platoon leader is the officer in charge of firing and is responsible for the following:

a. Safety of the firing element. b. Ensures AFCS database has been input correctly. c. Checks the survey data at SCPs. d. Ensures verification of the howitzers location and direction per TSOP.

2. Fire Direction Officer: In addition to those listed in FM 6-50, the FDO has the following responsibilities in a Paladin unit: Verifies POC and gun databases by conducting a verification mission (dry fire or AMC) after initialization, or when either the AFCS and LCU is powered up, or when a significant change occurs to the LCU/howitzer’s database (MET, MVV, registration corrections).

NOTE: Location is not a significant change to a howitzer database. 3. Gunnery Sergeant: The Gunnery Sergeant’s responsibilities are as follows:

a. Conducts an in-depth reconnaissance, selection, occupation and defense of a platoon firing position.

b. Verifies the position area location and transmits the location to the POC. + c. Performs hasty survey as required. d. Initiates the development of the platoon defense plan. e. Assists in the sustainment of 24-hour operations. f. Computes executive officer’s (XO’s) min QE for the lowest preferred

charge the unit expects to fire. +

4. Platoon Sergeant: The Firing Battery Platoon Sergeant (PSG) is the primary enlisted assistant to the platoon leader and must be prepared to assume all of the platoon leader’s duties. His responsibilities include the following:

a. Supervise the firing platoon and maintain firing capability. + b. Supervise the occupation of the position. c. Supervise the overall maintenance of the firing platoon. d. Continue to developed and execute the firing platoon defense plan

(Chapter 3 FM.6-50).

e. Provide the 1SG with the firing platoon defense plan for integration into the overall battery defense scheme.

f. Ensure that each chief of section knows the route to both alternate and supplementary positions.

g. Conduct independent secondary checks of all howitzer position locations. h. Verify Howitzer calibration and ensure muzzle velocity (MV) readings are

provided to the POC.

i. Verify the completion of DA Form 2408-4 (Weapon Record Data).

Chapter 4

4-54 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO j. Ensure ammunition is properly handled and protected. k. Ensure safety aids are used and safety procedures are followed. l. Determine platoon requirements and coordinate with the platoon leader and

the 1SG for all logistical activities for the platoon.

5. Howitzer Section Chief: The Howitzer Section Chief is responsible for all actions within his section. He performs the following:

a. Verifying the howitzer location/direction using prescribed methods. + b. The accuracy of database information. + c. Verifying firing limits. d. Visually verifying adjacent piece locations, and target reference points. e. Initiating and maintaining the section (RANGE CARDS).

6. POC: The Platoon Operation Center, is responsible to conduct a verification mission every time there is a significant change in the database, MVVs, MET, and registration data. The POC is responsible for verifying that targets do not violate fire support coordination measures and that the targets plot within the prescribed target area. It is imperative that the FDO or chief computer verifies the plot of the target and the target location that is input into LCU.

a. Ensure voice and digital communications with BN FDC and howitzers have been established. +

b. Receive piece status (HOW; UPDATE) from howitzers and verify center sector.

c. Verify howitzer location plots inside the firing area by plotting on howitzer tracking chart. +

d. Verify Database. If database information changes occur, the POC will direct a verification mission (i.e., check/change MVVs, Registrations, Ammunition, and MET). At this time, the firing unit is ready to fire. +

e. Verify and announce XO’s min QE to the guns. + f. Ensure fire support coordination measures are posted.

7. If your AFCS becomes degraded refer to TM 9-2350-314-10 for paladin degraded operations.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-55

PERFORM A PALADIN SURVIVABILITY MOVE 06-4-5026

CONDITIONS: The platoon/battery is providing fires in support of combat or simulated combat operations. The howitzer section has completed 3 to 6 rounds and is required to move to increase survivability. Enemy threat is likely or counterfire can be anticipated.

STANDARDS: The section(s) loaded all section equipment, maintained communications and moved to another firing position within the platoon or battery area of operations IAW TSOP or tactical guidance.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

*1. The section chief issues the prepare to move command to the howitzer section. a. March Order b. Communications with the platoon operations center (POC) is maintained at

all times, and POC is informed when moving.

c. Visibility is maintained between howitzers when in platoon formations. d. Automated fire control system (AFCS) is updated with current data (max and

min quadrant elevation and site data).

e. POC is updated with current powder temperature and piece status. 2. Section members load and secure all equipment and ammunition. 3. Gunner reports piece status to the Platoon/Battery Operations Center

(POC/BOC).

4. Howitzer section prepares the vehicle for movement: a. Gunner stows the tube. b. Driver secures the tube and starts the vehicle. c. Cannoneer loads and secures ammunition and fuzes.

5. Driver moves the vehicle to the next location as directed by the section chief. *6. Section chief ensures the following during the move:

a. POC/BOC is informed when moving. b. Communications with the POC/BOC is maintained at all times. c. Visibility is maintained between howitzers when in platoon formations.

7. Howitzer sections prepares the howitzer to fire: a. Automated fire control system (AFCS) is updated with current data (max and

min quadrant elevation and site data).

b. POC/BOC is updated with current powder temperature and piece status.

Chapter 4

4-56 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

LOAD HOWITZER SECTION AMMUNITION 06-4-5007

CONDITIONS: The section is conducting combat operations and has been issued its basic load of ammunition.

STANDARDS: The section chief and crew loaded ammunition on vehicles IAW load plans. Ammunition was stored and protected in the firing position in a manner which provided security from enemy fire and from the environment and provided easy access and accountability.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The crew segregates ammunition by type and lot when loading on vehicle. 2. The crew loads ammunition IAW load plan. 3. The crew leaves ammunition palletized and containerized until needed. 4. The crew keeps ammunition dry and out of direct sunlight. 5. The crew stores WP upright (on its base). 6. The crew protects ammunition from enemy fires. 7. The crew provides ventilation when stacking and storing ammunition. 8. The crew properly secures projectiles, charges, and fuze cans, etc., IAW

appropriate TM.

HOWITZER TABLE IV: EXECUTE FIRES 4-31. Table IV consists of indirect and direct fire using the FSCATT simulator where available or using primers to simulate full-service ammunition. It also includes the tasks that must be performed by the crew as sustainment training to maintain certification. This table is designed for the section to conduct their fire mission which includes low angle, high angle, and special missions. Table 4-6 lists the collective tasks included in Table IV.

DIRECT FIRE PROCEDURES 4-32. Table IV also includes the training required to train howitzer sections in the tasks of providing Direct Fire and Indirect Observed Fire (Killer Junior).

4-33. Direct Fire. The term “Direct Fire” always refers to the use of the maximum charge available. The advantages of Direct Fire are—

• Flat trajectory. • Lower time-of-flight. • Higher terminal velocity.

4-34. The direct fire mission training tasks are— • Direct Fire Sighting: Two-man–two-sight, two-man–one-sight, and one-man–one-sight. • Direct Fire Laying Methods: Reticle Laying, Central Laying. • Direct Fire Commands. • Estimation of Range and Lead.

INDIRECT OBSERVED FIRE (KILLER JUNIOR) 4-35. Indirect observed fire is a technique using the lowest authorized charge with a mechanical time fuze with minimal fuze setting (see Appendix I, FM 6-50). The advantages of using Killer Junior are—

• Higher trajectory allows firing over intermediate objects (parapets, front-line bunkers) that would be destroyed firing maximum charges with beehive ammunition.

• More effective against prone enemy personnel or enemy in defilade. • Killer Junior procedures require quick-fire tables for the howitzer section. Refer to FM 6-50 for

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-57

detailed discussion and safety procedures required to train.

Table 4-6. Howitzer Table IV – Execute Fires

Task Number Task Reference

06-3-5010 Conduct Emergency Missions UTL-DTMS 06-4-5017 Conduct Howitzer Fire Missions UTL-DTMS 06-4-5022 Conduct Direct Fire UTL-DTMS 06-4-5027 Perform Fire Missions in Degraded

Mode on the M109A6 Paladin Howitzer UTL-DTMS

06-4-6035 Perform an Excalibur Fire Mission DTMS

CONDUCT EMERGENCY MISSIONS 06-3-5010

CONDITIONS: The battery/platoon is enroute to a new position area and has received a call for fire. No other units are capable of executing the mission. The battalion directs the battery/platoon to execute the mission.

STANDARDS: The battery/platoon selects and occupies a firing position and fires the mission IAW unit TSOP and within the following time standards: M119A2–11 minutes. M777A1/2-12 minutes. Paladin–75 seconds.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

*1. XO/platoon leader directs the occupation. a. Selects a position area that facilitates timely completion of the mission. b. Notifies all elements in the column IAW TSOP. c. Selects most expeditious method of lay for the mission and lays the

howitzers. (NON PALADIN UNITS ONLY).

d. Notifies the FDC as soon as one howitzer is laid and uses first howitzer laid as the adjusting piece. (NON PALADIN UNITS ONLY).

2. The FDC/POC does the following: a. Verifies tactical data. b. Determines azimuth of fire. c. Computes the firing data for the fire mission. d. Transmits message to observer.

*3. The howitzer section chief does the following: a. The COS acknowledges receipt of the fire mission. b. Finds suitable firing location (verifies location if not GPS aided). c. COS verifies direction. (If required by SOP). d. COS presses ARRIVED. e. Verifies that mission is clear of crest when the tube is at the lay deflection

sent for the fire mission.

f. COS presses LOAD and executes fire mission. g. COS ensures proper crew drill is performed. h. COS ensures correct firing data is set.

4. The elements not required for fire mission establish position security.

Chapter 4

4-58 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONDUCT HOWITZER FIRE MISSIONS 06-4-5017

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer emplaced and ready to fire, communications with the POC, section equipment and personnel, and appropriate weapon TM. A warning order and fire commands have been issued by the FDC and received at the howitzer section. Aiming references have been established. Enemy contact is possible with counterfire. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4 STANDARDS: The howitzer section prepared and fired the howitzer in accordance with the fire commands.

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO * 1. The section chief verifies fire mission data is safe. If deflection is outside of traverse the

section chief directs the crew to reorient the weapon to the new direction of fire and veifies sight to crest.

2. The chief of section responds and issues the fire commands 3. The crew selects announced projectile and fuze. 4. The crew selects announced or standard ammunition lot. 5. The crew cuts and prepares announced charge. 6. The crew assembles fuze and projectile. 7. The crew places announced fuze setting (if applicable) on fuze using the appropriate

fuze-setter .

8. The chief of section checks setting if time fuze is used for proper time setting 9. The crew prepares projectile for loading and ramming. * 10. The chief of section will verify ammunition lot and charge before gunner loads it in the

tube.

11. The crew lays the howitzer for deflection and quadrant. * 12. The section chief verifies lay. 13. The crew loads projectile when directed. 14. Chief of section will command "Fire" and the number 1 man will fire. The crew fires

when directed IAW fire commands.

15. The crew complies with any additional command (for example, cease fire). 16. The crew makes required entries on record of missions fired (DA Form 4513). * 17. The section chief ensures that the howitzer's ammunition status is updated IAW TSOP.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-59

CONDUCT DIRECT FIRE 06-4-5022

CONDITIONS: The howitzer section is conducting combat operations. An enemy target is located within the direct fire sector of the section. Range to the target is less than 2500 meters and a decision to engage the target has been made by the section chief.

STANDARDS: The howitzer section engaged the target and achieved a target hit.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

*1. The section chief identifies target and issues fire commands consisting of the following:

a. A warning order, for example, TARGET APC. b. General direction to the target, for example, LEFT FRONT. c. Range to the target, example, RANGE 500. d. Lead in mils, example, LEAD, LEFT 5. e. Announces shell fuze combination if other than standard. f. Method of fire, example, FIRE AT WILL. g. Announces subsequent commands.

2. The section personnel do the following: a. Prepare the designated ammunition for firing. b. Load howitzer properly. c. Lay the howitzer on the target and track it, if needed.

3. Procedures for direct fire on the M109A6 Paladin Howitzer. a. Warning order, for example, Target APC. b. Chief of section selects direct fire from set up and information screen. c. Chief selects range and inputs estimated range to the target. d. Chief selects up and down for estimated altitude of target. e. Chief selects use all key to display fire mission screen. f. Chief lay’s howitzer for quadrant and announces set until howitzer is fired.

Chapter 4

4-60 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PERFORM FIRE MISSIONS IN DEGRADED MODE ON THE M109A6 PALADIN HOWITZER 06-4-5027

CONDITIONS: Given a M109A6 Paladin howitzer with a complete section and an inoperative subsystem. The subsystem could be the loss of communications, vehicle or AFCS power, some AFCS component, or anything that makes the vehicle less than 100% operational.

STANDARDS: The section completed all fire missions in degraded mode using alternate methods that are listed in TM 9-2350-314-10 and methods described in ST 6-50-60 Appendix A-4.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Chief of section procedures for degraded fire missions, due to loss of electrical

power:

a. Immediately notify platoon operation center (POC). b. Use limited electrical power available from the M992 field artillery

ammunition support vehicle (FAASV) auxiliary power unit (APU).

c. Manually ram projectile. d. Manually lay using gunners hand wheels. NOTE: The APU provides enough power for AFCS operations only. APU output is not sufficient for

operating the hydraulic system. 2. Procedures for degraded fire missions, if the M992 field artillery ammunition

support vehicle (FAASV) is not available.

a. Use reciprocal lay, aiming circle or compass laying techniques. (Refer to paragraph A-4 Reciprocal Laying Procedures in ST 6-50-60).

b. Ensure spades are used. c. Manually elevate and traverse. d. Receive firing data from adjacent howitzer. e. Operate travel lock manually. f. Use distant aiming point (DAP) or collimator. g. Hand ram projectile.

3. Degraded fire missions procedures due to the loss of Digital communications: a. Immediately notify platoon operation center (POC). b. Co-locate within 30-50 meters of operational gun and use data from

operational gun.

c. Use voice net for platoon operation center (POC). d. Manually input data into AFCS. e. Chief of section verifies AFCS firing data with data received from POC,

before firing round.

f. If data matches, chief of section fires round upon voice command to fire from POC, then reports rounds complete back to the POC.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-61

PERFORM AN EXCALIBUR FIRE MISSION 06-4-6035

CONDITIONS: The howitzer section is in an area of operation and conducting fire missions in support of the maneuver commander and has received a fire mission request for a precision munition. The section has digital communications with the Fire Direction Center and has established Precision Guided Munitions (PGM) firing capabilities at the firing point. Enemy indirect fire is possible. This task will be performed during day or night operations and all weather conditions. All section personnel, equipment, ammunition, and charges are available to conduct the mission. Time is available to accomplish the fire mission. Coalition forces and noncombatants may be present in the operational environment and target area. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. STANDARDS: The howitzer section fires the Excalibur round or is ready to fire a round within time requirements for the WR, AMC, and TTF mission. (WR: 1 minute; AMC: 1 minute; TTF: 1 minute)

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. COS receives a voice warning order for an excalibur fire mission. 2. The section unpackaged and inspects the excalibur round. 3. COS/RTO receives the fire mission issues the fire commands. 4. The section process the fire mission in accordance with the method of control:

a. When Ready (WR). b. At My Command (AMC) c. Time to Fire (TTF)

5. Cannoneer sets the fuze. 6. Cannoneer prepares the MACS charge. 7. COS verifies Excalibur is set via EPIAFS display or fuze countdown time on

the PDFCS/DFCS.

8. Section loads the round. 9. COS verifies commanded deflection and quadrant match and that "Warning the

Tube is not in Lay Position" is not displayed. Lay is in reverse video.

10. COS issues the prime and hook-up command. 11. COS issues the command to "Fire". 12. Cannoneer number 1 pulls the lanyard. 13. COS/RTO presses the "Shot" key on the fire control system.

HOWITZER TABLE V: SECTION CERTIFICATION 4-36. Table V should be conducted as an LTX and may include Tables II through IV or selected tables as determined by the commander. This table will include all tasks to be performed during Table VI (qualification) and may be performed using the FSCATT simulator where available or using primers to simulate full-service ammunition (see Table 4-7). The certification table for all cannon crewmen is a dry-fire exercise. The tasks to be evaluated are the collective tasks in Tables II and IV. The commander must certify that all assigned cannon crewmen can safely operate and fire the cannon in Dry Fire Table V prior to progressing to Table VI Live Fire.

Chapter 4

4-62 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 4-7. Howitzer Table V – Section Certification

Fire Mission Table High Angle, AF V High Angle, FFE V Low Angle, AF V Priority Target V Out of Sector Mission V Direct Fire Mission V

HOWITZER TABLE VI: SECTION QUALIFICATION 4-37. The qualification table for all cannon crewmen is an LFX. Table VI will be conducted using full-service ammunition. It is recommended that Tables IV and V be incorporated into a single LFX. During the LFX, Table VI will include the fire missions listed in Table 4-8 to satisfy the section/crew-qualification requirements. The qualification may also be accomplished during a scenario-driven training event using a MSEL to provide cues and responses. Time standards for the howitzer section to conduct fire missions are included in Appendix D as individual howitzer times.

Table 4-8. Howitzer Table VI – Section Qualification

Fire Mission Table Ammo High Angle, AF VI HE, 8 rds High Angle, FFE VI HE, 1 rd Low Angle, AF VI HE, 8 rds Priority Target VI HE, 1 rd Out of Sector Mission VI 0 Direct Fire Mission VI HE, 5 rds

SECTION II – MLRS SECTION TABLES

TRAINING WITH MLRS TABLES 4-38. Gunnery training programs should be developed that support the commander’s METL, develop and sustain qualified MLRS crewmember sections, and provide a means to evaluate, certify, and qualify teams. The MLRS Tables consist of the ASPT, individual Soldier and leader tasks (Table I), conduct MLRS OPAREA occupation (Table II), prepare HIMARS for air movement (Table III), reload operations (Tables IV/A and /B), and crew certification and qualification (Tables V and VI).

4-39. ASPT stations 1 through 4 and individual Soldier tasks are trained continuously. Table I consists of individual and leader tasks that can be conducted throughout the training year during Sergeant’s Time Training or by a hands-on evaluation at the commander’s discretion. Tables II, III, IV/A and IV/B, and V will train the section/crew in operation area occupation, prepare M142 for air movement, and reload operations for launchers and ammunition sections. Table IV/A is specific to launcher reload, IV/B is specific to ammunition section operations, and lead to Tables V and VI section certification and qualification in support of the commander’s METL. Table III contains specific skills necessary to HIMARS-equipped battalions/batteries. Tables IV/A and /B are used as a gateway to Table V and can be trained as an STX leading to the culminating live fire qualification in Table VI. Table V (Dry-Fire) is a gateway to Table VI (Live fire Qualification) and can be trained as an STX or FTX before the culminating live fire qualification event.

4-40. The 13M Master Gunner must ensure that the MLRS training program— • Maintains proficiency and certification of MLRS crewmembers. • Certifies and qualifies MLRS crewmembers through BCT collective training exercises.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-63

• Supports the commander’s METL.

REQUIREMENTS

Note. Evaluators must be certified prior to testing.

4-41. All launcher crewmembers assigned to an MLRS section (regardless of MOS) will be administered the ASPT. MLRS section members are required to pass the ASPT prior to MLRS section qualification. To pass the ASPT, a Soldier must receive a GO on all stations. If a Soldier fails a task, he must be retrained and retested on that station until he receives a GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare, administer, and evaluate the ASPT.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 4-42. The commander will incorporate risk assessment in planning all aspects of this training. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station in accordance with the unit SOP. The crest clearance tool is used to establish minimum planning ranges for launchers in specific firing areas in which rockets may be in close approach to trees, towers, large buildings, or geographical features. The crest clearance tool ensures that rockets will not only clear a crest, but that a warhead event will not occur until the crest is cleared. See appendix F for the Crest Clearance Tables.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES

Administrative Process 4-43. Before the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test station. When the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator logs the Soldiers in on a roster at each station and provides each Soldier with all materials and equipment displayed, as outlined on this section and in the Test Administrative Guide for that station. The evaluator reads the instructions to the Soldier exactly as written in the guide for each station. The evaluator must use the criterion-scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each Soldier’s performance. As each Soldier finishes or the time limit is up (whichever occurs first), the evaluator checks the Soldier’s performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs him of his performance on that task, and directs him either to the next station or to further training.

Administrative Procedures for Soldiers Receiving a NO-GO 4-44. If a Soldier does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion-scoring checklist, he receives a NO- GO. The Soldier must then be critiqued on that task, given an explanation of his mistakes, and told what to do to correct them. Soldiers will be retrained and retested in accordance with the local SOP.

Evaluation Criteria 4-45. See attached criterion-scoring checklist for each task provided in the test station administrative guidance.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED 4-46. The personnel, equipment, and material in the following list should be considered for all stations, but their use depends on the task to be trained. Additional items, if required, are listed in the Test Administrative Guide for each particular station:

• Site NCOIC (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test. • Station evaluator, SSG or above (one per test station). • Classroom or training area. • Stopwatch

Chapter 4

4-64 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

• Criterion-scoring checklist (one per Soldier). • Desk and chair or clipboard (per station). • Pencils (one per Soldier). • TC 3-09.8 (one per test site).

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 4-47. The evaluator tasked to conduct the ASPT should consider the following elements below during his planning:

THE ASPT 4-48. A “record” ASPT allows a commander to certify proficiency of Soldiers to meet artillery table prerequisites.

DETERMINE THE TEST SITE 4-49. Refer to the station conditions for each station to determine what is needed for that station.

CONSTRUCT A TEST STATION DIAGRAM 4-50. Before rehearsing the test, create a test station diagram. This diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. It will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The diagram should include the following elements: test stations, control station, direction of rotation, movement schedule, and aid station/warm-up tent, if available.

4-51. Figure 4-3 is an example for setting up a (round-robin) test station site for evaluation of the following test stations. Commanders and staffs may use any means necessary to conduct training and prepare the testing site. The following is a guideline for the commander and his staff.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-65

Figure 4-3. Test stations “round-robin” guideline

Determine Resources 4-52. The Master Gunner must determine the resources necessary to support the ASPT. He must consider the support of the test site, as well as the training aids required to conduct the test to standard. The Master Gunner can determine training aids or actual equipment needed. To support the test site, the Master Gunner must determine the amount of support needed to conduct the test. For example, transportation to and from the test site, tents for warm-up and briefings, stopwatches, tables for scoring, chairs, medical support, and Class I support if needed. Once the Master Gunner has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the battalion S-3.

Select Evaluators 4-53. Evaluators should be selected as far in advance as possible. This gives the NCOIC time to select the most qualified personnel available and time to coordinate with other units, if necessary; it also allows the evaluator time to prepare. If the NCOIC must draw on resources from outside his unit, he should request assistance from the Master Gunner. After the evaluators have been selected, the NCOIC will brief them on their duties and responsibilities, the test schedule and location, and the station they will be testing.

Test Evaluators 4-54. Evaluators must be technically proficient in performing all tasks to standard. Each evaluator is tested on all test stations.

Conduct a Rehearsal 4-55. Because of the size and scope of this test, it must be rehearsed before it is administered. This rehearsal will be conducted at the test site with all evaluators present. The NCOIC should check each station to ensure

Chapter 4

4-66 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

that the evaluator is aware of his duties and responsibilities, the station is set up correctly with all training aids and test materials on hand, and testing is conducted in accordance with the Test Administrative Guides.

Conduct the ASPT 4-56. Before the testing, the NCOIC must ensure that the stations are set up and all equipment and training aids are available. He must also ensure that the Soldiers are briefed on safety and the station locations and that the Soldiers are assigned to the test stations. During testing, the NCOIC will spot-check each station to ensure the task standards are being maintained and the evaluators are maintaining a roster of personnel evaluating and annotating the scorecards correctly.

Conduct the AAR for the ASPT 4-57. The battalion Master Gunner should conduct an AAR to help the MLRS crewmembers understand their actions and interactions during the conduct of the ASPT. The AAR should be conducted before the unit commander’s debrief and should consist of a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the MLRS crewmembers to better prepare the commander’s debrief as well as prepare them for the next ASPT.

Prepare Debrief 4-58. Once the test is complete, the Master Gunner will prepare a brief for the commander informing him of the ASPT results. (This information will also be retained for training records.) As soon as the Soldiers complete the training and before anyone leaves the test site, the Soldiers’ scorecards will be collected. The evaluators can provide additional information about a Soldier’s test performance. After all data is collected, they prepare a summarization of the results. Information from test results must be interpreted to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the unit. At a minimum, this report will contain the following data:

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-67

TEST STATIONS Station Task Title M270A1 M142

1 Select a multiple launch Rocket System (MLRS) and a High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS) Firing Position

061-310-3011 061-310-3011

2 Perform Hang Fire Procedures 061-310-8009 061-310-8009 2 Control Hangfire Procedures 061-310-8015 061-310-8015 2 Control Launch Tube Pod Fire

Procedures 061-310-3025 061-310-3025

3 Perform M270A1 Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) and M142 High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS) Enhanced Program Load Unit (EPLU) Functions

061-312-2001 061-312-2001

4 Edit Databases (M270A1 or M142) 061-312-5102 061-312-5102 4 Perform Initialize/Menu

Navigation/Shutdown of the FCS (M270A1 & HIMARS)

061-312-5101 061-312-5101

Chapter 4

4-68 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 1 (All Platforms)

Select a Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) and a High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS) Firing Position

061-310-3011 CONDITIONS: Given a launcher, a crew, a firing area, an M2 compass, and a map of the firing area, FM 3-09.60 and TMs 9-1425-648-13&P, IETM 9-1055-1646-13&P, or IETM 9-1055-647-13&P. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Select a launcher firing position. The selected position must meet all criteria: slope, mask, hide area, defilade signature, distance limits, and azimuth of fire. PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED:

• Coordinate scale. • Declinated M2 compass. • Map.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 15 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at a firing point. Your azimuth of fire is as follows: ___________________. You must successfully determine the azimuth to and measure the maximum immediate crest and determine the distance to the crest. You must also measure and report the azimuth to your left and right limits. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Followed the correct criteria for the firing point. 2. Supervised operations in the launcher area. 3. Supervised transmission of firing point data base. 4. Supervised Masking Clearance. 5. Supervised Masking Azimuth. 6. Supervised Distance to Mask. 7. Ensured Masking Data was entered in the FCS.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-69

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 2 (All Platforms)

PERFORM HANG FIRE PROCEDURES 061-310-8009

CONDITIONS: The firing section is conducting operations and is executing fire missions. Upon firing the weapon, one or more of the Rocket(s) failed to leave the launcher. The “HANGFIRE OCCURRED” message appears on the gunner display unit/fire control panel (GDU/FCP). Enemy situation is probable. The crew will follow all safety guidelines IAW the IETM. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. Environmental protection is a continual process. Always be alert to ways to protect our environment and reduce waste.

STANDARDS: Firing section performed all hangfire procedures IAW IETM, and safely unloaded the weapon without damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

TEST PLANNING TIME:

• Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 30 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 30 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: You are currently located at a firing point. In the process of executing a fire mission, one or more rockets failed to fire. The hang fire indicator on the fire control panel is flashing. NOTE: The continue option was selected during start-up. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Ensured the carrier vehicle VENT FAN switch was set to MED and checked the

DIFFERENTIAL PRESURE GAGE for a positive pressure.

2. Ensured VENT FAN CONTROL OVERRIDE switch on the instrument panel is set to OFF.

3. Ensured the ventilation damper control is set to FIRING position. 4. Ensured all doors, windows, hatches, and louvers were closed. 5. Set the ARM switch down to safe the system after rocket firing stops. 6. Stayed in the firing position unless ordered to move the launcher. 7. Waited 10 minutes.

NOTE: If the cab became uncomfortably hot, all crew members put on their protective masks. When the masks were on, set the launcher ventilation damper to NORMAL.

8. Waited another 20 minutes (for a total of 30 minutes). 9. Waited for further orders, or followed unit SOP to dispose of the LP/C. Kept the

doors, windows, and hatches closed while the launcher was moving to the unload site. Opened only the louvers that must have been open to be able to see to drive the launcher.

10. Unloaded the LP/C with the hangfire rocket or missile. Followed unit SOP or special instructions as required. As soon as the umbilical cable(s) were disconnected, connected the LP/C connector cover(s) (shorting plug(s) to LP/C connector(s).

11. Continued with normal operating procedures after unloading.

Chapter 4

4-70 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 2 (All Platforms)

CONTROL HANGFIRE PROCEDURES 061-310-8015

CONDITIONS: Given a launcher with a simulated hangfire, a crew, applicable TMs, and a unit Standard Operating Procedure.

STANDARDS: Direct hangfire procedures following established procedural steps without causing injury to personnel or damage to equipment.

TEST PLANNING TIME:

• Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 30 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 30 minutes

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Notified Battery Operations Center of Hangfire. 2. Directed hangfire procedures.

a. Verified ventilation system is properly set. b. Remained in the FP unless ordered to move. c. Stowed LM.

3. Downloaded the launch pod container. a. Notified BOC that hangfire procedures were conducted. b. Awaited and followed BOC directions.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-71

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 2 (All Platforms)

CONTROL LAUNCH TUBE POD FIRE PROCEDURES 061-310-3025

CONDITIONS: Given a launcher at the conclusion of a fire mission sequence, crew, fire extinguishers, and applicable IETM's and TM's.

STANDARDS: Perform section chief's duties during a launch tube pod fire. Perform all steps in correct sequence with no omissions.

TEST PLANNING TIME:

• Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 30 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 30 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: You are currently located at a firing point. In the process of executing a fire mission, a launch tube pod fire was detected. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Notify platoon leader and battery of the fire. 2. Determined the action to be taken. 3. Correctly directed the Gunner to select the best reload options. 4. Moved the launcher to a safe location. 5. Directed Gunner to press the Reload PFK. 6. Directed the Gunner to select Reload left or right. 7. Exited cab and secured fire extinguisher. 8. Took CBRN Mask. 9. Went to rear of launcher.

10. Correctly got into position to use the fire extinguisher. 11. Correctly discharged and directed the flow of fire extinguisher toward the base

of flame.

12. Correctly determined the situation. a. Downloaded RP. b. Abandoned launcher and notified platoon leader and battery

Chapter 4

4-72 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 3 (M270A1/HIMARS)

Perform M270A1 Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) and M142 High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS) Enhanced Program Load Unit (EPLU)

Functions 061-312-2001

CONDITIONS: Given a M270A1 or M142 (HIMARS) Launcher with EPLU card.

STANDARDS: Performed software loading procedures and successfully transferred files.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 30 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 35 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: You have determined after startup that you must reprogram and update your weapon files. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Insured power to FCS was turned off. 2. Inserted UPLU card into correct slot. 3. Turned on power. 4. Selected “connect.” 5. Selected “reload MSU.” 6. Powered down FCS. 7. Applied power to FCS. 8. Initialized the system to OPERATIONAL | READY state and verified system

was operational.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-73

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 4 (M270A1 or M142)

EDIT DATABASES (M270A1 or M142) 061-312-5102

CONDITIONS: Given a launcher (M270A1 or M142) in an operational ready status or Fire Control Panel (FCP) trainer, Maintenance Support Device (MSD-FR) and IETM 9-1055-647-13&P or IETM 9-1055-1646-13&P, Location data, Fire Mission data, and MET data.

STANDARDS: Updated Location, Fire Mission, and MET databases in the Fire Control System.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 13 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 18 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure all information, references, and equipment required to perform the tasks are available. Use the performance measures and IETM/TMs to evaluate the Soldier. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Navigated FCS menus and keys. 2. Edited the appropriate data into the fire mission database. 3. Edited the appropriate data into the location database. 4. Edited the appropriate data into the MET database. 5. Edited the appropriate data for polar coordinates. 6. Verified data before it was sent.

Chapter 4

4-74 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 4 (M270A1/HIMARS)

PERFORM INITIALIZE/MENU NAVIGATION/SHUTDOWN OF THE FCS (M270A1 & HIMARS)

061-312-5101

CONDITIONS: Given a Launcher (M270A1 or HIMARS) with gunner’s display unit (GDU) and mass storage unit (MSU), data transfer device (DTD, AN/CYZ-10), all communications equipment, start-up data, MSD-FR and IETM 9-1055-647-13&P or IETM 9-1055-1646-13&P for system initialization.

STANDARDS: Initialized FCS by powering up and downloading operational software to the FCS. Provided operational parameters to the FCS which are used to initialize the improved position navigation unit (IPNU), global positioning system (GPS), and communications systems. Shutdown FCS in a reverse logical order.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 13 minutes • Total time (per Soldier): 18 minutes

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed System Initialization.

a. Initiated process by placing FCS SYSTEM PWR switch in “ON” position. b. Reviewed/entered data in system sub-mode (time of day, Launcher location

data, comms initialization).

c. Performed communications start up. d. Selected Weapon Data. e. Reviewed/Selected Operator Options. f. Performed LDST. g. Loaded GPS Keys.

2. Performed FCS Shutdown. a. Pressed menu bar. b. Selected SYSTEM option. c. Selected CONFIRM option. d. Monitored all CSCI’s as they shutdown on FCP display. e. Placed FCS POWER SWITCH in “OFF” position after the prompt POWER

DOWN THE SYSTEM was displayed.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-75

MLRS TABLES 4-59. The MLRS Tables for the Self-Propelled Launcher Loader (Launcher) are listed in Table 4-9.

Table 4-9. MLRS Section Tables

Table No. Description I Individual Soldier and Leader Tasks (Includes Safety Certification) II Conduct MLRS Firing Section OPAREA Occupation III Prepare HIMARS for Air Movement IV/A Launcher Reload Procedures IV/B Ammunition Upload/Download Procedures V Crew Training (Fire Missions) Dry VI Section Live fire Qualification

MLRS TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL SOLDIER AND LEADER TASKS 4-60. The tasks for Table I include individual and leader tasks required to accurately and safely fire MLRS munitions (see Table 4-10). Leader task steps are included in the collective tasks in DTMS. The training of these tasks is conducted during Sergeant’s Time Training, and the results of this table will assist in the planning and conduct of that training. The leader’s safety certification exams addressed in Chapter 2 of this manual may be required to be supplemented with local range safety procedures and requirements to meet the commander’s safety certification program. Example examination questions may be found at the Master Gunner Web Site on FKN (http://sill-www.army.mil/428thfa/Master_Gunner/index.html) and should be supplemented with questions on unit TACSOP and local regulations.

Table 4-10. MLRS Table I – Basic Skills (Individual)

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-312-1000 Perform Driver’s Duties during M270A1 Reload 1 061-310-8004 Operate the M993 1 061-310-8021 Operate the M993 During a Fire Mission 1 061-310-8022 Operate the M985 and M989A1 1 061-312-5101 Perform Initialization/Menu Navigation/Shutdown of the FCS

(M270A1 & HIMARS) 1

061-312-5106 Perform a Fire Mission (Gunner’s Duties) on M270A1 & HIMARS 2 061-312-5102 Edit Databases (M270A1 or M142) 2 061-312-5101 Perform Initialization/Menu Navigation/Shutdown of the FCS

(M270A1 & HIMARS) 2

061-310-8011 Perform Ground Reconnaissance of a Firing Platoon Area 2 061-312-2000 Perform Gunner’s Duties during M270A1 Reload 2 061-310-3011 Select a Launcher Firing Position 3 061-310-8006 Conduct an MLRS Ammunition Resupply 3 061-312-3000 Perform Section Chief’s Duties during M270A1 Reload 3

Chapter 4

4-76 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PERFORM DRIVER’S DUTIES DURING M270A1 RELOAD 061-312-1000

CONDITIONS: Given a M270A1 Launcher with expended LP/Cs, reload point with LP/Cs, and a crew.

STANDARDS: Perform driver’s duties during launcher reload operations without injury to personnel or damage to equipment IAW IETM 9-1055-647-13&P.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with a resupply position that is as level as is possible (too much slope will cause the pods to be lifted slightly out of position against the hoist carriage), launcher M270A1 with ammunition, reload point with ammunition, and a crew. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell him he will be given a launcher, M270A1 with ammunition; reload point with ammunition, and a crew. He must perform the driver’s duties of a launcher reload IAW the reload procedures in IETM 9-1055-647-13&P.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Positioned the launcher for reload as directed by the Section Chief.

a. Stopped the M270A1 when ordered and as directed by section chief. b. Followed the Section Chief’s hand signals. c. Moved RANGE SELECTOR to NEUTRAL and set handbrake as soon as the

M270A1 was correctly parked.

2. Prepared the launcher for reload. a. Set the Suspension Lockout. b. Signaled the Gunner that launcher is ready for unload. c. Verified the Launcher Interconnect switch was on.

3. Unloaded empty pods from launcher. a. Dismounted the vehicle and moved to rear. b. Unlatched left umbilical cable door. c. Unlatched the power harness door and lowered it out of the way. d. Disconnected all umbilical cables on the left side bay. e. Connected and verified appropriate umbilical cables using the cable

connections table decal inside the armor door.

f. Removed quick release pins from all four skids of the RPs or GMLAs to be loaded.

g. Guided and unhooked hoist hooks from the pod. 4. Loaded replacement pods.

a. Reconnected hoist hooks to RP or GMLA. b. Stood in front and clear of the RP or GMLA. c. Connected the appropriate umbilical cables to each connector. d. Closed the latch armor door and connected the latch safety restraint hook to

the latch handle.

e. Returned to cab to prepared to displace.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-77

OPERATE THE M993 061-310-8004

CONDITIONS: Given a carrier M993, an assistant driver, TM 9-1450-646-10 and a DA Form 5988-E or DA Form 2404.

STANDARDS: Soldier must: (1) correctly perform the “Before” and “After” PMCS procedures, (2) operate the M993 carrier and perform each step without causing injury to personnel or damage to the carrier, and (3) accelerate, steer, and brake, as directed.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the performance measures and references to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

EVALUATION GUIDANCE: Score the Soldier GO if all performance measures are passed. The Soldier will only be scored on their current duty position. Score the Soldier NO-GO if any performance measure is failed. If the Soldier scores NO-GO, show the Soldier what was done wrong and how to do it correctly. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Conducts before operations PMCS. 2. Starts engine. 3. Drove the M993. 4. Shuts down the M993. 5. Conducts after operations PMCS.

OPERATE THE M993 DURING A FIRE MISSION

061-310-8021

CONDITIONS: Given a launcher M270A1, a crew, fire mission, and TM 9-1450-646-10, TM 9-1425-648-13&P or IETM 9-1055-647-13&P.

STANDARDS: Soldier must: (1) park the launcher at the firing point within the recommended tolerances for heading (100 (mils)) and slope (89 (mils)); (2) correctly prepare the cab for firing; and (3) displace the launcher from the firing point. All steps must be performed in the prescribed sequence and with no omissions.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Parks the launcher at the firing point. 2. Prepares the cab for firing. 3. Prepares to displace from the firing point.

Chapter 4

4-78 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

OPERATE THE M985 AND M989A1 061-310-8022

CONDITIONS: Given a HEMTT M985 with a HEMAT M989A1, an assistant driver TM 9-2330-383-14&P.

STANDARDS: Operate the M985 (HEMTT) and M989A1 (HEMAT) without injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Soldier must (1) accelerate, brake & steer as directed; and (2) connect the HEMAT to the HEMTT performing all procedural steps.

1. Starts cold engine and checks all gauges. 2. Operates service brakes. 3. Operates trailer brakes. 4. Operates Transmission range selector by pushing button and moving the

selector to desired position.

5. Operates the Transfer case selector lever. 6. Operates engine brake. 7. Drives vehicle forward. 8. Follows directions from the ground guide. 9. Accelerates, brakes, and steers as required.

10. Parks vehicle and shuts off engine. 11. Connects HEMAT to towing vehicle.

a. Pulls cotter pin and opens pintel on towing vehicle. b. Closes towing vehicle pintel. c. Attaches trailer safety chains to towing vehicle rear shackles and attaches

chains crossed under towbar.

d. Connects inter-vehicular air hoses from trailer to towing vehicle. e. Connects inter-vehicular electrical cable to trailer and towing vehicle.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-79

PERFORM A FIRE MISSION (GUNNER’S DUTIES) ON M270A1 & HIMARS 061-312-5106

CONDITIONS: Given a M270A1 Launcher or HIMARS, in an operational ready status, a crew, an executable fire mission, and IETM 9-1055-647-13&P or IETM 9-1055-1646-13&P.

STANDARDS: Performed a fire mission within the standard of the appropriate IETM. Soldier performed all procedural steps for (1) duties upon receipt of a fire mission; and (2) duties at the firing point.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed gunner’s duties upon receipt of a fire mission.

a. Reviewed the fire mission data. b. Reported fire mission data to the launcher chief. c. Transmitted the WILCO message by pressing the WILCO PF-key.

2. Performed gunner’s duties at the firing point. a. Provided the driver with appropriate data in order to properly park at the

firing point.

b. Verified the launcher interconnect switch is set to the “ON” position. c. Initiated the fire mission processing sequence by pressing the LCHR LAY

PF-key.

d. Monitored the FCP display screen. e. Armed and Fired on command, depending upon the method of fire control

used.

f. Set the ARM-SAFE switch to the SAFE position. g. Stowed the LM on command.

EVALUATION GUIDANCE: Score the Soldier GO if all steps are passed (P). Score the Soldier NO-GO if any step is failed (F). If the Soldier fails any step, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.

EDIT DATABASES (M270A1 OR M142)

061-312-5102

STANDARDS: Updated Location, Fire Mission, and MET databases in the Fire Control System.

EVALUATION GUIDANCE: Score the Soldier GO if all steps are passed (P). Score the Soldier NO-GO if any step is failed (F). If any step is failed, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.

Chapter 4

4-80 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PERFORM INITIALIZATION/MENU NAVIGATION/SHUTDOWNOF THE FCS (M270A1 & HIMARS)

061-312-5101

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed System Initialization.

a. Initiated process by placing FCS SYSTEM PWR switch in “ON” position. b. Reviewed/entered data in system sub-mode (time of day, launcher location

data, comms initialization).

c. Performed communications start up. d. Selected Weapon Data. e. Reviewed/Selected Operator Options. f. Performed LDST. g. Loaded GPS Keys.

2. Performed FCS Shutdown. a. Pressed menu bar. b. Selected SYSTEM option. c. Selected CONFIRM option. d. Monitored all CSCIs as they shutdown on FCP display. e. Placed FCS POWER SWITCH in “OFF” position after the prompt POWER

DOWN THE SYSTEM was displayed.

EVALUATION GUIDANCE: Score the Soldier GO if all performance measures are passed (P). Score the Soldier NO-GO if any performance measure is failed (F). If any performance measure is failed, show the Soldier what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-81

PERFORM GROUND RECONNAISSANCE OF A FIRING PLATOON AREA 061-310-8011

CONDITIONS: Given a mission directive, a vehicle with mounted radio, a map of the area, coordinate scale, PLGR, straight edge, declinated M2 compass and FM 3-09.60, and FM 3-34-170. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Perform ground reconnaissance of a MLRS firing platoon operational area following all procedural steps of this task.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the performance measures to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Conducts map reconnaissance. 2. Conducts ground recon. 3. Prepares track plan. 4. Reconnoiters routes of march. 5. Emplaces RP. 6. Performs advance party procedures. 7. Organizes platoon positions. 8. Maintains security.

Chapter 4

4-82 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PERFORM GUNNER’S DUTIES DURING M270A1 RELOAD 061-312-2000

CONDITIONS: Given a M270A1 Launcher with expended LP/Cs, reload point with LP/Cs, and a crew.

STANDARDS: Perform gunner’s duties during launcher reload operations without injury to personnel or damage to equipment IAW IETM 9-1055-647-13&P.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with a resupply position that is as level as is possible (too much slope will cause the pods to be lifted slightly out of position against the hoist carriage), launcher M270A1 with ammunition, reload point with ammunition, and a crew. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell him he will be given a launcher, M270A1 with ammunition; reload point with ammunition, and a crew. He must perform launcher reload IAW the reload procedures in IETM 9-1055-647-13&P.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Selected the appropriate reload option to position the launcher module (LM). 2. Operated the boom controller.

a. Retrieved BC from the stowage compartment. b. Verified that the BC ENABLE green indicator lamp is ON and set the boom

selector switch to the Both position.

c. Followed Section Chief’s signals for unloading expended pods. d. Pressed and held the “LM CW” or “LM CCW” button on the BC to move the

LM in the direction of the RPs or GMLAs to be loaded.

e. Followed Section Chief’s Signals for uploading new pods. f. Pressed and held the “LM CW” or “LM CCW” button on the BC until access

to the RP hold-down latch handles, umbilical cables and armor door was possible.

g. Stowed the Boom Controller and ensured that the BC storage compartment door was closed and both latches were secured.

3. Stowed the LM. a. Pressed the “STOW PF” key and monitored LM. b. Pressed the “CONFIRM PF” key and monitored LM movement. c. Selected item to EDIT or ENTER to continue Weapons processing.

4. Entered LOT numbers.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-83

SELECT A LAUNCHER FIRING POSITION 061-310-3011

CONDITIONS: Given a launcher, a crew, a firing area, an M2 compass, and a map of the firing area, FM 3-09.60 and TMs 9-1425-648-13&P, IETM 9-1055-1646-13&P, or IETM 9-1055-647-13&P.

STANDARDS: Select a launcher firing position. The selected position must meet all criteria: slope, mask, hide area, defilade signature, distance limits, and azimuth of fire.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the tasks are available. Use the performance measures and references to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Follows the correct criteria for the firing point. 2. Supervises operations in the launcher area. 3. Supervises transmission of firing point data base. 4. Supervises Masking Clearance. 5. Supervises Masking Azimuth. 6. Supervises Distance to Mask. 7. Ensures Masking Data is entered in the FCS.

CONDUCT AN MLRS AMMUNITION RESUPPLY

061-310-8006

CONDITIONS: Given an MLRS ammunition section, necessary maps, mission directive, DA Form 581, FM 3- 09.60, ATP 4-11, TM 9-1425-648-13&P.

STANDARDS: Conduct an MLRS resupply to maintain the organization’s expenditure rate with properly annotated forms and report to proper NCOIC/OIC upon completion of convoy.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the performance measures and references to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepares MLRS vehicles for convoy. 2. Supervises ammunition upload. 3. Reorganizes the convoy. 4. Turns-in DA Form 581 to ALOC.

Chapter 4

4-84 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PERFORM SECTION CHIEF’S DUTIES DURING M270A1 RELOAD 061-312-3000

CONDITIONS: Given a M270A1 Launcher with expended LP/Cs, reload point with LP/Cs, and a crew.

STANDARDS: Perform Section Chief’s duties during launcher reload operations without injury to personnel or damage to equipment IAW IETM 9-1055-647-13&P.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with a resupply position that is as level as is possible (too much slope will cause the pods to be lifted slightly out of position against the hoist carriage), launcher M270A1 with ammunition, reload point with ammunition, and a crew. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell him he will be given a launcher, M270A1 with ammunition; reload point with ammunition, and a crew. He must perform launcher reload IAW the reload procedures in IETM 9-1055-647-13&P.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Directed Driver to the reload point. 2. Exited launcher and ensured reload site was adequate. 3. Inspected RPs or GMLAs.

a. Checked for correct ammo. b. Recorded lot numbers. c. Checked for damaged pods.

4. Positioned the launcher for reload. 5. Unloaded empty pods. 6. Loaded new RPs or GMLAs. 7. Connected RPs or GMLAs. 8. Stowed the LM. 9. Verified that travel locks closed.

10. Ensured Gunner entered the proper pod lot numbers.

MLRS TABLE II: CONDUCT MLRS FIRING SECTION OPAREA OCCUPATION

4-61. Table II is a critical task (see Table 4-11) for MLRS sections that can be trained live or as an STX, on varying terrain, and under varying conditions. MLRS crewmembers must perform the tasks before moving to Table V.

Table 4-11. MLRS Table II – Conduct MLRS Firing Section OPAREA Occupation Task Number Task Reference

06-4-3011 Establish an MLRS Firing Section Operation Area DTMS

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-85

ESTABLISH AN MLRS FIRING SECTION OPERATION AREA 06-4-3011

CONDITIONS: The firing section is conducting combat operations. The section is in a platoon operations area and has received occupation and mission instructions from the platoon leader. Launcher is operational and calibrated, and all startup/PDS/FCS data is current and complete. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The section must move to the section’s firing area, select hide and firing positions IAW FM 3- 09.60, occupy an initial hide area, update the FCS data, transmit the updated database as required, and assume the designated Launcher posture.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Section chief conducted a map reconnaissance of the area to become familiar

with area and spot potential hide/firing locations.

2. Driver drove the Launcher to the section firing area IAW FM 3-09.60, platoon instructions, terrain/weather conditions, and section chief’s instructions.

3. Section chief selected initial hide/firing locations and at least two additional hide/firing locations IAW FM 3-09.60. Unless special considerations apply, the locations should meet the following criteria:

a. Hide areas (HAs) are within 100 meters of firing points and offer good cover and concealment; however, longer distances are acceptable if response times can be kept short.

b. Firing points (FPs) are at least 500 meters from other FPs (800 meters is preferred) and 800 meters from any other position or element except HAs.

c. Slope of firing points is not greater than 89 mils. d. If a firing point is located on a road, the road is perpendicular to the azimuth

of fire for rocket missions or parallel to the azimuth of fire for missile missions.

e. Firing points do not have an immediate mask in the probable direction of fire that will interfere with firing.

f. All locations afford good communications with POC and BOC. 4. Section moved to and occupied initial hide area IAW FM 3-09.60.

a. Section conducted proper tactical movement to the hide area. Section chief directed the driver using proper hand signals.

b. Section chief directed camouflage and position preparation as appropriate. c. Section chief finalized position selections and verified all position data.

5. Gunner updated all data in FCS as appropriate. Section chief verified correct data entry.

6. Gunner transmitted updated FCS position data to the POC/BOC and verified receipt.

7. Section assumed directed Launcher response posture.

Chapter 4

4-86 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

MLRS TABLE III: PREPARE HIMARS FOR AIR MOVEMENT 4-62. The strategic mobility of HIMARS and the resulting high probability of supporting the modular concept of force packaging require crew proficiency in the tasks of preparing the HIMARS for air transport. The actual air-loading of HIMARS must be in accordance with the guidance and control of the USAF load-master supported by the HIMARS crew. The task (see Table 4-12) can be trained as a crew-level STX using a simulated C-130, air-load trainer prior to training on actual aircraft.

Table 4-12. MLRS Table III – Prepare HIMARS for Air Movement

Task Number Task Reference 06-3-3001 Perform Air Movement of the M142 HIMARS DTMS

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE TABLE III (HIMARS)

PERFORM AIR MOVEMENT OF THE M142 HIMARS 06-3-3001

CONDITIONS: The Firing Platoon Leaders receive a movement order from the battery commander that includes air movement. The Platoon Leaders/Platoon Sergeants brief their Platoons and move their Platoons to the airfield. Enemy situation is probable some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The Firing Platoon prepared all section vehicles, equipment, supplies, and personnel for air movement IAW the movement order.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Section Chief positions Launcher for loading:

a. Guides Launcher into position directly behind aircraft loading ramp to insure minimal amount of steering movement.

2. Crew prepares Launcher to be loaded: a. Section chief verifies that the Gunner has purged crypto keys. b. Section chief verifies that the Gunner has entered the coordinates for the

anticipated landing zone into the Fire Control System or Gunner Display Unit (FCS/GDU) and that the system has been properly shut down.

c. Section Chief verifies that the tires have been deflated to the right pressure. d. Section chief verifies that the Driver has set the parking brake and turned the

tires to allow accesses on the driver's side for the lowering plate.

NOTE: The lowering plates should be installed and the tires straightened before air is completely removed. Excessive steering movement may cause tires to separate from rims.

NOTE: These steps are to be performed at the same time on both sides of the vehicle. e. Section chief deflates cab springs. f. Section chief compresses suspension. g. Section chief verifies equipment is stored properly.

3. Crew loads Launcher on aircraft: a. Crew follows all commands from the loadmaster while loading vehicle.

4. Vehicle is transported to new position. 5. Vehicle is removed from aircraft:

a. Section chief and crew follow all commands from the loadmaster while unloading the vehicle.

b. Section chief verifies that communications have been initialized.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-87

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO c. Section chief verifies that the CTIS system has engaged and that all tires have

started to inflate.

NOTE: The vehicle may be driven while tires are inflating; however, it is restricted to first gear and smooth surfaces until after 1 minute of tire inflation has occurred. High idle may be used to decrease pressurization time.

d. Section chief verifies that the FCS/GDU has been initialized. e. Section chief opens Improved Weapons Interface Unit (IWIU) compartment

and observes the automatic Short No Voltage Test (SNVT) results.

6. Section chief verifies that cab recovery has been completed. 7. Section chief decompresses suspension. 8. Section chief inflates cab air springs. 9. Section chief verifies FCS/GDU initialization has been completed:

a. Verifies that the Global Positioning System (GPS) keys have been loaded and that they are verified.

b. Verifies that a Launcher status message has been sent. NOTE: If initialization was not at a Survey Control Point (SCP), the accuracy of the location must be

determined to be within the accuracy requirements of the weapon to be fired. Otherwise, the GPS-aided mode must be achieved before firing.

NOTE: If the location stored in the Mass Storage Unit (MSU) prior to air movement varies by more than 5 km from the location determined by the Position Navigation Unit (PNU) when you attempt to load GPS keys, the gunner will receive the following prompt on the FCP/GDU: (POSITION VIOLATION RECYCLE AND UPDATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS). To respond to this prompt, the gunner must purge crypto keys, input and store new coordinates using a data transfer device (DTD) then shut the FCS completely down and reinitialize beginning with power on. This eliminates the possibility of heading errors that might be introduced by the first alignment that used the location stored on the MSU as its start point. This condition only exists when the stored location varies by more than 5km from the GPS-corrected location.

MLRS TABLE IV/A: LAUNCHER RELOAD PROCEDURES 4-63. The reload task in Table IV/A (see Table 4-13) can be trained as an STX or during the LTX for Tables V/VI. Tables IV/A and /B contain the core combat tasks on launcher and ammunition reload operations and are a gate to Tables V and VI.

Table 4-13. MLRS Table IV/A – Launcher Reload Procedures

Task Number Task Reference 06-4-5036 Conduct Launcher Reload DTMS

Chapter 4

4-88 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDETABLE IV/A (M270A1/M142) CONDUCT LAUNCHER RELOAD

06-4-5036

CONDITIONS: The firing section is conducting operations and has expended all rockets. The Launcher is located on the firing point. The fire control panel/gunner display unit (FCP/GDU) displays EOM MOVE TO RELOAD. Enemy situation is probable. The crew will follow all safety guidelines IAW the IETM. Environmental protection is a continual process. Always be alert to ways to protect our environment and reduce waste. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The firing section performs reload operations within 10 minutes using the M270A1/M142.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO NOTE: The time starts when the Launcher is correctly positioned next to the Rocket Pods/Guided

Missile Launch Assembly (RP/GMLAs) IAW IETM, and ends when the Launcher begins to move off the reload point.

1. Section Chief exits the Launcher and ensures the RP/GMLA(s) are in proper position for loading.

2. Driver stops the Launcher when approaching the RP/GMLA(s). a. Inspects the RP/GMLA(s) for any damage or unsafe conditions that could

prevent safe resupply operations.

3. Section Chief guides the Launcher into position. a. Ensures the M270A1 Launcher is placed 1/3 of a meter and at a 35 degree

angle from the side of the RP/GMLAs. The M142 HIMARS Parks parallel to the RP/GMLA(s), approximately 5 feet beyond and 6 to 12 inches from the RP/GMLA(s).

4. Driver prepares the carrier for reload. CAUTION: Engaging the handbrake/air brake with transmission in gear could damage the transmission.

5. Section Chief directs the Gunner to position the LM for reload WARNING: Except for Soldiers occupying the Launcher cab, Soldiers will not occupy an area within 3 meters of the LM when the LDS is activated, unless required during reload procedures. Soldiers will not occupy an area within 3 meters of the LM anytime it is in motion, regardless if it is moving at Tactical or Maintenance speed. The safety zone for the HIMARS M142 is 4 meters.

NOTE: The driver’s duty during reload in the M142 is to pull security. 6. The firing section downloads the expended RP/GMLA(s).

a. Unlatch RP/GMLAs hold down’s and open connection doors. b. Remove connections from RP/GMLA(s) and reconnect to LM. c. Conduct SNVT test. d. Operate boom controller.

WARNING: Gunner will hold the controller and maintain a 3 meter distance from the LM during the entire reload operation, except when removing or replacing the BC from its storage bracket. Nobody else will be in the 3 meter safety zone while the Gunner is removing or replacing the BC. Once the Gunner has the BC in hand and has stepped out of the 3 meter safety zone, the other crewmembers may step into the safety zone to perform reload procedures.

7. Firing section uploads live RP/GMLA(s). a. Position LM over live RP/GMLA(s). b. Connect hoist hooks to RP/GMLA(s). c. Operate boom controller. d. Conduct SNVT test. e. Remove connections from LM and reconnect to RP/GMLA(s).

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-89

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO f. Close connection doors latch and secure hold downs.

WARNING: Failure to pass the SNVT self test indicates that a hazardous condition exists. If a red NO-GO light exists, conduct a second SNVT test to verify results. If a red NO-GO continues, stop operations and inform FDC. If the results are a GO in all cables, continue sequence. WARNING: Dropping a Rocket Pod Container (RP/C) or Guided Missile Launching Assembly (GMLA) can create a serious flaw in the rocket motor that could cause the rocket or missile to explode or fly erratically. WARNING: The LM shall not be moved in azimuth with either or both booms extended with pods attached (on the ground, hanging, or raised against hoist carriage assembly) except during combat operations.

8. Section Chief directs the Gunner to stow the LM. a. Prepare the Launcher for movement.

WARNING: Before the Gunner presses stow ensure all personnel are beyond the safety zone. Personal injury could occur.

b. Section Chief verifies that the travel locks engage. c. Section Chief verifies that the Gunner has entered the correct lot numbers into

the fire control panel/gunner display unit.

CAUTION: Selecting the incorrect LOT NUMBERS will cause the rocket to miss the target. It is important to select the correct LOT NUMBERS. Selecting the wrong LOT NUMBERS results in the wrong aerodynamic algorithm being used in calculating the fire mission. This will result in the range being calculated either too long or too short.

d. Section Chief directs the Driver to move the Launcher to a designated area.

MLRS TABLE IV/B: AMMUNITION UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 4-64. The reload tasks in Table IV/B (see Table 4-14) can be trained as an STX or during the LTX for Tables V/VI. The commander can certify his ammunition sections upon completion of Table IV/B.

Table 4-14. MLRS Table IV/B – Ammunition Upload/Download Procedures

Task Number Task Reference 06-4-6027 Transport Ammunition (Firing Battery) DTMS 06-4-6031 Transport MLRS Ammunition DTMS 06-4-6030 Establish an MLRS Ammunition Holding Area DTMS

Chapter 4

4-90 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TRANSPORT AMMUNITION (FIRING BATTERY) 06-4-6027

CONDITIONS: The amount and types of ammunition to draw have been provided by the BC. Location of the ammunition supply point (ASP) and ammunition transfer point (ATP) have been provided to section chiefs. Movement orders have been received by section chiefs. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The section safely loaded, stored, and transported ammunition IAW section chief’s guidance, TSOP and applicable TMs. The section chief and crew moved to the designated ATP/ASP and drew and accounted the number of rounds requested on Request for Issue and Turn in Ammunition form (DA Form 581). Ammunition was loaded, secured and transported safely to the battery position area.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The section chief plans movement to the directed ASP/ATP using TLP.

a. Considers route and alternate route. b. Considers actions at danger areas. c. Issues warning order.

2. The section chief inspects ammunition vehicles for serviceability and appropriate safety equipment for the transport of ammunition.

3. The ammunition section conducts tactical road march to ASP/ATP. 4. The ammunition section arrives at the ASP/ATP with properly prepared and

authenticated Request for Issue and turn in Ammunition (DA 581) form.

5. The ammunition section inspects ammunition for serviceability and accountability.

6. The section chief monitors and loads ammunition on vehicles as follows: a. Secures ammunition. b. Segregates ammunition. c. Ensures vehicle payload is not exceeded. d. Loads WP ammunition standing upright (on its base) and secured.

7. The section secures ammunition properly before movement. 8. The section chief plans and conducts road march IAW guidance received. 9. The section chief ensures vehicle gross weights are consistent with the type

surface terrain over which ammunition is transported.

10. The section chief ensures fire extinguishers are present and operable on ammunition vehicles.

11. The section chief ensures accurate weight classification is reflected on vehicle and that bridges are adequate to sustain the loaded weight of the vehicle.

12. The section loads vehicles according to vehicle load plan. 13. Ammunition section returns to battery position area.

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-91

TRANSPORT MLRS AMMUNITION 06-4-6031

CONDITIONS: The battery is conducting operations. The ammunition section has arrived at the battalion ammunition holding area (AHA). The ammunition section has all documentation needed to draw Launch Pod Container/Guided Missile Launch Assembly (LPC/GMLA) and has established communications with the BOC/POC. Enemy situation is probable. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. Environmental protection is a continual process. Always be alert to ways to protect our environment and reduce waste. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The ammunition section delivered the ammunition to the battery Ammunition Holding Area (AHA) or designated firing platoon AHA IAW FM 3-09.60.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Battalion AHA personnel inspect vehicles for:

a. Proper BII and all safety equipment. b. Proper classification signs.

2. Ammunition section draws ammunition. a. Ammunition section submits all documents to AHA personnel. b. Battalion AHA personnel annotate correct lot numbers on the 581.

3. Ammunition section inspects the LPC/GMLAs for: a. Any damage that may cause unsafe firing conditions. b. Correct lot number/serial number. c. Correct amount/type of ammunition.

4. Ammunition section uploads LPC/GMLAs. a. Truck Commander (TC) operates crane. b. Driver guides LPC/GLMAs onto the vehicle. c. Ammunition section ties down LPC/GMLAs.

5. The TC ensures that the vehicle is ready to transport ammunition. a. Ensure that all ammunition is properly tied down. b. Ensure that all BII and equipment are stowed in proper position c. Ensure that all vehicles are posted with the proper signs.

6. The Ammunition section verifies convoy information through movement control.

a. The situation. b. The location of the battery/platoon AHA. c. Security along the route. d. Actions on contact.

7. Ammunition section transports ammunition to designated area(s). a. Keeps constant communication with BOC/POC. b. Notifies BOC/POC when entering the perimeter.

8. Ammunition section receives instructions for download procedures. a. Move to location and download. b. Move to location and keep vehicle loaded.

9. Ammunition Platoon Leader/SGT informs the BOC/POC of the Ammunition status.

Chapter 4

4-92 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ESTABLISH AN MLRS AMMUNITION HOLDING AREA 06-4-6030

CONDITIONS: The unit is conducting combat operations. The ammunition section has drawn ammunition and must hold it for future use. The ammunition may have been sent to firing platoons or it may remain in the battery area. This task must be performed in all environmental conditions. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The ammunition section established, maintained, and defended the Ammunition Holding Area (AHA) and resupplied the platoon(s) with ammunition IAW FM 3-09.60 and unit TSOP.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The ammunition section establishes an AHA as follows:

a. Positions HIMTT/HEMAT/RSV/Ts for rapid entry and exit. b. Establishes or augments defense positions. c. Establishes measures to control access to LPCs. d. Uses camouflage techniques. e. Establishes communications with BOC/POC and ammunition platoon. f. Designates an emergency destruction (ED) team.

2. The ammunition section resupplies launchers in the platoon OPAREA as follows:

a. The ammunition chief coordinates with firing platoon leader/platoon SGT on: (1) Reload point (RL) locations. (2) Routes. (3) The platoon OPAREA traffic plan. (4) The number and type of LPC to be delivered. (5) The method of controlling and coordinating launcher resupply. b. The ammunition chief: (1) Briefs Soldiers on situation. (2) Requests situation update from BOC/POC and monitors and implements

changes as necessary.

c. The ammunition section delivers ammunition to designated launcher RLs IAW guidance.

MLRS TABLE V: TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION 4-65. Table V consists of the task to train and certify an MLRS section on their ability to provide surface-to- surface fires (see Table 4-15). Table V is identical to Table VI, but is conducted in a dry-fire status. Table V can be conducted as an evaluated LTX. Table 4-16 identifies the dry-fire ammunition and fire missions crew/section certification requirements.

Table 4-15. MLRS Table V – Training and Certification

Task Number Task Reference 06-4-5032 Execute an MLRS Fire Mission DTMS

13B/13M Delivery Section Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 4-93

Table 4-16. Dry-Fire Certification Fire Mission and Ammunition Requirements

Event Rocket Fire When Ready (FWR) 0 At My Command (AMC) 0 Time On Target (TOT) 0

EXECUTE AN MLRS FIRE MISSION

06-4-5032

CONDITIONS: The firing platoon is conducting operations, with one launcher in hot status. A fire when ready (FWR) or at my command (AMC) fire mission has been received by the launcher in hot status. The launcher is located 100 meters from a firing point. Enemy situation is probable. The crew will follow all safety guidelines IAW the IETM. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. Environmental protection is a continual process. Always be alert to ways to protect our environment and reduce waste. (FM 3-09.60)

STANDARDS: The firing section moved the launcher to the firing point. The firing section acknowledged and fired either the FWR mission or sent the ready to fire message on the AMC mission within 4 minutes.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Receive the fire mission.

a. Gunner acknowledges the fire mission and reviews the data. 2. Section Chief verifies the fire mission data. 3. Section Chief directs the fire mission. 4. Position the Launcher.

a. Move Launcher to the firing point. NOTE: Positioning the Launcher within 100 mils from the heading is recommended with a maximum

of 240 mils, and with an 89 mil slope recommended with a maximum 266 mils. b. Place the Launcher on the preferred heading. c. Section Chief verifies launcher heading and slope.

5. The firing section prepares to execute the fire mission. a. Driver prepares the cab. b. Gunner lays LM and confirms fire mission data. c. Section Chief visually verifies the LM direction. d. Section Chief Verifies that the cab is secure.

CAUTION: Fire in an RP launch tube, after firing, is always a possibility. A check of each RP for fire should be made after each firing

6. Section Chief directs Gunner to arm and fire when prompted. 7. The firing section prepares to move.

a. Gunner safes the weapon. b. Gunner sends mission fired report c. Section Chief verifies that no tube fires occurred. d. Gunner stows the LM.

WARNING: Hazardous rocket exhaust gasses are present around the Launcher after firing. Do not set the ventilation system to NORMAL until after the Launcher has left the firing position. If you must open a door or hatch, be sure air around the Launcher is safe. (Gas cloud has blown away.) If you should open a door or hatch and your eyes, nose, or throat starts to become irritated, put on your CBRN mask immediately.

8. Section Chief directs the Driver to move the Launcher to a designated area.

Chapter 4

4-94 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

MLRS/HIMARS TABLE VI: QUALIFICATION 4-66. MLRS/HIMARS qualification requires the participation of the battalion commander and staff. Table VI Live Fire is identical to Table V Dry Fire. Table VI qualification of the MLRS/HIMARS launcher crews may be accomplished during a live training event such as a Battery FTX. Table VI is a live fire exercise conducted as multi-echelon training to maximize the training benefit of the limited ammunition available for training. Table 4-17 identifies the fire missions and the ammunition firing section qualification requirements.

Table 4-17. MLRS/HIMARS Table VI – Qualification

Event Rocket Fire When Ready (FWR) 1 At My Command (AMC) 1 Time On Target (TOT) 1

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-1

Chapter 5

13R Radar Section Tables This chapter provides commanders and radar sections a standardized method of training and qualifying the Firefinder Radar Sections assigned to their organizations. It includes training and qualification standards for all weapon location radar sections (WLRSs) (TPQ-36/TPQ- 37/TPQ-48).

INTRODUCTION 5-1. The training strategy for the radar sections of the Fires Brigade (FIB) and BCTs is a progressive, C, W, R strategy that must be integrated into the training plans of both the Fires Battalion and the Maneuver Force. This progressive, gated approach to training assists unit Master Gunners in supporting the events and tasks described in the CATS for the FIB, HBCT, SBCT, and IBCT. The contents of Table I provide the individual tasks to support the routine training of the radar section during Sergeant’s Time. Table II consists of training the LCMR. Tables III and IV provide progressive training on section tasks as they are performed within the unit. Tables V and VI are radar certification (Dry Fire) and qualification (Live Fire) tables and are required semi-annually for the Active Army and annually for the Army National Guard.

5-2. ASPT Stations 1 through 3 and the individual Soldier tasks are to be trained continuously with all assigned systems. Table I consists of individual and leader tasks that can be conducted throughout the training year during Sergeant’s Time by hands-on evaluation. Tables II, III, and IV will train the TPQ-36 and TPQ-37 sections in Establishing Operations, Site Occupation, and Target Acquisition in support of the commander’s METL. Table II identifies tasks required for Preparation, Operations, and March Order procedures for units assigned the LCMR. Table V Section Certification (Dry Fire) must be conducted prior to Table VI Section Qualification (Live Fire).

TRAINING WITH RADAR SECTION TABLES 5-3. Radar training programs should be developed to support the commander’s METL, develop and sustain qualified radar sections, and provide a means to evaluate, certify, and qualify those sections. The tables consist of the ASPT, Individual Training (Table I), Section Training (Tables II–IV), and Certification and Qualification (Tables V–VI).

5-4. The Counterfire NCO and the Master Gunner must ensure that the radar training program— • Certifies and qualifies radar sections to support mortar and Fires Battalion LFXs. • Maintains proficiency and certification of radar sections. • Certifies and qualifies radar sections to support battery/company through BCT collective training

exercises. • Supports the commander’s METL.

SECTION I – ASPT FOR RADAR SECTIONS 5-5. The ASPT evaluates the radar section member’s ability to execute selected individual skills. The tasks listed in this chapter provide the unit commander a means to evaluate the radar section member’s basic proficiency prior to live fire exercises. The ASPT can also be used as a guide for identifying section strengths and weaknesses. ASPT results should be used by the commander, Master Gunner, and radar section leaders when structuring the unit’s gunnery training program.

REQUIREMENTS 5-6. All 13R personnel and any personnel assigned to a radar section (regardless of MOS) will be administered the ASPT. Radar section members are required to pass the ASPT prior to Radar Section Qualification. To pass the ASPT, a Soldier must receive a GO on all stations. If a Soldier fails a task, he must be

Chapter 5

5-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

retrained and retested on that station until he receives a GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare, administer, and evaluate the ASPT.

Note. Evaluators must certify on the ASPT prior to testing.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 5-7. The commander will incorporate risk assessment in planning all aspects of this training. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station in accordance with the unit SOP.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES

Administrative Process 5-8. Before the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test station. When the Soldiers arrive, the evaluator logs the Soldiers on a roster at each station and provides each Soldier with all materials and equipment displayed, as outlined on this section and in the Test Administrative Guide for that station. The evaluator reads the instructions to the Soldier exactly as written in the guide for each station. The evaluator must use the criterion-scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each Soldier’s performance. As each Soldier finishes, the evaluator checks the Soldier’s performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs him of his performance on that task, and directs him either to the next station or to further training.

Administrative Procedures for Soldiers Receiving a NO-GO 5-9. If a Soldier does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion-scoring checklist, he receives a NO-GO. The Soldier must then be critiqued on that task, given an explanation of his mistakes, and told what to do to correct them. Soldiers will be retrained and retested in accordance with the local SOP.

Evaluation Criteria 5-10. See attached criterion-scoring checklist for each task provided in the test station administrative guidance.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED 5-11. The personnel, equipment, and material in the following list should be considered for all stations but their use depends on the task to be trained. Additional items, if required, are listed in the Test Administrative Guide for each particular station:

• Primary evaluator (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test (he may also occupy a test station).

• Station evaluator, SGT or above (one per test station). • Classroom or training area. • Criterion-scoring checklist (one per Soldier). • Desk and chair or clipboard (one per test station). • Pencils (one per Soldier). • TC 3-09.8 (one per test site).

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 5-12. The evaluator tasked to conduct the ASPT should consider the following elements below during his planning:

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-3

The ASPT 5-13. A “record” ASPT allows a commander to certify proficiency of Soldiers to meet artillery table prerequisites.

Determine the Test Site 5-14. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all stations; for example, Station 1, Declinate the M2 or M2A2 Aiming Circle, requires a clear view of surrounding terrain at ranges of 1 km. Refer to the station conditions for each station to determine what is needed for that station.

Construct a Test Station Diagram 5-15. Before rehearsing the test, create a test station diagram. This diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. It will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The diagram should include the following elements: test stations, control station, concurrent/retraining station, direction of rotation, movement schedule, and aid station/warm-up tent, if available. An example test station diagram is depicted in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1. Test station diagram

Determine Resources 5-16. The Master Gunner must determine the resources necessary to support the ASPT. He must consider the support of the test site, as well as the training aids required to conduct the test to standard. The Master Gunner can determine training aids or actual equipment, such as a radar shelter with power for initializing or protractors for determining grid coordinates, by referring to the individual station in this and following chapters. To support the test site, the Master Gunner must determine the amount of support needed to conduct the test; for example, vehicles with drivers, transportation to and from the test site, tents for warm-up or briefings, tables for scoring, chairs, medical support, and Class I support if needed. Once the Master Gunner has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the battalion S-3.

Select Evaluators 5-17. Evaluators should be selected as far in advance as possible. This gives the NCOIC time to select the most qualified personnel available and time to coordinate with other units, if necessary; it also allows the evaluator time to prepare. If the NCOIC must draw on resources from outside his unit, he should request assistance from the Master Gunner. After the evaluators have been selected, the NCOIC will brief them on their duties and responsibilities, the test schedule and location, and the station they will be testing.

Chapter 5

5-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Conduct a Rehearsal 5-18. Because of the size and scope of this test, it must be rehearsed before it is administered. This rehearsal will be conducted at the test site with all evaluators present. The NCOIC should check each station to ensure that the evaluator is aware of his duties and responsibilities, the station is set up correctly with all training aids and test materials on hand, and testing is conducted in accordance with the Test Administrative Guides.

Conduct the ASPT 5-19. Before the testing, the test site manager must ensure that the stations are set up and all equipment and training aids are available. He must also ensure that the Soldiers are briefed on safety and the station locations and that the Soldiers are assigned to the test stations. During testing, the test site manger will spot-check each station to ensure the task standards are being maintained and the evaluators are maintaining a roster of personnel evaluating and annotating the scorecards correctly.

Conduct the AAR for the ASPT 5-20. The battalion Master Gunner should conduct an AAR to help the test site manager understand his actions and interactions during the conduct of the ASPT. The AAR should be conducted before the unit commander’s debrief and should consist of a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the test site manager to better prepare the commander’s debrief as well as prepare him for the next ASPT.

Prepare Debrief 5-21. Once the test is complete, the Master Gunner will prepare a brief for the commander informing him of the ASPT results. (This information will also be retained for training records.) As soon as the Soldiers complete the training and before anyone leaves the test site, the Soldiers’ scorecards will be collected. The evaluators can provide additional information about a Soldier’s test performance. After all data is collected, they prepare a summarization of the results. Information from test results must be interpreted to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the unit. At a minimum, this report will contain the following data:

Test Stations 5-22. Each station consists of a Test Administrative Guide and criterion-scoring checklist as required.

TEST STATIONS Radar Section Tables

1. Map and Aiming Circle Orientation 2. Initialize the Radar 3. Establish Communications

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-5

TEST STATION 1: MAP AND AIMING CIRCLE ORIENTATION

INTRODUCTION: At this station there are six tasks that will be administered to the Soldier. The tasks that must be performed are listed below. They can be administered in any order which best suits the evaluator and environmental considerations. During the evaluation process of the M2 or M2A2 Aiming Circle the evaluator can choose to do the Recovery or March Order of the M2 or M2A2 Aiming Circle as the last task evaluated.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED: • M2 compass • Marking stakes • Aiming circle • 1:50,000-scale map

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 20 minutes • Total time: 25 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: Before the radar section arrives in the selected position area, the evaluator will ensure that a survey control point with an azimuth mark is available within 1,000 meters and that survey data has been determined for the test site for grading purposes.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE RADAR OPERATOR: At this station you will perform 3 M2 Aiming Circle, 2 Map Reading, 1one M2 Compass Tasks. If it becomes apparent to me that you are unable to complete a task, you will receive a NO-GO, get retrained, and then retested after completing this station. You will inform me once you have completed each task. I will then tell you when to begin the next task. All the equipment required to accomplish these three tasks are in front of you. Do you have any questions pertaining to this station? You may begin.

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDESTATION 1 TASK 1

DETERMINE THE GRID COORDINATES OF A POINT USING A MILITARY MAP 071-329-1002

CONDITIONS: Given a standard 1:50,000-scale military map in a field location, a 1:50,000 grid coordinate scale, a pencil, paper, and a point on the map for which coordinates must be determined.

STANDARDS: Determined the six-digit grid coordinates for the point on the map with a 100 meter tolerance. Record the grid coordinates with the correct two-letter 100,000 meter -square identifier.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Give the Soldier a standard 1:50,000-scale military map in a field location, a 1:50,000 grid coordinate scale, a pencil, paper, and a point on a map for which coordinates must be

Task Number Subject 071-329-1002 Determine the Grid Coordinates of a Point Using a Military Map

071-COM-1004 Determine the Elevation of a Point on the Ground Using a Map 061-266-4000 Set Up and Recover the M2 or M2A2 Aiming Circle 061-266-4013 Declinate the M2 or M2A2 Aiming Circle 061-294-1014 Determine Manual Terrain Following Data 061-266-5100 Measure Sight to Crest Using a M2 Compass

Chapter 5

5-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

determined. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to write down the 2-letter 100,000 meter -square identifier and the 6-digit grid coordinates for one point and the 2-letter 100,000 meter -square identifier.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined the six-digit grid coordinates for the point on the map with a

100 meter tolerance.

2. Recorded the grid coordinates with the correct two-letter 100,000 meter -square identifier.

TASK 2

DETERMINE THE ELEVATION OF A POINT ON THE GROUND USING A MAP 071-329-1004

CONDITIONS: As a member of a dismounted squad given a 1:50,000-scale military map and a military protractor. You have been directed to determine the elevation of a point on the map. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Determine the point's elevation to within half the value of the map's contour interval. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with the equipment and/or materials described in the conditions statement. BRIEF THE SOLDIER: Explain what is expected of the Soldier by reviewing the task standards. Stress to the Soldier the importance of observing all cautions, warnings, and dangers to avoid injury to personnel and, if applicable, damage to equipment. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Identified the contour interval and unit of measurement used on the map from the elevation guide.

2. Identified the point on the map. 3. Determined the direction of up elevation and down elevation. 4. Determined the elevation of the identified point.

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-7

STATION 1 TASK 3

SET UP AND RECOVER THE M2 OR M2A2 AIMING CIRCLE 061-266-4000

CONDITIONS: As a radar operator in a field environment, given a complete M2 or M2A2 aiming circle in the stowed position, an orienting station (OS) (ORSTA) or a known point.

STANDARDS: Set up and recover the aiming circle following the procedural steps in FM 6-50. Soldier must (1) Set up the aiming circle; (2) Level the aiming circle; (3) Recover the aiming circle.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available and ready for use. BRIEF SOLDIER: Identify the ORSTA or a known point on the ground to them.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Set up the aiming circle. 2. Leveled the aiming circle. 3. Recovered the aiming circle.

TASK 4

DECLINATE THE M2 OR M2A2 AIMING CIRCLE 061-266-4013

CONDITIONS: As the Platoon Sergeant or Section Chief, given an emplaced aiming circle, a declination station with known data, and FM 6-50.

STANDARDS: Determined when declination is required IAW FM 6-50, declinate the aiming circle to an accuracy of ±2 mils with a surveyed declination station, and record the data on the notation pad.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment and personnel are ready and available. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to declinate the aiming circle IAW FM 6-50.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Declinated the aiming circle.

Chapter 5

5-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

STATION 1 TASK 5

DETERMINE MANUAL TERRAIN FOLLOWING DATA 061-294-1014

CONDITIONS: As a radar operator in a field environment, given a declinated aiming circle. You have been directed to determine manual terrain following data. STANDARDS: Azimuths and vertical mask angles are measured to within 0.5 mils. Accurate to within 2.0 mils.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Leveled aiming circle over near stake? 2. Measured horizontal angles and elevations of screening crest to the nearest

0.5 mils, accurate to within 2.0 mils?

3. Recorded data without error? 4. Provided manual terrain following data to section chief?

TASK 6

MEASURE SIGHT TO CREST USING A M2 COMPASS 061-266-5100

CONDITIONS: Given a M2 compass and designated position area for the howitzer. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: The Soldier determined site to crest by averaging three measurements of the highest crest with the M2 compass.

OTHER INFORMATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to measure sight to crest using the M2 compass. Remind the Soldier to provide this information to the fire direction center. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Held the compass correctly. 2. Read the elevation in mils. 3. Measured the sight to crest three times. 4. Recorded the average measurement.

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-9

TEST STATION 2: INITIALIZE THE RADAR

INTRODUCTION: There are three tasks that must be performed prior to moving to the next station. The tasks that must be performed are listed below. They can be administered in any order that best suits the evaluator and environmental considerations.

Task Number Subject 061-294-5300 Determine Initialization Data

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED • AN/TPQ-36 or -37 (one per station)

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 40 minutes • Total time: 45 minutes

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDESTATION 2

TASK 1 DETERMINE INITIALIZATION DATA

061-294-5300 CONDITIONS: Given a Firefinder Radar position, a map, M2A2 aiming circle, a range pole, an initialization worksheet, and coordinates scale/protractor (GTA 5-2-12). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Determine radar initialization data IAW FM 6-50 and applicable TMs.

TEST PLANNING TIME: None identified.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMEMBER: At this station you will perform determine initialization data, conduct initialization, and evaluate initialization data. If it becomes apparent to me that you are unable to complete a task, you will receive a NO-GO, get retrained, and then retested after completing this station. You will inform me once you have completed each task. I will then tell you when to begin the next task. All the equipment required to accomplish these three tasks are in front of you. Do you have any questions pertaining to this station? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined radar site coordinates? 2. Determined far stake data? 3. Measured manual terrain following data? 4. Completed initialization worksheet?

Chapter 5

5-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

STATION 2 TASK 3

TEST STATION 3: ESTABLISH COMMUNICATIONS

There are three tasks that must be performed in order to achieve a “GO” and move on to the next station. The tasks that must be performed are listed below. They can be administered in any order which best suits the evaluator and environmental considerations.

Task Number Subject 061-275-8003 Operate SINCGARS ASIP 061-276-1011 Perform COMSEC Operations 061-276-1012 Install OE-254/GRC Antenna Group

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED • S-250 Shelter with Communications equipment • ANCD/SKL • OE-254 Antenna • Frequencies

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 40 minutes • Total time: 45 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMEMBER: At this station you will perform operate SINCGARS, COMSEC Operations, and Install OE-254 Antenna. If it becomes apparent to me that you are unable to complete a task, you will receive a NO-GO, get retrained and then retested after completing this station. You will inform me once you have completed each task. I will then tell you when to begin the next task. All the equipment required to accomplish these three tasks are in front of you. Do you have any questions pertaining to this station? You may begin.

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 3

TASK 1 OPERATE SINCGARS ASIP

061-275-8003

CONDITIONS: Given an operational radio set AN/VRC-90F, RT-1523E/F, AN/PYQ-10 (SKL) with frequency hopping (FH) data, TM 11-5820-890-10-6, DA Form 2404/ DA Form 5988-E, and Distant Station.

STANDARDS: Prepare the SINCGARS (ASIP) for operation, perform preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS), and correctly establish communications with a distant station IAW TM 11-5820-890-10-6.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the performance measures and the references to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-11

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared the SINCGARS for Operation. 2. Loaded Single Channel Frequencies into the SINCGARS RT. 3. Performed Voice Communications. 4. Loaded COMSEC/FH Data/Sync Time Using COMSEC Device. 5. Performed PMCS on the AN/VRC-90F and Initiated DA Form 2404. 6. Conducted Frequency Hopping Operations. 7. Conducted Anti-Jamming Actions. 8. Performed Tactical Communications.

STATION 3

TASK 2 PERFORM COMSEC OPERATIONS

061-276-1011

CONDITIONS: Given an operational radio set AN/VRC-90F, RT-1523E/F, TM 11-5810-410-13&P, and AN/PYQ-10 (SKL).

STANDARDS: Prepare the SINCGARS (ASIP) for operation and extract all required information from the signal operating instructions (SOI) within 10 minutes.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared the Simple Key Loader (SKL) for Operation. 2. Extracted Signal Operating Instructions (SOI). 3. Loaded Key material into SINCGARS Radio. 4. Transmitted Database. 5. Conducted Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services. 6. Performed COMSEC Operations.

STATION 3 TASK 3

INSTALL OE-254/GRC ANTENNA 061-276-1012

CONDITIONS: Given an antenna group, OE-254/GRC, frequency modulated (FM) radio set, one assistant and an operational distant station. STANDARDS: Successfully assemble, perform operator's preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), erect and connect to a combat net radio, establish radio communications with a distant station, lower, disassemble, and stow the OE-254 antenna IAW TM 11-5985-357-13. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Chapter 5

5-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed safety procedures. 2. Performed operator’s PMCS and troubleshooting. 3. Assembled the antenna. 4. Raised the antenna (two persons). 5. Connected the antenna to a combat radio. 6. Established communications with a distant station. 7. Lowered the antenna (two persons). 8. Disassembled the antenna. 9. Stowed the antenna.

SECTION II – RADAR TABLES 5-23. The Radar Tables provide a standardized, tabular format to train and evaluate radar section tasks. These task-based tables include individual tasks from the Soldier’s Training Publication (STP), DTMS, and equipment-specific procedures from the TMs.

RADAR TABLE IA: INDIVIDUAL TASKS 5-24. Tables IA and IB include the individual tasks, skills, and common tasks for both the TPQ-36 and TPQ- 37 sections that all Soldiers must be proficient at to survive on the battlefield. These tasks are trained during Sergeant’s Time Training and are the basic building blocks for radar section training. The evaluation of the Soldier on Table IA tasks is a routine part of Sergeant’s Time Training and can be evaluated by senior 13Rs (SSG/SFC) as a gate prior to all other tables.

Table 5-1. Radar Table IA – Individual Tasks

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-294-1026 Emplace the AN/TPQ-36 Firefinder Radar Trailer Group 1 061-294-1028 Emplacement an AN/TPQ-36 Generator Set 1 061-294-5001 Prepare an AN/TPQ-36 Firefinder Radar System Shelter for

Operation 1

061-294-1013 Prepare an AN/TPQ-37 Firefinder Radar System Shelter for Operation

061-294-1010 Emplace the Firefinder Radar Shelter 1 061-294-5123 Start an MEP-816A/B 60kw Main Power Source 1 061-294-5122 Start an MEP-813A 10 kw Main Power Source 1 061-294-5116 Operate Modular Azimuth Positioning System (MAPS) Hybrid 1 061-294-1030 Perform Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)

on an AN/TPQ-36 Firefinder Radar System 1

061-294-5120 Operate the AN/TPQ-36 Firefinder Radar System Using a Remote Control Display Terminal (CDT)

061-294-1009 Operate the Firefinder Radar Set in the Hostile Mode (AN/TPQ- 36 (V)8 or AN/TPQ-37 Digital Upgrade) Using Field Exercise Mode (FEM)

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-13

EMPLACE AN AN/TPQ-36 FIREFINDER RADAR TRAILER GROUP 061-294-1026

CONDITIONS: Working as a Firefinder Radar Operator in a Radar Section, given an FA Radar System in the travel configuration, a site stake (and far stake for systems without MAPS), and at least one assistant.

STANDARDS: The Soldier emplaced the FA Radar Trailer Group IAW FM 3-09.12, TM 11-5840-380-10, and TM 5-6115-642-10.grounding straps properly connected, antenna vent open, and antenna properly positioned for boresighting.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Ensure the operator/assistant instructor is licensed for the prime mover. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Positioned the radar trailer over the site stake so that the plum bob is within

3 inch radius of the site stake?

2. Applied handbrakes to the Antenna Trailer Group. 3. Uncoupled the radar trailer from the prime mover? 4. Connected the system cables and grounding strap? 5. Secured vents in open position? 6. Leveled the radar trailer? 7. Erected the antenna? 8. Positioned antenna for boresight?

EMPLACEMENT OF THE GENERATOR SET

061-294-1028

CONDITIONS: Working as a FireFinder Radar Operator in a Radar Section given a generator set in the travel configuration.

STANDARDS: The Soldier emplaced the AN/TPQ-36 FA Radar Generator Set IAW FM 3-09.12 and TM 11-5840- 380-10.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Laid primary cable correctly. 2. Grounded the generator. 3. Connected Primary Power Cable.

Chapter 5

5-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PREPARE AN AN/TPQ-36 FIREFINDER RADAR SYSTEM SHELTER FOR OPERATION 061-294-5001

CONDITIONS: Given an emplaced AN/TPQ-36 (V)8 Radar system with power applied, printer paper, and a new site map.

STANDARDS: Prepare the shelter for operation IAW procedures outlined in TM 11-5840-380-10.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Loaded paper into line printer? 2. Installed map on paper map display?

a. Combined maps (If necessary)? b. Installed map(s)?

3. Set up operator control station. a. Corrected for Primary OCS (Right Side)? b. Corrected for Backup OCS (Left Side)?

4. Installed hard disk drive in HCU. 5. Adjusted color monitor.

PREPARE AN ANTPQ-37 FIREFINDER RADAR SYSTEM SHELTER FOR

OPERATION 061-294-1013

CONDITIONS: Given a properly emplaced Firefinder Radar w/ Common Front End Software with the power applied, printer paper, new map, and a hard drive. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Prepare the Firefinder radar shelter for operation IAW TM's 11-5840-380-10 and FM 3-09.12.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Loaded paper into printer correctly (if necessary)? 2. Verified TCIM connection and power applied? 3. Installed the hard drive correctly? 4. Turned on the Common Front End (CFE) Computer? 6. Adjusted the displays (if necessary)?. 7. Initialized the computer (bootstrap).

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-15

EMPLACE THE FIREFINDER RADAR SHELTER 061-294-1010

CONDITIONS: Given the firefinder radar shelter in the travel configuration.

STANDARDS: Emplace the firefinder radar shelter IAW (equipment related manual), TM 11-5840-378-10, TM 11- 5840-380-10, TM 11-5840-355-10, or most recent TM for equipment being used.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Positioned the shelter correctly? 2. Connected the system cables and grounding strap? 3. Connected wire lines to the shelter connector panel? 4. Installed radio antennas? 5. Secured all shelter vents in open position? 7. Attached the Environmental Control Unit (ECU) to the shelter (AN/TPQ-37

Digital Upgrade only)?

START AN MEP-816A/B 60kw MAIN POWER SOURCE

061-294-5123 CONDITIONS: Given a Warning Order (WARNO) or BCT/Task Force Operations Order (OPORD), Radar employment Order (RDO), an AN/TPQ-37 (Digital Upgrade) Firefinder Radar system and site map. STANDARDS: Apply power to the AN/TPQ-37 radar so the voltage is 115 or 200 (±10%) as indicated by switch position.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified that all radar circuit breakers and switches are in the correct position? 2. Applied power to AN/TPQ-37 Radar? 3. Checked voltages at the shelter power distribution pane? 4. Adjusted voltages if out of tolerance?

Chapter 5

5-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

START AN MEP-813a 10kw MAIN POWER SOURCE 061-294-5122

CONDITIONS: Working as a FireFinder Radar Operator in a Radar section, given MEP-813A 10kw generator set, basic issue items (BII), and required technical manuals. STANDARDS: The Soldier performed start up procedure so that voltage is 120/208 volts as indicated by the voltmeter and 400 Hz as indicated by the frequency meter. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Equipment properly grounded. 2. Verified that all radar circuit breakers are in the correct position? 3. Applied power to the AN/TPQ-36 radar system? 4. Checked voltages at shelter power distribution panel? 5. Adjusted voltages if out of tolerance?

OPERATE MODULAR AZIMUTH POSITIONING SYSTEM (MAPS) HYBRID

061-294-5116 CONDITIONS: Given a Warning Order (WARNO) or BCT/Task Force Operations Order (OPORD), a Firefinder Radar System with Modular Azimuth Positioning System in the travel configuration over a survey control point (SCP). Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Operate MAPS to ensure accurate position data is displayed on the MAPS radar display unit (RDU).

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Connected the MAPS cables to the prime mover? 2. Installed the RDU? 3. Performed PMCS on the MAPS? 4. Initialized the MAPS? 5. Performed zero velocity updates as needed? 6. Recorded site data from the RDU? 7. Shutdown the MAPS?

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-17

PERFORM PREVENTIVE MAINTENACE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) ON AN AN/TPQ-36 FIREFINDER RADAR SYSTEM

061-294-1030 CONDITIONS: Working as a Radar Systems Specialist in a Field Artillery BN or BDE, given an FA Radar system with materials, tools and required technical manuals.

STANDARDS: Perform operator level PMCS on the Radar systems IAW TM 11-5840-378-10 or TM 11-5840-380- 10.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed routine services. 2. Performed PMCS on shelter. 3. Performed PMCS on generator. 4. Performed PMCS on ATG. 5. Completed DA Form 2404 or 5988E. 6. Notified supervisor of any deficiencies not corrected.

OPERATE AN AN/TPQ-36 FIREFINDER RADAR SYSTEM USING A REMOTE

CONTROL DISPLAY TERMINAL (CDT) 061-294-5120

CONDITIONS: Given an emplaced AN/TPQ-36 (V) 8 Radar system and one assistant.

STANDARDS: Emplace, operate and march order the CDT so that operational control can be maintained within 100 meters.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Emplaced the CDT for remote operations? 2. Operated the radar from the remote CDT? 3. March-ordered the CDT from remote operation?

OPERATE THE FIREFINDER RADAR SET IN THE HOSTILE MODE (AN/TPQ-36 (V)8

OR AN/TPQ-37 DIGITAL UPGRADE) USING FIELD EXERCISE MODE (FEM) 061-294-1009

CONDITIONS: Given a Firefinder Radar system (AN/TPQ-36 (V) 8 or AN/TPQ-37 Digital Upgrade) in training mode.

STANDARDS: Process hostile weapons’ location IAW TM 11-5840-378-10, TM 11-5840-380-10, TM 11-5840- 355-10, or most recent TM for equipment being used.

Chapter 5

5-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Established digital communications. 2. Entered and delete zones correctly. 3. Processed hostile weapons’ location correctly. 4. Operated AN/TPQ-36 radar in extended azimuth mode. 5. Employed radar controls correctly.

RADAR TABLE IB: INDIVIDUAL LEADER TASKS 5-25. Skill-level 2-3 tasks are skills for both the TPQ-36 and TPQ-37 sections that leaders must be proficient at for their section to survive on the battlefield. These are skills that are taught at unit level through cross- training with a 13R who has graduated from the Advanced Leaders Course (ALC) or the Senior Leaders Course (SLC), with assistance from the Master Gunner to help coordinate.

Table 5-2. Radar Table IB – Individual Leader Tasks

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-294-1022 Organize the Emplacement of an AN/TPQ-36 Firefinder Radar

System 3

061-294-1021 Select a Site for the Firefinder Radar Systems 3 061-294-1023 Organize the March Order of an AN/TPQ-36 Firefinder Radar

System 3

061-294-1024 Initiate Operator Maintenance of AN/TPQ-36 Firefinder Radar System and Associated Equipment

ORGANIZE THE EMPLACEMENT OF AN AN/TPQ-36 FIREFINDER RADAR

SYSTEM 061-294-1022

CONDITIONS: Given a Firefinder Radar system in the travel configuration, crew, previously determined site and the requirements to support a new mission.

STANDARDS: Direct the emplacement of the radar system IAW applicable TM.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified the procedures necessary to emplace the Firefinder radar systems? 2. Directed emplacement of the Firefinder radar system?

SELECT A SITE FOR THE FIREFINDER RADAR SYSTEMS

061-294-1021

CONDITIONS: Given a tactical mission (RDO and TA Tab to FASP), a reconnaissance vehicle, required survey equipment, and a general position area.

STANDARDS: Select a site IAW FM 3-09.12 and mission requirements.

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-19

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified technical, tactical and METT-T considerations? 2. Conducted a map reconnaissance? 3. Determined probability of detection? 4. Conducted a ground reconnaissance? 5. Evaluated METT-T considerations?

ORGANIZE THE MARCH ORDER OF AN AN/TPQ-36 FIREFINDER RADAR SYSTEM 061-294-1023

CONDITIONS: Given an operational firefinder Radar system, crew, a previously determined departure route, and requirement to move to a new location.

STANDARDS: Direct the movement of the radar system IAW applicable TM.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Directed march order procedures for the Firefinder Radar? 2. Conducted movement?

INITIATE OPERATOR MAINTENANCE OF AN/TPQ-36 FIREFINDER RADAR

SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 061-294-1024

CONDITIONS: Given an emplaced Firefinder Radar System with section equipment and crew.

STANDARDS: Evaluate the performance of the operator PMCS so that the appropriate TM and procedures are followed and deficiencies are corrected or referred to the appropriate maintenance activity.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified operator PMCS procedures for the Firefinder radar systems and

associated equipment?

2. Evaluated PMCS procedures on the radar system and associated equipment? 3. Analyzed operator’s interpretation of system faults? 4. Evaluated operator corrections of system faults?

Chapter 5

5-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

RADAR TABLE II: LCMR (LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTAR RADAR)

5-26. Table II consists of the skills needed to be proficient on the LCMR (see Table 5-3). LCMR operations are for the crewmembers to understand site requirements in order to correctly emplace the radar system.

LCMR certification is part of the training strategy to ensure that the designated LCMR operators meet the requirements to successfully operate the system in order to ensure mission success. LCMR certification may be conducted during Sergeant’s Time Training or an FTX.

This training allows LCMR operators to sustain their skill set prior to certification. Individual training will be held at the Battalion/Company level. This training will be managed and supervised by the CounterFire NCO in the Fires Brigade or BCT with the assistance of the Master Gunner.

Table 5-3. Radar Table II – LCMR

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-294-5600 Prepare an AN/TPQ-48 Lightweight Counter0Mortar Radar

(LCMR) System Operations 1

061-294-5610 Operate an AN/TPQ-48 Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) System

061-294-5620 March Order an AN/TPQ-48 Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) System

PREPARE AN AN/TPQ-48 LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTAR RADAR SYSTEM

(LCMR) SYSTEM FOR OPERATIONS 061-294-5600

CONDITIONS: Given Radar Deployment Order (RDO), Area of Operation, Military Map, Overlay, access to survey team or GPS, Power source, AN/TPQ-48 Laptop, DTED-1 Data, mission planning software (Falcon View), TB 11-5840-389-10, Operational AN/TPQ-48 radar, vehicle and a requirement to prepare the LCMR for operation from an FA BN or DCORD BDE.

STANDARDS: Prepare the LCMR for operation in accordance with the RDO without damage to the equipment.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Perform Radar Orientation Procedures? 2. Perform Radar Leveling Procedures? 3. Apply Power to the Radar? 4. Position the Radar Weather Cover? 5. Perform Ruggedized-Personal Digital Assistant (R-PDA) Assembly

Procedures?

6. Perform Mission Planning Procedures?

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-21

OPERATE AN AN/TPQ-48 LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTAR RADAR (LCMR) SYSTEM

061-294-5610

CONDITIONS: Given Radar Deployment Order (RDO), Area of Operation, Military Map, Overlay, Power source, vehicle, communications (voice/digital), TB 11-5840-389-10, Operational AN/TPQ-48 radar that has been prepared for operations, and a requirement to operate the LCMR.

STANDARDS: Complete all steps in sequential order of operations on the LCMR within 20 minutes.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared the AN/TPQ-48 LCMR for Operations? 2. Applied Power to the AN/TPQ-48 LCMR? 3. Oriented the Radar using Inertial Navigation System (Unit)

(Recommended)?

4. Oriented the Radar using Scope? 5. Conducted Final Positioning of Weather Cover?

MARCH ORDER AN AN/TPQ-48 LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTAR RADAR

(LCMR) SYSTEM 061-294-5620

CONDITIONS: Given Radar Deployment Order (RDO), Area of Operation, Military Map, Overlay, Power source, AN/TPQ-48 Laptop, Operational AN/TPQ-48 radar, TB 11-5840-389-10, vehicle and a requirement to prepare the LCMR for March order from an FA BN or DCORD.

STANDARDS: March order the LCMR in accordance with the RDO without damage to the equipment.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Disassembled the Wireless Devices. 2. Disassembled the Laptop. 3. Configured LCMR to Transit Configuration. 4. Disassembled the On Vehicle Configuration. 5. Inventoried the Components.

Chapter 5

5-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

RADAR TABLE III: RSOP (RECONNAISSANCE, SELECTION, AND OCCUPATION OF POSITION)

5-27. Table III includes the collective and supporting individual tasks as shown in Table 5-4. This table should include tasks based on unit TSOP such as pre-combat checks and inspections, load plans, PMCS checks, and certification of drivers. These tasks can be conducted in coordination with other elements during FTXs, STXs, or team training.

Table 5-4. Radar Table III – RSOP

Task Number Task Title 06-4-2046 Prepare Radar Equipment for Operations 06-4-2047 Occupy a Radar Site 06-4-2048 Select a Radar Position 06-4-3013 Prepare a Radar System for Movement 06-4-5088 Reconnoiter a Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) Position 06-4-5091 Prepare the Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) for

Movement

PREPARE RADAR EQUIPMENT FOR OPERATIONS 06-4-2046

CONDITIONS: The radar section has been assigned a tactical mission. Reconnaissance and site selection have been completed; the radar equipment is in position and ready for emplacement with a full crew. The survey requirement has been completed. Some iterations of this task should be completed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The Radar is in position and prepared for operations IAW TM 11-5840-355-10-1, TM 11-5840- 378-10, and TM 11-5840-380-10 within the following times: 20 minutes for the Q-36 and 30 minutes for the Q-37. Add 15 minutes for periods of poor visibility.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO NOTE: Start time when the radar is positioned over the near stake. Stop when the radar operator is

ready to observe the assigned sector. Time does not include camouflaging of equipment. 1. Radar section prepares radar generator for operation. 2. Radar section emplaces radar equipment. 3. Senior radar operator (SRO) obtains site data. 4. Radar section applies power to the radar set. 5. The radar section leader verifies the radar initialization data. 6. Radar operator loads operational program. 7. Radar section establishes communications IAW TSOP.

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-23

OCCUPY A RADAR SITE 06-4-2047

CONDITIONS: Section has been assigned a tactical mission. Reconnaissance has been completed, and a radar site has been selected. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The radar section conducts an occupation of the selected site, maintains tactical discipline and conducts position improvement as time permits.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The radar section leader briefs section personnel. 2. The radar section leader initializes modular azimuth positioning system

(MAPS).

3. The radar section leader positions vehicles and equipment. NOTE: Disperse equipment (within cable lengths), or keep equipment close together for survivability

based on METT-TC. 4. Section members maintain tactical discipline. 5. The section maintains communications with supported and parent units. 6. The section improves position as time and situation permit.

SELECT A RADAR POSITION

06-4-2048

CONDITIONS: A general position area and sector of coverage have been received from the supported S-2 or S-3. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: A radar site was selected that allows observation of the assigned sector of search IAW tactical requirements and FM 3-09.12.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The radar section leader (RSL) coordinates the radar position with the supported

unit S-2 and S-3.

2. The radar section leader conducts a map reconnaissance. 3. The radar section leader performs a ground reconnaissance.

Chapter 5

5-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PREPARE A RADAR SYSTEM FOR MOVEMENT 06-4-3013

CONDITIONS: The supported unit S-2 has directed the radar section to move and to occupy a new position. The unit has a Firefinder RADAR and a full crew. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The section prepared the radar equipment for movement IAW TM 11-5840-355-10-1, TM 11-5840- 378-10, and TM 11-5840-380-10. The Q-37 was march ordered within 15 minutes and the Q-36 within 10 minutes.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO NOTE: Start timing when the section is given MARCH ORDER. Stop timing when the section is

ready to depart the position. 1. Section members march order the radar trailer and updates maps. 2. Section members march order the operational control group (OK-398(V) TPQ). 3. Section members march order the power unit. 4. Section members march order the cables and ground rods. 5. Section members observe safety precautions.

NOTE: If PREPARE TO MARCH ORDER was not given, add 15 minutes to the time standard to allow for striking camouflage nets and storing nonessential section equipment.

RECONNOITER A LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTAR RADAR (LCMR) POSITION

06-4-5088 CONDITIONS: The Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) section receives a Radar Deployment Order (RDO). All necessary unit personnel and equipment are available. The section has received guidance on the rules of engagement (ROE), rules of interaction (ROI), and escalation of force (EOF). Coalition forces and noncombatants may be present in the operational environment. Civilians, government agencies, nongovernment organizations, and local and international media may be in the area. Some iterations of this task should be performed under METT-TC conditions that aid or limit performance. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. TASK STANDARDS: The LCMR Section Leader completes the reconnoiter and selects an LCMR position that is in compliance with the RDO.

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO 1. The radar section leader (RSL) receives the Radar Deployment Order (RDO) and

coordinates the radar position with the supported unit S2 and S3.

2. The radar section leader conducts a map reconnaissance by doing the following: a. Analyzes terrain. b. Selects possible routes of approach. c. Selects landmarks from the map that aid in hasty survey and land navigation. 3. The Radar Section Leader designates personnel for the recon element. 4. The Radar Section Leader conducts a ground reconnaissance with the recon element. 5. The Radar Section Leader along with the survey team establish survey control for the

LCMR by doing the following:

a. Establish a near stake and record grid coordinates. b. Establish a far stake and record grid coordinates (the far stake must be located at

least 100 meters or greater from the near stake).

c. Measures the height of the radar when located above the local terrain. Note: The emplacement height above the local terrain should be less than 15 meters. d. Measure distance from the near stake to any obstructions to ensure at least 10

meters of separation.

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-25

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO 6. The Radar Section Leader along with the survey team establish directional control for the

LCMR by doing the following:

a. Measure and record the angle from the near stake to the far stake. b. Measure the mask angle to the screening crest. Note: The mask angle should not exceed 4 degrees or 71 mils so that maximum observation coverage is obtained.

7. The Radar Section Leader selects a radar site.

EMPLACE THE LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTAR RADAR (LCMR) 06-4-5089

CONDITIONS: The Radar section is conducting operations as part of a higher headquarters and has received a Radar Deployment Order (RDO). All necessary unit personnel and equipment are available. Reconnaissance, site selection, and survey requirements have been completed and the section has arrived at the site. The Radar Section Leader directs the section where to emplace the LCMR and gives the order to emplace the LCMR. The section has received guidance on the rules of engagement (ROE), rules of interaction (ROI), and escalation of force (EOF). Coalition forces and noncombatants may be present in the operational environment. Civilians, government agencies, nongovernment organizations, and local and international media may be in the area. Some iterations of this task should be performed under METT-TC conditions that aid or limit performance. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. TASK STANDARDS: The radar section emplaces the Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) system within 20 minutes and IAW FM 3-09.12

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO Start time when the Radar Section Leader gives the order to emplace the LCMR. Stop time when the Operator completes the initialization.

1. The radar section leader directs where to emplace the Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR).

2. Emplace the tripod a. locate the tripod directly over the near stake. b. Adjust the length of each tripod leg until the Bubble Level indicates the tripod is

level.

3. Assemble the LCMR a. Install Top Hat Assembly. b. Install Upper Column Support Rings. c. Weather Cover Placement. d. Mount the Cylinder on the Tripod. e. Install Lower Column Support Rings. f. Install Antenna Columns. g. Install Ground Planes. h. Attach tie down straps. i. Attach Scope Assembly. j. Connect Cross-Over Ethernet Cable to the Cylinder assembly. 4. Perform inital radar orientation and leveling. 5. Apply power to the Cylinder. a. Attach the AC-DC Power Supply b. Connect to Power Source by utilizing one of the following sources: (1) Local Power Grid (2) Generator (3) Vehicle Power (4) Battery Power

Chapter 5

5-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO c. Turn Cylinder power switch to the on position. 6. Perform Mission Planning if not previously executed. 7. Perform Final Radar Leveling and Orientation. 8. Initialize the LCMR 9. Radar Section Leader verifies initialization data.

PREPARE THE LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTAR RADAR (LCMR) FOR

MOVEMENT 06-4-5091

CONDITIONS: The Radar section is conducting operations as part of a higher headquarters and has received a Radar Deployment Order (RDO). All necessary unit personnel and equipment are available. The Radar Section Leader gives the order to "March-Order" the LCMR. The section has received guidance on the rules of engagement (ROE), rules of interaction (ROI), and escalation of force (EOF). Coalition forces and noncombatants may be present in the operational environment. Civilians, government agencies, nongovernment organizations, and local and international media may be in the area. Some iterations of this task should be performed under METT-TC conditions that aid or limit performance. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. TASK STANDARDS: The radar section prepares the Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) system for movement within 10 minutes and IAW FM 3-09.12

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO NOTE: Start time when the Radar Section Leader gives the order to March-Order the LCMR. Stop time when the LCMR components are properly stored and prepared for transport.

1. The Radar Section Leader (RSL) gives the command to "March-Order" the Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR).

2. LCMR Operator Performs shutdown procedures of the Laptop Computer and the Ruggedized-Personal Digital Assistant (R-PDA).

3. Turn the power off at the Cylinder. 4. Disconnect Power cables 5. Disconnect Cross-Over Ethernet Cable. 6. Disassemble the LCMR antenna. 7. Secure the LCMR antenna components, cables, R-PDA, and Laptop in the appropriate

transportation cases.

RADAR TABLE IV: PERFORM RADAR OPERATIONS 5-28. Radar Table IV includes the collective task and supporting individual tasks shown in Table 5-5. These tasks can be conducted in coordination with other elements during FTX, STX, or team training.

Table 5-5. Radar Table IV – Radar Operations

Task Number Task Title 06-4-6033 Perform Unit Maintenance on Radar Equipment 06-4-5086 Observe Friendly Indirect Fires (Radar) 06-4-5087 Perform Surveillance and Locate Targets 06-4-5090 Locate Targets with the Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar

(LCMR)

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-27

PERFORM UNIT MAINTENANCE ON RADAR EQUIPMENT 06-4-6033

CONDITIONS: Given a RADAR section conducting tactical operations. Perform PMCS. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: Perform PMCS in accordance with appropriate TMs and unit SOP, for a given tactical environment.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Radar operators perform operator’s PMCS. 2. Unit level maintenance personnel perform unit- level PMCS. 3. Radar section leader or unit level maintenance personnel coordinate for higher

level maintenance.

4. Operator interprets built in test equipment (BITE) messages. 5. Radar section leader or unit level maintenance personnel troubleshoot system

fault(s).

6. Radar section leader or unit level maintenance personnel prepare documentation for the turn in and/or request for issue of radar parts.

7. Generator mechanic performs unit level PMCS on power unit MEP 112A. 8. Generator mechanic troubleshoots generator system faults.

Observe Friendly Indirect Fires (RADAR)

06-4-5086

CONDITIONS: The radar section is directed to observe a high burst (HB) or mean point of impact (MPI) registration. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The Radar section observed, recorded, and reported the grid and altitude of each round observed.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader Task

1. Radar section receives a request from the FDC to: Observe HB or MPI registration.

*2. Section chief ensures the radar's sector of search will support the friendly fire mission.

3. Radar operator enters the following data in the computer: a. Sub mode type of mission. b. Battery location (easting, northing, and altitude). c. Registration point location (easting, northing, and altitude). d. Maximum ordinate of the trajectory to the nearest meter from the appropriate

tabular firing table (TFT) (maximum ordinate above the gun).

e. Quadrant elevation or fall angle from the TFT (Table G). f. Target number.

4. Radar operator records all data on DA Form 5310-R (DA Form 5310-R may not be required in a digital environment.).

5. After the computer accepts all initial data, the radar operator notifies FDC that the radar is ready to observe and requests SHOT and TIME OF FLIGHT.

6. Radar operator records on the DA Form 5310-R each round fired and reports each grid to the FDC.

*7. Section Chief supervises and reviews all data going into the computer and on

Chapter 5

5-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

the DA Form 5310-R.

Perform Surveillance and Locate Targets 06-4-5087

CONDITIONS: The section has been assigned a tactical mission. An assigned sector of search and cueing guidance and radar zones have been received. The radar is operational and ready to observe. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: Indirect fire weapons were located within the accuracy standard of the radar. Locations were stored and reported IAW commander's guidance and radar zone.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Radar operator inputs search parameters as required.

a. Input minimum or maximum range changes. b. Input search sector azimuth changes as follows: c. Input search sector azimuth changes as follows: Center azimuth, Right sector

limit, Left Sector limit.

d. Input zones as directed. e. Enable commander's target priority as directed.

2. Radar operator turns the transmitter on only when directed (cued). 3. Radar operator processes weapons locations as they are located.

a. Display and make height corrections for weapons locations. (Height corrections are made to within one half a contour interval.)

b. Enter weapons locations into permanent memory storage. c. Transmit weapons locations to supported unit as directed (within 10 seconds

if height is corrected by digital maps, 20 seconds if height is corrected manually, and 60 seconds if height is corrected by voice).

NOTE: Time starts when the alarm sounds. Time stops when supported unit acknowledges transmission of weapons locations.

LOCATE TARGETS WITH THE LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTAR RADAR

(LCMR) 06-4-5087

CONDITIONS: The Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) is emplaced, initialized, and operational. The LCMR section has been assigned a sector of search, updated radar deployment order (RDO), and cueing guidance has been received. All necessary unit personnel and equipment are available. The section has received guidance on the rules of engagement (ROE), rules of interaction (ROI), and escalation of force (EOF). Coalition forces and noncombatants may be present in the operational environment. Civilians, government agencies, nongovernment organizations, and local and international media may be in the area. Some iterations of this task should be performed under METT-TC conditions that aid or limit performance. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. TASK STANDARDS: Radar section locates targets with the Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR). Section transmits, stores, and reports targets IAW commander's guidance and FM 3-09.12.

13R Radar Section Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 5-29

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO 1. LCMR operator inputs the following search data: a. Inputs search sector azimuth changes. b. Inputs zones as directed. 2. Radar Section Leader verifies the following search data is accurately entered: a. verifies search azimuth b. verifies zones are correctly entered and active. 3. LCMR operator selects the radiate button to on only when directed (cued). 4. LCMR operator processes weapons locations as they are located by doing the following: a. Displays the weapon's location b. Reports and Transmits the target locations to the supported unit. c. Saves the points of origin (POOs). d. Synchronizes the points of origin (POOs).

RADAR TABLE V: CERTIFICATION 5-29. Radar Table V, Certification, are requirements for radar sections. Table V is identical to Table VI and can be evaluated using the embedded training capability (Field Exercise Mode [FEM]) on the radar as a gate prior to live fire evaluation during Table VI. Table V contains the core combat task for radar sections, locating targets in the Hostile Fire Mode and Friendly Fire Mode. These tasks can be conducted in coordination with other elements during a CALFEX, command field exercise (CFX), or FTX.

RADAR TABLE VI: QUALIFICATION 5-30. Table VI, Qualification, should evaluate the radar section in both the Friendly Fire and Hostile Fire Modes during artillery and/or mortar live-fire. Table VI may be integrated into a lane training exercise (LTX) or conducted as standalone evaluated STXs. The qualification table for all radar sections is an LFX. The tasks to be evaluated are the tasks in Tables II–IV. The commander may base his recommendation for qualification on the cumulative results of Tables II–VI.

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-1

Chapter 6

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

This chapter provides commanders, FDOs, and fire direction chiefs a standardized method of training and qualifying the fire direction personnel assigned to their organizations. The chapter includes training and qualification standards for all FDC/BOC/POC. The FDC/BOC/POC tables provide a standardized, tabular format to train and evaluate FDC/BOC/POC section tasks. These task-based tables include individual and section tasks and equipment-specific procedures from system TMs.

INTRODUCTION 6-1. The training strategy for the Fire Direction elements at all levels is a progressive, C, W, R strategy that must be integrated into the training plans of both the Fires Brigade and the Maneuver Force. The Fire Direction Tables provide a methodology to train Fires Cells/FDCs and support the events and tasks described in the CATS for the HBCT, SBCT, IBCT, and Fires Brigade.

TRAINING WITH FIRE DIRECTION TABLES 6-2. The tables below provide a progressive approach to training to assist commanders in the assessment of training and the horizontal integration of training across the combined arms team. The tables also provide the means and tasks for C,W,R training for the section chief to use during Sergeant’s Time Training or as a prelude to the evaluation of training. The actual tables are preceded by the evaluation of FDC/BOC/POC personnel on selected tasks that are critical to the success of the mission of the section. These tasks include both individual and collective tasks but must be mastered by all Soldiers in the section. The content of the ASPT and Table I provide the individual and section tasks to support the routine training of sections and crews. Tables II, III, and IV provide section training in Establish and Maintain Operations, Computing Firing Data, and Providing Control of the FDC throughout FDC/BOC/POC Operations. Table V, Certification (Dry Fire), and Table VI, Qualification (Live Fire), culminate the section-qualification process. Certification and Qualification are conducted semi-annually for the Active Army and annually for the Army National Guard. This chapter includes the section/crew tasks from FM 6-40, FM 3-09.60 (FM 6-60), and FM 3-09.70 organized by cannon FDCs and rocket/missile BOC/POC These training programs should be developed to support the commander’s METL, develop and sustain qualified FDC personnel, and provide a means to evaluate, certify, and qualify his unit’s sections.

ASPT FOR FDC/POC/BOC 6-3. The ASPT evaluates the fire direction member’s ability to execute selected fire direction-related skills. The tasks listed in this chapter provide the unit commander a means to evaluate the fire direction member’s basic proficiency before live-fire exercises. The ASPT can also be used as a guide for identifying team strengths and weaknesses. The commander, Master Gunner, and Fire Direction Chief should use ASPT results when structuring the unit’s gunnery training program.

REQUIREMENTS 6-4. All 13D/P personnel and any personnel assigned to a fire direction section will be assessed in the ASPT. Testing personnel are required to pass the ASPT prior to unit’s qualification. To pass the ASPT, the tester must receive a GO in all areas. If the tester fails a task, he must be retrained and retested on that task until he receives a GO. Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each task must be used to prepare, administer, and evaluate the ASPT.

Chapter 6

6-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 6-5. The commander will incorporate risk assessment in planning all aspects of this training. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station in accordance with the unit SOP.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCESS 6-6. A Test Administrative Guide for the sections will be provided by the testers. The evaluator reads the instructions to the Soldier exactly as written in the guide for each task. The evaluator must use the criterion- scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each Soldier’s performance. As each Soldier finishes, the evaluator checks the Soldier’s performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs him of his performance on that task, and directs him either to move to the next task or to further training.

Note. Evaluators must be certified before testing.

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES FOR SOLDIERS RECEIVING A NO-GO 6-7. If a Soldier does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion-scoring checklist, he receives a NO- GO. The Soldier must then be critiqued on that task, given an explanation of his mistakes, and told what to do to correct them. Soldiers will be retrained and retested in accordance with the local SOP.

EVALUATION CRITERIA 6-8. See attached criterion-scoring checklist for each task provided in the test station administrative guidance.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED 6-9. The personnel, equipment, and material in the following list should be considered for all stations, but their use depends on the task to be trained. Additional items, if required, are listed in the Test Administrative Guide for each particular station:

• Primary evaluator (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test (he may also occupy a test section).

• Test evaluator, SGT or above (one per test station). • Classroom or training area. • Stopwatch (one per evaluator). • Criterion-scoring checklist (one per Soldier). • Desk and chair or clipboard (one per test station). • Pencils (one per Soldier). • TC 3-09.8 (one per test site).

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 6-10. The evaluator tasked to conduct the ASPT should consider the following elements below during his planning:

THE ASPT 6-11. A “record” ASPT allows a commander to certify proficiency of Soldiers to meet artillery table prerequisites.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-3

DETERMINE THE TEST SITE 6-12. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all tasks; for example, motor pool, local training area, tactical assembly area, etc. Refer to each task’s conditions to determine what is needed for that particular site.

CONSTRUCT A TEST STATION DIAGRAM 6-13. Before rehearsing the test, create a test station diagram. This diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. The ASPT can be conducted using the “round-robin” example, as the steps do not need to be done in any specific order in order to accomplish the training. The best methodology to complete the “round- robin” would be to organize the Soldiers into three- to four-man teams (number-of-personnel dependent) and allow them to begin at different stations. As the Soldier teams complete all the stations, they would be directed to the control station in order to annotate the training and address any deficiencies. This diagram will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The diagram should include the following elements: test stations, control station, direction of rotation, movement schedule, concurrent/retrain station, and aid station/warm-up tent, if available. See Figure 6-1 (13D/P) for example diagrams.

Figure 6-1. 13D/P test station diagram

DETERMINE RESOURCES 6-14. The Master Gunner must determine the resources necessary to support the ASPT. He must consider the support of the test site, as well as the training aids required to conduct the test to standard. The evaluator can determine training aids or actual equipment, such as a desktop computer, etc., by referring to the individual station in this and following chapters. To support the test site, the NCOIC must determine the amount of support needed to conduct the test; for example, number of vehicles with drivers, transportation to and from the test site, tents for warm-up briefings, stopwatches, tables for scoring, chairs, medical support, and Class I support if needed. Once the NCOIC has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the Master Gunner or battalion S-3.

SELECT EVALUATORS 6-15. Evaluators should be selected as far in advance as possible. This gives the NCOIC time to select the most qualified personnel available and time to coordinate with other units, if necessary; it also allows the evaluator time to prepare. If the Fire Direction Chief must draw on resources from outside his unit, he should request assistance from the Master Gunner. After the evaluators have been selected, the Fire Direction Chief will brief them on their duties and responsibilities, the test schedule and location, and the tasks they will be testing.

CONDUCT A REHEARSAL 6-16. Because of the size and scope of this test, it must be rehearsed before it is administered. This rehearsal

Chapter 6

6-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

will be conducted at the test site with all evaluators present. The primary evaluator should check each area to ensure that the evaluator is aware of his duties and responsibilities, the station is set up correctly with all training aids and test materials on hand, and testing is conducted in accordance with the Test Administrative Guides.

CONDUCT THE ASPT 6-17. Before the testing, the primary evaluator must ensure that their stations are set up and all equipment and training aids are available. He must also ensure that the Soldiers are briefed on safety and the station locations and that the Soldiers are assigned to the test stations. During testing, the NCOIC will spot-check each station to ensure the task standards are being maintained and the evaluators are maintaining a roster of personnel evaluating and annotating the scorecards correctly.

CONDUCT THE AAR FOR THE ASPT 6-18. The Master Gunner should conduct an AAR to help the primary evaluator understand his actions and interactions during the conduct of the ASPT. The AAR should be conducted before the unit commander’s debrief and should consist of a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the Master Gunner to better prepare the commander’s debrief as well as prepare him for the next ASPT.

PREPARE DEBRIEF 6-19. Once the test is complete, the Master Gunner will prepare a brief for the commander informing him of the ASPT results. (This information will also be retained for training records.) As soon as the Soldiers complete the training and before anyone leaves the test site, the Soldiers’ scorecards will be collected. The evaluators can provide additional information about a Soldier’s test performance. After all data is collected, they prepare a summarization of the results. Information from test results must be interpreted to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the unit. At a minimum, this report will contain the following data:

• A roster, by duty position, of each Soldier tested. • The scores of each Soldier tested. • The percentage of Soldiers passing the ASPT. • The percentage of GOs per section. • The percentage of NO-GOs per section. • Assessment of tasks receiving NO-GOs, what caused the NO-GOs • Recommended corrective action.

Table 6-1: Test Stations

13D/13P Fire Direction Tasks for ASPT 1. Initialize the AFATDS 2. Maintain Unit Data in AFATDS 3. Establish AFATDS Communication Configurations 4. Process Meteorological (MET) Data using AFATDS 5. Prepare the AFATDS for Fire Mission Processing

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 1 INITIALIZE THE AFATDS

061-300-5033

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to initialize the AFATDS, digital SOP, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-5

STANDARDS: Initialize AFATDS following the sequence outlined in TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 45 minutes • Total time: 50 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide at the test site all equipment and information stated in the task conditions statement. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at your new battery position area. You have been directed to power up the AFATDS, activate the system, and display the current situation. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1.Initialized the AFATDS in sequence. a. Powered on devices in order. b. Successfully logged into the system. c. Started the AFATDS. d. Restored the database (If required). e. Set the unit identification and unit role (if required). f. Set the system time (if required). g. Activated the system.

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 2 MAINTAIN UNIT DATA IN AFATDS

061-300-5007

CONDITIONS: Given updated unit information, an AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Maintain unit data without error, IAW the mission requirements.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time: 15 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at your new battery position area. Your AFATDS has been activated and you have to update unit data. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Maintained Friendly unit information. 2. Maintained Enemy unit information.

Chapter 6

6-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 3

ESTABLISH AFATDS COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATIONS 061-300-5002

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to establish communication configurations, an AFATDS, a digital SOP, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Establish a planned communications configuration and implement the configuration IAW the digital SOP.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 20 minutes • Total time: 30 minutes

Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Constructed a “planned” communications configuration. 2. Implemented the “planned” communications configuration.

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE

STATION 4

PROCESS METEOROLOGICAL (MET) DATA USING AFATDS 061-300-5184

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to process MET data, an AFATDS, MET information, external Operational Facility (OPFAC), and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Process MET data, without error.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time: 15 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: “You are currently located at your new battery position area. You need to update the current MET message in the AFATDS that was just given to you. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.”

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Requested MET data. 2. Entered MET data. 3. Transmitted MET data

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-7

TEST ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDE STATION 5

PREPARE THE AFATDS FOR FIRE MISSION PROCESSING 061-300-5014

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to prepare the AFATDS for fire mission processing, digital SOP, and TM 11- 7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Prepared the AFATDS for fire mission processing IAW the digital SOP.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Established mission processing preferences. 2. Established clearance of fires criteria. 3. Established mission processing purge criteria.

CONDUCT FDC OPERATOR’S QUALIFICATION TEST 6-20. The operator’s test will be administered to all personnel assigned as the operator of the AFATDS and the fire control sergeant/FDC section chief. At the discretion of the commander, the operator’s test can also be administered to selected members of the section. The operator’s test should be conducted at the battalion level by evaluators who have been certified by the Master Gunner. All tasks must be accomplished with GO ratings to be considered qualified.

Table 6-2. Fire Direction Operator’s Test

Task Number Subject 13D/P Tasks

061-300-5154 Verify Fire Mission Data using AFATDS 13D Tasks

061-280-5005 Compute Manual Safety 061-300-5304 Compute Safety Data using CENTAUR 061-300-5305 Verify CENTAUR Initialization Data 061-280-5006 Compute Manual Muzzle Velocity Variation (WVV)

13P Tasks 061-300-5306 Compute Multiple Launch Rocket System Safety

VERIFY FIRE MISSION DATA USING AFATDS 061-300-5154

CONDITIONS: Given an active fire mission, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Verify the fire mission data in accordance with the Fire Order (FO).

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5 minutes • Total time: 10 minutes

Chapter 6

6-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at your new battery position area. You received an active fire mission. You must verify the fire mission using the AFATDS. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified fire mission data. 2. Verified the fire commands (if required).

COMPUTE MANUAL SAFETY

061-280-5005

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to compute safety, an Executive Officer’s (XO’s) report, range safety card (if required), range regulation, appropriate Tabular Firing Table (TFT), Graphical Firing Table (GFT), Graphical Site Table (GST), FM 6-40, Table C addendum, map of operational area, and ST 6-50-20.

STANDARDS: Compute safety limits, without error, IAW with procedures outlined in FM 6-40.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 20 minutes • Total time: 25 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at your new battery position area and need to construct a safety diagram manually. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Constructed the basic safety diagram. 2. Computed low angle safety data. 3. Updated the safety data after determining a GFT setting. 4. Computed high angle safety. 5. Identified the elements of computation of minimum QE. 6. Computed manual minimum QE. 7. Computed minimum QE using the Rapid Fire Tables (RFT). 8. Determined intervening crest.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-9

COMPUTE SAFETY DATA USING CENTAUR 061-300-5304

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to compute safety data with the CENTAUR, range safety card (if required), XO’s report, range regulations, and TB 11-7025-355-10.

STANDARDS: Compute safety limits, without error.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes • Total time: 15 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at your new battery position area. You have just received the XO’s report. You must enter the required information and compute safety data for your new location. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Input safety area.

a. Fire point information. b. Dog Leg Information.

2. Input safety “T” data. 3. Calculated initial safety data. 4. Updated safety data (as required).

VERIFY CENTAUR INITIALIZATION DATA

061-300-5305

CONDITIONS: Given an initialized CENTAUR, map information, unit information, Muzzle Velocity Variation (MVV) information, weapon information, meteorological (MET) data, target data, and TB 11-7025-355-10.

STANDARDS: Verify the CENTAUR initialization data, without error.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 5 minutes • Total time: 10 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at your new battery position area. You must verify the required information and ensure the initialization data is accurate for this location. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Chapter 6

6-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified map mod. 2. Verified fire unit data. 3. Verified MVV data. 4. Verified MET data. 5. Verified target information.

COMPUTE MANUAL MUZZLE VELOCITY VARIATION (MVV)

061-280-5006 CONDITIONS: Given velocity meter readouts, Tabular Firing Table (TFT), Muzzle Velocity Correction Table (MVCT-1), DA Form 4982-1-R (M90 Velocimeter Worksheet), DA Form 4982-R (Muzzle Velocity Record), starting and ending powder temperature, projectil quare weight, and FM 6-40. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Compute muzzle velocity variation, without error, IAW procedures outlined in FM 6-40.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 20 minutes • Total time: 25 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at your new battery position area. Your AFATDS has been activated and you need to input the most recent history MVVs recorded. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Computed MVV information. 2. Computed subsequent lot inferred calibration (if required).

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-11

COMPUTE MULTIPLE LAUNCH ROCKET SYSTEM SAFETY 061-300-5306

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to compute safety, range safety card (if required), range regulation, map of operational area, FM 3-09.60 and TC 3-09.8.

STANDARDS: Compute safety limits, without error, IAW TC 3-09.8.

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 5 minutes • Test time: 30 minutes • Total time: 35 minutes

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at your new battery position area. “You are preparing to fire live ammunition and have been provided range safety card data and a current MET message. You have been directed to compute safety data, determine safety hazard areas, construct a safety T, and check clearance of intervening crests. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined Surface Danger Zone (SDZ). 2. Developed Safety T. 3. Determined Launcher Danger Area (Area F). 4. Determined Noise Hazard Area (NHA). 5. Completed the SDZ diagram. 6. Determined intervening crest.

FIRE DIRECTION TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL LEADER AND SOLDIER TASKS 6-21. The tasks to be trained in Table I for fire direction personnel depend on many factors, such as—

• The automated fire control system and version software assigned to the organization. • The backup system or procedures required (includes degraded mode procedures). • Cannon or Rocket unit. • The unit TACSOP.

6-22. The evaluation of tasks in FDC Table I is an ongoing process that will routinely be accomplished during Sergeant’s Time Training. The proficiency on Table I tasks are included in the semi-annual (Active Army) and annual (Army National Guard) testing of fire direction personnel as part of the commander’s certification process. Appendix C contains two example tests covering 13D and 13P section certification exams. The Fire Direction Chief will have overall responsibility for safeguarding and administrating the written test. More example questions are available on the Fires Knowledge Network Master Gunner Web Site at http://sill- www.army.mil/428thfa/Master_Gunner/index.html.

Chapter 6

6-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 6-3. Fire Direction Table I – Individual Tasks 13D and 13P

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-300-5181 Load Digital Maps on AFATDS 1 061-275-8004 Operate SINCGARS Advanced System Improvement Program

(ASIP) with VIC-3 1

*061-280-5000 Prepare to Process Fire Mission in Degraded Mode (Manual) 1 061-300-5183 Process Survey Control Point Information Using AFATDS 1

071-COM-1002 Determine the Grid Coordinates of a Point on a Military Map 1 071-329-1004 Determine the Elevation of a Point on the Ground Using a Map 1 071-000-0005 Prepare a Range Card for a Machine Gun 1 081-831-0101 Request Medical Evacuation 2

* Performed by 13D personnel only

LOAD DIGITAL MAPS ON AFATDS 061-300-5181

CONDITIONS: Given a digital map set, an AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Display digital map set.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Loaded digital map set. 2. Displayed selected digital map.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-13

OPERATE SINCGARS ADVANCED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM (ASIP) WITH VIC-3

061-275-8004 CONDITIONS Given an operational radio set AN/VRC-90F, RT-1523E/F, AN/PYQ-10 (SKL), TM 11-5820-890- 10-6, and DA Form 2404 or ULLS equivalent. STANDARDS: You must enter a radio net, send a message, and leave a radio net using the proper call signs, call sign sequence, prowords, phonetic alphabet and numerals with 100 percent accuracy EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the performance measures and the references to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Performed Voice Communications. 2. Prepared the SINCGARS for Operation.

a. Defined Terms and Definitions. b. Identified Controls and Indicators. c. Identified Characteristics and Components. d. Conducted Start-Up Procedures.

3. Operated Simple Key Loader (SKL). a. Identified Characteristics and Components. b. Prepared the Simple Key Loader for Operation. c. Loaded Single Key. d. Loaded Equipment. e. Loaded Platform

4. Performed Basic Operator Maintenance on a SINCGARS Radio Set. 5. Recognized Electronic Attack and Implemented Electronic Protection. 6. Performed Tactical Communications.

PREPARE TO PROCESS FIRE MISSION IN DEGRADED MODE (MANUAL)

061-280-5000

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to process fire missions in degraded mode, plotting equipment, known data, appropriate Graphical Firing Table (GFT) with GFT settings, Tabular Firing Table (TFT), Graphical Site Table (GST), and FM 6-40.

STANDARDS: Prepare to process fire missions in the degraded mode within specified tolerances in FM 6-40.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Constructed the firing chart 2. Determined and announced chart data 3. Determined basic firing data 4. Applied GFT settings 5. Determined site

Chapter 6

6-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PROCESS SURVEY CONTROL POINT INFORMATION USING AFATDS 061-300-5183

CONDITIONS: Given survey control point (SCP) information and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Process SCP information, without error.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Processed SCP information.

DETERMINE THE GRID COORDINATES OF A POINT ON A MILITARY MAP

071-COM-1002 CONDITIONS: You are a member of a squad or team in a field environment and have been directed to identify the grid coordinates of a point on a map. You have a 1:50,000 scale military map, a coordinate scale and protractor or plotting scale, a pencil, and paper. You have been shown the point on the map. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Determine the coordinates of the grid square, determine grid coordinates of a point with and without a coordinate scale and protractor or plotting scale. Identify the100,000 meter square identifier to determine grid coordinate. EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Give the Soldier a standard 1:50,000-scale military map in a field location, a 1:50,000 grid coordinate scale, a pencil, paper, and a point on a map for which coordinates must be determined. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to write down the 2-letter 100,000-meter-square identifier and the 6- digit grid coordinates for 1 point and the 2-letter 100,000-meter-square identifier.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined the coordinates of the grid square. 2. Determined point grid coordinates without a coordinate scale and

protractor or plotting scale.

3. Determined point grid coordinates with coordinate scale and protractor or plotting scale.

4. Added the two letter 100,000 meter square identifier to the determined grid coordinate.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-15

DETERMINE THE ELEVATION OF A POINT ON THE GROUND USING A MAP 071-329-1004

STANDARDS: Determined the elevation of the designated point to within half the value of the contour interval.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier with a 1:50,000 scale military map, a designated point on the map labeled “A” and a pencil. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to determine the elevation of the point that is labeled “A” on the map.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified the contour interval and unit of measurement used on the map

from the elevation guide.

2. Identified the point on the map. 3. Determined the direction of up elevation and down elevation. 4. Determined the elevation of the identified point.

PREPARE A RANGE CARD FOR A MACHINE GUN

071-000-0005

CONDITIONS: During daylight, in a defensive fighting position, given a tripod-mounted machine gun with a traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism; an assigned primary sector of fire with recognizable targets (either an FPL [final protective line] or PDF [principal direction of fire]); and a secondary sector of fire with recognizable targets; blank standard range cards DA Form 5517-R; a pencil; a lensatic compass; and a map of your assigned sector of fire.

STANDARDS: Prepared a range card for your position in duplicate. Sketched in the terrain in your assigned sector of fire. Located and sketched in magnetic north, using the appropriate symbol. Sketched in sector limits, the gun symbol, a FPL or PDF, and dead space. In the DATA SECTION wrote in the weapon, the unit, and other data. Sketched in terrain features that offer likely targets and numbered them in priority. Recorded the range and direction to and the elevation and description of each target.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Provide the Soldier all the equipment needed to prepare a range card: pencil, paper, a stationary firing position, sector of fire, and target reference point designated. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to prepare only one copy of the range card for training purposes.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared the range card. 2. Used the T&E mechanism, determined the direction, elevation, and range. 3. Used the T&E mechanism to determine data for targets, then recorded it on the

range card.

Chapter 6

6-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

REQUEST MEDICAL EVACUATION 081-831-0101

CONDITIONS: You have a casualty requiring medical evacuation and a patient pickup site. Necessary equipment and materials: operational communications equipment, medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) request format, a standard scale military map, a grid coordinate scale, and unit signal operation instructions (SOI).

STANDARDS: Transmitted a MEDEVAC request, providing all necessary information within 25 seconds. Transmitted, as a minimum, line numbers 1 through 5 during the initial contact with the evacuation unit. Transmitted lines 6 through 9 while the aircraft or vehicle was en route, if not included during initial contact.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Evaluate this task during a training exercise involving a MEDEVAC aircraft or vehicle, or simulate it by creating a scenario and providing the information as the Soldier requests it. You or an assistant will act as the radio contact at the evacuation unit during “transmission” of the request. Give a copy of the MEDEVAC request format to the Soldier. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Collected all information needed for the MEDEVAC request line items 1

through 9.

NOTE: Wartime procedures for line items 6 and 9 will be used. 2. Recorded the information using authorized brevity codes. 3. Transmitted the MEDEVAC request within 25 seconds. 4. States the purpose of the radio message in clear text. 5. Transmits the MEDEVAC request information.

NOTE: Line numbers 1 through 5 of the request must always be transmitted during initial contact with the evacuation unit. Lines 6 through 9 may be transmitted while the aircraft or vehicle is in route.

6. Keeps the radio on and listens for additional instructions or contact from the evacuation unit.

7. Perform step 5 within 25 seconds.

FIRE DIRECTION TABLE II: ESTABLISH OPERATIONS 6-22. The tasks trained in Table II for fire direction personnel are for operations of all systems (Towed, Mechanized, and MLRS) and are to be trained and evaluated as a section.

6-23. The evaluation of tasks in FDC Table II is an ongoing process that will routinely be accomplished during Sergeant’s Time Training or during an FTX or CPX. The proficiency on Table II tasks should be included in the testing of fire direction personnel as part of the commander’s safety certification process.

Table 6-4. Task Reference

Task Number Task Title Reference 11-2-0302 Establish a Single Channel Voice Radio Net UTL-DTMS 06-2-1063 Establish an Operations Center DTMS

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-17

Table 6-5. Fire Direction Table II – Establish Operations

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-276-1012 Install OE-254/GRC Antenna Group 1 061-300-5000 Connect the AFATDS Cables 1 061-300-5003 Prepare the AFATDS Printer 1 061-300-5010 Configure Message Setup in AFATDS 1 061-300-5012 Set Data Distribution in AFATDS 1 061-300-5013 Input Commander’s Guidance into AFATDS 1 061-300-5018 Verify an Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System

(AFATDS) Database 3

061-300-5035 Update Map Settings in AFATDS 1 061-300-5137 Perform Functions of the System Administrator in AFATDS 4 061-300-5140 Perform Preplanned Air Support Operations Using AFATDS 2

(NOTE: Supporting Individual Task that support collective task).

ESTABLISH A SINGLE CHANNEL VOICE RADIO NET 11-2-0302

CONDITIONS: The element is tactically deployed and must establish the communications networks. Operators were briefed and issued SOI/SSI extracts, numerical cipher authenticated system, operations codes, and brevity lists. Situational hazards such as NBC conditions; OPFOR, EW, and directional finding ability exists. General condition applies. (See Chapter 5, paragraph 5-4.) Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: Operators establish and enter a radio net no later than the time prescribed in the OPLAN/OPORD. The net is not compromised. Time required to complete this task increases in MOPP4.

Chapter 6

6-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TASK STEPS AND PERFORMANCE MEASURES GO NO-GO a. Use secure COMSEC equipment if available (TSEC/KY-38 or TSEC/KY-57). b. Load appropriate key variables using KYK-13 or KYX-15. c. Use only approved radiotelephone procedures as required by the SOI/SSI. d. Encrypt and decrypt grid coordinates using the SOI/SSI (not necessary in secure

voice operation.)

e. Keep the length and number of transmissions to a minimum (not more than 20 seconds per transmission).

f. Use the lowest power setting required to communicate with desired stations. g. Use correct call signs and frequencies. h. Observe periods of radio listening silence. i. Adhere to net discipline.

ESTABLISH AN OPERATIONS CENTER

06-2-1063

CONDITIONS: The battery/platoon has occupied a position area. Current operation orders (OPORDs), field artillery support plan, and commander’s guidance are available. Some iterations of this task can be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The BOC/POC/FDC personnel processed calls for fire utilizing available ABCS. BOC/POC/FDC personnel maintained current weapon, ammunition, and situation information IAW unit TSOP and applicable FMs and TMs.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The BOC/POC/FDC establishes and maintains communications (voice and

digital) as follows: +

a. Operates FM secure radio equipment to facilitate best transmission and reception attainable.

b. Installs and maintains range enhancing antennas. c. Uses remote radio setting IAW TSOP. d. Conducts voice/digital communications check with supported and

supporting unit.

2. The BOC/POC/FDC initializes their ABCS systems. 3. The FDC establishes and maintains the ABCS data base as follows:

NOTE: Current OPORD, OPLANs, and commander’s guidance are available. Does steps a through d. a. Inputs map modification. b. Inputs and posts battlefield geometry. c. Inputs zone of action data. d. Requests location and status data from the firing elements to include the

following:

(1) Weapons status and Battery/platoon center. (2) Firing points. (3) Survey control point locations. (4) Hide location. (MLRS only) (5) Ammunition storage sites/Rearm points. (MLRS only) (6) Ammunition Data. (7) Muzzle velocity information. (cannon only) e. Reviews and enters observer locations. (cannon only) f. Transmits automatically generated messages to higher HQ.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-19

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO g. Checks MET data. h. Executes MET data. i. Ensures that down range masks are entered in the database. j. Verifies operational data inputted.

4. The BOC/POC/FDC conducts voice/digital communications check with supported and supporting unit.

5. The BOC/POC/FDC prepares and updates situation maps, fire mission logs, overlays, and firing capability charts to include the following:

a. Establishes a situation map with maneuver control and fire support coordination measures plotted.

b. Updates situation map continually as the situation develops. c. Seeks information from higher HQ to keep the map current. d. Maintains locations of friendly units. e. Maintains fire mission log. f. Maintains and updates firing capability charts. g. Prepares and updates target overlay. h. Maintains and updates battlefield geometry plots. i. Maintains ammunition status. j. Prepare and update current safety data.

6. BOC/POC/FDC leaders conduct the necessary quality control (QC) checks to verify that all automation/communications equipment is properly set up and ready for operation.

7. The BOC/POC personnel coordinate and control logistical operations IAW commanders guidance as follows:

a. Receive and process requests from subordinate elements. b. Coordinate with higher HQ to process logistic support. c. Brief and dispatch logistical elements. d. Provide higher HQ logistic with status reports IAW TSOP.

8. The BOC/POC personnel receive/disseminate tactical information from higher HQ and subordinate elements IAW commander’s guidance and TSOP.

9. The BOC/POC/FDC performs operator and organizational maintenance on assigned equipment IAW TMs.

INSTALL OE-254/GRC ANTENNA

061-276-1012

Chapter 6

6-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Performance Measures GO NO-GO

CONNECT THE AFATDS CABLES

061-300-5000

CONDITIONS: Given an un-cabled AFATDS, printer, communication equipment, appropriate cables, and TM 11- 7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Connect the AFATDS cables without causing damage to the equipment.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Connected the AFATDS cables.

PREPARE THE AFATDS PRINTER

061-300-5003

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to prepare the AFATDS printer, an AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Prepare the AFATDS printer IAW TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Installed the printer. 2. Configured the printer.

CONFIGURE MESSAGE SETUP IN AFATDS

061-300-5010

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to configure message setup, an AFATDS, digital SOP, and TM 11-7025-297- 10-1.

STANDARDS: Configure message setup, without error, IAW the digital SOP.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Configured message setup.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-21

SET DATA DISTRIBUTION IN AFATDS 061-300-5012

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to disseminate information to other units using AFATDS, digital SOP, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Set data distribution IAW the digital SOP.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Created a Distribution List. 2. Set the distribution criteria.

INPUT COMMANDER’S GUIDANCE INTO AFATDS

061-300-5013

CONDITIONS: Given commander’s guidance, digital SOP, an AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Input commander’s guidance, IAW the commander’s guidance and the digital SOP, without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Input Commander’s Guidance.

VERIFY AN ADVANCED FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICAL DATA SYSTEM (AFATDS)

DATABASE 061-300-5018

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to verify the preparation of the AFATDS, digital SOP, situational data, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Verify the AFATDS IAW mission requirement.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified software version. 2. Verified initialization data. 3. Verified map settings. 4. Verified communications data. 5. Verified geometry data. 6. Verified unit data. 7. Verified MVV data (if required). 8. Verified data distribution criteria. 9. Verified commander’s guidance.

10. Verified MET data. 11. Verified survey control point data. 12. Verified trigger events. 13. Verified fire mission processing preferences.

Chapter 6

6-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

UPDATE MAP SETTINGS IN AFATDS 061-300-5035

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to update map settings, updated map information, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Update map settings IAW the mission requirements without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Updated map mod information. 2. Entered map center location. 3. Set map view. 4. Managed overlays. 5. Managed map filters.

PERFORM FUNCTIONS OF THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR IN AFATDS

061-300-5137 CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to perform the duties of the system administrator, AFATDS, and TM 11- 7025-297-10-1. STANDARDS: Perform System Administrator Functions IAW mission requirements, without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Managed the MUL. 2. Established Client/User administration accounts. 3. Managed the LMM. 4. Managed the Event Log. 5. Reviewed the Disk Utilization. 6. Managed Target Accumulation. 7. Managed the Timeline. 8. Managed the Record of Fire. 9. Performed Emergency Purge.

PERFORM PREPLANNED AIR SUPPORT OPERATIONS USING AFATDS

061-300-5140 CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to perform preplanned air support operations, AFATDS, preplanned air support information, subordinate and higher echelon OPFACs and TM 11-7025-297-10-1. STANDARDS: Perform Preplanned Air Support Operations without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Created the Air Support List (ASL). 2. Nominated targets for inclusion in the ASL. 3. Maintained target data on the ASL. 4. Incorporated subordinate unit preplanned air requests into ASL. 5. Performed target duplication checks. 6. Transmitted the ASL. 7. Updated ASRs after transmission of the ASL (as required). 8. Extracted Air Tasking Order (ATO) Confirmation. 9. Deleted ASL(s) and ATO(s) when no longer valid.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-23

FIRE DIRECTION TABLE III: COMPUTE FIRING DATA 6-24. Table III includes the core tasks for the fire direction elements to compute firing data, also known as fire mission processing. Our mission is to provide the supporting fires necessary to assist maneuver forces in the successful completion of their objectives. The procedures involved with fire mission processing vary according to the type of mission to be fired. Proper use of the fire direction tools will provide the fastest, most effective means of fire mission processing on the modern battlefield. The fire direction section must know and understand these procedures to provide the optimum means of delivery of fires in support of the maneuver forces.

6-25. This table requires the response and input from launcher/howitzers and battalion FDC or an active simulation such as SISTIM (Simulator/Stimulator). The focus of the tasks in this table are on the firing data computation and includes all types of fire missions, methods of control, adherence to time standards, and computation accuracies. The FDC chief has overall responsibility for administrating and conducting training based on Tables I–III, the METL, and the unit’s TACSOP. The training is an ongoing process that can be conducted during weekly Sergeant’s Time Training, Digital Sustainment Training, field exercises, and other opportunity training. The Fire Direction Chief will have overall responsibility for evaluating the unit’s training and making recommendations to the commander based on his observations of each section’s proficiency. The goal of Table III is to have the fire direction section capable of receiving a fire mission, process it quickly and accurately, send it to the firing unit, and process the mission-fired report. The fire direction section must be proficient in fire mission processing as they advance towards certification and live fire.

Table 6-6. Fire Direction Table III – Compute Firing Data Task Number Task Title Reference

06-2-5424 Process a Fire Mission DTMS 06-1-5016 Perform a Registration DTMS

Task Number Task Title Skill Level NOTE: Tasks 061-280-5000 through 061-280-5004 are for 13D only.

061-280-5000 Prepare to Process Fire Mission in Degraded Mode (Manual) 1 061-280-5001 Compute Fire Mission in Degraded (Manual) Mode 2 061-280-5002 Compute Special Fire Mission in Degraded (Manual) Mode 2 061-280-5003 Verify Preparation of Fire Mission Processing in Degraded (Manual)

Mode 3

061-280-5004 Verify Fire Mission Processing in Degraded (Manual) Mode 2 061-300-5015 Process Target Information Using AFATDS 1 061-300-5045 Operate the Munitions Calculator in AFATDS 1 061-300-5046 Perform Target List Search in AFATDS 1 061-300-5099 Verify a Fire Plan in an Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System

(AFATDS) 3

061-300-5154 Verify Fire Mission Data Using AFATDS 3 061-300-5300 Determine Rules for a Trigger Event 3 061-300-5301 Maintain Target List Using AFATDS 3 061-300-5307 Maintain Limited/Protected Area (L/PA) in AFATDS 3 061-300-5401 Develop Fire Support (FS) Plans Using AFATDS 4 061-300-4003 Verify Preplanned Air Support Operations in an Advanced Field Artillery

tactical Data System (AFATDS) 3

061-300-5035 Update Map Settings in AFATDS 1 Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-300-5047 Process a Received Fire Support Munitions Restriction Guidance Using

AFATDS 1

061-300-5140 Perform Preplanned Air Support Operations Using AFATDS 2 061-300-5185 Process a Fire Plan Using AFATDS 1

NOTE: Supporting Individual Task that support collective task

Chapter 6

6-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PROCESS A FIRE MISSION 06-2-5424

CONDITIONS: The battery is conducting combat operations. The ABCS system is available and operational. Target attack criteria and Commander’s guidance have been received. Schedule of Fires, Targets of Opportunity, and Call-For-Fires are being received. Enemy situation is probable. Environmental protection is a continual process. Always be alert to ways to protect our environment and reduce waste. Some iterations of this task can be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The BOC/POC/FDC controls and coordinates fire missions IAW commander's guidance, TSOP and applicable FMs.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. BOC/POC/FDC receives or manually inputs fire mission. 2. BOC/POC/FDC reviews the fire mission. 3. BOC/POC/FDC executes the CFF, reviews the tactical solution, and transmits

the mission to the selected firing element.

4. BOC/POC/FDC tracks the mission to ensure the firing element receives the mission and the firing element sends the mission status message.

5. BOC/POC/FDC ensures the firing element has the correct time for TOT/TTF type fire control.

6. BOC/POC/FDC issues the command to fire if the mission is “at my command” and if the BOC/POC/FDC is the originating source.

7. BOC/POC/FDC reassigns the mission IAW unit TSOP if the firing element selected is unable to comply.

8. BOC/POC/FDC analyzes any capabilities mission received and informs the controlling HQ of the status of capabilities missions.

9. BOC/FDC ensures the POCs are kept informed of the need for any special Munition Weapon Descriptor files required by the firing element to fire a special munition.

10. BOC/POC/FDC executes mission fired report when received from the firing element.

11. The POC monitors all fire missions and acts as a relay when needed because of poor communications.

PERFORM A REGISTRATION 06-1-5016

CONDITIONS: The battalion is conducting operations and is required to determine firing data corrections that will provide cumulative effects for nonstandard conditions. The battalion has voice and/or digital communications with a cannon battery, forward observer and/or Q36/37 radar. Enemy attack is possible. Some iterations of this task can be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: Engage an accurately located target within range with first round fire for effect (FFE) capability.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-25

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task *1. Fire Direction Officer (FDO) determines registration requirement. *2. FDO selects the registration type. *3. FDO issues Fire Order. *4. FDO coordinates Radar and Observer requirements, as needed. 5. FDC processes the Fire Order. 6. FDC issues the Call For Fire (CFF). 7. FDC verifies CFF data and notifies Observer, as necessary. 8. The Gunnery Team conducts fire missions. 9. Upon firing the last round the Observer provides refinement data, as required.

10. FDC issues End of Mission. 11. FDC computes and forwards registration corrections to higher headquarters. 12. FDC distributes registration corrections to other FDCs, as necessary.

PREPARE TO PROCESS FIRE MISSION IN DEGRADED MODE (MANUAL)

061-280-5000

STANDARDS: Prepare to process fire missions in the degraded mode within specified tolerances in FM 6-40.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Constructed the firing chart. 2. Determined and announced chart data. 3. Determined basic firing data. 4. Applied GFT settings. 5. Determined site.

COMPUTE FIRE MISSION IN DEGRADED MODE (MANUAL) 061-280-5001

CONDITIONS: Given a call for fire, a DA Form 4504 (Record of Fire), appropriate Graphical Firing Table (GFT), Graphical Site Table (GST), Tabular Firing Table (TFT), addendum, a fire order, chart data, and FM 6-40.

STANDARDS: Compute fire missions in the degraded mode within tolerances specified in FM 6-40.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Computed fire missions using DA Form 4504.

Chapter 6

6-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

COMPUTE SPECIAL FIRE MISSION IN DEGRADED (MANUAL) MODE

061-280-5002

CONDITIONS: Given a call for fire requiring special missions, a DA Form 4504 (Record of Fire), appropriate Graphical Firing Table (GFT), Graphical Site Table (GST), Tabular Firing Table (TFT), addendum, a fire order, chart data, and FM 6-40.

STANDARDS: Compute special fire missions in the degraded mode within tolerances specified in FM 6-40.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Computed special fire missions. 2. Computed Registration.

VERIFY PREPARATION OF FIRE MISSION PROCESSING IN DEGRADED

(MANUAL) MODE 061-280-5003

CONDITIONS: Given a surveyed firing chart, DA Form 4504 (Record of Fire), a Graphical Firing Table (GFT) with GFT settings applied, Tabular Firing Table (TFT), and Graphical Site Table (GST), known data, plotting equipment, and FM 6-40.

STANDARDS: Verify preparation of fire mission processing in degraded mode within tolerances specified in FM 6-40.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified the appropriate equipment is available. 2. Verified the accuracy of the surveyed firing chart. 3. Verified the accuracy of the GFT settings.

VERIFY FIRE MISSION PROCESSING IN DEGRADED (MANUAL) MODE 061-280-5004

CONDITIONS: Given a call for fire, fire order, plotting equipment, known data, DA Form 4504 (Record of Fire), a Graphical Firing Table (GFT) with GFT settings applied, appropriate Tabular Firing Table (TFT), and Graphical Site Table (GST), a FDC crew, and FM 6-40.

STANDARDS: Supervise fire mission processing in degraded mode, without error, IAW the procedures in FM 6- 40.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified the plotted target location. 2. Verified the announced chart data. 3. Verified announced Message to Observer (MTO). 4. Verified basic firing data. 5. Verified announced fire commands. 6. Processed End of Mission (EOM).

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-27

PROCESS TARGET INFORMATION USING AFATDS

061-300-5015

CONDITIONS: Given target information and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Process target information in the AFATDS, without error.

OPERATE THE MUNITIONS CALCULATOR IN AFATDS 061-300-5045

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to calculate munitions coverage and quantity, target information, weapon information, munitions information, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Calculate munitions coverage and quantity requirements with the munitions calculator IAW TM 11- 7025-297-10-1.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Entered target information. 2. Entered munitions information. 3. Performed calculations. 4. Stored information (if required)

PERFORM TARGET LIST SEARCH IN AFATDS 061-300-5046

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to search, an AFATDS, stored targets on local or external Operational Facility (OPFAC), search criteria, an external OPFAC, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Process target search results into the appropriate target list.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Entered Target Search criteria. 2. Conducted a target search. 3. Processed target search results.

VERIFY A FIRE PLAN IN AFATDS

061-300-5099

CONDITIONS: Given an established fire plan, fire plan information, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Verify the established fire plan is in accordance with the fire plan information.

Chapter 6

6-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified the fire plan targets. 2. Verified the fire plan information. 3. Verified the fire plan schedule. 4. Verified fire plan execution (if required).

VERIFY FIRE MISSION DATA USING AFATDS 061-300-5154

CONDITIONS: Given an active fire mission, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Verify the fire mission data in accordance with the Fire Order (FO).

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified fire mission data. 2. Verified the fire commands (if required).

DETERMINE RULES FOR A TRIGGER EVENT

061-300-5300

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to determine rules for trigger events, Operations Order (OPORD), digital SOP, situational data, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Determine trigger event rule sets in accordance with OPORD, digital SOP, mission requirements, without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined rules for each trigger event.

MAINTAIN TARGET LISTS USING AFATDS 061-300-5301

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to maintain target lists in AFATDS, listed targets in the AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Maintain targets in the appropriate target lists IAW mission requirements, without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Maintained active target list. 2. Maintained inactive target list. 3. Maintained the planned target list. 4. Maintained on-call target list. 5. Maintained suspect target list. 6. Maintained the Amphibious Task Force (ATF) target list. 7. Maintained preplanned air support list. 8. Maintained user created target lists.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-29

MAINTAIN LIMITED/PROTECTED AREA (L/PA) IN AFATDS 061-300-5307

CONDITIONS: Given Limited/Protected Area information, an AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Maintain Limited/Protected Area data, without error, IAW the mission requirements.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Maintained Limited/Protected Area information.

DEVELOP FIRE SUPPORT (FS) PLANS USING AFATDS

061-300-5401

CONDITIONS: Given Commander’s intent for the fire support plan, AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Develop the Fire Support Plan in accordance with the commander’s intent for the situation.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Created a new plan. 2. Established friendly situation. 3. Established enemy situation. 4. Established plan friendly and enemy units. 5. Added enemy template. 6. Conducted the Fire Support Estimate. 7. Added a Course of Action (COA) (if required). 8. Selected a Course of Action (COA). 9. Targeted enemy units.

10. Conducted the Field Artillery Estimate. 11. Prepared the plan text. 12. Compared plans (if required). 13. Managed the Fire Support Plan. 14. Edited the Fire Support Plan (if required).

VERIFY PREPLANNED AIR SUPPORT OPERATIONS IN AN ADVANCED FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICAL DATA SYSTEM (AFATDS)

061-300-4003

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to verify preplanned air support operation, AFATDS, preplanned air support information, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Verify Preplanned Air Support Operations without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified the Air Support List (ASL). 2. Verified the targets in the ASL. 3. Verified target data on the ASRs. 4. Verified subordinate unit preplanned air requests are included in the ASL. 5. Verified target duplication checks.

Chapter 6

6-30 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

6. Verified the Transmission of the ASL. 7. Verified the update of ASRs after transmission of the ASL (as required). 8. Verified the Air Tasking Order (ATO). 9. Verified the removal of the ASL(s) and ATO(s) when no longer valid.

UPDATE MAP SETTINGS IN AFATDS

061-300-5035

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to update map settings, updated map information, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Update map settings IAW the mission requirements without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Updated map mod information. 2. Entered map center location. 3. Set map view. 4. Managed overlays. 5. Managed map filters.

PROCESS A RECEIVED FIRE SUPPORT MUNITIONS RESTRICTION GUIDANCE

USING AFATDS 061-300-5047

CONDITIONS: Given a received fire support munitions restrictions guidance, an AFATDS, external Operational Facility (OPFAC), and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Process received fire support munitions restriction guidance IAW the mission requirements.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Processed the received fire support restrictions guidance. PERFORM PREPLANNED AIR SUPPORT OPERATIONS USING AFATDS

061-300-5140

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to perform preplanned air support operations, AFATDS, preplanned air support information, subordinate and higher echelon OPFACs and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Perform Preplanned Air Support Operations without error.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-31

PROCESS A FIRE PLAN USING AFATDS 061-300-5185

CONDITIONS: Given fire plan information, an AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1. STANDARDS: Execute a fire plan, without error, IAW mission requirements.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Established fire plan targets (if required). 2. Established the fire plan. 3. Entered the fire plan schedule information. 4. Executed the fire plan (if required). 5. Transmitted the fire plan (if required

FIRE DIRECTION TABLE IV: PROVIDE CONTROL OF THE FDC 6-26. Table IV includes the planning and the control tasks that the fire direction element must perform. This table can be evaluated in a CPX, STX, or LFX.

Table 6-7. Fire Direction Table IV – Provide Control of the FDC

Task Number Task Reference 06-1-1004 Perform Transfer of Control Functions DTMS

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-300-5024 Implement Planned Continuity of Operations (CONOPS) Using

AFATDS 3

061-300-5052 Validate Movement Request Using AFATDS 3 061-300-5064 Process a Movement Order Using AFATDS 3 061-300-5084 Prepare the Radar Deployment Order for Transmission Using

AFATDS 1

061-300-5085 Verify the Radar Deployment Order Using AFATDS 3 061-300-5186 Process Movement Request Using AFATDS 1 061-300-5403 Maintain Common Geographic Reference System (CGRS) Data

in AFATDS 4

071-326-3013 Conduct a Tactical Road March 3

NOTE: Supporting Individual Task that support collective task

PERFORM TRANSFER OF CONTROL FUNCTIONS

06-1-1004 CONDITIONS: The Fires Battalion is engaged in combat operations and the tactical situation requires the TOC to displace. The TOC has digital communications with higher and lower and adjacent echelons. Some iterations of this task can be performed in MOPP4. STANDARDS: The TOC transferred control to an alternate TOC without any loss of control and while providing continuous fire support (FS).

Chapter 6

6-32 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Establish Voice Communications with alternate TOC. 2. The TOC ensures that the ABCS data distribution for continuity of operations

is set up IAW unit TSOP and FS plan during systems initialization.

3. Ensure digital communications exists with the alternate TOC. 4. The TOC ensures that the element assuming control has the following

capabilities:

a. Voice communications with all elements. b. Subscribers are turned on in the computer systems. c. Firing units are ready in the computer systems. d. Digital communications are established. e. Appropriate data exchange has occurred.

5. Send current situation information (to include any common operational picture (COP) data/overlays that are not otherwise available).

6. Send plans information. 7. The TOC ensures that the ABCS are exchanging the necessary messages and

data to allow smooth transition of control IAW unit TSOP.

8. Jump Station (Alternate TOC) announces establishment of control.

IMPLEMENT PLANNED CONTINUITY OF OPERATIONS (CONOPS) USING AFATDS

061-300-5024

CONDITIONS: Given an order to prepare to move, AFATDS, digital SOP, external Operation Facility (OPFAC), and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Implement Planned Continuity of Operations (CONOPS) without losing Fire Support capabilities.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Identified CONOPS Unit. 2. Notified backup unit of impending CONOPS. 3. Confirmed backup unit has modified unit organization settings for CONOPS. 4. Verified the active target list is transmitted to backup unit. 5. Notified backup OPFAC of impending shut down.

VALIDATE MOVEMENT REQUEST USING AFATDS 061-300-5052

CONDITIONS: Given a received movement request on AFATDS, friendly attack requirements, enemy actions, future operations, external OPFACs, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Transmit the movement request to approving authority without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Reviewed the Movement Request. 2. Directed corrections to the Movement Request (as required). 3. Transmitted the Movement Request for approval.

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-33

PROCESS A MOVEMENT ORDER USING AFATDS 061-300-5064

CONDITIONS: Given an approved movement order in AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Transmit the movement order to the effected units without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified the Movement Order. 2. Verified the Movement Order route. 3. Sent the Movement Order to the moving unit(s).

PREPARE THE RADAR DEPLOYMENT ORDER FOR TRANSMISSION USING AFATDS

061-300-5084

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to control radar assets, an AFATDS, Radar assets and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Transmit the Radar Deployment Order IAW mission requirement without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Transmitted the next position Radar Deployment Order. 2. Transmitted the current search data Radar Deployment Order.

VERIFY THE RADAR DEPLOYMENT ORDER USING AFATDS

061-300-5085

CONDITIONS: Given radar assets, an AFATDS, and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Verify the radar deployment order IAW mission requirements without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified the next position Radar Deployment Order. 2. Verified the current search data Radar Deployment Order.

PROCESS MOVEMENT REQUEST USING AFATDS

061-300-5186

CONDITIONS: Given a requirement to process movement data using AFATDS, unit movement information, external OPFAC and TM 11-7025-297-10-1.

STANDARDS: Transmit movement request without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Entered Route Segment Data. 2. Entered Route Data. 3. Created a Movement Report. 4. Maintained Movement Data (as required). 5. Transmitted Movement Data.

Chapter 6

6-34 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

MAINTAIN COMMON GEOGRAPHIC REFERENCE SYSTEM (CGRS) DATA IN AFATDS

061-300-5403 CONDITIONS: Given Common Geographic Reference System (CGRS) information, an AFATDS, and TM 11- 7025-297-10-1. STANDARDS: Maintain Common Geographic Reference System data, without error, IAW the mission requirements.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Maintained CGRS kill box information.

CONDUCT A TACTICAL ROAD MARCH

071-326-3013

CONDITIONS: As an acting platoon sergeant/platoon leader, given a platoon with TOE weapons, personnel, equipment, operational vehicles with BII, a 1:50,000 military map of the road march area, a warning order, and an overlay of your route; a requirement to maintain radio listening silence until detected or engaged or until a SPOTREP/STATREP must be sent.

STANDARDS: Within the time allowed in the warning order, conducted a tactical road march from one point to an assembly area, planned, organized, controlled the road march and secured the assembly area.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Conducted each step in the planning sequence for a tactical road march. 2. Ensured all required actions in the assembly area were performed. 3. Issued the march order in its entirety. 4. Identified two of the three elements of the march columns. 5. Organized the march. 6. Performs all actions in the assembly area. 7. Ensured all actions at halts were performed. 8. Ensures all elements are released at the proper release points.

FIRE DIRECTION TABLE V: CERTIFICATION

6-27. Table V allows the commander to establish and maintain safety training and certification for their fire direction personnel. The commander must certify that all assigned fire direction personnel can safely compute and transmit firing data in Dry Fire Table V prior to progressing to Table VI (Live Fire).

Fire Mission Table High Angle, AF V High Angle, FFE V Low Angle, AF V Priority Target V Out of Sector Mission V Direct Fire Mission V

Cannon dry fire missions

13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 6-35

Event Rocket Fire When Ready (FWR) 0 At My Command (AMC) 0 Time On Target (TOT) 0

MLRS/HIMARS dry fire missions

FIRE DIRECTION TABLE VI: QUALIFICATION 6-28. Table VI is the culmination of all the previous tables and allows fire direction elements to perform their duties in a live-fire situation. During this table, the commander evaluates the section’s ability to perform their wartime mission in a safe, timely, and accurate manner. Upon successful completion of Table VI (Live Fire) the commander may assess the fire direction element as qualified. (NOTE: Round count and mission criteria is is what the gun’s will fire and the missions that the FDC will process for FDC Qualification)

Fire Mission Table Ammo High Angle, AF VI HE, 8 rds High Angle, FFE VI HE, 1 rd Low Angle, AF VI HE, 8 rds Priority Target VI HE, 1 rd Out of Sector Mission VI 0 Direct Fire Mission VI HE, 5 rds

Cannon live fire missions/round count

Event Rocket Fire When Ready (FWR) 1 At My Command (AMC) 1 Time On Target (TOT) 1

MLRS/HIMARS live fire missions/round count

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-1

Chapter 7

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

This chapter provides commanders, unit Master Gunners, and survey/MET sections a standardized method of training and qualifying the survey/MET personnel assigned to their organizations. This chapter includes training, certification, and qualification standards for all 13T survey/MET sections.

INTRODUCTION 7-1. ASPT Stations 1 through 3, the written examination, and individual Soldier tasks are trained continuously. Table I consists of individual and leader tasks that can be conducted throughout the training year during Sergeant’s Time Training by hands-on evaluation. The Survey/MET Planning Station, Table III, must be administered to station leaders and section chiefs prior to Table V certification. Tables II, III, and IV will train the section/crew in establishing operations, survey/MET planning and coordination, and survey/MET mission support in support of the commander’s METL. Table V Section Certification (Dry Fire) must be conducted prior to Table VI Section Qualification (Live Fire).

The training strategy for the survey/MET sections of the Fires Brigades and BCTs are a progressive crawl-walk- run strategy that must be integrated into the training plans of both the Fires Battalion and the Maneuver Force. This progressive, gated approach to training assists the commanders in the assessment of the survey/MET section readiness and also assists unit Master Gunners in the horizontal integration of training across the combined arms team. The tables also provide the means and tasks for crawl-walk-run training for the section chief to use during Sergeant’s Time Training, as refresher training, or as a prelude to the evaluation of training.

7-2. The Survey/MET Tables provide a standardized, tabular format for training and evaluating survey/MET section readiness. These task-based tables include individual and collective tasks from the DTMS. The tables may be integrated into an LFX or conducted as standalone-evaluated STXs.

TRAINING WITH SURVEY/MET TABLES 7-3. Survey/MET training programs should be developed to support the commander’s METL, develop and sustain qualified survey/MET crewmembers, and provide a means to evaluate, certify, and qualify teams and sections. The Survey/MET Tables consist of the ASPT, individual tasks (Table I), survey/MET establish operations tables (Table II), survey/MET planning and coordination tables (Table III), section mission training tables (Table IV), and certification and qualification tables (Tables V and VI).

7-4. The survey/MET station leader and Master Gunner must ensure that the survey/MET training program:

• Certifies and qualifies survey/MET sections to support mortar, Fires Brigade, and Battalion LFXs. • Maintains proficiency and certification of survey/MET sections. • Certifies and qualifies survey/MET sections to support BCT through Fires Brigades’ collective

training exercises. • Supports the commander’s METL.

Note. Evaluators must be certified before the testing.

SECTION I – ASPT FOR SURVEY/MET SECTIONS 7-5. The ASPT evaluates the survey/MET crewmember’s ability to execute selected survey/MET skills. The tasks listed in this chapter provide the unit commander a means to evaluate the section member’s basic proficiency before live-fire exercises. The ASPT can also be used as a guide for identifying team strengths and

Chapter 7

7-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

weaknesses. The commander, Master Gunner, and survey/MET station leader can use ASPT results when structuring the section’s training program.

REQUIREMENTS 7-6. All MOS 13T personnel and any personnel assigned to a survey/MET section (regardless of MOS or grade) will be assessed in the ASPT. Survey/MET personnel are required to pass the ASPT prior to survey/MET qualification. To pass the ASPT, a Soldier must answer 80% of questions on the written exam and receive all GOs on all 13T stations. If a Soldier scores less than 80% on the written exam or fails a task, they must be retrained and retested on that station until they receive a GO. The Soldier can be retrained and retake the written exam up to four times and the hands-on portion up to three times. The objective of the ASPT is to require the learner to demonstrate mastery of an actual operational hands-on task.

Appropriate manuals and other references listed for each station must be used to prepare, administer, and evaluate the ASPT.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 7-7. The commander will incorporate risk assessment in planning all aspects of this training. The unit will conduct a safety briefing for each station in accordance with the unit SOP. Drivers must have a valid driver’s license.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCESS 7-8. Before Soldiers arrive, the evaluator sets up the equipment and materials needed at each test station. When Soldiers arrive, the evaluator inputs the Soldiers data on a roster at each station and provides them with all materials and necessary equipment, as outlined in this section and in the Test Administrative Guide for that station. The evaluator reads the instructions to the Soldier exactly as written in the guide for each station. The evaluator must use the criterion-scoring checklist provided for each task to evaluate each Soldier’s performance. As each Soldier finishes or the time limit is up (whichever occurs first), the evaluator checks the Soldier’s performance as either GO or NO-GO, informs him of his performance on that task, and directs him either to the next station or to further training.

ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES FOR SOLDIERS RECEIVING A NO-GO 7-9. If a Soldier does not meet the standard indicated on the criterion-scoring checklist, the individual receives a NO-GO. The Soldier must then be critiqued on that task, given an explanation of his mistakes, and told what to do to correct them. Soldiers will be retrained and retested in accordance with the local SOP. Should the Soldier receive the maximum amount of NO-GOs, that Soldier will be retrained and then retested in accordance with ADP 7-0.

EVALUATION CRITERIA 7-10. See attached criterion-scoring checklist for each task provided in the test station administrative guidance.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED 7-11. The personnel, equipment, and material in the following list should be considered for all stations, but their use depends on the task to be trained. Additional items, if required, are listed in the Test Administrative Guide for each particular station:

• Primary evaluator (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test (evaluator may also occupy a test station).

• Station evaluator, SGT or above (one per test station).

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-3

• Classroom and/or training area. • Stopwatch (one per evaluator). • Criterion-scoring checklist (one per Soldier). • Desk and chair (one per Soldier). • Clipboard (one per Soldier). • Pencils/Pens (one per Soldier). • TC 3-09.8 (one per test site). • FM 3-09.15 (one per test site). • FM 6-2 (one per test site). • Profiler System; AN/TMQ-52 (one per test site). • Essential MET equipment, i.e., Kestrel 4500, barometer, forms, etc. (one set per test site). • IPADS (one per test site). • Nikon NE-102, Theodolite (one per test site). • Recorders Notebook, DA Form 4446 (one page per team).

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 7-12. The evaluator tasked to conduct the ASPT should consider the following elements below during their planning:

THE ASPT 7-13. A “record” ASPT allows a commander to certify proficiency of Soldiers to meet artillery table prerequisites.

DETERMINE THE TEST SITE 7-14. Establish a test site that will support the testing of all stations. The test site should be appropriate for the movement and size of all required equipment and personnel.

CONSTRUCT A TEST STATION DIAGRAM 7-15. Before rehearsing the test, create a test station diagram. This diagram will facilitate management and control of the test. It will also aid in briefing Soldiers and evaluators. The diagram should include the following elements: test stations, assembly area ,control station, and direction of rotation, movement schedule, retest/retrain area, and aid station/warm-up tent, if available. An example is shown in Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1. Sample test station diagram

Chapter 7

7-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

DETERMINE RESOURCES 7-16. The survey/MET station leader or Master Gunner must determine the resources necessary to support the ASPT. They must consider the support of the test site, as well as the training aids required to conduct the test to standard. The evaluator can determine training aids or actual equipment, such as the Profiler, IPADS, and MET forms, etc., by referring to the individual station in this chapter. To support the test site, the NCOIC must determine the amount of support needed to conduct the test; for example, Profiler and IPADS with drivers, transportation to and from the test site, tents for warm-up area and briefings, stopwatches, tables for scoring, chairs, medical support, and Class I support if needed. Once the NCOIC has determined the resources needed, he must coordinate the use of personnel and equipment. This coordination will usually be made through the battalion S-3.

SELECT EVALUATORS 7-17. Evaluators should be selected as far in advance as possible. This gives the NCOIC time to select the most qualified personnel available and time to coordinate with other units, if necessary. It also allows the evaluator time to prepare. If the survey/MET station leader must draw on resources from outside his unit, he should request assistance from the Master Gunner. After the evaluators have been selected, the survey/MET station leader will brief them on their duties and responsibilities, the test schedule and location, and the station they will be testing.

TEST EVALUATORS 7-18. Evaluators must be technically proficient in performing all tasks to standard. Each evaluator is tested on all test stations.

CONDUCT A REHEARSAL 7-19. Because of the size and scope of this test, it must be rehearsed before it is administered. This rehearsal will be conducted at the test site with all evaluators present. The survey/MET station leader should check each station to ensure that the evaluator is aware of their duties and responsibilities, the station is set up correctly with all training aids and test materials on hand, and testing is conducted in accordance with the Test Administrative Guides.

CONDUCT THE ASPT 7-20. Before testing, the survey/MET station leader must ensure that the stations are set up and all equipment and training aids are available. They must also ensure that the Soldiers are briefed on safety and the station locations and that the Soldiers are assigned to the test stations. During testing, the survey/MET station leader will spot-check each station to ensure the task standards are being maintained and the evaluators are maintaining a roster of personnel evaluated and annotating the scorecards correctly.

CONDUCT THE AAR FOR THE ASPT 7-21. The battalion Master Gunner should conduct an AAR to help the survey/MET station leader understand their actions and interactions during the conduct of the ASPT. The AAR should be conducted before the unit commander’s debrief and should consist of a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of the training event. This will allow the survey/MET station leader to better prepare the commander’s debrief as well as prepare him for the next ASPT.

PREPARE DEBRIEF 7-22. Once the test is complete, the Master Gunner will prepare a brief for the commander informing him of the ASPT results. (This information will also be retained for training records.) As soon as the Soldiers complete the training and before anyone leaves the test site, the Soldiers’ scorecards will be collected. The evaluators can provide additional information about a Soldier’s test performance. After all data is collected, they prepare a summarization of the results. Information from test results must be interpreted to determine the strengths and weaknesses of the unit. At a minimum, this report will contain the following data:

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-5

• A roster, by duty position, of each Soldier tested. • The scores of each Soldier tested. • The percentage of Soldiers passing the ASPT. • The percentage of GOs per station. (This will be broken down into first-time GOs, second-time

GOs, etc.) • The percentage of NO-GOs per station. (This will be broken down into first-time NO-GOs, second-

time NO-GOs, etc.) • Assessment of tasks receiving NO-GOs, what caused the NO-GOs • Recommended corrective action.

TEST STATIONS 7-23. Each station consists of a Test Administrative Guide and criterion-scoring checklist as required.

Table 7-1.Test Stations Survey/MET Tasks for ASPT

1. Written Exam Test Station 2. Basic Meteorological Skills Test Station 3. Survey Test Station

TEST STATION 1: WRITTEN EXAM 7-24. Each Soldier is required to determine solutions to questions or situations concerning basic FA survey/MET skills. Each Soldier must answer 80% of the questions correct in order to move on to the hands-on performance stations. The exam will consist of 50 questions with a 2-hour time limit to complete the exam. Master Gunners and survey/MET station leaders can develop their own exams as necessary. A sample exam and answer key is located in Appendix C.

Note. The following test stations consist of the hands-on performance evaluations. Each Soldier is required to perform the individual tasks in sequence and within the time allotted. This can be conducted in a “Round Robin”- type testing environment where the Soldiers are not limited to which test station to begin with, but dependent upon the number of evaluators available. Soldiers may have to wait in a holding/segregated area until the evaluator is ready to test that particular Soldier. The 13T Soldier Certification Control Record is shown in Figure 7-2.

Chapter 7

7-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

13T SOLDIER CERTIFICATION CONTROL RECORD PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT

SOLDIER NAME/RANK: ________________________________________________________________ UNIT: ________________________________________________________________________________ TRAINING LOCATION: _________________________________________________________________

TASK NUMBER GO NO- GO RETEST GO DATE REMARKS

061-303-1001 Prepare a Meteorological Balloon Train for Sounding

2d Time 3d Time

061-303-1005 Record a Meteorological Message

061-303-1012 Initialize the Profiler System

061-303-1015 Process Profiler System Messages

061-303-1017 Assemble T-VSAT Antenna

061-302-1000 Determine a Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Coordinate

061-302-1026 Record Field Notes

061-302-1060 Measure an Angle with a Nikon NE 102, Theodolite

061-302-1062 Determine a Location using a Global Positioning System (GPS) Receiver

061-302-1064 Mark a Survey Position with an Improved Position and Azimuth Determining System (IPADS)

INSTRUCTIONS: Make all entries in ink. 1. Students: Fill out name/rank, unit, and training location. 2. Instructors: Enter task number and date of evaluation, check GO, NO-GO, RETEST GO, as appropriate. NOTE: Reproduce copies of this form as required.

Table 7-2. Test Station 2: Basic MET Skills Test Administrative Guide

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED: • Balloon • Prepared Radiosonde • Parachute • Twine • Assistant

Task Number Task Title 061-303-1001 Prepare a Meteorological Balloon Train for Sounding 061-303-1005 Record a Meteorological Message

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-7

• Gas cylinder • Inflation tables located in FM 3-09.15 • DA Form 3677-R, DA Form 3675-R, and zone information • Barometer • Kestrel 4500

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 15 minutes • Test time: 15 minutes per task • Total time (per crewman): 45 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION: None provided.

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: At this station you will prepare a meteorological balloon train for sounding, record a meteorological message, and obtain surface pressure not necessarily in that order. If it becomes apparent to me that you are unable to complete a task, you will receive a NO-GO, get retrained, and then retested after completing this station. You will inform me once you have completed each task. I will then tell you when to begin the next task. All the equipment required to accomplish these three tasks are in front of you. Do you have any questions pertaining to this station? You may begin.

PREPARE A METEOROLOGICAL BALLOON TRAIN FOR SOUNDING

061-303-1001

CONDITIONS: Given a balloon, a prepared Radiosonde, parachute, twine, assistant, gas cylinder, and inflation tables located in FM 3-09.15.

STANDARDS: Prepare a meteorological balloon to the Required Total Lift.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Unpacked parachute. 2. Verified balloon is not over 5 years old and balloon size. 3. Inspected the balloon for obvious damage. 4. Shook the talc from the balloon. 5. Expelled air from balloon. 6. Determined the total lift required for the balloon and attachments. 7. Calculated weight to be added to inflation nozzle. 8. Attached hose from inflation nozzle to cylinder. 9. Purged hose and nozzle.

10. Secured the balloon to the end of the inflation nozzle with small piece of twine. 11. Inflated balloon until nozzle, and weight(s), rises from surface (if weights are

required).

12. Turned off the gas flow from cylinder when the balloon was properly inflated. 13. Removed balloon from nozzle. 14. Measured 2 double arm lengths of twine. 15. Tied twine around balloon neck. 16. Tied other end of twine to top of parachute.

Chapter 7

7-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

17. Partially unwound antenna, if Radiosonde used had one. 18. Inserted Radiosonde shuttle into the slot at bottom of parachute and ensured was

secure.

19. Proceeded to launch area. 20. Soldier holding balloon stood upwind of Radiosonde. 21. Balloon was released to travel downwind. 22. Soldier holding Radiosonde waited until balloon lifted Radiosonde prior to

releasing it.

RECORD A METEOROLOGICAL MESSAGE

061-303-1005

CONDITIONS: Given DA Form 3677-R, DA Form 3675-R and zone information.

STANDARDS: Record MET data in the correct fields on Meteorological computer and ballistic forms IAW 3- 09.21.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Recorded MET data onto a DA Form 3677-R Computer MET Message.

b. Recorded Header data. (1) Recorded number of the global octant of met station. (2) Recorded the station Latitude and Longitude. (3) Recorded the Greenwich date (GMT). (4) Recorded the GMT time of observation to the nearest 0.1 hour. (5) Recorded duration of 0. (6) Recorded station height of met station in tens of meters. (7) Recorded met station pressure to the nearest millibar. c. Recorded Body data. (1) Recorded wind direction for each line in tens of mils. (2) Recorded wind speeds for each line in knots. (3) Recorded temperatures for each line to the nearest 0.1 degrees Kelvin

(K).

(4) Recorded pressure for each line to the nearest millibar. d. Recorded data at Bottom of form. (1) Recorded From/To data; whom message was sent from and who

message was sent to.

(2) Recorded the GMT Date and Time when met message was delivered. (3) Recorded LST Time when met message was delivered. (4) Recorded Message Number. (5) Recorded Recorder data; who recorded data on the form. (6) Recorded Checked data; who checked the data that was recorded on

the form for accuracy.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-9

2. Recorded MET data onto a DA Form 3675-R Ballistic MET Message. a. Recorded Header data (1) Recorded Message Type. (2) Recorded number of the global octant of met station. (3) Recorded the station Latitude and Longitude. (4) Recorded the GMT date. (5) Recorded the GMT time of observation to the nearest 0.1 hour. (6) Recorded Duration of 0. (7) Recorded the station height in tens of meters. (8) Recorded met station pressure to the nearest 0.1 percent of standard.

When percent is 100 or over, omit the first digit.

b. Recorded Body data. (1) Recorded wind direction for each line in hundreds of mils. (2) Recorded wind speed for each line in knots (3) Recorded temperature percent of standard for each line to the nearest

0.1 percent.

(4) Recorded the density percent of standard for each line to the nearest 0.1 percent.

c. Recorded data at Bottom of form. (1) Recorded From/To data; whom message was sent from and who

message was sent to.

the form for accuracy.

Table 7-3. Test Station 3: Survey Skills Test Administrative Guide

TEST PLANNING TIME: • Administrative time: 15 minutes • Test time: 10 minutes per task • Total time (per crewman): 1 hour

Task Number Task Title 061-302-1000 Determine a Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Coordinate 061-302-1026 Record Field Notes 061-302-1060 Measure an Angle with a Nikon NE 102, Theodolite 061-302-1062 Determine a Location using a Global Positioning System (GPS) Receiver 061-302-1064 Mark a Survey Position with an Improved Position and Azimuth

Determining System (IPADS)

Chapter 7

7-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN: At this station you will determine a UTM grid coordinate, direction by astronomic observation, record field notes, measure an angle with a theodolite, determine location with a GPS, and mark a survey position with IPADS. If it becomes apparent to me that you are unable to complete a task, you will receive a NO-GO, get retrained, and then retested after completing this station. You will inform me once you have completed each task. I will then tell you when to begin the next task. All the equipment required to accomplish these three tasks are in front of you. Do you have any questions pertaining to this station? You may begin.

DETERMINE A UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR (UTM) COORDINATE

061-302-1000 CONDITIONS: Given US Military 1:50,000 scale map of local area, protractor, pencil,A, FM 3-25.26, and an identifiable point on the map This task should not be trained in MOPP. STANDARDS: Determine grid coordinates for a point on a map within 100 meters IAW FM 3-25.26.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Verify that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Located grid square on map where point is located. 2. Found the false Easting and Northing strings at the bottom left corner of the

map.

3. Placed coordinate scale/protractor on bottom horizontal grid line of grid square containing Point A to determine third and sixth digits of coordinate.

4. Checked to see that zeros of scale being used were in lower left-hand corner of grid square where Point A was located.

5. Slid scale to right, keeping bottom of scale on bottom grid line until Point A was under vertical (right-hand) scale.

6. Read coordinate right, then up.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-11

RECORD FIELD NOTES 061-302-1026

CONDITIONS: Given a DA Form 4446, a 3H or harder pencil, a straightedge or protractor, a watch that can be read to the nearest second and survey data as it is determined.

STANDARDS: Record field notes IAW the procedures listed in FM 6-2.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Record sample survey data on a 3x5-inch card. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier to record the information provided in the field notebook. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Entered the appropriate information on the flyleaf of the field notebook. 2. Titled the first two facing pages of the notebook as the index. 3. Recorded the page number, date, and type of survey in the index. 4. Entered the type of survey (designation) and date on the top left half of the

page.

5. Entered weather conditions (two variables describing temperature and visibility), type(s) and serial number(s) of instrument(s) used, and names of party personnel on the top right half of the page.

6. Labeled column headings according to the method of survey and/or type of instrument being used.

7. Recorded station names and field data in the appropriate columns as follows: a. For conventional survey methods. (1) Time (astronomic observations only). (2) Horizontal readings. (3) Vertical readings. b. For position and azimuth determining system (PADS) surveys. (1) Identification (ID) numbers. (2) Position, azimuth, elevation (PAE) readings. (3) Easting. (4) Northing. (5) Elevation. (6) Azimuth (true or grid). (7) Distance.

8. Entered station descriptions, sketches, and remarks on the right half of the page. 9. Verified instrument operator levels the collimation bubble before

accepting a vertical reading by asking BUBBLE LEVEL? (All theodolites except T16-84.)

10. Recorded the readings as they are announced. Repeat them back to the instrument operator.

11. Computed and recorded in the proper column, and circle the mean data. 12. Used correct procedures for voiding:

a. Voided single entries by drawing a single line through the entry and writing the correct value above the voided entry.

b. Voided half pages by drawing diagonal lines between opposite corners of the half page and printing the word VOID in large letters across the

Chapter 7

7-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Performance Measures GO NO-GO half page.

c. Voided full pages by drawing diagonal lines between opposite corners of each half of the page and writing the word VOID in large letters across each half of the page.

13. Verified recorded data is accurate, neat, and legible by using only approved abbreviations and capital block letters

MEASURE AN ANGLE WITH A NIKON NE 102, THEODOLITE

061-302-1060

CONDITIONS: Given a Nikon NE-102 with accessories at a survey station with visible rear and forward stations and a recorder, in a field environment.

STANDARDS: Within ten minutes & fifth-order survey specifications.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Mark the occupied station with a hub. Mark rear and forward stations with range poles. Pre-measure horizontal angle. BRIEF SOLDIER: Brief Soldiers on Nikon NE-102 setup, identify rear and forward stations, and inform Soldiers to measure horizontal and vertical angles and that a recorder will record all readings.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Set up Tripod. 2. Removed Nikon NE-102 from case. 3. Plumbed Nikon NE-102 over point. 4. Leveled Nikon NE-102. 5. Focused the Telescope to eliminate parallax. 6. Measured angles. 7. March-ordered Nikon NE-102 and Tripod.

DETERMINE A LOCATION USING A GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS)

RECEIVER 061-302-1062

CONDITIONS: Given an operational precision lightweight global positioning system (GPS) receiver AN/PSN-11 (PLGR) or AN/PSN-13 (DAGR); lithium battery; KYK-13 or AN/CZY-10, initialization, setup; and TM 11-5820- 1172-13 and TM 11-5825-291-13.

STANDARDS: Successfully determine location in Figure of Merit (FOM) 1 accuracies or ±10 meters.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: For this evaluation, prepare equipment and ensure that equipment is operational. Provide sufficient initialization, setup, and waypoint information to Soldier so that PLGR can be used to navigate. Prepare a navigation course. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier all performance measures must be accomplished within 60 minutes.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Determined location to within ±10 meters using AN/PSN-13 DAGR. 2. Determined location in FOM 1 using AN/PSN-11 PLGR.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-13

MARK A SURVEY POSITION WITH AN IMPROVED POSITION AND AZIMUTH DETERMINING SYSTEM (IPADS)

061-302-1064 CONDITIONS: Given an Improved Position and Azimuth Determining System (IPADS) mounted in a Vehicle, an Authorized Vehicle and Driver, Theodolite wit Accessories, Recorder's Note Book, Pencil, Trig List, Maps, Known Survey Point, and a Planned Survey Position, survey stakes, flags and ribbon, shipping tag, in a Field Environment. This task should not be trained in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Mark a Survey Position with an Improved Position and Azimuth Determining System.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Prepared a course with a start point at the Known Survey Point and ends at the Planned Survey Position. Course should be at least 5 km to 10 km between points. Ensure that all information, references, and equipment required to perform the task are available. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Applied Power to the IPADS. 2. Configured IPADS. 3. Initialized IPADS. 4. Updated IPADS. 5. Initiated Zero-velocity Updates (ZUPTs). 6. Recalled and reviewed data. 7. Marked Survey Position. 8. Recorded IPADS Data. 9. Updated IPADS data and recorded the horizontal and vertical error.

10. Recalled and recorded all adjusted data stored since the last update.

SECTION II – SURVEY/MET TABLES 7-25. The Survey/MET Tables are designed to train the survey and meteorological teams in the survey/MET tasks necessary to provide timely and accurate data in support of the commander’s intent. The tables provide a structure of progressive, gated training from individual through qualification at the artillery team level.

SURVEY/MET TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL TASKS 7-26. Tasks listed in Survey/MET Table I are the basic individual tasks that members of the survey/MET section must master before proceeding to establishing operations tasks. Once individuals have demonstrated proficiency in the basic skills required to set up and operate the equipment by successfully completing the ASPT, they use those skills to perform the basic tasks listed in Table I. The training on the basic individual tasks in Survey/MET Table I can be trained and evaluated during the weekly Sergeant’s Time Training and constitutes the Crawl-level training of these tasks.

INDIVIDUAL TASKS FOR THE SURVEY/MET SECTION 7-27. As a prerequisite to begin establishing operations, survey/MET crewmembers must know the basic survey/MET individual skills and knowledge as well as communication skills in order to be an effective member of the team. To accomplish these tasks, assigned personnel must know, understand, and be able to define all survey/MET terms, be able to conduct all Table I survey/MET tasks, and understand how the survey/MET section supports the overall Fires Brigade/battalion mission. Tasks will be conducted using the organization’s equipment.

Table 7-4. Survey/MET Table I – Individual Survey/MET Skills

Chapter 7

7-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Number Task Title Skill Level 061-275-8003 Operate SINCGARS ASIP 1 061-276-1011 Load COMSEC/FH Data/Sync Timing Using COMSEC Device 1 061-276-1012 Install OE-254/GRC Antenna Group 1 061-302-1005 Transfer a Direction by Simultaneous Observation 1 061-303-1008 Collect Surface Weather Data Using an AN/TMQ-55 1 061-303-1012 Initialize the Profiler System 1 061-303-1015 Process a Profiler Meteorological Messages 1 061-303-1016 Displace an AN/TPQ-52A/B/C/D MMS-Profiler System 1 061-303-1017 Assemble a Tactical-Very Small Aperture Transmitter(T-VSAT) 1 061-303-1020 Troubleshoot An AN/TMQ-52A/B/C/D MMS-Profiler System 1 061-302-1065 Compute a Conversion and Transformation of Coordinates and

Azimuth 2

061-302-5003 Convert Azimuths, Coordinates and Altitude Using Common Control 3

061-302-2100 Coordinate Survey/Meteorological Operations 4 061-302-2181 Establish a Declination Station 1 061-302-5024 Validate Survey Field Notes 3 061-303-5300 Verify a Meteorological Message 3 061-303-5304 Download NOGAPS Data 3 061-303-5306 Perform an/tmq-52A/B/C/D MMS-Profiler System Administration 3

061-303-5308 Operate An AN/TMQ-52-A/B/C/D MMS-Profiler System Archiving Utility 3

061-303-5310 Program a SR2001 Signal Data Receiver 3 061-302-5401 Develop an Operations Order Survey Tab 4 061-303-5407 Supervise the Movement of a Meteorological Section 4 061-303-5406 Develop an Operations Order Meteorological Tab 4

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-15

OPERATE SINCGARS ASIP 061-275-8003

CONDITIONS: Given an operational radio set AN/VRC-90F, RT-1523E/F, AN/PYQ-10 (SKL) with frequency hopping (FH) data, TM 11-5820-890-10-6, DA Form 2404 and DA Form 5988-E, and Distant Station.

STANDARDS: Prepare the SINCGARS (ASIP) for operation, perform Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS), and correctly establish communications with a distant station IAW TM 11-5820-890-10-6.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Prepared the SINCGARS for Operation. 2. Loaded a Single Channel Frequencies into the SINCGARS RT. 3. Performed Voice Communications. 4. Loaded COMSEC/FH Data/Sync Time Using COMSEC Device. 5. Performed PMCS on the AN/VRC-90F and Initiated DA Form 2404/5988E. 6. Conducted Frequency Hopping Operations. 7. Conducted Anti-Jamming Actions. 8. Performed Tactical Communications.

LOAD COMSEC/FH DATA/SYNC TIMING USING COMSEC DEVICE

061-276-1011

CONDITIONS: Given an operational radio set AN/VRC-90F, RT-1523E/F, TM 11-5810-410-13&P, and AN/PYQ-10 (SKL).

STANDARDS: Successfully prepare the SINCGARS (ASIP) for operation and extract all required information from the signal operating instructions (SOI) within 10 minutes.

Chapter 7

7-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

INSTALL OE-254/GRC ANTENNA 061-276-1012

TRANSFER A DIRECTION BY SIMULTANEOUS OBSERVATION

061-302-1005

CONDITIONS: Given a Nikon NE1E-102 Theodolite with accessories at Master and Flank Stations with a visible azimuth mark, an identified celestial body, method of observation, location and time, means of communication, TM 5-6675-312-14, an observer and an operator at each station.

STANDARDS: Transfer direction by Simultaneous Observation to within fifth-order specifications IAW TM 5- 6675-312-14.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Set up the Theodolites at each station. Radio communication between stations can be simulated for evaluation purposes. The Soldier is evaluated on both Master and Flank Station Procedures. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Established Flank Stations and Master Station. 2. Set up Theodolite at Flank Stations and Master Station.

a. Flank Stations oriented on a reference mark to which azimuth was required.

b. Master Station oriented on azimuth mark. 3. Master Station Observer selected celestial body and transmitted information to

Flank Stations.

4. Master Station Observer announced, READY, TRACK, TIP. 5. Flank Station Observers tracked celestial body/sun.

a. Placed vertical cross hair of Theodolite on celestial object using

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-17

Performance Measures GO NO-GO horizontal recording motion tangent screw, or

b. Centered sun inside solar circle and kept centered by using tangent screws.

6. Master Station Observer recorded readings on scales. 7. Flank Station Observers recorded readings on scales. 8. Master and Flank Stations plunged Theodolite and repeated tracking

procedures.

9. Master Station determined azimuth to sun and transmitted grid coordinates and azimuth to each Flank Station.

a. Added horizontal angle to celestial body to the azimuth to the azimuth mark.

b. Subtracted 6,400 mils, if necessary. 10. Flank Stations determined perpendicular distance between Flank Stations and

Master Station.

a. Plotted position of Master Station on map. b. Plotted azimuth that represented azimuth to sun c. Drew and measured length of line from Flank Stations that were

perpendicular to azimuth line representing azimuth to celestial body from Master Station.

11. Flank Stations determined nomograph correction. a. Divided by a multiple of 10 to achieve number between 100 and

1,000, if perpendicular distance was greater than 1,000.

b. Entered the graph by using the vertical angle from the Master Station and the distance determined from Step 11a.

c. Read the correction from Column C of the nomograph and multiplied it by same value by which distance was divided.

12. Flank Stations applied nomograph correction to azimuth to the celestial body at the Master Station.

a. Added correction if Flank Stations were to the left of Master Station when facing celestial body.

b. Subtracted correction if Flank Stations were to the right of Master Station.

13. Flank Stations determined the azimuth to the azimuth mark at the flank stations by subtracting the Flank Stations mean horizontal angle from the corrected azimuth to the celestial body. Applied 6400 if necessary.

14. Master Station determined the mean azimuth to the azimuth mark. a. Added the three azimuths together and divided by three. b. Checked mean azimuth to determine if it met the required accuracy of

fifth order (two sets within 0.3 mil of the mean).

15. Master Station ensured mean azimuth agrees exactly with precomputed azimuth.

Chapter 7

7-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

COLLECT SURFACE WEATHER DATA USING AN AN/TMQ-55 SYSTEM 061-303-1008

CONDITIONS: Given a TACMET System, FM 3-09.15, and Input Data in a field environment.

STANDARDS: Collect Surface Weather Data using an AN/TMQ-55 TACMET System within 5 minutes IAW FM 3-09.15.

EVALUATION PREPARATION: SETUP: Ensure that all the equipment is available, serviceable, and ready for use. Use the references and the evaluation guide to score the Soldier’s performance. BRIEF SOLDIER: Tell the Soldier what is required IAW the task conditions and standards. Give the Soldier the 23 items of data that will be entered into the TACMET System. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Erected Tripod. 2. Secured TACMET to Tripod. 3. Grounded the TACMET. 4. Installed Battery in Hand Terminal. 5. Mounted Hand Terminal on Top of One Leg Extension. 6. Connected W201P1 to J1 on the Hand Terminal. 7. Connected W201P2 to J1 on the TACMET. 8. Turned On the TACMET. 9. Entered the 23 lines of Data.

10. Operated the TACMET. a. Created Extrapolated Meteorological Messages. b. Viewed Meteorological Conditions at the Surface. c. Viewed MET;CM Messages.

11. Prepared for Movement or Storage. a. Turned Power Off. b. Disconnected Hand Terminal from TACMET System to remove

battery.

c. Removed TACMET. d. Removed Grounding Equipment. e. Displaced Tripod. f. Stowed Equipment.

INITIALIZE THE PROFILER SYSTEM

061-303-1012

CONDITIONS: Given a fully powered AN/TMQ-52A Profiler system in a field environment.

STANDARDS: Initialize the Profiler System in sequence within 20 minutes IAW TM 11-6660-297-12&P.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Entered User login and password data. 2. Verified Initialization data. 3. Loaded NOGAPS data. (Cold Start Only) 4. Verified MM5 Model Status.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-19

5. Adjusted Audible Alarm Control. 6. Started Communications Protocol. 7. Verified BIT Status screen. 8. Verified TACMET data.

PROCESS PROFILER SYSTEM MESSAGES

061-303-1015

CONDITIONS: Given an initialized AN/TMQ-52 Subscriber Address, Gun/Target Location, FM 3-09.15, and Message Type, a Text/Voice Message Broadcast to send a MET Message in a field environment. STANDARDS: Process a profiler meteorological message in sequence, requesting unit receives message(s) within minute of request IAW FM 3-09.15. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Selected Message Generation (Msg Gen) icon on the OIC desktop. 2. Edited or Entered:

a. Subscriber Address b. Gun Location c. Target Location d. Message Type

3. Selected “OK” to generate message. 4. Select CMP icon to activate CMP main menu. 5. Selected “draft” on the main menu screen. 6. Double clicked the draft message. 7. Verified message contents. 8. Selected and clicked “OK” on the met_cm_msg. 9. Highlighted the message; selected and clicked the "send" button.

10. Checked sent folder to ensure subscriber received MET Message.

DISPLACE AN AN/TMQ-52A/B/C/D MMS-PROFILER SYSTEM 061-303-1016

CONDITIONS: Given an AN/TMQ-52 MMS-Profiler, the T-VSAT Antenna, the Profiler System Shelter, the Meteorological Measuring Set (MMS), TM 11-6660-298-13&P, and section personnel in a field environment. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Displace the AN/TMQ-52 Profiler system within 15 minutes IAW TM 11-6660-298-13&P. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Displaced the System Operation Station. 2. Displaced the TACMET. 3. Displaced the T-VSAT Antenna. 4. Removed antennas. 5. Disconnected system power, if applicable. 6. Removed grounding system. 7. Displaced shelter ladder. 8. Secured shelter door.

Chapter 7

7-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ASSEMBLE A TACTICAL-VERY SMALL APERTURE TRANSMITTER (T-VSAT) 061-303-1017

CONDITIONS: Given a Tactical Very-Small-Aperture Terminal (TVSAT) Antenna, FM 3-09.15, TM 11-6660- 297-12&P, and accessories in a field environment. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Assemble the T-VSAT Antenna within 10 minutes IAW FM 3-09.15. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Determined satellite elevation and azimuth. a. Obtained emplacement site latitude and longitude to the nearest whole

degree.

b. activated laptop computer. c. Logged onto laptop Computer d. Activated satellite elevation and azimuth calculating program. e. Entered emplacement site latitude and longitude into satellite

elevation and azimuth calculating program.

f. Obtained satellite elevation and azimuth angles and polarization angle for the LNB.

g. Obtained magnetic declination h. Selected location to emplace T-VAST

2. Obtained antenna components. a. Obtained antenna dish. b. Obtained antenna frame. c. Obtained T-VSAT accessory case. d. Obtained cable reel.

3. Oriented and assembled antenna. a. Opened T-VSAT accessory case and removed the mast, hardware and

tool kit.

b. Secured frame with attached support arm and antenna mast. c. Attached antenna mast to frame. d. Attached support arm to antenna mast. e. Tightened all nuts. f. Positioned frame on site with mast end toward satellite g. Used compass to orient antenna. h. Leveled antenna frame. i. Placed sandbags on frame for stability. j. Slid dish mount collar over mast. k. Pointed dish in general direction of satellite. l. Tightened nuts on collar until snug. m. Secured feed rods from T-VSAT accessory case. n. Attached feed rods to dish. o. Attached feed rods to feed unit. p. Tightened all feed support hardware.

4. Set the LNB’s scale to polarity value.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-21

a. Selected LNB matching satellite to be used b. Loosened bolts on collar that holds LNB to brackets. c. Aligned to value composed on Az/El program. d. Ensured correct polarity. e. Secured LNB to feed rods.

5. Connected cable connections. a. Unwinded cable to T-VSAT location. b. Connected cable reel connector to RF2 connector on SEP. c. Removed spectrum analyzer from shelter and setup next to T-VSAT. d. Removed short cable from T-VSAT accessory case and connected to

LNB spectrum analyzer.

e. Connected Meter input to splitter. f. Connected Coax cable to splitter.

6. Locked on correct signal. a. Activated spectrum analyzer b. Loosened wing nuts on back of dish. c. Determined dish's azimuth using compass. d. Rotated dish to correct azimuth. e. Determined dish's current elevation. f. Tilted dish to correct elevation. g. Loosened wing nuts on dish collar. h. Maneuvered dish to achieve greatest signal. i. Tightened bolts on dish. j. Disconnected short cable from LNB and connected long cable to LNB. k. Checked SDR for signal lock after 30 seconds l. Tightened all wing nuts on dish.

7. Attached feed unit cover. a. Slid feed unit cover over feed unit. b. Attached feed unit cover to feed rods. c. Secured cable to bottom feed rod and antenna mast.

8. Stored Spectrum Analyzer, tool kit, compass and short cable in T-VSAT accessory case

Chapter 7

7-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TROUBLESHOOT AN AN/TMQ-52A/B/C/D MMS-PROFILER SYSTEM 061-303-1020

CONDITIONS: Given an AN/TMQ-52 Meteorological Set Profiler, TK101/G Tool Kit Electronic Equipment, Test equipment, BIT has identified a system fault, T-VSAT issued tools, TM 11-6660-297-12&P and TM 11-6660-296- 12&P. STANDARDS: Troubleshoot an AN/TMQ-52 A/B/C/D MMS - Profiler System by correcting the fault causing the symptom found during operational/power up check without delay IAW TM 11-6660-297-12&P and TM 11-6660- 296-12&P. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Performed power up/operational check procedure. 2. Determined symptom. 3. Diagnosed fault. 4. Determined authorized maintenance level for repair of fault(s) found. 5. Performed operational check and determined if fault(s) had been

corrected.

COMPUTE A CONVERSION AND TRANSFORMATION OF COORDINATES AND

AZIMUTH 061-302-1065

CONDITIONS: Given a power source, an Handheld Terminal Unit (HTU) or Ruggedized Handheld Computer (RHC), Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) projection grid coordinates and geographic coordinates of a point, grid azimuth, FM 6-2.

STANDARDS: Computed conversion and transformation of coordinates and azimuth without error.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Processed a record in the coordinate conversion file. 2. Processed a UTM/GEO Datum Transformation. 3. Processed a Gauss-Kruger Datum Transformation. 4. Processed a user-defined Datum Transformation.

CONVERT AZIMUTHS, COORDINATES AND ALTITUDE USING COMMON

CONTROL 061-302-5003

CONDITIONS: Given an operational Handheld Terminal Unit (HTU) or Ruggedized Handheld Computer (RHC), a power source, necessary computation forms, a computed survey that started on assumed control, and the common control of the starting point.

STANDARDS: Convert to common control IAW fourth- or fifth-order specifications.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Converted azimuth, coordinates, and height by recomputing the entire survey by

using the common control.

2. Converted coordinates and height.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-23

COORDINATE SURVEY/METEOROLOGICAL OPERATIONS 061-302-2100

CONDITIONS: Given a survey team with assigned equipment.

STANDARDS: IAW the OPORD and commanders guidance.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Obtained information from the Section Chief and/or extract the information from the Survey Order.

2. Prepared and load Survey Equipment. 3. Conducted Map Recon. 4. Developed a Survey Team Plan. 5. Performed Pre-Combat Checks (IAW Unit SOP). 6. Initialized and update IPADS. 7. Established Survey Positions. 8. Completed the Survey. 9. Reported the end of a Mission and back-briefing supervisor.

10. Received further Instructions.

ESTABLISH A DECLINATION STATION 061-302-2181

CONDITIONS: Given an order to establish a Declination Station, an Improved Position and Azimuth Determining System (IPADS), NIKON NE-102 Theodlite, an area free from local magnetic attraction, FM 6-2. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

STANDARDS: Established a declination station IAW FM 6-2. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Received the Survey Order to establish a declination station within a specified area.

2. Initialized the IPADS. 3. Located the declination station convenient to using Units(s) and away from

magnetic attractions. Observed the following minimum distances away from magnetic attractions:

a. Power lines and electronic equipment – 150 meters b. Railroad tracks, artillery, tanks and vehicles – 75 meters c. Barbed-wire, steel helmets, and personal weapons – 10 meters

4. Provided four azimuth marks (one in each quadrant of a visualized circle using prominent features such as permanent structures or stakes emplaced in the ground) that were located at least 300 meters and preferably 1,000 meters from the declination station.

5. Set up the theodolite. 6. Performed auto reflection (once only) to determine the distance from the IPADS

to the theodolite.

7. Turned the angle to the azimuth marks. a. Measured the vertical angle from your point to azimuth mark 1. b. Reversed the angle.

Chapter 7

7-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

c. Recorded the angle in the Surveyor's notebook. d. Entered offset information into the IPADS.

8. Repeated step 5. until all four of the azimuth marks are completed. 9. Fill out declination station information on a card with sketch to provide to the

TOC.

10. Report to the Section Chief to review the declination station field work.

VALIDATE SURVEY FIELD NOTES 061-302-5024

CONDITIONS: In a combat or field environment, given a mission order, Survey vehicle with IPADS and surveyor notebook.

STANDARDS: Checked survey field notes and computations for compliance with fourth- or fifth-order specifications within a specified time and with 100% accuracy. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Verified administrative data in the Surveyor’s Notebook is complete, legible, and accurate.

2. “Map Spotted” the SCP coordinates in each Notebook by plotting the coordinates on map.

3. Verified that each Survey meets the Mission specific requirements of fourth or fifth order.

4. Verified the accuracy of any Transformation of Coordinate and Azimuth information.

5. Signed and dated the Surveyor’s Notebook after checking the Survey Notebook for completion, legibility and accuracy.

VERIFY A METEOROLOGICAL MESSAGE 061-303-5300

CONDITIONS: Given a hard copy of a meteorological message.

STANDARDS: Verify the message format is correct and that all data entries have been entered into the correct fields properly.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Verified Computer Meteorological Message. 2. Verified Ballistic Meteorological Message. 3. Verified Air Weather Service (AWS) Message.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-25

DOWNLOAD NOGAPS DATA 061-303-5304

CONDITIONS: Given an initialized system, an initialized computer, a blank CD-R disk and an established internet connection.

STANDARDS: Conduct a manual NOGAPS download from the AKO NOGAPS web site that fully initializes the Profiler system.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Logged onto the Profiler System Laptop. 2. Logged onto the AKO NOGAPS Website. 3. Downloaded NOGAPS data. 4. Burned data onto CD. 5. Labeled CD IAW section and unit SOP.

PERFORM AN/TMQ-52A/B/C/D MMS-PROFILER SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

061-303-5306

CONDITIONS: Given an initialized MMS-Profiler system, system’s laptop computer, a blank CD-R disk, and TM 11-6660-298-13&P and Users Security Manual/Security SOP for MMS-P AN/TMQ-52.

STANDARDS: Perform Profiler System Administration functions to validate correct system setup and operations.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Added administrator and user accounts and passwords. 2. Deleted administrator and user accounts. 3. Changed satellite frequencies.

OPERATE AN AN/TMQ-52A/B/C/D MMS-PROFILER SYSTEM ARCHIVING UTILITY

061-303-5308

CONDITIONS: Given an initialized MMS-Profiler system.

STANDARDS: Conduct system archiving without losing data.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Archived data to Hard Drive. 2. Archived data to CD-ROM. 3. Archived CMP Messages. 4. Copied CD Files or NOGAPS data from one CD to another. 5. Stored Archived data to an identified secure location IAW Unit SOP.

Chapter 7

7-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PROGRAM A SR2001 SIGNAL DATA RECEIVER 061-303-5310

CONDITIONS: Given an initialized MMS-Profiler system, a Section Chief, and appropriate manuals.

STANDARDS: Program the SR2001 Satellite Receiver to the selected region. Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Started the SR2000 Application. —— ——

a. Obtained the last four characters of Ethernet address from the back of the Satellite Data Receiver.

b. Connected the laptop to the Satellite Data Receiver by connecting the serial cable from the back of the satellite receiver to the comm port on the laptop.

c. Started the SR2000 Programmer application on the laptop computer.

(1) Clicked Start on the desktop.

(2) Clicked VCH System Set-Up.

(3) Clicked SR2000 Programmer.

d. Entered the last four characters of the Ethernet address as the Password and clicked OK.

e. Established a connection with the Satellite Data Receiver.

f. Verified receiver settings.

(1) Clicked the radio button beside the "Check Current SR2000 Setting" text and clicked OK.

(2) Verified data set in the system for their current location.

2. Programmed the SR2000 Receiver. —— ——

a. Clicked radio button beside the "Program the SR2000" text and clicked OK.

b. Clicked radio button beside the desired satellite region in which located.

c. Clicked the Next button.

3. Set the SYS Type and IP Address. —— ——

a. Clicked the radio button "Other Tactical" System Type.

b. Set the desired IP Address.

c. Clicked the Next button.

d. Clicked the Yes button, when the SR2000 displayed a Warning Banner

e. Ensured the SR2000 begins the reprogramming process. Completed application displayed new status settings. Verified the settings then clicked the OK button.

f. Clicked the OK button, when the SR2000 reminder statement displayed.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-27

DEVELOP AN OPERATIONS ORDER SURVEY TAB 061-302-5401

CONDITIONS: In a combat or field environment, given a mission order, a briefing on the overall operation, an OPLAN and/or OPORD and/or FRAGO (digital or hard copy), a UNIT SOP and/or TSOP, a standard 1:50,000- scale map of the area, a coordinate scale, a protractor (mils), trig list data of the area, FM 6-2 (Survey).

STANDARDS: Developed Survey Tabs for a Brigade/Battalion OPORDIAW the time specified in the OPLAN/OPORD. Performance Measures GO NO-GO

1. Extracted/obtained information from Commander’s guidance (communicated in writing and/or verbally) regarding the Survey portion of the mission.

2. Exchanged information necessary for the creation of Survey plans with the Commander, and/or S-3.

3. Completed the Survey Tab to the OPORD/OPLAN. 4. Back briefed the Commander and submit the draft Survey tabs of the OPORD to

the Commander.

5. Submitted the final Survey tabs of the OPORD to the commander. 6. Monitored the operation, and as the situation changes continue to revise Survey

tab information following steps 1 through 3, as necessary.

SUPERVISE THE MOVEMENT OF A METEOROLOGICAL SECTION

061-303-5407

CONDITIONS: Given a complete Meteorological System equipped section, a military map of the operations area, and specific support requirements.

STANDARDS: Direct the proper movement to a given location IAW OPORD.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Conducted reconnaissance of the designated area. 2. Conducted actual route and area reconnaissance. 3. Briefed section personnel of movement plan. 4. Inspected vehicle load plans. 5. Ensured equipment and supplies are loaded as prescribed by section load plan. 6. Directed movement to designated area as directed. 7. Directed the occupation and emplacement of all equipment. 8. Camouflaged all equipment and positions. 9. Directed loading and displacement of section equipment.

DEVELOP AN OPERATIONS ORDER METEOROLOGICAL TAB

Chapter 7

7-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

061-303-5406

CONDITIONS: Given a tactical scenario, staff personnel, a military map of the operations area with overlays, and a higher headquarters’ OPORD using FM 3-09.15 ADP 5-0, and ADRP 5-0 in a field environment.

STANDARDS: Develop the MET Tab within the allotted timeframe using the five paragraph operations order format.

Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Received mission from higher headquarters. 2. Issued an oral warning order to the MET section. 3. Determined MET requirements during the unit’s Military Decision Making

Process (MDMP).

4. Confirmed the passage of a significant weather front. 5. Advised and coordinated with the S-3/Operations Officer of the significant

weather change and recommended changes to the MET schedule.

6. Adjusted sounding schedule so that current data is supplied to supported units. 7. Briefed section of the revisions and modifications of the MET schedule. 8. Ensured supported units were notified if data was obsolete due to a frontal

passage.

9. Developed a tentative plan. 10. Completed the MET Tab of the OPORD. 11. Disseminated MET plan to the MET section.

SURVEY/MET TABLE II: ESTABLISH OPERATIONS 7-28. The tasks in Survey/MET Table II include the tasks that are required to occupy a new position, establish survey/MET operations, and are prerequisites for successful execution of tasks in subsequent tables. Selecting and occupying the observation post and positioning the survey/MET section in the maneuver formation are critical tasks that share many of the same requirements. The tasks in Survey/MET Table II include establishing operations to most effectively accomplish the survey/MET tasks necessary to support the commander’s intent. This training can be conducted as an STX in a field environment. Unit CATS provide guidance to train Survey/MET Support Table II tasks.

7-29. At the Fires Brigade/battalion level, a detailed SOP is required to support the seamless integration of the survey/MET section into the command post of the supported force and to provide guidance on the specific missions to be developed by the Fires Brigade/battalion. Examples are: Priority of survey, level of survey needed, link-up points/times, unit movements and hot times for survey support and gun and target locations, MET message times, type of MET messages requested, and NOGAPS availability for MET support. The Fires Brigade/battalion must establish a Fires Net Plan that includes Primary, Alternate, Contingency, and Emergency Communications Nets. The Fires Brigade/battalion must also establish and synchronize battle rhythm with the survey/MET section.

Table 7-5. Survey/MET Table II – Establish Operations

Task Number Task Title Survey/MET Tasks

06-4-3015 Emplace a Meteorological (MET) Section 06-4-5025 Establish Azimuth by Astronomic Observation 06-4-5037 Update IPADS by Using Assumed Data 06-4-5042 Establish a Declination Station EMPLACE A METEOROLOGICAL (MET) SECTION

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-29

06-4-3015

CONDITIONS: The MET section is operating in a tactical environment and has arrived at a new position area preparing to occupy it.

STANDARDS: The MET section occupied the position area, initialized computer systems and was ready to generate MET messages within 50 min.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. The MET station arrives at the new position area. *2. Station leader parks vehicles in a manner that facilitates security of the vehicles

during the pre-occupation security sweep of the area.

*3. The MET station leader directs the section as they sweep the area. NOTE: Time starts as soon as the section has completed the security sweep and reassembled.

4. The section uses ground guides to position the vehicles inside the new position area.

*5. The station leader identifies defensive positions. 6. The station prepares equipment for operation.

WARNING: Proper grounding of all equipment is critical. Failure to properly ground equipment could result in loss of life or limb.

7. The station performs position improvement.

ESTABLISH AZIMUTH BY ASTRONOMIC OBSERVATION 06-4-5025

CONDITIONS: The survey section has been directed to establish directional control by astronomic observation. The station to be occupied has been designated by the survey officer or the chief surveyor. The survey section has a supplemental survey set and a Nikon NE-102 theodolite. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The survey section planned, performed, and computed an astronomic observation within 4th or 5th- order specifications as prescribed IAW FM 6-2.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task *1. The IPADS Crewmember prepares a FOS device for operation. 2. The IPADS Crewmember determines the UTM coordinate of the position of the

observation.

3. The IPADS Crewmember measures the angles with a Nikon NE-102 theodolite. 4. The IPADS Crewmember records the field notes for dissemination to higher

HQ.

5. The IPADS Crewmember determines direction by the Astronomic Observation performed.

UPDATE IPADS BY USING ASSUMED DATA

Chapter 7

7-30 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

06-4-5037

CONDITIONS: The battery is planning to occupy a new position. Survey control is required, but no known survey control is available. The survey plan directs that positional control be assumed or obtained from global positioning system (GPS) and directional control be established with IPADS. A 1:50,000 scale map of the area is available.

STANDARDS: The assumed coordinates were determined within 50 meters easting and northing, and altitude to the nearest one half contour intervals.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task *1. The team chief installs crypto into the SINCGARS. *2. The team chief operates the SINCGARS to communicate with HQ. 3. The IPADS Crewmember determines a location with a GPS Receiver to update

IPADS.

4. The IPADS Crewmember marks the position with the IPADS. 5. The IPADS Crewmember determines a UTM coordinate on the map to confirm

the IPADS Data.

6. The IPADS Recorder records the field notes to disseminate to higher HQ.

ESTABLISH A DECLINATION STATION 06-4-5042

CONDITIONS: The unit is planning to occupy new firing positions, Radar or mortar positions. Survey plans call for establishment of a declination station. A survey control point (SCP) that is suitable for a declination station is within 4,000 meters of the center of the area.

STANDARDS: The Survey section established a declination station which met the criteria stated in the mission order and FM 6-2.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1 The IPADS crewmember marks the declination station using IPADS.

2. The IPADS Crewmember measures angles with a Nikon NE-102 theodolite. 3. The Recorder records the field notes for future reference. 4. The IPADS crewmember establishes the Declination Station with the data from

IPADS.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-31

SURVEY/MET TABLE III: SURVEY/MET PLANNING AND COORDINATION 7-30. As a prerequisite to provide effective survey/MET support planning, survey/MET station leaders must know the MDMP and be able to mirror the steps in survey/MET planning. To accomplish these tasks, assigned personnel must know, understand, and be able to define all doctrinal terms in order to produce the Survey/MET Tabs of the OPORD.

7-31. The focus of this table is on the survey/MET planning process as an integral part of the MDMP conducted by the supported Fires Brigade/battalion or BCT or as part of Troop-Leading Procedures at the company level. A full understanding of the doctrinal tasks and tools addressed in Table II is a prerequisite for the survey/MET planning process. To produce an effective, integrated, executable survey/MET plan, the survey/MET section must conduct battle drills to develop and gather input from the Fire Brigade/battalion staff for the implementation of the OPORD prior to receipt of a new mission. To assess the capability of the survey/MET leaders to develop a fully integrated survey/MET plan requires the participation of a portion of the unit’s staff as part of the commander’s staff in a training event or exercise. The purpose of Table III is to ensure that the survey/MET leaders are proficient at planning and coordinating related tasks prior to participation with the full staff.

Table 7-6. Survey/MET Table III – Survey/MET Planning and Coordination

Task Number Task Title 06-4-5041 Prepare for a Survey Operation

PREPARE FOR A SURVEY OPERATION

06-4-5041

CONDITIONS: The unit is conducting combat operations and requires survey control. The commander has issued guidance on survey requirements and priorities. The survey section is equipped with the improved position and azimuth determining system (IPADS) and survey set supplementary equipment.

STANDARDS: The survey officer, chief surveyor or team chief developed a survey plan consistent with the commander’s guidance. The survey plan provided for the establishment of survey control when and where it was needed.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. The IPADS Crewmember performs services, tests, and adjustments on a Nikon NE-102 theodolite for mission preparation, as needed.

*2. The IPADS team chief downloads FOS software to a digital device in preparation for a mission.

*3. The Chief Surveyor develops an operations order survey tab. *4. The Chief Surveyor coordinates survey operations between all subordinate units

and topographical engineers.

*5. The Chief Surveyor plans a survey operation. 6. The Chief Surveyor determines the datum, spheroid or ellipsoid for the area of

operation.

*7. The IPADS team chief converts prior survey to common control. *8. The IPADS team chief computes the conversion and transformation of previous

coordinates and azimuths.

9. The IPADS Crewmember transmits information messages to the FDC and Chief Surveyor.

*10. The IPADS team chief conducts survey operations. *11. The Chief Surveyor validates the survey and survey filed notes.

Chapter 7

7-32 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SURVEY/MET TABLE IV: PERFORM SURVEY/MET MISSIONS 7-32. The tasks in Survey/MET Table IV include survey and MET missions in support of the execution of the unit’s METL. These tasks should be trained and assessed to determine training strengths and weaknesses for additional training prior to conducting section certification and qualification. These tasks should be trained using all tactical equipment and conducted during usual and unusual conditions for all survey/MET crewmembers assigned to the section. This training constitutes the beginning of the Walk phase of the crawl- walk-run training of these tasks. The tasks supporting these missions are found in Table I, Individual Tasks.

EVALUATION PROCEDURES 7-33. Time is a critical factor in most, but not all, survey/MET missions. For missions such as Record a Meteorological Message, the critical factors for a success are ensuring accurate wind, temperature and pressure data, not time. Survey/MET mission grading procedures are the same procedures as in Tables I–III.

7-34. The evaluation of Table IV tasks should replicate as closely as possible the conditions under which Table VI, Live-Fire Evaluation, will be conducted. The critical evaluation criterion for Table IV tasks is to provide the commander the means to certify that the survey/MET section/team being evaluated can safely conduct the required missions.

Table 7-7. Survey/MET Table IV – Perform Survey/MET Missions

Task Number Task Title 06-4-5023 Establish Azimuth by Simultaneous Observation 06-4-5039 Use IPADS to Extend Survey Control 06-4-3014 Displace a Meteorological (MET) Section 06-4-5425 Provide Meteorological (MET) Support

ESTABLISH AZIMUTH BY SIMULTANEOUS OBSERVATION

06-4-5023

CONDITIONS: The survey section has been directed to provide directional control by simultaneous observation. The location of the master station (a SCP with a line of known direction) and the time of observation have been designated by the survey officer or the chief surveyor. The survey section has a supplemental survey set, a Nikon NE-102 theodolite, and communications equipment.

STANDARDS: The survey section planned and performed a simultaneous observation within 4th or 5th-order specifications as prescribed in FM 6-2.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

*1. The IPADS Crewmember installs crypto on the SINCGARS. 2. The IPADS Crewmember operates the SINCGARS to communicate with flank

stations.

3. The IPADS Crewmember determines the UTM Coordinates of the master and flank stations.

4. The IPADS Crewmember measures the angles with a Nikon NE-102 theodolite. 5. The IPADS Recorder records the field note for dissemination to the flank

stations.

*6. The IPADS Crewmember transfers direction with the completed Simultaneous Observation.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-33

USE IPADS TO EXTEND SURVEY CONTROL 06-4-5039

CONDITIONS: The unit is conducting combat operations and survey operations are being performed. The survey plan has been issued and directs that survey control be extended. The supporting survey element has provided a SCP for cannon within 25 kilometers of the unit and within 30 kilometers of MLRS firing platoons. The survey section is equipped with PADS, GPS, and 1:50,000-scale maps of the area. The IPADS has been initialized.

STANDARDS: The survey section/IPADS party extended survey control to all designated elements IAW the survey plan using 10 minute zero velocity corrections. The survey was closed on the starting point or a second known point of equal or higher accuracy, and IPADS accepted the closure update data.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. The team chief installs the crypto key in the SINCGARS. *2. The team chief operates the SINCGARS to communicate with HQ. 3. The IPADS Crewmember determines a UTM coordinate on the map to mark

with the IPADS.

4. The IPADS Crewmember marks a Survey Position with an IPADS to extend control.

5. The IPADS Crewmember records field notes to disseminate to higher HQ. *6. The chief surveyor validates the survey and survey field notes.

DISPLACE A METEOROLOGICAL (MET) SECTION

06-4-3014

CONDITIONS: The MET station is operating under tactical conditions. The MET station has been ordered to displace and move to a new location. A movement order has been issued. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The MET station displaced IAW the movement order.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

*1. The MET section chief advises the commander and staff on employment considerations and mission requirements.

*2. The section chief or a designated team leader performs a reconnaissance of the new position area, as time permits.

*3. The section chief or designated team leader briefs section personnel on planned movement.

4. The section, on order, prepares equipment for movement. 5. The section moves to the start point (SP) to begin the road march to the new

position area.

Chapter 7

7-34 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

PROVIDE METEOROLOGICAL (MET) SUPPORT 06-4-5425

CONDITIONS: In a tactical environment, the MET station is set up with equipment in place and is organized for continuous operations. The station is prepared to perform atmospheric soundings or receive NOGAPS data from satellites.

STANDARDS: The MET team sounded the atmosphere, if necessary, and sent accurate MET messages as requested. The messages were received and acknowledged by the using units.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

*1. **Sounding optional The MET section chief or team leader adjusts the sounding schedule for changing weather conditions or mission requirements.

*2. The MET section chief or team leader specifies the type of sounding and balloon inflation.

3. The MET team prepares for an atmospheric sounding. 4. The MET team performs an atmospheric sounding. 5. The MET team performs post flight procedures.

*6. The MET section chief or team leader ensures that message data are accurate and delivered on time.

SAMPLE SCENARIOS

SURVEY/MET MISSION SCENARIO #1: OCCUPY AN EXISTING FIRE BASE 7-35. The following type of mission may be evaluated under Tasks 061-302-2100 and 061-303-1015. The commander must determine, based on his METL assessment, which tasks are to be evaluated. Hands-on evaluations should be utilized as often as possible to assess the competence of a section as a whole and to enable the commander to evaluate the section training level.

In this mission, the survey/MET section provides direct support to an artillery task force located in a built-up area of a secure location. Listed is the survey team’s priority of work:

• Establish a Survey Control Point (SCP)  Coordinate third order or higher engineer asset to carry survey control into unit area of

operations.  Locate fourth order or higher SCP to carry survey control to unit area of operations.  Select proper area for an SCP.  Establish as many SCP markers as needed for the unit’s operations.

• Establish a Declination Station  Locate an area for a declination station.  Ensure location is clear of interference.  Identify 1 feature in all 4 quadrants at least 1,000 meters away.  If the ideal requirements cannot be met, identify at least two features in different quadrants to

be used as azimuth markers.  Ensure DAP are in different quadrants of cardinal directions.  Clearly tag the site with all required information.

• Establish Master Station  Prepare a site for simultaneous observation.

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-35

 Establish an SCP with azimuth.  Identify personnel and equipment to man the site.

• Prep Firing Battery Positions  Establish four SCPs grouped so that four guns can pull up at the same time.  Establish 3 sites of 4 SCPs 1,000 meters apart along the route to the firing location.  Emplace center-grid SCP.  Establish Observing Station (OS) and End of Observing Line (EOL).  Emplace individual artillery piece with an SCP.

The following steps will be evaluated at the same time the survey team is conducting its mission. Listed is the MET team’s priority of work:

• Site Selection  Safety  Tactical situation  Line of sight to satellite (NOGAPS)  Availability of GPS signals  Security  Communications modes and nets  Operating frequencies  Electronic warfare activities  Areas of coverage  Terrain  Logistic support  Unit attachment

• Shelter Emplacement  The shelter should be positioned on firm level ground.  The shelter cannot be positioned more than 100 feet (30 meters) from the T-VSAT antenna or

TACMET because of cable length.  The shelter should not be positioned under power lines.  The GPS antenna requires a clear view of the sky for best satellite visibility.  The T-VSAT antenna requires line of sight to the satellite for the operational area. When

locating the T-VSAT antenna, ensure there is no upslope exceeding 3 degrees in front of the antenna.

• Balloon Inflation Site  Shelter to T-VSAT antenna: 100 feet (30 meters) maximum  Shelter to TACMET sensor: 100 feet (30 meters) maximum  Broadcast time of the last MET message from the current position.

• Perform MET Missions  Profiler GPS Mission (upon request)  Process Profiler Meteorological Messages (upon demand)  Perform Profiler System Administration  Operate a Profiler Archiving Utility

• Displacement Procedures  Download time for current NOGAPS data. (NOGAPS data is transmitted every 12 hours and

provides the section with 72 hours of valid data. If the section is displacing during the

Chapter 7

7-36 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

NOGAPS download period, coordination is made with adjacent MET section to acquire NOGAPS download or download NOGAPS from AKO Web Site using NIPRNET.)

 Procedures for monitoring, copying, and transmitting MET data from adjacent MET sections on both the left and right flanks.

 Section march-order sequence and when the camouflage systems will be dropped, packed, and loaded.

 Departure time and whether the section has road clearance to move independently.  Where the MET vehicles will be positioned in the battery column.  Route of march and any significant landmarks.  Designation of the section representative on the reconnaissance party.

SURVEY/MET MISSION SCENARIO #2: OCCUPY AN UNSECURE FIRE BASE 7-36. The following type of mission may be evaluated under Tasks 061-302-2100 and 061-303-1015. The commander must determine, based on his METL assessment, which tasks are to be evaluated. Hands-on evaluations should be utilized as often as possible to assess the competence of a section as a whole and to enable the commander to evaluate the section training level.

In this mission, the survey/MET section provides direct support to an artillery task force that will be occupying a new location. The sections will be attached—assigned to the maneuver batteries and needing to establish operations. Listed is the survey team’s priority of work:

• Prep Firing Battery Positions  Establish four Survey Control Points (SCPs) grouped so that four guns can pull up at the same

time.  Establish 3 sites of 4 SCPs 1,000 meters apart along the route to the firing location.  Emplace center-grid SCP.  Establish Observing Station (OS) and End of Observing Line (EOL).  Emplace individual artillery piece with an SCP.

• Establish Master Station  Prepare a site for simultaneous observation.  Establish an SCP with azimuth.  Identify personnel and equipment to man the site.

• Establish an SCP  Coordinate third order or higher engineer asset to carry survey control into unit area of

• Establish a Declination Station  Locate an area for a declination station.  Ensure location is clear of interference.  Identify one 1 feature in all 4 quadrants at least 1,000 meters away.  If the ideal requirements cannot be met, identify at least two features in different quadrants

to be used as azimuth markers.  Ensure DAP are in different quadrants of cardinal directions.  Clearly tag the site with all required information.

• The following steps will be evaluated at the same time both sections occupy a secure area. Listed is the MET team’s priority of work:

13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 7-37

• Site Selection  Safety  Tactical situation  Line of sight to satellite (NOGAPS)  Availability of GPS signals  Security  Communications modes and networks  Operating frequencies  Electronic warfare activities  Areas of coverage  Terrain  Logistic support  Unit attachment

• Shelter Emplacement  The shelter should be positioned on firm level ground.  The shelter cannot be positioned more than 100 feet (30 meters) from the T-VSAT antenna or

locating the T-VSAT antenna, ensure there is no upslope exceeding 3 degrees in front of the antenna.

• Displacement Procedures  Download time for current NOGAPS data. (NOGAPS data is transmitted every 12 hours and

provides the section with 72 hours of valid data. If the section is displacing during the NOGAPS download period, coordination is made with adjacent MET section to acquire NOGAPS download.)

 Procedures for monitoring, copying, and transmitting MET data from adjacent MET sections on both the left and right flanks.

 Section march-order sequence and when the camouflage systems will be dropped, packed, and loaded.

Chapter 7

7-38 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SURVEY/MET TABLE V: SURVEY/MET TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION

7-37. Table V is applicable for survey/MET crewmembers and includes, as a prerequisite, the requirement to participate in and satisfy the requirements of the Individual and Crew Survey/MET Training for Survey platforms in FM 6-2 (Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Survey) and FM 3-09.15. The Brigade/Battalion Master Gunner will maintain the training status of all survey/MET crewmembers and record their participation in the Fires Brigade/BCT Training Programs. Each survey/MET crewmember must maintain section certification as a gate to proceed to Survey/MET Qualification. This table trains the survey/MET sections on all missions to ensure proficiency in their survey/MET individual, collective, and leader tasks with oversight by the Fires Brigade/Battalion Master Gunner. This level of training constitutes the Run phase of the C, W, R training in the individual, collective, and mission training prior to qualification. Table V (Training & Certification) and Table VI (Survey/MET Qualification) (Day/Night) should be scheduled together over a 2- to 3-day period to reduce orientation and setup time. The objective is to conduct all survey/MET missions in an effort that trains TTP to the task standards required.

DEVELOPMENT OF EXERCISE 7-38. Units determine the missions and operations to conduct during this exercise. FM 6-2, FM 3-09.15, and this chapter provide the evaluation procedures and standards.

EXAMPLE SCENARIOS 7-39. Leaders use a “scenario-based training” concept to develop the training, which they resource based on the unit METL. Each engagement’s tactical scenario includes battlefield awareness, situational awareness, and SOPs. The crew then makes decisions based on this scenario.

Example 1. The survey/MET section occupies a position within a battery location. The survey team has been given the mission to provide survey common control to the task force. The survey team needs to establish a fourth-order SCP and declination station that is accessible to the task force. The survey team needs to coordinate with all elements of the task force to obtain required survey missions. Example 2. The survey/MET section occupies a position within an artillery battery location. The MET team has been given the mission to provide MET support to the gun battery, mortar platoons supported, and the Air Force. It has been requested to supply MET messages to the artillery battery every 4 hours, unless during transition or when a significant weather pattern changes, and supply MET messages to the mortar platoon upon request.

7-40. Leaders conduct certification tasks in a field environment that provides the best open area available to conduct missions.

7-41. Leaders can conduct section training/certification (Table V) and qualification (Table VI) in the same area; however, they use a different scenario for each.

SURVEY/MET TABLE VI: SURVEY/MET QUALIFICATION 7-42. The qualification table for all survey/MET sections culminates in an LFX. Survey/MET section qualification requires the participation of the supported company/battery, battalion or BCT commander, staff, and external evaluators. The run-level event for the survey/MET section qualification must include a combination of tasks trained in Tables II–V to demonstrate the capability to establish operations, conduct survey/MET planning and coordination, and perform survey/MET missions. The evaluation of survey/MET sections can be conducted as multi-echelon training during Fires Brigade/Battalion platoon and battery training and qualification and in conjunction with an LFX, Mortar LFX, or a CALFEX. The qualification may also be accomplished during a scenario-driven training event using a MSEL to provide cues and responses. Upon successful completion of Table VI (Live Fire), the commander may assess the survey/MET sections as qualified.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-1

Chapter 8

Collective FA Gunnery Training Collective FA Gunnery Tables require the melding of trained sections and teams that comprise the system of systems that is Field Artillery. Training of the gunnery team at the platoon level is the first echelon that must integrate the various skills and actions of the observer team, the delivery section, the FDC, the meteorological section, the survey section, and the radar section to achieve safe, timely, and accurate indirect fires. The collective gunnery tables provide progressive training of teams and sections (Tables VII–IX) culminating in the training, certification, and qualification of the platoon (Tables X–XII).

SECTION I – EVALUATION

CONCEPT 8-1. Collective FA gunnery training is task-based and will use the training and evaluation outlines (T&EOs) for the collective tasks to evaluate the standards of performance. The tasks selected for each table provide a means to train elements of the platoon to perform required tactical tasks and progressing to full platoon collective training.

GENERAL 8-2. Commanders determine how to train their units, and the manner chosen becomes the commander’s training strategy. The artillery gunnery tables and the unit CATS provide a list of tasks and events commanders may use to help develop their training strategy. The tables provide the structure for a progressive and sequential gunnery training strategy using dry-fire certification before live-fire qualification. These tables are aligned with the strategies outlined in DA Pam 350-38. The tables are not a strategy for training all tasks and areas required for the unit to obtain a rating of “Trained” on an external evaluation as contained in the unit CATS. Rather, the tables outline a plan for training the core mission that the unit is organized and equipped to perform—the mission to plan and execute fires across the full spectrum of combat operations. Many unit elements (for example, mess, maintenance, and administrative services) require less intense training because they perform many of their mission tasks on a daily basis. In addition, the tables are focused on the technical rather than the tactical aspects of unit collective training. Some tasks listed in the tables have both technical and tactical components; however, the primary goal of the tables is to outline a method of training the unit “gunnery” team to an acceptable level of technical proficiency. With this criterion in mind, the focus of the gunnery tables is on gunnery-related tasks.

8-3. After completion of section qualification, artillery units must train sections, teams, and leaders to operate together as a platoon to accomplish collective tasks in support of the mission to deliver timely and accurate fires. The collective gunnery tables continue the progressive training of sections and teams using live training of platoon-level gunnery tasks that are critical to the accomplishment of the delivery of fires.

8-4. Table 8-1 lists the tasks to be performed in Tables VII–XII. The task set for Tables X–XII is identical, as the tasks are designed for both platoon and battery echelons. The commander must conduct a METL analysis to determine the required types of fire missions to be trained and evaluated. Tables VII and VIII are critical platoon tasks that are performed by elements of the platoon, but are limited in scope or in training audience. Table X provides the platoon and battery leaders the opportunity to train all required tasks to standard and to evaluate the platoon in a live scenario. Table XI is the platoon certification by the battery commander. The commander certifies that all sections have qualified on Table VI and that all required leaders have passed the written safety test and hands-on safety certification and demonstrate proficiency on all METL gunnery tasks in a dry-fire condition. Table XII (Platoon Qualification) is a platoon live-fire evaluation conducted semi-annually.

Chapter 8

8-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table 8-1. Collective Gunnery Tables VII–XII

Table Number Cannon Unit Tasks MLRS/HIMARS Tasks  Artillery Table VII

(Platoon RSOP)  Perform Reconnaissance

Operations for Artillery Position (06-2-3005)

 Perform Reconnaissance Operations for Artillery Position (06-2-3005)

 Artillery Table VIII (Move)

 Conduct Tactical Convoy (55-2- 4003)

 Conduct Tactical Convoy (55- 2-4003)

 Artillery Table IX (Conduct Occupation of a Position Area and Establish a Firing Capability)

 Conduct a Non-Paladin Occupation (06-2-3026)

 Establish Firing Capability (Paladin Units) (06-3-5012)

 Conduct Emergency Missions (06-3-5010)

 Perform Position Occupation (06-2-3027)

 Artillery Table X (Platoon Training)

 Artillery Table XI (Platoon Certification)

 Artillery Table XII (Platoon Qualification)

 Establish an Operations Center (06-2-1063)

 Control Cannon Firing Operations (06-3-1066)

 Determine Firing Data (06-4-5016)

 Conduct Howitzer Fire Missions (06-4-5017)

 Establish an Operations Center (06-2-1063)

 Process a Fire Mission (06-2- 5424)

 Execute an MLRS Fire Mission (06-4-5032)

ARTILLERY TABLE VII: PLATOON RSOP 8-5. Artillery Table VII is a task that must be performed by all cannon and MLRS/HIMARS platoons prior to occupation of a position by the platoon. The training of the task may be conducted as an LTX, platoon STX, or as multi-echelon training during a battery or battalion FTX.

PERFORM RECONNAISSANCE OPERATIONS FOR ARTILLERY POSITIONS

06-2-3005

CONDITIONS: The unit/element is conducting combat operations. It must displace to provide support for maneuver forces. The unit/element has received a warning order from higher HQ that included the area to reconnoiter for future operations. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The element leader plans reconnaissance operations and moves with the advance party, selects and prepares a new position area for occupation by the unit.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The unit leader planned the reconnaissance. 2. The unit leader assembled key leaders and issued the movement order. 3. NCOIC of the advance party assembled, briefed and inspected the members of

the advance party.

4. The unit/element leader reconnoitered route(s) of march. 5. The unit leader selected position areas.

*6. The advance party secures and sweeps new position area. 7. The GSG for towed cannon units prepared a new position for occupation. 8. The BOC/POC/FDC representative established fire direction capability and

established and maintained digital communications with higher HQ.

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-3

ARTILLERY TABLE VIII: MOVE 8-6. Artillery Table VIII trains the platoon to plan and conduct a tactical move. The ability of the artillery platoon to continuously move about the battlefield provides continuous fires in support of maneuver forces. This capability is a historic attribute critical to the success of Fires units. This table may be trained as a standalone STX, LTX, or as multi-echelon training during battery and higher events.

CONTROL A FIELD ARTILLERY UNIT MOVE 06-6-1038

CONDITIONS: The field artillery unit has been directed to move to a new location in order to provide support of combat operations. A movement order has been developed, disseminated, and rehearsed by the unit designated to move. All necessary personnel and equipment are available. The unit has communications with higher, adjacent, and subordinate elements. The unit has been provided guidance on the rules of engagement (ROE). Coalition forces and noncombatants may be present in the area of operations. Some iterations of this task should be conducted during periods of limited visibility. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: The unit leader directs and manages the movements of the unit. The unit moves tactically to prevent the enemy from detecting its activities or intent IAW the movement order and the tactical standing operating procedures (TSOP).

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. The S3, with the unit commander's approval, determined which elements must move based on the tactical situation.

2. The operations section determined the type of movement required. 3. The operations section coordinated new position areas and movement routes

with the supported unit and/or force FA HQ.

4. The unit commander and S3 ensured reconnaissance was conducted for proposed locations and routes.

5. The operations section coordinated with force FA HQ for additional fire support coverage during movements.

6. The S3 updated the movement plan by publishing and disseminating a movement order to subordinate elements.

7. The S3/FDO ensured tactical fire control was maintained throughout the movement.

8. The XO ensured logistical support was readily available. 9. The unit commander positioned himself to best support the supported force

and/or command the unit during movement.

CONDUCT TACTICAL CONVOY

55-2-4003 CONDITIONS: All movement in the area of operations is conducted as a tactical convoy operations. Time specified in the movement order to cross the start point (SP) has arrived. Pre-combat checks and inspections have been conducted. Soldiers have been briefed on rules of engagement (ROE), convoy speeds, intervals, communications, primary and alternate routes, designated rally points, improvised explosive devices (IEDs), rocket propelled grenades (RPGs), breakdown procedures, suicide vehicles, small arms fire, and attacks by air. The convoy commander has communications with higher HQ and serial/march unit leaders. Higher HQ and unit Tactical Standing Operating Procedures (TSOP) are available. Threat capabilities cover a full spectrum including information gathering; hostile force sympathizers, terrorist activities to include suicide bombing, air support, and reinforced squad operations in a chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) environment. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP.

Chapter 8

8-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

STANDARDS: The element(s) crosses start point (SP), checkpoints (CP), and release point (RP) at times specified in the movement order or at times adjust on the road movement table by higher HQ staff element. All SP, checkpoints, and RP times are reported to higher HQ in accordance with the movement plan. At MOPP4, performance degradation factors increase travel time.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

1. Convoy commander initiated convoy. 2. Convoy commander reported convoy information to higher HQ staff element. 3. Convoy commander enforced march discipline. 4. Unit employed march discipline.

5 Unit conducted schedule halt. 6 Unit conducted unscheduled halt. 7 Trail party recovered disable vehicle. 8 Unit conducted a night convoy. 9 Unit conducted convoy through an urban area.

10 Convoy commander monitored unit crossing RP.

ARTILLERY TABLE IX: CONDUCT OCCUPATION OF A POSITION AREA AND ESTABLISH A FIRING CAPABILITY

8-7. Artillery Table IX trains the platoon to occupy a position area and establish a firing capability under all conditions.

CANNON UNIT TASKS CONDUCT A NON-PALADIN OCCUPATION

06-2-3026

CONDITIONS: The battery/platoon is conducting combat operations. The battery/platoon has completed a tactical road march and has arrived at the release point. The advance party are present, the area is secure and prepared lead the sections to positions that have been prepared. 6400 mil operations may be required. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The BC/PL directs and controls the occupation as follows:

2. The ground guides meet battery/platoon elements at the designated entry point and lead vehicles to their designated position.

3. Each gun guide performs the following: a. Aligns the howitzer on the azimuth of fire.

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-5

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO b. Gives the initial deflection to the gunner. c. Marks the position for day and night operations.

operations.

5. The XO/PL determines, prepares, and submits the XO report as follows: a. Determines the position minimum quadrant elevation (QE) to the nearest 1.0

mils for all charges to be fired.

b. Determines a safe time setting for all fuzes to be fired. c. Immediately prepares and submits XO report to the FDC. Elements are

reported as determined. As a minimum, report the following:

(1) Battery/Platoon is laid. (2) Azimuth of lay. (3) Orienting angle (if applicable). (4) Minimum QE. (5) Distribution of pieces (deflection, vertical angle, and distance from

aiming circle).

d. Submits additional information as it becomes available to include: (1) Left and right limits. (2) Maximum Elevation. (3) Ammunition count by type to include: (a) Amount (projectile, fuze, and propellant charge). (b) Lot numbers. (4) Square weight of projectiles by lot.

6. Continue with position improvement, camouflage nets and distribution of ammunition as required.

Chapter 8

8-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Establish Firing Capability (Paladin Units) 06-3-5012

STANDARDS: The battery/platoon occupies position area and is ready to deliver fires within 3 minutes.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task *1. The platoon leader: The platoon leader is the officer in charge of firing and is

responsible for the following:

a. Safety of the firing element. b. Ensures AFCS database has been input correctly. c. Checks the survey data at SCP’s. d. Ensures verification of the howitzers location and direction per TSOP.

NOTE: Location is not a significant change to a howitzer database. 3. Gunnery Sergeant : The Gunnery Sergeant’s responsibilities are as follows:

a. Conducts an in-depth reconnaissance, selection, occupation and defense of a platoon firing position.

the unit expects to fire. +

a. Supervise the firing platoon, and maintain firing capability. + b. Supervise the occupation of the position. c. Supervise the overall maintenance of the firing platoon. d. Continue to developed and execute the firing platoon defense plan

(Chapter 3 FM 6-50.)

e. Provide the 1SG with the firing platoon defense plan for integration into the overall battery defense scheme.

f. Ensure that each chief of section knows the route to both alternate and supplementary positions.

g. Conduct independent secondary checks of all howitzer position locations. h. Verify Howitzer calibration and ensure muzzle velocity (MV) readings are

provided to the POC.

i. Verify the completion of DA Form 2408-4 (Weapon Record Data).

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-7

the 1SG for all logistical activities for the platoon.

5. Howitzer Section Chief: The Howitzer Section Chief is responsible for all actions within his section. He performs the following:

6. POC: The Platoon Operation Center is responsible to conduct a verification mission every time there is a significant change in the database, MVVs, MET, and registration data. The POC is responsible for verifying that targets do not violate fire support coordination measures and that the targets plot within the prescribed target area. It is imperative that the FDO or chief computer verifies the plot of the target and the target location that is input into LCU.

a. Ensure voice and digital communications with BN FDC and howitzers have been established. +

b. Receive piece status (HOW; UPDATE) from howitzers and verify center sector.

c. Verify howitzer location plots inside the firing area by plotting on howitzer tracking chart. +

d. Verify Database. If database information changes occur, the POC. will direct a verification mission (i.e., check/change MVVs, Registrations, Ammunition, and MET). At this time, the firing unit is ready to fire. +

e. Verify and announce XO’s min QE to the guns. + f. Ensure fire support coordination measures are posted.

7. If your AFCS becomes degraded refer to TM 9-2350-314-10 for paladin degraded operations.

Chapter 8

8-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Conduct Emergency Missions 06-3-5010

STANDARDS: The battery/platoon selected and occupied a firing position and fired the mission IAW unit TSOP and within the following time standards:

• M119A2: 11 minutes • M777: 12 minutes • M109: 11 minutes • Paladin: 75 seconds

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task *1. XO/platoon leader directs the occupation.

a. Selects a position area that facilitates timely completion of the mission. b. Notifies all elements in the column IAW TSOP. c. Selects most expeditious method of lay for the mission and lays the

howitzers. (NON PALADIN UNITS ONLY).

d. Notifies the FDC as soon as one howitzer is laid and uses first howitzer laid as the adjusting piece. (NON PALADIN UNITS ONLY).

2. The FDC/POC does the following: a. Verifies tactical data. b. Determines azimuth of fire. c. Computes the firing data for the fire mission. d. Transmits message to observer.

*3. The howitzer section chief does the following: a. The COS acknowledges receipt of the fire mission. b. Finds suitable firing location (verifies location if not GPS aided). c. Gunner verifies direction. (If required by SOP). d. COS presses ARRIVED. e. COS and Gunner verifies that mission is clear of crest when the tube is at the

lay deflection sent for the fire mission.

f. COS presses LOAD and executes fire mission. g. COS ensures proper crew drill is performed. h. COS and Gunner ensures correct firing data is set on AFCS.

4. The elements not required for fire mission establish position security.

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-9

MLRS UNIT TASKS PERFORM POSITION OCCUPATION

06-2-3027

CONDITIONS: The firing battery is conducting operations. The battery has just completed a tactical road march and has arrived at the release point (RP). Reconnaissance of the area has been completed prior to movement by the advanced party. The advanced party is in position and awaiting the battery to enter the position. Enemy situation is probable. All safety procedures will be observed throughout the operation. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. Environmental protection is a continual process. Always be alert to ways to protect our environment and reduce waste. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The firing battery occupies the position, establishes security, maintains communications, and was ready to deliver fires IAW METT-TC and the movement order/OPORD.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *Leader task

*1. The BC/1SG and the platoon leaders ensure the following: a. Vehicle interval and security are maintained when entering the area. b. Vehicles observe a track plan while occupying position. c. Positions vehicles to allow for rapid entry and exit.

2. The advanced party personnel guide all elements into their preselected positions.

a. Ground guides observe vehicle track plan. b. Ground guides observe proper signals for daytime/nighttime entry.

*3. Platoon leaders ensure launchers move to the survey control points and update/reload if needed.

*4. BC and the platoon leaders dispatch firing platoons to their OPAREAs. a. The platoon leaders ensure all platoon elements know the occupation plan. b. Each launcher is given its general operational area within the platoon area. c. The ammunition sections are briefed on the resupply method and locations of

the resupply points for the platoon area.

5. The ammo section establishes ammunition reload sites as prescribed by the platoon leader/sergeant

6. The firing sections build their data base. a. Input hide/firing locations. b. Input survey control point (SCP), reload points, release point. c. Input BOC/POC location.

7. Firing sections transmit updated FCS position data to POC/BOC and verify receipt.

*8. The battery BC/1SG maintains security. a. Position OPs around the perimeter. b. OPs establish communications with the BOC/POC. c. Establish quick reactionary force (QRF). d. Establish casualty collection point (CCP). e. Establish easily identifiable displacement routes from the OPAREA.

*9. BC and the platoon leaders coordinate defense with adjacent units. a. Establish responsibility for overlapping enemy avenues of approach between

adjacent units.

b. Exchange information on OP locations and unit signals.

Chapter 8

8-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO *10. The BC/1SG develops a defense plan.

a. Prepares the defense diagram. b. Employs all anti-armor weapons. c. Establishes automatic weapons left and right limits and the final protective

line.

*11. The BC/1SG forwards the defense sketch to the battalion TOC and retains one copy.

NOTE: The battery observes OPSEC to avoid revealing to the enemy the location and intention of the unit

12. The battery headquarters performs position improvement as follows. a. Installs camouflage and conceals equipment. b. Prepares and designates alternate positions. c. Organizes logistic elements with enough turnaround area to ease operations. d. Selects, prepares, and marks helicopter landing area and ensures. (1) The area is relatively level. (2) The area is circular and 25 to 80 meters in diameter. (3) The approach/departure direction is free of obstacles. (4) The area is marked for day and night operations.

*13. The firing platoon sergeant supervises occupation of the platoon area. a. Observes firing sections move to and occupy initial hide areas. b. Observes camouflage and position improvement.

14. Firing sections assume directed launcher response posture.

ARTILLERY TABLES X–XII: PLATOON TRAINING, CERTIFICATION, AND QUALIFICATION

8-8. Collective Artillery Tables X–XII are the culminating tables for the platoon and are the first level at which the artillery system of systems combine all supporting elements of Fires to deliver timely and accurate fire support for the maneuver force. The tasks in the platoon tables are the platoon-level tasks required to deliver fires but must include support from all sections that contribute to the gunnery solution—Survey, Meteorological, Radar, FDC, Howitzer/MLRS/HIMARS, and Observer Teams. All supporting elements have been qualified to participate in the platoon training by completing Table VI. All tasks from previous tables are supporting tasks for the platoon tables. The platoon will then train and be certified on the fire missions determined by the commander to support the METL. Table XII, Platoon Qualification, may be conducted and evaluated as a platoon LFX or as part of a platoon or battery FTX (exercise evaluation [EXEVAL]).

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-11

CANNON PLATOON TASKS ESTABLISH AN OPERATIONS CENTER

06-2-1063

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The BOC/POC/FDC establishes and maintains communications (voice and

digital) as follows: +

a. Operates FM secure radio equipment to facilitate best transmission and reception attainable.

b. Installs and maintains range enhancing antennas. c. Uses remote radio siting IAW TSOP. d. Conducts voice/digital communications check with supported and

supporting unit.

2. The BOC/POC/FDC initializes their ABCS systems. 3. The FDC establishes and maintains the ABCS data base as follows:

following:

(1) Weapons status and Battery/platoon center. (2) Firing points. (3) Survey control point locations.

(4) Hide location. (MLRS only) (5) Ammunition storage sites/Rearm points. (MLRS only) (6) Ammunition Data. (7) Muzzle velocity information. (cannon only) e. Reviews and enters observer locations. (cannon only) f. Transmits automatically generated messages to higher HQ. g. Checks MET data. h. Executes MET data. i. Ensures that down range masks are entered in the database. j. Verifies operational data inputted.

4. The BOC/POC/FDC conducts voice/digital communications check with supported and supporting unit.

5. The BOC/POC/FDC prepares and updates situation maps, fire mission logs, overlays, and firing capability charts to include the following:

a. Establishes a situation map with maneuver control and fire support coordination measures plotted.

b. Updates situation map continually as the situation develops.

Chapter 8

8-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO c. Seeks information from higher HQ to keep the map current. d. Maintains locations of friendly units. e. Maintains fire mission log. f. Maintains and updates firing capability charts. g. Prepares and updates target overlay. h. Maintains and updates battlefield geometry plots. i. Maintains ammunition status. j. Prepare and update current safety data.

6. BOC/POC/FDC leaders conduct the necessary quality control (QC) checks to verify that all automation/communications equipment is properly set up and ready for operation.

7. The BOC/POC personnel coordinate and control logistical operations IAW commanders guidance as follows:

8. The BOC/POC personnel receive/disseminate tactical information from higher HQ and subordinate elements IAW commander’s guidance and TSOP.

9. The BOC/POC/FDC performs operator and organizational maintenance on assigned equipment IAW TMs.

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-13

CONTROL CANNON FIRING OPERATIONS 06-3-1066

CONDITIONS: The battery/platoon has occupied a firing position and is conducting fire missions. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The XO/platoon leader directed actions resulting in safe, timely, and accurate delivery of fires and proper execution of fire commands.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The XO/platoon leader ensures the battery/platoon is prepared for the conduct

of fire missions and enough rounds are prepared for planned fires as follows:

a. Howitzer sections have and use only the standard fire commands. b. Ammunition is protected from weather elements and enemy fire. c. Howitzer sections know minimum QE and Ti. d. Only correct data is fired.

2. The XO/platoon leader determines and reports position data. 3. The XO/platoon leader manages and coordinates ammunition supply and

resupply as follows:

a. Associates ammunition vehicles with howitzer sections. b. Directs receipt, storage, transportation, and preparation of ammunition. c. Distributes ammunition. d. Verifies FDC ammunition status. e. Ensures segregation by type and lot. f. Ensures howitzers maintain an accurate ammunition inventory. g. Ensures ammunition updates are sent to FDC.

4. The XO/platoon leader employs direct fire as follows: a. Designates method of engagement. b. Identifies target(s). c. Directs sections to displace if necessary to supplementary positions.

5. The XO/platoon leader directs and controls displacement of howitzer sections to an offset position to conduct a fire mission as follows (NON PALADIN UNITS ONLY):

a. Designates howitzer section(s) to displace. b. Ensures a fire direction capability accompanies the howitzer(s). c. Ensures security commensurate with the threat is maintained. d. Ensures communications with the battery/platoon is maintained.

Chapter 8

8-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Determine Firing Data 06-4-5016

CONDITIONS: The battery is conducting combat or simulated combat operations. The FDC computer systems are operational and have been initialized. FDC has received a fire order from battalion and a fire mission has been received. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4.

STANDARDS: The FDC responded to calls for fires, computed and transmitted firing data to the howitzers IAW commander’s guidance, TSOP and applicable FM.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The FDC determines/updates registration data as follows:

a. Transmits MTO to FO of impending registration. b. Enters and reviews registration data. c. Transmits data to gun. d. Coordinates between FO and gun. e. At conclusion of impact phase, ensures FO sends refinement data if

applicable then records as registration point, time repeat (if applicable).

f. Transmits fuze time data to gun (if applicable). g. Reviews subsequent time adjustments and enters (if applicable). h. Ensures the FO sends time refinement if applicable, then records as time,

EOM.

i. Updates backup system. j. Sends registration data to higher HQ (if applicable).

2. A radar HB/MPI registration is conducted by voice with a Firefinder. FDC does the following:

a. Selects an orienting point. Determines height of burst (HOB), ammunition lots, charge, piece to fire, and radar section to observe the registration.

b. Transmits MTO to radar. c. Enters and reviews registration data. d. Continues registration until desired usable rounds are obtained. e. Sends EOM and updates backup system. f. Sends registration data to higher HQ (if applicable). NOTE: AN/TPQ-36/37 (Firefinder) MTO must include TGT NO, TGT GRID/ALT, TOF, MAX ORD

and FU GRID/ALT, angle of fall, quadrant elevation. 3. A registration has been conducted. Meteorological information was valid.

Registration corrections must be verified for validity.

4. After the registration is completed and survey section has surveyed the location of the orienting station (ORSTA), FDC does the following:

a. Enters ORSTA location and/or azimuth of lay and determines new piece locations.

b. Updates backup systems. 5. A fire mission has been received. FDC does the following:

a. Reviews Call for Fire (CFF). b. Checks situation map. c. Checks for intervening crests. d. Enters CFF. e. Verifies firing data with backup system.

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-15

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO f. Transmits data to guns. g. Sends MTO. h. Sends EOM to the guns when EOM is sent from observer. i. Computes re plot data (if applicable).

6. The FDC determines firing data for the following adjust fire missions: a. Low angle adjust with FO. b. Low angle adjust with laser. c. Observed fire with radar. d. Low angle adjust with AFSO. e. Simultaneous missions. f. Emergency fire missions. The battery has been assigned a fire mission and all

automated computational means are inoperative.

g. Illumination. h. Coordinated Illumination. i. Quick Smoke. j. High angle adjust with FO. k. High angle adjust with laser. l. FASCAM (if applicable).

7. The FDC determines firing data for the following Fire For Effect fire missions: a. Immediate Smoke. b. Immediate Suppression. c. Large Irregular Shaped Target. d. Time On Target. e. Fire For Effect When Ready. f. Fire For Effect At My Command. g. Mass Mission. h. Copperhead Target of Opportunity (if applicable). i. Copperhead Priority (if applicable). j. Priority Target. k. Final Protective Fire. l. Schedule of Fires/Fire Plans. m. Counterfire.

Chapter 8

8-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

CONDUCT HOWITZER FIRE MISSIONS 06-4-5017

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer emplaced and ready to fire, communications with the POC, section equipment and personnel, and weapon TM. A warning order and fire commands have been issued by the FDC and received at the howitzer section. Aiming references have been established. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP4. STANDARDS: The howitzer section prepared and fired the howitzer in accordance with the fire commands.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The section chief verifies fire mission data is safe. If deflection is outside of

traverse the section chief directs the crew to reorient the weapon to the new direction of fire and veifies sight to crest.

appropriate fuze-setter

8. The chief of section checks setting if time fuze is used for proper time setting 9. The crew prepares projectile for loading and ramming.

10. The chief of section will verify ammunition lot and charge before gunner loads it in the tube.

11. The crew lays the howitzer for deflection and quadrant. 12. The section chief verifies lay. 13. The crew loads projectile when directed. 14. Chief of section will command "Fire" and the number 1 man will fire. The crew

fires when directed IAW fire commands.

15. The crew complies with any additional command (for example, cease fire). 16. The crew makes required entries on record of missions fired (DA Form 4513). 17. The section chief ensures that the howitzer's ammunition status is updated IAW

TSOP.

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-17

MLRS/HIMARS PLATOON TASKS ESTABLISH AN OPERATIONS CENTER

06-2-1063

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The BOC/POC/FDC establishes and maintains communications (voice and

digital) as follows: +

a. Operates FM secure radio equipment to facilitate best transmission and reception attainable.

b. Installs and maintains range enhancing antennas. c. Uses remote radio siting IAW TSOP. d. Conducts voice/digital communications check with supported and supporting

unit.

2. The BOC/POC/FDC initializes their ABCS systems. 3. The FDC establishes and maintains the ABCS data base as follows:

following:

4. The BOC/POC/FDC conducts voice/digital communications check with supported and supporting unit.

5. The BOC/POC/FDC prepares and updates situation maps, fire mission logs, overlays, and firing capability charts to include the following:

a. Establishes a situation map with maneuver control and fire support coordination measures plotted.

Chapter 8

8-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO b. Updates situation map continually as the situation develops. c. Seeks information from higher HQ to keep the map current. d. Maintains locations of friendly units. e. Maintains fire mission log. f. Maintains and updates firing capability charts. g. Prepares and updates target overlay. h. Maintains and updates battlefield geometry plots. i. Maintains ammunition status. j. Prepare and update current safety data.

6. BOC/POC/FDC leaders conduct the necessary quality control (QC) checks to verify that all automation/communications equipment is properly set up and ready for operation.

7. The BOC/POC personnel coordinate and control logistical operations IAW commanders guidance as follows:

8. The BOC/POC personnel receive/disseminate tactical information from higher HQ and subordinate elements IAW commander’s guidance and TSOP.

9. The BOC/POC/FDC performs operator and organizational maintenance on assigned equipment IAW TMs.

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-19

PROCESS A FIRE MISSION 06-2-5424

STANDARDS: The BOC/POC/FDC controlled and coordinated fire missions IAW commander’s guidance, TSOP and applicable FMs.

the mission to the selected firing element.

a. Monitors the type of fire control: When Ready (WR), Time on Target (TOT), Time to Fire (TTF), On-call (ONC), At My Command (AMC), Time-Time on Target (TTOT), Time When Ready (TWR).

b. Confirms that the mission is fired IAW the assigned method of fire control. 4. BOC/POC/FDC tracks the mission to ensure the firing element receives the

mission and the firing element sends the mission status message.

5. BOC/POC/FDC ensures the firing element has the correct time for TOT/TTF type fire control.

6. BOC/POC/FDC issues the command to fire if the mission is “at my command” and if the BOC/POC/FDC is the originating source.

7. BOC/POC/FDC reassigns the mission IAW unit TSOP if the firing element selected is unable to comply.

8. BOC/POC/FDC analyzes any capabilities mission received and informs the controlling HQ of the status of capabilities missions.

9. BOC/FDC ensures the POCs are kept informed of the need for any special Munition Weapon Descriptor files required by the firing element to fire a special munition.

10. BOC/POC/FDC executes mission fired report when received from the firing element.

11. The POC monitors all fire missions and acts as a relay when needed because of poor communications.

Chapter 8

8-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

EXECUTE AN MLRS FIRE MISSION 06-4-5032

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. Receive the fire mission.

NOTE: The launcher heading will be in accordance with the technical manual, however some units have parking standards more rigorous then the IETM. Evaluation of this task will be in accordance with the TM if the unit TSOP does not address this issue.

a. Gunner acknowledges the fire mission and reviews the data. b. Gunner replies to the fire mission with a WILCO or a CANTCO.

2. Section Chief verifies the fire mission data. NOTE: The method of fire control tells you what method is used to give you orders to fire. For AMC

and FWR missions, launcher time standard is 3 minutes, JED and JEH rockets only. Time starts when the section receives the mission and stops when the first rocket is fired for FWR mission, or when the ready to fire message is sent for AMC mission. The time for the launcher to move to the firing point is included in the 3 minutes. The methods are: (1) At My Command (AMC). (2) Fire When Ready (FWR). (3) Time On Target (TOT). (4) Time To Fire (TTF). (5) Timed When Ready (TWR). (6) Timed Time On Target (TTT). (7) On-call.

NOTE: On-call is a method of fire control stored in the database, however amended data from FDC is required to perform fire mission.

a. Driver: (1) Raises selector to neutral and sets hand brake. (2) Ensures that the carrier launcher interconnect switch is set to ON. (3) Checks that the carrier volts gauge is indicating in the upper 50 to 75

percent of the green zone.

(4) Sets suspension lockout switch. (5) Engages SLO, observes light. (6) Sets the vent fan control override switch to OFF. (7) Ensures all doors, hatches, windows, and louvers are closed. (8) Sets the carrier vehicle damper to firing. (9) Sets the carriers vehicle vent fan switch to medium and checks

differential pressure gauge for a positive pressure of 0.25.

(10) Sets the carrier vehicle damper to normal after mission is fired and LM is stowed.

b. Gunner: (1) Presses Launcher Lay PF-key when directed. (2) For AMC method of fire does the following:

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-21

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO (a) When the Launcher-module (LM) has moved to the first aim

point, and the ready to fire message has been sent to FDC, awaits CALL FOR FIRE (CFF) message from FDC containing fire command.

(b) Upon receipt of fire Command, arms and fires weapon when prompted.

(3) For FWR method of fire, does the following: (a) When the launcher module (LM) has moved to the first aim

point, sets the ARM/SAFE switch to ARM.

(b) When the prompt FIRE WEAPONS is displayed, fires weapons. (4) For TOT and TTF methods of fire does the following: (a) Presses LCHR LAY PFK before countdown time reaches zero on

the NLT for launcher lay clock.

(b) Observes CNTDN = NET FOR FIRING message. (c) Sets SAFE/ARM switch to ARM when prompted. (d) Fires weapons when FIRE WEAPON prompt is displayed. (e) When NET countdown reaches 20 seconds, observes ARM

ROCKET prompt.

(f) Sets SAFE/ARM switch to ARM before countdown reaches zero. (g) Fires rockets same as above when FIRE prompt is displayed. (5) TWR and TTT methods of fire, does the following: (a) Observes CNTDN=NET FOR LCHR LAY and CNTDN=NLT

FOR LCHR LAY clocks

(b) Presses LCHR LAY PFK at appropriate time. (c) Observes CNTDN=NET FOR FIRING and CNTDN=NLT

FIRING clocks

(d) When prompted, arms weapons (e) Fires weapons when prompted. (6) After the mission has been fired, and END OF MISSION SAFE

WEAPONS prompt has been displayed, sets SAFE/ARM switch to SAFE.

(7) Presses STOW PFK and observes the LM STOWED message on the display screen.

c. Section Chief: (1) Section Chief visually checks that LM lays in the direction of fire

during launcher aiming process.

(2) Checks for tube fires after weapons are safe and prior to stowing LM. (3) Verifies that travel locks have engaged and listens to ensure that LDS

powers down after LM is stowed.

(4) Directs driver to Move launcher off point IAW unit end of mission (EOM) instructions.

3. Section Chief directs the fire mission. 4. Position the Launcher.

a. Move Launcher to the firing point. NOTE: Positioning the Launcher within 100 mils from the heading is recommended with a maximum

of 240 mils, and with an 89 mil slope recommended with a maximum 266 mils b. Place the Launcher on the preferred heading. c. Section Chief verifies launcher heading and slope.

Chapter 8

8-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 5. The firing section prepares to execute the fire mission.

a. Driver prepares the cab. b. Gunner lays LM and confirms fire mission data. c. Section Chief visually verifies the LM direction. d. Section Chief Verifies that the cab is secure.

CAUTION: Fire in an RP launch tube, after firing, is always a possibility. A check of each RP for fire should be made after each firing.

6. Section Chief directs Gunner to arm and fire when prompted. 7. The firing section prepares to move.

a. Gunner safes the weapon. b. Gunner sends mission fired report. c. Section Chief verifies that no tube fires occurred. d. Gunner stows the LM.

8. Section Chief directs the Driver to move the Launcher to a designated area.

Collective FA Gunnery Training

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 8-23

PROCESS A PRECISION FIRE MISSION 06-6-6055

CONDITIONS: The fires battalion is in an area of operation and conducting fires in support of the maneuver commander and has received a WARNO fire mission request using a precision munition or precision guided munition. Voice and digital communications are established. The howitzer/MLRS/HIMARS sections have established a precision firing capability. Enemy indirect fire is possible. This task will be performed during day or night operations and all weather conditions. All section personnel, equipment, ammunition, and charges are available to conduct the mission. Time is available to accomplish the fire mission. Coalition forces and noncombatants may be present in the operational environment and target area. Some iterations of this task should be performed in MOPP. STANDARDS: Conduct the precision mission within the time requirement to support the commander’s intent and achieving limited collateral damage as determined within the commander’s guidance and verified through the damage assessment.

Task Steps and Performance Measures GO NO-GO 1. The request to fire on a preplanned target was received or the FO requested a

precision fire mission.

2. The Fires Cell performed tactical fire direction. 3. The Air Defense Air Management/Brigade Aviation Element (ADAM/BAE)

cell cleared the airspace for fires.

4. The FC issued the CFF. 5. The BN/Btry Fire Direction Center (FDC) processed the mission. 6. The Firing Units executed the fire mission. 7. The Bn Fire Direction Center (FDC) requested Battle Damage Assessment.

Table 8-2. Tasks for Collective Gunnery Tables XIII–XVIII

Task Number Task Title Reference Cannon Battery Tasks

06-2-1063 Establish an Operations Center UTL-DTMS 06-3-1066 Control Cannon Firing Operations UTL-DTMS 06-4-5016 Determine Firing Data UTL-DTMS 06-4-5017 Conduct Howitzer Fire Missions UTL-DTMS

MLRS Battery Tasks 06-2-1063 Establish an Operations Center UTL-DTMS 06-4-5032 Execute an MLRS Fire Mission UTL-DTMS 06-2-5424 Process a Fire Missions UTL-DTMS

Battalion Tasks 11-2-0302 Establish a Single Voice Radio Net UTL-DTMS 06-1-5001 Execute Battalion Fire Missions UTL-DTMS 06-4-5044 Process Fire Plans UTL-DTMS 06-6-6055 Process a Precision Fire Mission UTL-DTMS 06-6-5060 Conduct Counterfire UTL-DTMS

ARTILLERY TABLES XIII–XV: BATTERY TRAINING, CERTIFICATION, AND QUALIFICATION

8-9. Units organized and equipped to operate at the battery level use the identical tasks as the platoons in the previous section. These tasks are trained during battery LFXs, FTXs, or FTXs (EXEVAL). If applicable, this table should be conducted concurrently with the Brigade Fire Control Exercise (FCX). External evaluations

Chapter 8

8-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

are conducted and resourced by the brigade. The battalion commander will certify that all leaders have been safety certified within the past 6 months and that the battery has demonstrated proficiency on all METL-related gunnery tasks. The commander must also certify that all supporting sections (Survey, Met, Radar, and Observer Teams) have qualified on Table VI prior to battery live-fire.

ARTILLERY TABLES XVI–XVIII: BATTALION TRAINING, CERTIFICATION, AND QUALIFICATION

8-10. Battalion-level artillery gunnery tables train the battalion to conduct battalion-level fire missions and to mass fires at the battalion level. Battalion-level training and certification is based on battery/platoon qualification standards as stated in paragraphs 8-8 and 8-9 and the commander’s informal evaluation of tasks in Table XVI. The training of battalion gunnery tables may be conducted as a battalion LFX or FTX. An external evaluation requires division-level support and oversight. The tasks to be trained by both the cannon and MLRS/HIMARS battalion include the tasks in all previous tables as well as the tasks in Table 8-2. Fires Battalions may expect to fire a precision munition during a NTC/CTC rotation.

COLLECTIVE GUNNERY TRAINING IN SUPPORT OF COMBINED ARMS TRAINING

8-11. The culminating events for gunnery training in the BCTs are fire control exercises (FCXs) and CALFEXs. Fires battalions assigned to the BCTs are resourced to support CALFEXs and must ensure that all subordinate elements have qualified (Tables VI and XII) prior to participation in support of the CALFEX. Rehearsals for the CALFEX may be conducted as BCT FCXs using the Call For Fire Trainer as the supporting simulation.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-1

Appendix A

JADOCS This appendix will present an overview of the Field Artillery Tactical Data Systems (FATDS) software that is used by Fire Support and Field Artillery organizations. This appendix will specifically discuss the command and control (C2) software utilized with the Joint Automated Deep Operations Coordination System (JADOCS). This appendix is not to be used as part of the individual, crew/section certification, but will provide the Master Gunner and section chiefs a resource to train and prepare personnel that will encounter JADOCS. Up-to-date JADOCS PowerPoint presentation data can be found on the JADOCS Training Presentations site. Other JADOCS resources are available through the JADOCS help menu within your system and the IETM.

https://www.us.army.mil/suite/page/633009).

GENERAL SOFTWARE USAGE A-1. The JADOCS is a targeting and mission management software suite that bridges Joint and Combined automation across echelons in four-dimensional space. JADOCS enables near real-time horizontal and vertical coordination and deconfliction in order to expedite mission accomplishment, reduce fratricide, and significantly increase the efficiency and effectiveness of land, air, and naval forces. Currently, JADOCS is primarily operated on standalone locally procured commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) hardware.

PUBLISH AND SUBSCRIBE SERVICE (PASS) A-2. The U.S. Army currently uses PASS as a means of exchanging data between ABCS. The Program Manager Battle Command (PM BC) has created a product for other systems to interface with PASS called PASS Client Interface (PCI). PCI enables JADOCS to publish and subscribe to items of interest on the PASS server. When configuring Army servers, PCI should be installed and configured in order to maintain situational awareness with other ABCS.

TRAINING REFERENCE A-3. Within this appendix we are providing training material that will enhance the users of this circular with the ability to function in JADOCS using the managers. The training provided below is an overview of all JADOCS Managers, followed by a walkthrough of the Fires Manager. Although there are a multitude of other managers within JADOCS, understanding one manager allows easy manipulation of the other available managers.

JADOCS MANAGERS A-4. In the paragraphs below you will find an overview of the JADOCS Managers that are currently available within the JADOCS software:

• Mission Managers  Joint Time-Sensitive Target (JTST) Manager: The JTST Manager is used to prosecute time-

sensitive targets (TSTs). The JTST Manager takes the target from acquisition, development, tracking, execution, and assessment. JADOCS does this through a parallel process across echelons so that the information reaches all nodes simutaneously. The JTST Manager also provides tools to pair a variety of attack options against the target and facilitate cross- component coordination. There are also tools to move the target to and from the Fires Manager, ITM, and other managers.

 Joint Fires Manager (JFM): The JFM is used for coordination and engagement of targets with a significance of TST, High-Payoff Targets (HPTs), and High-value Targets (HVTs) within a Joint Fires environment. The JFM interoperates with the ITM, the Fires Manager, the MTM, the TDN Manager, and the JTST Manager in the joint targeting and fires process. The JFM was originally designed for HPT and HVT only. As of JADOCS version 1.0.1.2, coordination of

Appendix A

A-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

targets of any significance can be done in JFM if desired. This eliminates the need to operate two different target coordination managers to accomplish similar functions.

 Fires Manager: The Fires Manager automates and simplifies the coordination and execution processes within the Fires Cell (FC). JADOCS interfaces with all of the currently fielded Fire Direction Systems (FDSs) including the AFATDS. JADOCS is particularly useful when dealing with fleeting targets, as it significantly reduces the time required for coordinating a mission and clearing the necessary airspace. JADOCS will automatically check missions against multiple databases and other managers for conflicts. As a fire mission is processed, each element is notified when action is required at that station. All workstations are continually updated on the approval and firing status of all missions. Once a target has been cleared for firing, JADOCS offers a simple windowed interface for communicating directly with the FDS, including the ability to send the CFF.

 Intra-Air Operations Center (AOC) Target Manager (ITM): The AOC ITM is intended for an Air Force AOC to manage and execute TSTs. Targets addressed in the ITM are typically targets of opportunity not necessarily found on the daily ATO. The ITM gives the AOC the ability to assign aircraft, otherwise unassigned within the ATO, to a target. The ITM also allows missions to be handed off to other managers, or other components to be addressed.

 Maritime Target Manager (MTM): The MTM is used to coordinate and engage targets assigned to or developed by the Maritime Component Commander (MCC) within a Joint Operations environment. The MTM allows for both horizontal and vertical coordination of targets, and the internal coordination of targets. Whether a target originates from MTM or one of the other component target managers, it can be effectively coordinated and deconflicted from within MTM.

 Combat Search and Rescue (CSAR) Manager: The Search and Rescue (SAR) Manager is used in theaters so that Joint Task Forces (JTFs) and their component commands can quickly and effectively coordinate personnel recovery, SAR, and CSAR missions. JADOCS supports these missions by allowing the Joint Search and Rescue Center (JSRC) at the JTF level, the Rescue Coordination Centers (RCCs) located in each of the Component commands, and the executing units of the SAR mission to coordinate with each other.

 Close Air Support (CAS) Manager: The CAS Manager is primarily designed to allow a command to dynamically manage CAS assets and missions, usually in support of counterfire operations. If it is decided that a mission is better prosecuted by CAS assets than by other means, it can be passed into or generated in the CAS Manager for assignment to an aircraft by an Air Support Operations Center or Direct Air Support Center.

• Fires Asset Managers  Artillery Location Manager: The Artillery Location Manager displays a list of the friendly

artillery unit locations and their status. This data can be updated locally or updated automatically by the receipt of certain Tactical Fire Direction System/Variable Message Format (TACFIRE/VMF) or the United States Message Transfer Format (USMTF) messages from external systems. Mission managers rely on the data in this manager to determine mission execution options. The information associated with each unit includes, location, status, munitions, and range coverage.

 ATO/Integrated Tasking Order (ITO) Execution Manager: The ATO/ITO Execution Manager is used to track the execution of nominated missions that have been included in an ATO/ITO. Reviews/Updates of the mission are required at 8- and 4-hour intervals before TOT. Target locations may be automatically updated upon receipt of an S309 message if links between target ID (Basic Encyclopedia [BE] numbers) and All-Source Analysis System (ASAS) master keys are established in the BE number to ASAS Manager. This manager is generally used in combination with the ATO/ITO Planning Manager.

 Alert (On-Call) Interdiction (XINT) Manager – The XINT Manager provides tools for monitoring and employing the XINT missions on the ATO/ITO. XINT missions are missions that are not assigned a specific target and are oftentimes assigned to an Engagement Zone. The management concept is very similar to that used with the DCA Manager.

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-3

 Defensive Counter Air (DCA) Manager – The DCA Manager provides a tool for maintaining situation awareness of in-the-air and ground-alert DCA assets.

• Target Development Managers  Target Data Nomination (TDN) Manager – The TDN Manager is intended to develop

information and coordination of a target before it is either executed using the ITM or the JTST. This manager can either be set up to coordinate across echelons or can be used internally to vet targets. Additionally, the Collateral Damage Estimate (CDE) Wizard is located in this manager. JADOCS is the only digital system certified to produce a valid CDE call.

 ATO/ITO Planning Manager – This manager provides tools for the creation, coordination, transmission, and validation of AI nominations. Several echelons typically use this manager to pass their nominations to the next higher echelon. The nominations are then sent to the Theater Battle Management Core System (TBMCS). Then the ATO/ITO is published and scanned for targets nominated by JADOCS. This manager allows for racking and stacking of targets received from other JADOCS into a prioritized Candidate Target List.

 Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance (ISR) Manager – The ISR Manager provides a tool for defining, coordinating, and managing intelligence assets. Resources can be defined and associated with a NAI, TAI, or other target of interest thus providing a depiction of the assignment and synchronization of ISR assets to the target. Additionally, an assessment of the target can be made and transferred with a specific mission into a mission manager.

 NAI Manager – The NAI Manager allows the user to manage and display NAIs, which are areas of intelligence/targeting interest for user-designated time intervals. Originally developed as part of the Joint ISR Manager, which permitted assignment of resources to areas of interest (both NAIs and TAIs), the NAI Manager is presently used as a standalone tool. Hence, some of the original functionality of the tool is no longer applicable. NAI data may be received from and transmitted to JSWS via USMTF Request for Information (RI) F104 RI Message.

• Battlefield Layout and Coordination Managers  Coordination Measure Manager (CMM) – The CMM provides tools to create, transmit,

receive, modify, and display coordination measures (areas where fires are restricted or controlled) or battlefield geometries. It includes receipt and transmittal of coordination measures from an AFATDS, ASAS, or another JADOCS node. JADOCS’ exchange of coordination measures with AFATDS via the AFATDS XML Engine (AXE) interface supports coordination measures with up to 999 points.

 Engagement Zone Manager – The Engagement Zone Manager provides coordination and deconfliction capabilities for defined engagement zones. Engagement zones are used to designate areas in which generally either air or ground effects are placed without further coordination with the other component. Since lethal effects are common in engagement zones, it is important that friendly units be well informed of such areas so that they are avoided during these times.

 ATO/ITO Manager – The ATO/ITO Manager allows the user to quickly view, filter, plot, and analyze the data for all entries in a given ATO/ITO. Since the number of ATO/ITO entries can be large, this manager provides the user with diferent methods to sort and filter the list. The entries are also displayed graphically on the map as overlays.

 Airspace Control Order (ACO) Manager – The ACO Manager display window lists the Airspace Control Measures (ACMs) that have been imported from the ACO. The ACO Manager provides the ability to view, sort, filter, and plot a selected ACO. Use of the ACO Manager requires that one or more ACOs have been imported into JADOCS. The ACO defines a number of ACMs, such as Restricted Operating Zones (ROZs), which may bound operating areas or restricted access to certain airspace.

 Airspace Control Point (ACP) Manager – The ACP Manager allows the user to enter, import, and print ACPs. During flight, aviators use ACPs as visual reference guides. They are necessary for route planning functions in the JADOCS Aviation Routes Manager. In most cases, these are predefined, theater-wide points. ACP start and end times are processed via simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) messages from the Tactical Airspace Integration System (TAIS).

Appendix A

A-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

 ATO/ITO Change Request Manager – The ATO/ITO Change Request Manager is a tool for the horizontal coordination of request for changes to the ATO/ITO. Data is not currently pushed into the TBMCS or otherwise relayed from this manager.

 Aviation Route Manager – The Aviation Route Manager provides a set of tools for the creation and management of aviation routes for planning deep strikes. Routes can be built using the ACPs defined in the ACP Manager. These routes can be published so that they are available to all users. Then they can be used with the SEAD planning functionality in the Fires Manager to develop a supporting SEAD plan. Adding the routes in the Aviation Routes Manager can create aviation routes and their corresponding corridor filters. Likewise, creating a geographic corridor filter adds a route to the Aviation Routes Manager. Either approach can be used.

 Airspace Control Request (ACR) Manager – The ACR Manager provides a tool for imitating, coordinating, and tracking the status of ACRs, which are used to coordinate various types of ACMs. These measures include ROZs, air corridors and routes, high-density control zones, No Fire Areas (NFAs), and others. They are coordinated between the requesting agency, which is typically a Corps or Division Airspace Command and Control (AC2) cell, and the Air Force through the Battlefield Coordination Element (BCE).

• Location Managers  Base Status Manager – The Base Status Manager provides a tool for tracking the status of

airfields, ports, and other locations of interest. The manager provides tracking of overall base status as well as the status of the airfields, facilities, logistics, and capabilities for the fire response, explosive ordance disposal, and so forth.

 Site Manager – The Site Manager provides a tool for identifying and displaying the perimeter area occupied by a site, as well as tracking the status of that site. The manager provides tracking of overall site status as well as the status of the site’s airfields, facilities, utilities, communications, and medical capabilities. It also provides tools for updating the security status of a site and reporting weather conditions. Finally, the manager provides a tool for evaluating facilities, friendly and enemy forces, and other entities that fall within the perimeter of the site or within a user-defined range of that perimeter.

A-5. The JADOCS Fires Manager allows the user to add, edit, and delete targets on the display. You will also be able to produce target reports that are vital to the COP and situational awareness. The Fires Manager increases your ability to locate targets while identifying any air hazards that will need to be coordinated or deconflicted prior to initiation of a CFF. The Fires Manager provides the basic methodology to input and processing a target to AFATDS (See figures A-1 through A-79).

A-6. -).

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-5

Figure A-1. JADOCS fires manager

Figure A-2. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-3. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-4. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-5. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-7

Figure A-6. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-7. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-8. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-9. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-9

Figure A-10.

JADOC S fires

manage r

(cont’d. )

Figure A-11. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-12. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-13. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-11

Figure A-14. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-16. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-16. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-17. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-13

Figure A-18. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-19. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-20. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-21. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-15

Figure A-22. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-23. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-24. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-25. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-17

Figure A-26. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-27. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-28. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-29. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-19

Figure A-30. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-31. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-32. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-33. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-21

Figure A-34. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-35. JADOCS Fires Manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-36. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-37. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-23

Figure A-38. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-39. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-40. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-41. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-25

Figure A-42. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-43. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-44. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-45. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-27

Figure A-46. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-47. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-48. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-49. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-29

Figure A-50. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-51. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-30 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-52. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-53. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-31

Figure A-54. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-55. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-32 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-56. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-57. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-33

Figure A-58. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-59. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-34 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-60. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-61. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-35

Figure A-62. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-63. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-36 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-64. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-65. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-37

Figure A-66. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-67. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-38 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-68. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-69. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-39

Figure A-70. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-71. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-40 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-72. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-73. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-41

Figure A-74. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-75. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Appendix A

A-42 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure A-76. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

Figure A-77. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

JADOCS

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 A-43

Figure A-78. JADOCS fires manager (cont’d.)

FIGURE A-79. JADOCS FIRES MANAGER (CONT’D.)

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-1

Appendix B

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables B-1. Use rapid fire tables only when ∠1 + ∠2 is ≤ 300 mils. ∠1 is the greatest site to crest as reported by the COS. Use Table B-1 to extract ∠2 for a given PCR:*

Note:Firing Table (FT) RFT-155-1 for the MACS charge is currently located on the Firing Tables and Ballistics (FTaB) site on AKO (https://www.us.army.mil/suite/page/131620) as an Electronic Tabular Firing Table (ETFT).

Figure B-1. PCR range table

Note. All M557 and M564 tables are used for unarmed VT fuzes. Use EL on VT tables only when firing less than minimum safe time

Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I

FUZE: M557, M564 PROPELLANT: M67 WEAPON: M102/M119 Piece-to-Crest Range CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG 6 CHG 7

100 67 65 63 61 59 58 57 200 54 50 46 42 39 36 34

Appendix B

B-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I (Continued)

300 58 51 45 40 35 30 27 400 68 57 50 43 36 30 25 500 78 68 56 47 39 31 25 600 91 79 65 53 42 33 25 700 105 89 74 59 46 36 27 800 116 98 82 64 50 38 28 900 128 110 89 70 54 41 29

1000 143 121 98 77 59 45 31 1100 162 136 109 86 64 49 36 1200 177 147 118 93 69 53 36 1300 190 159 128 99 74 56 37 1400 205 170 137 106 79 60 40 1500 219 182 146 113 84 64 43 1600 248 203 159 124 91 69 45 1700 262 214 170 130 95 72 50 1800 278 226 179 137 101 76 50 1900 293 240 189 147 106 81 53 2000 310 252 199 154 112 85 56 2100 349 280 218 166 119 92 60 2200 367 293 228 173 125 97 63 2300 385 308 238 181 131 101 66 2400 404 321 249 189 136 106 69 2500 424 337 261 199 144 111 72 2600 493 372 282 212 152 115 75 2700 514 389 292 220 158 119 78 2800 536 403 305 228 164 124 81 2900 558 421 316 236 170 129 85 3000 584 438 328 245 176 134 88 3100 503 359 263 185 142 94 3200 522 371 270 191 148 98 3300 541 385 281 198 155 102 3400 562 398 289 204 160 105 3500 583 413 300 210 165 109 3600 457 322 221 171 113 3700 472 331 227 176 117 3800 488 340 234 181 123 3900 502 352 240 187 128 4000 519 362 247 192 132 4500 690 436 290 227 157

FUZE: M557, M564 PROPELLANT: M67 WEAPON: M102/M119

Piece-to-Crest Range CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG 6 CHG 7

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-3

Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I (Continued)

5000 531 337 257 180 5500 670 387 298 208 6000 450 334 234 6500 527 389 270 7000 633 430 299 7500 516 340 8000 565 375 8500 431 9000 471 9500 561

10000 609

FUZE: M557, M564 PROPELLANT: M67 WEAPON: M102/M119

Piece-to-Crest Range CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG 6 CHG 7

Appendix B

B-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I (Continued)

FUZE: M513 PROPELLANT: M67 WEAPON: M102/M119 Piece-to-

Crest Range CHG 1 EL TI

CHG 2 EL TI

CHG 3 EL TI

CHG 4 EL TI

CHG 5 EL TI

CHG 6 EL TI

CHG 7 EL TI

100 67 8.0 65 8.0 63 8.0 61 8.0 59 8.0 58 8.0 57 8.0

200 54 8.0 50 8.0 46 8.0 42 8.0 39 8.0 36 8.0 34 8.0

300 58 8.0 51 8.0 45 8.0 40 8.0 35 8.0 30 8.0 27 8.0

400 259 8.0 57 8.0 50 8.0 43 8.0 36 8.0 30 8.0 25 8.0

500 230 8.0 220 8.0 208 8.0 47 8.0 39 8.0 31 8.0 25 8.0

600 218 9.0 206 9.0 194 8.0 180 8.0 42 8.0 33 8.0 25 8.0

700 241 9.0 198 9.0 183 9.0 168 9.0 155 8.0 36 8.0 108 8.0

800 211 10.0 193 10.0 177 9.0 159 9.0 145 8.0 133 8.0 108 8.0

900 213 10.0 195 10.0 174 10.0 155 9.0 139 9.0 126 8.0 108 8.0

1000 219 11.0 197 11.0 174 10.0 153 10.0 135 9.0 121 9.0 108 8.0

1100 232 11.0 206 11.0 179 11.0 156 10.0 134 9.0 119 9.0 103 8.0

1200 240 12.0 210 12.0 181 11.0 156 10.0 132 10.0 116 9.0 99 9.0

1300 249 13.0 218 12.0 187 11.0 158 11.0 133 10.0 115 10.0 96 9.0

1400 260 13.0 225 12.0 192 12.0 161 11.0 133 10.0 115 10.0 95 9.0

1500 270 14.0 233 13.0 197 12.0 164 12.0 135 11.0 115 10.0 94 9.0

1600 295 14.0 250 13.0 206 13.0 171 12.0 138 11.0 115 10.0 92 10.0

1700 307 15.0 259 14.0 215 13.0 175 12.0 140 11.0 116 11.0 92 10.0

1800 321 15.0 269 15.0 222 14.0 180 13.0 144 12.0 119 11.0 93 10.0

1900 333 16.0 280 15.0 229 14.0 187 13.0 146 12.0 120 11.0 93 10.0

2000 348 16.0 290 16.0 237 15.0 192 14.0 150 12.0 123 12.0 94 11.0

2100 385 17.0 316 16.0 254 15.0 202 14.0 155 13.0 127 12.0 96 11.0

2200 402 18.0 328 17.0 263 15.0 208 14.0 160 13.0 131 12.0 98 11.0

2300 418 18.0 341 17.0 271 16.0 214 15.0 164 14.0 134 13.0 99 11.0

2400 435 19.0 352 18.0 280 16.0 220 15.0 167 14.0 136 13.0 100 12.0

2500 454 20.0 367 18.0 291 17.0 229 16.0 174 14.0 140 13.0 102 12.0

2600 523 20.0 402 19.0 312 17.0 242 16.0 182 15.0 144 14.0 105 12.0

2700 543 21.0 418 19.0 321 18.0 249 16.0 187 15.0 148 14.0 107 13.0

2800 564 22.0 431 20.0 333 18.0 256 17.0 192 15.0 152 14.0 109 13.0

2900 585 22.0 448 21.0 343 19.0 263 17.0 197 16.0 156 15.0 112 13.0

3000 610 23.0 464 21.0 354 19.0 271 18.0 202 16.0 160 15.0 114 13.0

3100 528 22.0 384 20.0 288 18.0 210 16.0 167 15.0 119 14.0

3200 546 23.0 395 20.0 296 19.0 215 17.0 171 16.0 122 14.0

3300 564 23.0 408 21.0 304 19.0 221 17.0 177 16.0 125 14.0

3400 584 24.0 420 22.0 312 20.0 226 18.0 182 16.0 127 15.0

3500 605 25.0 435 22.0 322 20.0 232 18.0 187 17.0 131 15.0

3600 793 25.0 478 23.0 343 20.0 242 18.0 191 17.0 134 15.0

3700 493 23.0 352 21.0 248 19.0 197 17.0 138 16.0

3800 508 24.0 360 21.0 254 19.0 201 18.0 143 16.0

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-5

Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I (Continued)

FUZE: M513 Piece-to-

Crest Range

PROPELLANT: M67

CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5

WEAPON: M102/M119

CHG 6 CHG 7

3900 521 25.0 371 22.0 259 20.0 206 18.0 147 16.0

4000 538 25.0 381 22.0 266 20.0 211 19.0 151 17.0

4500 707 29.0 453 25.0 307 22.0 243 20.0 174 18.0

5000 546 28.0 352 24.0 271 22.0 195 20.0

5500 684 31.0 401 26.0 312 24.0 222 22.0

6000 463 29.0 346 26.0 247 24.0

6500 539 31.0 401 28.0 282 25.0

7000 644 34.0 440 31.0 310 27.0

7500 526 33.0 350 26.0

8000 575 36.0 385 32.0

8500 440 34.0

9000 480 36.0

9500 569 39.0 10000 617 42.0

CHG 1

Appendix B

B-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-1. Rapid Fire Table I (Continued)

FUZE: M728, Piece- to- Crest Range

M732

CHG 1 EL TI

CHG 2 EL TI

PROPELLANT: M67

CHG 3 CHG 4 EL TI EL TI

WEAPON: M102/M119

CHG 5 CHG 6 EL TI EL TI

CHG 7 EL TI

100 67 8.0 65 8.0 63 8.0 61 8.0 59 8.0 58 8.0 57 8.0 200 54 8.0 50 8.0 46 8.0 42 8.0 39 8.0 36 8.0 34 8.0 300 58 8.0 51 8.0 45 8.0 40 8.0 35 8.0 30 8.0 27 8.0 400 183 8.0 57 8.0 50 8.0 43 8.0 36 8.0 30 8.0 25 8.0 500 169 8.0 159 8.0 147 8.0 47 8.0 39 8.0 31 8.0 25 8.0 600 167 9.0 155 9.0 143 8.0 129 8.0 42 8.0 33 8.0 25 8.0 700 170 9.0 154 9.0 139 9.0 124 9.0 111 8.0 36 8.0 27 8.0 800 173 10.0 155 10.0 139 9.0 121 9.0 107 8.0 95 8.0 28 8.0 900 180 10.0 162 10.0 141 10.0 122 9.0 106 9.0 93 8.0 29 8.0

1000 189 11.0 167 11.0 144 10.0 123 10.0 105 9.0 91 9.0 78 8.0 1100 204 11.0 178 11.0 151 11.0 128 10.0 106 9.0 91 9.0 75 8.0 1200 215 12.0 185 12.0 156 11.0 131 10.0 107 10.0 91 9.0 74 9.0 1300 225 13.0 194 12.0 163 11.0 134 11.0 109 10.0 91 10.0 74 9.0 1400 238 13.0 203 12.0 170 12.0 139 11.0 111 10.0 93 10.0 74 9.0 1500 250 14.0 213 13.0 177 12.0 144 12.0 115 11.0 95 10.0 74 9.0 1600 276 14.0 231 13.0 187 13.0 152 12.0 119 11.0 96 10.0 74 10.0 1700 289 15.0 241 14.0 197 13.0 157 12.0 122 11.0 98 11.0 74 10.0 1800 304 15.0 252 15.0 205 14.0 163 13.0 127 12.0 102 11.0 76 10.0 1900 317 16.0 264 15.0 213 14.0 171 13.0 130 12.0 104 11.0 77 10.0 2000 335 16.0 275 16.0 222 15.0 177 14.0 135 12.0 108 12.0 79 11.0 2100 370 17.0 301 16.0 239 15.0 187 14.0 140 13.0 112 12.0 81 11.0 2200 388 18.0 314 17.0 249 15.0 194 14.0 146 13.0 117 12.0 84 11.0 2300 405 18.0 328 17.0 258 16.0 201 15.0 151 14.0 121 13.0 86 11.0 2400 422 19.0 339 18.0 267 16.0 207 15.0 154 14.0 123 13.0 87 12.0 2500 442 20.0 355 18.0 279 17.0 217 16.0 162 14.0 128 13.0 90 12.0 2600 511 20.0 390 19.0 300 17.0 230 16.0 170 15.0 132 14.0 93r 12.0 2700 532 21.0 407 19.0 310 18.0 238 16.0 176 15.0 137 14.0 96 13.0 2800 553 22.0 420 20.0 322 18.0 245 17.0 191 15.0 141 14.0 98 13.0 2900 574 22.0 437 21.0 332 19.0 252 17.0 186 16.0 145 15.0 101 13.0 3000 600 23.0 454 21.0 344 19.0 261 18.0 192 16.0 150 15.0 104 13.0 3100 519 22.0 375 20.0 279 18.0 201 16.0 158 15.0 111 14.0 3200 537 23.0 386 20.0 287 19.0 205 17.0 162 16.0 113 14.0 3300 555 23.0 399 21.0 295 19.0 212 17.0 168 16.0 116 14.0 3400 575 24.0 411 22.0 303 20.0 217 18.0 173 16.0 118 15.0 3500 596 25.0 426 22.0 313 20.0 223 18.0 178 17.0 122 15.0 3600 784 25.0 469 23.0 334 20.0 233 18.0 182 17.0 125 15.0 3700 485 23.0 344 21.0 240 19.0 189 17.0 130 16.0 3800 500 24.0 352 21.0 246 19.0 193 18.0 135 16.0 3900 513 25.0 363 22.0 251 20.0 196 18.0 141 16.0 4000 530 25.0 373 22.0 258 20.0 203 19.0 143 17.0 4500 700 29.0 446 25.0 300 22.0 236 20.0 167 18.0 5000 540 28.0 346 24.0 265 22.0 189 20.0 5500 678 31.0 395 26.0 306 24.0 216 22.0 6000 458 29.0 341 26.0 242 24.0 6500 534 31.0 396 28.0 277 25.0 7000 640 34.0 436 31.0 306 27.0 7500 522 33.0 346 29.0 8000 571 36.0 381 32.0 8500 437 34.0 9000 477 36.0 9500 566 39.0

10000 614 42.0

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-7

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II FUZE: M557, M564 Piece-to-Crest Range

PROPELLANT: GREEN BAG M3A1 CHG 3

WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198

CHG 5 CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 4 100 67 64 62 61 59 200 53 47 43 40 37 300 57 48 40 36 31 400 65 53 43 37 31 500 77 62 48 40 33 600 87 69 52 43 35 700 98 77 58 45 37 800 111 86 64 52 40 900 125 96 72 56 43

1000 137 108 80 61 47 1100 151 116 86 66 50 1200 167 126 93 76 58 1300 181 137 99 76 58 1400 194 147 106 81 62 1500 210 160 116 87 66 1600 231 172 123 95 71 1700 244 181 129 99 75 1800 260 192 137 105 79 1900 276 204 144 111 84 2000 303 221 155 117 89 2100 317 232 164 123 93 2200 335 245 170 129 100 2300 352 256 179 135 105 2400 370 269 187 141 110 2500 407 290 199 150 115 2600 427 303 208 155 119 2700 447 315 216 161 124 2800 467 329 224 167 129 2900 490 341 232 175 134 3000 551 370 247 183 140 3100 576 385 256 189 145 3200 602 398 264 196 150 3300 631 414 273 202 155 3400 664 430 284 208 160 3500 813 469 300 219 168 3600 486 309 225 173 3700 504 320 232 178 3800 522 330 241 183 3900 541 330 247 189 4000 607 362 259 197 4500 432 302 228 5000 521 350 262 5500 644 403 297 6000 466 335 6500 549 379 7000 659 427 7500 483 8000 554 8500 646

Note. CHG 1 restriction due to possibility of a “sticker” (see TM 9-2350-311-10).

Appendix B

B-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

FUZE:M557, M564

Piece-to- Crest Range

PROPELLANT: WHITE BAG M4A1 (CHG 3-7), M119

CHG 5 CHG 6

WEAPON: M109A2-

CHG 8

(CHG 8)

CHG 3 CHG 4

A6/M198

CHG 7 100 60 59 58 56 55 55 200 41 37 35 32 31 30 300 38 33 29 25 23 22 400 39 33 28 24 21 19 500 43 36 30 24 20 18 600 47 39 32 24 20 17 700 54 42 35 26 21 17 800 59 46 37 27 21 17 900 64 50 40 29 22 17

1000 70 55 43 32 24 19 1100 75 60 46 34 26 19 1200 81 67 50 36 27 20 1300 88 71 53 38 28 20 1400 94 76 56 40 30 21 1500 100 82 60 43 32 23 1600 108 87 67 46 34 24 1700 114 91 70 48 34 24 1800 121 96 74 50 36 25 1900 128 101 79 53 38 27 2000 137 108 83 56 40 28 2100 143 113 88 59 42 30 2200 152 118 92 62 44 32 2300 158 124 97 65 46 33 2400 165 129 101 68 48 34 2500 174 138 105 71 50 36 2600 181 142 110 73 51 36 2700 188 148 115 76 54 38 2800 195 153 119 80 56 39 2900 202 159 126 84 58 40 3000 215 166 131 89 60 42 3100 222 172 136 93 63 43 3200 229 178 141 96 66 45 3300 236 184 146 100 68 46 3400 246 190 151 103 70 48 3500 258 199 156 107 73 50 3600 266 207 163 110 76 51 3700 275 213 168 114 78 53 3800 283 219 173 118 80 54 3900 291 225 178 122 83 56 4000 308 234 183 128 85 58 4500 362 272 213 149 101 66 5000 423 312 244 173 116 77 5500 500 356 277 195 133 85 6000 596 410 312 224 149 95 6500 468 352 249 172 109 7000 542 392 282 191 121 7500 642 442 310 215 135

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-9

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

FUZE: M557, M564 PROPELLANT: WHITE BAG M4A1 (CHG 3-7), M119 WEAPON: M109A2- (CHG 8) A6/M198

Piece-to- Crest Range CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG 6 CHG 7 CHG 8

8000 499 348 238 149 8500 569 394 266 167 9000 660 428 291 183 9500 492 325 203

10000 531 352 222 10500 648 393 244 11000 697 423 266 11500 478 291 12000 513 315 12500 597 347 13000 639 372 13500 409 14000 438 14500 484 15000 516 15500 585 16000 622

Appendix B

B-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued) FUZE: M514 Piece-to- Crest Range CHG

PROPELLANT: GREEN BAG M3A1

CHG 3 TI EL TI

WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198

CHG 4 CHG 5 EL TI EL TI

1 TI

CHG 2 EL

100 67 8.0 64 8.0 62 8.0 61 8.0 58 8.0 200 53 8.0 47 8.0 43 8.0 40 8.0 36 8.0 300 57 8.0 48 8.0 40 8.0 36 8.0 30 8.0 400 254 8.0 53 8.0 43 8.0 37 8.0 30 8.0 500 268 8.0 253 8.0 48 8.0 40 8.0 32 8.0 600 251 9.0 231 9.0 213 8.0 43 8.0 35 8.0 700 239 9.0 216 9.0 196 9.0 184 8.0 37 8.0 800 235 9.0 208 9.0 185 9.0 172 9.0 160 8.0 900 236 10.0 205 10.0 180 9.0 163 9.0 150 8.0

1000 237 10.0 204 10.0 176 10.0 157 9.0 143 9.0 1100 249 11.0 207 11.0 175 10.0 155 10.0 138 9.0 1200 253 11.0 209 11.0 174 10.0 152 10.0 135 9.0 1300 262 12.0 215 12.0 175 11.0 151 10.0 133 10.0 1400 269 12.0 220 12.0 176 11.0 151 11.0 131 10.0 1500 280 13.0 224 13.0 182 12.0 151 11.0 130 10.0 1600 301 13.0 238 13.0 186 12.0 156 11.0 132 11.0 1700 311 14.0 244 14.0 189 12.0 157 12.0 132 11.0 1800 324 14.0 252 14.0 194 13.0 160 12.0 134 11.0 1900 337 14.0 261 14.0 198 13.0 163 12.0 135 12.0 2000 351 15.0 269 15.0 203 14.0 165 13.0 137 12.0 2100 381 15.0 286 15.0 213 14.0 171 13.0 139 12.0 2200 398 16.0 298 16.0 220 14.0 176 13.0 145 12.0 2300 413 16.0 307 16.0 225 15.0 180 14.0 148 13.0 2400 429 17.0 318 17.0 231 15.0 184 14.0 151 13.0 2500 445 19.0 328 17.0 237 16.0 188 14.0 153 13.0 2600 502 20.0 354 18.0 250 16.0 194 15.0 157 14.0 2700 521 21.0 365 19.0 257 16.0 199 15.0 161 14.0 2800 540 21.0 378 19.0 264 17.0 204 15.0 165 14.0 2900 561 22.0 388 20.0 270 17.0 210 16.0 168 15.0 3000 583 23.0 402 20.0 279 18.0 215 16.0 172 15.0 3100 720 24.0 439 21.0 295 18.0 224 17.0 178 15.0 3200 746 24.0 451 21.0 302 19.0 230 17.0 182 16.0 3300 773 25.0 466 22.0 310 19.0 235 17.0 186 16.0 3400 805 26.0 481 22.0 320 19.0 240 18.0 191 16.0 3500 842 27.0 496 23.0 327 20.0 246 18.0 195 17.0 3600 558 24.0 347 20.0 257 18.0 202 17.0 3700 575 24.0 358 21.0 263 19.0 206 18.0 3800 592 25.0 366 21.0 271 19.0 211 18.0 3900 610 26.0 374 22.0 276 20.0 215 18.0 4000 630 26.0 385 22.0 282 20.0 220 19.0 4500 453 25.0 323 22.0 249 20.0 5000 514 28.0 369 24.0 281 22.0 5500 589 31.0 421 27.0 315 24.0 6000 482 29.0 351 26.0 6500 564 32.0 395 28.0 7000 673 35.0 441 30.0 7500 497 33.0

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-11

FUZE: M514 PROPELLANT: GREEN BAG M3A1 WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198 Piece-to- Crest Range CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5

EL TI EL TI EL TI EL TI EL TI 8000 566 35.0 8500 657 38.0

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

Appendix B

B-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued) FUZE: M514

Piece-to- Crest Range CHG 3

PROPELLANT: WHITE BAG M4A1 (CHG 8) CHG 5

TI EL TI CHG 6 EL TI

WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198

CHG 8 EL TI

(CHG 3-7), M119 CHG 4 TI EL

CHG 7 EL TI

100 61 8.0 59 8.0 58 8.0 58 8.0 56 8.0 56 8.0 200 41 8.0 37 8.0 35 8.0 34 8.0 32 8.0 31 8.0 300 38 8.0 33 8.0 29 8.0 27 8.0 24 8.0 23 8.0 400 39 8.0 33 8.0 28 8.0 26 8.0 22 8.0 20 8.0 500 234 8.0 36 8.0 30 8.0 26 8.0 21 8.0 19 8.0 600 207 8.0 40 8.0 32 8.0 26 8.0 21 8.0 18 8.0 700 191 8.0 180 8.0 35 8.0 28 8.0 22 8.0 18 8.0 800 179 9.0 167 8.0 157 8.0 29 8.0 22 8.0 18 8.0 900 171 9.0 158 9.0 147 8.0 138 8.0 23 8.0 18 8.0

1000 166 9.0 152 9.0 139 9.0 129 8.0 25 8.0 20 8.0 1100 165 10.0 149 9.0 134 9.0 123 8.0 115 8.0 21 8.0 1200 163 10.0 148 10.0 130 9.0 117 9.0 108 8.0 22 8.0 1300 165 10.0 147 10.0 128 9.0 114 9.0 104 8.0 97 8.0 1400 165 11.0 146 10.0 125 10.0 110 9.0 100 9.0 92 8.0 1500 166 11.0 146 11.0 124 10.0 108 9.0 97 9.0 89 8.0 1600 170 12.0 148 11.0 127 10.0 107 9.0 95 9.0 86 8.0 1700 173 12.0 149 11.0 127 11.0 106 10.0 92 9.0 83 9.0 1800 178 12.0 151 12.0 128 11.0 105 10.0 91 9.0 81 9.0 1900 181 13.0 153 12.0 130 11.0 105 10.0 90 10.0 80 9.0 2000 185 13.0 156 12.0 131 12.0 105 11.0 89 10.0 78 9.0 2100 190 13.0 159 13.0 133 12.0 107 11.0 88 10.0 76 9.0 2200 198 14.0 163 13.0 136 12.0 109 11.0 89 10.0 77 9.0 2300 202 14.0 167 13.0 139 12.0 110 11.0 89 10.0 76 10.0 2400 207 15.0 170 14.0 141 13.0 111 12.0 89 11.0 75 10.0 2500 212 15.0 176 14.0 143 13.0 112 12.0 89 11.0 75 10.0 2600 222 15.0 181 14.0 147 13.0 113 12.0 89 11.0 74 10.0 2700 228 16.0 186 15.0 151 14.0 115 12.0 91 11.0 75 10.0 2800 234 16.0 190 15.0 154 14.0 118 13.0 92 12.0 75 11.0 2900 239 16.0 194 15.0 159 14.0 121 13.0 92 12.0 74 11.0 3000 247 17.0 198 16.0 163 14.0 123 13.0 93 12.0 75 11.0 3100 258 17.0 206 16.0 167 15.0 128 14.0 95 12.0 75 11.0 3200 264 18.0 211 17.0 171 15.0 130 14.0 97 13.0 76 11.0 3300 270 18.0 216 17.0 175 16.0 133 14.0 98 13.0 76 11.0 3400 279 18.0 221 17.0 179 16.0 135 15.0 99 13.0 77 12.0 3500 285 19.0 226 18.0 183 16.0 138 15.0 101 13.0 78 12.0 3600 300 19.0 237 18.0 190 17.0 141 15.0 103 13.0 79 12.0 3700 308 20.0 242 18.0 194 17.0 144 15.0 105 14.0 80 12.0 3800 315 20.0 247 19.0 198 17.0 147 16.0 106 14.0 80 12.0 3900 322 21.0 252 19.0 202 18.0 150 16.0 108 14.0 81 13.0 4000 331 21.0 257 19.0 206 18.0 153 16.0 109 15.0 82 13.0 4500 383 23.0 293 21.0 234 20.0 176 18.0 123 16.0 88 14.0 5000 442 26.0 331 23.0 263 22.0 195 20.0 137 17.0 97 15.0 5500 517 28.0 374 26.0 295 24.0 220 21.0 153 19.0 106 16.0 6000 614 31.0 426 28.0 328 25.0 244 23.0 167 20.0 115 17.0 6500 556 33.0 367 27.0 273 25.0 190 22.0 126 19.0 7000 655 36.0 406 30.0 301 27.0 208 24.0 137 20.0 7500 455 32.0 337 29.0 231 25.0 151 21.0

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-13

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued) FUZE: M514

Piece-to- Crest Range

PROPELLANT: WHITE BAG M4A1

CHG 6 EL TI

WEAPON: M109A2 A6/M198

CHG 8 EL TI

(CHG 3-7), M119 (CHG 8)

CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 EL TI EL TI EL

CHG 7 EL TI

8000 511 34.0 365 31.0 254 27.0 164 23.0 8500 580 37.0 411 33.0 281 29.0 182 25.0 9000 671 39.0 446 35.0 307 31.0 198 26.0 9500 623 40.0 368 35.0 237 30.0

10000 667 42.0 408 37.0 258 31.0 10500 718 45.0 439 39.0 281 33.0 11000 493 41.0 305 35.0 11500 529 43.0 330 37.0 12000 614 46.0 363 39.0 12500 657 49.0 387 41.0 13000 425 43.0 13500 455 45.0 14000 501 47.0 14500 533 50.0 15000 605 52.0 15500 643 55.0

Appendix B

B-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

FUZE: M728, M732 PROPELLANT: GREEN BAG M3A1 WEAPON: M109A2- A6/M198

Piece-to- Crest Range CHG 1

EL TI CHG 2 EL TI

CHG 3 EL TI

CHG 4 EL TI

CHG 5 EL TI

100 67 8.0 64 8.0 62 8.0 61 8.0 58 8.0 200 53 8.0 47 8.0 43 8.0 40 8.0 36 8.0 300 57 8.0 48 8.0 40 8.0 36 8.0 30 8.0 400 65 8.0 53 8.0 43 8.0 37 8.0 30 8.0 500 209 8.0 194 8.0 48 8.0 40 8.0 32 8.0 600 201 9.0 181 9.0 163 8.0 43 8.0 35 8.0 700 196 9.0 173 9.0 153 9.0 141 8.0 37 8.0 800 198 10.0 171 9.0 148 9.0 135 9.0 123 8.0 900 203 10.0 172 10.0 147 9.0 130 9.0 117 8.0

1000 207 11.0 174 10.0 146 10.0 127 9.0 113 9.0 1100 221 11.0 179 11.0 147 10.0 127 10.0 110 9.0 1200 228 12.0 184 11.0 149 10.0 127 10.0 110 9.0 1300 238 12.0 191 12.0 151 11.0 127 10.0 109 10.0 1400 147 13.0 197 12.0 154 11.0 129 11.0 109 10.0 1500 260 14.0 204 13.0 160 12.0 131 11.0 110 10.0 1600 282 14.0 219 13.0 167 12.0 137 11.0 113 11.0 1700 293 15.0 226 14.0 171 12.0 139 12.0 114 11.0 1800 307 15.0 235 14.0 177 13.0 143 12.0 117 11.0 1900 321 16.0 245 14.0 182 13.0 147 12.0 119 12.0 2000 336 16.0 254 15.0 188 14.0 150 13.0 122 12.0 2100 367 17.0 272 15.0 199 14.0 157 13.0 125 12.0 2200 384 17.0 284 16.0 206 14.0 162 13.0 131 12.0 2300 400 18.0 294 16.0 212 15.0 167 14.0 135 13.0 2400 416 19.0 305 17.0 218 15.0 171 14.0 138 13.0 2500 433 19.0 316 17.0 225 16.0 176 14.0 141 13.0 2600 491 20.0 343 18.0 239 16.0 183 15.0 146 14.0 2700 510 21.0 354 19.0 246 16.0 188 15.0 150 14.0 2800 529 21.0 367 19.0 253 17.0 193 15.0 154 14.0 2900 551 22.0 378 20.0 260 17.0 200 16.0 158 15.0 3000 573 23.0 392 20.0 269 18.0 205 16.0 162 15.0 3100 711 24.0 430 21.0 286 18.0 215 17.0 169 15.0 3200 736 24.0 442 21.0 293 19.0 221 17.0 173 16.0 3300 764 25.0 457 22.0 301 19.0 226 17.0 177 16.0 3400 796 26.0 472 22.0 311 19.0 231 18.0 182 16.0 3500 834 27.0 488 23.0 319 20.0 238 18.0 187 17.0 3600 549 24.0 338 20.0 248 18.0 194 17.0 3700 567 24.0 349 21.0 255 19.0 198 18.0 3800 584 25.0 358 21.0 263 19.0 204 18.0 3900 602 26.0 367 22.0 269 20.0 208 18.0 4000 623 26.0 378 22.0 275 22.0 213 19.0 4500 446 25.0 316 22.0 242 20.0 5000 534 28.0 363 24.0 275 22.0 5500 656 31.0 415 27.0 309 24.0

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-15

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

FUZE: M728, M732 PROPELLANT: GREEN BAG M3A1 WEAPON: M109A2- A6/M198

Piece-to- Crest Range CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4

CHG 5

6000 477 29.0 346 26.0 6500 559 32.0 390 28.0 7000 669 35.0 437 30.0 7500 493 33.0 8000 562 35.0 8500 654 38.0

Appendix B

B-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

FUZE: M728, M732

Piece-to- Crest Range CHG 3

PROPELLANT: WHITE BAG M4A1 (CHG 3-7),

CHG 5 CHG 6 EL TI EL TI

WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198

CHG 8 EL TI

M119 (CHG 8)

CHG 4 TI EL TI

CHG 7 EL TI

100 61 8.0 59 8.0 58 8.0 57 8.0 56 8.0 56 8.0 200 41 8.0 37 8.0 35 8.0 33 8.0 32 8.0 31 8.0 300 38 8.0 33 8.0 29 8.0 26 8.0 24 8.0 23 8.0 400 39 8.0 33 8.0 28 8.0 25 8.0 22 8.0 20 8.0 500 43 8.0 36 8.0 30 8.0 25 8.0 21 8.0 19 8.0 600 181 8.0 40 8.0 32 8.0 25 8.0 21 8.0 18 8.0 700 148 8.0 137 8.0 35 8.0 27 8.0 22 8.0 18 8.0 800 132 9.0 130 8.0 120 8.0 28 8.0 22 8.0 18 8.0 900 138 9.0 125 9.0 113 8.0 105 8.0 23 8.0 18 8.0

1000 136 9.0 122 9.0 108 9.0 99 8.0 25 8.0 20 8.0 1100 137 10.0 121 9.0 106 9.0 95 8.0 87 8.0 21 8.0 1200 138 10.0 123 10.0 105 9.0 92 9.0 83 8.0 21 8.0 1300 141 10.0 123 10.0 104 9.0 90 9.0 80 8.0 72 8.0 1400 143 11.0 124 10.0 103 10.0 88 9.0 78 9.0 69 8.0 1500 146 11.0 126 11.0 104 10.0 88 9.0 77 9.0 68 8.0 1600 151 12.0 129 11.0 108 10.0 88 10.0 76 9.0 67 8.0 1700 155 12.0 131 11.0 109 11.0 88 10.0 74 9.0 65 9.0 1800 161 12.0 134 12.0 111 11.0 88 10.0 74 9.0 64 9.0 1900 165 13.0 137 12.0 114 11.0 89 10.0 74 10.0 64 9.0 2000 170 13.0 141 12.0 116 12.0 90 11.0 74 10.0 63 9.0 2100 176 13.0 145 13.0 119 12.0 93 11.0 74 10.0 62 9.0 2200 184 14.0 149 13.0 122 12.0 95 11.0 75 10.0 63 9.0 2300 189 14.0 154 13.0 126 13.0 97 11.0 76 10.0 63 10.0 2400 194 15.0 157 14.0 128 13.0 98 12.0 76 11.0 62 10.0 2500 200 15.0 164 14.0 131 13.0 100 12.0 77 11.0 63 10.0 2600 211 15.0 170 14.0 136 13.0 102 12.0 78 11.0 63 10.0 2700 217 16.0 175 15.0 140 14.0 104 12.0 80 11.0 64 10.0 2800 223 16.0 179 15.0 143 14.0 107 13.0 81 12.0 64 11.0 2900 229 16.0 184 15.0 149 14.0 111 13.0 82 12.0 64 11.0 3000 237 17.0 188 16.0 153 15.0 113 13.0 83 12.0 65 11.0 3100 249 17.0 197 16.0 158 15.0 119 14.0 86 12.0 66 11.0 3200 255 18.0 202 17.0 162 15.0 121 14.0 88 12.0 67 11.0 3300 262 18.0 207 17.0 166 16.0 124 14.0 89 13.0 67 11.0 3400 270 18.0 212 17.0 170 16.0 126 15.0 90 13.0 68 12.0 3500 277 19.0 218 18.0 175 16.0 130 15.0 93 13.0 70 12.0 3600 291 19.0 228 18.0 181 17.0 132 15.0 94 13.0 70 12.0 3700 300 20.0 234 18.0 186 17.0 136 15.0 97 14.0 72 12.0 3800 307 20.0 239 19.0 190 17.0 139 16.0 98 14.0 72 12.0 3900 315 21.0 245 19.0 195 18.0 143 16.0 101 14.0 74 13.0 4000 324 21.0 250 19.0 199 18.0 146 16.0 102 14.0 75 13.0 4500 376 21.0 286 21.0 227 20.0 169 17.0 116 16.0 81 14.0 5000 436 26.0 325 23.0 257 22.0 189 20.0 131 17.0 91 15.0 5500 511 28.0 368 26.0 289 24.0 214 21.0 147 19.0 100 16.0

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-17

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued) FUZE: M728, M732

Piece-to- Crest Range CHG 3

PROPELLANT: WHITE BAG M4A1 (CHG 3-7),

CHG 5 CHG 6 EL TI EL TI

WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198

CHG 8 EL TI

M119 (CHG 8)

CHG 4 TI EL TI

CHG 7 EL TI

6000 609 31. 421 28.0 323 26.0 239 23.0 162 20.0 110 17.0 6500 479 30.0 362 28.0 268 25.0 185 22.0 121 19.0 7000 552 33.0 402 30.0 297 27.0 204 24.0 133 20.0 7500 651 36.0 451 32.0 343 29.0 227 25.0 147 21.0 8000 507 34.0 361 31.0 250 27.0 160 23.0 8500 577 37.0 408 33.0 278 29.0 179 25.0 9000 667 40.0 442 35.0 303 31.0 194 26.0 9500 546 40.0 365 35.0 234 30.0

10000 664 42.0 405 37.0 255 31.0 10500 436 39.0 278 33.0 11000 41 41.0 303 35.0 11500 526 43.0 327 37.0 12000 611 46.0 360 39.0 12500 655 49.0 385 41.0 13000 423 43.0 13500 453 45.0 14000 498 47.0 14500 531 50.0 15000 603 52.0 15500 641 55.0

Appendix B

B-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

FUZE: M557, M564 SHELL RAP ROCKET ON WEAPON: ONLY M109A2-A6/M198

Piece-to-Crest Range CHG 7RB CHG 8WB CHG M203 100 55 55 54 200 32 31 30 300 24 23 22 400 22 20 18 500 21 19 17 600 21 18 16 700 22 18 16 800 22 18 15 900 23 19 15

1000 25 20 16 1100 26 20 16 1200 28 21 17 1300 29 21 16 1400 31 23 17 1500 32 24 18 1600 34 25 19 1700 35 25 19 1800 37 27 19 1900 39 28 20 2000 41 29 21 2100 43 31 22 2200 44 33 23 2300 46 34 24 2400 48 35 25 2500 50 37 25 2600 51 37 25 2700 53 39 26 2800 55 40 27 2900 57 41 28 3000 60 43 29 3100 63 44 30 3200 66 46 31 3300 67 47 32 3400 69 49 33 3500 71 50 34 3600 74 52 35 3700 76 53 36 3800 78 55 37 3900 80 56 38 4000 83 58 39 4500 94 66 44 5000 107 73 49 5500 117 82 54 6000 128 90 60 6500 141 97 65

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-19

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

FUZE: M557, M564 SHELL RAP ROCKET ON WEAPON: ONLY M109A2-A6/M198

Piece-to-Crest Range CHG 7RB CHG 8WB CHG M203 7000 152 105 71 7500 165 113 77 8000 177 123 85 8500 192 132 91 9000 206 141 97 9500 221 151 103

10000 238 161 109 10500 256 170 114 11000 273 184 121 11500 295 196 129 12000 313 208 138 12500 339 223 143 13000 360 237 152 13500 389 251 160 14000 412 268 170 14500 447 85 175 15000 474 302 187 15500 515 324 198 16000 545 343 209 16500 601 366 214 17000 636 387 229 17500 728 416 242 18000 771 440 256 18500 1173 471 266 19000 1241 498 281 19500 538 297 20000 567 315 20500 622 328 21000 657 347 21500 745 365 22000 789 383 22500 404 23000 425 23500 445 24000 468 24500 500 25000 525 25500 550 26000 577 26500 648 27000 577 27500 648 28000 525 28500 550 29000 577 29500 648

Appendix B

B-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

SHELL DPICM Piece-to-Crest

Range CHG 3GB

CHG 3WB

CHG 4GB

CHG 4WB

WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198 CHG CHG CHG CHG 5GB 5WB 6WB 7RB

CHG 7WB

100 62 61 59 58 58 57 56 55 55 200 44 42 41 38 37 35 33 31 32 300 43 39 37 34 32 30 27 23 25 400 46 41 39 35 32 30 25 20 22 500 51 45 43 38 34 31 26 19 22 600 50 50 47 41 37 34 28 10 22 700 65 55 51 45 40 37 29 19 23 800 71 62 56 49 44 39 31 19 24 900 78 68 61 54 47 42 32 19 24

1000 88 74 67 59 52 46 35 20 26 1100 96 81 72 64 56 49 37 22 28 1200 104 87 80 69 61 53 40 23 30 1300 111 92 85 73 64 56 42 23 31 1400 119 99 91 78 69 60 44 25 33 1500 127 108 97 86 73 65 47 26 35 1600 140 117 104 92 79 70 50 27 37 1700 149 123 111 96 83 73 52 28 38 1800 157 130 117 102 88 77 5 29 40 1900 165 137 123 107 92 82 58 30 42 2000 174 145 130 113 97 86 62 32 44 2100 188 155 138 120 103 92 66 33 47 2200 196 162 147 126 108 96 69 34 50 2300 207 169 153 132 113 103 72 36 52 2400 216 177 160 137 118 107 76 37 54 2500 224 186 167 143 123 112 79 39 56 2600 241 196 172 150 129 117 82 39 58 2700 250 203 183 156 134 121 86 41 60 2800 262 211 190 164 139 126 89 42 62 2900 271 218 197 170 144 131 93 44 65 3000 281 228 204 176 150 136 96 45 67 3100 303 243 211 185 157 143 101 47 70 3200 313 251 224 191 162 148 105 48 73 3300 325 258 232 197 168 153 109 50 75 3400 335 268 241 203 173 158 112 52 78 3500 346 277 248 209 181 163 116 53 0 3600 376 294 256 221 190 170 121 55 83 3700 307 302 271 227 195 175 127 57 86 3800 390 313 278 236 201 181 131 58 88 3900 411 321 286 242 207 186 135 60 91 4000 423 330 294 249 212 191 139 62 94 4500 523 392 338 289 246 224 163 72 109 5000 671 468 394 335 282 256 186 81 125 5500 1068 563 460 386 323 289 211 93 145 6000 709 447 367 329 241 104 163 6500 1087 521 420 371 270 117 185 7000 622 479 420 300 129 205 7500 783 556 478 336 145 232 8000 661 548 372 160 254

Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 B-21

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Continued)

SHELL DPICM Piece-to-Crest CHG CHG CHG Range 3GB 3WB 4GB

WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198 CHG CHG CHG CHG CHG 4WB 5GB 5WB 6WB 7RB

CHG 7WB

8500 9000 9500 10000 10500 11000 11500 12000 12500 13000 13500 14000 14500 15000 15500 16000 16500 17000

854 642 796

413 461 516 585 676 829

177 195 214 232 374 278 307 329 363 388 429 459 509 542 619 660 845 902

284 302 346 374 420 451 514 550 661 709

Appendix B

B-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table B-2. Rapid Fire Table II (Concluded)

SHELL COPPERHEAD Piece-to-Crest Range CHG 4GB CHG 5GB

WEAPON: M109A2-A6/M198

CHG 6WB CHG 7WB CHG 8WB

100 99 97 95 94 93 200 82 78 75 73 71 300 82 76 70 67 65 400 86 79 71 67 63 500 93 83 73 68 64 600 100 88 76 70 65 700 107 93 79 72 67 800 115 99 83 75 68 900 123 105 87 78 70

1000 132 112 92 81 73 1100 141 118 96 84 75 1200 150 125 101 88 77 1300 159 132 105 91 79 1400 169 139 110 95 82 1500 179 147 116 99 85 1600 189 154 121 103 88 1700 198 161 126 106 90 1800 209 169 131 110 93 1900 220 177 137 115 96 2000 231 185 143 119 100 2100 242 194 149 124 103 2200 253 202 155 128 106 2300 265 211 161 133 109 2400 277 219 167 138 113 2500 289 228 174 142 116 2600 301 236 179 146 119 2700 314 245 185 151 122 2800 327 255 192 156 126 2900 341 264 199 162 130 3000 356 274 206 167 133

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-1

Appendix C

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations This appendix contains examples of written examinations that can be used for your training and certification programs and sample tasks for Leader’s Hands-On Component tests. The examinations can be modified to include local regulations and SOPs

ADMINISTRATIVE DATA Written examinations should be controlled and accessible by the Master Gunner of the organization. It is recommended that the Master Gunner have the examination reviewed for technical accuracy and revised as necessary.

These examinations can be used as an official part of the training and certification process or as an assessment tool by the Master Gunner in the process of developing the organization’s training plan.

Written examinations will be administrated as per the guidance in the specific MOS Chapter. The Leader’s Hands- On Component Examination will be conducted to support safety certification as presented in Chapter 2 of this manual.

SECTION I – HOWITZER EXAMINATIONS

HOWITZER WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS Howitzer written examinations included in this appendix are Common to All Systems, M119, M109A6, and M777 along with the answer keys for each. The common examination will be given to all 13B cannon crewmembers regardless of rank. Weapon-specific examinations will be administrated to each 13B cannon crewmember for the weapon system to which they are assigned for their organization. Administration of the howitzer examinations will be as follows:

The 25 questions of the common systems and 25 questions from the weapon-specific examination will comprise the written examination for 13B personnel.

COMMON TO ALL SYSTEMS

1. Corrosive damage to the interior of an artillery tube results from _______.

a. Failure to clean dust and dirt from the tube prior to firing b. Friction created as the projectile moves through the bore c. Escape of gas from behind the rotating band d. Absorption of moisture by the residue of primer salts

2. To whom do you announce BORE CLEAR?

a. Executive Officer/Platoon Leader b. Section Chief c. Fire Direction Center

3. If you are firing more than one round, what should the number 1 man announce after each round is fired?

a. BORE CLEAR b. BORE CLEAR and number of rounds fired

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

c. BORE CLEAR, number of rounds fired, and quadrant

4. If any member of the battery observes a dangerous situation, he can stop a fire mission already in progress by giving the command _______.

a. STOP FIRING b. CANCEL FIRING c. CEASE LOADING d. CHECK FIRING

5. The optimum distances for emplacing the collimator are _______ meters from the howitzer.

a. 0–15 b. 3–10 c. 3–13 d. 5–12

6. Regardless of the distance at which the far aiming post is set, the near aiming post must be emplaced _______.

a. About 50 meters from the howitzer b. Half the distance to the far aiming post c. As the situation permits d. 100 meters from the howitzer

7. In a fire command, the number 3167 is pronounced _______.

a. Thir-tee wun six-tee seven b. Thuh-ree thouzand wun six seven c. Thuh-ree wun six seven d. Three thousand wun hundred six-tee seven

8. Number 2 wants the FDC to repeat the deflection. Number 2 should say _______.

a. REPEAT DEFLECTION, NUMBER 2 b. NUMBER 2, DEFLECTION? c. DEFLECTION, NUMBER 2 d. SAY AGAIN DEFLECTION, NUMBER 2

9. The primary reason for painting a projectile is to _______.

a. Prevent rust and corrosion b. Provide an easy method of identification c. Facilitate handling and storage d. Enhance the camouflage of the position

10. Storing ammunition on dunnage is important only in very hot weather.

a. True b. False

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-3

11. When storing ammunition on the ground, what is the minimum number of inches of dunnage that should be under the ammunition?

a. 5 b. 6 c. 12

12. How should a WP projectile be stored?

a. On its side and rotated every few hours b. On its base c. The same as an HC projectile

13. How should you segregate the ammunition in the firing battery area?

a. By size, color, and weight b. By type, lot, and weight zone c. By fuze type, lot, and zone

14. Field artillery ammunition is classified according to type as _______.

a. Fixed and separate b. Separate and separate-loading c. Semi-fixed and separate-loading d. Separate-loading and fixed

15. To set an M557 PD fuze for delay action, the correct tool is the _______.

a. M63 fuze setter b. P-38 c. M16 fuze wrench d. M18 fuze wrench

16. The type of fuze that can detonate the projectile in the air at a predetermined height above the ground is the _______.

a. Superquick fuze b. Concrete-piercing fuze c. Proximity fuze (VT)

17. To prepare an M557 fuze for delay action, you must first _______.

a. Rotate the selector setting screw to the horizontal (delay) position b. Rotate the fuze body to the proper setting c. Put a supplementary charge in the proper setting d. Move the interrupter out of the fuze channel

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

18. If the MTSQ fuze M564 (dated 1970) is to be used for superquick action, the fuze must be set at _______.

a. 90.0 b. 95.5 c. 98.0 d. S

19. The fuze wrench used to seat and tighten a fuze into a standard HE projectile is the _______.

a. M18 b. M27 c. M34 d. M63

20. When the distant aiming point method of boresighting is used, the minimum distance between the aiming point and the weapon should be _______ meters.

a. 1,300 b. 1,400 c. 1,500 d. 7,200

21. Fire control alignment tests should be performed _______.

a. At the discretion of the battery commander b. Every 3 months when firing or once a year if no firing takes place c. When fires are inaccurate for no apparent reason d. All of the above

22. What is the tolerance when verifying boresight?

a. ±0.2 mils b. ±0.4 mils c. ±1.0 mils d. ±0.5 mils

23. Smoking is permitted:

a. Inside the howitzer and Ammo Carrier with sections chief’s approval b. Anywhere on the firing point c. Smoking is not permitted d. In designated area only

24. When emplacing, the cant of the howitzer should not exceed _______ mils.

a. 12 b. 30 c. 90 d. 60

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-5

25. When does the number 1 man hook up the lanyard?

a. Right after closing the breech b. Last digit of the quadrant c. When told by Ammo Team leader d. When told by Section Chief

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Common to All Systems Answer Key

1. b

2. b

3. a

4. d

5. d

6. b

7. c

8. c

9. a

10. b

11. b

12. b

13. c

14. c

15. d

16. c

17. a

18. d

19. a

20. c

21. d

22. d

23. d

24. c

25. d Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-7

M119 HOWITZER EXAMINATION

1. TM _______ covers the M119A2 howitzer.

a. TM 9-1015-211-10 b. TM 9-1025-112-10 c. TM 9-1015-252-10

2. _____ meters is the maximum range of the M119A2 howitzer with Charge 7.

a. 11,000 b. 11,500 c. 15,000

3. What type of breechblock does the M119A2 howitzer have?

4. The M119A2 howitzer is equipped with what type of firing mechanism?

5. What type (qualification) of ammunition does the M119A2 howitzer fire?

6. Which of the following statement(s) is TRUE concerning misfire procedures of a cold tube?

a. After a misfire, the section should recock and attempt to fire the weapon system a maximum of four times.

b. If the gun still does not fire, the section should immediately punch the round out of the tube. c. If the primer was not fired, the section is authorized to change the firing pin assembly before

attempting to refire. If recocking the weapon one time results in the weapon firing successfully, it is not necessary to change the firing pin assembly.

d. Regardless of the success of recocking and/or changing of the firing pin mechanism, the section must fire or remove the round from the tube within 5 minutes from the time of the initial misfire.

7. What is the maximum traversing limit of the M119A2 howitzer?

a. 50 mils left/75 mils right b. 75 mils left/75 mils right c. 100 mils left/100 mils right d. 100 mils left/200 mils right

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

8. When emplacing the aiming post by stadia method, the far aiming post should be _______ mils and the near aiming post should be _______ mils.

a. 12, 24 b. 15, 28 c. 14, 28 d. 12, 28

9. Which of the following statement(s) is TRUE concerning the misfire procedures of a hot tube?

a. Following a misfire, the section will recock and attempt to fire the weapon twice to fire the round. If the round does not fire following the recock attempts, the crew should wait 2 minutes before unloading the canister.

b. If the primer was fired, the crew must replace the canister and refire within 1 minute of chambering the round.

c. If the primer was not fired, the crew should immediately evacuate to a safe distance and notify EOD for projectile removal.

d. When firing is interrupted, the section must fire or remove the projectile from the chamber within 5 minutes from the time it was loaded or must evacuate to a safe distance and call EOD.

10. Distant aiming points must be at least _______ meters from the howitzer.

a. 1,000 b. 1,500 c. 2,000 d. 2,500

11. Which of the following fuzes is not authorized to be fired with the M60 WP projectile?

a. M767 b. M577 c. M739 d. M564

12. Section Chief must report range to crest to the nearest ________ meters.

a. 50 b. 100 c. 150 d. 10

13. Proper storage of WP munitions is critical. What is the melting point of WP filler?

a. 90 degrees b. 100 degrees c. 111.4 degrees

14. What single propelling charge does the M913 HERA contain for maximum range?

a. M200 b. M229

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-9

c. M121 d. M232

15. The M90A3 and the M187A1 are each equipped with an LED light source. What does the acronym LED stand for?

16. How do you disengage the hand brake on the M119A2?

a. Push handle to the right b. Push handle outward c. Push handle to the left d. Push handle inward

17. What type of fuze does the M915 DPICM mate with?

a. M732 b. M782 c. M762

18. When firing the M548 HERA projectile, what should be done with the rocket when firing charges 3, 4, 5, and 6 under emergency combat conditions?

19. What is the difference between the HERA (M913) and the HERA (M548) in relation to propelling charge?

20. After the gunner sights on the DAP during laying, what does he do with the reading on counter azimuth?

a. Informs the section chief b. Tells the gunner to write it down c. Writes it down on gunner’s reference card d. Does nothing and continues with the TLASBAPP

21. What is the optimum distance when emplacing the collimator?

a. 4–15 meters b. 5–12 meters c. 4–12 meters d. 5–15 meters

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

22. When rigging the howitzer for airmobile with the 25k sling set, what is the chain link count for each leg?

23. What FM covers rigging the howitzer for single point air-movement?

24. What type of clevis is used when rigging the A22 bag for airmobile transport?

25. What is the definition of a hot tube?

26. The M137A2 has an ON and OFF button. How long will the light stay on before it automatically shuts OFF?

a. 4 hours b. 2 hours c. 8 hours d. 3 hours

27. The maximum rate of fire for the M119A2 is _______.

a. 10 rounds per minute for 3 minutes b. 6 rounds per minute for 2 minutes c. 8 rounds per minute for 3 minutes d. As fast as the crew can fire the weapon for 3 minutes

28. What are the two types of telescopes used during direct fire?

a. M90A3 and M186 b. M90A1 and M140 c. M139 and M168 d. M119 and M140

29. What is the maximum range when using the M913 RAP?

a. 11,500 meters b. 14,000 meters c. 12,000 meters d. 19,500 meters

30. When towing the weapon unfolded on a secondary road, what is the maximum speed?

a. 0 mph b. 30 mph c. 40 mph d. 45 mph

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-11

31. Which of the following is part of the breech mechanism?

a. Self-locking hinge pins, recock mechanism, firing pin assembly b. Self-locking hinge pins, primer hole, safety mechanism c. Safety mechanism, buffer assembly, recuperator knob d. None of the above

32. The sustained rate of fire for the M119A2 is _______.

a. 3 rounds per minute for 30 minutes b. 6 rounds per minute for 20 minutes c. 8 rounds per minute for 30 minutes d. As fast as the crew can fire the weapon for 3 minutes

33. What is the weight of the weapon when it is fully loaded with BII?

a. 1,389 lbs. b. 4,400 lbs. c. 4,690 lbs. d. 4,609 lbs.

34. Where is the firing mechanism located on the M119A2?

a. Rear of the breech b. On the left side of cradle rail c. On the right side of the cradle rail d. In front of the tube

35. If the lights are not working after you change the battery on a panoramic telescope, what is your next action?

a. Report to FDC that you cannot see b. Tell the section chief c. Notify unit Maintenance d. Notify the Gunnery Sergeant

36. How long must you wait to turn ON the panoramic telescope before attempting to turn the switch back on again?

a. 5 seconds b. 1 minute c. 2 seconds d. 2 minutes

37. What additional duties does the Ammo team chief perform when there are only six men on the howitzer?

a. Perform the duties of Cannoneer 4 b. Perform the duties of Cannoneer 1 c. Perform the duties of Cannoneer 2 d. Act as chief of section

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

38. If the Section has only a five-man crew, what additional duty does the Assistant Gunner perform?

a. Perform the duties of Cannoneer 4 b. Perform the duties of Ammo team chief c. Perform the duties of Cannoneer 3 d. Perform the duties of Driver

39. During the occupation, what does the section chief command after the vehicle comes to a complete stop?

a. Dismount b. Get off and prepare for action c. Get ready d. March order

40. On the command DISMOUNT, the Assistant Gunner dismounts to the left with _______.

a. Hammer, block wood, chop block b. Hammer, block wood, jack strut c. M10, screw driver, howitzer key d. a and c

41. What lanyard would you use when firing charge 7, above 800 mils?

a. 5-foot lanyard b. 6-foot lanyard c. 50-foot lanyard d. Does not matter

42. Who releases the firing platform clamps during the emplacement of the howitzer?

a. Cannoneer Nos. 1 and 3 b. Cannoneer Nos. 2 and 3 c. Cannoneer Nos. 1 and 4 d. Cannoneer Nos. 1 and 2

43. When laying the howitzer, the gunner received more than 10 mils from initial deflection. What do you do next?

a. Shift the trail on the direction gunner command b. Do nothing since it’s less than 50 mils out of center traverse c. Tell Gunnery Sergeant that you have to move d. Have the Advance party man shoot another azimuth

44. The azimuth knob bar must read _______.

a. Direct Fire b. Indirect c. Does not matter

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-13

45. On which side of the howitzer do you place the collimator?

a. Left front b. Left rear c. Right rear d. Ask the gunner where he wants the collimator placed

46. You are Cannoneer No. 1, and you just rammed the round and the assistant gunner closed the breech. What is your next action to inform the gunner that the cannon is loaded?

a. Tell the gunner that you are ready to fire b. Request permission from your section chief to hook the lanyard c. Command closed d. Tap the gunner on his shoulder

47. During misfire on hot tube, you replace the canister. How much time do you have to refire the weapon?

a. 5 minutes b. 10 minutes c. 2 minutes d. 30 seconds

48. Proximity (VT) fuzes must be protected from _______.

a. Direct sunlight b. Rain c. Dampness d. Fog

49. The class leakage on page 0037 00-2 pertains only to _______.

a. Breech b. Hydraulic power c. Brake system d. None of the above

50. When pulling PMCS on M119A2, Item 8 pertains to _______.

a. Carriage b. Cannon tube c. Handbrakes d. Wheel assembly

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

M119 HOWITZER ANSWER KEY 1. c 2. b 3. Vertical Sliding Wedge 4. Spring Actuated Inertia Percussion 5. Semi-Fixed Ammunition 6. c 7. c 8. c 9. a 10. b 11. b 12. b 13. c 14. b 15. Light Emitting Diode 16. d 17. c 18. Rocket Off 19. M913 has Zone 8 and M548 has charge 7 20. c 21. b 22. L45, R40, and Rear R 28 Facing the Muzzle Brake from the Breech 23. TM 4-48.11 24. Medium Clevis 25. Howitzer exceeded firing maximum rate of fire 26. c 27. c 28. a 29. d 30. b 31. a 32. a 33. c 34. b 35. c 36. c 37. c 38. d 39. a 40. b 41. b 42. d 43. a 44. b 45. b 46. d 47. a 48. c 49. c 50. a

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-15

M109A6 HOWITZER EXAMINATION

1. Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops that fall from the item being inspected is considered a _______ leak.

a. Class I b. Class II c. Class III

2. In a 24-hour continuous operation, a hydraulic component that leaks 1 quart in 24 hours will require the Paladin Commander to _______.

a. Stop vehicle operations b. Notify unit maintenance/repair as soon as mission allows c. Repair at next scheduled maintenance

3. During inspection, if the external fire extinguisher handle seal is broken, or handle pulled, the howitzer is _______.

a. To be scheduled for quarterly service b. Not fully mission capable c. Generally safe to operate

4. Prior to installing the M117A2 telescope, the M145 mount _______.

a. Switch must be off b. Seats must be greased c. Lights must be on

5. On the M117A2 the quadrant, elevation is indicated on the _______.

a. Gunner’s aid counter b. Correction counter c. Elevation counter

6. The automatic fire control system (AFCS) operates in three modes. They are _______.

a. Training, Normal Operations, and Maintenance b. Normal Operations, Keypad Operations, and Stow Mode c. Maintenance, Normal, and Load Mode

7. While in Travel Mode, if a navigation system failure occurs while the howitzer is moving, the operator must _______.

a. Stop the howitzer and initialize AFCS b. Press “Ack” key to acknowledge the fault c. Navigate on his own to his destination

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

8. When a zero velocity update or “ZUPT Required” is indicated while moving, the operator should _______.

a. Press the “Ack” key and stop the howitzer as soon as possible b. Press the “Ack” key and continue movement until “ZUPT” is complete c. Press the “Ack” key and begin orderly shut down

9. Before pressing the “Arrived” key, the operator should _______.

a. Press the “Steer to Fire area” key b. Record current position data and base azimuth c. Input max tube elevation and azimuth

10. Site definition identifies left and right limits, range and elevation in mils using the same procedures as Site to Crest. Up to _______ sets of site definition data can be entered.

a. 12 b. 8 c. 5

11. When establishing DAP or Setting Collimator, there is no FPF or Priority target displayed on the “Section in Order” screen, and the CMD DEFL reads 3200. The AFCS is using the _______.

a. Center of sector (base azimuth) b. ACTL DEFL c. Pantel

12. After firing, the “Verify Expended Ammo” screen is displayed. If the fuze information is incorrect, the AFCS operator should _______.

a. Press “Verify” key and continue mission b. Press “Inventory” key and make correction c. Substitute a compatible fuze for next mission

13. If the Ballistic Computer or Digital Commo is out, fire commands will be sent by voice to the Paladin Commander. He will enter the deflection and quadrant manually. When the voice order “End of Mission” is received the Paladin Commander must _______.

a. Do nothing. The Ammo accountability is automatic. b. Press the “EOM” key and conduct the manual ammo accountability process. c. Press “Verify” key and continue the mission.

14. You receive a new or re-tubed howitzer. Pre-fire checks will include measurement of the rear face of the gun tube to the forward shoulder of the breech ring. The max distance is _______ inches.

a. 4 b. 5 c. 6

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-17

15. When the rammer is in the stowed position, the pointer will be in the _______ band.

a. Red b. Black c. White

16. Rounds that have been rammed and are removed from the tube before firing should be _______.

a. Separated from other ammo and turned in as unserviceable b. Fired on the next mission c. Inspected by the Plt Ldr/PSG then fired if approved by them d. Transferred to another howitzer so the rifling doesn’t match

17. You may cut all the charges you expect to fire at the current firing point once you receive your safety “T”.

a. True b. False

18. During pre-fire checks, the correct measurement on the recoil index pins is _______.

a. ¼ to ¾ in. b. ½ to 1 in. c. ¾ to 1 in. d. ½ to ¾ in.

19. During pre-fire checks, the replenisher gauge should read _______ psi.

a. 10–15 b. 17–50 c. 12–24 d. 17–24

20. The M109A6 howitzer should not have more than _______ mils of cant when boresighting or firing.

a. 12 b. 20 c. 90 d. 200

21. The proper setting on the M582 MT/SQ to function on impact is _______.

a. 90.0 b. Black Triangle 98.0 c. Black Triangle 95.0 d. PD

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

22. The DPICM (M864) projectile contains _______ shaped charged grenades.

a. 144 b. 60 c. 72 d. 0 (the M864 contains no shaped charged grenades)

23. The device used to set time on M732 is the _______.

a. M18 b. M35 c. M27 d. M63

24. In order to properly seat the projectile, the rammer actuating valve must be held in the forward position for a full _______ seconds.

a. 5 b. 4 c. 3

25. When propellant charges are cut and not fired, the order that they are reassembled in is not important.

a. True b. False

26. Once you receive your safety “T”, minimum times should be preset on all fuzes.

a. True b. False

27. When boresighting the M109A6 by the test target method, the test target must be located at least how many meters in front of the howitzer?

a. 50 b. 100 c. 75 d. 4–15

28. The micrometer test on the Gunner’s quadrant allows a maximum tolerance of _______ mils.

a. 0 b. 4 c. 0.4 d. 4.4

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-19

29. To set an M564 MT/SQ (dated 1970) for super quick action, the fuze should be set at _______.

a. 90.0 b. Triangle 98 c. 98.8 d. S

30. If the primer did not fire, the first step in cold tube misfire procedures is _______.

a. Wait 2 minutes and remove the primer b. Wait 10 minutes and remove the charge c. Evacuate the howitzer and call EOD d. Command misfire and attempt to fire two additional times

31. The proper fuze setter to set the time on a M582 MT/SQ fuze is the _______.

a. M18 b. M35 c. M34 d. M63

32. The proper wrench used to tighten the fuze on a standard HE projectile is the _______.

a. M18 b. M27 c. M35 d. M63

33. Artillery ammunition is segregated by _______.

a. Type, Lot, and Weight Zone b. Color, Lot, and Size c. Number, Lot, and Markings d. Fixed, Semi-fixed, and Separate Loading

34. The command “Check Firing” can be given by _______.

a. The Battery Commander b. The Paladin Commander c. The Plt Ldr/PSG d. Anyone observing an unsafe act

35. When emplacing the collimator, the optimum distance is _______ meters.

a. 3–10 b. 4–15 c. 5–12 d. 6–8

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

36. What is a “cook off”?

a. A delay in the action by the igniter or propelling charge b. When the weapon does not fire after an attempt to fire c. When the propelling charge is ignited by excessive tube heat d. None of the above

37. The maximum rate of fire for the M109A6 howitzer is _______.

a. 1 rpm for 4 min. b. 3 rpm for 1 min. c. 1 rpm d. 4 rpm for 3 min.

38. How many rammer staff sections should be assembled to unload a rammed round?

a. 5 b. 4 c. 7 d. None; the round should be fired at a safe elevation or EOD extracts the projectile.

39. The maximum cruising range for the M109A6 is _______ miles.

a. 350 b. 250 c. 175 d. 186

40. The fording depth for the M109A6 is _______.

a. 42 in. b. 36 in. c. 4 ft. d. None of the above

41. The weight of the muzzle brake is approximately _______ pounds.

a. 250 b. 350 c. 200 d. 300

42. The “U” in the acronym SALUTE stands for _______.

a. Uniform b. Unfriendly c. Under control d. Unknown

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-21

43. The safety “T” for high angle HE missions, charge 4 WB can also be used to shoot charge 4 WB with Illumination Projectiles.

a. True b. False

44. The propelling charge M119A2 is easily distinguished from the M119A2 because _______.

a. It is incremented b. The charge bag is red c. It has a white igniter pad d. The charge bag is green

45. Storing ammunition on dunnage is important only if you will be in the area for a long time.

a. True b. False

46. What is the maximum limit of the track adjuster on the M109A6 howitzer?

a. 4 in. b. 3.5 in. c. ¼ in.

47. When storing ammunition, what is the minimum inches of dunnage that should be under the ammunition?

a. 5 b. 6 c. 12

48. The propelling charge M3A1 is packed two (2) per metal container:

a. True b. False

49. To set an M557 PD fuze to delay the correct tool is the _______.

a. M63 fuze setter b. P-38 c. M16 fuze wrench d. M18 fuze wrench

50. During daylight operations, which end of the magnetic needle on an M2 compass is used to determine an azimuth?

a. The white end (north seeking) b. The black end (south end) c. The red end (azimuth seeking) d. Will not matter as long as the compass is declinated

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

M109A6 HOWITZER VERSION I ANSWER KEY 1. c 41. b 2. c 42. a 3. b 43. b 4. a 44. b 5. c 45. b 6. c 46. b 7. c 47. b 8. a 48. a 9. b 49. d 10. b 50. a 11. a 12. b 13. b 14. b 15. b 16. a 17. b 18. b 19. d 20. c 21. b 22. b 23. c 24. b 25. b 26. b 27. a 28. a 29. d 30. d 31. b 32. a 33. a 34. d 35. c 36. c 37. d 38. c 39. d 40. a

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-23

M777A1/A2 HOWITZER EXAMINATION

1. TM _______ covers theM777A1/A2 howitzer.

a. TM 9-1015-211-10 b. TM 9-1025-112-10 c. TM 9-1025-211-10 d. TM 9-1025-215-10

2. When using the M231 MACS charge using the zone 1 and 2, what is the maximum range?

a. 5,000–9,900 b. 3,000–4,000 c. 4,500–10,000 d. 4,500–11,900

3. What is the maximum rate of fire of M777A1/A2?

a. 1 round per minute for 2 minutes b. 4 rounds per minute for 2 minutes c. 3 rounds per minute for 1 minute d. 4 rounds per minute for 1 minute

4. The M777A1/A2 is equipped with what type of breechblock?

5. What type of firing mechanism does the M777A1/A2 have?

6. The base plate can be used as a speedshift assembly.

a. True b. False

7. During a move to the designated area, the DFCS will allow the section chief to enter a _______ without interfering with the original move order.

a. Target Heading b. Destination c. Section in order d. Site definition

8. During the move to the next location, where does the gunner sit?

a. Behind the driver b. Behind the Section Chief c. At the end of the truck behind the chief d. At the end of the truck behind the driver

9. When using the best method, the reading on the near and far aiming post should be _______ mils.

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

10. One turn on the elevating hand-wheel moves the tube _______ mils.

11. Who loads the powder into the chamber during fire mission?

12. What wrench do you use to adjust the equilibrator screw?

13. Which cannoneers ram the round on the chamber?

14. During the fire mission, who announces “Primed” to the section chief?

15. The No. 5 cannoneer records all fire mission information on DA Form 4513.

a. True b. False

16. What is the different between M564 MT and M565 MTSQ?

17. What fuze setter do you use to set the time on M782?

18. M728 can be set from _______ to _______.

19. What is the allowable tolerance when conducting the micrometer test on the gunner’s quadrant?

20. What does the acronym ICM stand for?

21. Which of the following fuzes are required for deep cavity rounds: the M732 or M728?

22. Piece-to-crest range is expressed to the nearest _______ meter.

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-25

23. What does the acronym HEAT stand for?

24. What is the EFC rating when firing 8-S charge?

a. 1.00 b. 1.000 c. 0.250 d. 0.100

25. During PMCS, who checks the M154 Alignment device?

a. Section Chief b. Ammo Team Chief c. Assistant Gunner d. Gunner

26. When separate-loading ammunition is being fired, the fire command for lot includes two letters, XY. The ammunition component(s) represented by the letter X in lot is (are) _______.

a. Propellant b. Projectile c. Propellant and projectile d. Propellant, projectile, and fuze

27. When misfire procedures for the M777A1/A2 are performed, what device indicates the tube temperature?

a. Thermal warning device b. Alignment device c. Firing device d. Heating device

28. On a weapon that fires separate-loading ammunition, excessive blowback around the breechblock may mean the split rings are less than 180 degrees apart.

a. True b. False

29. Which cannoneers unlatch the spade during speed-shifting?

a. Cannoneers 1 and 3 b. Cannoneers 2 and 3 c. Cannoneers 1 and 5 d. Cannoneers 3 and 5

30. When do Cannoneers No. 1 and No. 2 stop pumping during the speed shift mission?

a. When the chief commands STOP

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

b. When the Gunner commands STOP while looking at the sight c. When the Platoon Sergeant commands STOP d. After the Ammo Team Chief moves the truck

31. Who engages the travel locks during march order?

a. Cannoneers 1 and 3 b. Cannoneer 2 c. Cannoneer 3 d. Cannoneers 1 and 2

32. Who unlatches the spades during March order?

a. No. 2 and Gunner b. No. 3 and driver c. No. 5 and ATC d. ATC and Driver

33. Define Check Firing.

34. What is the expected temperature on hot weather?

a. +100 degrees b. 75 degrees c. 80 degrees d. 89–95 degrees

35. Who do you call to remove the round from the tube in case of Hot Tube?

a. Platoon Sergeant b. S-3 c. BN ammo d. EOD

36. In misfire procedures for cold tube, how long must you wait to remove the primer?

a. 1 minute b. 30 seconds c. 10 minutes d. 2 minutes

37. How many times do you attempt to fire when a misfire occurs?

a. One time only b. Two additional times c. Do not fire again d. Maybe three times

38. When initializing the DFCS, which side of the howitzer do you initialize?

a. Right wheel

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-27

b. Middle wheel c. Left wheel d. Either side

39. When initializing, how far is the howitzer from the SCP?

a. 2 meters b. 3 meters c. 10 meters d. 1 meter

40. When installing the breech, the split rings must be _______.

a. 90 degrees apart b. 180 degrees apart c. 360 degrees apart d. At least 60 degrees apart

41. While inspecting the breech, you find a burr. What do you do?

a. Notify Maintenance b. Remove it with hand file c. Notify the Platoon Sergeant d. Notify the Master Gunner

42. When conducting a reliability test on the pantel, the correction counter must be set to _______.

a. 0 b. min quadrant c. .5 d. 1

43. When doing a comparison test on M140, how many M140 do you use?

a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4

44. What color is the HERA projectile?

45. What color is the M485A1 projectile?

46. What type of fuze can you use on M485 Series?

47. What type of fuze can you use on HE, M898?

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

48. What fuze do you use on HE, M864 projectile?

49. Can you use M119A2 propelling Charge on M110?

50. M203 series charge 8 is equivalent to M119A2 charge 8/M119A2 charge 7.

a. True b. False

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-29

M777 HOWITZER ANSWER KEY 1. d 2. d 3. b 4. Screw block, interrupted thread 5. Magazine feed; loads, fires, and extracts primers 6. a 7. a 8. d 9. 75 to 150 meters 10. 10 mils 11. No. 2 Cannoneer 12. 17-mm wrench 13. No. 4 Cannoneer and driver 14. No. 2 Cannoneer 15. b 16. M565 Fuze 17. The M1155 Portable Inductive Artillery Fuze Setter (PIAFS) 18. The fuzes can be set from 5 to 100 seconds. 19. 0.4 mils 20. Improved Conventional Munitions 21. M728 22. 100 meters 23. High-Explosive, Anti-Tank 24. b 25. c 26. b 27. a 28. b 29. d 30. a 31. d 32. c 33. A check firing is a command given by anyone observing an unsafe act or condition. 34. a 35. d 36. d 37. b 38. c 39. d 40. b 41. b 42. a 43. c 44. Olive Drab w/yellow marking 45. Olive drab w/white marking 46. M565, 577, and M762 47. M577 48. M577 and M762 49. No 50. b

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-30 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SECTION II – FIRE DIRECTION CANNON EXAMINATIONS (13D)

FIRE DIRECTION EXAMINATIONS The fire direction written examination included in this appendix is the technical test along with the answer key. Questions that are generic safety or Fort Sill specific questions are referenced in local range regualations and are depicted in the examination as examples only. They will need to be revised or removed, as necessary, based on your local range regulations.

Test Administration Requirements

TASK: Complete the written test.

CONDITIONS: In a classroom or field environment given a test, answer sheet, pen or pencil, and all required references.

STANDARDS: Time given to complete the test and the passing grade will be determined by the unit commander and local SOPs.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED:

• Primary evaluator (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test (he may also occupy a test station).

• Classroom or training area.

• Stopwatch (one per evaluator).

• Criterion-scoring checklist (one per Soldier).

• Desk and chair or clipboard (one per Soldier).

• Pencils (one per Soldier).

• Required references

TEST PLANNING TIME: (Example)

• Administrative time: 5 minutes

• Test time: 60 minutes

• Total time: 65 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION:

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SOLDIER: You are currently located at a testing location. This is an open book exam. You will have 1 hour to complete this exam. Individual work is mandatory. Do you understand the requirements of this test? Do you have any questions? You may begin. (Start the time.)

13D TECHNICAL TEST THIS IS AN OPEN BOOK EXAM. YOU HAVE 1 HOUR TO COMPLETE THIS EXAMINATION. ALL ANSWERS WERE DETERMINED USING THE FOLLOWING REFERENCES:

a. TC 3-09.8, Field Artillery Gunnery b. FM 3-09.70, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for M109A6 Howitzer (Paladin) Operations c. Local Range SOP d. Unit TACSOP

Individual work is mandatory. Your test score will be given to your chain of command upon grading.Your test is available for review upon request. 5. POC for this examination is the BN FDNCO at XXX-XXXX.

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-31

Note. This is an example of the test; yours should include other questions concerning local range regulations and unit TACSOP.

1. List the five requirements for accurate predicted fire.

2. Define technical fire direction.

3. Define tactical fire direction.

4. If the azimuth from point A to point B is 1,800, what is the back azimuth?

a. 1,600 mils b. 5,000 mils c. 3,200 mils d. 4,800 mils

5. A map with a scale of 1:25000 will show more details than a map of 1:50000.

a. True b. False

6. An eight-digit grid coordinate will give you a location to the nearest 10 meters.

a. True b. False

7. List the colors designated to each firing battery, targets, check points, and radar.

8. Which of the following is the correct sequence for transmitting an MTO?

a. Changes to the call for fire, unit to fire, number of rounds, target number. b. Unit to fire changes to the call for fire, number of rounds, target number. c. Target number, number of rounds, unit to fire, changes to the call for fire. d. Number of rounds, target number, changes to the call for fire, unit to fire.

9. When must SPLASH be sent to the observer?

a. When working with aerial observers b. During illumination missions c. During high angle missions d. During both a and c

10. Fire Commands are used to tell the FDC how to attack a target.

a. True b. False

11. When firing a FASCAM minefield, which shot first, ADAM or RAAMS?

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-32 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

12. You should always disconnect your antennae when trying to determine whether or not you are being jammed.

a. True b. False

13. The 155mm White Bag (M4A2) propelling charge consists of increments numbered _______.

14. What is the standard weight of the M107 round that the M109A6 fires?

15. The common deflection for the M109-series howitzer is _______ mils.

a. 2,800 b. 3,200 c. 1,600 d. 2,400

16. The OIC will brief all personnel to command _______ immediately, if unsafe acts are observed or reported.

17. When dealing with azimuths, which rule applies, RALS or LARS?

a. RALS b. LARS

18. When dealing with deflections, which rule applies: RALS or LARS?

a. LARS b. RALS

19. The left and right limits are entered as _______ in the move order sent by the POC.

a. Azimuth b. Deflection

20. What is the max firing position area radius for the howitzers?

a. 750m b. 500m c. 1000m d. 25m

21. According to the 1st Armored Division Artillery Cannon and Rocket Firing Safety Policy, a fire mission log must include:

22. How often should the howitzer-tracking chart be updated?

23. The howitzer-tracking chart is set up to what scale?

a. 1:2,000 b. 1:1,000 c. 1:10,000

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-33

d. 1:20,000

24. What are the colors of a military map, and what do they represent?

25. What DATUM code do we use in Germany?

a. 121 b. 31 c. 131 d. 32

26. What are the five major and three minor terrain features?

27. What are the three types of contour lines?

28. What are the three colors used for the howitzer-tracking chart, and what do they stand for?

29. Why do you NOT want the guns to move into another gun’s past position?

30. What time do you load into the SINCGARS radio?

a. PLUGGER, Zulu b. PLUGGER, Local c. PLUGGER, 1 hour behind d. PLUGGER, 2 hours behind

31. When erecting the OE 254 antennae group, what is meant by a “drip loop”?

32. When should PMCS on vehicles be performed in a field environment?

a. After operations b. Before operations c. Daily d. All of the above

33. What is your individual weapon serial number?

34. During training, when a target grid plots out of safe what is the correct command from the chart operator?

a. Cease firing b. Check firing c. Cease loading d. Hey chief

35. What numbers may be set on the Copperhead projectile?

a. 0-999 b. 111-888 c. 1-8 d. 0-9

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-34 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

13D TEST ANSWER KEY

1. Accurate TGT location, accurate firing unit location, accurate weapon and ammo information, accurate meteorological information, accurate computational procedures. (FM 6-40, p. 1-3) 2. Technical fire direction is the process of converting weapon and ammunition characteristics

weapon and target locations, and meteorological information to firing data. 3. Tactical fire direction includes processing calls for fire and determining the appropriate method of

fire, ammunition expenditure, units to fire, and time of attack. 4. c 5. a 6. a 7. A: red B: black C: blue Targets: black Checkpoints: blue Radar: green 8. b 9. d 10. a 11. RAAMS 12. a 13. 3-7 (TFT) 14. 95.0 lbs (ST 6-40-2, p. B-4) 15. b 16. CHECK FIRING 17. a (FM 6-40, p. 6-22) 18. a (FM 6-40, p. 6-22 19. a 20. a (FM 3-09.70) 21. Target number, Grid, altitude, charge, lot, shell, fuze, and number of rounds fired. (1st Armored

Division Artillery Cannon and Rocket Firing Safety Policy, p. 8) 22. Every time the howitzers move 23. c 24. Black: manmade feature, green: vegetation, blue: water, brown: relief features, red: main roads,

red-brown: relief features, roads. 25. c 26. Hill, saddle, valley, ridge, depression draw, spur, cliff 27. Index, intermediate, supplementary 28. Red: past position, black: present position, blue: future position 29. So the guns do not move into past footprints (Counter-fire footprint) 30. a 31. Making a loop in the antennae cable as it comes from the feed cone as to not cause excessive

bending. 32. d

33. As determined from your Supply 34. b 35. c

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-35

SECTION III – FIRE DIRECTION MULTIPLE LAUNCH ROCKET SYSTEM EXAMINATIONS (13P)

FIRE DIRECTION WRITTEN EXAMINATION The fire direction written examination included in this appendix is the technical test along with the answer key. Questions that are generic safety or Fort Sill specific questions are referenced in local range regualations and are depicted in the examination as examples only. They will need to be revised or removed, as necessary, based on your local range regulations.

Test Administration Requirements

TASK: Complete the written test.

CONDITIONS: In a classroom or field environment given a test, answer sheet, pen or pencil, and all required references.

STANDARDS: Time given to complete the test and the passing grade will be determined by the unit commander and local SOPs.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED:

• Primary evaluator (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test (he may also occupy a test station).

• Classroom or training area.

• Stopwatch (one per evaluator).

• Criterion-scoring checklist (one per Soldier).

• Desk and chair or clipboard (one per Soldier).

• Pencils (one per Soldier).

• Required references

TEST PLANNING TIME: (Example)

• Administrative time: 5 minutes

• Test time: 60 minutes

• Total time: 65 minutes

OTHER INFORMATION:

13P TECHNICAL TEST

1. This is an open book exam. You have 1 hour to complete this examination.

2. All answers were determined using the following references:

a. FM 3-09.60, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Operations

b. TC 3-09.8, Field Artillery Gunnery c. Local Range SOP

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-36 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

d. Unit TACSOP

3. Individual work is mandatory.

4. Your test score will be given to your chain of command upon grading. Your test is available for review upon request.

5. POC for this examination is the BN FDNCO at XXX-XXXX.

Note. This is an example of the test; yours should include other questions concerning local range regulations and unit TACSOP.

1. The OIC of an MLRS live fire exercise is responsible for _______.

a. Turning in unused ammunition within 24 hours of firing. b. Gathering MET data. c. Ensuring rounds are safely fired toward the impact area and all safety procedures are followed. d. Maintaining accountability of radar equipment.

2. Ponds, dams, and hay meadows are off limits to tactical vehicles.

a. True b. False

3. Road guards will _______when it is dark, or visibility is reduced to 500 feet or less.

a. Wear reflective vest, and carry baton flashlights b. Not be posted c. Carry flashlights d. Put out road flares

4. Convoys will not exceed 35 mph on range roads unless _______.

a. Trying to make a SP. b. They are lost. c. They are attempting to catch up to the lead vehicle. d. None of the above

5. When verifying MET data, you should question wind speed changes of _______ from line to line.

a. 1–5 knots b. 8 knots c. 10–15 knots d. Any speed

6. Tents that have operational heaters in them must have a/an _______.

a. Alert fireguard in the tent b. 5BC or chemical fire extinguisher c. Fuel container outside with a drip loop d. All of the above

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-37

7. Blackout driving on range roads will be in effect during _______.

a. Unit movements to Peachtree crossing b. All ammunition runs c. Blackout driving is against Fort Sill Range Regulations d. Hours of darkness, 0600 Monday through 1200 Friday

8. If fire engulfs an LPC you should _______.

a. Pour water onto the LPC to put the fire out b. Attempt to smother the flames with dirt c. Evacuate the area d. Mark the area

9. For fire safety, when transporting ammunition you are required to have which type of fire extinguishers?

a. One 10-lb, BC-rated extinguisher b. Two 10-lb, BC-rated extinguishers c. Two of any kind of fire extinguisher d. One 5-lb, AB-rated extinguisher

10. Mow-Way Road and Apache Gate Road are off limits to track vehicles.

a. True b. False

11. Hard copies of FDC and SPLL fire mission logs are maintained for _______ after live fire.

a. 6 months b. 1 year c. 2 years d. 18 months

12. Who is responsible for the input of downrange masks?

a. Battery Commander b. Platoon Leader c. Ops Officer/FDC Chief d. Platoon Sergeant

13. When verifying MET data, you should question temperature changes of over 20 degrees Kelvin from line to line.

a. True b. False

14. Temperatures and densities in MET messages normally show an inverse relationship. This means as _____ increases, _______ should decrease.

a. Density, temperature

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-38 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

b. Temperature, density c. Octant, temperature d. Temperature, octant

15. Tracked vehicles must not park within _______ feet of the base of trees on Fort Sill. All other vehicles must not park within _______ feet of the base of trees.

a. 20, 10 b. 50, 100 c. 100, 50 d. 10, 20

16. Only the OIC of the firing point can cancel a CHECKFIRE command.

a. True b. False

17. Which types of MET data are important to the MLRS?

a. Computer MET (METCM) b. Firing point low level MET (METFP) c. Target area low level MET (METTA) d. All of the above

18. Which of the following is true?

a. During movement track commanders must be used. b. The driver may not act as a track commander. c. The track commander will have commo with the driver. d. All the above

19. Blank cartridges will not be fired at individuals at a distance of less than _______ feet.

a. 50 b. 40 c. 100 d. 75

20. When a round is unobserved, you immediately place your unit in CHECKFIRE.

a. True b. False

21. Upon the command CEASE FIRE/FREEZE, who will remain with the launcher and wait for further instructions?

a. Platoon Leader b. Section Chief c. Battery Commander d. Nobody

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-39

22. There must be a minimum of six launchers in order to formulate check data.

a. True b. False

23. Sudden wind reverses are not uncommon when wind speed is 5 knots or less.

a. True b. False

24. What are MISFIRE procedures?

a. Do nothing; the launcher will automatically attempt to fire the other squib associated with the misfired rocket and go to the next available rocket if the second squib fails.

b. Notify the OIC. c. When directed, safe rocket, rearm rocket, and attempt to fire the rocket again. d. Both b and c

25. During live-fire exercises, launchers must perform a PDS update within 3 km of the firing point.

a. True b. False

26. The _______ is responsible for the operation of his launcher crew from the reload point through rocket launch. He ensures that all procedures in the launcher are safe and follows command guidance.

a. Platoon Sergeant b. FDC Computer Operator c. Section Chief d. Gunner

27. The FDO will verify that the MET data and target location were correctly entered by the AFATDS operator and transmitted digitally to the firing launcher. This is an example of the _______.

a. Two-Man Rule b. Using a check launcher c. Law of Diminishing Returns d. All the above

28. Any individual who observes an unsafe act or condition may cause firing to cease by commanding CHECKFIRE.

a. True b. False

29. When you update your PDS, the section chief is to check to see if the SPLL location grid exceeds _______ meters in Easting, and Northing or Altitude.

a. 86 b. 1,500

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-40 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

c. 85 d. 004

Given the following Safety T for FP 400 below, answer the questions. You must answer all of the questions to pass this test.

You are prepared to fire live rockets. You are parked at firing point you have armed rockets:

Firing Point 400

DTG___________

30. On the FCP your actual azimuth is 1450. Are you safe to fire? If not safe, why?

31. You are parked at firing point of 401, and your azimuth is 1454. Are you safe to fire? If not safe, why?

32. To aid in the MEDEVAC procedure, what information do you provide?

a. Pickup location (grid coordinates or common name) b. Number of patients c. Description of patient’s condition and any special equipment needed d. All of the above

33. Artillery and mortar rounds must be observed. When visibility is less than 800 meters firing will cease, unless radar is available to support the firing unit.

a. True b. False

34. Forward Observers will utilize the following items when observing MLRS fire:

a. M-2 Compass b. Map with Safety Diagram c. FM radio for communications d. All of the above

35. When moving a vehicle in a confined area or where troops are bivouacked, ground guides will be used _______.

a. In rear of vehicle

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-41

b. When vehicle is traveling faster than 10 mph c. In front of vehicle

36. Who is responsible for ensuring that launchers properly calibrate prior to conducting a live fire?

a. Platoon Sergeant b. OIC c. a and b d. PAC NCOIC

37. What is the required method of checking firing data for safety?

a. Range Safety Fan b. Range Safety Diagram c. Checking it against a check launcher d. None of the above

38. Per the Battalion Live Fire SOP, a minimum of two independent check launchers is required to compute check data prior to any live fire. What are the tolerances for the command azimuth/elevation and fuze time, respectively, before you utilize this data to compute a safety T?

a. ±5 mils and ±0.2 mils b. ±4 mils and ±0.2 mils c. ±6 mils and ±4 mils d. No prescribed tolerance e. Both a and c

39. Battery FDC does not need an operational printer in use during live-fire procedures before missions may be executed.

a. True b. False

40. Safety is the responsibility of _______.

a. Anyone who cares b. All personnel

41. Per the Battalion Live Fire SOP, check data is generated by minimum of two independent check launchers. How is “independence” achieved?

a. Use the same chief in each of the launchers. b. Have one launcher receive all its firing data, to include MET, digitally, and have one launcher

receive all of its firing data, to include MET, manually. c. Fire checks data using a manual MET. d. It does not matter what you do.

42. When computing check data you average _______.

a. Actual data b. Command data

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-42 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

43. The location identified on the ID line is expressed in _______.

a. UTM b. Millibars c. Meters d. Height Feet

44. It is critical to ensure that the _______ from the ID line is equal to measurement of, the _______, contained on line 00. This is one of the steps done to validate the accuracy of the MET.

45. How many lines of MET are needed for MLRS live fire?

a. 00–07 b. 00–09 c. 00–15

46. Survey data will not be considered valid until the survey is closed. Check launchers will use the data from the firing point provided by the survey section. Survey sections will always get their update grid from the Fort Sill Trig list.

a. True b. False

47. What is area “F” on a safety diagram?

a. Area in front of the launcher that is at risk due to fin failure b. Area in the rear of the launcher that is at risk from blast and debris c. Area near the target that ensures all debris remains within the impact area d. Area in the rear of the launcher that can be occupied by essential personnel wearing ear

protection

48. During a live fire mission, what must the actual data be compared to prior to firing?

a. Safety T b. Safety diagram c. A check launcher d. Ballistic solution tables Sa

mp le

Ex am

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-43

13P TEST ANSWER KEY 1. d 2. a 3. a 4. d 5. c 6. d 7. d 8. c 9. b 10. a 11. b 12. b 13. a 14. a 15. c 16. b 17. d 18. d 19. a 20. a 21. d 22. b 23. b 24. d 25. a 26. c 27. a 28. a 29. d 30. NO, No Date Time Group listed. 31. NO, Safety “T” is for FP400 only 32. d 33. a 34. d 35. c 36. a 37. b 38. a 39. b 40. b 41. b 42. b 43. a 44. Altitude, Altitude 45. c 46. b 47. b 48. c

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-44 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

SECTION IV – SURVEY/METEOROLOGICAL (MET) EXAMINATIONS

SURVEY/MET EXAMINATIONS The Survey/MET Crewmember written examination included in this appendix is for the 13T and the 13W or 13S with the Y5 ASI. The test includes Meteorological and Survey Questions combined in one examination along with the answer key.

13T1O EXAMINATION (SURVEY/MET) 13T (MET PORTION)

1. Identify the main equipment groups that make up the Profiler.

a. Shelter and equipment b. HMMWV and shelter c. HMMWV and trailer d. Shelter and trailer

2. The Artillery method of fire that makes it necessary to correct for the meteorological effects on a projectile is called _______ fire.

a. Direct b. Tank c. Small Arms d. Indirect

3. In what layer of the atmosphere does most weather take place?

a. Mesosphere b. Stratosphere c. Ionosphere d. Troposphere

4. Solar Radiation is absorbed by ozone at the top of which layer?

a. Mesosphere b. Stratosphere c. Biosphere d. Troposphere

5. What is the ratio of the actual amount of water vapor the air can hold?

a. Relative Humidity b. Absolute Humidity c. Ratio Humidity d. Real Humidity

6. What is the term for an increase in temperature as the radiosonde rises through the atmosphere?

a. Subversion b. Introverted

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-45

c. Inversion d. Adiabatic

7. Utilize the Octant map and the following information to complete each block within the Identification Line of the Computer MET message. Place your answers on the answer sheet only!

• Date: 20 January 2001 • Local Standard Time: 2247 • Latitude: 24 Degrees, 11 Minutes North • Longitude: 101 Degrees, 36 Minutes West • Station Height: 55 meters • Surface Pressure: 995.4 Millibars

IDENTIFI- CATION

METCM

OCTANT

LOCATION LaLaLa or xxx LoLoLo or xxx

DATE

TIME (GMT)

GoGoGo

DURATION (HOURS)

STATION HEIGHT (10s M)

hhh

MDP PRESSURE

PPP

1 METCM

Use the following Ballistic MET message to answer questions 8 through 11.

METB31347984 191492036967 001702029938 013104016951 023310021946 032909022946 042606023946 052306028943 062106034939 072707036940

8. What type of Ballistic MET message is annotated on the printout?

a. 1, air to air b. 2, surface to air c. 3, surface to surface d. 4, air to surface

9. What is the date of the Ballistic MET message?

a. 19 b. 22 c. 12 d. 26

10. What is the wind direction at line 07 in mils?

a. 2,100 b. 270

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-46 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

c. 27 d. 2,700

11. What is the Longitude listed on the Ballistic MET message?

a. 347 b. 498 c. 984 d. 822

Use the following Computer MET message to answer questions 12 through 15.

METCM1344982 161412036983 0007100529360983 0104900728810971 0207701628590943 0306702328360899 0405201728550846 0561901728410797 0660101828100750 0758602128100706 0857701828100664 0942701327120623

12. In which zone did the inversion occur?

a. Zone 1 b. Zone 2 c. Zone 3 d. Zone 4

13. In which zone did the 1000 or more mils change occur?

a. Zone 2 b. Zone 10 c. Zone 09 d. Zone 5

14. What is the difference in pressure between 2,500 meters and 3,500 meters?

a. 91 mbs b. 86 mbs c. 83 mbs d. 44 mbs

15. What is the term for what has occurred in zones 6, 7, and 8 with the temperature?

a. Adiabatic b. Inversion c. Isotherm d. Isobar

16. What type of MET message is created by the TACMET?

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-47

a. Computer b. Ballistic c. Extrapolated Computer d. Extrapolated Ballistic

17. When should the TACMET be used to generate a MET message?

a. During calm winds b. The Kestrel 4500 is not available c. At all times d. When electronic means are not available

18. Wind speed, wind direction, station height and _______ are entered for the second point when using two points with the TACMET.

a. Pressure b. Temperature c. Bias d. Relative Humidity

19. Using the barometer shown above, which scale would you use to determine pressure if the station height was 730 meters?

a. Mirror scale b. Inner scale c. Outer scale d. Round scale

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-48 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

20. Using the barometer shown above, with a station height of 2,005 meters, what is the pressure?

a. 969.0 mbs b. 803.0 mbs c. 971.0 mbs d. 817.0 mbs

21. Where is the declination diagram found?

a. TM 11-6660-297-12&P b. In the handout c. National register d. Margin of a map

22. The Kestrel’s compass measures magnetic wind direction. To get true wind direction, _______ is applied.

a. True North b. Grid North c. Magnetic North d. Magnetic Declination

23. Compute magnetic declinations on the following diagrams:

GN 57′ 9° 21′

MD ______________

GN 7° 19′ 12° 58′

15′ 8° 13′

MD ______________ MD ______________

13T (SURVEY PORTION)

24. You are turning the PLGR on using battery power. When you press the ON key it will default to the operational mode.

a. Standby

11° 41’ 10° 58’

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-49

b. Fix c. Continuous d. Averaging

25 Which Figure of Merit (FOM) provides the most accurate position data?

a. Nine b. Six c. Three d. One

26. How many satellites are needed to obtain 3-D position?

a. 4 b. 2 c. 5 d. 3

For questions 27 and 28, refer to the CACHE map sheet.

27. Determine the elevation to the storage bins in grid square NP4223.

a. 375 meters b. 355 meters c. 371 meters d. 365 meters

28. Determine the straight-line distance (in meters) from the wind pump in grid square NP2918 to the storage bins in grid square NP4223.

a. 12,700 meters b. 13,450 meters c. 14,550 meters d. 16,820 meters

For question 29 see Figure 1.

29. You are the recorder for a fifth order survey party. An error has been made meaning the horizontal readings to the forward station. Which of the following examples show the correct way to void the entry? a. A b. B c. C d. D

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-50 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 1

0001.0 3201.0 0001.0 1007.10 - 39.80 1008.1 1639.8 - 39.80 4208.1 4760.3 - 39.70

A D R MN D R

0001.00 3201.00 0001.00 1007.10 - 39.80 1008.10 1639.80 - 39.80 4208.10 4760.30 - 39.70

B D R MN D R

0001.00 30001.00 1007.10 - 39.80 1008.10 1639.8 - 39.80 4208.10 4760.30 - 39.70

C D R MN D R

D D R MN D R

0001.00 3201.00 0001.00 1007.10 - 39.8 1008.10 1639.8 - 39.8 4208.10 4760.3 - 39.7

1008.1

1008.1 1008.1

1008.1

1080.1 V O I D

Figure 1

1008.1 1001.8

1001.8

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-51

For question 30 see Figure 2.

30. What is the mean horizontal angle measured at TS-1?

a. 5421.10 b. 5420.00 c. 2221.10 d. 2220.10

Figure 2 For question 31 see Figure 3.

31. Which figure shows the proper initial circle setting for the theodolite?

a. A b. B c. C d. D

DESIGNATION DATE 20 TRAVERSE

STATION

AZ MK

BNSCP

TS - 1

HORIZ MEAN VERT RD VERT

0001.00

1633.30 3312.00 4766.80

3200.90

0112.10

JOHN

TS - 1

TS - 2

0001.00

1572.20 5421.10 4827.80

3201.00

TS - 1

TS - 2

TS - 3

0001.00

1596.10 2682.10 4803.80

3201.20

5881.90

2221.10

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-52 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 3

For question 32 see Figure 4.

32. Where do you sight on the range pole for horizontal angles?

a. A b. B c. C d. D

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-53

Figure 4 For question 33 see Figure 5.

33. You are measuring an angle with the theodolite. Which controls would you use to place the cross lines exactly on the target?

a. A and D b. H and F c. G and I d. A and F

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-54 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure 5

34. In order to determine the azimuth correction between the master and flank station while performing a simultaneous observation, you must use which of the following?

a. Program 2 in the HTU b. The ephemeris c. The mean angle between the master and flank station d. The nomograph

35. When performing a simultaneous observation and the flank station is located to the left of the master station, how must you apply the azimuth correction?

a. Add b. Subtract c. Depends on the number of flank stations d. None of the above

36. When performing a Hasty Astro using a T16, the beginning procedure is to lock the horizontal scales on which of the following readings.

a. 0000.0 b. 0001.0 c. 4800.0 d. 1600.0

H G

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-55

37. You have powered up the HTU and are at the FOS STARTUP screen when you hear an alarm go off. You want to erase the status line you see and shut off the alarm at the same time. Which key is pressed to erase the status line and silence the status line alarm?

a. F3 b. F4 c. F8 d. F12

38. Which key(s) turn on and increase the brightness light?

a. FN + F2 simultaneously b. FN + F8 simultaneously c. FN + F3 simultaneously d. None of the above

39. What must be done once you have completed the alignment/initialization of the IPADS?

a. Mark with a Plumb Bob b. Update the IPADS c. ZUPT d. Nothing; the IPADS is ready to conduct Survey Operations

40. What F key is used to save data in the database?

a. F2 – Use All b. F1 – Use All c. F3 – Use All d. F4 – Use All

41. What does the PAE code of ttt mean?

a. Marked the Position, Azimuth, and Elevation with a Plumb Bob b. Updated the Position, Azimuth and Elevation with a Theodolite c. Marked the Position, Azimuth, and Elevation with a Theodolite d. Marked the Position and Elevation with a Theodolite

42. Which F key is used to scroll through the Database Filters?

a. F1 b. F2 c. F3 d. F4

43. What must be performed after an Update?

a. Mark b. Alignment c. ZUPT d. Another Update

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-56 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

44. While performing a 2-Position Mark, what is the minimum distance needed to travel before marking the EOL?

a. 50 m b. 90 m c. 100 m d. 45 m

45. What is the Radial Distance limit on the IPADS?

a. 221 km b. 75 km c. 100 km d. 90 km

46. What is the maximum distance the theodolite can be from the IPADS while performing Optical Transfer?

a. 16 m b. 10 m c. 24 m d. 12 m

47. What is the primary function of Field Artillery Surveying?

a. Establish direction and provides Common Grid b. Determine target location c. Provide altitude from mean sea level d. Attain time declination for artillery fire

48. What is the device used to measure horizontal and vertical angles?

a. Kestrel 4500 b. Nikon NE-102 theodolite c. Profiler d. Handheld Terminal Unit (HTU) Sa

mp le

Ex am

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-57

13T10 EXAMINATION (MET/SURVEY) ANSWER KEY 1. a 2. d 3. d 4. b 5. a 6. c 7.

IDENTIFI- CATION

METCM

OCTANT

LOCATION LaLaLa or xxx LoLoLo or xxx

DATE

TIME (GMT)

GoGoGo

DURATION (HOURS)

STATION HEIGHT (10s M)

hhh

MDP PRESSURE

PPP

1 METCM 1 242 016 21 058 0 006 995 8. c 9. a 10. d 11. c 12. d 13. c 14. b 15. c 16. c 17. d 18. c 19. c 20. b 21. d 22. d 23. A B C 24. b 25. d 26. a 27. d 28. b 29. b 30. d 31. b 32. b 33. c 34. d 35. a 36. a 37. c 38. c 39. b 40. a 41. c 42. d 43. c

11.7° W 11.0° E 8.5° W

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-58 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

44. c 45. b 46. c 47. a 48. b

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-59

SECTION V – SAMPLE HANDS-ON COMPONENT LEADER EXAMINATION TASKS

Task 1: Perform prefire checks on an applicable weapon.

Conditions: The Soldier is given an emplaced weapon in operational condition, ready for low-angle firing.

Standards: Conduct the prefire checks, state what is a safe and unsafe condition, and specify what necessary corrective action is to be taken.

Reference: Appropriate -10 manual, FM 6-50, and DA Pam 385-63

Task 2: Verify emplacement of aiming points and recording of deflection.

Conditions: Given an operational emplaced howitzer with the aiming posts, safety and lay circles, and collimator emplaced; all deflections recorded on a gunner’s reference card are correct.

Standards: Determine and announce if the aiming posts are properly emplaced to within 1 mil of the recorded deflections. Announce any error found and what must be done to correct them. All bubbles must be leveled and the scales zeroed out.

Reference: Appropriate -10 Manual

Task 3: Verify boresight.

Conditions: Given an emplaced weapon that has been correctly boresighted. The fire control equipment and a gunner’s quadrant is available. An assistant is available to help traverse or elevate the tube.

Standards: Correctly demonstrate the procedures to verify that the weapon is properly boresighted. Announce to the tester whether or not the weapon is properly boresighted. If any error was found, indicate what corrective action should be taken.

Reference: Appropriate -10 Manual

Task 4: Emplacement of safety aids (stakes or tape).

Conditions: Given an emplaced weapon with a standard reference point (collimator or aiming posts), fire control equipment, safety aids, a Safety T with the right and left deflection limits, and a crewmember to assist in the emplacement of the safety aids.

Standards: Correctly emplace the safety aids at the proper deflection limits in accordance with (IAW) FM 6-50.

Reference: FM 6-50

Task 5: Determine site to crest.

Conditions: Given an emplaced weapon, assistant, assigned sector of fire, and visible crest less than 1,000 meters away.

Standards: Determine and report the site to crest, within 10 mils, to the tester.

Reference: FM 6-50

Sa mp

le Ex

Appendix C

C-60 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task 6: Perform end for end, gunner’s quadrant test.

Conditions: Given a weapon and a gunner’s quadrant.

Standards: Correctly perform the end-for-end test to within 0.1 mil accuracy and report the result to the tester. State the criteria for determining the quadrant’s serviceability.

Reference: Appropriate -10 Manual

Task 7: Perform micrometer test for the gunner’s quadrant.

Conditions: Given a weapon and an accurate gunner’s quadrant.

Standards: Correctly perform the micrometer test procedures and announce the result to within 0 mils tolerance to the tester. State the criteria for determining if the gunner’s quadrant is serviceable.

Reference: Appropriate -10 Manual

Task 8: Set the cannon for deflection using a distant aiming point.

Conditions: Given an emplaced weapon with sights, the gunner’s reference card with the recorded deflection to the collimator and DAP; collimator and aiming posts are not available for use.

Standards: Correctly set the cannon for the deflection of the fire mission using the DAP, aligning the tube and sight to within 1 mil accuracy. All bubbles must be leveled.

Reference: FM 6-50

Task 9: Determine that the weapon is safe to fire (10 missions).

Conditions: Given an emplaced weapon with crew, correctly boresighted, the prefire checks completed, Safety T and a gunner’s quadrant available, and ammunition and charge increments available. Fire commands will be verbally issued by the tester, and the weapon data will be set off by the crew.

Standards: Verify that the commands are safe; confirm the crew set off the data correctly to 1 mil accuracy, and prepare the ammunition properly (correct and complete charge and time fuzes set to 0.1 sec accuracy). If an unsafe condition or error greater than 1 mil exists, “check firing” is announced, along with the reason why. After the condition is corrected, continue to safe the weapon and then fire the weapon.

Reference: FM 6-50, TM 43-0001-28, and appropriate -10 Manual

Task 10: Set up and orient an M2 aiming circle by the grid azimuth method.

Conditions: Given a declinated aiming circle in march order configuration and an AOF.

Standards: Correctly set up and level the circle, determine and place the instrument reading on the circle to 0 mil accuracy, and correctly orient the circle to within 0 mil accuracy.

Note. Leveling the circle can be accomplished by either the circular leveling vial (fish-eye bubble) or the tubular leveling vial. The orientation of the circle will be checked by a reciprocal reading from another circle by the tester.

Reference: FM 6-50

Task 11: Set up and orient an M2 aiming circle by the orienting angle method.

Sa mp

le Ex

Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 C-61

Conditions: Given an unleveled, declinated aiming circle on a tripod, an AOF, an orienting station (OS), a clearly marked end of the orienting line (EOL), and azimuth to the EOL.

Standards: Correctly level the circle, determine and place the instrument reading on the circle to 0 mil accuracy, and correctly orient the circle to 0 mil accuracy.

Note. Leveling the circle can be accomplished by either the circular leveling vial (fish-eye bubble) or the tubular leveling vial. The orientation of the circle will be checked by reciprocal reading by another circle. The circle should initially be positioned near, but not over, the OS.

Reference: FM 6-50

Task 12: Determine the orientation of the lay circle as safe or unsafe.

Conditions: Given leveled, declinated, aiming circles on a tripod that have been oriented.

Standards: Verify the orientation of the lay circle with the safety circle. If safe, correctly zero-out the safety circle to 0 mil accuracy. If unsafe, announce the error, recheck the lay circle after it has been reoriented, and then zero out the safety circle. Record the deflections on paper.

Note. The circles must check within 10 mils. After zeroing, the circles must check within 0 mil. The initial deflection on the test should be unsafe. An immediate second reading will be given that is safe.

Reference: FM 6-50

Task 13: Set up and level the GLPS.

Conditions: Given an M67 Gun Laying Positioning System in the stowed configuration.

Standard: Set up and level the GLPS in accordance with TM 9-6675-347-13&P.

Reference: TM 9-6675-347-13&P

Task 14: Position and orientation using the M67 GLPS.

Conditions: Given an M67 GLPS set up and leveled in a field location; known azimuths to two azimuth markers; an AOF, a howitzer in a firing position, necessary assistants, and communication with the howitzer.

Standard: Perform positioning and orientation in accordance with TM 9-6675-347-13&P.

Reference: TM 9-6675-347-13&P Sa mp

le Ex

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-1

Appendix D

Time & Accuracy Standards

CONTENTS

Paragraph Title Page No. D-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... D-2 D-2 Purpose .................................................................................................................................. D-2 D-3 Fire Mission Total Time Standards ....................................................................................... D-3 D-3.1 MLRS .................................................................................................................................... D-4 D-3.2 Howitzer ................................................................................................................................ D-5 D-4 Evaluating Fire Mission Times ............................................................................................. D-6 D-5 Special Situations .................................................................................................................. D-7 D-6 Section Timing Standards ..................................................................................................... D-8 D-7 Fire Mission Accuracy Standards ....................................................................................... D-28 Table Title Page No. D-1 Overall fire mission timing ................................................................................................... D-6 D-2 Simultaneous mission timing ................................................................................................ D-7 D-3 Fire mission section timing (FIST/COLT) ............................................................................ D-7 D-4 Fire mission section timing (FDC section) ........................................................................... D-8 D-5 Fire mission section timing (gun section) ............................................................................. D-9 D-6 Ready to fire (RTF) times – general...................................................................................... D-9 D-6.1 RTF times – emergency mission (hip shoot)....................................................................... D-10 D-7 FFE: When ready, at my command, or time on target ........................................................ D-12 D-8 FFE: Large segmented target .............................................................................................. D-13 D-9 FFE: FASCAM (target of opportunity) ............................................................................... D-14 D-10 FFE: Priority target or final protective fire ......................................................................... D-14 D-11 FFE: Immediate suppression ............................................................................................... D-15 D-12 FFE: Immediate smoke ....................................................................................................... D-16 D-13 FFE: ICM/DPICM .............................................................................................................. D-17 D-14 FFE: Schedule of fires/fire plan .......................................................................................... D-17 D-15 FFE: Counterfire ................................................................................................................. D-18 D-16 FFE: Engage a moving target, AMC, or TOT ..................................................................... D-19 D-17 Conduct registration, with radar .......................................................................................... D-19 D-18 Conduct HB/MPI registration (with at least two observers) ............................................... D-20 D-19 Adjust fire, forward observer .............................................................................................. D-21 D-20 Adjust fire, forward observer ssing a LLDR/MELIOS, or adjust fire,

radar observed ..................................................................................................................... D-22 D-21 Adjust fire, high-angle, forward observer ........................................................................... D-22 D-22 Adjust fire, high-angle, forward observer using a G/VLLD/LLDR/MELIOS;

adjust fire, high-angle, radar observed ................................................................................ D-23 D-23 Adjust fire: Coordinated illumination ................................................................................. D-24 D-24 Adjust fire: Simultaneous missions ..................................................................................... D-25 D-25 Adjust illumination ............................................................................................................. D-26 D-26 Adjust smoke ...................................................................................................................... D-27 D-27 X and Y radius values ......................................................................................................... D-30

Appendix D

D-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Notes: These tables are designed to be four separate evaluations: Observers, BN FDC, PLT/BTRY FDC, and Guns. Any Fire for Effect (FFE) mission may be designated as a “multiple volley mission.” Missions with identical time standards have been combined; separate fire mission, same standard. In the Adjust Fire mission tables, only one round observer adjustments are annotated (the initial round) and added to the FFE times when determining total mission time. That is, other than the radar or G/VLLD missions which by nature only allow for one round adjustments, the standard for adjust fire missions that employ subsequent rounds in adjustment must be calculated by adding the additional subsequent round adjustment times. Therefore, the “+” (plus) sign in these tables denotes this possible addition of subsequent observer, FDC, and gun times for each of the subsequent rounds yielding a revised total mission time standard. Trainers and evaluators determine if subsequent adjustments in any mission become excessive. PALADIN gun times include the computation of the technical solution by the AFCS. Fuze quick is used as the baseline fuze in most of the fire mission tables. If fuze time or VT is used in a particular fire mission in lieu of fuze quick, 15 seconds will be added to the “gun time” standard for each round fired. High-angle fire mission tables allow 15 seconds more “gun time” than low-angle tables.

D-1. INTRODUCTION Accurate and timely artillery fires are critical for mission accomplishment and battlefield survival of the maneuver force. Recognizing this, FA units continue to improve their fire mission response time. These time standards represent the maximum amount of time a well-trained FA unit takes to place accurate fire on target. Accurate field artillery fires are a mandate, and no amount of speed in response times displaces this requirement. Trainers should be acutely aware of this fact and stress accuracy foremost in their training programs. As teamwork improves through training, response time should decrease without sacrificing accuracy. These time and accuracy standards apply only to Cannon units.

D-2. PURPOSE This appendix has three purposes.

a. It outlines the framework of the training objective time and accuracy standards for fire missions. b. It delineates the methodology by which fire mission total time standards should be timed for both basic

and special missions. c. It provides an indication of strengths and weaknesses of each element of the gunnery team (FO, FDC,

guns), by breaking down total mission time into section response times.

D-3. FIRE MISSION TOTAL TIME STANDARDS D-3.1 MLRS TIME STANDARDS

D-3.1.1 LAUNCHER SECTION

a. The fire mission time standard for a launcher section is based on the “when ready” (WR), and the “at my command” (AMC) fire missions. The standard is 4 minutes. The initial ballistic computation and the travel time from the hide area to the firing point are included in the 4 minute standard. For AMC fire missions, the time that elapses between sending the ready to fire (RTF) message and receiving the command to fire is not included in the time standard.

b. Time starts when the launcher receives the mission.

c. Time stops at time of first fire (TFF) for a WR mission, or upon the sending of the ready to fire message (RTF) for an AMC mission.

d. TOT and TTF missions require that the mission be fired in accordance with a countdown clock. The mission will abort if the crew fails to meet the countdown clock. The clock in the launcher may be out

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-3

of sync with the actual time and even though the launcher crew made the countdown clock, the mission may not have been fired on time. Evaluators cannot use mission-fired reports because the launcher clock generates the time included in them, which could be incorrect. The only true way to evaluate an MLRS dry mission with TOT or TTF method of fire control is to have an evaluator in the launcher to ensure the clock is synchronized with the FDC clock.

D-3.1.2 BATTERY/PLATOON OPERATIONS CENTER (BOC/POC)

a. The BOC/POC fire mission time standard is 2 minutes.

b. Time starts when the mission is received.

c. Time stops when the fire mission is transmitted to the selected firing unit.

d. If the BOC/POC is designated to process ATACMS missions see paragraph A-3, c, below.

D-3.1.3 BATTALION FIRE DIRECTION CENTER (FDC)

a. The fire mission time standard for the Battalion FDC is 2 minutes. Time starts when the mission is received by the FDC and stops when it is transmitted.

b. For when ready and at my command type fire control:

(1) Time starts when the fire mission is received.

(2) Time stops when the fire mission is transmitted to the selected firing unit.

c. ATACMS fire missions are initially processed in the FDS. Processing times vary greatly. Therefore these processing times cannot be included in a time standard. For ATACMS fire missions:

(1) Time starts when the mission has finished processing and is sent to the SPAP queue (version 11) in the FDS.

(2) Time stops when the fire mission is transmitted to the selected firing unit.

d. If the FDC must gain clearance to fire because of an FSCM violation such as an air corridor, the time required verifying/clearing the mission does not count toward the mission time. The clock will stop once processing is finished and the violation is identified. D-3.1.4 Battalion Total Mission Time Standard

a. Total fire mission processing time is a sum of the section times of the battalion FDC, the BOC/POC,

and launcher section for a given mission. That is, from the time that a fire mission is received at the Battalion FDC, the unit has 8 minutes to fire the mission (WR), or report RTF (AMC).

b. The time that the mission resides in the Fire Direction System’s (FDS) buffer at either battalion or battery FDC, is a matter of great concern. Most of the targets engaged by MLRS units have short dwell times. Therefore, it is critical for units FDC sections to rapidly action fire missions.

c. For WR and AMC methods of fire control, time starts at the time of receipt of the mission by the FDS, and stops when the mission is transmitted.

d. Safety Time. Time to perform tactical safety checks are included in these time standards as part of normal section duties. Additional safety tasks required by local range regulations or policies are not considered in these time standards and local commanders will have to adjust these standards based local regulations to allow proper safety procedures. MLRS ROCKET FIRE MISSION TIME STANDARDS

Appendix D

D-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Fire Mission

SPLL POC/BOC Bn FDC TOTAL MISSION PROCESSING TIME

AMC/WR 4 min 2 min 2 min 8 min

D-3.2 HOWITZER TIME STANDARDS

Tables D-8 through D-29 are based on the following:

a. The goal of the Field Artillery is to achieve first-round FFE on every fire mission. By meeting the five elements of accurate predicted fire, or by applying the five steps to improved firing data, units will be able to deliver fires on target or be close enough to necessitate limited subsequent adjustments.

b. The fire mission tables use four components to determine a mission’s total time standard: Observer time, Battalion FDC (Tactical Fire Direction) time, Platoon/Battery (Tactical and Technical Fire Direction) time, and Gun time. Time Standards are listed for each section.

c. TOTAL MISSION time equals Total Observer Time + Battalion FDC Total Time + Platoon/Battery FDC Total Time + Total Gun Time (by system). For example: The Platoon/Btry FDC can be evaluated without BN FDC or Observers. Total mission time would be the sum of the evaluated sections.

d. Three schema are used to determine the time standards. They are represented by the three columns in each table. The digital column represents the use of digital methods at each node in the processing of the mission (e.g., observer–FED or HTU, FDC–AFATDS, Guns–AFCS). The manual column is a voice call for fire, manual FDC, and voice fire commands method. Finally, the M109A6 Paladin column. The first entry is “Tactical Fire Direction” which is done by FDC. The AFCS computes the technical solution for firing the howitzer. Paladin “gun time” in the tables includes the AFCS computation time.

e. If for some reason automation fails, a switch to manual methods will occur. This means that the evaluator may have to zigzag between the columns and take times from both (digital and manual/voice) columns and add them together to compute the “Total Mission Time” standard. Thirty seconds may be added at the component where automation fails, or is non-existent, to compensate for time to switch to manual. This may also apply to Paladin units reverting to degraded mode operations.

f. In the Adjust Fire mission tables, only one round observer adjustments are annotated (the initial round) and added to the FFE times when determining total mission time. That is, other than the radar or G/VLLD missions which by nature only allow for one round adjustments, the standard for adjust fire missions that employ subsequent rounds in adjustment must be calculated by adding the additional subsequent round adjustment times. Therefore, the “+” (plus) sign in these tables denotes this possible addition of subsequent observer, FDC, and gun times for each of the subsequent rounds yielding a revised total mission time standard. Trainers and evaluators determine if subsequent adjustments in any mission become excessive.

g. Fuze quick is used as the baseline fuze in the fire mission tables. If fuze time or VT is used in a particular fire mission, 15 seconds will be added to the “gun time” standard for each round fired.

h. The time standards were developed through operational testing and subsequent field validation. These standards do not include the following: (1) Safety time by external safety personnel. (2) Time of flight: shot to munitions impact. (3) Illumination: shot to burst (illumination adjustment). (4) Illumination: shot to mark (HE adjustment).

D-4. EVALUATING FIRE MISSION TIMES a. The timing and sequencing for each fire mission (initial, subsequent correction, FFE) is shown in

Table D-2. This table is used to determine the basic start and stop times, by mission phase, for each fire mission. This overall mission table, when used in conjunction with the component section timing tables (D-4, D-5, and D-6), gives the trainer/evaluator an accurate picture of how to determine unit fire mission timeliness.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-5

b. Total mission time is usually kept using one of two methods. When training a FIST/COLT/FO, the observer trainer/evaluator is normally responsible for keeping both total mission time as well as the observer section time. Under general support (GS) unit conditions, where an observer may not be part of the unit evaluation, the FDC trainer/evaluator is normally responsible for keeping the total mission time as well as the FDC section time.

c. Safety time is embedded into the section’s time to execute required actions (assumes chain of command personnel, e.g., safety-certified chiefs of section). Units using other than chain of command safety personnel should record and subtract safety time from total mission time, if necessary.

d. Observer times are based on a team consisting of at least one observer assisted by a radio telephone operator (RTO)/digital device operator (FO party, COLT, or FIST). Two such teams may be employed for firing a simultaneous mission.

e. Fire mission time standards may have to be modified by the trainer/evaluator when any of the following occurs: (1) When bad weather prevents the effective execution of a fire mission (e.g., high, shifting winds

when illumination rounds are being fired). (2) When increased MOPP status in simulated CBRN conditions adversely affect the unit’s

timeliness. (3) When real or simulated personnel or equipment losses severely reduce unit capabilities. (4) When the unit receives more fire missions than it can readily handle with the firing units that are

available (e.g., high-intensity war scenario). f. If a howitzer misfires during the FFE phase of a fire mission, and the platoon leader or FDO calls the

piece out of action, mission time will stop when all other pieces have fired in the initial volley of FFE. Misfires subsequently fired should be observed/evaluated for accuracy (effects).

g. There is no administrative requirement that every howitzer in the unit be in position and firing for each battalion mission. As a general rule, two-thirds of the battalion’s firing capability should be in position and available to answer calls for fire. The bottom line is that the FDO is responsible to the commander for determining the volume of fire necessary to achieve the desired effects on the target and issues a fire order which appropriately reflects the number of available howitzers to fire.

h. Out-of-traverse missions may be a necessary part of some units’ METL. The FA School has no established time standard for the execution of the re-laying of firing units on targets outside traverse limits. Units with these mission requirements should develop a standard for this procedure, battle drill it, and use this standard in training and evaluations. Once the firing unit is relayed, the tables in this appendix will serve as the time standard for the fire mission itself.

i. Scheduling planned fires, as in a preparation or other program of fires, by its very nature is an untimed event. During the planning process for a battle, fire support personnel may be tasked to develop a particular schedule of fires to support the scheme of maneuver. This process is untimed. In an evaluation, the measure of success for a schedule of fires is whether or not it was executed when required, and had the intended effect on the target(s) to meet the commander’s intent.

Appendix D

D-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-1. Overall Fire Mission Timing

I. FFE Mission

Phase Action Timing FFE Observer identifies the target. Starts

Last round in first volley of FFE is fired. Stops

II. Adjust Fire Mission

Phase Action Timing Initial Observer identifies the target. Starts

Round is fired. Stops Subsequent* Initial/Subsequent round impacts. Starts

Round is fired. Stops FFE Subsequent round (last) impacts. Starts

Last round in first volley FFE is fired. Stops *Timing of this phase is repeated for each adjustment.

Note. The “stopwatch” method of timing the adjust fire mission shown in Part II above automatically accounts for time of flight (TOF). If the total mission time evaluator prefers a “let the clock run” method of timing the mission, he would strip the TOF(s) out of the total time at the end of the mission (per paragraph D-5, b.)

D-5. Special Situations The timing techniques in paragraph D-5 apply to all missions—adjust fire, FFE, and special munitions. However, certain missions require slightly adjusted timing techniques to evaluate them properly.

a. Illumination and/or Coordinated Illumination. When an observer is involved in the evaluation of this mission, the evaluator must adjust the timing sequence because of the peculiar illumination TOF determination. (1) TOF during illumination adjustment is defined as shot-to-illumination mark time. (2) TOF during HE adjustment under illumination is also defined as illumination shot-to-mark time.

Since this time includes both illumination TOF to effective illumination on the target, and the HE TOF impact, the time represented by illumination shot to mark encompasses all of the variables that need to be stripped out of this portion of mission timing.

b. Simultaneous Mission (Table D-3). This mission is to evaluate a platoon/battery. The stress of performing the simultaneous mission has often been a valuable training tool for the firing platoon/battery. Evaluating the timing of two adjust fire missions simultaneously is more difficult that merely running two total mission watches, one for each mission. Table D-2 must be adapted to a timing sequence that realistically strips out the mission variables. That is, the stopping of the watch following each shot to eliminate TOF variables may not be accurate (e.g., while the round for Mission 1 is in flight to the target area, Mission 2 may be in progress in the FDC). Timing should be conducted as follows: (1) During training not involving the evaluation of the observer team, the unit should not be

charged with time when both the FDC and guns are idle and awaiting observer corrections for either mission. That is, should the occasion arise whereby rounds from both missions have been fired (guns idle), and the FDC has yet to receive a correction from the observer for either mission (FDC idle), then that amount of time should be subtracted from the total mission time as often as this occurs in adjust fire. The second column of Table D-3 attempts to portray this occurrence.

(2) In evaluating a unit with an observer, the only variable time is when both rounds for the separate missions are in the air at the same time. This amount of time normally will be only a

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-7

few seconds and may be negligible in the total mission time. The third column shown in Table D-2 attempts to portray this occurrence.

Table D-2. Simultaneous Mission Timing

Action Timing Without Observer Timing With Observer Adjusting piece (Mission 1) fires a round

Watch already running from FDC’s receipt of initial target location

Watch already running from initial target identification by observer

Adjusting piece (Mission 2) fires a round

Stop Watch Stop Watch

Round 1 impacts Start Watch Round 2 impacts Watch Running The FO sends correction: The FDC receives correction (Mission 1)

Start Watch

Watch Running

The FO sends correction: The FDC receives correction (Mission 2)

Watch Running

Last round, first volley in FFE is fired

STOP STOP

D-6. SECTION TIMING STANDARDS a. For the FA gunnery team to meet the standards listed as fire mission time standards, each element of

the team (Observer, FDC, guns) must perform to standard. b. Tables D-3, D-4, and D-5 outline the “time starts–time stops” methodology for the timing of each

phase of a fire mission for the Observer, FDC, and gun sections. c. RTF time standards appear in Table D-6. This table prescribes the standards for the occupation of

position areas for firing.

Table D-3. Fire Mission Section Timing (FIST/COLT)

Phase Event Actions Timing Initial Observer Time  Detect and identify target

 Prepare call for fire Start

 Transmit target location to FDC, and receive acknowledgment

 Complete call for fire

Stop

Subsequent Corrections

Observer Time  Initial or subsequent round impacts  Sense initial or subsequent round  Determine subsequent corrections (if any)

Start

 Transmit corrections (if any) to FDC, and receive acknowledgment

Stop

FFE Observer Time  Initial or subsequent round impacts  Sense initial or subsequent round  Determine subsequent corrections (if any)

Start

 Transmit corrections (if any) and FFE to FDC, and receive acknowledgment

Stop

Refinement/ Surveillance

 Report refinement, replot data, surveillance, and end of mission to FDC, as appropriate

Not Timed

Appendix D

D-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

NOTE TO EVALUATOR: Missions times are based on a team of at least one observer assisted by an RTO/digital device operator. Observer times in the “Digital” column are valid for FED or HTU.

Table D-4. Fire Mission Section Timing (FDC Section) Phase Event Actions Timing

Initial Battalion FDC Tactical Fire Direction

 FDC receives target location  FDO receives complete call for fire  FDO analyzes target for attack  FDO approves or disapproves target

Start

 FDO issues fire order Stop Initial Plt/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction

 Plt/Battery receives BN Fire Order (or when FDC receives target location if Plt/Btry is autonomous)

 FDO performs tactical checks

Start

 FDO issues fire order Stop Initial Technical Fire

Direction  FDC/AFCS computes firing data  FDO verifies data is safe*

Start

 FDC sends firing data to gun(s) (xmit) Stop Subsequent Technical Fire

Direction  FDC receives subsequent correction or FFE  FDC/AFCS computes firing data  FDO verifies data is safe*

Start

 FDC sends firing data to gun(s) (xmit) Stop FFE Technical Fire

Direction  FDC receives FFE  FDC/AFCS computes firing data  FDO verifies data is safe*

Start

 FDC sends firing data to gun(s) (xmit) Stop *Combat safety check

Table D-5. Fire Mission Section Timing (Gun Section) Phase Event Actions Timing

Initial Gun Time  Acknowledges quadrant from FDC/AFCS displays data

 Sets off firing data  Prepares and loads ammunition  Section chief safes gun

Start

 Announces SHOT (depresses shot key) (READY for at my command fire mission)

Stop

Subsequent Corrections

Gun Time  Acknowledges quadrant from FDC/AFCS displays data

 Gun(s) set(s) off firing data  Gun(s) prepare(s) and load(s) ammunition  Section chief safes gun

Start

 Announces SHOT (depresses shot key) (READY for at my command fire mission)

Stop

FFE Gun Time  Acknowledges quadrant from FDC/AFCS displays data

 Sets off firing data  Prepares and loads ammunition  Section chief safes gun

Start

 Announces SHOT (depresses shot key) (READY for at my command fire missions)

Stop

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-9

Table D-6. Ready To Fire (RTF) Times – General

Occupy Position Area PLT – 4 Gun PLT – 3 Gun Btry – 6 Gun M119A2 12 min M777 10 min 10 min 13 min M109 Series (less A6) 10 min 12 min M109A6* 3 min

TIME STARTS: (Non PALADIN) When first howitzer stops in its firing position.

TIME STOPS: When every howitzer section has completed TLABSPAP (Trails, Lay, Aimpoint established, Boresight verified, Safe [verification of lay], Prefire checks performed, Ammunition Prepared [one round per gun]) procedures; commo established with the FDC and critical elements* of the section chief’s report rendered. The FDC has commo with guns, Battalion FDC, and Fires Cell/FISTS, current sitmap posted, two means of computing firing data, XO’s min QE determined (lowest charge), and transmits “READY” in the operational tab of the unit data to Bn FDC (RTF).

(*Reference FM 6-50; these critical elements should be designated in the unit’s TACSOP.)

Notes:

1. Times do not include position improvement.

2. Times assume site to crest determined by advanced party.

3. Add 5 minutes for night occupation.

4. Add 10 minutes for occupation of unprepared position.

5. Time standard for M119A2 applies to all configurations.

6. Tasks do not reflect any local range safety regulations, or unit safety policies (Safety Ts, taping guns, staking guns, verifying data via a “bump mission,” etc.)

*PALADIN SECTION STANDARDS INCLUDE:

TIME STARTS: When the first howitzer stops in its firing position. a. Howitzer tactical move: verify location, verify direction, determine site data, input/verify firing limits

(load EL, max EL, L/R sectors of fire), send piece status to POC, and concurrently perform prefire checks.

b. Howitzer survivability move: determine site data, verify firing limits, send piece status to POC, and concurrently perform prefire checks.

TIME STOPS: When the last howitzer sends piece status to the POC. c. POC: establish voice and digital commo with guns and Bn FDC/FISTS, verify database, verify gun

locations on sitmap, receive and verify site data from guns, compute and announce XO’s min QE, verify firing limits w/guns, post current sitmap, and transmits “READY” in the operational tab of the unit data to Bn FDC (RTF).

Appendix D

D-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-6.1. RTF Times – Emergency Mission (Hip Shoot)

Occupy Position Area PLT Btry M119A2 11 min M777 12 min 12 min M109 Series( less A6) 11 min 11 min M109A6 (outside position area)* 75 sec

TIME STARTS: When FDC receives fire mission warning order.

TIME STOPS: When the last round is fired in the first volley of FFE.

*PALADIN NOTES: 1. Moving mission inside position area: find suitable location, arrive, verify immediate site to crest along

commanded deflection, and execute fire mission. Time standard is 60 seconds. 2. Moving mission outside position area: location, verify direction, arrive, verify immediate site to crest along

commanded deflection, and execute fire mission. Standard is 75 sec.

RTF Times – Air Assault Movement

I. Preparation standards for an air assault operation are: 30 minutes to rig all howitzers 40 minutes to rig all howitzers and prime movers

TIME STARTS: When the first vehicle arrives in the PZ.

TIME STOPS: When last vehicle is prepared (PZ posture).

II. Once the howitzers arrive at the new position the Ready to Fire standard is: 12 minutes for each serial (includes derigging and TLABSPAP – daytime) 17 minutes nighttime

TIME STARTS: When first vehicle arrives in the firing position.

TIME STOPS: When every howitzer section and the FDC are ready to fire (see Table D-7).

NOTES: 1. The advance party is on the LZ, and lift helicopters arrive at the LZ. 2. If firing position is offset from LZ, allow 4 minutes for each serial to clear the LZ, then apply occupation time

standards. 3. Time does not include position improvement. 4. Times assume site to crest determined by advanced party. 5. Add 10 minutes for occupation of unprepared position. 6. Time standard for M119A2 applies to all configurations.

RTF Times – Air Assault Artillery Raid

I. Preparation standards for an air assault artillery raid: 30 minutes to rig howitzers.

TIME STARTS: When the first howitzer arrives at the PZ, or upon receipt of mission if the PZ is the firing position.

TIME STOPS: When the last howitzer is ready for liftoff.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-11

II. Once the howitzers are in position: 10 minutes (daytime) 20 minutes (nighttime)

TIME STARTS: When first howitzer touches down.

TIME STOPS: When the last howitzer is ready to fire.

NOTES: 1. Assumes raid is conducted with M119A2 in D-frame configuration with baseplate on. 2. Add 2 minutes if M119A2 is rigged in stowed position. 3. Add 2 minutes if M119A2 is rigged with baseplate removed. 4. Assumes all howitzers arrive at firing position in one serial. 5. Firing position is the LZ.

III. Fire mission is conducted IAW standards established in Tables D-7 through D-28.

TIME STARTS: When howitzers are ready to fire.

TIME STOPS: When last round, first volley in FFE is fired.

IV. Extraction standards: 17 minutes to prepare howitzer for extraction, (19 minutes nighttime).

TIME STARTS: At EOM (command to march order for extraction is given).

TIME STOPS: When howitzers are ready to be extracted.

RTF Times – Drop Zone Mission

Should the tactical situation require the Battery to conduct a fire mission from a drop zone, the following standards apply:

105mm: 15 minutes during the day (25 minutes at night). 155mm: 25 minutes during the day (40 minutes at night).

TIME STARTS: When last jumper, first pass, exits the aircraft.

TIME STOPS: After TLABSPAP procedures (less position improvement) are completed, and first round in adjustment is fired (adjust fire mission).

Appendix D

D-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-7. Fire for effect (FFE): When Ready, At My Command, Or Time On Target

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :55 :45 :55 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME :55 :45 :55

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION TIME :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :35 :45 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45

1:00

:30 :45

1:00 :30

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45

1:00

:30 :45

1:00 :30

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

2:35 2:50 3:05

2:15

Note: These three fire missions have the same time standards. For TOT missions, all rounds must impact at ±3 seconds of TOT time.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-13

Table D-8. FFE: Large Segmented Target

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :55 :45 :55 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME :55 :45 :55

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION 1:05 1:00 1:05

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME (Note 1) :35 :45 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

3:05 3:20 3:35

3:00 3:15 3:30

2:45

Note: Assumes each firing element, platoon or battery, fires a single target location. If only Platoon/Btry FDC is being evaluated on these procedures the “Tactical Fire Direction” time would be 1 minute, 5 seconds.

Appendix D

D-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-9. FFE: FASCAM (Target Of Opportunity)

Unit is evaluated on determining FASCAM data. HE data may be computed separately and delivered for execution. Release of FASCAM has been received from proper authority. Coordination has been affected with the Engineers. Minefield Safety Zone is computed and disseminated per unit SOP.

Note: No digital method of determining FASCAM aimpoint data is available. Use manual method standard (15:00 min.). Time standard for the FDC is determined by the number of aimpoints required. Multiply the number of subsequent aimpoints by value shown and add to the FDC total time = new FDC total time. For HE execution, time stops at determination of FASCAM data, time starts again when FFE HE/TI (to simulate FASCAM) data is sent to the guns. Multiply the number of rounds fired by the time shown (by weapon system), that time becomes total gun time. (Add 15 seconds per round, gun time, for high angle fire.). Total mission time = new total observer time + new FDC total time + total gun time.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-15

Table D-10. FFE: Priority Target or Final Protective Fire

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction TOTAL OBSERVER TIME :10 :10 :10

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :05 :10 :05

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :05 :05 :05 (Note 1)

Initial Round Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 :15 Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction FDC TOTAL TIME :05 :05 :05

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:20 :30 :30

:15

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:20 :30 :30

:15

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:40 :55 1:10

:45 1:00 1:15

:35

Note: These two separate fire missions have the same time standards. Firing data precomputed and stored in the AFCS. The AFCS can store firing data for, either the Copperhead target or the Final Protective Fire (FPF) but not both. These time standards apply to the mission that is stored in the AFCS. For Non-Paladin units this would be an on-call mission with the tubes laid on the data. Firing data stored in the AFATDS.

Appendix D

D-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-11. FFE: Immediate Suppression

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :55 :25 :55 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME :55 :45 :55

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :35 :45 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

2:35 2:50 3:05

2:35 2:50 3:00

2:15

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-17

Table D-12. FFE: Immediate Smoke

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN AFCS

FFE Shell/Fuze Combination (Note 1)

WP/Q HC/TI WP//Q HC/TI WP/Q SMK/TI

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :55 :25 :55 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME :55 :25 :55

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION

:35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction

:20 :30

Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :55 1:15 :15

Guns Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:45 1:00 1:15

:30 :45 1:00

:45 1:00 1:15

:45

TOTAL GUN TIME

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:15 1:45 2:15

:45

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

3:40 4:10 4:40

3:30 4:00 4:30

2:30

Note: (105mm) 1st round, WP/Q, remaining rounds HC smoke. (155mm) Add 15 sec to FDC for M825 smoke workaround, if necessary.

Appendix D

D-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-13. FFE: ICM/DPICM

Type of Computation tx6480

DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/TI HE/TI HE/TI

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :55 :45 :55 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME :55 :45 :55

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :35 :45 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:45 1:00 1:15

:45

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:45 1:00 1:15

:45

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

2:50 3:05 3:20

2:30

Unit is evaluated on determining ICM/DPICM data. HE/TI data may be computed separately and delivered for FFE.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-19

Table D-14. FFE: Schedule of Fires/Fire Plan

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction TOTAL OBSERVER TIME Note 1 Note 1 Note 1

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION Note 1 Note 1 Note 1

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15+ :15+ :15+ Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20+ :30+ FDC TOTAL TIME :35+ :45+ :15+

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30+ :45+ 1:00+

:30+

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:05+ 1:20+ 1:35+

1:15+ 1:30+ 1:45+

:45+

Note: The preparation of a schedule of fires or fire plan, is not a timed event. The delivery of fires is timed. If there is an H-Hour then the rounds must impact within 3 seconds. If any target is High angle or fuze time add 15 seconds to gun time. Total mission time would be the sum x number of missions in the plan.

Appendix D

D-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-15. FFE: Counterfire

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :55 :45 :55 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME :55 :45 :55

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :35 :45 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

2:35 2:50 3:05

2:15

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-21

Table D-16. FFE: Engage A Moving Target, AMC, or TOT

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round :50 :45 :50 Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :20 :10 :20 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 1:10 :55 1:10

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :25 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :20 FDC TOTAL TIME :35 :35 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:15

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:15

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

2:50 3:05 3:20

2:25 2:40 2:55

2:15

Note: This procedure is performed using the FFE mission type, and either At My Command or Time on Target Method of Control. If undesirable effects are achieved, the observer may make corrections and repeat the mission.

Appendix D

D-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-17. Conduct Registration, With Radar

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/TI HE/TI HE/TI

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction TOTAL OBSERVER TIME

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION 1:15 1:00 1:15

Platoon/Battery FDC (Note 1)

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :35 :45 :15

Guns

Each Round (Note 2) 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME (Note 3)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30+ :45+ 1:00+

:30+

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

2:20+ 2:35+ 2:50+

2:15+ 2:30+ 2:45+

2:00+

Note: If Platoon/Btry FDC orients RADAR/conducts the registration, the FDC Time would be 1:15. If time fuze is fired for a HB registration, add 15 seconds to gun times. Multiply gun time by number of rounds fired. FDC must ensure that RADAR has the following data: Btry Loc., TGT Loc (to include ALT), QE fired, MAX ORD.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-23

Table D-18. Conduct HB/MPI Registration (With At Least Two Observers)

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction TOTAL OBSERVER TIME

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION 1:15 1:15 1:15

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :35 :45 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:45 1:00 1:15

:45

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:45+ 1:00+ 1:15+

:45+

TOTAL MISSION TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

2:35+ 2:50+ 3:05+

2:45+ 3:00+ 3:15+

2:15+

Note: Observer participation is not timed for this mission. If Platoon/Btry FDC orients the observers/conducts the registration, the FDC Time would be 1:15. This mission normally needs 6 to 8 rounds. HB is the most desirable method; it gives us a fuze TI correction. If MPI is conducted subtract 15 seconds from “EACH ROUND” gun time.

Appendix D

D-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-19. Adjust Fire, Forward Observer

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round :55 :45 :55 Each Subsequent Correction (Note 1) :10 :10 :10 FFE Correction :10 :10 :10 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 1:05+ :55+ 1:05+

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction (Note 2)

(:20) (:30)

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :55+ 1:15+ :15+

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME (Note 3)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:00+ 1:30+ 2:00+

1:00+

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE (Note 4)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

3:35+ 4:05+ 4:35+

3:45+ 4:15+ 4:45+

2:55+

Note: Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by value shown and add to the total observer time = new total observer time. Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by value shown and add to the FDC total time = new FDC total time. Multiply the number of subsequent rounds by the “each round” time shown and add to the total gun time = new total gun time. Total mission time = new total observer time + new FDCs total time + new total gun time.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-25

Table D-20. Adjust Fire, Forward Observer Using A LLDR/MELIOS, or Adjust Fire, Radar Observed

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round :55 :45 :55 Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :10 :10 :10 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 1:05 :55 1:05

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :55 1:15 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:00 1:30 2:00

1:00

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

3:35 4:05 4:35

3:45 4:15 4:45

2:55

Note: Normally there is only one round in adjustment. These two separate fire missions have the same time standards.

Appendix D

D-26 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-21. Adjust Fire, High-Angle, Forward Observer

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round :55 :45 :55 Each Subsequent Correction (Note 1) (:10) (:10) (:10) FFE Correction :10 :10 :10 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 1:05+ :55+ 1:05+

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction (Note 2)

(:20) (:30)

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :55+ 1:15+ :15+

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:45 1:00 1:15

:45

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:30+ 2:00+ 2:30+

1:30+

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE (Note 4)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

4:05+ 4:35+ 5:05+

4:15+ 4:45+ 5:15+

3:25+

NOTES: Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by value shown and add to the total observer time = new total observer time. Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by value shown and add to the FDC total time = new FDC total time. Multiply the number of subsequent rounds by the “each round” time shown and add to the total gun time = new total gun time. Total mission time = new total observer time + new FDC total time + new total gun time.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-27

Table D-22. Adjust Fire, High-Angle, Forward Observer Using a G/VLLD/LLDR/MELIOS; Adjust Fire, High-Angle, Radar Observed

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q

Observer Initial Round :55 :45 :55 Each Subsequent Correction FFE Correction :10 :10 :10 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 1:05 :55 1:05

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME :55 1:15 :15

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:45 1:00 1:15

:45

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:30 2:00 2:30

1:30

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

4:05+ 4:35+ 5:05+

4:15+ 4:45+ 5:15+

3:25+

Note: Normally there is only one round in adjustment. These two separate fire missions have the same time standards.

Appendix D

D-28 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-23. Adjust Fire: Coordinated Illumination

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN AFCS

FFE Shell/Fuze Combination ILLUM/ TI

HE/Q ILLUM/ TI

HE/Q

Observer Initial Round :55 :55 :45 :45 :55 :55 Each Subsequent Correction (Note 1)

(:10) (:10) (:10) (:10) (:10) (:10)

FFE Correction :10 :10 :10 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 2:00+ 1:40+ 2:00+

Battalion FDC Tactical Fire Direction :35 :10 :35 :10 :35 :10 BATTALION FDC TOTAL TIME

:45 :45 :45

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction

:20 :20 1:00 :30

Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction (Note 2)

(:20) (:20) (:30) (:30)

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME 1:30+ 2:30+ :30+

Guns Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:45 1:00 1:15

:30 :45 1:00

:45 1:00 1:15

:30 :45 1:00

:45

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME (Note 3)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:45+ 2:30+ 3:15+

1:15+

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE (Note 4)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

6:00+ 6:45+ 7:30+

6:40+ 7:25+ 8:10+

4:30+

This mission doesn’t start until target has been identified and “mark” time is determined. The times denote 1 round of Illum, 1 round HE (initial), and 1 round HE in effect. Other rounds in adjustment, either Illum and/or HE, must be added to determine overall time.

Note: Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments for both shell/fuze combinations by value shown and add to the total observer time = new total observer time. Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments for both shell/fuze combinations by value shown and add to the FDC total time = new FDC total time. Multiply the number of subsequent rounds by the “each round” time shown and add to the total gun time = new total gun time. Total mission time = new total observer time + new FDC total time + total gun time.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-29

Table D-24. Adjust Fire: Simultaneous Missions

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN AFCS

FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q HE/Q HE/Q Msn 1 Msn 2 Msn 1 Msn 2 Msn 1 Msn 2

Observer Initial Round :55 :55 :45 :45 :55 :55 Each Subsequent Correction (Note 2)

(:10) (:10) (:10) (:10) (:10) (:10)

FFE Correction :10 :10 :10 :10 :10 :10 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 2:10+ 1:50+ 2:10+

Battalion FDC Tactical Fire Direction :35 :35 :35 :35 :35 :35 BATTALION FDC TOTAL TIME

1:10 1:10 1:10

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction

:20 :20 :30 :30

Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction (Note 2)

(:20) (:20) (:30) (:30)

FFE Technical Fire Direction :20 :20 :30 :30 FDC TOTAL TIME 1:50+ 2:30+ :30+

Guns Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:30 :45

1:00

:30

TOTAL GUN TIME (Note 4)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

2:00+ 3:00+ 4:00+

1:00+

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE (Note 5)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

7:10+ 8:10+ 9:10+

7:30+ 8:30+ 9:30+

4:50+

Note: For timing sequence see instructions Table D-3.1. This should be a Platoon/Btry mission to gain optimum training value. Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by the value shown and add to the total observer time = new total observer time. Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by the value shown and add to the FDC total time = new FDC total time. Multiply the number of subsequent rounds by the “each round” time shown and add to the total gun time = new total gun time. Total mission time = Platoon/Battery FDC total time + new total gun time.

Appendix D

D-30 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table D-25. Adjust Illumination

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/ MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN

AFCS FFE Shell/Fuze Combination ILLUM/TI ILLUM/TI ILLUM/TI

Observer Initial Round :55 :45 :55 Each Subsequent Correction (Note 1) :10 :10 :10 FFE Correction TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 1:05+ :55+ 1:05+

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION :35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction :15 :15 :15 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction :25 1:00 Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction (Note 1)

FFE Technical Fire Direction FDC TOTAL TIME (Note 1) :40+ 1:15+ :15+

Guns

Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:45 1:00 1:15

:45

TOTAL GUN TIME 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:30+ 2:00+ 2:30+

1:30

TOTAL MISSION TIME WITH OBSERVER PHASE (Note 3)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

3:50+ 4:20+ 4:50+

4:15+ 4:45+ 5:15+

3:25+

This mission denotes only the times for the first round fired. Times for subsequent volleys fired must be added to the total time (see Notes). Paladin units firing more than a “one gun illum” mission (e.g., a range or lateral spread), use the time standards from the Digital column.

Note: Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by the value shown and add to observer or FDC total time = new observer or FDC total time. Multiply the number of subsequent rounds by the “each round” time shown and add to the total gun time = new total gun time. Total mission time = new observer total time + new FDC total time + new total gun time.

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-31

Table D-26. Adjust Smoke

Type of Computation DIGITAL

VOICE/MANUAL COMPS

M109A6 PALADIN AFCS

FFE Shell/Fuze Combination HE/Q SMK/TI HE/Q SMK/TI HE/Q SMK/TI

Observer Initial Round :55 :45 :55 Each Subsequent Correction (Note 1)

(:10) (:10) (:10)

FFE Correction :10 :10 :10 TOTAL OBSERVER TIME 1:05+ :55+ 1:05+

Battalion FDC TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION

:35 :35 :35

Platoon/Battery FDC

Tactical Fire Direction 3:00 3:00 3:00 Initial Round Technical Fire Direction

:20 :40 :20

Each Subsequent Correction Technical Fire Direction (Note 2)

(:20) (:30)

FFE Technical Fire Direction (R1) (Note 3)

:40 1:20 :40

FDC TOTAL TIME 4:00+ 5:00+ 4:00+

Guns Each Round 105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

:30 :45 1:00

:45 1:00 1:15

:30 :45 1:00

:45 1:00 1:15

:30

:45

TOTAL GUN TIME (Note 4)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

1:15+ 1:45+ 2:15+

1:15+ 1:45+ 2:15_

1:15+

TOTAL MISSION TIME (Note 5)

105-mm 155-mm (SP) 155-mm (T)

6:55+ 7:25+ 7:55+

7:45+ 8:15+ 8:45+

6:55+

This mission denotes only the times for the first round fired. Times for subsequent volleys fired must be added to the total time (see Notes).

Note: 1. Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by the value shown and add to the total observer time = new total observer time (if evaluating observers).

2. Multiply the number of subsequent adjustments by the value shown and add to the FDC total time = new FDC total time.

3. R1 and R2 fired at appropriate intervals determined by the Munitions Expenditure Tables.

4. Multiply the number of subsequent rounds by the “each round” time shown and add to the total gun time = new total gun time.

5. Total mission time = New Platoon/Battery FDC total time + new total gun time.

D-7. FIRE MISSION ACCURACY STANDARDS There are two methods of determining if FFE achieves accuracy standards.

Appendix D

D-32 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

a. The primary method is to subjectively decide, by observing from the observer’s location, if the fires had the desired effect on the target. If so, the standard was met. If any element of the FFE (deviation, range, or HOB) was not obtained, the standard was not met.

b. Commanders are reminded that there are a myriad of variables that affect an artillery projectile’s accuracy in terms of “hitting the target.” If the commander cannot use the primary method of judging effects (visual determination) in his firing evaluation, the following graphical methods are offered. They use average firing data (the distribution of mean points of impact [MPI] around an aiming point) from a ballistics laboratory. There are two different procedures depending on whether or not the unit can meet the five elements of accurate predicted fire. (1) If the five requirements for accurate predicted fire (target location and size, firing unit location,

weapon and ammunition information, MET information [2- or 4-hour schedule], and computational procedures [see FM 6-40, Chapter 1]) can be met, and are properly applied, it is “statistically possible” to judge accuracy of the round being fired. Using a plotting board, or chart: (a) Select a radius X value from Table D-1 for the appropriate caliber weapon, charge, and angle

of fire. Center the circle (X) about the aiming point. (b) Using the corresponding radius Y value from the table, construct a circle in a manner to cover

the largest quantity of rounds. The entire circle (Y) must lie on or inside circle X (Figure D- 1).

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-33

Figure D-1. Five elements of accurate predicted fire are met

(2) If the five requirements for accurate predicted fire cannot be met, then the five steps to improved

firing data (rounds burst at a point of known location, determine did-hit and should-hit data, determine total corrections, isolate position constants [by quantifying all measurable non-standard conditions] update total corrections), or an observer-adjusted mission, should be used. To determine accuracy: (a) Construct an initial circle with a radius of 50 meters, centered around the aiming point at

which the observer calls for in fire-for-effect. (b) Next, determine the radius of circle Y from Table D-29. (Radius Y is equal to 2 probable

errors in range.) Then place the center of the Ym radius circle anywhere inside or on the circumference of the 50-meter circle. Position the circle (Y) to include the maximum number of impacting rounds (Figure D-2).

RADIUS

RA DIU

AIMING POINT

Appendix D

D-34 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Figure D-2. Accurate predicted fire requirements not met

(3) The preceding graphical methods were designed to determine the accuracy of a weapon. Trainers and evaluators must remember that most targets fired upon are area targets. Therefore, when judging effects, avoid the tendency to treat a grid coordinate sent by the observer as a point target. Consider the choice of munitions, method of attack, and acceptable dispersion of the FFE sheaf.

(4) Using a Firefinder radar, or a G/VLLD/LLDR/MELIOS, a round may be accurately plotted (within the tolerances of the system) and compared against the location of the aiming point. During the computation of special sheafs, various aiming points are selected around the target. Care must be taken during any measurement of accuracy to ensure the burst is being compared against the proper aiming point for the howitzer being fired. This should reinforce the FDO’s use of a proper sheaf in computing firing data (and resist the temptation to “close” the sheaf in an attempt to hit a “point” with an area weapon).

NOTE: If a Firefinder radar is used to observe rounds impacting, it must be used in the friendly fire mode, with an “angle T” of less than 1,000 mils. A battery or platoon should fire by piece, at 30-second intervals, or AMC (RADAR), for adequate control in spotting individual bursts.

+Radius Ym + 50 meters

Radius FFE Aiming Point

Time and Accuracy Standards

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 D-35

Table D-27. X and Y Radius Values

105 mm* ZONES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Radius X

LOW HIGH

105 110

120 125

140 150

160 180

195 225

240 N/A

Radius Y

LOW HIGH

80 80

60 60

70 70

60 60

40 40

55 55

95 N/A

*Valid for HE-M1 projectile family. 155 mm*

Propellants M3A1 M4A2 M119 M203 Zone 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 6 7 A1/A2 Radius X

LOW HIGH

105 110

120 125

135 145

155 165

140 145

145 155

160 175

185 210

220 255

280 325

345 415

Radius Y

LOW HIGH

65 65

80 80

70 75

55 60

110 115

75 80

65 70

60 70

70 75

105 115

125 145

Propellants M231 M232 M232A1 Zone 1L 2L 3H 4H 5H 3H 4H 5H Radius X

LOW HIGH

124 134

189 201

237 257

286 353

381 431

243 281

296 366

386 430

Radius Y

LOW HIGH

60 64

48 54

80 86

104 114

108 118

74 80

82 96

90 102

*Valid HE-M107 and DPICM-M483A1 projectile families.

NOTE: The above radii for X were computed by using the variances in range and deflection. The variance in range is equal to the sum of the variances due to muzzle velocity, range wind, air temperature, air density, gun location, drag, and precision. The variance for deflection is equal to the sum of the variances in gun location, crosswind, aiming, and precision. Each radius for Y is equal to 2 probable errors in range.

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-1

Appendix E

Gunner’s Qualification Test TASK: Gunner’s Qualification Badge PURPOSE: The purpose of the Gunner's Qualification Badge is to administer it to all personnel

assigned to a howitzer section, with the intent of awarding them the Gunner’s Badge. The test will include the tasks in the Gunner Test Tasks Table, and may include additional tasks.

Task Number Subject Elements

Points Per

Element Maximum

Credit 1 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Using the

Panoramic Telescope 1 4 4

2 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Without an Aiming Circle by Using the Panoramic Telescope

3 4 12

3 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire by Reciprocal Lay by Using the Panoramic Telescope

1 4 4

4 Lay and Measure a Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range Quadrant

2 4 8

5 Refer the Piece 1 4 4 6 Align Close In Aiming Points Using the M100 Series

Panoramic Telescope 2 4 8

7 Boresight the Panoramic Telescope 1 4 4 8 Verify the Boresight of the Panoramic Telescope with the

M139 or M140 Alignment Device 1 4 4

9 Boresight the Direct Fire Telescope 1 4 4 10 Process Fire Mission 5 4 20 11 Sight On a Target During Direct Fire With the Panoramic

Telescope 4 4 16

12 Perform Direct Fire Using Fire Control System 1 4 4 13 Initialize Fire Control System 1 4 4 14 Prepare the Howitzer for Firing Using the Fire Control

System 1 4 4

15 Conduct Fire Missions Using the Fire Control System 1 4 4 STANDARDS OF PRECISION: The following standards apply to all tasks evaluated. Failure to meet these standards will result in the loss of 4 points on each task.

• Settings must be exact. Bubbles in leveling vials must be centered exactly.

• The vertical crosshairs of the pantel reticle pattern must be aligned exactly on the left edge of the aiming posts, the 0 line of the collimator, or on exactly the same part of the designated aiming point each time the piece is laid.

• The last motion of elevating handwheel must be in the direction that raises cannon tube or direction of the greater resistance.

Appendix E

E-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

• The last motion of all knobs should be from lower to higher readings. For all knobs not associated with scales, the last motion should be clockwise. The last motion of the traversing handwheel should cause the howitzer or sighting device to approach aiming point from left to right. The last motion of the pitch/elevation and cross level control knobs will be in a clockwise direction.

• The appropriate deflection correction must be set on the correction counter.

• Read-backs must be accomplished while looking at and reading from the azimuth counter.

• Correct terms and hand and arm signals must be used.

PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED: • NCOIC (SSG or above) in charge of administering the test (he may also occupy a test station).

• Station evaluator, SGT or above (one per test station) with an assistant if required.

• Training area.

• Stopwatch (one per evaluator).

• Criterion-scoring checklist (one per Soldier).

• Desk and chair or clipboard (one per Soldier).

• Pencils (one per Soldier).

• TC 3-09.8 (one per station).

• An in-briefing station.

• Six howitzers in the firing position with BII.

• An aiming circle with communications.

• Two direct fire targets, 600 meters in front of the test site and 50 meters apart.

• At least one distant aiming point.

Gunner’s Name Section Unit Section Chief Date Weapon System Task Points Achieved Task 1 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Using the

Panoramic Telescope NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 2 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Without an Aiming Circle by Using the Panoramic Telescope

Task 2A Laying Using M2 Compass

NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 2B Laying Using DAP NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 2C Laying Using Back-lay NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 3 Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire by Reciprocal NO-GO = 0 Points

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-3

Lay by Using the Panoramic Telescope Time____=____Points Task 4 Lay and Measure a Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range

Quadrant

Task 4A Laying the Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range Quadrant

NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 4B Measure the Quadrant with a Range Quadrant NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 5 Refer the Piece NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 6 Align Close in Aiming Points Using the M100-Series Panoramic Telescope

Task 6A Aligning the Collimator

NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 6B Aligning the Aiming Post NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 7 Boresight the Panoramic Telescope

Task 7A Boresight Pantel with DAP

NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 7B Boresight Pantel with Testing Target NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 8 Boresight Direct Fire Telescope

Task 8A Boresight Elbow Telescope Using a DAP

NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 8B Boresight Elbow Telescope With Testing Target NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 9 Verify the Boresight of the Panoramic Telescope with the M139 or M140 Alignment Device

NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 10

Process Fire Mission

Task 10A Fire Mission NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 10B Fire Mission NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 10C Fire Mission NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 10D Fire Mission NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 10E Fire Mission NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 11

Conduct Direct Fire

Task 10A Direct Fire NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 11B Direct Fire NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 11C Direct Fire NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 11D Direct Fire NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 12 Perform Direct Fire Using the Paladin Digital Fire Control System

NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Appendix E

E-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Task 13 Initialize the Fire Control System NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 14 Prepare Howitzer for Firing Using the Fire Control System NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Task 15 Conduct Fire Missions Using the Fire Control System NO-GO = 0 Points Time____=____Points

Total Points

Recommended Grading Sheet. TEST PLANNING TIME: 4 hours Administrative time: 2 minutes/task Test time: 10 seconds – 120 seconds/task Total time (per Soldier): 68 minutes OTHER INFORMATION: Before the Soldier arrives, the evaluator will:

• Determine the exact data setting to be used throughout that particular test. The values for deflections, quadrants, and setups (i.e., within “so many” mils) presented in the gunner’s test are guides. Plus or minus 10 mils is acceptable, but must be consistent for all examinees on that test.

• Successful administration of the test is enhanced by efficient organization of the testing site. The specific approach will depend on the availability of equipment, space, and qualified personnel to administer the test. Whenever possible, it is desirable to use multiple stations in a “Round-Robin” setup. Such an approach uses equipment most efficiently, particularly in tasks requiring the aiming circle or a second weapon. Also, each Soldier is exposed to a given task on the same equipment and evaluated by the same examiner.

TASK SCORING: Scoring will be in accordance with the standards for each task. A NO-GO will be given if any of the standards of precision or the standards of a specific task are not met then 0 points will be awarded. If the soldier receives all GO ratings for the standards, the score for the task will depend on the speed of execution.

QUALIFICATION SCORES: Scores determining the qualification status of the gunner are shown in the tables below.

Weapon Classification M119A2 M777A2 M109A6

Score Expert Gunner 72-64 84-75 92-84 Gunner First Class 63-57 74-67 83-76 Gunner Second Class 56-50 66-58 75-66 Unqualified 49-0 57-0 65-0

INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CREWMAN:

• All personnel are briefed on the conduct and purpose of the training.

• The scoring system and standards of precision are explained.

• The organization of the training area and general administrative and safety procedures are explained.

• All questions pertaining to any portion of the test are explained.

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-5

TASK 1 LAY A HOWITZER FOR INITIAL DIRECTION OF FIRE USING THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

Conditions– Given a howitzer in the firing position with the cannon tube 50 mils off the azimuth of fire and at loading elevation (unit SOP). Bubbles will be level, and special corrections are 0. An assistant examiner will operate the aiming circle, which will be located 50 meters to the left front of the howitzer. Soldier positions himself as gunner and announces when ready. The assistant examiner commands NUMBER 1 ADJUST, AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT, DEFLECTION (XXXX). Time– Time will start on the last digit of deflection of the initial command. Time will stop when the assistant examiner states that number 1 is laid.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-29 0-34 0-29 4 30-34 35-39 30-34 3 35-39 40-45 35-39 2 40-50 45-50 40-50 1 51+ 51+ 51+ 0

Score Example: (M119 howitzer) If the Soldier performs Task 1 in 29.59 seconds, he scores 4 points. If the Soldier performs Task 1 in 50.59 seconds, he scores 1 point.

TASK 2 LAY A HOWITZER FOR INITIAL DIRECTION OF FIRE WITHOUT THE AN AIMING CIRCLE BY USING THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

Conditions– You will be given a howitzer with a panoramic telescope (pantel), positioned within 50 mils of the azimuth of fire, and the tube at lay elevation, a distant aiming point (DAP), an M2 compass, a gunner’s reference card, a command to lay the weapon, and an assistant. Time– Time will start on the last digit of the deflection of the initial command. Time will stop when the assistant examiner announces that number 1 is laid. TASK 2A Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Using an M2 Compass

Scoring– GO NO-GO a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable). b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task. c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6

Appendix E

E-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Time in Seconds Points 0-17 0-22 0-17 4 18-20 23-25 18-20 3 21-23 26-28 21-23 2 24-25 29-30 24-25 1 26+ 31+ 26+ 0

TASK 2B Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Using a Distant Aiming Point

Time– Time will start on the last digit of the deflection of the initial command. Time will stop when the examiner states that number 1 is laid.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-17 0-22 0-17 4 18-20 23-25 18-20 3 21-23 26-28 21-23 2 24-25 29-30 24-25 1 26+ 31+ 26+ 0

TASK 2C Lay a Howitzer for Initial Direction of Fire Using the Back-lay Method

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-17 0-22 0-17 4 18-20 23-25 18-20 3 21-23 26-28 21-23 2 24-25 29-30 24-25 1 26+ 31+ 26+ 0

TASK 3 LAY A HOWITZER FOR INITIAL DIRECTION OF FIRE BY RECIPROCAL LAY BY USING THE

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-7

PANORAMIC TELESCOPE (061-266-2002)

Conditions– Given a howitzer in the firing position and already laid for initial direction of fire. Bubbles will be level and special corrections at 0. The pantel will be 50 mils off the howitzer to be laid. An assistant examiner will act as the gunner of the howitzer to be laid. The Soldier positions himself as gunner and states when ready. The examiner will say BEGIN. Time– Time will start when the examiner says BEGIN. The time will stop when the gunner says NUMBER 2 IS LAID. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-12 0-12 0-12 4 13-15 13-15 13-15 3 16-18 16-18 16-18 2 19-20 19-20 19-20 1 21+ 21+ 21+ 0

TASK 4 LAY AND MEASURE A HOWITZER FOR QUADRANT WITH THE RANGE QUADRANT

Condition: Given a howitzer with the tube at an unknown elevation and a fire command containing elevation. TASK 4A Lay a Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range Quadrant

Time– The time will start when the examiner states Quadrant XXX and will stop when the assistant gunner/gunner states SET. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6

Appendix E

E-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Time in Seconds Points 0-9 0-9 0-8 4

10-11 10-11 9-10 3 12-13 12-13 11-12 2 14-15 14-15 13-14 1 16+ 16+ 15+ 0

TASK 4B Measure a Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range Quadrant

Time– The time will start when the examiner states Measure Quadrant and will stop when the assistant gunner/gunner states SET. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-9 0-9 0-8 4 10-11 10-11 9-10 3 12-13 12-13 11-12 2 14-15 14-15 13-14 1 16+ 16+ 15+ 0

TASK 5 REFER THE PIECE (061-266-2231)

Conditions– Given a howitzer in the firing position that has already been laid for initial direction of fire. Bubbles will be level and special corrections at 0. The pantel will be oriented on the collimator. An assistant examiner will be operating the aiming circle 50 meters to the howitzer’s left front. The Soldier positions himself as the gunner and announces when ready. The assistant examiner commands NUMBER 1 REFER, AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT. Time– Time will start on the word refer. Time will stop when the last digit of deflection is announced.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-9

Time in Seconds Points 0-12 0-12 0-12 4 13-15 13-15 13-15 3 16-18 16-18 16-18 2 19-20 19-20 19-20 1 21+ 21+ 21+ 0

TASK 6 ALIGN CLOSE IN AIMING POINT USING THE M100 SERIES PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

Conditions– Given a howitzer in a firing position, section equipment, and necessary assistants. TASK 6A Aligning the Collimator Time– Time will start when the examiner says BEGIN. Time will stop when the gunner states that the collimator is set. Scoring– GO NO-GO a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable). b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task. c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-17 0-22 0-17 4 18-20 23-25 18-20 3 21-23 26-28 21-23 2 24-25 29-30 24-25 1 26+ 31+ 26+ 0

TASK 6B Aligning the Aiming Posts

Time– The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN. The time will stop when the gunner states that the aiming posts are set.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

Appendix E

E-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

0-17 0-22 0-17 4 18-20 23-25 18-20 3 21-23 26-28 21-23 2 24-25 29-30 24-25 1 26+ 31+ 26+ 0

TASK 7 BORESIGHT THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

CONDITIONS: Given a howitzer, section equipment, test target and a distant aiming point (DAP).

TASK 7A Boresight the Panoramic Telescope by Using a Distant Aiming Point (DAP) Time– The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN, and will stop when the gunner states that the howitzer is boresighted. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-45 0-45 0-45 4 46-1:00 46-1:00 46-1:00 3

1:01-1:30 1:01-1:30 1:01-1:30 2 1:31-2:00 1:31-2:00 1:31-2:00 1

2:01+ 2:01+ 2:01+ 0

TASK 7B Boresighting the howitzer (pantel) with the test target. Time– The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN and will stop when the gunner states that the howitzer is boresighted.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-11

0-45 4 46-1:00 3

1:01-1:30 2 0-45 1

46-1:00 0

TASK 8 VERIFY THE BORESIGHT OF THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE WITH THE M139 OR M140 ALIGNMENT DEVICE

Condition: Given a howitzer in the firing position, with level bubbles and special corrections on 0. The cannon tube will be at 0 mils elevation, and the azimuth counter will be set at 1600. The Soldier will be provided with an M139/M140 alignment device. The Soldier positions himself as gunner and announces when ready.

Time– The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN, and will stop when the gunner states that boresight is either verified or not verified. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-17 0-17 0-17 4 18-20 18-20 18-20 3 21-23 21-23 21-23 2 24-25 24-25 24-25 1 26+ 26+ 26+ 0

TASK 9 BORESIGHT THE DIRECT FIRE TELESCOPE Condition: Given a howitzer in the firing position. The cannon tube will be aligned on the DAP, but the elbow telescope will not be aligned on the DAP. The Soldier will be provided with the tools needed to adjust the sight. The Soldier positions himself as assistant gunner and announces when ready.

TASK 9A Boresight the Direct Fire Telescope by Using a Distant Aiming Point (DAP)

Time– The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN, and will stop when the assistant gunner states that the howitzer is boresighted.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

Appendix E

E-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-45 0-45 4 46-1:00 46-1:00 3

1:01-1:30 1:01-1:30 2 1:31-2:00 1:31-2:00 1

2:01+ 2:01+ 0

TASK 9B Boresight the Direct Fire Telescope with the test target

Time– The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN, and will stop when the assistant gunner states that the howitzer is boresighted. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-45 0-45 4 46-1:00 46-1:00 3

1:01-1:30 1:01-1:30 2 1:31-2:00 1:31-2:00 1

2:01+ 2:01+ 0

TASK 9C Verify Boresight of the M90A2 Direct Fire Telescope by Using a Distance Aiming Point (M119)

Time– The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN, and will stop when the gunner states that boresight is either verified or not verified.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-13

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119 Time in Seconds Points

0-17 4 18-20 3 21-23 2 24-25 1 26+ 0

TASK 10 Proces Fire Missions (The missions in Task 10 are one continuous mission.)

TASK 10A Conditions– The Soldier is given a howitzer in the firing position. The howitzer is laid and both the collimator and aiming posts are emplaced. The pantel is aligned on the collimator, bubbles are level, and special corrections are at 0. The cannon tube is oriented on the primary direction of fire and elevated to 315 mils. The Soldier positions himself as gunner and announces when ready. The examiner commands FIRE MISSION, PLATOON ADJUST, NUMBER 1, 1 ROUND, SHELL HE, CHARGE (XX), FUZE QUICK, DEFLECTION 3225 (M101A1 USE DEFLECTION 2825), QUADRANT 315. Time– The time will start on the last digit of the deflection and will stop when the gunner says READY. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-10 0-10 0-8 4 11-12 11-12 9-10 3 13-14 13-14 11-12 2 15-16 15-16 13-14 1 17+ 17+ 15+ 0

TASK 10B

Conditions– Continuation from l0A. The Soldier announces when ready. The examiner commands SPECIAL CORRECTIONS, RIGHT 4, DEFLECTION 3194, QUADRANT 315. Time– The time will start on the last digit of deflection and will stop when the gunner states READY.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

Appendix E

E-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-11 0-11 0-9 4 12-13 12-13 10-11 3 14-15 14-15 12-13 2 16-17 16-17 14-15 1 18+ 18+ 16+ 0

TASK 10C

Conditions– Continuation from 10B. The Soldier announces when ready. The examiner cancels special corrections, says that the collimator has fallen down and directs the gunner to use the aiming posts. The examiner commands DEFLECTION 3180, QUADRANT 315. Time– The time will start on the last digit of deflection and will stop when the gunner states READY.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-14 0-14 0-10 4 15-16 15-16 11-12 3 17-18 17-18 13-14 2 19-20 19-20 15-16 1 21+ 21+ 17+ 0

TASK 10D

Conditions–Continuation from 10C. The Soldier announces when ready. The examiner commands DEFLECTION 3230, QUADRANT 315. Time– The time will start on the last digit of deflection and will stop when the gunner states READY.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-15

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-11 0-11 0-9 4 12-13 12-13 10-11 3 14-15 14-15 12-13 2 16-17 16-17 14-15 1 18+ 18+ 16+ 0

TASK 10E

Conditions–Continuation from 10D. The Soldier announces when ready. The examiner commands GAS (waits for the soldier to mask), DEFLECTION 3242, QUADRANT 315. Time– The time starts on the last digit of deflection and stops when the gunner states READY.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-11 0-11 0-9 4 12-13 12-13 10-11 3 14-15 14-15 12-13 2 16-17 16-17 14-15 1 18+ 18+ 16+ 0

TASK 11 SIGHT ON A TARGET DURING DIRECT FIRE WITH THE PANORAMIC TELESCOPE

The fire mission in Task 11 is one continuous mission. The central or reticle method of sighting may be used. Only the one-man/one-sight technique of direct fire will be used.

TASK 11A

Conditions– Given a howitzer with a panoramic telescope (pantel) in a field location, a target, and a fire command. Time– The time will start when the examiner states FIRE AT WILL and will stop when the gunner says FIRE.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

Appendix E

E-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-11 0-11 0-9 4 12-13 12-13 10-11 3 14-15 14-15 12-13 2 16-17 16-17 14-15 1 18+ 18+ 16+ 0

TASK 11B

Conditions– Continuation from 11A. The Soldier announces when ready. The examiner commands RIGHT 5, ADD 100. Time– The time will start when the examiner states ADD 100 and will stop when the gunner says FIRE. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (f applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-6 0-6 0-4 4 7-8 7-8 5-6 3 9-10 9-10 7-8 2 11-12 11-12 9-10 1 13+ 13+ 11+ 0

TASK 11C

Conditions–Continuation of Task llB. The Soldier announces when ready. The examiner commands LEFT 10, ADD 100. Time– The time starts when the examiner states ADD 100 and stops when the gunner states FIRE.

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-17

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-6 0-6 0-4 4 7-8 7-8 5-6 3 9-10 9-10 7-8 2 11-12 11-12 9-10 1 13+ 13+ 11+ 0

TASK 11D

Conditions–Continuation from Task 11C. The Soldier announces when ready. The examiner commands LEFT 15, DROP 100. Time– The time will start when the examiner states DROP 100 and will stop when the gunner states FIRE.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M119A2 M777A2 M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-6 0-6 0-4 4 7-8 7-8 5-6 3 9-10 9-10 7-8 2 11-12 11-12 9-10 1 13+ 13+ 11+ 0

TASK 12 PERFORM DIRECT FIRE USING PALADIN DIGITAL FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM

Conditions- Given a howitzer, aligned on the azimuth of fire, and out of travel lock. The Soldier is shown which target he is to engage and an assistant examiner will be provided to lay for deflection. The Soldier positions himself as the section chief and announces when ready.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

Appendix E

E-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M109A6 Time in Seconds Points

0-20 4 21-22 3 23-24 2 25-29 1 30+ 0

TASK 13 INITIALIZE FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM

Conditions– Given a howitzer at a survey control point (SCP) or at a firing point/area, survey data, voice communications between the howitzer and the platoon operations center (POC), and initialization information.

Time– The time starts when the examiner states BEGIN and stops when the Soldier announces INITIALIZED.

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M109A6 M777A2 Time in Minutes Points

0-7 0-8 4 8-13 9-14 3 14-15 15-16 2 16-17 17-18 1 18+ 19+ 0

TASK 14 PREPARE THE HOWITZER FOR FIRING USING THE FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM Conditions– The Soldier is given a howitzer, aligned along the azimuth of fire, and in travel lock. The “Emplace” screen is displayed on the PDFCS/DFCS. The Soldier positions himself as the section chief and announces when ready. The examiner will state BEGIN. Time– The time will start when the examiner states BEGIN and will stop when the Soldier sends the updated piece status.

Gunner’s Qualification Test

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 E-19

Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M109A6 M777A2 Time in Seconds Points

0-1:30 0-1:30 4 1:31-1:45 1:31-1:45 3 1:46-1:55 1:46-1:55 2 1:56-2:10 1:56-2:10 1

2:11+ 2:11+ 0

TASK 15 CONDUCT A FIRE MISSION USING THE FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM. Conditions– The Soldier is given a howitzer at loading elevation. The Soldier positions himself as the section chief and announces when ready. The examiner has a digital call-for-fire transmitted to the PDFCS/DFCS. Time– The time starts when the fire mission is received at the PDFCS/DFCS and stops when the howitzer is laid on the target. Scoring– GO NO-GO

a. Standards of precision were met (if applicable).

b. Correct steps were followed to complete the task.

c. If steps a and b were not followed, Soldier receives a NO-GO and 0 points. If Soldier received a GO on steps a and b, use the table below to determine score.

M109A6 M777A2 Time in Seconds Points

0-15.0 0-15.0 4 15.1-16.0 15.1-16.0 3 16.1-20.0 16.1-20.0 2 20.1-22.0 20.1-22.0 1

22.1+ 22.1+ 0

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-1

Appendix F

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables These tables provide leaders with a planning tool to assess the impact of intervening crests on rocket trajectories. The MLRS project office of U.S. Army Missile Command (MICOM) developed them for the U.S. Army Field Artillery School.

ASSUMPTIONS F-1. These tables establish minimum planning ranges for launchers in specific firing areas to ensure that rockets will not only clear a crest, but that a warhead event will not occur until the crest is cleared. The tables use 5 launch altitudes: sea level, +400 meters, +800 meters, +1,200 meters, and +3,048 meters. They do not represent an absolute launcher ballistic algorithm and should not be used as a firing solution safety check. The tables are based on several assumptions and conditions:

• European rockets or those with lot number VGT072 or higher were used. These lots have more aerodynamic fins and therefore produce longer ranges with lower trajectories.

• A warhead event will not occur until the crest is cleared. • Standard atmospheric conditions with 99 percent global wind conditions (head and tail) were applied

to account for low-level winds. Rockets were conditioned both cold and hot to account for temperature extremes.

• 3.3 sigma range and height dispersion errors were used to account for occasion-to-occasion (bias) and round-to-round (precision) errors.

• 100-meter altitude subtracted to account for vegetation and terrain effects. • Ballistic algorithm version 6.09 with no high QE mode.

PROCEDURES F-2. There are 2 entry arguments for the tables: range (to crest) and angle of site (to crest). If the angle of site cannot be directly measured, then leaders can calculate it by using the mil relation formula. See figure F-1, figure F-2, and figure F-3.

ANGLE OF SITE =

d ALT (m)

RANGE (km)

Where: d ALT = Difference in altitude between launcher and crest (meters). RANGE = Range to crest to the nearest 100 m expressed in kilometers.

Figure F-1. Mil Relation Formula

Appendix F

F-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

F-3. If the actual target location and altitude are known, the angle of site can be modified to account for the differences in launch and target altitude using the following formula.

Angle of Siteeff = Angle of Site to Crest – Angle of Site to Target

Where:

Angle of Site to Target = ALTTGT(m) – ALTLCHR (m)

RANGE TO TARGET

and: ALTTGT = Altitude of Target

ALTLCHR = Altitude of Launcher

Figure F-2. Effective Angle of Site

Figure F-3. Crest Clearance

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-3

Table F-1. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: Sea Level

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

1,000 9,300 9,500 9,700 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,800 11,100

1,250 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,800 10,000 10,400 10,800

1,500 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,700 10,200 10,600

1,750 8,200 8,500 8,800 9,100 9,300 9,600 10,000 10,400

2,000 8,000 8,400 8,700 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,900 10,300

2,250 7,900 8,200 8,500 8,800 9,100 9,400 9,800 10,300

2,500 7,800 8,200 8,500 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,800 10,200

2,750 0 8,100 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,700 10,200

3,000 0 8,100 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,200 9,700 10,200

3,250 0 8,100 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,200 9,700 10,200

3,500 0 8,100 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,700 10,200

3,750 0 8,100 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,800 10,200

4,000 8,000 8,200 8,500 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,800 10,200

4,250 8,100 8,300 8,600 8,800 9,100 9,300 9,800 10,300

4,500 8,200 8,400 8,700 8,900 9,100 9,400 9,900 10,300

4,750 8,300 8,500 8,800 9,000 9,200 9,400 9,900 10,400

5,000 8,400 8,700 8,900 9,100 9,300 9,500 10,000 10,400

5,250 8,600 8,800 9,000 9,200 9,500 9,700 10,100 10,500

5,500 8,700 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,600 9,800 10,200 10,600

5,750 8,800 9,100 9,300 9,500 9,700 9,900 10,300 10,600

6,000 9,000 9,200 9,400 9,600 9,800 10,000 10,400 10,800

6,250 9,200 9,400 9,600 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,500 10,900

6,500 9,300 9,500 9,700 9,900 10,100 10,300 10,700 11,000

6,750 9,500 9,700 9,900 10,100 10,300 10,400 10,800 11,100

7,000 9,700 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,600 10,900 11,300

7,250 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,600 10,700 11,100 11,400

7,500 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,200 11,500

7,750 10,200 10,400 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,000 11,400 11,700

8,000 10,400 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,000 11,200 11,500 11,800

8,250 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,000 11,200 11,400 11,700 12,000

8,500 10,700 10,900 11,100 11,200 11,400 11,500 11,800 12,100

8,750 10,900 11,100 11,200 11,400 11,500 11,700 12,000 12,300

Appendix F

F-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-1. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: Sea Level

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

9,000 11,100 11,300 11,400 11,600 11,700 11,900 12,200 12,500

9,250 11,300 11,400 11,600 11,700 11,900 12,000 12,300 12,600

9,500 11,500 11,600 11,800 11,900 12,100 12,200 12,500 12,800

9,750 11,700 11,800 12,000 12,100 12,300 12,400 12,700 13,000

10,000 11,900 12,000 12,100 12,300 12,400 12,600 12,900 13,100

10,250 12,100 12,200 12,400 12,500 12,600 12,800 13,000 13,300

10,500 12,300 12,400 12,600 12,700 12,800 13,000 13,200 13,500

10,750 12,500 12,600 12,800 12,900 13,000 13,200 13,400 13,700

11,000 12,700 12,800 13,000 13,100 13,200 13,400 13,600 13,800

11,250 12,900 13,000 13,200 13,300 13,400 13,600 13,800 14,000

11,500 13,100 13,300 13,400 13,500 13,600 13,800 14,000 14,200

11,750 13,300 13,500 13,600 13,700 13,800 14,000 14,200 14,400

12,000 13,600 13,700 13,800 13,900 14,000 14,200 14,400 14,600

12,250 13,800 13,900 14,000 14,100 14,300 14,400 14,600 14,800

12,500 14,000 14,100 14,200 14,400 14,500 14,600 14,800

12,750 14,200 14,300 14,500 14,600 14,700 14,800

13,000 14,500 14,600 14,700 14,800 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-5

Table F-1. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: Sea Level

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260

1,000 11,500 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 12,900 13,200 13,400

1,250 11,200 11,500 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,200

1,500 11,000 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,800 13,100

1,750 10,800 11,200 11,500 11,900 12,200 12,500 12,700 13,000

2,000 10,700 11,100 11,500 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000

2,250 10,700 11,000 11,400 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900

2,500 10,600 11,000 11,400 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900

2,750 10,600 11,000 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900

3,000 10,600 11,000 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900

3,250 10,600 11,000 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900

3,500 10,600 11,000 11,400 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900

3,750 10,600 11,000 11,400 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900

4,000 10,700 11,000 11,400 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000

4,250 10,700 11,100 11,400 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000

4,500 10,700 11,100 11,500 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000

4,750 10,800 11,200 11,500 11,900 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100

5,000 10,800 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100

5,250 10,900 11,300 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

5,500 11,000 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

5,750 11,000 11,400 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300

6,000 11,100 11,500 11,800 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,300

6,250 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,400

6,500 11,300 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500

6,750 11,500 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,500

7,000 11,600 11,900 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,300 13,600

7,250 11,700 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,100 13,400 13,700

7,500 11,900 12,200 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,200 13,500 13,800

7,750 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,100 13,400 13,600 13,800

8,000 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,200 13,500 13,700 13,900

8,250 12,300 12,600 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,600 13,800 14,100

8,500 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,200 13,500 13,700 14,000 14,200

Appendix F

F-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-1. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: Sea Level)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: Sea Level

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260

8,750 12,600 12,900 13,100 13,400 13,600 13,900 14,100 14,300

9,000 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,500 13,800 14,000 14,200 14,400

9,250 12,900 13,200 13,400 13,700 13,900 14,100 14,300 14,600

9,500 13,100 13,300 13,600 13,800 14,000 14,300 14,500 14,700

9,750 13,200 13,500 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,400 14,600 14,800

10,000 13,400 13,600 13,900 14,100 14,300 14,500 14,700

10,250 13,600 13,800 14,000 14,300 14,500 14,700

10,500 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,400 14,600 14,800

10,750 13,900 14,100 14,400 14,600 14,800

11,000 14,100 14,300 14,500 14,700

11,250 14,300 14,500 14,700

11,500 14,400 14,700 14,800

11,750 14,600 14,800

12,000 14,800

12,250

12,500

12,750

13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-7

Table F-2. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 400 m ASL

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

1,000 9,400 9,700 9,900 10,200 10,400 10,600 11,000 11,400

1,250 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,700 10,000 10,200 10,600 11,000

1,500 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,700 9,900 10,400 10,800

1,750 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,200 9,500 9,700 10,200 10,600

2,000 8,200 8,500 8,800 9,100 9,400 9,600 10,100 10,500

2,250 8,100 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,500 10,000 10,500

2,500 8,000 8,300 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,500 10,000 10,400

2,750 7,900 8,300 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,900 10,400

3,000 7,900 8,200 8,600 8,900 9,100 9,400 9,900 10,400

3,250 7,900 8,200 8,600 8,900 9,100 9,400 9,900 10,400

3,500 7,900 8,200 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,900 10,400

3,750 8,000 8,300 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,900 10,400

4,000 8,100 8,300 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,500 10,000 10,400

4,250 8,200 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,200 9,500 10,000 10,500

4,500 8,300 8,600 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,600 10,100 10,500

4,750 8,400 8,700 8,900 9,100 9,400 9,600 10,100 10,600

5,000 8,500 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,700 10,200 10,600

5,250 8,700 8,900 9,100 9,400 9,600 9,800 10,200 10,700

5,500 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,700 9,900 10,300 10,700

5,750 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,600 9,800 10,000 10,400 10,800

6,000 9,100 9,300 9,500 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,600 10,900

6,250 9,200 9,500 9,700 9,900 10,100 10,300 10,700 11,100

6,500 9,400 9,600 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,800 11,200

6,750 9,600 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,600 10,900 11,300

7,000 9,700 9,900 10,100 10,300 10,500 10,700 11,100 11,400

7,250 9,900 10,100 10,300 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,200 11,600

7,500 10,100 10,300 10,500 10,700 10,800 11,000 11,400 11,700

7,750 10,300 10,400 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,200 11,500 11,800

8,000 10,400 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,200 11,300 11,700 12,000

8,250 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,100 11,300 11,500 11,800 12,100

8,500 10,800 11,000 11,100 11,300 11,500 11,600 12,000 12,300

8,750 11,000 11,200 11,300 11,500 11,600 11,800 12,100 12,400

Appendix F

F-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-2. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 400 m ASL

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

9,000 11,200 11,300 11,500 11,700 11,800 12,000 12,300 12,600

9,250 11,400 11,500 11,700 11,800 12,000 12,100 12,500 12,800

9,500 11,500 11,700 11,900 12,000 12,200 12,300 12,600 12,900

9,750 11,700 11,900 12,000 12,200 12,400 12,500 12,800 13,100

10,000 11,900 12,100 12,200 12,400 12,600 12,700 13,000 13,300

10,250 12,100 12,300 12,400 12,600 12,700 12,900 13,200 13,500

10,500 12,300 12,500 12,600 12,800 12,900 13,100 13,400 13,600

10,750 12,500 12,700 12,800 13,000 13,100 13,300 13,500 13,800

11,000 12,800 12,900 13,100 13,200 13,300 13,500 13,700 14,000

11,250 13,000 13,100 13,300 13,400 13,500 13,700 13,900 14,200

11,500 13,200 13,300 13,500 13,600 13,700 13,900 14,100 14,400

11,750 13,400 13,500 13,700 13,800 13,900 14,100 14,300 14,500

12,000 13,600 13,800 13,900 14,000 14,100 14,300 14,500 14,700

12,250 13,900 14,000 14,100 14,200 14,300 14,500 14,700

12,500 14,100 14,200 14,300 14,400 14,600 14,700

12,750 14,300 14,400 14,500 14,600 14,800

13,000 14,500 14,600 14,700 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-9

Table F-2. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 400 ASL

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260

1,000 11,700 12,000 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,200 13,500 13,800

1,250 11,400 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,500

1,500 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,400

1,750 11,100 11,400 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300

2,000 11,000 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300

2,250 10,900 11,300 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

2,500 10,800 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

2,750 10,800 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

3,000 10,800 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

3,250 10,800 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

3,500 10,800 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

3,750 10,800 11,200 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

4,000 10,900 11,300 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200

4,250 10,900 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300

4,500 10,900 11,300 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300

4,750 11,000 11,400 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,300

5,000 11,000 11,400 11,800 12,100 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,400

5,250 11,100 11,500 11,900 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,400

5,500 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500

5,750 11,200 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,500

6,000 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600

6,250 11,400 11,800 12,100 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,700

6,500 11,500 11,800 12,200 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,700

6,750 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800

7,000 11,800 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,900

7,250 11,900 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,700 14,000

7,500 12,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,000

7,750 12,200 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,300 13,600 13,900 14,100

8,000 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,700 14,000 14,200

8,250 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,800 14,100 14,300

8,500 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,400 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,500

8,750 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,800 14,100 14,300 14,600

Appendix F

F-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-2. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 400 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 400 ASL

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260

9,000 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,500 14,700

9,250 13,100 13,300 13,600 13,900 14,100 14,400 14,600 14,800

9,500 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,000 14,300 14,500 14,700

9,750 13,400 13,600 13,900 14,200 14,400 14,600

10,000 13,500 13,800 14,100 14,300 14,500 14,800

10,250 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,500 14,700

10,500 13,900 14,100 14,400 14,600 14,800

10,750 14,100 14,300 14,500 14,800

11,000 14,200 14,500 14,700

11,250 14,400 14,600

11,500 14,600 14,800

11,750 14,800

12,000

12,250

12,500

12,750

13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-11

Table F-3. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 800 m ASL

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

1,000 9,600 9,900 10,100 10,400 10,600 10,800 11,200 11,600

1,250 9,100 9,400 9,700 9,900 10,200 10,400 10,800 11,300

1,500 8,800 9,100 9,400 9,600 9,900 10,100 10,600 11,000

1,750 8,500 8,800 9,100 9,400 9,700 9,900 10,400 10,900

2,000 8,300 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,800 10,300 10,800

2,250 8,200 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,700 10,200 10,700

2,500 8,100 8,500 8,800 9,100 9,400 9,700 10,200 10,600

2,750 8,100 8,400 8,700 9,100 9,300 9,600 10,100 10,600

3,000 0 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,600 10,100 10,600

3,250 0 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,600 10,100 10,600

3,500 0 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,600 10,100 10,600

3,750 8,100 8,400 8,700 9,100 9,300 9,600 10,100 10,600

4,000 8,200 8,400 8,800 9,100 9,400 9,600 10,200 10,600

4,250 8,300 8,500 8,800 9,100 9,400 9,700 10,200 10,700

4,500 8,400 8,700 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,700 10,200 10,700

4,750 8,500 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,800 10,300 10,800

5,000 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,600 9,800 10,300 10,800

5,250 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,700 9,900 10,400 10,900

5,500 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,600 9,900 10,100 10,500 10,900

5,750 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,600 11,000

6,000 9,200 9,400 9,700 9,900 10,100 10,300 10,700 11,100

6,250 9,300 9,600 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,800 11,200

6,500 9,500 9,700 9,900 10,200 10,400 10,600 11,000 11,300

6,750 9,700 9,900 10,100 10,300 10,500 10,700 11,100 11,500

7,000 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,200 11,600

7,250 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,400 11,700

7,500 10,200 10,400 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,100 11,500 11,900

7,750 10,300 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,100 11,300 11,700 12,000

8,000 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,100 11,300 11,400 11,800 12,100

8,250 10,700 10,900 11,100 11,300 11,400 11,600 11,900 12,300

8,500 10,900 11,100 11,200 11,400 11,600 11,800 12,100 12,400

8,750 11,100 11,200 11,400 11,600 11,800 11,900 12,300 12,600

Appendix F

F-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-3. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 800 m ASL

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

9,000 11,200 11,400 11,600 11,800 11,900 12,100 12,400 12,800

9,250 11,400 11,600 11,800 11,900 12,100 12,300 12,600 12,900

9,500 11,600 11,800 11,900 12,100 12,300 12,500 12,800 13,100

9,750 11,800 12,000 12,100 12,300 12,500 12,600 13,000 13,300

10,000 12,000 12,200 12,300 12,500 12,700 12,800 13,100 13,400

10,250 12,200 12,400 12,500 12,700 12,900 13,000 13,300 13,600

10,500 12,400 12,600 12,700 12,900 13,000 13,200 13,500 13,800

10,750 12,600 12,800 12,900 13,100 13,200 13,400 13,700 14,000

11,000 12,800 13,000 13,100 13,300 13,400 13,600 13,900 14,100

11,250 13,000 13,200 13,300 13,500 13,600 13,800 14,100 14,300

11,500 13,300 13,400 13,600 13,700 13,800 14,000 14,200 14,500

11,750 13,500 13,600 13,800 13,900 14,000 14,200 14,400 14,700

12,000 13,700 13,800 14,000 14,100 14,200 14,400 14,600

12,250 13,900 14,100 14,200 14,300 14,500 14,600 14,800

12,500 14,100 14,300 14,400 14,500 14,700 14,800

12,750 14,400 14,500 14,600 14,700

13,000 14,600 14,700 14,800 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-13

Table F-3. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 800 ASL

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260

1,000 12,000 12,300 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,500 13800 14,100

1,250 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,900

1,500 11,400 11,800 12,100 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,700

1,750 11,300 11,700 12,000 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600

2,000 11,200 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,600

2,250 11,100 11,500 11,900 12,200 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500

2,500 11,100 11,500 11,800 12,200 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500

2,750 11,000 11,400 11,800 12,200 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500

3,000 11,000 11,400 11,800 12,200 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500

3,250 11,000 11,400 11,800 12,200 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500

3,500 11,000 11,400 11,800 12,200 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500

3,750 11,000 11,500 11,800 12,200 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500

4,000 11,100 11,500 11,900 12,200 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500

4,250 11,100 11,500 11,900 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,300 13,600

4,500 11,100 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,600

4,750 11,200 11,600 12,000 12,300 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600

5,000 11,200 11,700 12,000 12,400 12,700 13,100 13,400 13,700

5,250 11,300 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,700

5,500 11,400 11,800 12,100 12,500 12,800 13,200 13,500 13,800

5,750 11,400 11,800 12,200 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800

6,000 11,500 11,900 12,300 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,900

6,250 11,600 12,000 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,400 13,700 14,000

6,500 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,700 14,000

6,750 11,800 12,200 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,100

7,000 11,900 12,300 12,600 12900 13,300 13,600 13,900 14,200

7,250 12,100 12,400 12,700 13,000 13,400 13,700 14,000 14,200

7,500 12,200 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,000 14,300

7,750 12,300 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,800 14,100 14,400

8,000 12,500 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,500

8,250 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,100 14,400 14,600

8,500 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,700 13,900 14,200 14,500 14,700

8,750 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,100 14,300 14,600 14,800

Appendix F

F-14 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-3. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 800 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 800 ASL

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260

9,000 13,100 13,400 13,700 13,900 14,200 14,500 14,700

9,250 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,100 14,300 14,600 14,800

9,500 13,400 13,700 14,000 14,200 14,500 14,700

9,750 13,500 13,800 14,100 14,400 14,600

10,000 13,700 14,000 14,300 14,500 14,800

10,250 13,900 14,200 14,400 14,700

10,500 14,100 14,300 14,600 14,800

10,750 14,200 14,500 14,700

11,000 14,400 14,700

11,250 14,600 14,800

11,500 14,800

11,750

12,000

12,250

12,500

12,750

13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-15

Table F-4. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 1,200 m ASL

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

1,000 9,800 10,100 10,300 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,400 11,800

1,250 9,300 9,600 9,900 10,100 10,400 10,600 11,100 11,500

1,500 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,800 10,100 10,300 10,800 11,200

1,750 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,600 9,900 10,100 10,600 11,100

2,000 8,500 8,800 9,200 9,500 9,700 10,000 10,500 11,000

2,250 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,600 9,900 10,400 10,900

2,500 8,300 8,600 9,000 9,300 9,600 9,800 10,400 10,800

2,750 0 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,800 10,300 10,800

3,000 0 8,500 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,800 10,300 10,800

3,250 0 8,500 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,800 10,300 10,800

3,500 0 8,500 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,800 10,300 10,800

3,750 0 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,800 10,300 10,800

4,000 8,300 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,500 9,800 10,400 10,800

4,250 8,400 8,700 9,000 9,300 9,600 9,900 10,400 10,900

4,500 8,500 8,800 9,100 9,300 9,600 9,900 10,400 10,900

4,750 8,600 8,900 9,200 9,400 9,700 10,000 10,500 11,000

5,000 8,800 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,800 10,000 10,500 11,000

5,250 8,900 9,100 9,400 9,700 9,900 10,100 10,600 11,100

5,500 9,000 9,300 9,500 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,700 11,100

5,750 9,200 9,400 9,600 9,900 10,100 10,300 10,800 11,200

6,000 9,300 9,500 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,500 10,900 11,300

6,250 9,400 9,700 9,900 10,100 10,400 10,600 11,000 11,400

6,500 9,600 9,800 10,100 10,300 10,500 10,700 11,100 11,500

6,750 9,800 10,000 10,200 10,400 10,600 10,900 11,300 11,600

7,000 9,900 10,100 10,400 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,400 11,800

7,250 10,100 10,300 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,100 11,500 11,900

7,500 10,300 10,500 10,700 10,900 11,100 11,300 11,700 12,000

7,750 10,400 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,200 11,400 11,800 12,200

8,000 10,600 10,800 11,000 11,200 11,400 11,600 11,900 12,300

8,250 10,800 11,000 11,200 11,400 11,500 11,700 12,100 12,500

8,500 11,000 11,200 11,300 11,500 11,700 11,900 12,300 12,600

8,750 11,100 11,300 11,500 11,700 11,900 12,100 12,400 12,800

Appendix F

F-16 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-4. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 1,200 m ASL

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

9,000 11,300 11,500 11,700 11,900 12,000 12,200 12,600 12,900

9,250 11,500 11,700 11,900 12,000 12,200 12,400 12,700 13,100

9,500 11,700 11,900 12,000 12,200 12,400 12,600 12,900 13,200

9,750 11,900 12,100 12,200 12,400 12,600 12,800 13,100 13,400

10,000 12,100 12,300 12,400 12,600 12,800 12,900 13,300 13,600

10,250 12,300 12,500 12,600 12,800 13,000 13,100 13,400 13,800

10,500 12,500 12,700 12,800 13,000 13,200 13,300 13,600 13,900

10,750 12,700 12,900 13,000 13,200 13,400 13,500 13,800 14,100

11,000 12,900 13,100 13,200 13,400 13,500 13,700 14,000 14,300

11,250 13,100 13,300 13,400 13,600 13,700 13,900 14,200 14,500

11,500 13,300 13,500 13,600 13,800 13,900 14,100 14,400 14,700

11,750 13,600 13,700 13,900 14,000 14,100 14,300 14,600 14,800

12,000 13,800 13,900 14,100 14,200 14,300 14,500 14,800

12,250 14,000 14,100 14,300 14,400 14,600 14,700

12,500 14,200 14,300 14,500 14,600 14,800

12,750 14,400 14,600 14,700 14,800

13,000 14,700 14,800 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-17

Table F-4. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 1,200 ASL

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260

1,000 12,200 12,600 12,900 13,300 13,600 13,900 14,200 14,400

1,250 11,900 12,300 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,900 14,200

1,500 11,700 12,000 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,400 13,700 14,000

1,750 11,500 11,900 12,300 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,900

2,000 11,400 11,800 12,200 12,600 12,900 13,200 13,600 13,900

2,250 11,300 11,700 12,100 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800

2,500 11,300 11,700 12,100 12,500 12,800 13,200 13,500 13,800

2,750 11,300 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,500 13,800

3,000 11,200 11,700 12,000 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,500 13,800

3,250 11,200 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,500 13,800

3,500 11,200 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,800 13,200 13,500 13,800

3,750 11,300 11,700 12,100 12,500 12,800 13,200 13,500 13,800

4,000 11,300 11,700 12,100 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800

4,250 11,300 11,700 12,100 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,600 13,900

4,500 11,400 11,800 12,200 12,600 12,900 13,300 13,600 13,900

4,750 11,400 11,800 12,200 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,900

5,000 11,500 11,900 12,300 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,700 14,000

5,250 11,500 11,900 12,300 12,700 13,100 13,400 13,700 14,000

5,500 11,600 12,000 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,500 13,800 14,100

5,750 11,700 12,100 12,400 12,800 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,100

6,000 11,700 12,100 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,600 13,900 14,200

6,250 11,800 12,200 12,600 13,000 13,300 13,600 14,000 14,300

6,500 11,900 12,300 12,700 13,000 13,400 13,700 14,000 14,300

6,750 12,000 12,400 12,800 13,100 13,500 13,800 14,100 14,400

7,000 12,100 12,500 12,800 13,200 13,500 13,900 14,200 14,500

7,250 12,300 12,600 12,900 13,300 13,600 13,900 14,300 14,500

7,500 12,400 12,700 13,100 13,400 13,700 14,000 14,300 14,600

7,750 12,500 12,900 13,200 13,500 13,800 14,100 14,400 14,700

8,000 12,700 13,000 13,300 13,600 13,900 14,200 14,500 14,800

8,250 12,800 13,100 13,500 13,800 14,100 14,300 14,600

8,500 12,900 13,300 13,600 13,900 14,200 14,500 14,700

8,750 13,100 13,400 13,700 14,000 14,300 14,600

Appendix F

F-18 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-4. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 1,200 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 1,200 ASL

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260

9,000 13,200 13,600 13,900 14,200 14,400 14,700

9,250 13,400 13,700 14,000 14,300 14,600

9,500 13,600 13,900 14,200 14,400 14,700

9,750 13,700 14,000 14,300 14,600

10,000 13,900 14,200 14,500 14,700

10,250 14,100 14,300 14,600

10,500 14,200 14,500 14,800

10,750 14,400 14,700

11,000 14,600 14,800

11,250 14,700

11,500

11,750

12,000

12,250

12,500

12,750

13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-19

Table F-5. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 3,048 m ASL

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

1,000 10,800 11,100 11,400 11,700 11,900 12,200 12,700 13,100

1,250 10,200 10,600 10,900 11,200 11,400 11,700 12,200 12,700

1,500 9,800 10,200 10,500 10,800 11,100 11,400 11,900 12,400

1,750 9,500 9,900 10,200 10,600 10,900 11,200 11,700 12,200

2,000 9,300 9,700 10,100 10,400 10,700 11,000 11,600 12,100

2,250 9,200 9,500 9,900 10,300 10,600 10,900 11,500 12,000

2,500 9,100 9,500 9,800 10,200 10,500 10,800 11,400 11,900

2,750 0 9,400 9,800 10,100 10,400 10,800 11,300 11,900

3,000 0 9,300 9,700 10,100 10,400 10,700 11,300 11,900

3,250 0 9,300 9,700 10,100 10,400 10,700 11,300 11,900

3,500 0 9,300 9,700 10,100 10,400 10,700 11,300 11,900

3,750 0 9,300 9,700 10,100 10,400 10,700 11,300 11,900

4,000 0 9,300 9,700 10,100 10,400 10,700 11,300 11,900

4,250 9,100 9,400 9,800 10,100 10,500 10,800 11,400 11,900

4,500 9,200 9,500 9,800 10,200 10,500 10,800 11,400 12,000

4,750 9,300 9,600 9,900 10,200 10,500 10,900 11,500 12,000

5,000 9,400 9,700 10,000 10,300 10,600 10,900 11,500 12,100

5,250 9,500 9,800 10,100 10,400 10,700 11,000 11,600 12,100

5,500 9,600 9,900 10,200 10,500 10,800 11,000 11,600 12,200

5,750 9,700 10,000 10,300 10,600 10,900 11,100 11,700 12,200

6,000 9,900 10,200 10,400 10,700 11,000 11,300 11,800 12,300

6,250 10,000 10,300 10,600 10,800 11,100 11,400 11,900 12,400

6,500 10,100 10,400 10,700 11,000 11,200 11,500 12,000 12,500

6,750 10,300 10,600 10,800 11,100 11,400 11,600 12,100 12,600

7,000 10,400 10,700 11,000 11,200 11,500 11,700 12,200 12,700

7,250 10,600 10,900 11,100 11,400 11,600 11,900 12,300 12,800

7,500 10,700 11,000 11,300 11,500 11,800 12,000 12,500 12,900

7,750 10,900 11,200 11,400 11,700 11,900 12,100 12,600 13,100

8,000 11,100 11,300 11,600 11,800 12,000 12,300 12,700 13,200

8,250 11,200 11,500 11,700 12,000 12,200 12,400 12,900 13,300

8,500 11,400 11,600 11,900 12,100 12,400 12,600 13,000 13,500

8,750 11,600 11,800 12,000 12,300 12,500 12,700 13,200 13,600

Appendix F

F-20 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-5. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3,048 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 3,048 m ASL

10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

9,000 11,700 12,000 12,200 12,400 12,700 12,900 13,300 13,800

9,250 11,900 12,100 12,400 12,600 12,800 13,100 13,500 13,900

9,500 12,100 12,300 12,600 12,800 13,000 13,200 13,700 14,100

9,750 12,300 12,500 12,700 13,000 13,200 13,400 13,800 14,200

10,000 12,500 12,700 12,900 13,200 13,400 13,600 14,000 14,400

10,250 12,700 12,900 13,100 13,300 13,500 13,800 14,200 14,500

10,500 12,900 13,100 13,300 13,500 13,700 13,900 14,300 14,700

10,750 13,100 13,300 13,500 13,700 13,900 14,100 14,500

11,000 13,300 13,500 13,700 13,900 14,100 14,300 14,700

11,250 13,500 13,700 13,900 14,100 14,300 14,500

11,500 13,700 13,900 14,100 14,300 14,500 14,700

11,750 13,900 14,100 14,300 14,500 14,700

12,000 14,100 14,300 14,500 14,700

12,250 14,300 14,500 14,700

12,500 14,600 14,700

12,750 14,800

13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-21

Table F-5. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3048 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 3048 ASL

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 1,000 13,600 14,000 14,400 14,800

1,250 13,200 13,600 14,000 14,400 14,800

1,500 12,900 13,400 13,800 14,200 14,600

1,750 12,700 13,200 13,600 14,100 14,500 14,800

2,000 12,600 13,100 13,500 13,900 14,400 14,700

2,250 12,500 13,000 13,400 13,900 14,300 14,700

2,500 12,400 12,900 13,400 13,800 14,200 14,600

2,750 12,400 12,900 13,400 13,800 14,200 14,600

3,000 12,400 12,900 13,300 13,800 14,200 14,600

3,250 12,400 12,900 13,300 13,800 14,200 14,600

3,500 12,400 12,900 13,300 13,800 14,200 14,600

3,750 12,400 12,900 13,300 13,800 14,200 14,600

4,000 12,400 12,900 13,400 13,800 14,200 14,600

4,250 12,400 12,900 13,400 13,800 14,300 14,700

4,500 12,500 13,000 13,400 13,900 14,300 14,700

4,750 12,500 13,000 13,500 13,900 14,300 14,700

5,000 12,600 13,100 13,500 14,000 14,400 14,800

5,250 12,600 13,100 13,600 14,000 14,400 14,800

5,500 12,700 13,200 13,600 14,100 14,500

5,750 12,700 13,200 13,700 14,100 14,500

6,000 12,800 13,300 13,700 14,200 14,600

6,250 12,900 13,400 13,800 14,200 14,700

6,500 13,000 13,400 13,900 14,300 14,700

6,750 13,000 13,500 14,000 14,400 14,800

7,000 13,100 13,600 14,000 14,500

7,250 13,200 13,700 14,100 14,500

7,500 13,400 13,800 14,200 14,600

7,750 13,500 13,900 14,300 14,700

8,000 13,600 14,000 14,400 14,800

8,250 13,700 14,200 14,500

8,500 13,900 14,300 14,700

8,750 14,000 14,400 14,800

Appendix F

F-22 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-5. M28A1/A2 Minimum Planning Range to Clear a Crest (ALT: 3048 m ASL)

Range to Crest (m) Angle of Site to Crest (mil) ALT: 3048 ASL

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 9,000 14,200 14,600

9,250 14,300 14,700

9,500 14,500 14,800

9,750 14,600

10,000 14,800

10,250

10,500

10,750

11,000

11,250

11,500

11,750

12,000

12,250

12,500

12,750

13,000 Note: Blank fields indicate that maximum range fails to clear crest.

Table F-6. M28A1/A2 Rocket (Reduced Range, Practice) Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Apogee

Range to Target (m) QE (mil)

Time to Impact (sec) Time (sec) Altitude (m) Range (m)

7,500 150 16.8 8.14 319 4,411

7,600 153 17.1 8.14 334 4,410

7,700 157 17.5 8.64 349 4,628

7,800 160 17.8 8.64 364 4,627

7,900 163 18.2 8.64 380 4,626

8,000 167 18.5 9.14 396 4,836

8,100 171 18.9 9.14 414 4,835

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-23

Table F-6. M28A1/A2 Rocket (Reduced Range, Practice) Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Apogee

Range to Target (m) QE (mil)

Time to Impact (sec) Time (sec) Altitude (m) Range (m)

8,200 174 19.3 9.14 431 4,834

8,300 178 19.6 9.64 449 5,038

8,400 182 20.0 9.66 468 5,042

8,500 186 20.4 9.66 487 5,040

8,600 190 20.8 9.66 507 5,039

8,700 194 21.1 10.14 528 5,230

8,800 198 21.5 10.14 549 5,228

8,900 202 21.9 10.64 571 5,419

9,000 206 22.3 10.64 593 5,417

9,100 210 22.7 10.64 617 5,415

9,200 215 23.1 11.14 640 5,601

9,300 219 23.5 11.14 665 5,598

9,400 224 23.9 11.14 690 5,595

9,500 228 24.3 11.66 716 5,783

9,600 233 24.8 11.64 743 5,773

9,700 238 25.2 11.64 770 5,770

9,800 243 25.6 12.14 799 5,947

9,900 247 26.1 12.16 828 5,948

10,000 252 26.5 12.16 858 5,944

10,100 258 26.9 12.66 889 6,116

10,200 263 27.4 12.64 920 6,106

10,300 268 27.9 13.14 953 6,273

10,400 273 28.3 13.16 987 6,274

10,500 279 28.8 13.16 1,021 6,269

10,600 284 29.2 13.66 1,056 6,432

10,700 290 29.7 13.66 1,093 6,426

10,800 296 30.2 13.66 1,130 6,420

10,900 302 30.7 14.16 1,169 6,579

11,000 308 31.2 14.16 1,209 6,572

11,100 314 31.7 14.66 1,249 6,727

Appendix F

F-24 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

Table F-6. M28A1/A2 Rocket (Reduced Range, Practice) Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Apogee

Range to Target (m) QE (mil)

Time to Impact (sec) Time (sec) Altitude (m) Range (m)

11,200 320 32.2 14.66 1,291 6,719

11,300 326 32.7 15.16 1,334 6,871

11,400 333 33.2 15.16 1,379 6,863

11,500 339 33.7 15.16 1,424 6,854

11,600 346 34.3 15.66 1,471 7,001

11,700 353 34.8 15.67 1,519 6,996

11,800 359 35.4 16.17 1,569 7,140

11,900 367 35.9 16.16 1,620 7,124

12,000 374 36.5 16.66 1,673 7,264

12,100 381 37.0 16.66 1,727 7,252

12,200 388 37.6 17.16 1,782 7,389

12,300 396 38.2 17.16 1,840 7,374

12,400 404 38.8 17.66 1,899 7,507

12,500 412 39.4 17.66 1,961 7,492

12,600 420 40.0 18.16 2,024 7,621

12,700 428 40.7 18.17 2,090 7,607

12,800 437 41.3 18.66 2,157 7,727

12,900 446 42.0 18.67 2,227 7,712

13,000 455 42.6 19.17 2,300 7,832

13,100 464 43.3 19.17 2,375 7,809

13,200 473 44.0 19.67 2,453 7,925

13,300 483 44.7 20.17 2,533 8,037

13,400 493 45.5 20.17 2,618 8,009

13,500 504 46.2 20.67 2,705 8,116

13,600 514 47.0 21.17 2,797 8,218

13,700 525 47.8 21.17 2,892 8,184

13,800 537 48.6 21.67 2,993 8,279

13,900 549 49.5 22.17 3,098 8,370

14,000 562 50.4 22.17 3,210 8,326

14,100 575 51.3 22.73 3,329 8,423

M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 F-25

Table F-6. M28A1/A2 Rocket (Reduced Range, Practice) Ballistic Algorithm Solutions

Aim Apogee

Range to Target (m) QE (mil)

Time to Impact (sec) Time (sec) Altitude (m) Range (m)

14,200 589 52.3 23.23 3,456 8,497

14,300 604 53.3 23.73 3,592 8,563

14,400 620 54.4 24.25 3,741 8,624

14,500 638 55.6 24.73 3,905 8,665

14,600 657 57.0 25.23 4,089 8,694

14,700 680 58.5 25.75 4,304 8,706

14,800 708 60.3 26.75 4,571 8,793

14,900 749 63.0 27.75 4,969 8,783

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 Glossary-1

Glossary Acronym

AAR Definition After Action Report

ABCS Army Battle Command Systems ABE Assistant Brigade Engineer

AC Alternating Current AC2 Airspace Command and Control ACA Airspace Coordination Area ACH Army Combat Helmet ACM Airspace Control Measures ACO Airspace Control Order ACP Airspace Control Point ACR Airspace Control Request ADA Air Defense Artillery

ADAM Area Denial Artillery Munition AF Adjust Fire

AFATDS Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System AFCS Automatic Fire Control System

AFSCOORD Assistant Fire Support Coordinator AFSO Aerial Fire Support Observer

AG Assistant Gunner AGM Attack Guidance Matrix AHA Ammunition Holding Area

AI Air Interdiction AKO Army Knowledge Online AKV Armored Knight Vehicle ALC Advanced Leaders Course ALO Air Liaison Officer

ALOC Administrative and Logistical Operations Center AMB Air Mission Brief AMC Air Mission Commander AMC At My Command

ANCD Automated Net Control Device ANGLICO Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison Company

AO Area of Operation AOC Intra-Air Operations Center AOF Azimuth of Fire AOI Area of Interest

AOL Azimuth of Lay APU Auxiliary Power Unit

Glossary

Glossary-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

ASAS All-Source Analysis System ASI Additional Skill Identifier

ASL Air Support List ASP Ammunition Supply Point

ASPT Artillery Skills Proficiency Test AST Air Support Request ASV Armored Security Vehicle

AT Artillery Table ATC Ammunition Team Chief ATF Amphibious Task Force ATG Antenna Transceiver Group ATO Air Tasking Order ATP Ammunition Transfer Point

AVAM Azimuth and Vertical Angle Measurement AXE Afatds Xml Engine

AZ Azimuth BC Battery Commander BC Beam Controller

BCE Battlefield Coordination Element BCT Brigade Combat Team

BCTC Battle Command Training Center BCU Battery Computer Unit BDA Battle Damage Assessment

BE Basic Encyclopedia BFA Battlefield Functional Area

BFIST Bradley Fire Support Team BFV Bradley Fighting Vehicle

BII Basic Issue Items BIT Built-In Test

BITE Built In Test Equipment BMNT Beginning Morning Nautical Twilight Bn/Sqn Battalion/Squadron

BOC Battery Operations Center BOLT Brigade Operational Legal Team

BOS Battle Operating Systems BRT Brigade Reconnaissance Troop

C,W,R Crawl, Walk, Run C/VAM Compass/Vertical Angle Measurement

C2 Command and Control CA Combat Assessments

CAFU Chemical Air Filtration Unit

Glossary

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 Glossary-3

CALFEX Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise CANTCO Cannot Comply

CAS Close Air Support CASEVAC Casualty Evacuation

CATS Combined Arms Training Strategies CBRN Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear

CBRNE Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear Environment CCIR Commander’s Critical Information Requirements CCP Casualty Collection Point CDE Collateral Damage Estimate

CD-R Compact Disc–Recordable CDT Control Display Terminal CDU Control Display Unit

CECOM Communications Electronics Command (U.S. Army) CFB Chief of Firing Battery CFF Call For Fire

CFFT Call For Fire Trainer CFL Coordinated Fire Line CFL Coordinated Fire Line CFX Command Field Exercise CFZ Critical Friendly Zone

CGRS Common Geographic Reference System CLGP Cannon-Launched Guided Projectile CMM Coordination Measure Manager CMO Civilian Military Operations CMP Common Message Processor

Co/Trp Company/Troop COA Course of Action

COLT Combat Observation and Lasing Team COMSEC Communications Security CONOPS Continuity of Operations

COP Common Operational Picture COS Chief of Station

COTS Commercial Off-the-Shelf CP Command Post

CPX Command Post Exercise CRP Center Reference Point

CSAR Combat Search and Rescue CSD Chief of Section Display CSR Controlled Supply Rate CTC Combat Training Center

Glossary

Glossary-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

D3A Decide, Detect, Deliver, and Access DA Department of the Army

DAGR Defense Advanced Gps Receiver DAP Distant Aiming Point

DC Declination Constant DC Direct Current

DCA Defensive Counter Air DCO Deputy Commanding Officer

DFCS Digital Flight Control System DP Decision Point

DPICM Dual-Purpose Improved Conventional Munitions DS Direct Support

DST Decision Support Template DTD Data Transfer Device

DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data DTMS Digital Training Management System

DZ Drop Zone ECM Electronic Countermeasures

ECOA Enemy Courses of Action ECU Environmental Control Unit

ED Emergency Destruction EENT End of Evening Nautical Twilight

ELINT Electronic Intelligence EOL End of the Orienting Line EOL End of Observing Line

EOM End of Mission EP Electronic Protection

EPLU Embedded Program Load Unit ERPSL Essential Repair Parts Stock List ETAC Enlisted Terminal Attack Controller

EW Electronic Warfare EXEVAL Exercise Evaluation

F&E Fires & Effects FA Field Artillery

FAASV Field Artillery Ammunition Support Vehicle FASCAM Field Artillery Scatterable Mines

FASP Field Artillery Support Plan FATDS Field Artillery Tactical Data Systems

FBCB2-BFT Force XXI Battle Command, Brigade-and-Below–Blue Force Tracker FC Fires Cell

FCP Fire Control Panel

Glossary

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 Glossary-5

FCS Fire Control System FCX Fire Control Exercise FDA Functional Damage Assessment FDC Fire Direction Center

FDNCO Fire Direction NCO FDO Fire Direction Officer FDS Fire Direction System FED Forward Entry Device FEM Field Exercise Mode FFE Fire For Effect

FH Frequency Hopping FIB Fires Brigade

FIST Fire Support Team FKN Fires Knowledge Network

FLOT Forward Line of Own Troops FM Field Manual FM Frequency Modulated

FMC Fully Mission Capable FO Forward Observer FO Fire Order

FOM Figure of Merit FOS Forward Observer System

FP Firing Point FPF Final Protective Fire FPL Final Protective Line

FRAGO Fragmentary Order FS Fire Support

FSCATT Fire Support Combined Arms Tactical Trainer FSCM Fire Support Coordination Measures FSEM Fire Support Execution Matrix

FSNCO Fire Support Nco FSO Fire Support Officer FST Fire Support Task FSV Fire Support Vehicle

FT Firing Table FTX Field Training Exercise

FWR Fire When Ready G/VLLD Ground Vehicular Locator Laser Designator

GDU Gun Display Unit GFT Graphical Firing Table

GLPS Gun Laying and Positioning Systems

Glossary

Glossary-6 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

G-M Grid-Magnetic GMLA Guided Missile Launching Assembly

GPS Global Positioning System GQ Gunner’s Quadrant GS General Support

GST Graphical Site Table GUARDFIST Guard Unit Armory Device Full Crew Interactive Simulation Trainer

HA Hide Area HB High Burst

HBCT Heavy Brigade Combat Team HCO Horizontal Control Operator

HDRS Heavy Drop Rigging Site HE High Explosive

HEMAT Heavy Expanded Mobility Ammunition Trailer HEMTT Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Truck

HEPI Heavy Equipment Point of Impact HIMARS High Mobility Artillery Rocket System

HN Host Nation HOB Height of Burst HPT High-Payoff Target

HPTL High-Payoff Target List HQ Headquarters

HRDS Heavy Drop Rigging Site HTU Handheld Terminal Unit HVT High-Value Target

I&EW Intelligence and Electronic Warfare IAW In Accordance With

IBCT Infantry Brigade Combat Team ICM Improved Conventional Munitions

ICM/DPICM Improved Conventional Munitions/Dual-Purpose Improved Conventional Munitions

ICOM Intercommunications ID Identification

IETM Interactive Electronic Technical Manual IMIU Improved Weapons Interface Unit

INFOSYS Information Systems INTSUM Intelligence Summary

IO Information Operations IOWG Induced Ordered Weighted Geometric Operator IPADS Improved Position and Azimuth Determining System

IPB Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield IPNU Improved Position Navigation Unit

Glossary

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 Glossary-7

IR Information Requirements IR Infrared

ISM Intelligence Synchronization Matrix ISR Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance ISU Integrated Sight Unit

ITM Intra-Air Operations Center Target Manager ITO Integrated Tasking Order

J/I Joint Inspection JADOCS Joint Automated Deep Operations Coordination System

JCAS Joint Close Air Support JCDB Joint Common Database

JED MLRS/HIMARS Ammunition JEH MLRS/HIMARS Ammunition

JFIRE Joint Application of Firepower JFM Joint Fires Manager JFO Joint Fires Observer

JSRC Joint Search and Rescue Center JTAC Joint Tactical Air Controller

JTF Joint Task Force JTST Joint Time-Sensitive Target L/PA Limited/Protected Area LAR Logistics Assistance Representative LBE Load Bearing Equipment

LCMR Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar LCU Lightweight Computer Unit LDA Launcher Danger Area LDS Launcher Drive System LFX Live-Fire Exercise

LLDR Lightweight Laser Designator Rangefinder LLM Loader Launcher Module

LM Launcher Module LMM Loadable Munitions Manager LNB Low Noise Block LP/C Launch Pod/Container LRF Laser Range Finder

LRSO Laser Range Safety Officer LTX Lane Training Exercise

LZ Landing Zone MAPS Modular Azimuth Positioning System

MBITR Multiband Inter/Intra Team Radio MCC Maritime Component Commander

Glossary

Glossary-8 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

MCO Marine Corps Order MCOO Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay MDMP Military Decision-Making Process

MEDEVAC Medical Evacuation MELIOS Mini-Eyesafe Laser Infrared Observation Set

MEP Mission Equipment Package MET Meteorological

METL Mission-Essential Task List METT-T Mission, Enemy, Terrain, Troops & Time Available

METT-TC Mission, Enemy, Terrain, Troops and Time Available, and Civil Considerations

MFR Mission Fired Report MHL Manufacturer’s Hairline

MI Military Intelligence MISO Military Information Support Operations

MLRF MELIOS Laser Range Finder MLRS Multiple Launch Rocket System MOA Memorandum of Agreement MOE Measures of Effectiveness

MOPP4 Mission Oriented Protective Posture MOS Military Occupational Specialty MPI Mean Points of Impact

MSD Maintenance Support Device MSE Mobile Subscriber Equipment

MSEL Master Scenario Events List Msg Gen Message Generation

MSU Mass Storage Unit MTM Maritime Target Manager MTO Message To Observer

MTOE Modified Table of Organization and Equipment MTP Mission Training Plan MUL Master Unit List

MV Muzzle Velocity MVCT Muzzle Velocity Correction Table

MVV Muzzle Velocity Variation NAI Named Area of Interest

NCO Non-Commissioned Officer NCOIC Non-Commissioned Officer in Charge

NCS Net Control Station NFA No Fire Area NHA Noise Hazard Area

NIPRNET Non-Secure Internet Protocol Router Network (U.S. DoD)

Glossary

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 Glossary-9

NLT No Later Than NOD Night Observation Device

NOGAPS Navy Operational Global Atmospheric Prediction System (U.S. Navy global weather model)

NOHD Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance NSFS Naval Surface Fire Support

NSL No Strike List OC Observer-Controller OF Observed Fire

OIC Officer in Charge OP Observation Post

OPAREA Operations Area OPFAC Operational Facility OPLAN Operations Plan OPORD Operations Order OPSEC Operations Security ORSTA Orienting Station

OS Orienting/Observing Station OT Observer-Target

PAA Position Areas for Artillery PADS Position and Azimuth Determining Station PAO Public Affairs Operations

PASS Publish and Subscribe Service PC Personal Computer

PCCI Pre-Combat Checks and Inspections PCI Pass Client Interface

PCR Piece-to-Crest Range PD Point Detonating

PDA Physical Damage Assessment PDF Principal Direction of Fire

PDFCS Paladin Digital Fire Control System PDU Power Distribution Unit

PGM Precision Guided Munition PIAFS Portable Inductive Artillery Fuze Setter

PIR Priority Information/Intelligence Requirements PL Platoon Leader

PLGR Precision Lightweight Gps Receiver PLL Prescribed Load List PLU Program Load Unit

PM BC Program Manager Battle Command PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

PNU Position Navigation Unit

Glossary

Glossary-10 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

POC Platoon Operations Center POI Program of Instruction PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency PSG Platoon Sergeant

PSS-SOF Precision Strike Suite for Special Operations Force PZ Pickup Zone QC Quality Control QE Quadrant Elevation

QRF Quick Reactionary Force R3SP Rearm, Refuel, Resupply, Survey Control Points

RAAM Remote Anti-Armor Mine RAAMS (Appendix C) Remote Anti-Armor Mine System RADAR Radio Detection and Ranging

RAP Rocket-Assisted Projectile RC Reserve Component

RCC Rescue Coordination Center RCO Range Control Officer RDO Radar Deployment Order RDP Range-Deflection Protractor RDU Radar Display Unit

RETRANS Retransmission RFT Rapid Fire Table RHC Ruggedized Handheld Computer

RI Request for Information RL Reload Point

ROC-V Recognition of Combat Vehicles ROE Rules of Engagement ROZ Restricted Operating Zone

RP Release Point RP Rocket Pod

RP/C Rocket Pod Container RP/GMLA Rocket Pod/Guided Missile Launch Assembly

RPG Rocket-Propelled Grenade RSL Radar Section Leader RSO Range Safety Officer

RSOP Reconnaissance, Selection, and Occupation of Position RSR Required Supply Rae

RSTA Reconnaissance, Surveillance, and Target Acquisition RSV/T Resupply Vehicle/Trailer

RTF Ready to Fire RTO Radio Telephone Operator

Glossary

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 Glossary-11

S-2 Intelligence Officer S-3 Operations Officer

SALUTE Size, Activity, Location, Unit, Time, and Equipment SAR Search and Rescue

SBCT Stryker Brigade Combat Team SC Single Channel

SCATMINE Scatterable Mines SCP Survey Control Point SCU Small Computer Unit SDC Safety Data Calculator SDZ Surface Danger Zone

SEAD Suppression of Enemy Air Defense Sgt Sergeant

SGT Sergeant SINCGARS Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System

SISTIM Simulator/Stimulator SITMAP Situation Map SITREP Situation Report

SKL Simple Key Loader SLC Senior Leaders Course SLO Suspension Lock Out

SMCT Soldier's Manual of Common Tasks SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SNVT Standard Network Variable Types SNVT Short No Voltage Test

SOI Standard Operating Instructions SOI Signal-Operating Instructions SOP Standard Operating Procedures

SP Start/Starting Point SPOTREP Spot Report

SRO Senior Radar Operator SSG Staff Sergeant

STAFFEX Staff Exercise STATREP Status Report

STP Soldier’s Training Publication STRAC Standards in Training Commission

STX Situational Training Exercise SUPRP Supplementary Surface Weather Report

T&E Traversing and Elevation T&EO Training and Evaluation Outline

TA Target Acquisition

Glossary

Glossary-12 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

TACFIRE Tactical Fire Direction System TACMET Tactical Meteorological Equipment

TACP Tactical Air Control Party TACSOP Tactical Standing Operating Procedure

TADSS Training Aids, Devices, Simulators, and Simulations TAFCS Tactical Automated Fire Control System

TAI Target Area of Interest TAIS Tactical Airspace Integration System

TAMMS The Army Maintenance Management System TB Technical Bulletin

TBMCS Theater Battle Management Core System TC Truck Commander TC Training Circular

TCIM Tactical Communications Interface Module TCRIT Target Criteria

TDA Table of Distribution and Allowances TDMP Tactical Decision-Making Process

TDN Target Data Nomination TF Time of Flight TF Task Force

TFT Tabular Firing Table TGO Terminal Guided Operations

Ti Time TIDAT Target Intelligence Data

TLABSPAP Trails, Lay, Aimpoint established, Boresight verified, Safe, Prefire checks performed, Ammunition Prepared

TLP Troop Leading Procedures TM Technical Manual

TMDE Test Measuring Diagnostic Equipment TMM Target Management Matrix

TO&E Table(s) of Organization and Equipment TOC Tactical Operations Center TOE Table of Organization and Equipment TOF Time of Flight TOT Time on Target

TRADOC U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command TSA Target System Assessment

TSCP Targeting Station Control Panel TSFO Training Set Fire Support Observation TSM Target Synchronization Matrix

TSOP Tactical Standard Operating Procedures TSP Training Support Package

Glossary

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 Glossary-13

TSS Target Selection Standard TST Time-Sensitive Target TTF Time to Fire

TTOT Total Time Off Target TTP Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures TTT Timed Time on Target TVA Target Value Analysis

T-VSAT Tactical Very Small Aperture Terminal TWR Timed When Ready UAS Unmanned Aerial System

ULLS-G Unit Level Logistics System – Ground USAR U.S. Army Reserve

USMTF United States Message Transfer Format USR Unit Status Report

UTM Universal Transverse Mercator VA Vertical Angle

VCU Versatile Computer Unit VE Velocity Error VI Vertical Interval

VMF Variable Message Format VT Variable Time

WARNO Warning Order WFX Warfighter Exercise

WILCO Will Comply WLRS Weapon Location Radar Section

WLU Weapons Location Unit WP White Phosphorous WR When Ready

XINT Alert (On-Call) Interdiction XO Executive Officer

ZUPT Zero-Velocity Update

This page intentionally left blank.

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 References-1

References SOURCES USED These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication.

Army Doctrine Publications

ADP 5-0. The Operations Process. 17 May 2012. ADP 7-0. Training Units and Developing Leaders. 23 August 2012. ADRP 5-0. The Operations Process. 17 May 2012. ADRP 7-0. Training Units and Developing Leaders. 23 August 2012.

Army Regulations

AR 220-1. Army Unit Status Reporting and Force Registration – Consolidated Policies. 15 April 2010. AR 350-1. Army Training and Leader Development. 18 December 2009. AR 385-63/MCO 3570.1C. Range Safety. 30 January 2012. AR 600-8-22. Military Awards. 11 December 2006.

Army Techniques Publications

ATP 1-02.1. Multi-Service Brevity Codes {MCRP 3-25B; NTTP 6-02.1; AFTTP (I) 3-2.5}. 20 September 2012. ATP 3-09.30. Techniques for Observed Fire. 2 August 2013. ATP 3-09.32. JFIRE Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Joint Application of Firepower.

30 November 2012. ATP 4-11. Army Motor Transport Operations. 5 July 2013.

Army Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (ATTP)

ATTP 3-18.12. Air Assault Operations. 1 March 2011.

Field Manuals

FM 1-02. Operational Terms and Graphics. 21 September 2004. FM 3-04.111. Aviation Brigades. 7 December 2007. FM 3-09.12/MCRP 3-16.1A. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Target Acquisitions. 21

June 2002. FM 3-09.15. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Meteorology. 25 October 2007. FM 3-09.21. Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for the Field Artillery Battalion. 22 March 2001. FM 3-09.60. Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) Operations. 12 August 2008. FM 3-09.70. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for M109A6 Howitzer (Paladin) Operations. 1 August 2000. FM 3-20.21. Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT). 3 September 2009. FM 3-22.3. Stryker Gunnery. 9 March 2006. FM 6-2. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Survey. 23 September 1993. ) FM 6-20-40. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Heavy). 5 January

1990. FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery.

23 April 1996.

References

References-2 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

FM 6-50. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Field Artillery Cannon Battery. 23 December 1996. FM 90-26. Airborne Operations. 18 December 1990.

Training Circular

TC 4-11.46. Convoy Protection Platform (CPP) Gunnery. 6 April 2010

Training Manuals

TM 4-48.11. Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load: Dual-Point Load Rigging Procedures. 5 July 2013. TM 9-1015-252-10. Technical Manual, Operator’s Manual for Howitzer, Light, Towed 105mm, M119A2, NSN

1015-01-482-4914 (EIC: 3WE) LIN: H57505. 30 September 2010. TM 9-1025-215-10. Operator's Manual for Howitzer, Medium, Towed: 155-MM, M777(NSN 1025-91-445-

0991), Howitzer, Medium, Towed: 155-MM, M777A1 (NSN 1025-99-411-1447) (EIC: 3ET)/Howitzer, Medium, Towed: 155-MM, M777A2 (NSN 1025-99-463-7551) (EIC: 3EU) {TM-10407A-10/1}. 30 November 2012.

IETM 9-1055-647-13&P. The Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) M270A1 Launcher & M993/M993A1 Carrier. 19 January 2013.

IETM 9-1055-1646-13&P. Interactive Electronic Technical Manual (IETM) for High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS). 14 January 2013.

TM 9-1260-477-12. Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Electro-Optical Target Designator Set AN/TVQ-2 (G/VLLD). 23 January 1982.

TM 9-1450-646-10. Operator's Manual for Carrier, Multiple Launch Rocket System, M993. 31 July 2013. TM 9-2330-383-14&P. Operator's, Unit, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual (Including

Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists) for Trailer, Ammunition, Heavy Expanded Mobility, 11 Ton, M989A1. 13 December 1991.

TM 9-2350-297-10-1. Operator's Manual for Bradley Fire Support Vehicle M (NSN 2350-01-432-1526) (EIC:AP7) HULL. 20 August 2013.

TM 9-2350-314-10. Operator's Manual Howitzer, Medium, Self-Propelled 155 Millimeter M109A6(NSN 2350- 01-305-0028) (EIC: 3FC). 8 February 1999.

TM 9-2350-362-10. Operator's Manual for Knight Fire Support Vehicle M707. 9 June 2011. TM 9-2350-380-10PMC. Crew/Operator Daily Preventive Maintenance Checklist for Armored Knight Fire

Support Vehicle M1200. 30 October 2009. TM 9-2355-311-10-9-1/2/3. Operator's Manual, Fire Support Vehicle/Fire Support Sensor. 30 May 2008. TM 9-6675-347-13&P. Operator, Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair

Parts and Special Tools List for Gun Laying and Positioning System (GLPS): M67 (NSN 6675-01-430- 1965) (EIC: CJ2). 31 October 2000.

TM 11-5810-410-13&P. Operators and Field Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Transfer Unit, Cryptographic Key AN/PYQ-10(C) Simple Key Loader (SKL). 15 August 2013.

TM 11-5820-890-10-1. Operator's Manual for SINCGARS Ground Combat Net Radio, ICOM. 11 July 2007. TM 11-5820-890-10-6. SINCGARS ICOM Ground Radios used with Automated Net Control Device (ANCD)

AN/CYZ-10; Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) AN/PSN-11; Handheld Remote Control Radio Device (HRCRD)C-12493/U; Simple Key Loader (SKL) AN/PYQ-10; Operator's Pocket Guide Radio Manpack Radios (AN/PRC-119A/D/F) (NSN: N/A) (EIC: N/A) Vehicular Radios (AN/VRC-87A/D/F through AN/VRC-92A/D/F). 1 July 2007.

TM 11-5820-1172-13. Operator and Maintenance Manual Defense Advances GPS Receiver (DAGR) SAT. 1 March 2005.

TM 11-5825-291-13. Operations and Maintenance Manual for Satellite Signals Navigation. 1 April 2001.

References

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 References-3

TM 11-5840-355-10. Operator's Manual for Radar Set, AN/TPQ-37(V) 6 (NSN 5840-01-270-5100)EIC: IYF) and AN/TPQ-37(V)8 (5840-01-400-3218) EIC: (N/A). 1 April 2002.

TM 11-5840-378-10. Operator's Manual for Radar Sets AN/TPQ-36(V) (NSN 5840-01-185-4244) (EIC: N/A) and AN/TPQ-36(V)5 (5840-01-229-1276) (EIC: IYE) and AN/TPQ-36(V)7 (NSN 5840-01-229-1278) (EIC: IT6). 1 July 2000.

TM 11-5840-380-10. Operator's Manual for Radar Set AN/TPQ-36(V)8, (NSN 5840-01-390-0529) (EIC: Q68). 17 April 2009.

TM 11-5855-315-13&P. Operator's and Field Maintenance Manual (Including RPSTL) for Range Finder- Target Designator, Laser AN/PED-1 (NSN: 1240-01-455-1791). 1 March 2013.

TM 11-5985-357-13. Operator's, Organizational, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Antenna Group, OE-254/GRC (NSN 5985-01-063-1574). 1 February 1991.

TM 11-6660-296-12&P. Operator's and Unit Maintenance Manual, Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Meteorological Station, Semiautomatic AN/TMQ-55 (NSN: 6660-01-522-5141). 15 November 2005.

TM 11-6660-297-12&P. Operator's and Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Meteorological Measuring Set Profiler AN/TMQ-52A (NSN 6660-01-538-9208). 30 March 2007.

TM 11-6660-298-13&P. Operator and Field Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Meteorological Measuring Set AN/TMQ-52B. 1 May 2010.

TM 11-7025-297-10-1. Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) Operational System Software Version 6.4.0.1 Volume 1 {TM 7025-OR/1}. 1 October 2007.

TM 11-7440-283-12-2. Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Data Display Groups, Gun Direction, OD-144(V)1/GYK-29(V) (NSN 7025-01-134-2329) (EIC: HP4) OD-144(V)2/GYK-29(V) (7025-01-134-3218) (EIC: HQH) OD-144(V)3/GYK-29(V) (7025-01-134-3219) (EIC: HQJ) (P/O Computer System Gun Direction, AN/GYK-29(V)). 27 September 1982.

TM 43-0001-28. Ammunition Data Sheets for Artillery Ammunition: Guns, Howitzers, Mortars, Recoilless Rifles, Grenade Launchers and Artillery Fuzes (FSC 1310, 1315, 1320, 1390. 28 April 1994.

Department of the Army Forms

DA Form 581. Request for Issue and Turn-In of Ammunition. DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms. DA Form 2404. Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet. DA Form 2408-4. Weapon Record Data. DA Form 3675-R. Ballistic Message. DA Form 3677-R. Computer MET Message. DA Form 4446. Level, Transit, and General Survey Record Book. DA Form 4504. Record of Fire. DA Form 4513. Record of Missions Fired. DA Form 4982-R. Muzzle Velocity Record. DA Form 4982-1-R. M90 Velocimeter Work Sheet. DA Form 5212-R. Gunner’s Reference Card. DA Form 5310-R. Firefinder Friendly Fire Log. DA Form 5368. Quick Fire Plan. DA Form 5517-R. Standard Range Card. DA Form 5988-E. Equipment Inspection Maintenance Worksheet (EGA). DA form 7232-R. MLRS FDC Fire Mission Log. DA form 7233-R. MLRS Launcher Fire Mission Log. DA Form 7353-R. Universal Safety - T. .

References

References-4 TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

DD Forms

DD Form 1972. Joint Tactical Air Strike Request.

Joint Publications

JP 3-09.1 (JFIRE FM 3-09.32). Laser/Terminal Guidance Operations. 1 June 1991. JP 3-09.3. Joint Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Close Air Support. 1 December 1995.

Department of the Army Pamphlets

DA Pam 350-38. Standards in Training Commission (STRAC). 19 November 2012. DA Pam 385-63. Range Safety. 30 January 2012.

Student Text

ST 6-40-2. Battery Computer System (BUCS). January 1995. ST 6-50-20. Battery Executive Officer's/Platoon Leader's Handbook. 30 October 1992. ST 6-50-60. COORDINATING DRAFT. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for M109A6 Howitzer (Paladin)

Operations. 30 September 1997.

Technical Bulletins

IETB 9-2320-279-14. Warranty Program for M977 Series 8X8 Heavy Expanded Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT) 15 October 2004

TB 11-5840-389-10. LCMR. Technical Bulletin for Lightweight Counter-Mortar Radar (LCMR) Radar Set AN/TPQ-48(V2) 15 February 2007.

TB 11-7021-228-10-1. Operator's Manual for Forward Observer Systems (FOS Version 7.01). 15 March 2005.

TB 11-7021-228-10-2. Operator's Manual for Forward Observer Systems (FOS) (Software Version 7.01). 15 March 2005.

TB 11-7021-228-10-3. Operator's Reference Manual for Forward Observer Systems (FO/FIST and FSO/CDR Operational Modes FOS Version 7.01). 15 March 2005.

TB 11-7021-228-10-4. Operator's Reference Manual for Forward Observer Systems (Survey Operational Mode, FOS Version 7.01). 15 March 2005.

TB 11-7025-355-10. CENTAUR V2.0 Software User Manual. 27 February 2009.

Marine Corps Orders

MCO 3570.1B. Range Safety. 19 May 2003.

DOCUMENTS NEEDED

All documents quoted or paraphrased in this publication must be available to the intended users of this publication.

INTERNET WEB SITES (current at printing)

USAFAS Training and Doctrine Web Site http://sill-www.army.mil/

Master Gunner Web Site. (AKO/CAC log in required) https://www.us.army.mil/suite/page/130718

References

15 November 2013 TC 3-09.8 References-5

POI for ROC-V Train-the-Trainer, ROC-V (Visible), ROC-V (1st Gen), and ROC-V (2d Gen). (AKO/CAC log in required) https://rocv.army.mil

This page intentionally left blank.

TC 3-09.8 15 November 2013

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

RAYMOND T. ODIERNO

General, United States Army Chief of Staff Official: GERALD B. O’KEEFE Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 1331801 DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army, Army National Guard, and US Army Reserve: Not to be distributed; electronic media only.

PIN: 103230-000

Cover
Contents
Preface
Chapter 1 - Introduction

QUALIFICATION METHODOLOGY
GENERAL CONTENT
SECTION I – TRAINING STRATEGY

GUNNERY TABLES

SECTION II – COMMANDER’S GUIDANCE

TRAINING GOALS
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION III – TRAINING PLANS

GUNNERY TRAINING
NEAR TERM TRAINING PLANS

Chapter 2 - Safety

SECTION I – CERTIFICATION, BATTLE FOCUS, DUTIES, AND RESPONSIBILITIES

CERTIFICATION
BATTLE FOCUS

SECTION II – PROCEDURES

CANNON SAFETY
M109A6 PALADIN FIRING SAFETY

SECTION III – MANUAL COMPUTATION OF SAFETY DATA

MANUAL SAFETY COMPUTATION PROCEDURE
COMPUTATION OF LOW ANGLE SAFETY DATA
SAFETY T
UPDATING SAFETY DATA AFTER DETERMINING A GFT SETTING
DETERMINATION OF MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE ILLUMINATION AREA
COMPUTATION OF HIGH ANGLE SAFETY DATA

SECTION IV – DETERMINING MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION

MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION

SECTION V – MLRS/HIMARS SAFETY PROCEDURES
SECTION VI – COMPUTATION OF MLRS/HIMARS SAFETY DATA

GENERAL
MLRS/HIMARS SURFACE DANGER ZONE VALUES
COMPUTING SAFETY DATA

SECTION VII – CHECK DATA FOR M270A1/MLRS M142 HIMARS

M270A1 MLRS AND M142 HIMARS

Chapter 3 - 13F Fire Support Tables

INTRODUCTION
SECTION I – ASPT FOR FIRE SUPPORT

REQUIREMENTS
EVALUATION PROCEDURES

SECTION II – FIRE SUPPORT TABLES

FIRE SUPPORT TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL TASKS
FIRE SUPPORT TABLE II: ESTABLISH OPERATIONS
FIRE SUPPORT TABLE III: FIRE PLANNING
FIRE SUPPORT TABLE IV: EXECUTE FIRES
FIRE SUPPORT TABLE V: MOUNTED GUNNERY TRAINING PROGRAM
OBSERVER TABLE VI

Chapter 4 - 13B/13M Delivery Section training

INTRODUCTION
SECTION I – HOWITZER SECTION TABLES

ASPT FOR HOWITZER SECTIONS
EVALUATION PROCEDURES
PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL REQUIRED
HOWITZER TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL TASKS
HOWITZER TABLE II: RIGGING PROCEDURES
HOWITZER Table III: ESTABLISH OPERATIONS
HOWITZER TABLE IV: EXECUTE FIRES
HOWITZER TABLE V: SECTION CERTIFICATION
HOWITZER TABLE VI: SECTION QUALIFICATION

SECTION II – MLRS SECTION TABLES

TRAINING WITH MLRS TABLES
TEST STATIONS
MLRS TABLES
MLRS TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL SOLDIER AND LEADER TASKS
MLRS TABLE II: CONDUCT MLRS FIRING SECTION OPAREAOCCUPATION
MLRS TABLE III: PREPARE HIMARS FOR AIR MOVEMENT
MLRS TABLE IV/A: LAUNCHER RELOAD PROCEDURES
MLRS TABLE IV/B: AMMUNITION UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES
MLRS TABLE V: TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION
MLRS/HIMARS TABLE VI: QUALIFICATION

Chapter 5 - 13R Radar Section Tables

INTRODUCTION
TRAINING WITH RADAR SECTION TABLES
SECTION I – ASPT FOR RADAR SECTIONS

REQUIREMENTS
TEST STATIONS
TEST STATION 1: MAP AND AIMING CIRCLE ORIENTATION
TEST STATION 2: INITIALIZE THE RADAR

SECTION II – RADAR TABLES

RADAR TABLE IA: INDIVIDUAL TASKS
RADAR TABLE IB: INDIVIDUAL LEADER TASKS
RADAR TABLE II: LCMR (LIGHTWEIGHT COUNTER-MORTARRADAR)
RADAR TABLE III: RSOP (RECONNAISSANCE, SELECTION, ANDOCCUPATION OF POSITION)
RADAR TABLE IV: PERFORM RADAR OPERATIONS
RADAR TABLE V: CERTIFICATION
RADAR TABLE VI: QUALIFICATION

Chapter 6 - 13D/13P Fire Direction Tables

INTRODUCTION
TRAINING WITH FIRE DIRECTION TABLES
EVALUATION PROCEDURES
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
CONDUCT FDC OPERATOR’S QUALIFICATION TEST
FIRE DIRECTION TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL LEADER AND SOLDIER TASKS
FIRE DIRECTION TABLE II: ESTABLISH OPERATIONS
FIRE DIRECTION TABLE III: COMPUTE FIRING DATA
FIRE DIRECTION TABLE IV: PROVIDE CONTROL OF THE FDC
FIRE DIRECTION TABLE V: CERTIFICATION
FIRE DIRECTION TABLE VI: QUALIFICATION

Chapter 7 - 13T Survey/Meteorological (MET) Crewmember Tables

INTRODUCTION
SECTION I – ASPT FOR SURVEY/MET SECTIONS

EVALUATION PROCEDURES
CONSTRUCT A TEST STATION DIAGRAM
TEST STATION 1: WRITTEN EXAM

SECTION II – SURVEY/MET TABLES

SURVEY/MET TABLE I: INDIVIDUAL TASKS
SURVEY/MET TABLE II: ESTABLISH OPERATIONS
SURVEY/MET TABLE III: SURVEY/MET PLANNING AND COORDINATION
SURVEY/MET TABLE IV: PERFORM SURVEY/MET MISSIONS
SURVEY/MET TABLE V: SURVEY/MET TRAINING ANDCERTIFICATION

Chapter 8 - Collective FA Gunnery Training

SECTION I – EVALUATION

CONCEPT

Appendix A - JADOCS
Appendix B - Minimum QE Rapid Fire Tables
Appendix C - Sample Hands-On and Written Examinations
Appendix D - Time & Accuracy Standards
Appendix E - Gunner’s Qualification Test
Appendix F - M28A1/A2 Rocket Crest Clearance Tables
Glossary
References
Authentication
PIN: 103230-000

<< /ASCII85EncodePages false /AllowTransparency false /AutoPositionEPSFiles true /AutoRotatePages /None /Binding /Left /CalGrayProfile (Dot Gain 20%) /CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-2.1) /CalCMYKProfile (U.S. Web Coated \050SWOP\051 v2) /sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-2.1) /CannotEmbedFontPolicy /Error /CompatibilityLevel 1.4 /CompressObjects /Tags /CompressPages true /ConvertImagesToIndexed true /PassThroughJPEGImages true /CreateJobTicket false /DefaultRenderingIntent /Default /DetectBlends true /DetectCurves 0.0000 /ColorConversionStrategy /CMYK /DoThumbnails false /EmbedAllFonts true /EmbedOpenType false /ParseICCProfilesInComments true /EmbedJobOptions true /DSCReportingLevel 0 /EmitDSCWarnings false /EndPage -1 /ImageMemory 1048576 /LockDistillerParams false /MaxSubsetPct 100 /Optimize true /OPM 1 /ParseDSCComments true /ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo true /PreserveCopyPage true /PreserveDICMYKValues true /PreserveEPSInfo true /PreserveFlatness true /PreserveHalftoneInfo false /PreserveOPIComments true /PreserveOverprintSettings true /StartPage 1 /SubsetFonts true /TransferFunctionInfo /Apply /UCRandBGInfo /Preserve /UsePrologue false /ColorSettingsFile () /AlwaysEmbed [ true ] /NeverEmbed [ true ] /AntiAliasColorImages false /CropColorImages true /ColorImageMinResolution 300 /ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK /DownsampleColorImages true /ColorImageDownsampleType /Bicubic /ColorImageResolution 300 /ColorImageDepth -1 /ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 /ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 1.50000 /EncodeColorImages true /ColorImageFilter /DCTEncode /AutoFilterColorImages true /ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy /JPEG /ColorACSImageDict << /QFactor 0.15 /HSamples [1 1 1 1] /VSamples [1 1 1 1] >> /ColorImageDict << /QFactor 0.15 /HSamples [1 1 1 1] /VSamples [1 1 1 1] >> /JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >> /JPEG2000ColorImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >> /AntiAliasGrayImages false /CropGrayImages true /GrayImageMinResolution 300 /GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK /DownsampleGrayImages true /GrayImageDownsampleType /Bicubic /GrayImageResolution 300 /GrayImageDepth -1 /GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 /GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 1.50000 /EncodeGrayImages true /GrayImageFilter /DCTEncode /AutoFilterGrayImages true /GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy /JPEG /GrayACSImageDict << /QFactor 0.15 /HSamples [1 1 1 1] /VSamples [1 1 1 1] >> /GrayImageDict << /QFactor 0.15 /HSamples [1 1 1 1] /VSamples [1 1 1 1] >> /JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >> /JPEG2000GrayImageDict << /TileWidth 256 /TileHeight 256 /Quality 30 >> /AntiAliasMonoImages false /CropMonoImages true /MonoImageMinResolution 1200 /MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy /OK /DownsampleMonoImages true /MonoImageDownsampleType /Bicubic /MonoImageResolution 1200 /MonoImageDepth -1 /MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 1.50000 /EncodeMonoImages true /MonoImageFilter /CCITTFaxEncode /MonoImageDict << /K -1 >> /AllowPSXObjects false /CheckCompliance [ /None ] /PDFX1aCheck false /PDFX3Check false /PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false /PDFXNoTrimBoxError true /PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true /PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /PDFXOutputIntentProfile () /PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () /PDFXOutputCondition () /PDFXRegistryName () /PDFXTrapped /False /CreateJDFFile false /Description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> /CHS <FEFF4f7f75288fd94e9b8bbe5b9a521b5efa7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065876863900275284e8e9ad88d2891cf76845370524d53705237300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c676562535f00521b5efa768400200050004400460020658768633002> /CHT <FEFF4f7f752890194e9b8a2d7f6e5efa7acb7684002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002065874ef69069752865bc9ad854c18cea76845370524d5370523786557406300260a853ef4ee54f7f75280020004100630072006f0062006100740020548c002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee553ca66f49ad87248672c4f86958b555f5df25efa7acb76840020005000440046002065874ef63002> /CZE <FEFF005400610074006f0020006e006100730074006100760065006e00ed00200070006f0075017e0069006a007400650020006b0020007600790074007600e101590065006e00ed00200064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074016f002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002c0020006b00740065007200e90020007300650020006e0065006a006c00e90070006500200068006f006400ed002000700072006f0020006b00760061006c00690074006e00ed0020007400690073006b00200061002000700072006500700072006500730073002e002000200056007900740076006f01590065006e00e900200064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400790020005000440046002000620075006400650020006d006f017e006e00e90020006f007400650076015900ed007400200076002000700072006f006700720061006d0065006300680020004100630072006f00620061007400200061002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000610020006e006f0076011b006a016100ed00630068002e> /DAN <FEFF004200720075006700200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072006e0065002000740069006c0020006100740020006f007000720065007400740065002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000620065006400730074002000650067006e006500720020007300690067002000740069006c002000700072006500700072006500730073002d007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e00670020006100660020006800f8006a0020006b00760061006c0069007400650074002e0020004400650020006f007000720065007400740065006400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074006500720020006b0061006e002000e50062006e00650073002000690020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006c006c006500720020004100630072006f006200610074002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002e> /DEU <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> /ESP <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> /ETI <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> /FRA <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> /GRE <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a stvaranje Adobe PDF dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. Stvoreni PDF dokumenti mogu se otvoriti Acrobat i Adobe Reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /HUN <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> /ITA <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> /JPN <FEFF9ad854c18cea306a30d730ea30d730ec30b951fa529b7528002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020658766f8306e4f5c6210306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103055308c305f0020005000440046002030d530a130a430eb306f3001004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d3067958b304f30533068304c3067304d307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a306b306f30d530a930f330c8306e57cb30818fbc307f304c5fc59808306730593002> /KOR <FEFFc7740020c124c815c7440020c0acc6a9d558c5ec0020ace0d488c9c80020c2dcd5d80020c778c1c4c5d00020ac00c7a50020c801d569d55c002000410064006f0062006500200050004400460020bb38c11cb97c0020c791c131d569b2c8b2e4002e0020c774b807ac8c0020c791c131b41c00200050004400460020bb38c11cb2940020004100630072006f0062006100740020bc0f002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020c774c0c1c5d0c11c0020c5f40020c2180020c788c2b5b2c8b2e4002e> /LTH <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> /LVI <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> /NLD (Gebruik deze instellingen om Adobe PDF-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. De gemaakte PDF-documenten kunnen worden geopend met Acrobat en Adobe Reader 5.0 en hoger.) /NOR <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> /POL <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> /PTB <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> /RUM <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> /RUS <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> /SKY <FEFF0054006900650074006f0020006e006100730074006100760065006e0069006100200070006f0075017e0069007400650020006e00610020007600790074007600e100720061006e0069006500200064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074006f0076002000410064006f006200650020005000440046002c0020006b0074006f007200e90020007300610020006e0061006a006c0065007001610069006500200068006f0064006900610020006e00610020006b00760061006c00690074006e00fa00200074006c0061010d00200061002000700072006500700072006500730073002e00200056007900740076006f00720065006e00e900200064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400790020005000440046002000620075006400650020006d006f017e006e00e90020006f00740076006f00720069016500200076002000700072006f006700720061006d006f006300680020004100630072006f00620061007400200061002000410064006f00620065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e0030002000610020006e006f0076016100ed00630068002e> /SLV <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> /SUO <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> /SVE <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> /TUR <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> /UKR <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> /ENU (Use these settings to create Adobe PDF documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. Created PDF documents can be opened with Acrobat and Adobe Reader 5.0 and later.) >> /Namespace [ (Adobe) (Common) (1.0) ] /OtherNamespaces [ << /AsReaderSpreads false /CropImagesToFrames true /ErrorControl /WarnAndContinue /FlattenerIgnoreSpreadOverrides false /IncludeGuidesGrids false /IncludeNonPrinting false /IncludeSlug false /Namespace [ (Adobe) (InDesign) (4.0) ] /OmitPlacedBitmaps false /OmitPlacedEPS false /OmitPlacedPDF false /SimulateOverprint /Legacy >> << /AddBleedMarks false /AddColorBars false /AddCropMarks false /AddPageInfo false /AddRegMarks false /ConvertColors /ConvertToCMYK /DestinationProfileName () /DestinationProfileSelector /DocumentCMYK /Downsample16BitImages true /FlattenerPreset << /PresetSelector /MediumResolution >> /FormElements false /GenerateStructure false /IncludeBookmarks false /IncludeHyperlinks false /IncludeInteractive false /IncludeLayers false /IncludeProfiles false /MultimediaHandling /UseObjectSettings /Namespace [ (Adobe) (CreativeSuite) (2.0) ] /PDFXOutputIntentProfileSelector /DocumentCMYK /PreserveEditing true /UntaggedCMYKHandling /LeaveUntagged /UntaggedRGBHandling /UseDocumentProfile /UseDocumentBleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /HWResolution [2400 2400] /PageSize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice